HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 User Guide ENWW C01840794

User Manual: HP HP Web Jetadmin - User Guide

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 494 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HP Web Jetadmin 10.4
User Guide
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2017 HP Development Company,
L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without
prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to
change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Publication Date: 11/2017
Trademark Credits
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
AirPrint is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
VMware® is a registered trademark of VMware,
Inc.
Table of contents
1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
System Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
HP Web Jetadmin Server Application ............................................................................................................... 1
HP Web Jetadmin Client Application ................................................................................................................. 2
Virtual Machine (Optional Platform) ................................................................................................................. 3
Server Hardware .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Client Hardware .................................................................................................................................................... 4
Database ............................................................................................................................................................... 4
Network ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Installations and Upgrades ................................................................................................................................. 5
Client Application ................................................................................................................................................. 5
Supported Devices ............................................................................................................................................... 5
Host Access ........................................................................................................................................................... 5
Client/Server Security .......................................................................................................................................... 6
Install HP Web Jetadmin .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Install HP Web Jetadmin from the Command Line ............................................................................................................. 6
Install HP Web Jetadmin in Blocking Mode ........................................................................................................................... 9
Post-installation Tasks ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
Recommended Initial Conguration Steps .................................................................................................... 10
Congure the HP Web Jetadmin Service to Restart Automatically ........................................................... 10
Ports ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Implement SSL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Enable Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) ................................................................................................................ 13
Important Points to Remember When Implementing SSL ......................................................................... 14
Congure HTTPS (Server Certicates or SSL) ............................................................................................... 14
Use a Separate Instance of Microsoft SQL Server ............................................................................................................. 15
Deploy the Smart Client ........................................................................................................................................................ 15
Change the Default HTTP or HTTPS Port for the HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client Application ............. 16
Run the Smart Client Application in a Workgroup ........................................................................................ 16
Start an HP Web Jetadmin Client Session ..................................................................................................... 17
Congure HP Web Jetadmin to Bind to a Specic NIC .................................................................................. 17
HP Web Jetadmin Client Connection .......................................................................................... 18
HP Web Jetadmin Alerts and SNMP Traps Registration ......................................................... 19
HP Web Jetadmin Web Service ................................................................................................... 20
Congure the Port for Event Notications .................................................................................................... 20
Congure the Firewall Software ...................................................................................................................... 21
ENWW iii
Restart the HP Web Jetadmin Service Manually ............................................................................................................... 21
Back Up and Restore HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................................................................................. 22
Upgrade HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................................................... 22
Import Feature Packs ............................................................................................................................................................ 22
Enable FIPS on the HP Web Jetadmin Server .................................................................................................................... 24
Uninstall HP Web Jetadmin .................................................................................................................................................. 29
Manage Licenses .................................................................................................................................................................... 30
2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ........................................................................................................................................................ 31
Product Support ..................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Print the HP Web Jetadmin Guides ................................................................................................................. 31
Online Help ......................................................................................................................................................... 31
Technical Support .............................................................................................................................................. 31
Getting Around in HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................................... 32
Application Views in HP Web Jetadmin .......................................................................................................... 32
Top Menu Bar ..................................................................................................................................................... 32
Preferences .................................................................................................................................... 32
Device Filters ................................................................................................................................. 32
Device Identication ..................................................................................................................... 33
Application Log .............................................................................................................................. 33
Status Bar Features ........................................................................................................................................... 34
Page Layout in HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................... 34
Left Navigation Pane .................................................................................................................... 34
Task Modules ................................................................................................................................. 35
Docking Task Modules and Maps ................................................................................................ 35
Workspace ...................................................................................................................................... 35
Wizards ................................................................................................................................................................ 36
Need Info Wizard ........................................................................................................................... 36
Other Features ................................................................................................................................................... 36
HP Web Jetadmin Server ...................................................................................................................................................... 37
HP Web Jetadmin and Distributed Environments ........................................................................................ 37
How the HP Web Jetadmin Service Works ................................................................................ 38
Overview of Directories and Files .................................................................................................................... 39
Microsoft SQL Database Overview .................................................................................................................. 40
Low-privilege Service Account ........................................................................................................................ 41
HTTP Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 42
Localization ........................................................................................................................................................ 42
HP Web Jetadmin Network Trac and Behavior .......................................................................................... 43
HP Web Jetadmin Client ........................................................................................................................................................ 44
ClickOnce Software Installation and Launch ................................................................................................. 44
Notication that Microsoft .NET Framework Is Required ....................................................... 44
iv ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin Client's Sleep State ........................................................................................................... 45
Shared Conguration Options for all Views ....................................................................................................................... 45
General Shared Conguration Options .......................................................................................................... 45
Congure the Database Settings ............................................................................................... 45
Congure the Data Collection Option ........................................................................................ 45
Shared Conguration Options for Network ................................................................................................... 46
Congure the SNMP Settings ...................................................................................................... 46
Congure the HTTP Settings ....................................................................................................... 46
Congure the HTTPS Settings .................................................................................................... 47
Congure the DNS Settings ......................................................................................................... 47
Shared Conguration Options for Email ........................................................................................................ 47
Congure the SMTP Gateway Settings ...................................................................................... 47
Manage the Shared Email Addresses ........................................................................................ 48
Shared Conguration Options for Discovery ................................................................................................. 48
Congure Large Subnets for IP Range Discoveries ................................................................. 49
Manage the IP Ranges for Discoveries ...................................................................................... 49
Manage the Address Lists for Specied Address Discoveries ................................................ 49
Shared Conguration Options for Server Maintenance ............................................................................... 50
Congure the Schedule for Server Maintenance ..................................................................... 50
Manage the Discovery History .................................................................................................... 51
Congure the Retention Period for the Conguration History .............................................. 51
Congure the Retention Period for the Alerts History ............................................................ 52
Manage the Report Data .............................................................................................................. 52
Shared Conguration Options for Credentials .............................................................................................. 52
Credentials Store ........................................................................................................................... 52
Credentials Delegation ................................................................................................................. 53
Credentials Needed ...................................................................................................................... 54
HP Jetdirect Device Password ..................................................................................................... 54
Restricting Conguration by Device Group ............................................................................... 54
Clear the Credentials .................................................................................................................... 55
Manage the Global SNMPv1 Get Community Names .............................................................. 55
Manage the Global SNMPv1 Set Community Names .............................................................. 56
Manage the Global SNMPv3 Credentials ................................................................................... 56
Manage the Global EWS Passwords .......................................................................................... 58
Manage the Global File System Passwords .............................................................................. 58
Manage the Domain Credentials ................................................................................................ 58
Application Management Conguration Options .............................................................................................................. 58
Congure the Settings for the Application Log ............................................................................................. 59
Restore the Default Roles ................................................................................................................................ 59
Device Management Conguration Options ...................................................................................................................... 60
Device Polling Conguration Options ............................................................................................................. 60
ENWW v
Congure the Background Polling Options ............................................................................... 60
Congure the Polling Options for Device Lists ......................................................................... 61
Congure the Polling Options for Device Tabs ......................................................................... 62
Congure the Polling Options for Device Alerts and Supplies Alerts ................................... 62
Congure the Polling Options for Supplies ............................................................................... 63
Devices Conguration Options ........................................................................................................................ 63
Manage Hidden Devices ............................................................................................................... 63
Manage Blocked Devices ............................................................................................................. 64
Device Discovery Conguration Options ........................................................................................................ 64
Congure the General Settings for Device Discoveries .......................................................... 64
Device Filters Conguration Options .............................................................................................................. 65
Congure the Number of Days that Devices are Considered New ....................................... 65
Device Tabs Conguration Options ................................................................................................................. 65
Congure the General Options for Device Tabs ....................................................................... 65
Conguration Options for Fleet Congurations ............................................................................................ 66
Congure the Retry Settings for Device Conguration Schedules ....................................... 66
Restore the Default Conguration Templates ......................................................................... 66
Manage the User-dened Device Conguration Settings ...................................................... 66
Manage the PJL Repository ......................................................................................................... 69
Manage the Certicate Repository ............................................................................................. 69
Manage the OXPd Device Function Repository ........................................................................ 70
Manage the OXPd Accessory Record Repository ..................................................................... 70
Manage the OXPd Authentication Agent Repository .............................................................. 70
Manage the OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration Repository ........................................ 72
Manage the OXPd Statistics Agents Repository ...................................................................... 74
Manage the OXPd Quota Record Repository ............................................................................ 76
Alerts Conguration Options ........................................................................................................................... 78
Attach the Supplies Report to the Email Notications for Supply Alerts ............................. 78
Manage the Custom Email Templates ...................................................................................... 78
Manage the Templates for Alert Subscriptions ....................................................................... 79
Congure the Settings for the Alerts Log ................................................................................. 79
Congure the Format for SNMP Traps ...................................................................................... 80
Firmware Conguration Options ..................................................................................................................... 80
Congure the Settings for Firmware Upgrades ....................................................................... 81
Reports Conguration Options ........................................................................................................................ 82
Manage the General Settings for Reports ................................................................................ 82
Congure the Data Collection Times for Reports .................................................................... 82
Supplies Conguration Options ....................................................................................................................... 82
Congure the Threshold for Low Supplies ............................................................................... 82
Congure the Shop for Supplies Link in Reports ..................................................................... 83
vi ENWW
3 Device Management .............................................................................................................................................................................. 84
Devices - Common Tasks Task Module ............................................................................................................................... 84
Devices - Summary Task Module ........................................................................................................................................ 84
Devices - Active Tasks Task Module .................................................................................................................................... 84
Devices - Scheduled Tasks Task Module ............................................................................................................................ 84
Device Management Options ............................................................................................................................................... 84
Device Tabs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Showing and Hiding Device Tabs .................................................................................................................... 85
Status Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 85
Cong Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 87
Alerts Tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 88
Troubleshoot Tab .............................................................................................................................................. 89
Groups Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Reports Tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 91
Supplies Tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 92
Storage Tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 93
Solutions Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 95
Editing Solutions ........................................................................................................................... 95
Install Solutions ............................................................................................................................. 96
Capabilities Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 96
Firmware Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 96
Copy Template Wizard .......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Export and Import Device Conguration Templates ........................................................................................................ 99
Edit Schedule Wizard .......................................................................................................................................................... 100
Mapping ................................................................................................................................................................................. 101
Devices and Groups ........................................................................................................................................ 101
Hidden Devices and Mapping ........................................................................................................................ 102
Activating the Maps Feature .......................................................................................................................... 102
Adding a Map Graphic to a Device Group ..................................................................................................... 102
Changing a Graphic Image for a Map ........................................................................................................... 102
Placing Devices and Subgroups on a Map ................................................................................................... 103
Placing URLs on a Map ................................................................................................................................... 103
Viewing Device or Group Status .................................................................................................................... 103
Sizing a Map ..................................................................................................................................................... 104
Removing Items from a Map ......................................................................................................................... 104
Removing a Map from a Group ..................................................................................................................... 104
Device Lists ........................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Pre-Dened Device Lists ................................................................................................................................ 105
Columns for Device Lists ................................................................................................................................ 106
Complex Data in Device Lists .................................................................................................... 106
Columns Dependent on HP Web Jetadmin Data ................................................................... 107
ENWW vii
Columns Dependent on HP Jetdirect Data ............................................................................. 107
Statuses on Device Lists in HP Web Jetadmin ....................................................................... 108
Manipulating Columns in Device Lists ..................................................................................... 108
Customizing Layouts for Device Lists .......................................................................................................... 109
Filters and Device Lists ................................................................................................................................... 110
Built-in Filters .............................................................................................................................. 110
Filter Manager and Filter Editor ................................................................................................ 111
Building a Compound Filter ....................................................................................................... 111
Create Filters ............................................................................................................................... 111
Edit Filters .................................................................................................................................... 112
“Save As” Filters .......................................................................................................................... 112
Managing Filters ......................................................................................................................... 112
Apply Filters to Device Lists ...................................................................................................... 113
Filtering On Special Column Types .......................................................................................... 113
Search Device Lists ......................................................................................................................................... 114
Exporting Device Data .................................................................................................................................... 115
Related Application Options for Device Lists .............................................................................................. 117
Printing Device Lists ........................................................................................................................................ 117
Deleting Devices from Device Lists .............................................................................................................. 117
Refreshing Devices ......................................................................................................................................... 118
Find More Devices ........................................................................................................................................... 119
Add Credentials for Devices ........................................................................................................................... 119
Resolve Communication Errors for Devices That Have a New IP Address ............................................. 120
Groups ................................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Group Representation .................................................................................................................................... 122
Manual versus Automatic Groups ................................................................................................................. 122
Group Policies .................................................................................................................................................. 123
Example for Group Policies ....................................................................................................... 123
Change the Order in which HP Web Jetadmin Applies Policies ........................................... 124
Security Restriction Settings for Groups ..................................................................................................... 125
Groups - Common Tasks Task Module ........................................................................................................ 125
Groups - Summary Task Module .................................................................................................................. 126
Groups - Management Task Module ............................................................................................................ 126
Create a New Device Group ........................................................................................................................... 126
Building a Compound Filter (Groups) ....................................................................................... 128
Moving a Device Group ................................................................................................................................... 129
Add Devices to a Group .................................................................................................................................. 129
Remove Devices from a Manual Group ....................................................................................................... 130
Edit a Device Group ......................................................................................................................................... 130
Delete a Device Group .................................................................................................................................... 132
Edit Device Group Policies .............................................................................................................................. 132
viii ENWW
Import Device Groups ..................................................................................................................................... 133
Export Device Groups ..................................................................................................................................... 133
Rename a Device Group ................................................................................................................................. 133
View a Device Group ....................................................................................................................................... 134
Search for Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 134
Discovery ............................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Discovering Devices with HP Web Jetadmin through Firewalls ............................................................... 136
Discovery Types and Methods ...................................................................................................................... 136
Network-Connected Device Discoveries ...................................................................................................... 136
PC-Connected Device Discoveries ................................................................................................................ 137
HP SNMP Proxy Agent ................................................................................................................ 138
Troubleshoot PC-connected Device Discoveries ................................................................... 138
Quick Device Discovery ................................................................................................................................... 139
SLP Multicast Discovery ................................................................................................................................. 140
Details About Running an SLP Multicast Discovery ............................................................... 141
IP Broadcast Discovery ................................................................................................................................... 141
IP Broadcast Discoveries for Network Devices ...................................................................... 141
IP Broadcast Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices ............................................................ 142
Details About Running an IP Broadcast Discovery ................................................................ 142
IP Range Discovery ......................................................................................................................................... 142
Setting Realistic Ranges ............................................................................................................ 143
Setting Ranges Based on Subnets or Contiguous Subnets ................................................. 143
Import and Export Features of IP Range Files ....................................................................... 145
IP Range Discoveries for Network Devices ............................................................................. 145
Customizing IP Ranges for Discoveries ................................................................................... 146
IP Range Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices ................................................................... 146
Details About Running an IP Range Discovery ....................................................................... 146
Specied Device Address Discovery ............................................................................................................. 147
Specied Device Address Discoveries for Network Devices ................................................ 148
Specied Device Address Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices ...................................... 148
Details About Running a Specied Device Addresses Discovery ........................................ 148
Active Directory Discovery ............................................................................................................................. 149
Active Directory Discoveries for Network Devices ................................................................. 149
Active Directory Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices ....................................................... 150
Details About Running an Active Directory Discovery .......................................................... 150
Passive SLP Discovery .................................................................................................................................... 151
Domain Discovery ........................................................................................................................................... 151
Details About Running a Discovery Using Domains .............................................................. 152
WS-Discovery ................................................................................................................................................... 152
Details About Running a WS-Discovery .................................................................................. 152
Managing Third-Party Printers in HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................. 153
ENWW ix
Support ........................................................................................................................................ 153
Functionality Denitions ............................................................................................................ 155
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 156
Discovery - Common Tasks Task Module .................................................................................................... 157
Discovery - Quick Monitor Task Module ....................................................................................................... 157
Discovery - Summary Task Module .............................................................................................................. 158
Discovery - Active Discoveries Task Module ............................................................................................... 158
Discovery - Scheduled Discoveries Task Module ....................................................................................... 159
Discovery - Templates Task Module ............................................................................................................ 159
Related Application Options for Discovery .................................................................................................. 159
SNMPv3 Enabled Devices .......................................................................................................... 159
Network Options for Discoveries ............................................................................................. 160
Discover Devices .............................................................................................................................................. 160
Schedule Discoveries ...................................................................................................................................... 163
View Discovery History ................................................................................................................................... 165
Discovery Templates ...................................................................................................................................... 166
Create Discovery Templates ..................................................................................................... 166
Run Discoveries by Applying Discovery Templates .............................................................. 168
Edit Discovery Templates .......................................................................................................... 168
Copy Discovery Templates ........................................................................................................ 170
Delete Discovery Templates ..................................................................................................... 170
View Discovery Templates ........................................................................................................ 171
Conguration ........................................................................................................................................................................ 171
Complex Data in the Conrm, Results, and Conguration History Pages .............................................. 171
Credentials Required for Device Conguration .......................................................................................... 171
Device File System Password ........................................................................................................................ 172
Sensitive Device Information ......................................................................................................................... 172
Importing a Conguration from a File .......................................................................................................... 172
Conguration - Common Tasks Task Module ............................................................................................. 174
Conguration - Recent Congurations Task Module ................................................................................. 174
Conguration - Active Congurations Task Module .................................................................................. 174
Conguration - Scheduled Congurations Task Module ........................................................................... 174
Conguration - Templates Task Module ..................................................................................................... 174
Related Application Options for Conguration Management .................................................................. 175
Congure Devices ............................................................................................................................................ 175
View the Conguration History ..................................................................................................................... 177
Schedule Device Congurations ................................................................................................................... 178
Conguration Templates ............................................................................................................................... 180
Volatile Conguration and HP Web Jetadmin Conguration Templates ........................... 181
Adding Conguration Templates to a Group Policy .............................................................. 182
Captured Congurable Options and Conguration Templates ........................................... 182
x ENWW
Create Conguration Templates ................................................................................................................... 182
Create and Use Variable Data ........................................................................................................................ 183
Edit Conguration Templates ....................................................................................................................... 185
Delete Conguration Templates .................................................................................................................. 186
Copy a Conguration Template .................................................................................................................... 186
View Conguration Templates ...................................................................................................................... 186
Apply Conguration Templates to Devices ................................................................................................. 186
Alerts ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 188
Alerts and HP Web Jetadmin ......................................................................................................................... 188
What You Can Do With Alerts ........................................................................................................................ 189
Types of Alerts ................................................................................................................................................. 189
Examples of Alerts .......................................................................................................................................... 189
Alerts Traps Listener Port .............................................................................................................................. 190
Alerts - Common Tasks Task Module ........................................................................................................... 190
Alerts - Recent Alerts Task Module .............................................................................................................. 190
Alerts - Alert Subscriptions Task Module .................................................................................................... 190
Alerts - Subscription Templates Task Module ............................................................................................ 190
Alerts - Active Tasks Task Module ................................................................................................................ 191
Related Application Options for Alerts ........................................................................................................ 191
Managing Device Alerts .................................................................................................................................. 191
Create Alert Subscriptions ............................................................................................................................. 192
Edit Alert Subscriptions .................................................................................................................................. 196
Copy an Alert Subscription Template .......................................................................................................... 199
Alert History ..................................................................................................................................................... 199
Alert Subscription Templates ........................................................................................................................ 200
Alert Templates in Group Policies ................................................................................................................ 200
Create Alert Subscription Templates ........................................................................................................... 200
Apply an Alert Subscription Template ......................................................................................................... 204
Edit Alert Subscription Templates ................................................................................................................ 205
Import and Export Alert Templates ............................................................................................................. 207
Delete an Alert Subscription Template ....................................................................................................... 208
View All Alert Subscriptions ........................................................................................................................... 209
Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................................... 209
Qualifying Firmware ....................................................................................................................................... 210
Firmware Repository and Qualifying Firmware ..................................................................... 210
Qualify Feature ........................................................................................................................... 210
Finding Images ............................................................................................................................ 210
Firmware - Common Tasks Task Module .................................................................................................... 210
Firmware - Active Tasks Task Module .......................................................................................................... 211
Firmware - Scheduled Tasks Task Module .................................................................................................. 211
Firmware - Device Summary Task Module ................................................................................................. 211
ENWW xi
Related Application Options for Firmware .................................................................................................. 211
Upgrade Firmware .......................................................................................................................................... 211
Upgrading Firmware for HP Jetdirect Devices versus Printer Devices ................................................... 213
Firmware Repository ...................................................................................................................................... 213
View the Firmware Repository ................................................................................................. 213
Get Images ................................................................................................................................... 214
Import Images ............................................................................................................................. 214
Edit Properties for Firmware Images ...................................................................................... 214
Delete Images ............................................................................................................................. 215
Edit Scheduled Upgrades .......................................................................................................... 215
Delete Scheduled Upgrades ..................................................................................................... 215
Reports .................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available ........................................................................ 216
Examples of Reports ...................................................................................................................................... 217
Report Management - Common Tasks Task Module ................................................................................ 218
Data Collection - Common Tasks Task Module .......................................................................................... 218
Data Collection - Management Task Module .............................................................................................. 219
Data Collection - Templates Task Module ................................................................................................... 219
Reports - Scheduled Reports Task Module ................................................................................................ 219
Reports - Report Templates Task Module .................................................................................................. 219
Reports - Report Generation Task Module ................................................................................................. 220
Reports - Archived Reports Task Module .................................................................................................... 220
Related Application Options for Reports ..................................................................................................... 220
Available Reports ............................................................................................................................................ 220
Accessory Inventory ................................................................................................................... 221
Device Inventory ......................................................................................................................... 221
Device Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 221
Device Utilization by User .......................................................................................................... 222
Event Log History ....................................................................................................................... 222
Hourly Peak Usage ..................................................................................................................... 223
Supply Ordering .......................................................................................................................... 223
Supply Replacement Forecast ................................................................................................. 223
Supply Usage .............................................................................................................................. 224
Getting Started with Reports ........................................................................................................................ 224
Data Collection ................................................................................................................................................. 225
Data Collection Cycle .................................................................................................................. 225
Initial Data Collection ................................................................................................................. 225
Data Collection Custom Collection Time ................................................................................. 225
Device Utilization by User and Data Collections .................................................................... 226
Device and Printer Driver Support for Device Utilization by User ....................................... 226
Using Group Policies to Set Data Collection ........................................................................... 226
xii ENWW
Add Devices to Data Collection ................................................................................................. 227
Remove Devices from Data Collection .................................................................................... 227
Data Collection Templates ........................................................................................................ 228
Create a Data Collection Template .......................................................................................... 228
Apply a Data Collection Template ............................................................................................ 229
Edit a Data Collection Template ............................................................................................... 230
Delete a Data Collection Template .......................................................................................... 230
Copy a Data Collection Template ............................................................................................. 230
View Data Collection Templates .............................................................................................. 230
Data Collection Summaries ...................................................................................................... 231
Data Collection Statuses ........................................................................................................... 232
Data Collection Anomalies ........................................................................................................ 232
Report Generation .......................................................................................................................................... 234
Reports - Common Tasks Task Module .................................................................................. 235
Generate Reports ....................................................................................................................... 235
Accessory Inventory Report Settings ...................................................................................... 238
Device Inventory Report Settings ............................................................................................ 239
Device Utilization Report Settings ........................................................................................... 240
Device Utilization by User Report Settings ............................................................................. 241
Event Log History Report Settings .......................................................................................... 243
Hourly Peak Usage Report Settings ........................................................................................ 244
Supply Ordering Report Settings ............................................................................................. 245
Supply Replacement Forecast Report Settings ..................................................................... 246
Supply Usage Report Settings ................................................................................................. 246
Schedule a Report ...................................................................................................................... 247
Deleting Scheduled Reports ..................................................................................................... 249
Editing the Schedule for a Report ............................................................................................ 249
Email Reports .............................................................................................................................. 250
Save Archived Reports ............................................................................................................... 250
Report Templates ...................................................................................................................... 250
View Report Templates ............................................................................................................. 251
Create a Report Template ......................................................................................................... 251
Apply a Report Template .......................................................................................................... 253
Edit a Report Template ............................................................................................................. 253
Delete a Report Template ......................................................................................................... 254
Copy a Report Template ............................................................................................................ 255
Archived Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 255
View Archived Reports ............................................................................................................... 255
Delete Archived Reports ............................................................................................................ 255
Storage .................................................................................................................................................................................. 255
Storage - Common Tasks Task Module ....................................................................................................... 256
ENWW xiii
Storage - Active Tasks Task Module ............................................................................................................. 256
Storage - Scheduled Tasks Task Module ..................................................................................................... 256
Storage Repository ......................................................................................................................................... 256
Import Fonts and Macros ............................................................................................................................... 256
Delete Fonts and Macros ............................................................................................................................... 257
Edit Properties for Storage ............................................................................................................................ 257
Save to File ....................................................................................................................................................... 257
Install Fonts and Macros on Devices ............................................................................................................ 258
Remove Font and Macro Files from Devices ............................................................................................... 258
Print Font/Macro .............................................................................................................................................. 258
Storage Templates ......................................................................................................................................... 259
Create Storage Templates ............................................................................................................................. 259
Apply a Storage Template ............................................................................................................................. 260
Edit Storage Templates .................................................................................................................................. 260
Delete a Storage Template ............................................................................................................................ 261
Copy a Storage Template .............................................................................................................................. 261
View Storage Templates ................................................................................................................................ 261
Solutions ............................................................................................................................................................................... 262
Solutions - Common Tasks Task Module .................................................................................................... 262
Solutions - Active Tasks Task Module .......................................................................................................... 262
Solutions - Scheduled Tasks Task Module .................................................................................................. 263
Solutions Repository ...................................................................................................................................... 263
Importing Solutions ........................................................................................................................................ 263
Editing Solution Settings ................................................................................................................................ 263
Removing Solutions ........................................................................................................................................ 264
Installing Solutions ......................................................................................................................................... 264
Uninstalling Solutions ..................................................................................................................................... 265
Solutions Templates ....................................................................................................................................... 266
Specic Solution Templates Overviews ....................................................................................................... 266
Creating a Solutions Template ...................................................................................................................... 266
Deleting a Solutions Template ..................................................................................................................... 267
Editing a Solutions Template ........................................................................................................................ 267
Copying a Solutions Template ...................................................................................................................... 267
Applying a Solutions Template ..................................................................................................................... 268
4 Print Management ............................................................................................................................................................................... 269
Fleet Management of Print Queues .................................................................................................................................. 269
Driver Management ............................................................................................................................................................. 269
HP’s Universal Print Driver ................................................................................................................................................. 270
Print Management and Credentials .................................................................................................................................. 270
Print Management - Common Tasks Task Module ......................................................................................................... 270
xiv ENWW
Print Management - Print Queues Task Module ............................................................................................................. 271
Print Management - Available Drivers Task Module ...................................................................................................... 271
Print Management - Active Tasks Task Module .............................................................................................................. 271
Print Management Options ................................................................................................................................................ 271
Create Print Queue .............................................................................................................................................................. 271
Edit Print Queue ................................................................................................................................................................... 273
Delete Print Queue .............................................................................................................................................................. 273
Pre-congure Driver ............................................................................................................................................................ 274
Upload Drivers to HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................................. 274
Delete a Driver ...................................................................................................................................................................... 275
Retrieve a Driver .................................................................................................................................................................. 275
5 Application Management .................................................................................................................................................................... 277
Network Ports ...................................................................................................................................................................... 277
Application Management Options ..................................................................................................................................... 277
Application Management - Common Tasks Task Module ............................................................................................. 277
Application Management - Active Tasks Task Module ................................................................................................... 277
Application Management - Scheduled Tasks Task Module ........................................................................................... 277
HP Web Jetadmin - All Active Tasks Task Module ........................................................................................................... 278
HP Web Jetadmin - All Scheduled Tasks Task Module ................................................................................................... 278
Client Management - Active Clients Task Module ........................................................................................................... 278
User Security ........................................................................................................................................................................ 278
Initial User Security ......................................................................................................................................... 279
The HP Web Jetadmin Administrator Role .................................................................................................. 279
Alternate Log-in Method for User Security ................................................................................................. 279
User Security - Common Tasks Task Module .............................................................................................. 279
User Security - Roles Task Module ............................................................................................................... 280
User Security - Users Task Module ............................................................................................................... 280
Roles ................................................................................................................................................................. 280
Restrict Roles to Device Groups ............................................................................................... 281
Create Roles ................................................................................................................................ 281
Edit Roles ..................................................................................................................................... 282
Delete Roles ................................................................................................................................ 282
View Roles ................................................................................................................................... 282
Role Templates ........................................................................................................................... 283
Copy a Role Template ................................................................................................................ 283
Users ................................................................................................................................................................. 283
Managing Users within User Groups ....................................................................................... 283
Assign Roles to Users ................................................................................................................ 284
Edit Users ..................................................................................................................................... 285
Remove Roles ............................................................................................................................. 286
ENWW xv
User Security Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................. 286
HP Web Jetadmin Management ........................................................................................................................................ 287
HP Web Jetadmin - Common Tasks Task Module ...................................................................................... 287
HP Web Jetadmin - Management Task Module ......................................................................................... 287
HP Web Jetadmin - Summary Task Module ................................................................................................ 287
Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin on the Network ..................................................................... 288
Discover Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................. 288
Launch Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................... 289
Remove Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................. 289
Data Synchronization ..................................................................................................................................... 289
6 Device Conguration Options ............................................................................................................................................................. 292
Device Conguration Options for Copier .......................................................................................................................... 292
Auto Include Margins ...................................................................................................................................... 292
Color Copy Mode and Color Copy Mode With Auto ..................................................................................... 292
Color Copy Option ............................................................................................................................................ 292
Copier Fit To Page ............................................................................................................................................ 292
Copier Reduce/Enlarge ................................................................................................................................... 293
Copy - Alternative Letterhead Mode ............................................................................................................ 293
Copy Background Cleanup ............................................................................................................................. 293
Copy Content Orientation .............................................................................................................................. 293
Copy Contrast .................................................................................................................................................. 294
Copy Darkness ................................................................................................................................................. 294
Copy Fold .......................................................................................................................................................... 294
Copy Heavy Originals ...................................................................................................................................... 294
Copy Job Auto Interrupt ................................................................................................................................. 294
Copy Job Build .................................................................................................................................................. 295
Copy Job Scan Ahead ...................................................................................................................................... 295
Copy Manage Booklet ..................................................................................................................................... 295
Copy Optimize Text/Picture ........................................................................................................................... 295
Copy Output Bin ............................................................................................................................................... 296
Copy Pages Per Sheet .................................................................................................................................... 296
Copy Paper Tray Selection ............................................................................................................................. 296
Copy Reduce/Enlarge ..................................................................................................................................... 296
Copy Sharpness ............................................................................................................................................... 296
Copy Stamps .................................................................................................................................................... 297
Copy Stamps (Custom) ................................................................................................................................... 297
Copy Stamps (Enforced) ................................................................................................................................ 297
Copy Staple ...................................................................................................................................................... 297
Copy Staple/Hole Punch ................................................................................................................................ 297
Copy Watermark .............................................................................................................................................. 298
xvi ENWW
Copy Watermark (Custom) ............................................................................................................................ 298
Default Copier Copies ..................................................................................................................................... 298
Default Copy Collation .................................................................................................................................... 298
Default Edge-to-Edge Setting ....................................................................................................................... 299
Default Image Quality ..................................................................................................................................... 299
Default Number of Copies ............................................................................................................................. 299
Default Number of Sides ................................................................................................................................ 299
Default Original Content ................................................................................................................................. 299
Default Original Media Size ............................................................................................................................ 299
First Copy Speed .............................................................................................................................................. 300
Hold O Print Jobs During Copy .................................................................................................................... 300
Hold O Time ................................................................................................................................................... 300
Interrupt Copy Jobs ......................................................................................................................................... 301
Paper Path ........................................................................................................................................................ 301
Device Conguration Options for Device ......................................................................................................................... 301
Alternative Letterhead Mode ......................................................................................................................... 301
Anonymous Usage Information Transmission ........................................................................................... 301
Asset Number .................................................................................................................................................. 302
Auto Cleaning Page ......................................................................................................................................... 302
Auto Continue .................................................................................................................................................. 303
Auto Recovery .................................................................................................................................................. 303
Auto Sense Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 303
AutoSend .......................................................................................................................................................... 304
AutoStore ......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Browser ............................................................................................................................................................. 305
Calibration Timing ........................................................................................................................................... 305
Cartridge Low Action ...................................................................................................................................... 305
Cartridge Out Action ....................................................................................................................................... 305
Clearable Warnings ......................................................................................................................................... 306
Cold Reset Media Size .................................................................................................................................... 306
Color Control Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 306
Color Supply Out .............................................................................................................................................. 307
Color/Black Mix ................................................................................................................................................ 307
Company Name ............................................................................................................................................... 307
Contact Person ................................................................................................................................................ 307
Control Panel Display ..................................................................................................................................... 308
Control Panel Language ................................................................................................................................. 308
Courier Font Type ............................................................................................................................................ 308
Date and Time ................................................................................................................................................. 308
Date/Time Format .......................................................................................................................................... 308
Daylight Savings Time .................................................................................................................................... 308
ENWW xvii
Default Input Paper Tray ................................................................................................................................ 309
Default Media Size .......................................................................................................................................... 309
Default Media Type ......................................................................................................................................... 309
Default Print Density ...................................................................................................................................... 309
Default Printer Copies .................................................................................................................................... 309
Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On ........................................................................................................... 310
CA Certicates .................................................................................................................................................. 310
Device Location ............................................................................................................................................... 311
Device Name .................................................................................................................................................... 311
Device Volumes ............................................................................................................................................... 311
Duplex Binding ................................................................................................................................................. 311
Duplex Blank Pages ........................................................................................................................................ 312
Duplex Impressions ........................................................................................................................................ 312
Dust Detection ................................................................................................................................................. 312
Economode ...................................................................................................................................................... 312
Enable Retrieve/Print from USB ................................................................................................................... 313
Energy Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 313
Fuser Modes ..................................................................................................................................................... 313
FutureSmart Level .......................................................................................................................................... 313
High Capacity Output Mode ........................................................................................................................... 314
High Capacity Output Names ........................................................................................................................ 314
Home Screen Applications - FutureSmart 3 ............................................................................................... 314
Home Screen Applications - FutureSmart 4 ............................................................................................... 315
Home Screen Language Selection ............................................................................................................... 317
Home Screen Wallpaper Customization ...................................................................................................... 318
I/O Timeout to End Print Jobs ....................................................................................................................... 318
Inactivity Timeout ............................................................................................................................................ 318
Input Auto Continue ........................................................................................................................................ 318
Input Auto Continue Timeout ........................................................................................................................ 319
Instant Lamp On .............................................................................................................................................. 319
Invalid Personality Reports ........................................................................................................................... 319
Jam Recovery ................................................................................................................................................... 319
Stored Jobs (Delete Temporary Jobs After) ................................................................................................ 319
Stored Jobs (Allow on this device) ................................................................................................................ 320
Stored Jobs (Temporary Storage Limit) ...................................................................................................... 320
Key Press Sound .............................................................................................................................................. 320
Keyboard Layout ............................................................................................................................................. 320
Manage Stapler/Stacker ................................................................................................................................. 320
Manually Feed Prompt ................................................................................................................................... 321
Media Administration ...................................................................................................................................... 321
Online Solutions .............................................................................................................................................. 321
xviii ENWW
Optimum Speed/Cost ..................................................................................................................................... 322
Optimum Speed/Energy Usage .................................................................................................................... 322
Order Supplies % Level .................................................................................................................................. 323
Original Orientation ......................................................................................................................................... 323
Outgoing Servers ............................................................................................................................................ 323
Output Auto Continue ..................................................................................................................................... 325
Override A4/Letter .......................................................................................................................................... 325
OXPd Accessory Records ............................................................................................................................... 325
OXPd Authentication Agents ......................................................................................................................... 326
OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration .................................................................................................... 327
OXPd Device Functions ................................................................................................................................... 328
OXPd Enabled .................................................................................................................................................. 328
OXPd OPS Cong Settings ............................................................................................................................. 329
OXPd Quota Agents ........................................................................................................................................ 329
OXPd Statistics Agents ................................................................................................................................... 330
Paper Tray Assignments ................................................................................................................................ 330
PCL Form Length ............................................................................................................................................. 331
PJL Conguration ............................................................................................................................................. 331
Power On Calibration ...................................................................................................................................... 331
Print PDF Errors ............................................................................................................................................... 331
Print PS Errors ................................................................................................................................................. 331
Printer Wakeup ................................................................................................................................................ 332
PS Defer Media ................................................................................................................................................ 332
Quick Sets ......................................................................................................................................................... 332
Quiet Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 335
Replace Supplies ............................................................................................................................................. 335
Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 335
Resolution Enhancement .............................................................................................................................. 335
Restore Modes ................................................................................................................................................. 336
Rotate Oset .................................................................................................................................................... 336
Show Date and Time ...................................................................................................................................... 336
Show Network Address .................................................................................................................................. 336
Show Stop Button ........................................................................................................................................... 336
Show Welcome Message ............................................................................................................................... 336
Size/Type Prompt ........................................................................................................................................... 337
Sleep/Wake Time ............................................................................................................................................ 337
Sleep Delay (Minutes) ..................................................................................................................................... 337
Sleep Delay Time ............................................................................................................................................ 337
Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 338
Sleep Schedule ................................................................................................................................................ 338
Sleep Timer Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 339
ENWW xix
Stacker Staple Setting .................................................................................................................................... 339
Stand by Fuser Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 339
Stapler Oset Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 340
Staples Out Override ....................................................................................................................................... 340
Status Page Language ................................................................................................................................... 340
Stored Jobs (Sort/List Order) ......................................................................................................................... 340
Supplies Status Messages on Control Panel ............................................................................................... 340
Suppress Blank Pages .................................................................................................................................... 341
System Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 341
System Setup Ram Disk ................................................................................................................................. 341
Time Zone ........................................................................................................................................................ 342
Time Zone/Daylight Saving ........................................................................................................................... 342
Tray 1 Mode / Manual Feed ........................................................................................................................... 342
Tray Administration ........................................................................................................................................ 343
Tray Setup Media Type ................................................................................................................................... 343
Use Another Tray ............................................................................................................................................ 343
Use Requested Tray ........................................................................................................................................ 343
Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending .......................................................................................................... 344
Activity Log ....................................................................................................................................................... 344
Address Book Management .......................................................................................................................... 344
Administrator Information ............................................................................................................................. 344
Advanced Search Options .............................................................................................................................. 345
Clear All Network Folders .............................................................................................................................. 345
Default Messages Settings ............................................................................................................................ 346
Default Notication Settings for Email ........................................................................................................ 347
Default Scan Settings for Email .................................................................................................................... 347
Device Contacts Import .................................................................................................................................. 348
Digital Sending - Accessing the LDAP Server ............................................................................................. 348
Digital Sending - Auto Reset Settings .......................................................................................................... 350
Digital Sending - Default ‘From:’ Address ................................................................................................... 351
Digital Sending - Default Scanner Settings ................................................................................................. 351
Digital Sending - Email Attachment Settings ............................................................................................. 352
Email Address Validation ............................................................................................................................... 352
Email Address/Message Settings ................................................................................................................. 352
Email File Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 355
Email Message Text ........................................................................................................................................ 357
Email Notication Settings ............................................................................................................................ 357
Email Scan Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 357
Enable Device Fax Archive Settings .............................................................................................................. 358
Enable Save to Network Folder .................................................................................................................... 358
Enable Save to SharePoint ............................................................................................................................ 359
xx ENWW
Enable Save to USB ......................................................................................................................................... 359
Enable Send to Email ...................................................................................................................................... 359
Folder Access Settings ................................................................................................................................... 359
Import/Export Address Book ........................................................................................................................ 359
Import/Export Address Book (Pro) ............................................................................................................... 360
LDAP Search Method ...................................................................................................................................... 361
LDAP Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 361
Network Folder File Settings ......................................................................................................................... 363
Network Folder Notication Settings ........................................................................................................... 364
Network Folder Scan Settings ....................................................................................................................... 364
Network Folder Setup .................................................................................................................................... 365
OXPd 1.4 Conguration .................................................................................................................................. 366
Personal Contacts Setup ............................................................................................................................... 367
Replicate MFP .................................................................................................................................................. 367
Reset Copy Send Timeout ............................................................................................................................. 367
Scan To Folder Predened Jobs .................................................................................................................... 367
Send to Network Folder ................................................................................................................................. 369
Send to Network Folder - MSeries or later ................................................................................................. 369
SMTP Gateway Settings ................................................................................................................................. 370
SMTP Multiple Gateway Settings .................................................................................................................. 371
USB File Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 371
USB Notication Settings ............................................................................................................................... 372
USB Scan Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 373
Device Conguration Options for Embedded Web Server ............................................................................................ 374
Embedded Web Server Conguration Options .......................................................................................... 374
Embedded Web Server Language Settings ................................................................................................ 374
Embedded Web Server Mail Settings ........................................................................................................... 374
Embedded Web Server Other Links ............................................................................................................. 375
Embedded Web Server URL .......................................................................................................................... 375
Time Services ................................................................................................................................................... 375
Device Conguration Options for Fax ............................................................................................................................... 376
Blocked Fax List ............................................................................................................................................... 376
Enable Fax Receive ......................................................................................................................................... 376
Fax Activity Log ................................................................................................................................................ 376
Fax Answer Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 376
Fax Answer Mode Settings ............................................................................................................................ 377
Fax Archive ....................................................................................................................................................... 377
Fax Archive Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 377
Fax Archiving .................................................................................................................................................... 378
Fax Billing Code ................................................................................................................................................ 379
Fax Forwarding ................................................................................................................................................ 380
ENWW xxi
Fax General ...................................................................................................................................................... 380
Fax Header ....................................................................................................................................................... 380
Fax Header Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 381
Fax Maximum Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................... 381
Fax Maximum Baud Rate - Receive .............................................................................................................. 382
Fax Maximum Baud Rate - Send .................................................................................................................. 382
Fax Modem Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 382
Fax Notication ................................................................................................................................................ 382
Fax Number Conrmation .............................................................................................................................. 383
Fax Printing ...................................................................................................................................................... 383
Fax Printing Schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 383
Fax Receive ...................................................................................................................................................... 384
Fax Receive - Disposition ............................................................................................................................... 384
Fax Receive - Other Options .......................................................................................................................... 385
Fax Receive - Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 385
Fax Receive Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 385
Fax Reporting and Error Corrections ............................................................................................................ 386
Fax Reports and Logs ..................................................................................................................................... 386
Fax Resolution Quality .................................................................................................................................... 386
Fax Ring Burst O Time .................................................................................................................................. 387
Fax Ring Frequency ........................................................................................................................................ 387
Fax Send ........................................................................................................................................................... 387
Fax Send - Dialing Mode ................................................................................................................................. 387
Fax Send - Other Options or Other Settings ............................................................................................... 387
Fax Send - Resolution .................................................................................................................................... 388
Fax Send - Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 388
Fax Send Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 388
Fax Send Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 392
Fax Service ....................................................................................................................................................... 394
Fax Time Format ............................................................................................................................................. 395
Fax Transmit Signal Loss ............................................................................................................................... 395
Import Speed Dials ......................................................................................................................................... 395
LAN Fax Service Settings ............................................................................................................................... 395
PC Fax Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 397
TCF Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 397
Device Conguration Options for File System ................................................................................................................. 397
File System External Access .......................................................................................................................... 397
File System Password .................................................................................................................................... 397
Secure File Erase Mode .................................................................................................................................. 398
Device Conguration Options for Network ...................................................................................................................... 398
Bonjour Service Name (mDNS Service Name) ............................................................................................ 398
xxii ENWW
Conguration Precedence ............................................................................................................................. 399
Desired USB Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 399
DHCP User Class Option (Tag 77) ................................................................................................................. 399
DHCPv4 FQDN compliance with RFC 4702 ................................................................................................. 399
HP Connection Inspector ................................................................................................................................ 399
DNS Server ....................................................................................................................................................... 400
Error Handling .................................................................................................................................................. 400
Google Cloud Print .......................................................................................................................................... 400
HTTP Idle Timeout .......................................................................................................................................... 401
IPP Printer Install Wizard ............................................................................................................................... 401
IPv4 Information .............................................................................................................................................. 401
IPv6 Information .............................................................................................................................................. 402
IPX - Ethernet Frame Type ............................................................................................................................ 402
IPX - Frame Type Token Ring ........................................................................................................................ 403
IPX - Queue Server Job Polling Interval ....................................................................................................... 403
IPX - RCFG Support Enabled .......................................................................................................................... 403
IPX - SAP Broadcast Interval ......................................................................................................................... 403
IPX - Source Routing ....................................................................................................................................... 404
IPX Name .......................................................................................................................................................... 404
Jetdirect External Print Server ...................................................................................................................... 404
Job Timeout ..................................................................................................................................................... 404
Locally Administered Address ....................................................................................................................... 404
Link Setting ...................................................................................................................................................... 405
Mgmt Protocol ................................................................................................................................................. 405
Network Enable Features .............................................................................................................................. 405
Network Enable Features - More Settings .................................................................................................. 406
Parallel Handshake ......................................................................................................................................... 407
Parallel Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 407
Phone Home Privacy Setting ........................................................................................................................ 407
Protocol Stacks ................................................................................................................................................ 408
Scan Idle Timeout ........................................................................................................................................... 408
SNMP Trap Destination Table ........................................................................................................................ 409
Support Contact .............................................................................................................................................. 410
Support Phone Number ................................................................................................................................. 410
System Contact ............................................................................................................................................... 410
System Location .............................................................................................................................................. 410
System Log Server .......................................................................................................................................... 410
System Log Server Info - More Settings ..................................................................................................... 410
System Name .................................................................................................................................................. 411
TCP Idle Timeout ............................................................................................................................................. 412
TCP/IP Conguration Method ........................................................................................................................ 412
ENWW xxiii
TCP/IP Domain Sux ...................................................................................................................................... 412
Upload CA Certicate ...................................................................................................................................... 412
Upload Jetdirect Certicate ........................................................................................................................... 413
Web Services Print .......................................................................................................................................... 413
WINS Server ..................................................................................................................................................... 413
Device Conguration Options for Projector ..................................................................................................................... 414
Auto-search ..................................................................................................................................................... 414
Auto-sync VGA ................................................................................................................................................. 414
Power ................................................................................................................................................................ 414
Requested Source ........................................................................................................................................... 414
Device Conguration Options for Security ....................................................................................................................... 414
802.1X Authentication ................................................................................................................................... 414
Access Control for Device Functions ............................................................................................................ 416
Access Control Level for Device Functions .................................................................................................. 418
Access Control List .......................................................................................................................................... 418
Authenticate LDAP and Kerberos Without Email ....................................................................................... 419
Authentication Manager ................................................................................................................................. 419
Automatic Update ........................................................................................................................................... 419
Bootloader Password ..................................................................................................................................... 420
Color Access Control ....................................................................................................................................... 420
Color Access Control Level ............................................................................................................................. 421
Control Panel Access ...................................................................................................................................... 421
Control Panel Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................. 421
Default Sign In Method ................................................................................................................................... 422
Device Announcement Agent ........................................................................................................................ 422
Device User Accounts ..................................................................................................................................... 422
Digital Sending Service ................................................................................................................................... 423
Disable Direct Ports ........................................................................................................................................ 423
Display Color Usage Job Log Page On Information Tab ............................................................................ 423
Display Options on Information Tab ............................................................................................................. 423
Embedded Web Server Password ................................................................................................................ 424
Enable Host USB plug and play ..................................................................................................................... 424
Enable PJL Device Access Commands ......................................................................................................... 424
Encrypt all web communication ................................................................................................................... 425
Encryption Strength ........................................................................................................................................ 425
EWS Information Protection .......................................................................................................................... 425
FIPS-140 Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 425
Get Community Name .................................................................................................................................... 426
Group 1 PIN ...................................................................................................................................................... 426
Group 2 PIN ...................................................................................................................................................... 426
IPsec/Firewall Policy ....................................................................................................................................... 426
xxiv ENWW
Kerberos Authentication ................................................................................................................................ 428
Accessing the Kerberos Authentication Server ..................................................................... 429
Accessing the LDAP Server ....................................................................................................... 429
Searching the LDAP Database .................................................................................................. 430
Retrieve the Device User's Email Address Using Attribute Of ......................... 430
Retrieve the Device User's Name Using Attribute Of ....................................... 430
LDAP - Accessing the Server ......................................................................................................................... 430
LDAP - Searching the Database .................................................................................................................... 431
LDAP Sign In Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 431
LDAP Users and Groups ................................................................................................................................. 433
Local Administrator Password ...................................................................................................................... 433
Near Field Communication ............................................................................................................................ 433
Novell Sign In Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 434
PJL Password ................................................................................................................................................... 434
Print Job Color Control .................................................................................................................................... 434
Printer Firmware SHA1 Code Signing .......................................................................................................... 434
Printer Firmware Update ............................................................................................................................... 435
Remote Conguration Password .................................................................................................................. 435
Restrict Color .................................................................................................................................................... 435
Secure Communication .................................................................................................................................. 436
Secure Disk Encryption Mode ........................................................................................................................ 436
Secure Disk Password .................................................................................................................................... 437
Service Access Code ....................................................................................................................................... 437
Service Loading ............................................................................................................................................... 438
Set Community Name .................................................................................................................................... 438
Smart Card Sign In Setup ............................................................................................................................... 438
Smart UX .......................................................................................................................................................... 439
SNMP Version Access Control ....................................................................................................................... 439
Temporary Limit Overrides ............................................................................................................................ 440
Usage Limit and Reset Period ....................................................................................................................... 441
Usage Limits for Permission Sets ................................................................................................................. 441
User PIN Authentication ................................................................................................................................. 442
Windows Sign In Setup ................................................................................................................................... 442
Windows Users and Groups ........................................................................................................................... 443
Device Conguration Options for Supplies ...................................................................................................................... 444
Cartridge Low Action - Black ......................................................................................................................... 444
Cartridge Policy ............................................................................................................................................... 444
Cartridge Protection ....................................................................................................................................... 444
Delay Very Low Message ............................................................................................................................... 446
Estimated Supplies Levels ............................................................................................................................. 446
Level Gauge ..................................................................................................................................................... 447
ENWW xxv
Supply Low Alerts ........................................................................................................................................... 447
Supply Threshold ............................................................................................................................................ 447
Supply Very Low Action .................................................................................................................................. 448
Device Conguration Options for Web Services ............................................................................................................. 448
ePrint Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 449
ePrint Settings - More Settings ..................................................................................................................... 449
HP JetAdvantage (More Apps) ....................................................................................................................... 449
Proxy Server ..................................................................................................................................................... 450
Device Conguration Options for Wireless ...................................................................................................................... 450
Enable Wireless Direct .................................................................................................................................... 450
Enable Wireless Station (802.11) ................................................................................................................. 451
Radio State ....................................................................................................................................................... 451
Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................................................... 451
Wireless Direct ................................................................................................................................................. 452
Wireless Station (802.11) .............................................................................................................................. 454
7 End-User License Agreement ............................................................................................................................................................ 458
Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 459
xxvi ENWW
1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin
When you install HP Web Jetadmin, you only need to install it on one hardware platform that meets the
recommended minimum requirements (System Requirements on page 1) and is centrally accessible on the
network. You may then access the software from any supported Windows desktop on the network and manage
all supported network-connected peripherals.
HP Web Jetadmin oers several installation options. If you have installed a previous version of HP Web Jetadmin,
you can choose to upgrade the previous version or install a new copy. Upgrading an older version preserves your
settings for discovery options and groups and is most likely the best choice if you have already been using
HP Web Jetadmin.
Every release of HP Web Jetadmin contains new features and improvements to existing features. In an
environment where a previous release of HP Web Jetadmin is integrated into critical business operations,
HP recommends that you fully test and qualify a new release before implementing that release into full
production.
Read all of the support materials before you implement HP Web Jetadmin. For current information about
HP Web Jetadmin, see the Late Breaking News for HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 and the HP Web Jetadmin 10.4
Supported Devices Readme. These documents are available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (click the
ag icon on the bottom of the page, and then select your country/region).
System Requirements
HP Web Jetadmin includes network device communication protocols and internal components that manage
application and device data. These components extend the capabilities of HP Web Jetadmin and improve usage
and performance in device lists, columns, and ltering functions.
HP Web Jetadmin is supported on platforms that have Microsoft Windows and .NET Framework high-priority
updates. During each development cycle, HP regularly tests HP Web Jetadmin on platforms that have the
current Microsoft updates. HP investigates all post-release software issues that customers report. For more
information about the current software issues, see the Late Breaking News for HP Web Jetadmin 10.4. This
document is available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (in English).
HP Web Jetadmin requires the Windows HTTP SSL service. HP Web Jetadmin uses SSL to communicate with
newer HP devices through port 8050.
HP Web Jetadmin Server Application
Supported operating systems
●Microsoft Windows Server 2016
●Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
●Microsoft Windows Server 2012
●Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
●Microsoft Windows 10 (64-bit edition only)
ENWW System Requirements 1
●Microsoft Window 8.1 (64-bit edition only)
●Microsoft Window 8 (64-bit edition only)
●Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 (64-bit edition only)
For more information about a specic Microsoft operating system, go to www.microsoft.com.
Notes
●HP no longer supports or tests HP Web Jetadmin installations on Microsoft operating systems that were
released prior to the operating systems that are supported for the current release.
●Beginning with HP Web Jetadmin 10.3 SR6, Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or later is required in addition
to .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 because HP Web Jetadmin supports Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.1 and 1.2.
Some of the operating systems that are supported for the current release already ship with .NET
Framework 4.5 or later.
If the HP Web Jetadmin installer does not detect .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 and .NET Framework 4.5 or later,
the installer provides the appropriate installation instructions and Microsoft URL to download .NET
Framework.
●The operating systems that are supported for the current release include Windows Installer 4.5. If Windows
Installer 4.5 is not already installed, the HP Web Jetadmin installer provides the appropriate Microsoft URL
to download Windows Installer 4.5.
●Local administrator access is required to install or upgrade HP Web Jetadmin.
●Production HP Web Jetadmin installations are restricted to dedicated hosts. Running HP Web Jetadmin on
systems that are also mail servers, DNS servers, domain controllers, and so on is not supported.
HP Web Jetadmin Client Application
Supported operating systems
●Microsoft Windows Server 2016
●Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
●Microsoft Windows Server 2012
●Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
●Microsoft Windows 10
●Microsoft Windows 8.1
●Microsoft Windows 8
●Microsoft Windows 7 SP1
For more information about a specic Microsoft operating system, go to www.microsoft.com.
Notes
●Beginning with HP Web Jetadmin 10.3 SR6, Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or later is required in addition
to .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 because HP Web Jetadmin supports Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.1 and 1.2.
Some of the operating systems that are supported for the current release already ship with .NET
Framework 4.5 or later.
2 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
If the HP Web Jetadmin installer does not detect .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 and .NET Framework 4.5 or later,
the installer provides the appropriate installation instructions and Microsoft URL to download .NET
Framework.
Virtual Machine (Optional Platform)
Recommended requirements
HP recommends the following virtualization solutions:
●VMware ESX
●Microsoft Hyper-V
Notes
●For a VMware server, the virtual machine network must be set to bridged to facilitate HP Web Jetadmin
communications.
●It is very important to congure VMware so that its guest or virtual systems have enough resources to
support HP Web Jetadmin and Microsoft SQL Server. To ensure that the appropriate resources are
provisioned, see the support documentation for the version of VMware you are using.
Server Hardware
Recommended requirements
HP recommends the following hardware conguration for the server:
●4 or more processor cores
●2.8 GHz or higher processor speed
●4 GB or more of RAM
●4 GB of available storage
Minimum requirements
Although you can use the following hardware conguration for the server, HP does not recommend that you use
it for production installations. HP does not test HP Web Jetadmin on this hardware conguration and, therefore,
cannot guarantee the results.
●2 processor cores
●2.33 GHz processor speed
●5 GB of RAM (2 GB is required for the HP Web Jetadmin Service, and 2 GB is the default SQL memory
reservation)
HP Web Jetadmin uses a value of 3,072 MB to qualify a system as having 3 GB of RAM.
●4 GB of available storage
ENWW System Requirements 3
Notes
●Recent software improvements have increased resource capacity requirements. HP strongly recommends
the 64-bit editions of Windows and 4 GB or more of RAM for production HP Web Jetadmin installations.
●Storage requirements vary depending on the implementation, database, and migration from previous
versions.
●NTFS is the only supported le system.
●If the HP Web Jetadmin installer determines that less than 1 GB of RAM is installed, the installer displays a
message stating that 3 GB of RAM is required.
Client Hardware
Recommended requirements
HP recommends the following hardware conguration for the client:
●PC with 2.4 GHz processor
●64-bit system with 4 GB of RAM
●Client display with a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768
●Optimized for Normal font size
●Default DPI only
Minimum requirements
Although you can use the following hardware conguration for the client, HP does not recommend that you use
it for production installations. HP does not test HP Web Jetadmin on this hardware conguration and, therefore,
cannot guarantee the results.
●PC with 1.8 GHz processor
●32-bit or 64-bit system with 2 GB of RAM
●Client display with a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768
●Optimized for Normal font size
●Default DPI only
Database
For new installations of HP Web Jetadmin 10.3 SR8 or later, the installation package contains and automatically
installs the database for Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Express SP2 (product version 11.0.5058.0). Existing
installations of HP Web Jetadmin prior to 10.3 SR8 and installations that have been upgraded to 10.3 SR8 or
later use the database for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express (product version 10.00.2531.00).
NOTE: HP has successfully tested HP Web Jetadmin with Microsoft SQL Server 2014.
TIP: For more information about conguring HP Web Jetadmin to use a separate Microsoft SQL instance, see
the Using Microsoft SQL Server with HP Web Jetadmin white paper. This white paper is available from the
HP Web Jetadmin support page (in English).
4 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Network
The HP Web Jetadmin installer requires one active IPv4 connection. If an active IPv4 connection is not available,
the installer fails.
For rmware upgrades with HP Web Jetadmin, a minimum bandwidth of 1 MB/s is required. If there are multiple
devices upgrading at the same time, then the minimum bandwidth of 1 MB/s will be equal to the number of
concurrent rmware upgrades. For example, four simultaneous upgrades requires at least 4 MB/s.
Installations and Upgrades
Local administrator access is required to install or upgrade HP Web Jetadmin.
Client Application
The HP Web Jetadmin client application requires the following:
●Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10, or 11
●Display with a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768
Notes
●Internet Explorer is required to start the HP Web Jetadmin client application. For more information about
Internet Explorer requirements and limitations, see the support documentation for the Windows operating
system that you are using.
●Administrator access is not required to run the HP Web Jetadmin client application.
●A maximum of 15 concurrent client sessions are allowed.
Supported Devices
HP Web Jetadmin supports HP devices and third-party devices that are connected through HP Jetdirect print
servers. HP Web Jetadmin also supports third-party devices that are standard printer MIB compliant and are
connected to the network. For third-party devices, HP Web Jetadmin provides basic capabilities as well as more
robust capabilities if the devices are used with HP-certied plug-ins for HP Web Jetadmin.
IMPORTANT: If the following devices use a Universal Plug-in (UPI), WS-Discovery must be enabled on the
devices:
●HP LaserJet Pro
●HP Ocejet Pro
●HP FutureSmart with a rmware version earlier than 3.2.3
If WS-Discovery is disabled on HP LaserJet Pro and HP Ocejet Pro devices, HP Web Jetadmin uses the correct
UPI and displays a status of Device Communication Error for the devices after a device discovery or full refresh is
performed.
If WS-Discovery is disabled on HP FutureSmart devices with a rmware version earlier than 3.2.3,
HP Web Jetadmin uses a generic device model instead of the correct UPI after a device discovery or full refresh is
performed.
ENWW System Requirements 5
Host Access
For the application host, local administrator access is required to install or upgrade HP Web Jetadmin.
For the client host, local user access is required to access the HP Web Jetadmin client application and
administrator access is required to install Microsoft .NET Framework.
Client/Server Security
Microsoft domain or locally managed Windows users and passwords are required.
Notes
●HP tests HP Web Jetadmin in Microsoft Active Directory domains.
●Users must be a member of an HP Web Jetadmin server administrator group or designated as one of the
following in the HP Web Jetadmin User settings:
–Windows local security group
–Active Directory security group
–Local individual user account
–Active Directory domain user account
Install HP Web Jetadmin
To install HP Web Jetadmin, perform the following steps:
1. Go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin, and then download the HP Web Jetadmin software.
2. Double-click the EXE le.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
4. If the installation stops with a warning that a reboot is required, reboot the host on which the
HP Web Jetadmin installer is running. Then relaunch the installer to continue the installation.
5. When the installation is complete, click the Finish button.
IMPORTANT: If the HP Web Jetadmin installer does not install Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition, the most
common reason for the failure is that Windows updates, such as service packs or hotxes, were installed on the
machine and the machine was not restarted after the updates completed. Restart the machine, and then install
HP Web Jetadmin again.
Install HP Web Jetadmin from the Command Line
You can install HP Web Jetadmin from a command line, through a script, or through an automated process. The
following is the command syntax:
<filename>.exe [/L"<LanguageID>"] [/S /v/qn] </V"[Property1=Value1]
[Property2=Value2] [...]">
6 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Command-line parameters
●<filename>.exe
Species the name of the EXE le that you downloaded from www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
●/L"<LanguageID>"
Species the ID of the language the installer uses (Optional). If the language dialog is enabled and you
specify a valid language ID, the installer automatically suppresses the language dialog. If you specify an
invalid language ID or a language ID that the installer does not support, the installer ignores this parameter.
The following are the language IDs. The default is the local system language.
Language Language ID
Chinese (Simplied) 2052
Chinese (Traditional) 1028
English (Worldwide) 1033
French (European) 1036
German 1031
Italian 1040
Japanese 1041
Korean 1042
Portuguese (Brazilian) 1046
Russian 1049
Spanish (Mid-Atlantic) 1034
●/S /v/qn
Performs a silent installation (Optional).
To perform a silent installation, the following properties are required:
–WJA_EULA
–ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLECTION
●/V"[Property1=Value1] [Property2=Value2] [...]"
Species a list of properties the installer uses (Required). The following are the properties and values.
Property and Value Description
WJA_EULA=ACCEPT | REJECT Species whether you accept or reject the HP Web Jetadmin End User License
Agreement (EULA).
This property is required for silent installations.
ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLEC
TION=TRUE | FALSE
Species whether the Data Collection feature is enabled or disabled. This feature
collects data about your printers and implementation of HP Web Jetadmin and
anonymizes the data. HP Web Jetadmin uses an Internet connection to transmit the
anonymized data to HP. HP uses the anonymized data to improve products and
services.
This property is required for silent installations.
ENWW Install HP Web Jetadmin from the Command Line 7
Property and Value Description
IMPORTANT: HP is committed to protecting your privacy and the integrity of your
computer. You can enable and disable this feature at any time. Your name, address,
email address, and other sensitive data are not sent to HP.
WJA_BACKUP_CONFIRM=YES | NO Species whether a backup of HP Web Jetadmin was performed prior to the
installation.
This property is required for upgrade installations.
WJA_SUPPLY_GROUP_REMOVAL_CONF
IRM=YES | NO
Species whether the existing Supplies Groups are removed. In HP Web Jetadmin
10.2, the Supplies Groups functionality was removed as a product feature. Regular
device groups will not be removed or altered during the installation.
This property is required when upgrading from all versions of HP Web Jetadmin 10.1
and earlier.
YES—Conrms that you understand and agree that all Supplies Groups functionality
as well as existing groups will be removed during the installation.
NO—Causes the installation to terminate and end without the software being
installed.
WJA_COLUMN_CONFIRM=YES | NO Species whether the column data is upgraded, which might aect lters, groups
with lters, and device list exporting.
This property is required for silent upgrade installations prior to HP Web Jetadmin
10.2 SR 5.
WJA_SKIP_DB_INSTALL=1 | 0 Species whether the database installation is skipped. To skip the database
installation, specify 1.
This property is required only if you want the installer to skip the database
installation.
INSTALLDIR=\"<Path>\" Species the HP Web Jetadmin installation path. The following is the default path:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\
This property is optional for silent installations.
The path must be enclosed with \". In addition, the properties specied for the /V
option must be enclosed with quotes. The following is an example of the correct
syntax:
/V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT INSTALLDIR=\"C:\Program Files\HP Inc
\Web Jetadmin 10\""
CAUTION: If the path contains spaces and is not enclosed with \", the installer
fails.
DATABASEDIR=\"<Path>\" Species the database installation path. The following is the default path:
C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\
This property is optional for silent installations.
If the directory name contains spaces, you must use the Windows short-path
notation. To nd the short-path notation, issue the following command:
Dir *. /x
The path must be enclosed with \". In addition, the properties specied for the /V
option must be enclosed with quotes.
The following are examples of the correct syntax:
–/V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT DATABASEDIR=\"C:\SQLServer\""
8 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Property and Value Description
–/V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT DATABASEDIR=\"C:
\Program~1\SQLServer\""
CAUTION: If the path contains spaces and is not enclosed with \", the installer
fails.
Examples of the command-line syntax
The following examples assume that the name of the installation le is WjaSetup-x64.exe.
●To perform a basic silent installation, enter the following command:
WjaSetup-x64.exe /S /v/qn /V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT
ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLECTION=TRUE"
●To start the installer in Spanish, enter the following command:
WjaSetup-x64.exe /L"1034"
●To perform a silent installation with HP Web Jetadmin installed on C:\WJA, enter the following command:
WjaSetup-x64.exe /S /v/qn /V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT
ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLECTION=TRUE INSTALLDIR=\"C:\WJA\""
●To perform a silent installation with HP Web Jetadmin installed on C:\WJA and the database installed on C:
\WJADB, enter the following command:
WjaSetup-x64.exe /S /v/qn /V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT
ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLECTION=TRUE INSTALLDIR=\"C:\WJA\"
DATABASEDIR=\"C:\WJADB\""
●To perform a silent upgrade, enter the following command:
WjaSetup-x64.exe /S /v/qn /V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT
ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLECTION=TRUE INSTALLDIR=\"C:\WJA\"
DATABASEDIR=\"C:\WJADB\" WJA_BACKUP_CONFIRM=YES
WJA_SUPPLY_GROUP_REMOVAL_CONFIRM=YES WJA_COLUMN_CONFIRM=YES"
Install HP Web Jetadmin in Blocking Mode
You can run a silent installation in blocking mode from the command line. The following is the command syntax:
start /wait <ProgramAndArguments>
The following examples assume that the name of the installation le is WjaSetup-x64.exe.
●start /wait WjaSetup-x64.exe /S /v/qn /V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT INSTALLDIR=
\"C:\wja\" DATABASEDIR=\"C:\wjadb\""
●start /wait "C:\temp\WjaSetup-x64.exe /S /v/qn /V"WJA_EULA=ACCEPT
ENABLE_ANONYMIZED_DATA_COLLECTION=TRUE INSTALLDIR=\"C:\wja\"
DATABASEDIR=\"C:\wjadb\"""
ENWW Install HP Web Jetadmin in Blocking Mode 9
Post-installation Tasks
The HP Web Jetadmin server will start automatically as a Microsoft Service. The HP Web Jetadmin server cannot
accept HP Web Jetadmin client connections until the HP Web Jetadmin server has fully loaded all services into
memory. Dependent upon your HP Web Jetadmin server available system resources, it may take 1-2 minutes for
all services to completely load after initial server installation or server reboot.
The rst time you launch HP Web Jetadmin after installation, a pop-up dialog is displayed stating that no devices
have been discovered. You can opt to launch discovery settings at this point.
Once the installation is complete, HP Web Jetadmin can be launched from a supported browser by entering the
hostname or IP address of the computer on which it is installed, followed by the port number and path. Typical
default port numbers for Web services have a value of 80. Since HP Web Jetadmin may be running
simultaneously with another Web service on the same computer, HP Web Jetadmin uses a port number of 8000.
If desired, the port value may be altered.
Here is an example of the URL used to activate HP Web Jetadmin on a supported Windows desktop:
http://myhost:8000
Recommended Initial Conguration Steps
After HP Web Jetadmin is installed, some of the initial steps that you should take to begin managing devices and
the print environment include conguring the options that are shared throughout HP Web Jetadmin, running a
discovery, and conguring various other features.
Shared conguration options include the database, network (for example, SNMP and HTTPS), discovery, server
maintenance, and credentials. To congure these options, go to Tools > Options > Shared, and then navigate to
the appropriate category. For more information about a specic option, see the online Help for that option.
Finding devices on the network might be as simple as enabling HP Web Jetadmin to passively listen for devices
on the network. Finding devices might be as complex as working with the IT team to map the entire IP network,
and then running an IP Range discovery to compile a complete inventory of network-connected devices. You can
also use many of the same settings and techniques to discover PC-connected devices. Before you plan and
implement a device discovery strategy, carefully review the information about discoveries in the
HP Web Jetadmin documentation and white papers.
You should congure features such as Roles, Users, Alerts, and Device Groups before you begin using
HP Web Jetadmin. For more information about a specic feature, see the appropriate section in the
HP Web Jetadmin documentation and the HP Web Jetadmin white papers.
The HP Web Jetadmin documentation and white papers are available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page
(click the ag icon on the bottom of the page, and then select your country/region).
Congure the HP Web Jetadmin Service to Restart Automatically
It is recommended to congure HP Web Jetadmin to restart automatically whenever the HP Web Jetadmin
service fails. If, for example, the database is inaccessible, the HP Web Jetadmin service will be stopped and then
automatically restarted. The HP Web Jetadmin service will wait for the database to become accessible and then
the HP Web Jetadmin service becomes live.
HP Web Jetadmin installs an additional service named HPWSProAdapter. The HPWSProAdapter service facilitates
communication with certain HP device models and must be left running. You must also perform the steps in this
section for the HPWSProAdapter service.
10 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
To congure the HP Web Jetadmin service to restart automatically, follow these steps.
1. Access the Windows Control Panel and select Administrative Tools.
2. Select Services and then select HPWJA Service.
3. Right-click and select Properties from the menu.
4. Click the Recovery tab. For the First failure, Second failure, and Subsequent failures, select Restart the
service.
5. Click OK.
Ports
HP Web Jetadmin listens continuously on several ports and opens other ports for specic functionality. The
following table lists the ports that HP Web Jetadmin uses.
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) in the discovery process.
HP Web Jetadmin sends an ICMP echo request to determine if the IP is active.
Port number Type
Inbound (I) or
Outbound (O)1Description
69 UDP I TFTP Incoming Port: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port as a staging area for
rmware images during HP Jetdirect rmware updates. Through SNMP,
HP Web Jetadmin triggers HP Jetdirect to retrieve rmware through this port.
80 TCP O HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to qualify the link to the HP Embedded Web
Server on the device and to retrieve the rmware images from the web.
161 UDP O SNMP: HP Web Jetadmin and other management applications use SNMP to
communicate with and manage devices. HP Web Jetadmin uses this port on
the printer to issue Set and Get commands to the SNMP agent.
427 UDP I SLP Listen: HP Jetdirect-connected devices use Service Location Protocol
(SLP) to advertise their existence. When the passive SLP discovery feature is
enabled on HP Web Jetadmin, devices send multicast packets to this port on
the HP Web Jetadmin server.
443 TCP O HTTPS: The HP Web Jetadmin service and HPWSProAdapter service send
device congurations and queries to this port over HTTPS.
HPWSProAdapter uses this port to communicate with devices that do not
support Web Services and are congured to redirect all of the network trac
to HTTPS.
843 TCP O HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to congure some settings, such as fax and
digital sending, on some HP MFP device models.
1433 UDP O Microsoft SQL Server: By default, HP Web Jetadmin installs the SQL Server
database on the same host. Optionally, you can congure HP Web Jetadmin
to communicate with a SQL Server database on a dierent host.
HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to facilitate communication with a remote
SQL Server database.
2493 UDP I/O Build Monitor: This is an HP Web Jetadmin server port that is kept open. Other
HP Web Jetadmin servers use this port to discover running instances of
HP Web Jetadmin.
37022UDP O WS Discovery: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to perform a Web Services
discovery on newer HP devices.
ENWW Ports 11
Port number Type
Inbound (I) or
Outbound (O)1Description
39102, 3911 TCP O WS Discovery: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to retrieve details about the
device Web Services during a discovery. HP Web Jetadmin uses these details
to establish the WS communication paths that it needs to manage devices.
HP Web Jetadmin uses port 3910 to retrieve print requests and uses port
3911 to retrieve the printer status.
4088 TCP I Remoting: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port as the primary communication
channel between a started HP Web Jetadmin client and its corresponding
HP Web Jetadmin server.
4089 TCP I Client Event Notication: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to communicate
change events from the HP Web Jetadmin server to the client. These events
trigger the client to pull updates from the server through the Remoting
interface. In previous releases of HP Web Jetadmin, Windows assigned this
port.
76272TCP O Web Services (HTTPS): HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to communicate with
HP FutureSmart devices and older laser devices for some operations, such as
OXPd.
For devices that do not support Web Services, the HPWSProAdapter Service
acts as a gateway between HP Web Jetadmin and the devices. The
HPWSProAdapter Service receives Web Services requests from
HP Web Jetadmin, and then sends the translated requests to the devices over
port 8080 (an unsecure connection, an HP Embedded Web Server password is
not congured on the devices) or port 443 (a secure connection, an
HP Embedded Web Server password is congured on the devices).
8000 UDP O HP Web Jetadmin Discovery Listen: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port on
remote IP hosts to detect earlier versions of the HP Web Jetadmin software.
8000 TCP I Web Server: HP Web Jetadmin provides an HTTP listener for the initial client
launch and online Help content.
8050 TCP I Device Eventing Callback (HTTPS): Newer HP devices use a WS eventing
protocol for management communications.
8080 TCP O HPWSProAdapter: HPWSProAdapter uses this port to communicate with
devices that do not support Web Services and are not congured to redirect
all of the network trac to HTTPS. HP Web Jetadmin sends device
congurations and queries to this port.
8140 TCP I OXPm Web Services (HTTP): This is the communication port for HP Open
Extensibility Platform (management operations).
8143 TCP I OXPm Web Services (HTTPS): This is a secure communication port for
HP Open Extensibility Platform (management operations).
8443 TCP I Secure Web Server (HTTPS): HP Web Jetadmin provides a secure HTTPS
listener for the initial client launch, Help content, and device le transfer
operations.
9100 TCP O Printer Firmware Upgrade and Test File Operation: HP Web Jetadmin uses this
printer port to transfer printer rmware les, test job les, and PJL
conguration les.
27892 UDP I Traps Listener: HP Web Jetadmin uses this port for SNMP-based alerts and for
By User Data Collections.
27893 UDP I WS Hello Listener: HP Web Jetadmin monitors this port for incoming WS Hello
packets from the HP WS Pro Proxy Agent software that is installed on hosts in
the enterprise. When HP Web Jetadmin detects a packet, it follows up to
determine whether there are any printers to discover on the sending host. For
12 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Port number Type
Inbound (I) or
Outbound (O)1Description
more information, see the HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 Proxy Agents Readme. This
document is available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (in English).
59113 TCP O Microsoft SQL Server: By default, HP Web Jetadmin installs the SQL Server
database on the same host. Optionally, you can congure HP Web Jetadmin
to communicate with a SQL Server database on a dierent host.
HP Web Jetadmin uses this port to facilitate communication with a remote
SQL Server database.
1The I/O column represents the communication direction with respect to the HP Web Jetadmin server host. HP Web Jetadmin uses
random source ports when communicating with ports on remote IP addresses.
2HP Web Jetadmin uses ports 7627, 3702, and 3910 internally to communicate with devices. To ensure proper communication, these
ports must be kept open for communication directly with the device and with the internal HPWSProAdapter service.
When using WMI discovery (discovering PC-connected printers without an HP proxy installed on the PC), several
ports have to be opened for the WMI communication (DCOM ports, WMI ports, and WMI connection applications
(UnsecApp or WMI_OUT)). For more information, see: https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa822854.aspx
Open the ports in the Windows rewall by using a batch le
HP Web Jetadmin opens the ports listed in the table to communicate with devices. However, the rewall that you
are using might block the connection and prevent HP Web Jetadmin from communicating with the network.
Instead of adding rewall rules for these ports one at a time, you can create a batch le that opens all of the
ports that HP Web Jetadmin requires for the Windows rewall at one time. For instructions, see the Create a
Batch File to Open HP Web Jetadmin Required Ports in the Windows Firewall white paper. This white paper is
available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page.
Implement SSL
By default, the HP Web Jetadmin HTTP service runs without certicates. If you add a certicate, the HTTP server
runs in HTTPS mode and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) communication is enforced. In HTTPS mode, the user and
the HTTP server are authenticated to one another and the trac between them is encrypted. This adds an extra
layer of security to the Smart Client download and other HTTP transactions.
HP Web Jetadmin does not self-generate certicates. You must obtain a certicate from a certicate authority
(CA). CAs can exist inside or outside of an organization. Many companies have their own CAs. The
HP Web Jetadmin Signing Request feature generates a le that you can send to the CA. When the CA sends you a
certicate, use the Install Certicate feature to enable HTTPS.
IMPORTANT: For new server certicates, you must install 2048-bit certicates. Any previously installed 1024-
bit server certicates continue to function correctly.
Enable Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
HP Web Jetadmin administrators enable SSL by adding a certicate to the HP Web Jetadmin application. This
certicate forces the browser to use the more secure HTTPS protocol when a user accesses the client logon
page. The administrator must enable SSL from the console or host that runs the application by using the
procedure in Congure HTTPS (Server Certicates or SSL) on page 14. When a remote administrator accesses
Tools > Options > Shared > Network > HTTPS, a message appears stating that certicates can only be installed
from an HP Web Jetadmin client that runs on the console or server that hosts HP Web Jetadmin.
ENWW Implement SSL 13
In some environments, SSL is required when an HTTP interface or service is used for communication. In these
cases, SSL can be enabled and enforced by HP Web Jetadmin. SSL provides a high level of assurance regarding
the authentication and encryption of HTTP communication. That is, a user who requests access to the
HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client download can be reasonably assured that the system hosting HP Web Jetadmin
is authentic and the communication between the two systems is encrypted so that it cannot be easily read by
eavesdroppers.
The SSL protocol uses certicates to accommodate both authentication and encryption. HP Web Jetadmin can
generate a signing request that can be used by a certicate authority (CA) to generate a certicate. Using Tools >
Options > Shared > Network > HTTPS, the user can generate a Signing Request.
Once the request has been fullled by the CA, the certicate is ready to be installed on HP Web Jetadmin.
Remember, you must be at the application console to use Tools > Options > Shared > Network > HTTPS. Use
Install Certicate to browse and upload the certicate le.
Once the certicate is installed, the HTTP service enforces SSL. Any browser contact with HP Web Jetadmin
should indicate HTTPS on the URL when a certicate is installed. Using Remove Certicate uninstalls the
certicate and SSL is no longer enforced.
Important Points to Remember When Implementing SSL
Client communication with SSL enforced requires one or more of the following considerations.
●For new server certicates, you must install 2048-bit certicates. Any previously installed 1024-bit server
certicates continue to function correctly.
●When SSL has been implemented on HP Web Jetadmin with an internal certicate authority (CA), the CA’s
authorizing certicate must be installed in the client browser. If this certicate is not installed in the client
browser the HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client page will fail to load up in SSL mode.
●Proxy servers tend to use the standard SSL port 443. If the HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client page is being
called through a proxy server, a redirect error may occur. This is due to the URL being redirected to 443
rather than 8443 which is the port used by the HP Web Jetadmin SSL. The workaround for this is to place
the HP Web Jetadmin fully qualied domain name (FQDN) into the browsers exceptions list under Tools >
Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings > Advanced. This causes the browser to pull HTTP and
HTTPS content directly from the HP Web Jetadmin server.
TIP: HP Web Jetadmin HTTP and HTTPS port numbers can be customized to something other than 8000
and 8443.
●When you have implemented SSL on HP Web Jetadmin, a redirect occurs when the browser URL uses port
8000. Here is an example:
The known URL prior to SSL implementation is http://servername.domain.xxx:8000.
After SSL implementation, HP Web Jetadmin will redirect this to a new URL: https://
servername.domain.xxx:8443.
The URLs shown here use FQDN. In most cases the certicate issued and installed in the HP Web Jetadmin
SSL implementation will contain an FQDN for the host on which HP Web Jetadmin is installed. If a non FQDN
is used in the browser, certicate failure will occur. As a general rule, form the HP Web Jetadmin URL with
FQDN when HP Web Jetadmin is implemented with SSL.
To congure HTTPS, access Tools > Options > Shared > Network > HTTPS.
14 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Congure HTTPS (Server Certicates or SSL)
1. To congure HTTPS, access Tools > Options > Shared > Network > HTTPS.
2. To associate a certicate with the HP Web Jetadmin server and enable HTTPS, select Install Certicate.
IMPORTANT: When using the HP Web Jetadmin client to install a certicate on a Vista host with UAC
enabled, you must launch the client from the installer (just after install is nished and from the checkbox
that enables client launch) or from an IE that was Run as Administrator.
-or-
To remove the installed certicate from the server and disable HTTPS, select Remove Certicate.
-or-
To generate a certicate request that can be sent to a signing authority to generate a certicate that can be
installed to enable HTTPS, select Signing Request.
IMPORTANT: For new server certicates, you must install 2048-bit certicates. Any previously installed
1024-bit server certicates continue to function correctly.
3. To save these settings and continue setting other options, click Apply. Then click the next option to
congure in the left menu bar. To save these settings and close this window, click OK.
Use a Separate Instance of Microsoft SQL Server
By default, HP Web Jetadmin installs and uses a database that runs under Microsoft SQL Server Express. An
existing installation of HP Web Jetadmin can be congured to use the full version of SQL Server instead of SQL
Server Express. However, HP does not support or test HP Web Jetadmin installations with SQL Server databases
other than the version listed in Database on page 4 and, therefore, cannot guarantee the results.
For more information about conguring HP Web Jetadmin to use a separate Microsoft SQL instance, see the
Using Microsoft SQL Server with HP Web Jetadmin white paper. This white paper is available from the
HP Web Jetadmin support page (in English).
Deploy the Smart Client
HP Web Jetadmin uses the Microsoft ClickOnce Smart Client technology. This technology runs a Microsoft .NET
Framework application by automatically downloading and starting the application through a web browser. The
Smart Client application runs as a local .NET Framework application on the host and uses .NET Remoting to
communicate with the HP Web Jetadmin service. The following describes the interaction between the
HP Web Jetadmin server and the Smart Client application:
●The Smart Client application uses HTTP or HTTPS to initially contact the HP Web Jetadmin server. The
default HTTP port is 8000. The default HTTPS port is 8443. For instructions on changing the default ports,
see Change the Default HTTP or HTTPS Port for the HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client Application
on page 16.
●The HP Web Jetadmin server transfers approximately 2 MB of les for the Smart Client application to the
client.
●The Smart Client application runs on the client as the user who is logged in to the computer, executes
commands that download approximately 50 MB of HP Web Jetadmin client les, and starts the graphical
user interface for the HP Web Jetadmin client application. The web browser is now inactive.
ENWW Use a Separate Instance of Microsoft SQL Server 15
After the Smart Client application starts, the web browser is no longer required. Although HP Web Jetadmin
also uses the web browser to deliver online Help and proactive Product Update notications, the
HP Web Jetadmin client application runs locally on the computer.
●The HP Web Jetadmin server downloads all of the relevant information to the client. When new information
is available, the HP Web Jetadmin server contacts the client and downloads the new information.
The HP Web Jetadmin installer builds a shortcut on the installation host to http://<ip_address>:8000/, where
<ip_address> is the host where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. Use this URL to access HP Web Jetadmin remotely
from anywhere on the company's intranet or WAN.
To start the Smart Client session, only a web browser is required. Administrator rights are not required to run
Smart Client applications. However, .NET Framework must be installed. Local administrator rights might be
required to install .NET Framework.
In most cases, the Smart Client session starts automatically. However, the local security settings on the
workstation might prevent the application from starting automatically. For more information about manually
starting the Smart Client, see Start an HP Web Jetadmin Client Session on page 17. For more information
about changing the local security settings, see the Microsoft documentation.
Change the Default HTTP or HTTPS Port for the HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client
Application
Use the following steps to change the default HTTP or HTTPS port that is used to start the HP Web Jetadmin
Smart Client application:
1. Use Notepad or a similar text editor to open the HP.Imaging.Wjp.Core.WebServer.cong.xml le. This
conguration le is available in the following directory:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
2. Update the <value> attribute for the HTTP or HTTPS port in the following entries:
<property name="HttpsPort">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>8443</value>
</property>
<property name="HttpPort">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>8000</value>
</property>
3. Close and save the le.
Run the Smart Client Application in a Workgroup
Use the following steps to change the Microsoft security settings:
TIP: For more information about the security policy settings, see the Microsoft documentation.
1. On the HP Web Jetadmin server, go to Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Administrative Tools,
and then double-click Local Security Policy.
2. In the left navigation pane, expand Local Policies, and then select Security Options.
16 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
3. In the right pane, double-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts.
4. From the list, select the Classic - local users authenticate as themselves option.
5. Click the OK button.
Start an HP Web Jetadmin Client Session
After the HP Web Jetadmin installation is complete, use one of the following methods to start an
HP Web Jetadmin client session:
●On the host where HP Web Jetadmin is installed, go to Start > All Programs > HP Web Jetadmin 10, and
then select HP Web Jetadmin.
●In Internet Explorer, browse to the following URL on the host where HP Web Jetadmin is installed:
http://<ip_address>:8000
●From the command line, issue the following command:
rundll32 dfshim.dll, ShOpenVerbApplication http://<ip_address>:
8000/wja/wja.application?InternalErrorDetails=true
To start the HP Web Jetadmin client session in a specic language, use the following URLs. If the
corresponding Windows language pack is installed, the HP Web Jetadmin client session displays in that
language. If the corresponding Windows language pack is not installed, the HP Web Jetadmin client session
displays in a mixture of English and the specied language.
Language URL
Chinese (Simplied) http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=zh-cn
Chinese (Traditional) http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=zh-tw
English (Worldwide) http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=en-us
French (European) http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=fr-fr
German http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=de-de
Italian http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=it-it
Japanese http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=ja-jp
Korean http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=ko-kr
Portuguese (Brazilian) http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=pt-pt
Russian http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=ru-ru
Spanish (Mid-Atlantic) http://<ip_address>:8000/wja/wja.application?lang=es-es
In some cases, you might need to add the URL for HP Web Jetadmin to the trusted security zone in the Web
browser.
Congure HP Web Jetadmin to Bind to a Specic NIC
HP Web Jetadmin can run on a multi-homed server or on a server that has multiple network interfaces. In many
cases, a multi-homed server is connected to more than one network and has multiple IP addresses. A multi-
ENWW Deploy the Smart Client 17
homed server with multiple IP addresses can cause problems because HP Web Jetadmin tends to use only one
address for various reasons.
HP Web Jetadmin is a collection of features that administrators can use to manage devices. Each of these
features might require communications on the network or convey the IP address through which communications
should take place to other features either on or o the HP Web Jetadmin server. These features facilitate
learning the HP Web Jetadmin server IP address when the HPWJA service starts. These features do so in
isolation and might not select the correct IP address. The following sections describe situations where features
might not detect and select the correct IP address and provide a workaround that forces HP Web Jetadmin to
select the correct IP address.
HP Web Jetadmin Client Connection
The HP Web Jetadmin client startup is initiated from Internet Explorer using HTTP. Immediately after the startup
sequence, the HP Web Jetadmin client sends an HTTP message to the client host. The HTTP message points to a
Microsoft .NET Framework remote connection. The client host then initiates a relatively secure connection to the
HP Web Jetadmin server based on the HTTP message.
If HP Web Jetadmin is installed on a multihomed server and the HP Web Jetadmin (HPWJA) service selects an
incorrect IP address, the .NET Framework remote connection fails because the system that hosts the client
cannot communicate by using the IP address provided. Use the following steps to force the HPWJA service to use
the correct IP address:
1. Stop the HPWJA service by using Windows Service Manager.
CAUTION: Be careful when stopping the HPWJA service. Critical tasks might be running and clients might
be logged in to HP Web Jetadmin. To view the running tasks, go to Application Management > Overview >
Application Management - Active Tasks. To view the clients that are logged in, go to Application
Management > Overview > Client Management - Active Clients.
2. Use Notepad or a similar editor to open the System.Remoting.cong le. This conguration le is available
in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\cong\WjaService
IMPORTANT: Make sure that Notepad is running with sucient privileges to update and save the le.
3. Find the following code in the System.Remoting.cong le:
<application>
<channels>
<channel ref="tcp" port="4088" name="CMRemotingChannel"
rejectRemoteRequests="false"
tokenImpersonationLevel="Impersonation" secure="true"
protectionLevel="EncryptAndSign" impersonate="false">
4. Add the machineName="xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" entry, changing the value to the IP address of the
HP Web Jetadmin server that facilitates client communication. The following is an example of the edited
code:
<application>
<channels>
<channel ref="tcp" port="4088" name="CMRemotingChannel"
rejectRemoteRequests="false"
tokenImpersonationLevel="Impersonation" secure="true"
protectionLevel="EncryptAndSign" impersonate="false"
machineName="xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx">
18 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
CAUTION: Make sure that the new entry and value are entered exactly as shown here. Use the quotes
that the editor generates. Do not copy and paste this text because incorrect characters, such as quotes,
cause the HPWJA service to fail at startup. Observe all of the rules for editing XML. If the le is incorrectly
formatted, the HP Web Jetadmin XML parser fails.
5. Close and save the le.
6. Start the HPWJA service by using Windows Service Manager.
HP Web Jetadmin Alerts and SNMP Traps Registration
In rare cases, HP Web Jetadmin detects and uses an incorrect IP address for SNMP traps registration at the
device. When HP Web Jetadmin alert subscriptions are created, HP Web Jetadmin registers its IP address in the
SNMP traps destination table on the HP device. This registration causes the device to send a notication in the
form of SNMP trap packets back to the HP Web Jetadmin server. HP Web Jetadmin uses these notications to
trigger alerts for device conditions such as toner out or paper jam.
If an HP Web Jetadmin instance on a multi-homed server populates the SNMP traps destination table with the
incorrect IP address, follow these steps to force HP Web Jetadmin to select and use the correct IP address:
1. Stop the HPWJA service by using Windows Service Manager.
CAUTION: Be careful when stopping the HPWJA service. There might be critical tasks running. To view the
running tasks in HP Web Jetadmin, go to Application Management > Overview > Application Management -
Active Tasks. To view the client logins in HP Web Jetadmin, go to Application Management > Overview >
Client Management - Active Clients.
2. Open Notepad or a similar text editor that has the appropriate create and edit permissions.
3. Enter the following text:
<ipmc:configuration
xmlns:ipmc="www.hp.com/schemas/imaging/ipmc/config/2004/02/24">
<property name="LocalIPV4Address">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</value>
</property>
</ipmc:configuration>
CAUTION: Make sure that the new eld and values are entered exactly as shown here. Use the quote
marks that the editor generates. Do not copy and paste from this document because incorrect characters
cause the HPWJA service to fail at startup. Observe all the rules regarding XML editing. If the les are
incorrectly formatted, the HP Web Jetadmin XML parser fails.
4. Change the <value>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</value> entry to the correct HP Web Jetadmin server IP
address through which the device can communicate.
5. Select File > Save As.
6. On the Save as window, navigate to the following directory on the HP Web Jetadmin server host:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
7. In the File name text box, enter
HP.Imaging.Wjp.Alerts.Library.AlertsHelpers.config.xml.
8. From the Save as type drop-down list, select All Files (*.*).
ENWW Deploy the Smart Client 19
9. Click Save.
10. Start the HPWJA service by using Windows Service Manager.
HP Web Jetadmin now uses the IP address specied during SNMP traps registration. You must update any SNMP
traps registrations created prior to this procedure by using the HP Web Jetadmin Conguration feature or by
creating additional alerts subscriptions.
HP Web Jetadmin Web Service
The HP Web Jetadmin web or HTTP service uses the server IP addresses for various reasons, including
communicating with other processes, nodes, services, and the IP address of the actual HTTP server. In rare
cases, HP Web Jetadmin detects the incorrect IP address on multi-homed systems. A conguration le that
includes the HP Web Jetadmin IP address is built during the rst HPWJA service startup. Follow these steps to
correct the IP address value in the conguration le:
1. Stop the HPWJA service by using Windows Service Manager.
CAUTION: Be careful when stopping the HPWJA service. There might be critical tasks running. To view the
running tasks in HP Web Jetadmin, go to Application Management > Overview > Application Management -
Active Tasks. To view the client logins in HP Web Jetadmin, go to Application Management > Overview >
Client Management - Active Clients.
2. Open Notepad or a similar text editor that has the appropriate create and edit permissions.
3. Select File > Open.
4. On the Open window, navigate to the following directory:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
5. Open the HP.Imaging.Wjp.Core.WebServer.cong.xml le.
6. Find the following portion of the le:
<property name="HostIPv4Address">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</value>
</property>
7. Change the <value>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</value> entry to the correct server IP address.
8. Select File > Save.
9. Start the HPWJA service by using Windows Service Control Manager.
HP Web Jetadmin now uses the specied IP address with reference to the HTTP or web services.
Congure the Port for Event Notications
HP Web Jetadmin directs clients to a TCP connection to receive event notications. After the client establishes
the TCP connection, HP Web Jetadmin sends event notications that prompt the client to update itself via the
standard Microsoft .NET Remoting channel on port 4088. The HP Web Jetadmin server communicates the port
number that is established for event notications to the client when the client rst establishes a connection to
the HP Web Jetadmin server. The port number that HP Web Jetadmin communicates to the client is somewhat
random, which might cause a problem if a rewall is congured on the HP Web Jetadmin server.
20 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
If a rewall is congured on the HP Web Jetadmin server, the event notication port must be set to static and the
rewall must be congured to accept connections through this port. If a rewall is congured on the client, the
rewall on the client does not have to be congured to launch the client.
Use the following steps to congure a static port for event notications:
CAUTION: Be careful when restarting the HP Web Jetadmin service. Critical tasks might be running and clients
might be logged in to HP Web Jetadmin. To view the running tasks, go to Application Management > Overview >
Application Management - Active Tasks. To view the clients that are logged in, go to Application Management >
Overview > Client Management - Active Clients.
1. Use Notepad or a similar editor to create a le that contains the following XML section:
<ipmc:configuration
xmlns:ipmc="www.hp.com/schemas/imaging/ipmc/config/2004/02/24">
<property name="ClientEventRouter.ServerPort">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>8099</value>
</property>
</ipmc:configuration>
The port number specied for the <value> attribute can be any unused port.
2. From the File menu, select Save.
3. On the Save As window, navigate to the following directory on the HP Web Jetadmin server:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
4. In the File name box, enter Global.config.xml, and then click the Save button.
5. Restart the HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJAService). For instructions, see Restart the HP Web Jetadmin
Service Manually on page 21.
6. Use any rewall application or a similar application to open the port.
Congure the Firewall Software
You must congure the rewall on the HP Web Jetadmin server host to allow client trac and other trac to
pass through the correct ports. The rewall monitors HP Web Jetadmin for the ports that it uses and allows
trac.
In some rewall applications, such as Microsoft Firewall, you can specify a program or executable le as a
rewall exception. In these cases, you can dene the following le as an exception:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\bin\HPWJAService.exe
The rewall on the client system does not require any special consideration because the client application does
not listen to a specic port.
Restart the HP Web Jetadmin Service Manually
It may be necessary to stop and restart the HP Web Jetadmin service. An example of this would be when a
network is switched from hard-wired to wireless. Once the network is switched, HP Web Jetadmin must be
restarted in order for the application to realize the change.
ENWW Restart the HP Web Jetadmin Service Manually 21
CAUTION: Restarting HP Web Jetadmin services may interrupt background tasks and user sessions. Always
check the application before restarting.
To script the stop of all HP Web Jetadmin services, use these command strings in this order:
●Net stop HPWSProAdapter
●Net stop HPWJAService
●Net stop mssql$HPWJA
To script the start of all HP Web Jetadmin services, use these command strings in this order:
●Net start mssql$HPWJA
●Net start HPWJAService
●Net start HPWSProAdapter
1. Uninstall HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Use Windows Service Manager to set the older HP Web Jetadmin service (listed as HP Web Jetadmin in the
Services MMC) to activate and to also start the service.
Back Up and Restore HP Web Jetadmin
Scripts for backing up and restoring HP Web Jetadmin are available. These scripts provide examples of the
recommended method for backing up and restoring the HP Web Jetadmin settings and data, including the
Microsoft SQL Server database. The WJABackupRestoreInstructions_<language_code>.txt le provides
instructions for running the scripts. The scripts and instructions are available in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\WJABackupRestore
Upgrade HP Web Jetadmin
The current HP Web Jetadmin installation must be backed up before an upgrade is started. The
WJABackupRestoreInstructions_<language_code>.txt le provides instructions for backing up HP Web Jetadmin.
This le is located in the following directory on the HP Web Jetadmin server:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\WJABackupRestore
In HP Web Jetadmin, go to Help > About, and then write down the current version as 10.4. nnnnn, where nnnnn
is the build number. This version of the installer is required to perform a recovery.
Before you begin an upgrade, go to Application Management > Overview > Application Management – Active
Tasks, and then check for any paused or pending tasks. You must stop or resolve these tasks before you run the
installer.
To upgrade HP Web Jetadmin, obtain the HP Web Jetadmin installation executable from www.hp.com/go/
webjetadmin. Then run the executable on the system that hosts HP Web Jetadmin.
22 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Import Feature Packs
Feature Packs provide support for dynamically adding new conguration options and new device images to
HP Web Jetadmin. Feature Packs are imported and applied on an existing installation of HP Web Jetadmin. This
means that you can gain access to the new functionality without installing and qualifying a new version of the
full HP Web Jetadmin application. HP Web Jetadmin Administrator rights are required to apply Feature Packs.
Feature Packs are cumulative. A new Feature Pack includes the new functionality that is being released and all of
the functionality that was released in previous Feature Packs.
Each Feature Pack has a minimum version of HP Web Jetadmin that must be installed before the Feature Pack
can be imported and applied. If you import a Feature Pack on a version of HP Web Jetadmin that is earlier than
the minimum required version, HP Web Jetadmin displays a message that species the minimum required
version.
Feature Packs are available from www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin as signed HP Binary (HPb) les. After you
download an HPb le, you must import the HPb le into the existing installation of HP Web Jetadmin, and then
apply the HPb le. You must restart the HP Web Jetadmin service before the new functionality is available in
HP Web Jetadmin.
CAUTION: After a Feature Pack is applied, it cannot be removed from HP Web Jetadmin. HP recommends that
you back up HP Web Jetadmin before you apply a Feature Pack.
When a Feature Pack is initially released, the software and online Help for the new features are available only in
English. The localized software and online Help for the new features will be provided at a later time, either in a
new Feature Pack or a new version of HP Web Jetadmin.
Import and apply a Feature Pack
CAUTION: After a Feature Pack is applied, it cannot be removed from HP Web Jetadmin. HP recommends that
you back up HP Web Jetadmin before you apply a Feature Pack.
1. Go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin, and then download the HP Web Jetadmin Feature Pack le.
2. Go to Tools > Feature Packs.
3. Click the Import button.
4. On the Open window, browse to and select the HPb le, and then click the Open button.
5. On the Success window, click the OK button. The HPb le is listed on the Feature Packs window with a
status of Imported (Apply Pending).
-or-
If a Feature Pack has already been imported, but has not been applied yet, HP Web Jetadmin displays the
Warning window.
To overwrite the existing Feature Pack, click the Yes button.
To cancel the import process, click the No button.
6. Select the Feature Pack from the list, and then click the Apply button.
The status of the selected Feature Pack must be Imported.
7. On the Conrm Feature Pack apply window, click the OK button.
8. On the Success window, click the OK button. The Feature Pack is listed on the Feature Packs window with a
status of Applied (Service Restart Required).
9. Restart the HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJAService).
ENWW Import Feature Packs 23
CAUTION: Restarting the HP Web Jetadmin service can interrupt critical processes. Before you restart the
HP Web Jetadmin service, use the HP Web Jetadmin Broadcast Message feature to notify the active users,
and then make sure that all of the users are logged o and that there are no active tasks running on the
HP Web Jetadmin server.
Delete an imported Feature Pack
1. Go to Tools > Feature Packs.
2. Select the Feature Pack from the list, and then click the Delete button.
The status of the selected Feature Pack must be Imported.
3. On the Delete Feature Pack window, click the OK button.
4. On the Success window, click the OK button.
Display the Release Notes for a Feature Pack
The Release Notes for Feature Packs are provided only in English.
1. Go to Tools > Feature Packs.
2. Select the Feature Pack from the list, and then click the Details button. The Release Notes are displayed in
Notepad.
Enable FIPS on the HP Web Jetadmin Server
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) can be enabled only after you upgrade to HP Web Jetadmin 10.4
or later. This topic provides instructions for upgrading HP Web Jetadmin, making the required changes to the
settings in HP Web Jetadmin, and then enabling FIPS. These instructions must be followed in the order provided.
The MD5 and DES protocols are blocked after FIPS is enabled. Communication over SNMPv1/SNMPv2 is still
possible after FIPS is enabled.
Upgrade to HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 or later
1. On the HP Web Jetadmin server, go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin, and then download the
HP Web Jetadmin software.
2. Double-click the EXE le.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
4. If the installation stops with a warning that a reboot is required, reboot the HP Web Jetadmin server.
Launch the installer again to continue the installation.
5. When the installation is complete, click the Finish button.
Make the required changes to the settings in HP Web Jetadmin and on the devices
If you omit the following steps, HP Web Jetadmin might not be able to communicate with the devices after FIPS
is enabled. HP Web Jetadmin displays a status of Device Communication Error for these devices.
1. If HP Web Jetadmin has already discovered devices by using an SNMPv3 credential that species the MD5
and DES protocols, SNMP communication with those devices will not work after FIPS is enabled. The
SNMPv3 credential for these devices must be changed to the SHA-1 and AES-128 protocols. However, you
24 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
cannot use HP Web Jetadmin to determine if the SNMPv3 credential for the devices uses the MD5 and DES
protocols.
Use the following steps to update the SNMPv3 credential on all of the devices that use SNMPv3:
a. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Create
conguration template. The Create Device Conguration Template wizard starts.
b. On the Select Template Models page, select the device models to congure, and then click the right
arrow button.
c. Select the network cards to congure, and then click the right arrow button.
d. Click the Next button.
e. On the Specify template options page, enter a name for the template in the Name box (up to 48
characters).
f. In the Device settings navigation pane, go to Security > SNMP Version Access Control.
g. Select the Modify SNMPv3 option.
h. In the Current SNMPv3 Credential section, enter the user name, authentication protocol,
authentication passphrase, privacy protocol, and privacy passphrase that are currently congured for
SNMPv3. The current SNMPv3 credentials are required.
i. In the New SNMPv3 Credential section, select SHA-1 from the Authentication Protocol list, and select
AES-128 from the Privacy Protocol list.
j. If required, enter the new values for the user name, authentication passphrase, and privacy
passphrase.
CAUTION: To change the authentication and privacy passphrases, the current passphrases must be
specied in the device conguration template even if global SNMPv3 credentials are stored in
HP Web Jetadmin. If the current passphrases are not specied, the conguration fails.
k. Click the Next button.
l. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Create Template button.
m. On the Results page, click the Done button.
n. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Apply
conguration template. The Apply Device Conguration Template wizard starts.
o. Select the device conguration template that you just created from the list, and then click the Next
button.
p. On the Select devices page, select the devices to congure from the Available devices list, and then
click the > button.
q. Click the Next button.
r. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Apply Template button.
s. On the Results page, click the Done button.
2. Use the following steps to delete the SNMPv3 global credentials that use the MD5 and DES protocols:
a. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > SNMPv3.
b. Select the SNMPv3 credential that uses the MD5 and DES protocols from the list, and then click the
Remove button.
ENWW Enable FIPS on the HP Web Jetadmin Server 25
c. On the Conrm Delete window, click the Yes button.
d. Repeat steps b through c for each SNMPv3 credential that uses the MD5 and DES protocols.
3. Run a discovery to rediscover all of the SNMPv3-congured devices.
4. Trap forwarding that is congured to use SNMPv3 credentials with the MD5 and DES protocols does not
work after FIPS is enabled. Use one of the following procedures to update the alert subscriptions that are
congured to forward SNMP traps to a server using SNMPv3 credentials with the SHA-1 and AES-128
protocols.
NOTE: Alert subscriptions that are congured to only write alerts to the alert history log or to send email
notications when alerts occur do not need to be updated.
Update the alert subscriptions that were created by using an alert subscription template that is congured
to forward SNMP traps
a. In the Device Management navigation pane, go to Alerts > All Subscriptions.
b. At the top of the All Subscriptions pane, click the Expand all button to display the details for each alert
subscription.
c. To identify the alert subscription templates that must be updated, look for alerts that have SNMPv3
Trap Forwarding in the Notication Type column and have Linked in the Linked to Template column.
The name of the alert subscription template is shown in the Subscription Name column.
d. In the Device Management navigation pane, go to Alerts > Templates.
e. In the Alerts - Subscription Templates pane, select the alert subscription template from the list, and
then click the Edit button. The Edit Subscription Template wizard starts.
f. Click the Next button until the Specify notication settings page appears.
g. In the SNMPv3 credential section, select SHA-1 from the Authentication protocol list, and select
AES-128 from the Privacy protocol list.
h. If required, enter the new values for the user name, authentication passphrase, and privacy
passphrase.
i. Click the Next button until the Conrm page appears.
j. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Save Template button.
k. On the Results page, click the Done button.
All of the alert subscriptions that are linked to this alert subscription template are automatically
updated with the new SNMPv3 credentials.
l. Repeat steps c through k for each of the alert subscription templates.
Update the alert subscriptions that were created without using an alert subscription template and are
congured to forward SNMP traps
a. In the Device Management navigation pane, go to Alerts > All Subscriptions.
b. In the All Subscriptions pane, select the alert subscription from the list, and then click the Edit
Subscription button. The Edit Subscription wizard starts.
c. Click the Next button until the Specify notication settings page appears.
d. In the SNMPv3 credential section, select SHA-1 from the Authentication protocol list, and select
AES-128 from the Privacy protocol list.
26 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
e. If required, enter the new values for the user name, authentication passphrase, and privacy
passphrase.
f. Click the Next button until the Conrm page appears.
g. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Edit Subscription button.
h. On the Results page, click the Done button.
i. Repeat steps b through h for each alert subscription that was created without using an alert
subscription template.
-or-
If any future changes are made to the alert subscriptions, all of the alert subscriptions must be changed. To
prevent this in the future, HP recommends that you use the following steps to create new alert
subscriptions that are linked to alert subscription templates:
a. In the Device Management navigation pane, go to Alerts > All Subscriptions.
b. In the All Subscriptions pane, select the alert subscription from the list, and then click the Unsubscribe
button. The Delete Alert Subscriptions wizard starts.
c. On the Conrm page, click the Unsubscribe button.
d. On the Results page, click the Done button.
e. In the Device Management navigation pane, go to Alerts > Templates.
f. In the Alerts - Subscription Templates pane, select the alert subscription template from the list, and
then click the Apply button. The Apply Alert Subscription Template wizard starts.
NOTE: If an alert subscription template is not available, create an alert subscription template that
meets your specic needs.
g. On the Select devices page, select the devices from the Available devices list, and then click the >
button.
h. Click the Next button.
i. To link the selected alert subscription template to this alert subscription, select the Link template to
subscription option. Changes that are made to the selected alert subscription template are
automatically applied to the devices that are associated with this alert subscription.
-or-
To create an alert subscription that is not linked to the selected alert subscription template, select the
Do NOT link template to subscription option, and then enter a name for this alert subscription in the
Subscription name box. Changes that are made to the alert subscription template are not applied to
the devices that were previously congured with this alert subscription template.
j. Click the Next button.
k. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Apply Template button.
l. On the Results page, click the Done button.
m. Repeat steps b through l for each of the alert subscriptions that were created without using an alert
subscription template.
5. On the client machines where the HP Web Jetadmin client is launched, use the following steps to enable
the TLS protocol:
ENWW Enable FIPS on the HP Web Jetadmin Server 27
a. Open an Internet Explorer browser.
b. Go to Tools > Internet options, and then click the Advanced tab.
c. Scroll down to the Security section, and then select the checkboxes for one or more of the TLS
versions (TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2).
6. Use the following steps to verify that the devices are congured to communicate with the TLS protocol:
a. Select the device from any device list.
b. On the Cong tab, go to Network > Mgmt Protocol.
c. Verify that any version of TLS (TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2) is enabled.
d. Repeat steps a through c for each device.
7. Use the following steps to enable FIPS-140 mode on the devices. Enabling FIPS-140 mode aects only the
following device conguration options:
●SNMP Version Access Control conguration option: The SHA-1 authentication protocol and AES-128
privacy protocol must be congured.
●Mgmt Protocol conguration option: The TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, or TLS 1.2 protocol must be enabled.
TIP: The following steps are not required. However, you can use these steps to troubleshoot any FIPS-
related problems.
a. Select the device from any device list.
b. On the Cong tab, go to Security > FIPS-140 Mode.
c. Select the Enabled option.
d. Click the Apply button.
e. Repeat steps a through d for each device.
If any of the following device conguration options are congured on a device, enabling FIPS-140 mode
fails for that device:
●SNMP Version Access Control conguration option: The MD5 authentication and DES privacy protocols
must not be specied.
●IPsec/Firewall Policy conguration option: The DES-CBC-MD5 algorithm must not be specied for the
Kerberos setting.
●Upload Jetdirect Certicate conguration option: Certicates must not be signed by using MD5 or
earlier (MD2 or MD4).
●Upload CA Certicate conguration option: Certicates must not be signed by using MD5 or earlier
(MD2 or MD4).
●Mgmt Protocol conguration option: The SSL 3.0 or earlier protocol must not be enabled.
HP Web Jetadmin does not report the exact reason for the failure. However, if you enable FIPS-140 mode
by using the device HP Embedded Web Server (EWS), the EWS does report the exact reason for the failure.
The FIPS-140 mode setting is available in the EWS from the Networking tab > Security link > Settings page.
Enable FIPS on the HP Web Jetadmin server
1. Stop the following services. These services must be stopped in the specied order.
28 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
a. HPWSProAdapter
b. HPWJAService
c. mssql$HPWJA
2. Use the following steps to enable FIPS on the HP Web Jetadmin server as a local security policy:
TIP: For more information about the System cryptography setting, see the “System cryptography: Use
FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption, hashing, and signing" security setting eects in Windows XP and in
later versions of Windows document. This document is available from the Microsoft support page.
a. Go to Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy > Local Policies > Security Options.
b. Right-click System cryptography: Use FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption, hashing and signing,
and then select Properties.
c. On the Local Security Setting tab, select the Enabled option, and then click the OK button.
3. Start the following services. These services must be started in the specied order.
a. mssql$HPWJA
b. HPWJAService
c. HPWSProAdapter
4. Use the following steps to verify that HP Web Jetadmin can communicate with all of the devices:
a. In the All Devices list, look for any devices that have Device Communication Error in the Status
column.
b. Verify that you can congure a device by using HP Web Jetadmin.
c. In the All Devices list, right-click a device, and then select Refresh Selection (Full). Verify that the
refresh completed.
If there are any devices that have a status of Device Communication Error or you cannot complete step b or
c, access the device EWS, and then verify the following settings:
●Click the Networking tab, and then click the Network Settings link. If SNMPv3 is enabled, verify that
the authentication protocol is SHA x and the privacy protocol is AES.
●Click the Security tab, and then click the Certicate Management link. Select a certicate, and then
click the View Details button. Verify that the self-signed certicate uses a signature algorithm other
than MD5. Repeat this step for each self-signed certicate.
Uninstall HP Web Jetadmin
When you uninstall HP Web Jetadmin, the Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition instance of the HP Web Jetadmin
database is also removed. You can restore the HP Web Jetadmin database if you ran the appropriate backup
procedures and stored the backup les in a secure location.
To uninstall HP Web Jetadmin, perform the following steps:
1. Go to Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program.
2. Right-click HP Web Jetadmin 10.4, and then select Change. The HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 - InstallShield
Wizard starts.
3. Click the Next button.
ENWW Uninstall HP Web Jetadmin 29
4. Select the Remove option, and then click the Next button.
5. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
6. Review the MSI <xxxxx>.LOG le, where <xxxxx> is a randomly generated string. The log le is available in
the following directory:
C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Temp
TIP: You can uninstall HP Web Jetadmin from the command line. For instructions, see the Uninstall
HP Web Jetadmin from the Command Line white paper. This white paper is available from the HP Web Jetadmin
support page (in English).
Manage Licenses
There are some features for HP Web Jetadmin that require a license. After you obtain the license for a feature,
you must install the license to enable the functionality.
To manage the licenses, perform the following steps:
1. Go to Start > All Programs > HP Web Jetadmin 10, and then select HP Web Jetadmin License Manager.
2. To install a license, perform the following steps:
a. Click the Add button.
b. On the Enter License window, enter the license key, and then click the Apply button.
3. To delete a license, select the license from the list, and then click the Remove button.
4. To refresh the list of licenses, click the Refresh button.
5. Click the Exit button.
6. Restart the HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJA Service).
30 Chapter 1 Install and Set Up HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin increases business productivity by helping you proactively address potential printing
problems, automatically congure peripheral drivers, and update rmware. HP Web Jetadmin provides all of the
peripheral management capabilities you need in one easy-to-use Web browser interface. It is a is a free utility
that you can download from www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
Product Support
This section provides information about obtaining support for HP Web Jetadmin.
Print the HP Web Jetadmin Guides
If you need to print the HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 Installation and Setup Guide and the HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 User
Guide, PDFs are available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (click the ag icon on the bottom of the page,
and then select your country/region).
To view PDF les, Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer. To download the latest Adobe
Acrobat Reader, go to www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html.
Online Help
The HP Web Jetadmin online Help provides detailed information about using the software to congure and
manage devices on the network. Use the Contents, Index, and Search tabs to navigate the online Help.
Each page in HP Web Jetadmin has a help icon (?) on the content toolbar. When you click the help icon and then
click somewhere on the user interface, HP Web Jetadmin displays the context-sensitive help for that specic
portion of the user interface.
To access external links, the browser must have access to the Internet. If you are behind an Internet rewall, you
might need to congure proxy servers. Contact the network administrator to determine the appropriate settings
for the browser.
Technical Support
HP maintains an extensive Web presence to provide information and assistance. To obtain technical support for
HP Web Jetadmin, use the following links:
●www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
Provides access to Premium Support, Consulting Services, and a variety of self-help information, such as
support documentation and white papers.
●http://support.hp.com
Provides access to 24/7 online support for your country/region.
ENWW Product Support 31
Getting Around in HP Web Jetadmin
The user interface for HP Web Jetadmin is designed to be ecient and intuitive, limiting the number of steps
required to complete a task and streamlining software operation.
Application Views in HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin can be separated into three views accessible through the lower portion of the left navigation
pane:
●Device Management on page 84 for managing all device-related functions.
●Print Management on page 269 for managing print queues and drivers on remote servers and
workstations.
●Application Management on page 277 for managing application functionality such as users and roles,
security, and software updates.
Top Menu Bar
The features that are available from the top menu bar change depending on the application view, plug-ins that
are installed, and version of HP Web Jetadmin. The top menu bar can be used to quickly access product
functionality.
The following menus are available from the top menu bar:
●File menu—Use this menu to perform tasks such as adding new items (for example, roles, groups, and
templates), displaying a print preview or printing the device list that is currently displayed, and exiting
HP Web Jetadmin.
●View menu—Use this menu to perform tasks such as specifying the columns that are displayed in the
device lists, refreshing the device list, specifying which predened device lists are displayed in the Device
Management navigation pane, and specifying which columns are included in device lists to identify devices.
●Tools menu—Use this menu to perform tasks such as exporting device list information, managing Feature
Packs, discovering devices, and managing the global settings for HP Web Jetadmin.
●Help menu—Use this menu to perform tasks such as displaying the context help, accessing the
HP Web Jetadmin support page, and displaying information about HP Web Jetadmin (for example, version
installed, End-User License Agreement, copyright information, and installed licenses).
Preferences
Preferences for lists (in Device Lists on page 105 and Groups on page 121) lets you manage data displayed in
those lists. The top menu bar changes depending on the application view, presence of plug-ins, and the version
of HP Web Jetadmin.
Device Filters
You can select which device lists or lters are displayed in the left navigation pane.
32 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
To congure device lters, perform the following steps:
1. From the top menu bar, select View > Preferences > Device Filters. The Preferences page is displayed with
elds for device lters.
2. To display device lters in the left navigation pane under All Devices, move the lters from Available lters
to Selected lters.
To remove lters from the left navigation pane, select them in Selected lters and move them to Available
lters.
3. To save these settings and continue setting other options, click Apply. Then click the next option to
congure in the left menu bar. To save these settings and close this window, click OK.
Device Identication
Individual users can customize device tools to reect only the device information that is most important to them.
Space on device lists can be limited, so you should carefully choose the columns to be displayed. You can select
columns to identify the devices on the Select Devices page, on the device list pages in Device Lists (Device Lists
on page 105) and in Device Groups (Groups on page 121) and in the Status tab (Status Tab on page 85).
To congure how devices are identied, perform the following steps:
1. From the top menu bar, select View > Preferences > Device Identication. The Preferences page is
displayed with elds for device identication.
2. To display elds as columns on device lists throughout HP Web Jetadmin, move them from Available elds
to Selected elds.
To remove columns from device lists, move the elds from Selected Fields to Available Fields.
3. To save these settings and continue setting other options, click Apply. Then click the next option to
congure in the left menu bar. To save these settings and close this window, click OK.
Application Log
The application log records all of the transactions that occur. The application log includes the following
information:
●The transaction that occurred.
●The details of the transaction.
●How the transaction was triggered, such as a user or group policy.
●The user who triggered the transaction.
●The date and time the transaction was triggered. If a time is not specied, the transaction was just
triggered.
View the application log
1. Go to Tools > Application Log. The Application Log window opens.
2. To display a specic range of log entries, select the start date from the calendar in the Show log entries
from eld, select the end date from the calendar in the to eld, and then click the Apply Time Range button.
3. To sort the application log entries, click a column header.
ENWW Getting Around in HP Web Jetadmin 33
Refresh the log entries
▲Click the Refresh button.
Edit the application log settings
▲To congure how long the application log entries are saved, maximum number of log entries that are
saved, and whether the log entries are archived, click the Edit Log Settings button. The Options window
opens with the Application Log option selected. For more information, see Congure the Settings for the
Application Log on page 59.
Clear the application log
1. Click the Clear Log button.
2. On the Clear Application Log window, click the OK button.
Status Bar Features
The status bar spans the bottom of the page and includes information about:
●Activity indicator: indicates the status of HP Web Jetadmin. If HP Web Jetadmin is processing a background
activity (for example, refreshing a device or getting updated data about a device), it is displayed in this area
(the area includes the icon/menu and the status message). If more than one activity is underway, the user
can see the list of what is happening by clicking on the activity indicator. They can select an entry from the
list to see the status message associated with that activity. If a new activity starts it will change what is
shown (otherwise the selected activity message will continue to show until the activity completes).
If multiple activities are in progress, you can see the list of all of those activities by clicking on the Activity
indicator. You can select an entry from the list to see the status message associated with that activity.
●Device counts: when in device lists, this indicates the device you have highlighted and a count of all devices
in the displayed list.
●Layout: when in device lists, displays the type of layout being shown.
●Filter: when in device lists, states whether or not lters are in use.
●Map: identies the item on the map. This information is included in the activity/status message area and is
not a separate area on the status bar.
Page Layout in HP Web Jetadmin
Each page in HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
●A left navigation pane that lists all functions for each separate view (Left Navigation Pane on page 34).
●An area on the right that displays content or task modules providing access to related features or tasks
(Task Modules on page 35).
●A work space that changes depending on the view and the feature selected (Workspace on page 35).
You can resize columns for most lists by clicking and dragging the column headers.
34 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Left Navigation Pane
HP Web Jetadmin has a navigation pane on the left side of the user interface that displays a tree for the current
view (Device Management, Print Management, or Application Management). The tree provides an organized
display of the functionality of the view. The Device Management view contains most of the functionality of
HP Web Jetadmin and, therefore, has the most complex tree.
Many parts of the navigation tree have right-click functionality. An example of this is Discovery on page 134,
where you can select an item from the Discover devices right-click menu.
Other parts of the tree, such as Device Groups (Groups on page 121), have drag-and-drop functionality enabled.
Devices can be selected in device lists within the workspace and dragged into Device Groups. The selected
devices are added as group members. Many top-level nodes can invoke summary functionality in the workspace.
By selecting a top-level node, such as Alerts, the workspace in the right-hand portion of the interface contains a
summary of the Alerts features. The task modules that are specic to a feature (such as Alerts) are then
displayed in the work space. You can alter the feature summary by selecting or deselecting the task modules
that are important to you. (See Task Modules on page 35.)
Task Modules
Task modules are exible blocks of specic or targeted functionality designed to help a you perform a task or
obtain feature information. You can nd task modules in many of the workspace pages or in the docking area
(see Docking Task Modules and Maps on page 35). In either case, you can enable or disable task modules on a
per-user basis. You can hide or display task modules, and you can move them within the content area.
A Current Task task module is initially included in the task module docking for each section. For example, in
Device Groups, the Current Tasks - Device Groups task module lists all tasks within Groups.
Docking Task Modules and Maps
The docking feature in HP Web Jetadmin enables you to dock task modules and maps. You can:
●Specify a map or a user-specic collection of task modules in HP Web Jetadmin to be docked.
●View the collection of task modules regardless of the current focus of the application.
●Undock the maps or collection of task modules to maximize application space.
●Dock maps or task modules to any one of four sides of the work space.
●Hide maps or the collection of task modules beneath a tabbed control that enables access at any time.
●View a Current Tasks task module, which changes depending on the focus (context) of the application.
To display the Task Module docking area, click View > Task Modules > Task Module docking area. To display the
Map docking area, click View > Device Modules > Map. The Map menu item is available when you have selected a
group; the group does not have to have to a map associated with it. The Map module is visible if the Map menu
item has been selected to show the module and if the selected group has a map associated with it. Note here
that the map module may not be visible even if it is “displayed” because it is only visible when you are on a group
that has a map attached to it.
Workspace
The large area on the right side of the navigation tree is the HP Web Jetadmin workspace. This area changes
depending on the View and Navigation tree elements selected. In many cases, the focus of this area can be a
ENWW Getting Around in HP Web Jetadmin 35
summary of a feature space. You can obtain this summary by selecting any top-level element within the
navigation tree. Elements with the + symbol next to them are top-level elements that invoke a summary focus.
An exception to this is the All Devices list. When All Devices is selected in the left navigation pane, the device list
is displayed in the workspace. The workspace can also reect specic feature functionality. Whenever a sub-level
element (generally one that has no + symbol next to it) is selected, the workspace reects specic functionality.
For an example, see View Discovery History on page 165.
Wizards
Wizards provide a collection of steps in the required order for a user to accomplish a task successfully. Every
wizard is launched in a window separate from the main application by using many dierent controls including
right-click menu items and task modules. Many of the wizards in HP Web Jetadmin are launched from multiple
controls in dierent parts of the application. An example of a wizard is Create Group (Create a New Device Group
on page 126). After your start the wizard, you are prompted for the group type, the group name, and the group
members; after you identify that information, you can continue with the displayed steps until the task is
successfully completed. Conrmation and results pages provide both a safeguard and additional details about
the task.
Need Info Wizard
The Need Info wizard is displayed when you try to perform a device conguration but provide incorrect sensitive
conguration information.
Some conguration items require additional information, such as an existing password, before setting the new
conguration. If you fail to enter this required information correctly, the Need Info wizard is displayed, providing
an opportunity to enter the correct information. The wizard displays one or more devices on the left, and
prompts you for the required information on the right. You can only change the required information. All other
information remains the same as originally entered.
For each device and each set of required information, you must click either Set or Skip to complete the wizard.
You can select one or more devices in the list, enter the required information, and click Set. If you do not know
the existing passwords or required information, you can click Skip. If you click Skip, that conguration item will
not be set on that device.
When you click Finish, HP Web Jetadmin tries to complete the device conguration again. If additional
information is required, the Need Info wizard is displayed again.
Other Features
●Drag-and-drop: You can drag-and-drop various items (for example, devices) onto functionality (reports,
groups, and more) to save time and increase accuracy.
●Errors Encountered within HP Web Jetadmin: If the user interface has an error or cannot understand the
input, it displays “error on page”. You can hover the mouse over the error icon to see information about the
problem that exists on that page.
●Identication of the HP Web Jetadmin Server: The title bar on the HP Web Jetadmin client window always
indicates the name of the computer system where HP Web Jetadmin is installed.
●Determining the Software Version: By using Help > About, an HP Web Jetadmin logo page can be launched.
This contains the exact revision of the software in the xx.x.xxxxx format which represents
MajorApplicationVersion.MinorApplicationVersion.Buildnumber number.
36 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
●Client performance: The client application performs many tasks locally to reduce trac to the
HP Web Jetadmin server and improve performance on the client. HP Web Jetadmin leverages the client
application in the following ways to maximize performance:
–The client application is built on Microsoft .NET Framework technology. The client application does not
need to contact the HP Web Jetadmin server to complete user actions.
–The client application stores and manages all of the graphics.
–The HP Web Jetadmin server sends event notications to the client application only on an as-needed
basis.
–The client application performs most of the list operations instead of the HP Web Jetadmin server.
–Virtualization improves client performance because the HP Web Jetadmin server passes only the data
that is required for display to the local host.
–All of the clients share the update trac from a single data set on the HP Web Jetadmin server.
–Sometimes the settings for the network and HP Web Jetadmin can impact client performance.
HP Web Jetadmin uses an economical polling pattern to gather information from devices. If a feature
that causes HP Web Jetadmin to gather information from devices is added, the result might be less
than optimal.
●Running Multiple Clients: You can run more than one HP Web Jetadmin client application on a single host,
and you might also have multiple client sessions communicating simultaneously to dierent
HP Web Jetadmin server applications. On a single host, you may also run multiple client sessions that are
connected to the same HP Web Jetadmin server application.
●Smart Client le cache: The les for the Smart Client application and other Microsoft .NET Framework
applications are stored in this le cache. The Smart Client le cache has the following characteristics:
–Files are stored in the following directory:
C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Apps\2.0
–Administrative access on the local machine is not required to install and remove the les and
directories.
–Microsoft .NET Framework imposes a 200 MB limit for the Smart Client le cache.
–The Smart Client le cache contains the client debug control le and trace log. To manually clear these
les, use the following Smart Client cache tool. The les are reloaded during the next run.
Mage.exe –cc Del *.*
●Copy and Paste: In Device Lists , device information can be copied and pasted into other applications. Select
one or more rows, click Ctrl-C or right-click on a device and then select Copy. When pasted, this information
is formatted the same way a device list export would be: the rst row is column headers and the
subsequent rows are the selected devices.
In the Status tab, you can select elds from the device information section and click Ctrl-C.
HP Web Jetadmin Server
HP Web Jetadmin runs on a server host allowing remote access from HP Web Jetadmin host clients. The
following sections outline features and information about the HP Web Jetadmin server application.
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Server 37
HP Web Jetadmin and Distributed Environments
HP Web Jetadmin is scalable client/server software designed to support distributed environments.
HP Web Jetadmin can be installed on either a server or on a user’s desktop. It can be installed on multiple
servers and the user desktop can support multiple instances of the HP Web Jetadmin client application running
simultaneously.
The HP Web Jetadmin server performs many background tasks including discovery and conguration of devices,
rmware retrieval, and application security. HP Web Jetadmin has a robust client application that runs on
Microsoft Windows desktops. The client application displays device lists and groups and provides all the control
interfaces needed for device management. Due to changes in the allocation of tasks between the client and
server, HP Web Jetadmin oers signicant performance improvements over earlier releases of the software.
Characteristics of the HP Web Jetadmin server-based application include:
●Can run on remote server-host or locally on client-host.
●Supports multiple clients (up to 15 or more) accessing a single HP Web Jetadmin server.
●Supports multiple client sessions on a single desktop accessing separate HP Web Jetadmin servers.
●Provides secure downloads of client application through a Microsoft Smart Client connection that is
established through Internet Explorer.
●Communications through Microsoft .NET Remoting.
●Provides change event mechanism for the server to eciently update application details at clients.
●Retrieves information from www.hp.com facilitating updates to software, rmware, and more.
●Oers update service for obtaining application patches, plug-ins, and more from www.hp.com.
●Automatically updates clients whenever newer server-based client components exist.
●Ensures that device credentials and user/roles details are securely stored by the server.
●Provides HTML online help content to clients.
●Communicates to devices, both network and PC-connected, from the server.
●Communicates from the server to other hosts (email, print queue, Active Directory, SNMP traps, and more).
How the HP Web Jetadmin Service Works
HP Web Jetadmin provides a variety of features that support the client, application, and device communication.
HP Web Jetadmin runs on the server as a service. The HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJA Service) contains a
simple HTTP server that downloads the Smart Client application and provides the online Help. For more
information about the Smart Client application, see Deploy the Smart Client on page 15.
The HP Web Jetadmin service also handles the client-driven requests. HP Web Jetadmin communicates with
devices in ways that are both user-driven and automated as background activities. Background activities include
the following:
●Slow polling: Keeps network trac to a minimum even when multiple client sessions are running.
●User-scheduled activities: Includes discovery, rmware upgrades, and device conguration.
A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web
Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
The HP Web Jetadmin service has the following characteristics:
38 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
●The HP Web Jetadmin service runs in the background.
●The HP Web Jetadmin service supports the following communication interfaces:
–HTTP
–HTTPS
–TFTP
–SNMP
–Microsoft .NET Remoting
–.NET Listen
–TFTP send/receive
–SLP
●The client application is rst downloaded through a Smart Client connection that is launched through
Internet Explorer.
●Client communication works through .NET Remoting, which provides both authentication and encryption.
●HP Web Jetadmin communicates with devices and other hosts through user-driven requests or automated
background activities.
Overview of Directories and Files
Resources for HP Web Jetadmin are available in the following directories on the server:
●C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin
●C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10
●C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.10.HPWJA
This is the Microsoft SQL Server database instance for HP Web Jetadmin.
HP Web Jetadmin includes the following services:
●HP Web Jetadmin Core Service:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\bin\HPWJAService.exe
Display name: HPWJAService
●MSSQL$HPWJA (must be started before HPWJAService):
C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.10.HPWJA\MSSQL\Binn\sqlserver.exe
Display name: SQL Server (HPWJA)
The following table provides a list of the les that are typically found in the directories.
Directory Files
C:\Program Files ●Core application components, DLLs, and more
●HP Web Jetadmin service executable
●Files downloaded through Smart Client application install
●Universal Print Driver
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Server 39
Directory Files
●Certicates
●End User License Agreements (EULAs)
●Other documents such as the release notes and online user
documentation.
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc
\HPWebJetadmin
●All application settings (le-based)
●Trace control le for debug mode
●Trace le when debug mode (server) is enabled
The user settings and data that are stored in the HP Web Jetadmin database can be backed up and restored. For
more information, see the Back up, Restore, and Clone an HP Web Jetadmin Installation white paper. This white
paper is available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (in English). The user settings and data that are not
stored in the HP Web Jetadmin database are stored in les that are available in the following directory:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin
Microsoft SQL Database Overview
HP Web Jetadmin uses a Microsoft SQL Server database instance to store and manage the captured device data.
SQL Server Express Edition is embedded in HP Web Jetadmin. SQL Server Express Edition requires Microsoft .NET
Framework, has a 4 GB limitation on the size of the database, and can exist on a host with any other SQL Server
implementation.
If SQL Server Express Edition is not already installed, it is installed during the initial HP Web Jetadmin installation.
HP Web Jetadmin can coexist with other versions of SQL Server if they are installed on the same host.
During the installation, HP Web Jetadmin executes OSQL commands that install the database components,
including the HP Web Jetadmin database instance and data structures. There are no user-specied attributes for
any of the SQL elements during the installation.
HP Web Jetadmin creates a named Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition database instance during the
installation. The database instance is a service that runs in Windows Service Manager MMC and has a
dependency on the HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJA Service). You can also observe the HPWJA Service in
Windows Service Manager MMC. You must stop the HPWJA Service before you can stop the Microsoft SQL service.
HP Web Jetadmin manages the proprietary HP Web Jetadmin database. HP Web Jetadmin must be the only
entity that connects to the database. The database does not contain user-accessible details and cannot be used
as a source of raw content for other user processes.
The HP Web Jetadmin database contains the following data:
●Application logs (Application Log on page 33)
●User and role associations (User Security on page 278)
●User preferences (Users on page 283)
●Role permissions (Roles on page 280)
●Credentials (Add Credentials for Devices on page 119)
●Device groups (Groups on page 121)
●Tasks (throughout HP Web Jetadmin)
40 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
●Templates (throughout HP Web Jetadmin)
●Devices and supported device objects (Device Lists on page 105)
●Data collections (Data Collection on page 225)
Low-privilege Service Account
The HPWJA Service and Microsoft SQL Server (HPWJA) service run under the NT AUTHORITY\Network Service
account, which is a low-privilege account on the local system. Using this account for both of these services is a
critical security feature for HP Web Jetadmin. The NT AUTHORITY\Network Service account must have access to
the following locations.
Location Rights required
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10
(including all subdirectories and les in the directory structure)
Read & execute, List folder contents, and Read access
Registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\HP Inc.
\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService
(including all subkeys)
Full control and Read access
Registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Hewlett-Packard
\WJAUpdateService
(including all subkeys)
IMPORTANT: This registry key applies only to HP Web Jetadmin
10.2 (10.2.59093) through HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 (10.4.98174).
Previous versions do not use this registry key.
Full control and Read access
Registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\HP Inc.
\WJAUpdateService
(including all subkeys)
IMPORTANT: This registry key applies only to HP Web Jetadmin
10.4 SR1 and later. Previous versions do not use this registry key.
Full control and Read access
Microsoft SQL directory and le structure Full control and Read access
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService
(including all subdirectories and les in the directory structure)
Full control and Read access
Although you can run both of the HPWJA services under a dierent account, HP does not provide support to
assist with this conguration. Changing the Microsoft Windows account that the HPWJA Service or SQL Server
(HPWJA) service runs under might cause unexpected behavior in HP Web Jetadmin or cause both of these
services to not start. In this case, HP Web Jetadmin will not run at all.
CAUTION: If you run HP Web Jetadmin under any account other than the NT AUTHORITY\Network Service
account, you do so at your own risk.
To verify which account a service is running under, perform the following steps:
1. Use one of the following methods to open the Microsoft Windows Services window:
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Server 41
●Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Services
●Start > Run > Services.msc
2. Double-click the service.
3. On the Properties screen, click the Log On tab.
4. Verify that the NT AUTHORITY\Network Service account is listed in the This account eld.
HTTP Service
HP Web Jetadmin contains a small and embedded HTTP/HTTPS service. This service exists for three reasons:
●Smart Client application delivery (initial client access).
●Help content delivery (during client session).
●Device application le hosting (devices get jar le when directed by Device Management features).
A few key points about this HTTP service include:
●The integrated HTTP service is simple and only exists for the purpose of distributing les.
●The service contains no script execution interpreters or cgi-bin capability.
●The service does not allow le navigation.
●The service does not execute read/write calls to the HP Web Jetadmin database.
●The HTTP/HTTPS server is integrated into the HP Web Jetadmin service, which runs as a low-privilege
account on the local host.
●The HTTP service does not run in kernel mode.
The HTTP service can be congured to run default HTTPS and uses certicates that are obtained through a local
certicate-authority. When HTTPS is enabled, it enforces authentication between the users IE browser and the
local HTTP service. This provides tighter security for initial HP Web Jetadmin client launch than is provided by
HTTP. Some environments may require that all HTTP servers enforce and run default HTTPS.
Characteristics of the HTTPS service are:
●HTTPS can be enabled as part of a post-install procedure with HP Web Jetadmin security settings.
●HTTPS requires that the user obtain a certicate from a certicate authority.
●HTTPS can only be enabled through a client running on the local system hosting HP Web Jetadmin
software.
The default port for HTTP is 8000. The default port for HTTPS is 8443. If the HP Web Jetadmin installation
requires a dierent port on the HTTP server that is embedded in HP Web Jetadmin, change the HttpPort and
HttpsPort entries in the HP.Imaging.Wjp.Core.WebServer.cong.xml le. This le is available in the following
directory:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
If you change the port entries, you must restart HP Web Jetadmin.
To change the program link, go to Start > All Programs > HP Web Jetadmin 10. Right-click HP Web Jetadmin, and
then select Properties. Change the port number in the link variable to the new port number.
42 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Localization
HP Web Jetadmin is localized in several languages. All the available languages are automatically implemented
when you install HP Web Jetadmin. There are no additional steps required after the installation to enable the
language support.
The Windows Region and Language settings on the client used to access HP Web Jetadmin determine the
language in which the HP Web Jetadmin software and online Help are displayed. For more information about
specifying the Region and Language settings, see the Microsoft documentation for the version of Windows that
is running on the client.
If the Region and Language settings on the client specify a language that HP Web Jetadmin does not support,
the software and online Help are displayed in English.
HP Web Jetadmin might not be localized at every software release. If a software release is not localized, some of
the new content in the software and online Help for that release might be displayed in English while other
content is displayed in the language specied by the Region and Language settings.
When you use the Export feature, the exported content might contain information based on the Region and
Language settings specied on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed instead of the Region and
Language settings specied on the client.
Localized versions of the HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 Installation and Setup Guide and the HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 User
Guide are available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (click the ag icon on the bottom of the page, and
then select your country/region).
HP Web Jetadmin Network Trac and Behavior
The HP Web Jetadmin server application performs a number of actions including:
●Client event notications: When a user logs in to HP Web Jetadmin, a separate client application runs on the
local desktop host. The HP Web Jetadmin server uses a TCP connection to notify the client application
when changes occur. The client application then connects to the Microsoft .NET Remoting channel on the
HP Web Jetadmin server and requests the updated information. The HP Web Jetadmin server sends event
notications only when the following events occur:
–Updated data for the client application is available
–The HP Web Jetadmin server has not received any communication from the client application for a
predetermined period of time
●Supplies Alerts Polling: When devices exist in supplies groups, Supplies Alerts are enabled (Alerts
on page 188). The Alerts features aect both user alerts (by email or a log) and other supplies-related
reports. All of the alerts are based on user-selected threshold values. When the supply level value for a
device is not close to the specied supply threshold, HP Web Jetadmin polls that device more slowly, taking
up less network bandwidth. When the supply level value for a device is close to the specied supply
threshold, HP Web Jetadmin polls that device more often. This smart-polling mechanism ensures that the
supply level alert is delivered in a timely manner while limiting the polling that is done on the network.
Supplies Alerts polling is integrated with other kinds of polling within the HP Web Jetadmin system which
means that polling is performed only when stale information is detected.
●Slow Polling: HP Web Jetadmin uses a slow-polling mechanism that queries for device information. This
mechanism is user-congurable; faster settings put a larger load on the network (see documentation on
application settings and the training module on application maintenance). This slow-polling mechanism is
used for a variety of tasks including:
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Server 43
–Users are viewing lists and one or more displayed information attributes has become stale.
–Automatic Device Groups exist (Groups on page 121).
●Background Tasks: Many features in HP Web Jetadmin can be launched automatically or manually by a user
logged into a client application session. In either case, these can become background tasks that can be run
without a user being logged into a client application session. Background tasks are managed centrally by
HP Web Jetadmin software and the user can display them at any time through a task manager interface.
The Active Tasks task module is one way users can view running tasks.
HP Web Jetadmin Client
Users gain access to HP Web Jetadmin through a local Microsoft .NET Framework client application. The client
application runs on any supported client desktop. The rst time a client application accesses the
HP Web Jetadmin server, HP Web Jetadmin installs client les and launches a Windows client session. The client
session communicates with HP Web Jetadmin on the server. Client application les are left in the users’ Local
Settings directory and updated as needed. The server and client applications can run on the same host or on
dierent hosts.
ClickOnce Software Installation and Launch
The following events occur when you start the Smart Client installation and launch:
1. Client using Internet Explorer browses HTTP service (URL: http://server:8000).
●The server detects Microsoft .NET Framework on the browser client.
●Browser is redirected to HP Web Jetadmin.
●The browser passes the application to .NET Framework.
●.NET Framework veries the signature, reads the XML, and launches Smart Client.
2. Smart Client is launched.
●For the rst run, an Application Run dialog box is displayed to client.
●2MB les are downloaded through the HTTP service.
●UIExec.exe is launched on client host.
3. Microsoft .NET Framework Remoting begins and uses port 4088.
●For the rst run, 50 MB les downloaded.
●The HP logo page is visible.
●The client les are updated if a newer version is detected.
4. HP Web Jetadmin Client application is started.
●The client begins detecting events, executing calls, and more.
●The help content traverses the HTTP service.
●All other client communication uses .NET Framework Remoting.
44 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Notication that Microsoft .NET Framework Is Required
The HP Web Jetadmin server detects whether or not Microsoft .NET Framework is installed on the host. If .NET
Framework is not installed on the host, HP Web Jetadmin displays a message that provides instructions to
install .NET Framework or start HP Web Jetadmin.
Admin privileges are required to install .NET Framework. The Start HP Web Jetadmin link launches the client
after .NET Framework is installed.
HP Web Jetadmin Client's Sleep State
When the HP Web Jetadmin client is started and then goes into a sleep or power-save state, it may fail with an
Unexpected Error when the client system is brought back up to a “run” or “on” state. This is due to the
HP Web Jetadmin server host losing regular contact with the client host. The server host, once it loses regular
contact, will break the connection with the client session. Once the client system is out of the sleep state and
tries to contact the server, access is denied and the client stops causing an Unexpected Error. You need to then
restart the client.
Shared Conguration Options for all Views
The following sections describe the conguration options that are shared among all the views in
HP Web Jetadmin. To access these shared conguration options, go to Tools > Options > Shared.
General Shared Conguration Options
General settings are those settings that do not t into any other category for shared conguration options.
Congure the Database Settings
This option allows you to select the memory size for the database.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > General > Database.
2. Select the memory size from the drop-down list.
NOTE: This feature is not available when HP Web Jetadmin is using a remote database.
3. Select database query timeout from the drop-down list.
4. Click the Apply button.
Congure the Data Collection Option
The Data Collection feature collects data about your printers and implementation of HP Web Jetadmin and
anonymizes the data. HP Web Jetadmin uses an Internet connection to transmit the anonymized data to HP.
HP uses the anonymized data to improve products and services.
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 45
IMPORTANT: HP is committed to protecting your privacy and the integrity of your computer. You can enable and
disable this feature at any time. Your name, address, email address, and other sensitive data are not sent to HP.
To congure this feature, perform the following steps:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > General > Data Collection.
2. For more information about this feature, click the Data Collection and Use Statement and HP Privacy
Statement Online links.
3. To enable the collection of anonymized data, select the Enable data collection checkbox.
-or-
To disable the collection of anonymized data, clear the Enable data collection checkbox.
Shared Conguration Options for Network
Network settings impact how HP Web Jetadmin behaves on your network and how it performs for functions like
discovery.
Congure the SNMP Settings
HP Web Jetadmin uses the SNMP protocol to gather information from the devices. You can congure the SNMP
timeout value and SNMP retries. On some networks, SNMP timeouts and retries should be increased because of
low bandwidth or slow links. Also, decreasing SNMP timeouts and retries might improve discovery performance
on some networks.
Your network topology might cause slow response times; if so, increase the timeout value. Or, you might want to
set the number of retries to a higher number to protect against packet loss.
CAUTION: Increasing SNMP values can increase the time required to perform a discovery.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Network and select SNMP.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●SNMPv1 timeout value: Specify how long HP Web Jetadmin waits for a reply from a network query
that is sent to SNMPv1 devices. The default is 500 ms.
●SNMPv3 timeout value: Specify how long HP Web Jetadmin waits for a reply from a network query
that is sent to SNMPv3 devices. The default is 1000 ms.
●SNMP retries: Specify how many times HP Web Jetadmin retries an SNMP communication with
devices after a timeout occurs. The default is 3.
3. Click the Apply button.
Congure the HTTP Settings
HTTP options enable you to specify a web proxy server and port number from which a client can access the
proxy server. A security barrier is enabled on your internal network when accessing external web sites that are
required by HP Web Jetadmin.
46 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Network and select HTTP.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●HTTP proxy address settings: If your environment includes a proxy server, enter the HTTP proxy
address settings. Identify the address and the port number HP Web Jetadmin should use to
communicate through the proxy server.
●HTTP proxy user settings: Check Use HTTP proxy credentials to use HTTP proxy credentials and then
enter the user and password.
●Download settings: Check Allow download to allow downloads.
●HTTP timeout: Specify the number of seconds that an HTTP connection can be idle before a timeout
occurs. The default is 30. On networks that have a low bandwidth or slow links, you can increase the
HTTP timeout period. On some networks, decreasing the HTTP timeout period might improve the
performance of discoveries.
The HTTP timeout also impacts the ClickOnce Smart Client start-up.
3. Click the Apply button.
Congure the HTTPS Settings
The HP Web Jetadmin HTTP service runs without certicates. If you add a certicate, the HTTP server runs in
HTTPS mode, which means that secure sockets layer (SSL) communication is enforced. For more information
about running in HTTPS mode, see Implement SSL on page 13.
IMPORTANT: For new server certicates, you must install 2048-bit certicates. Any previously installed 1024-
bit server certicates continue to function correctly.
Congure the DNS Settings
By default, HP Web Jetadmin enables DNS lookups. You can turn them o if desired.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Network and select DNS.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Enable DNS lookups: Check this box to enable HP Web Jetadmin to perform DNS lookups.
3. Click the Apply button.
Shared Conguration Options for Email
Options in Email provide a way to congure settings to enable email communications from HP Web Jetadmin and
also to manage email addresses.
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 47
Congure the SMTP Gateway Settings
Server, user, and email settings must be congured for the SMTP gateway that HP Web Jetadmin uses to send
email messages to users. These email messages contain information about alert events, reports, exported
report data, exported device list data, and so on.
Congure the SMTP server settings
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Email > SMTP.
2. In the SMTP server settings section, enter the IP address or hostname, the port for the SMTP gateway, and
click the box next to Use SSL.
NOTE: To congure smtp.oce365.com server, enable Use SSL and enter port 587.
3. To verify that the SMTP server settings are valid, click the Verify button. If the SMTP server is valid, the IP
address or hostname is underlined.
4. If the SMTP server requires authentication, perform the following steps:
TIP: To test whether the SMTP server requires authentication, send a test email message without
specifying the SMTP user settings. If the test is successful, the SMTP user settings are not required.
a. In the SMTP user settings section, enter the user name, password, and domain that are required for
authentication on the SMTP server.
b. In the Default ‘from’ address box, enter the email address that is included in each email that
HP Web Jetadmin sends. The default is wja@hp.com.
5. Click the Apply button.
Send a test email message
Before you send a test email message, you must congure the SMTP gateway settings.
1. Click the Test button.
2. On the Test Email Settings window, enter the email address for the recipient of the test message in the ‘To’
address box.
3. Click the OK button.
Manage the Shared Email Addresses
This option allows email addresses to be added and maintained for use in Reports on page 215, Alerts
on page 188, and Device Lists on page 105.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Email > Addresses.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●New: Type the new email address and select the preferred language. Then click OK.
●Remove: Select an existing email address and click Remove. When prompted, conrm the action.
●Edit: Select an existing email address and click Edit. Make changes to the email address and click OK.
48 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Shared Conguration Options for Discovery
You can search for devices located within a range of IP addresses (multiple IP ranges can be designated).
Congure Large Subnets for IP Range Discoveries
You can choose to specify a large subnet range using the larger subnet address feature (Tools > Options >
Shared > Discovery > Methods > IP Range > General). Large networks are considered any network bigger than a
Class B network, which has up to 65,000 nodes.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Discovery > Methods > IP Range > General.
2. To search for subnets larger than Class B (65,000 nodes), click Allow large subnet discoveries.
3. Click the Apply button.
To dene the IP ranges, see Manage the IP Ranges for Discoveries on page 49.
Manage the IP Ranges for Discoveries
HP Web Jetadmin can search for devices located within a range of IP addresses (multiple IP ranges can be
designated) (IP Range Discovery on page 142).
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Discovery > Methods > IP Range > IP Ranges.
2. Choose the action to take:
●Select an IP range.
●Add: Add an IP range. Type the range in First address and Last address; then type a description (if
desired) in Description. Click Add.
Calculate range: To calculate a range, click Calculate range. The Calculate IP Range page is displayed:
–Subnet from my computer: Automatically use IP address ranges currently found on the local
subnet of your computer. You can add a description in Description if desired.
–Subnet from WJA server: Automatically use IP address ranges currently found on the subnet of
the HP Web Jetadmin server. You can add a description in Description if desired.
–Subnet from network address: Type a known IP address and subnet mask. You can add a
description in Description if desired.
●Edit: Make changes to IP ranges. Follow the steps in the bulleted item above for adding an IP range.
●Delete: Remove addresses from the list by highlighting the address and clicking Delete.
●Import: If desired, import a range list by clicking Import; then browse for the range list.
●Export: If desired, export a range list by clicking Export; then browse for the location where you want
to store the range list.
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 49
Manage the Address Lists for Specied Address Discoveries
The Specied Address option lets you manage lists of specied addresses for discoveries. The addresses and
groups managed through this option can be selected while launching or scheduling discoveries through the
Device Discovery wizard (see Discover Devices on page 160).
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Discovery > Methods > Specied Address.
2. Add a new address group:
a. Click New. The Add a specied address group page is displayed.
b. Type the name of the address group.
c. To add an IP address to the group, click Add.
d. The Add specied address dialog is displayed. Type the IP address or hostname.
e. Click Add. To continue adding IP addresses or hostnames, repeat these steps.
f. When all IP addresses or hostnames have been added, click Close.
g. Click OK two times.
3. Edit a specied address group name:
a. Highlight the group and click Edit. The Add specied address group page is displayed.
b. Change the group name.
c. Click OK two times.
4. Remove a specied address from a group:
a. Highlight the group and click Edit. The Add specied address group page is displayed.
b. Highlight the IP address or hostname and click Remove.
c. Click OK two times.
5. Delete a specied address group:
a. Highlight the group and click Delete.
b. Click OK.
Shared Conguration Options for Server Maintenance
Server Maintenance settings help you automatically maintain your server.
Congure the Schedule for Server Maintenance
Your server is automatically cleaned up daily, but you can specify the time of day that the cleanup should occur.
This is when the HP Web Jetadmin service performs routine clean-up tasks. These tasks are better performed
when the HP Web Jetadmin service is not busy doing other processor intensive tasks such as Discovery, Reports
Data Collection, exporting Device List data, and more. Select a time that you know the HP Web Jetadmin service
is not doing other processor intensive tasks.
50 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
The scheduled Server Maintenance task removes unneeded data from the HP Web Jetadmin database tables.
This is temporary data used in normal HP Web Jetadmin processes throughout the day. No user or device-
related information is removed from the system.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance and select Schedule.
2. Enter the time you want the server cleaned up every day.
3. Click the Apply button.
Manage the Discovery History
Use this option to congure the number of days that HP Web Jetadmin retains the discovery history, clear the
entries in the discovery history, archive the expired entries in the discovery history, and clear the discovery
history archive le.
Congure the retention period for the discovery history
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Discovery.
2. From the Retention time list, select the number of days that HP Web Jetadmin retains the discovery
history. The default is 90 days.
3. Click the Apply button.
Clear the discovery history
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Discovery.
2. Click the Clear History button.
Archive the expired entries in the discovery history
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Discovery.
2. Select the Archive expired entries to le checkbox.
3. Click the Apply button.
Clear the discovery history archive le
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Discovery.
2. Click the Clear Archive button.
Congure the Retention Period for the Conguration History
This option allows you to select the number of days to retain conguration history.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Conguration.
2. In the Retention time box, specify the number of days that the conguration history is retained. The default
is 30.
3. Click the Apply button.
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 51
To clear all previous conguration history, click Clear History.
Congure the Retention Period for the Alerts History
This option allows you to select the memory size for the database.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Alerts.
2. In the Retention time box, specify the number of days that the entries in the alerts log are retained. The
default is 30.
3. Click the Apply button.
To clear the log, select Clear History.
Manage the Report Data
As data is collected for reports, it is stored in tables within the HP Web Jetadmin database. You can specify how
long to retain data for reporting purposes and delete data that has been retained by HP Web Jetadmin for
reporting purposes. Data retention is set to one year beyond the initial collection date. You can change this value
to a maximum of ve years through this option.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance > Reports.
2. Select the type of data to delete:
●All data: Delete all data that has been collected to-date, as though no data collections had ever been
done.
●User data: You will be asked to identify the user and then conrm your request.
●Device data: Delete device data that has been collected to-date, as though no data collections had
ever been done.
3. Click Delete Data. Conrm the delete request by clicking Yes.
4. In the Retention time box, specify the number of years that the report data is retained. The default is 1.
5. Click the Apply button.
Shared Conguration Options for Credentials
HP Web Jetadmin can congure many devices simultaneously. This saves device administrators from having to
contact every device separately for the purpose of assigning conguration items like passwords and other
credentials. Many environments have password policies that make the device administrator have to recongure
security credentials periodically. The power of HP Web Jetadmin eet management lends itself to conguration
of many devices simultaneously.
52 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Credentials Store
The concept of a Credentials Store is not new to HP Web Jetadmin. Older versions of HP Web Jetadmin stored
credentials onto the devices as they were used and congured. This feature keeps HP Web Jetadmin users from
having to provide a credential every time a device is congured that requires one.
The Credentials Store is a portion of the HP Web Jetadmin database that securely encrypts and stores device
credentials when ever a correct credential value is authenticated at the device. These values are stored on a per
credential and per device basis.
Here is a list of HP device credentials used by HP Web Jetadmin:
●EWS Password: Blocks unauthorized access to the device-embedded HTTP interface. It is also synchronized
with the HP Jetdirect telnet password.
●File System Password: Protects the printer disk and other storage facilities from unauthorized access.
●SNMPv3 Credentials: Consists of user name, passphrase1, and passphrase2 which are all used when
SNMPv3 is enabled. This version of SNMP secures and authenticates communication between
management applications like HP Web Jetadmin and the device. This protocol is used when strong security
is required.
●SNMP Set Community Name: A grouping mechanism for SNMPv1/v2 used as a security mechanism by
many customers. Device conguration is not possible without knowledge of the Set name value. The Set
name value traverses the network in clear text and can be “snied” by eavesdroppers.
●SNMP Get Community Name: Sometimes used to prevent device discovery from other HP Web Jetadmin
installations. Devices only respond to Get packets that have the correct value. The Get name value
traverses the network in clear text and can be “snied” by eavesdroppers.
Two actions cause the value of any credential to be stored:
●Conguration: The credential becomes stored once it has been congured onto the device.
●Use: The credential value, when used successfully, becomes stored.
HP Web Jetadmin reuses stored credentials any time it encounters the requirement for them. When conguring
a device that has had a credential stored, you are not required to re-enter the credential into HP Web Jetadmin.
The application uses the credential in the background. In fact, you are not even required to know the credential
because HP Web Jetadmin is using stored values.
Credentials Delegation
With credentials stored in the Credentials Store, HP Web Jetadmin can apply them transparently any time the
need arises. This is known as credentials delegation. While conguring devices, you do not have to remember or
even know the credential to perform the conguration. You just need access to HP Web Jetadmin and device
conguration features. Characteristics of credentials delegation are:
●Only one or a few device administrators know the device credentials.
●Some HP Web Jetadmin users are allowed conguration access to the devices via Roles and User Security.
●Users can be added or removed from this delegation through Roles and User Security (User Security
on page 278).
●Other HP Web Jetadmin users can be restricted from device conguration.
●Knowledge about device passwords is required before you can change any password value.
Credentials delegation is used to allow conguration of devices without having to share the credential “secrets”
across a large distribution. Stas can control and congure devices while administrators control and congure
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 53
passwords. Any user with access to devices and conguration features has delegated access to the Credential
Store.
Credentials Needed
When HP Web Jetadmin, during an action such as device conguration, encounters a device with a credential
such as SNMP Set Community Name, it follows a specic sequence. Here is a simplied example showing how
HP Web Jetadmin attempts to resolve a credential:
●HP Web Jetadmin checks the Credential Store for a credential.
●If a credential exists, HP Web Jetadmin attempts the conguration using the credential value.
If a credential does not exist, HP Web Jetadmin checks Global Credentials.
●If the conguration is successful, the credential check is resolved and complete.
If it fails, HP Web Jetadmin checks Global Credentials.
During a user-attended conguration session, HP Web Jetadmin prompts for credentials. If the user does not
supply the credential or the session is not live, the device is agged as Credentials Required and listed in the
Credentials Required column that can be enabled in any device list (Columns for Device Lists on page 106). You
can right-click the device and add the needed credential to the system in order to resolve this state.
HP Jetdirect Device Password
HP Web Jetadmin enables device security by providing management over appropriate, device-based security
settings. The HP Jetdirect password that was used by HP Web Jetadmin in the past is a software security
solution and not a device-based security solution. That is, the password itself had to be recognized and
authenticated by earlier revisions of HP Web Jetadmin software. Other applications did not recognize this
password and did not force users to prove knowledge of the password.
As security features have become more sophisticated and device based security has improved, HP Web Jetadmin
developers have opted out of using the HP Jetdirect device password as a protective mechanism for device
authentication. Instead, HP recommends that you choose one of the following two recommendations providing
device security:
●SNMP Set Community Name: Devices will not allow an SNMP Set from any application without the Set
Community Name correctly embedded in the SNMP packet. If the Set name in the packet is “public” and the
Set name on the device is “George”, the device will not accept or acknowledge the packet. Set Community
Names traverse the network in clear text and, therefore, can be “snied” or viewed by eavesdroppers. In
most environments, security provided a Set Community Name may provide adequate security.
●SNMPv3: Devices congured via SNMPv3 oer signicant security benets. First, SNMPv3 congures a user
account and two pass-phrases onto the device that the user (or application) must authenticate. This blocks
unauthorized management of devices, and the account/pass-phrase details do not traverse the network in
clear text which makes it dicult for eavesdroppers to learn the “secrets”. Second, the communication
between the management application and the device is encrypted using the SNMP credentials so
information about the device is protected. SNMPv3 is recommended in security-sensitive environments.
Restricting Conguration by Device Group
Within the model of device credential delegation, restriction to specic device conguration can be further
dened in User Security using the Restriction type Groups (Restrict Roles to Device Groups on page 281).
54 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Consider the following layers of security:
●Access to device credential values: Credential Store/selected device administrators (Credentials Store
on page 52).
●Access to HP Web Jetadmin: Users and Roles (User Security on page 278).
●Access to device credentials store: Roles/Feature Permissions (Roles on page 280).
●Access to specic devices: Roles/Device Group Membership/Device Feature Permissions (Roles
on page 280).
Each layer uses HP Web Jetadmin security to protect against unauthorized access:
1. First, device passwords are protected by one administrator or a few select administrators.
2. Second, Users and Roles allow only authorized users to log onto HP Web Jetadmin.
3. Third, Roles and Feature Permissions allow only authorized users access to conguration access to all
devices.
4. Finally, Roles, Device Group Membership, and Device Feature Permissions allow authorized users to specic
devices based on device group membership and specied device conguration features.
All devices and conguration options outside of the Group Restriction Type are secured from unauthorized
access.
Clear the Credentials
Global credentials are credentials that HP Web Jetadmin uses for any device; they are an easy way for you to
enter common credentials up front. Global credentials can be set for SNMPv1 Get Community Name, SNMPv1
Set Community Name, SNMPv3 Credentials, and EWS Password. If these credentials have been set, and device
operations (for example, device conguration) require credentials, then the global credential will be tried. If the
operation succeeds for the devices with the global credential, that global credential will be stored with the
device. It still remains a global credential for other devices, but now that specic device has a working credential
stored with it.
For example: User “A” enters global credentials for SNMPv1 Get Community Name as “mine” and “yours”. User
“B” tries to interact with device “X”, which has a community name already set. HP Web Jetadmin rst tries global
credentials “yours” and “mine”; “yours” works. “Yours” is the stored as a regular credential for device “X”. The
next time any user tries to interact with device “X”, HP Web Jetadmin will use the regular credential for that
device (which is now “yours”) and will ignore any global credentials. However, if the regular credential “yours”
becomes out of date, this process starts over again.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > General.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Clear global credentials: Clears every temporary, global, device-specic credential.
●Clear all stored credentials: Clears every temporary, global, device-specic credential.
3. You must then conrm or cancel your request.
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 55
Manage the Global SNMPv1 Get Community Names
The SNMP Get Community Name object is congurable from within security settings. It can actually cause a
device to disappear. For example:
User A is running an instance of HP Web Jetadmin known as Web Jetadmin A. This user is managing a set of
devices that are also being managed by User B. User B is running another copy of HP Web Jetadmin known as
Web Jetadmin B. This B copy of HP Web Jetadmin is being used at the help desk.
User B tries to provide a measure of security by changing the default Get Community Name on the set of devices
from public to private using HP Web Jetadmin. User A opens HP Web Jetadmin and notices that all the
devices have become non-responsive and show only a device communication error. Quick Device
Discovery does not help. Upon checking the printer itself, User A nds it to be powered on. User A can also reach
the printer web server interface through a browser.
CAUTION: Changing the Get Community Name can cause devices to become unresponsive to management
applications such as HP Web Jetadmin. The SNMP protocol will no longer respond to public queries and other
management applications on the network will not be able to communicate with these devices.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > SNMPv1 Get Community
Name.
2. To add a community name, click Add and type the community name. Enter an associated (or easier) name
in Remember credential as and click OK.
3. To remove a Get Community Name, click Remove.
Manage the Global SNMPv1 Set Community Names
The SNMP Set Community Name is a grouping mechanism for SNMPv1/v2 that has been adopted as a security
mechanism by many customers. Device conguration is not possible without knowledge of the Set name value.
The Set name value traverses the network in clear text and can be easily detected by eavesdroppers.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > SNMPv1 Set Community
Name.
2. To add a community name, click Add and type the community name. Enter an associated (or easier) name
in Remember credential as and click OK.
3. To remove a Set Community Name, click Remove.
Manage the Global SNMPv3 Credentials
SNMPv3 secures and authenticates communication between management applications, such as
HP Web Jetadmin, and devices. SNMPv3 is used when strong security is a requirement.
SNMPv3 credentials consist of a user name, authentication protocol, authentication passphrase, private protocol,
and privacy passphrase. HP Web Jetadmin uses these credentials when SNMPv3 is enabled.
IMPORTANT: SNMPv3 does not support the No Authentication Protocol and No Privacy Protocol modes.
56 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin can discover devices that have SNMPv3 fully enabled. However, you must congure
HP Web Jetadmin to discover SNMPv3-enabled devices. For more information, see Congure the General
Settings for Device Discoveries on page 64.
To discover SNMPv3-enabled devices, HP Web Jetadmin requires the SNMPv3 credentials for the devices.
HP Web Jetadmin detects SNMPv3 credentials for devices in the following ways:
●SNMPv3 is enabled in HP Web Jetadmin and SNMPv3 credentials are congured on the devices. In this case,
HP Web Jetadmin stores the credentials in its credentials store, and then uses these credentials when
communicating with the devices.
●SNMPv3 credentials are added to the HP Web Jetadmin global credentials store and these global
credentials match the credentials on the devices. In this case, when HP Web Jetadmin communicates with
an SNMPv3-enabled device, it tries the values in the global credentials store. If the global credential values
are valid and HP Web Jetadmin can communicate with the device, the credential values are stored on each
device.
Devices that HP Web Jetadmin discovers through SNMPv1 and have SNMPv3 enabled through some other
method, such as the HP Embedded Web Server or another instance of HP Web Jetadmin, have a Device
Communication Error status when HP Web Jetadmin attempts to re-establish communication. To reset these
devices to SNMPv3-enabled, use the Refresh Selection command in the device list.
Add SNMPv3 credentials
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > SNMPv3.
2. Click the Add button.
3. In the User name box, enter the user name.
4. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the authentication protocol must be MD5 or SHA-1. HP Web Jetadmin cannot
discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
5. In the Authenticated passphrase and Conrm authenticated passphrase boxes, enter the authenticated
passphrase (minimum of 8 characters).
For third-party devices, the authentication passphrase must be in the format of a passphrase with a
minimum length of 8 characters. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover third-party devices that have an
authentication passphrase that is in the format of a key or that is less than 8 characters.
6. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the privacy protocol must be DES or AES-128. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover
third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
7. In the Private passphrase and Conrm private passphrase boxes, enter the private passphrase (minimum
of 8 characters).
8. For HP devices, select the HP Device checkbox. HP Web Jetadmin uses Jetdirect for the context name.
-or-
For third-party devices, clear the HP Device checkbox, and then enter a context name in the box next to the
HP Device checkbox. The context name can be left blank.
9. In the Remember credential as box, enter a name for this credential that is easy to remember.
10. Click the OK button.
ENWW Shared Conguration Options for all Views 57
Delete SNMPv3 credentials
1. Go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > SNMPv3.
2. Select the credential from the list, and then click the Remove button.
3. On the Conrm Delete window, click the Yes button.
Manage the Global EWS Passwords
The EWS password blocks unauthorized access to the device-embedded HTTP interface. Also, it is synchronized
with the HP Jetdirect telnet password.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > EWS.
2. To add an EWS password, click Add and type the username and password. Then enter an associated (or
easier) name in Remember credential as and click OK.
NOTE: Enter either the EWS credentials or the Domain credentials. Enter Domain credentials as:
FullyQualifiedDomainName\Username
3. To remove an EWS password, click Remove.
Manage the Global File System Passwords
The File system password protects the printer disk and other storage facilities from unauthorized access.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > File System.
2. To add a le system password, click Add and type the password. Then enter an associated (or easier) name
in Remember password as and click OK.
3. To remove a le system password, click Remove.
Manage the Domain Credentials
This option allows you to enter domain credentials when needed.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Domain Browsing.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Add Domain: Add a domain. The Add Domain dialog is displayed. Type the domain or browse for it. If
you browse, you might be prompted for credentials.
●Set Credential: Enter the username and password. In the Stored column, set credentials for any
domain with Yes.
●Remove: Delete a domain; select a domain listed and click Remove.
●Test: Test the domain. Credentials might be required.
58 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Application Management Conguration Options
The following sections describe the conguration options for functional areas in the Application Management
view. To access these conguration options, go to Tools > Options > Application Management.
Congure the Settings for the Application Log
Use this option to specify how long the application log entries are saved, the maximum number of log entries
that are saved, and whether older log entries are archived. For more information about viewing the application
log, see Application Log on page 33.
Congure the log settings
1. Go to Tools > Options > Application Management > Application Log.
2. From the Save log entries for list, select the number of days that the log entries are saved. The default is
60.
3. In the Maximum number of entries box, specify the maximum number of entries that are saved in the log.
Any log entries that exceed this number are stored in the archive le. The default is 20,000.
4. Click the Apply button.
Clear the log entries
1. Click the Clear Log button.
2. On the Clear Application Log window, click the OK button.
Archive the log entries
Log le entries that are older than the limit specied for the Save log entries for setting can be archived to a le.
The archive log le is written to the HP Web Jetadmin server in the location displayed in the Log archive section.
The operating system on the server determines this location.
TIP: The NetworkService folder is typically a hidden system folder in Microsoft operating systems. For
instructions on how to make this folder visible, see the Microsoft Windows documentation for the operating
system on the HP Web Jetadmin server.
1. Select the Archive expired entries to le check box.
2. Click the Apply button.
Clear the archived log entries
CAUTION: The log archive le will continue to grow indenitely. You must manage the size of this le.
▲Click the Clear Archive button.
Restore the Default Roles
You can use this option to restore the default user roles. For more information, see Roles on page 280.
To restore the default roles, perform the following steps:
ENWW Application Management Conguration Options 59
1. Go to Tools > Options > Application Management > User Security.
2. Click the Restore button.
Device Management Conguration Options
The following sections describe the conguration options for functional areas in the Device Management view. To
access these conguration options, go to Tools > Options > Device Management.
Device Polling Conguration Options
There are several conguration options that can be set to aect how device polling is performed in
HP Web Jetadmin.
Congure the Background Polling Options
Whenever you access a device list in HP Web Jetadmin, the devices on the network are polled. You can determine
how many devices and how often devices are polled by setting the rate on the Background polling page. You can
reduce network trac by setting a polling rate appropriate for your own environment.
HP Web Jetadmin performs a slow-poll when users access device lists. Slow polling means that
HP Web Jetadmin queries only a certain number of devices every X seconds and only for specied columns. The
columns polled are based on the union of all columns in the layouts currently displayed on Device List pages on
all currently connected clients. This polling rate can be changed through Tools > Options > Device Management >
Device Polling > Device List. List performance can be improved by changing the polling rate; network trac will
increase.
TIP: Another way to refresh the list more quickly is to highlight any or all devices where fast data is desired.
Selected devices in the currently visible portion of the device list are always polled at a faster rate than non-
selected devices.
Polling always occurs across all devices at the specied rate regardless of whether or not anyone is accessing a
device list. Accessing a device list only aects the columns which are polled for when the polling does occur.
Selecting devices within the visible portion of the list causes those devices to be polled for at a higher rate.
Polling is also aected by thresholds that specify how long the value for a specic column is considered valid.
These thresholds are predened in HP Web Jetadmin. You cannot change the predened thresholds. Before
HP Web Jetadmin polls a device for column values, it performs the following steps:
1. If HP Web Jetadmin does not have a value for a column, it polls the device. If HP Web Jetadmin can obtain a
value from the device, it displays the value in the device lists.
2. If HP Web Jetadmin cannot obtain a value from the device, it checks the age of the value it has. If the age of
the value is within the predened threshold for the column, HP Web Jetadmin considers the value valid.
3. If the age of the value exceeds the predened threshold for the column, HP Web Jetadmin polls the device
to obtain the current value. If HP Web Jetadmin can obtain a value from the device, it displays the value in
the device lists. If HP Web Jetadmin cannot obtain a value from the device, it displays <Unknown> in the
device lists.
The predened thresholds are based on the stability of the value for each column. For example, the Severity
column is considered out-of-date after 15 seconds because the status of devices changes frequently. The
60 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
System Contact column is considered out-of-date after 24 hours because the contact does not change
frequently. The Model column is never considered out-of-date because the device model never changes.
If you use HP Web Jetadmin to update the System Contact value for a device, the 24-hour polling threshold is
not valid. HP Web Jetadmin immediately updates the System Contact column in the device lists. If you use
another mechanism, such as HP Embedded Web Server, to change the System Contact value, HP Web Jetadmin
does not display the updated value in the device lists for 24 hours. However, you can refresh the information in
the device lists at any time to reect the current values for the devices. For instructions, see Refresh device
selection in Top Menu Bar on page 32.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Polling > Background
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Polling interval: Specify the number of seconds during which HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests
to the network. The default is 2.
●Time between polling intervals: Specify the number of seconds that HP Web Jetadmin remains idle
between polling intervals. The default is 10.
●Number of devices per poll: Specify the number of devices that HP Web Jetadmin can query
concurrently. The default is 2.
HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests for the specied number of devices to the network in a poll
burst and waits for the responses. When HP Web Jetadmin receives the response packets, it sends
another burst of device requests. HP Web Jetadmin continues to send device requests until the
specied polling interval expires, and then waits until the specied number of devices per poll is
satised before sending new device requests.
3. Click the Apply button.
To reset all of the values to the defaults, click the Reset to Default Values button.
Congure the Polling Options for Device Lists
Device List polling polls devices that are in view across all clients. The information polled from the device varies
based on what columns the clients are viewing in the Device List.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Polling > Device List.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Polling interval: Specify the number of seconds during which HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests
to the network. The default is 5.
●Time between polling intervals: Specify the number of seconds that HP Web Jetadmin remains idle
between polling intervals. The default is 7.
●Number of devices per poll: Specify the number of devices that HP Web Jetadmin can query
concurrently. The default is 2.
HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests for the specied number of devices to the network in a poll
burst and waits for the responses. When HP Web Jetadmin receives the response packets, it sends
another burst of device requests. HP Web Jetadmin continues to send device requests until the
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 61
specied polling interval expires, and then waits until the specied number of devices per poll is
satised before sending new device requests.
3. Click the Apply button.
To reset all of the values to the defaults, click the Reset to Default Values button.
Congure the Polling Options for Device Tabs
Device Tab polling polls device information needed to drive the device-related information on the selected device
tabs across all clients.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Polling > Device Tabs.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Polling interval: Specify the number of seconds during which HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests
to the network. The default is 5.
●Time between polling intervals: Specify the number of seconds that HP Web Jetadmin remains idle
between polling intervals. The default is 2.
●Number of devices per poll: Specify the number of devices that HP Web Jetadmin can query
concurrently. The default is 3.
HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests for the specied number of devices to the network in a poll
burst and waits for the responses. When HP Web Jetadmin receives the response packets, it sends
another burst of device requests. HP Web Jetadmin continues to send device requests until the
specied polling interval expires, and then waits until the specied number of devices per poll is
satised before sending new device requests.
3. Click the Apply button.
To reset all of the values to the defaults, click the Reset to Default Values button.
Congure the Polling Options for Device Alerts and Supplies Alerts
You can dene how often devices should be checked to see if they warrant alerts. Frequent polling can increase
network trac; infrequent polling might cause some device alerts to go unnoticed and, therefore, unattended.
You can also specify how long an alert event stays in the alert history log, or you can clear the alerts log at any
time.
You can congure static polling rates for supplies alerts subscriptions. This feature helps prevent missing alerts
by keeping supplies alerts subscriptions in a static polling interval. If you enable this feature, supplies alerts
subscriptions that exceed the specied threshold are placed in static polling. These supplies alerts subscriptions
remain in static polling until you disable static polling or replenish the supplies. Supplies alerts subscriptions
move to the static poller on the next polling cycle of the poller the subscription is in. If you disable this feature,
qualifying supplies alerts subscriptions move from the static poller to the most appropriate poller, which is
determined by the rate of use for the supply, on the next polling cycle of the poller the subscription is in.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Polling > Alerts.
2. To congure polling for devices, specify the following settings:
62 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
●Maximum communication interval: Specify the number of hours during which no device
communication occurs. The default is 24.
●Critical alert interval: Specify how often devices are polled for critical alerts. The default is 5 minutes.
3. To congure static polling for supplies alerts, specify the following settings:
●Enable static polling: Select this checkbox to enable static polling for supplies alerts.
●Polling interval: Specify the polling interval in hours.
●Apply at % above alert threshold: Specify the percentage above the alert threshold the supply level
must reach before the supplies alerts subscription is placed in static polling.
●Number of devices per poll: Specify the number of devices HP Web Jetadmin polls in each polling
burst.
4. Click the Apply button.
Congure the Polling Options for Supplies
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Polling > Supplies.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Polling interval: Specify the number of seconds during which HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests
to the network. The default is 5.
●Time between polling intervals: Specify the number of seconds that HP Web Jetadmin remains idle
between polling intervals. The default is 10.
●Number of devices per poll: Specify the number of devices that HP Web Jetadmin can query
concurrently. The default is 2.
HP Web Jetadmin sends device requests for the specied number of devices to the network in a poll
burst and waits for the responses. When HP Web Jetadmin receives the response packets, it sends
another burst of device requests. HP Web Jetadmin continues to send device requests until the
specied polling interval expires, and then waits until the specied number of devices per poll is
satised before sending new device requests.
3. Click the Apply button.
To reset all of the values to the defaults, click the Reset to Default Values button.
Devices Conguration Options
Conguration options for Devices help determine which devices will be displayed or not displayed in Device Lists.
Manage Hidden Devices
If communication with a device has not occurred within a specied number of days, you can congure
HP Web Jetadmin to automatically list the device on the Hidden Devices list so that it will not show up in other
Device lists throughout the product. The number of days specied is counted starting at midnight after the policy
has been set and the device has not been communicated with.
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 63
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Devices > Hidden Devices.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Automatically hide devices in communication error after: Specify how many days should pass with a
device before that device should be hidden.
●Hidden devices: To show a device in the device lists even though it has not been communicated with,
highlight it in the Hidden devices list and click Show.
3. Click the Apply button.
Manage Blocked Devices
The Blocked Devices list contains device addresses for which device discoveries are blocked. You can add devices
to this list in one of two ways:
●Devices can be deleted from the All Device list with the “Delete and Block” option; the devices are then
added to the Blocked Devices list.
●Devices can be added to (or removed from) the Blocked Devices list in Tools > Options > Device
Management > Devices > Blocked Devices (see steps below).
If a device is on the Blocked Devices list, HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover it. If you add a device to this list
through Tools > Options > Device Management > Devices > Blocked Devices, the device will still be included on
the All Devices list. Devices can be identied by IP Address or Hostname. Hostname is the preferred method,
since IP Addresses on devices can change.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Devices > Blocked Devices.
2. To add a device to the Blocked Devices list so that it will not be found during a discovery, click Add.
3. To remove a device from the Blocked Devices list so that it can be found during a discovery, click Remove.
Device Discovery Conguration Options
Global settings for discovery can be set here.
Congure the General Settings for Device Discoveries
General discovery settings include SLP listen, SNMPv3, and WS-Discovery listen.
IMPORTANT: HP Jetdirect rmware version x.06.00 or greater is required to support the Multicast and SLP
discovery method.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Discovery > General.
2. Congure the desired settings:
64 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
●SLP listen: Select this option to use passive discovery on port 427 for SLP signals propagated at
HP Jetdirect power-on. The default for this eld is o or unselected.
●SNMPv3: Select this option to enable SNMPv3 credential entry elds in HP Web Jetadmin discovery
settings. When these credentials are added for discovery settings or global credentials,
HP Web Jetadmin attempts SNMPv3 queries on devices. The default for this eld is o or unselected.
CAUTION: SNMPv3 discoveries can be slow if not properly set. These should be targeted only at
parts of the network that are known to have SNMPv3-enabled devices. Also, SNMPv3 devices require
that SNMPv3 credentials are entered.
●WS-Discovery listen: Select this option to use passive discovery on port 3702 for WS-Discovery
signals propagated at HP Jetdirect power-on. The default for this eld is o or unselected.
3. Click the Apply button.
Device Filters Conguration Options
Conguration options for Device Filters help determine which devices will be displayed or not displayed in Device
Lists.
Congure the Number of Days that Devices are Considered New
You can specify how long a device is considered new in HP Web Jetadmin. “New” devices are displayed on the
New (Time Period) device list.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Filters > New Devices Filter.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Time period for device to remain “New”: Specify the number of days that HP Web Jetadmin considers
devices new. The default is 14.
3. Click the Apply button.
Device Tabs Conguration Options
Conguration options for Device Tabs help determine how many devices will be displayed at one time in multiple
device view.
Congure the General Options for Device Tabs
For multiple device view, this conguration option determines the maximum number of devices per page for
which status should be shown.
Use the following steps:
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 65
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Tabs > General.
2. In the Devices to allow in multi-view box, specify the maximum number of devices that are displayed in the
tabs when multiple devices are selected in a device list. The default is 10.
3. Click the Apply button.
Conguration Options for Fleet Congurations
Global settings can be set here for eet congurations.
Congure the Retry Settings for Device Conguration Schedules
Device congurations can be run on an immediate or scheduled basis. The settings on this page apply to
scheduled congurations. When a device fails to respond to a scheduled conguration operation, it is added to a
list of devices to which the conguration operation will be retried. The settings determine how often the
conguration operation will be retried, and how many times it will be retried before the conguration operation
gives up and marks the conguration as having failed overall. If the device responds successfully during a retry
attempt, it is removed from the list. If all devices are removed from the list before the number of retries is
exhausted, the conguration operation is deemed successful.
If the device cannot be congured, an entry noting the failed operation is logged in the Application Log and in the
Conguration History.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > General.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Number of conguration retries: Select the number of times that HP Web Jetadmin tries to congure
a device before stopping. The default is 0.
●Hours between conguration retries: Specify the number of hours that HP Web Jetadmin waits before
trying to congure a device again. The default is 8.
3. Click the Apply button.
Restore the Default Conguration Templates
You can choose to restore default templates with this setting.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > Templates.
2. Congure the desired settings:
●Restore default templates: Restores all templates shipped with HP Web Jetadmin.
The changes are applied automatically.
66 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Manage the User-dened Device Conguration Settings
You can create custom device conguration settings that provide additional information about a device that is
not available by using the device's existing conguration options. You can then apply the user-dened settings to
devices. The following are examples of user-dened settings:
●Warranty expiration dates
●Lease start and stop dates
●Service maintenance dates
●Location of the device
User-dened settings are available on the Cong tab, device conguration wizards, device list columns, and
reports.
You can export user-dened settings from one HP Web Jetadmin installation to an XML le. Then you can import
the XML le into a dierent HP Web Jetadmin installation.
Changes that are made to the user-dened settings might not take eect for all of the HP Web Jetadmin
features until HP Web Jetadmin is restarted.
CAUTION: Actions that are performed on the User Dened window are eective immediately and cannot be
canceled.
Create user-dened settings
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > User Dened.
2. Click the New button.
3. On the Create User Dened Setting window, enter a name for the user-dened setting in the Setting name
box.
4. To disable the user-dened setting when conguring multiple devices, select the Hide when conguring
multiple devices checkbox.
IMPORTANT: Select this checkbox if the value of the user-dened setting must be unique for each device,
such as an identication number. This user-dened setting cannot be used to congure multiple devices or
in device conguration templates.
-or-
To allow the user-dened setting to be used when conguring multiple devices, clear the Hide when
conguring multiple devices checkbox.
5. Click the OK button.
Edit user-dened settings
Changing the name of a user-dened setting does not aect any current or historical data that was saved for
that setting. The new name should still reect the purpose of the setting.
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > User Dened.
2. Select the user-dened setting from the list, and then click the Edit button.
3. On the Edit User Dened Setting window, enter a new name for the user-dened setting in the Setting
name box.
4. To disable the user-dened setting when conguring multiple devices, select the Hide when conguring
multiple devices checkbox.
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 67
IMPORTANT: Select this checkbox if the value of the user-dened setting must be unique for each device,
such as an identication number. This user-dened setting cannot be used to congure multiple devices or
in device conguration templates.
-or-
To allow the user-dened setting to be used when conguring multiple devices, clear the Hide when
conguring multiple devices checkbox.
5. Click the OK button.
6. On the message window, click the OK button.
Delete user-dened settings
After a user-dened setting is deleted, all of the current and historical data that was saved for the setting is lost
and the user-dened setting is removed from any templates and scheduled tasks.
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > User Dened.
2. Select the user-dened settings from the list, and then click the Delete button.
3. On the Delete User Dened Setting window, verify that the correct user-dened settings are listed, and
then click the OK button.
4. On the message window, click the OK button.
Import user-dened settings
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > User Dened.
2. Click the Import button. The Import User-Dened Settings wizard starts.
3. On the Select le page, click the Browse button.
4. On the Open window, navigate to and select the le, and then click the Open button.
5. To replace duplicate user-dened settings with the user-dened settings in the XML le, select the
Overwrite duplicate user-dened settings checkbox.
IMPORTANT: If a user-dened setting that already exists in HP Web Jetadmin is overwritten by a user-
dened setting in the XML le that has the same name, note the following issues:
●Templates and user-dened data for the devices lose the values for the overwritten user-dened
settings.
●To display the overwritten user-dened settings correctly, the HP Web Jetadmin service must be
restarted.
●The columns for the overwritten user-dened settings in HP Web Jetadmin must be reselected.
-or-
To prevent duplicate user-dened settings from being imported into HP Web Jetadmin, clear the Overwrite
duplicate user-dened settings checkbox.
6. Click the Next button.
7. On the Conrm page, verify that the correct XML le is selected, and then click the Import button.
8. On the Results page, click the Done button.
68 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Export user-dened settings
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > User Dened.
2. Select the user-dened settings from the list.
-or-
Select the Select all checkbox.
3. Click the Export button. The Export User-Dened Settings wizard starts.
4. On the Conrm page, verify that the correct user-dened settings are listed, and then click the Export
button.
5. On the Save As window, navigate to and select the directory where you want to save the XML le.
6. In the File name box, enter a name for the XML le, and then click the Save button.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Manage the PJL Repository
You can send a le or test le with PJL conguration options to one or more printers. You can choose to have the
le sent immediately or you can schedule it.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > PJL Repository. The
PJL File Repository page is displayed showing current le names and descriptions.
2. To add a le to the repository, click Add File. The Add File dialog is displayed.
a. Type a unique le name or browse to the le.
b. Type a description and then click OK.
3. To delete a le:
a. Select the les from the list, and then click the Remove button.
b. On the Remove Files window, click the OK button.
Manage the Certicate Repository
Printers might need certicates to access some external web sites. You can store certicates in the certicate
repository, and then install those certicates on one or more printers. You can view detailed information for a
certicate, delete certicates, and include certicates in device conguration templates.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > Certicate
Repository. The Certicate Repository page is displayed showing the certicates stored in the repository.
2. To import a certicate, click Import. The Open dialog is displayed. Browse to the certicate le, and then
click Open.
3. To delete a certicate, select the certicate, and then click Delete. A conrmation message is displayed.
Click OK.
4. To view a certicate, select the certicate, and then click View Details.
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 69
Manage the OXPd Device Function Repository
A device function le denes the name and functionality of a button that can be displayed on a printer control
panel. You can import device function les into the device function repository, and then use the device function
les to congure one or more printers. You can edit device function les, delete device function les, and include
device function les in device conguration templates.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Device
Functions. The OXPd Device Function Repository page is displayed showing the device function les stored
in the repository.
2. To import a device function le, click Import. The Open dialog is displayed. Browse to the device function
le, and then click Open.
3. To delete a device function le, select the le, and then click Delete. A conrmation message is displayed.
Click OK.
4. To edit a device function le, select the le, and then click Edit. Change the settings, and then click OK.
Manage the OXPd Accessory Record Repository
An accessory record le denes how third-party applications access device accessories. You can import
accessory record les into the accessory record repository, and then use the accessory record les to congure
one or more printers. You can edit accessory record les, delete accessory record les, and include accessory
record les in device conguration templates.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Accessory
Records. The OXPd Accessory Record Repository page is displayed showing the accessory record les
stored in the repository.
2. To import an accessory record le, click Import. The Open dialog is displayed. Browse to the accessory
record le, and then click Open.
3. To delete an accessory record le, select the le, and then click Delete. A conrmation message is
displayed. Click OK.
4. To edit an accessory record le, select the le, and then click Edit. Change the settings, and then click OK.
For a shared accessory record le, you can only edit the name of the accessory.
Manage the OXPd Authentication Agent Repository
When a user signs in on an OXPd-enabled device to access secure features, the device initiates an authentication
process by invoking a proxy from a third-party solution. The proxy, which is called an OXPd authentication agent,
contacts the authentication server and authenticates the user before the user is allowed to gain access to the
secure features. OXPd authentication agent les contain the information that devices require to contact
authentication servers and authenticate users.
70 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Import OXPd authentication agent les
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Authentication Agents.
2. Click the Import button.
3. On the Open window, navigate to and select the OXPd authentication agent les, and then click the Open
button.
Edit OXPd authentication agent les
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Authentication Agents.
2. Select the OXPd authentication agent le from the list, and then click the Edit button.
3. In the Name box, enter the unlocalized name for the OXPd authentication agent (maximum of 100
characters).
4. In the Web application section, perform the following steps:
a. In the URI box, enter the URI of the OXPd authentication server (maximum of 256 characters). The URI
is case-sensitive and must begin with one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
b. If network credentials are required to access the OXPd authentication server, select the Use
credentials checkbox. Enter the network credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters),
Password (maximum of 128 characters), and Conrm password boxes.
c. In the Connection timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to
establish a connection to the OXPd authentication server before a timeout occurs.
d. In the Response timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to receive a
response from the OXPd authentication server before a timeout occurs.
e. To enable the device to contact the OXPd authentication server before launching the Web browser,
select the Enable pre-prompt check checkbox.
5. In the Prompt info section, perform the following steps:
a. In the Post-query format string box, enter the string that the device uses to construct the body of the
initial HTTP POST request (maximum of 1,024 characters). The device sends this request to the
specied URI. The string can contain extended characters.
b. In the URI box, enter the URI that the device contacts to validate and perform the functionality from
the third-party solution (maximum of 256 characters). The URI is case-sensitive and must begin with
one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 71
NOTE: OXPd does not allow URIs that contain embedded authentication credentials, such as ftp://
username:password@domain/path, by explicitly prohibiting the use of the at (@) symbol in the
domain name.
c. If credentials are required to access the URI, select the Use pre-prompt credentials checkbox. Enter
the credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters), Password (maximum of 128
characters), and Conrm password boxes.
6. To notify the OXPd authentication server when users sign out, select the Enable signout notication
checkbox.
7. In the Signout notication max retries box, enter the maximum number of times that the device can retry
sending a notication to the OXPd authentication server when users sign out.
8. In the Signout notication retry intervals box, enter the minimum number of seconds that the device must
wait before sending another notication to the OXPd authentication server when users sign out.
9. Click the OK button.
Delete OXPd authentication agent les
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Authentication Agents.
2. Select the OXPd authentication agent le from the list, and then click the Delete button.
3. On the conrmation window, click the OK button.
Manage the OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration Repository
The built-in authorization proxy on a device provides access to a Web-based service that authorizes users to
access the device. OXPd authorization proxy les contain the information that devices require to access
authorization agents from third-party solutions. You can use OXPd authorization proxy les to override the built-
in authorization proxies on OXPd-enabled devices with OXPd authorization agents from third-party solutions.
Import OXPd authorization proxy les
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration.
2. Click the Import button.
3. On the Open window, navigate to and select the OXPd authorization proxy les, and then click the Open
button.
Delete OXPd authorization proxy les
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration.
2. Select the OXPd authorization proxy conguration le from the list, and then click the Delete button.
3. On the conrmation window, click the OK button.
Edit OXPd authorization proxy les
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration.
2. Select the OXPd authorization proxy le from the list, and then click the Edit button.
3. In the Name box, enter the unlocalized name for the OXPd authorization proxy (maximum of 100
characters).
72 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
4. In the URI box, enter the URI of the OXPd authorization agent (maximum of 256 characters). The URI is
case-sensitive and must begin with one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_URI%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: http://%%var_URI%%
Example: http://%%var_URI%%/myapp
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: For more information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
5. If network credentials are required to access the URI, select the Use credentials checkbox. Enter the
network credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters), Password (maximum of 128
characters), and Conrm password boxes.
6. In the Connection timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to establish a
connection to the authorization agent before a timeout occurs.
7. In the Response timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to receive a
response from the authorization agent before a timeout occurs.
8. To allow users to choose an alternate sign-in method when more than one method is enabled on the
device, select the Enable sign in choice checkbox. An Advanced button is available on the sign-in screen on
the device control panel. When the user touches the Advanced button, a list of the alternate sign-in
methods that the user can select opens.
NOTE: Some devices do not support alternate sign-in methods. These devices do not display the
Advanced button if this checkbox is selected.
9. To notify the authorization agent each time the permissions or proxy conguration on the device changes,
select the Enable change notication checkbox.
10. To enable the authorization proxy to automatically add new permissions to the guest permission set, select
the Add new permission to guest permission set checkbox.
IMPORTANT: If this checkbox is cleared, guest users for new permissions are denied access to the device.
11. To view the fax and email settings that the device uses for guest users, click the View guest user overrides
button.
12. Click the OK button.
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 73
Manage the OXPd Statistics Agents Repository
Devices collect statistics about each job that they process. The job statistics include the device ID, job ID, user
who initiated the job, and details about the job.
A statistics agent is a server-based solution that receives job statistics from devices. When a job is completed,
the device sends the job statistics to the statistics agent. The statistics agent sends an acknowledgement to the
device when the job statistics are received.
An OXPd statistics agent record denes the information that devices require to send job statistics to the server
where the statistics agent is installed. An OXPd statistics agent record also denes when the device sends job
statistics to the OXPd statistics agent server and whether the device automatically deletes the oldest job
statistics when the storage media on the device is full. The OXPd statistics agent record must be registered on
every device that sends job statistics to the specied OXPd statistics agent server.
During normal operation, if the storage media on the device is full when a new job starts, the device
automatically deletes the oldest job statistics from the storage media to make room for the new job statistics.
The device deletes the oldest job statistics even if all of the registered OXPd statistics agents have not received
the job statistics and sent an acknowledgement to the device. However, you can congure a device to prevent
the job statistics from being deleted from the storage media if the device has not received an acknowledgement
from the OXPd statistics agent server. In this case, if the storage media is full when a job starts, the device is
locked and does not start any new print or scan jobs. Use one of the following methods to unlock the device:
●Allow the device to continue resending an unacknowledged notication until the OXPd statistics agent
server acknowledges that the job statistics have been received. After the device receives an
acknowledgement for all of the outstanding notications, the lock is cleared from the device.
●Remove the OXPd statistics agents that have not successfully received the notications from the device.
The device no longer sends notications to these OXPd statistics agents.
●Use the Administration app or menu on the device control panel or the device HP Embedded Web Server
(EWS) to remove all of the OXPd statistics agents from the device. The device no longer sends notications
to any OXPd statistics agents.
After an OXPd statistics agent record is imported into the OXPd Statistics Agents Repository, use the OXPd
Statistics Agents conguration option to add that OXPd statistics agent record to a device. OXPd statistics agent
records can be edited, deleted, and included in device conguration templates.
Import OXPd statistics agent records
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Statistics Agents.
2. Click the Import button.
3. On the Open window, navigate to and select the OXPd statistics agent records, and then click the Open
button.
Delete an OXPd statistics agent record
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Statistics Agents.
2. Select the OXPd statistics agent record from the list, and then click the Delete button.
3. On the File Delete window, click the OK button.
74 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Edit an OXPd statistics agent record
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Statistics Agents.
2. Select the OXPd statistics agent record from the list, and then click the Edit button.
3. In the Name box, enter the unlocalized name for the OXPd statistics agent (maximum of 100 characters).
4. To prevent the device from automatically deleting the oldest job statistics to make room for the new job
statistics when the storage media on the device is full, select the Critical agent (acknowledgement required
for delete) check box. The device deletes the job statistics only when it receives an acknowledgement from
the OXPd statistics agent server. If the device runs out of storage space for unacknowledged job statistics,
the device is locked and does not print or scan any new jobs.
-or-
To allow the device to automatically delete the oldest job statistics to make room for the new job statistics
when the storage media on the device is full, clear the Critical agent (acknowledgement required for delete)
check box.
5. From the Data persistence frequency list, select one of the following options:
●Job—The device commits the job statistics to its storage media only when each job is completed. If a
power failure occurs while the device is processing a job, all of the statistics for that job are lost.
●Job and sheet—The device commits the job statistics to its storage media when each job is
completed and when each scanned or printed page is delivered to its destination. If a power failure
occurs while the device is processing a job, the recovered job statistics contain accurate values up to
the time of the power failure. Only the job statistics that the device was actively processing at the
time of the power failure are lost.
6. In the URI box, enter the URI of the OXPd statistics agent server (maximum of 256 characters). The URI is
case-sensitive and must begin with one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_URI%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: https://%%var_URI%%
Example: https://pull.%%var_URI%%.MyCompany.com:8443/
MyCompanyAuthentication/services/AuthenticationService
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: For more information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 75
7. If network credentials are required to access the OXPd statistics agent server, select the Use credentials
check box. Enter the network credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters), Password
(maximum of 128 characters), and Conrm password boxes.
8. In the Connection timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to establish a
connection to the OXPd statistics agent server before a timeout occurs.
9. In the Response timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to receive a
response from the OXPd statistics agent server before a timeout occurs.
10. In the Retry interval box, specify the number of seconds that the device waits before trying to connect to
the OXPd statistics agent server again.
11. In the Max consecutive retries box, enter the maximum number of times that the device tries to connect to
the OXPd statistics agent server.
12. Click the OK button.
Manage the OXPd Quota Record Repository
A quota solution, such as Pcounter for HP, is installed on a server and used to specify the amount of various
device resources that each user is allowed to use. These device resources include the number of sheets of paper
printed, the amount of toner used, and so on. The following are examples of how quotas can be dened:
●Quotas can be based on time. The quota balance can be automatically reset on a recurring basis, such as
each week or once a month.
●Quotas can be based on a credit or debit amount. Users can pay into their quota account by using a
payment product, such as a web-based pay-for-print application or a debit/credit card machine attached to
the device.
An OXPd quota agent record contains the information that devices require to access the server where the quota
solution is installed. An OXPd quota agent record can also dene web resources that are displayed when users
initiate a job on the device, such as a request for credentials, and when a quota limit is reached, such as a
warning message.
After an OXPd quota agent record is imported into the OXPd Quota Record Repository, use the OXPd Quota
Agents conguration option to add that OXPd quota agent record to a device. OXPd quota agent records can be
edited, deleted, and included in device conguration templates.
Import OXPd quota agent records
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Quota Agents.
2. Click the Import button.
3. On the Open window, navigate to and select the OXPd quota agent records, and then click the Open button.
Delete an OXPd quota agent record
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Quota Agents.
2. Select the OXPd quota agent record from the list, and then click the Delete button.
3. On the File Delete window, click the OK button.
76 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Edit an OXPd quota agent record
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Quota Agents.
2. Select the OXPd quota agent record from the list, and then click the Edit button. The Quota Agent Details
window opens.
3. In the Name box, enter an unlocalized name for the OXPd quota agent record (maximum of 100
characters).
4. In the Quota agent section, use the following steps to specify the settings that the device requires to access
the OXPd quota server:
a. In the URI box, enter the URI of the OXPd quota server (maximum of 256 characters). The URI is case-
sensitive and must begin with one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_URI%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: https://%%var_URI%%
Example: https://%%var_URI%%/myApp
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: For more information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
b. If network credentials are required to access the OXPd quota server, select the Use credentials check
box. Enter the network credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters), Password
(maximum of 128 characters), and Conrm password boxes.
c. In the Connection timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to
establish a connection to the OXPd quota server before a timeout occurs.
d. In the Response timeout box, enter the maximum number of seconds that the device has to receive a
response from the OXPd quota server before a timeout occurs.
e. In the Retry interval box, specify the number of seconds that the device waits before trying to connect
to the OXPd quota server again.
f. In the Max consecutive retries box, enter the maximum number of times that the device tries to
connect to the OXPd quota server.
5. In the Quota StartJob User Prompt Target section, use the following steps to specify the settings for the
web resource that is displayed in a web browser when a user initiates a job on the device:
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 77
a. In the URI box, enter the URI of the web resource (maximum of 256 characters). The URI is case-
sensitive and must begin with one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
b. If network credentials are required to access the URI of the web resource, select the Use credentials
check box. Enter the network credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters), Password
(maximum of 128 characters), and Conrm password boxes.
6. In the Quota Limit Reached User Prompt Target section, use the following steps to specify the settings for
the web resource that is displayed in a web browser when a quota limit is reached:
a. In the URI box, enter the URI of the web resource (maximum of 256 characters). The URI is case-
sensitive and must begin with one of the following protocols:
●http://
●https://
●le://
●ftp://
b. If network credentials are required to access the URI of the web resource, select the Use credentials
check box. Enter the network credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters), Password
(maximum of 128 characters), and Conrm password boxes.
7. Click the OK button.
Alerts Conguration Options
Global settings for alerts can be set here.
Attach the Supplies Report to the Email Notications for Supply Alerts
The General option for Alerts provides the capability to include or exclude the supplies report as an email
attachment when the email notication is selected for alert subscriptions. Other notication options in
HP Web Jetadmin include Email Templates, Subscription Templates, Log to File, and SNMP Trap Generator. For
more information about Alerts, see Alerts on page 188.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Alerts > General.
2. To restrict who receives detailed supply report attachments to emails, check Attach supplies report to
supply alert email notications.
3. Click the Apply button.
78 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Manage the Custom Email Templates
You can create custom email templates or reset the default alert subscription template back to its original state.
This is convenient if changes have been made to the template that you no longer want.
NOTE: Email clients may or may not make the web browser the active window when a device URL is selected in
an alerts email.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Alerts > Email Templates.
2. Select one of the actions:
●Create: Click Create and complete the page displayed.
–Complete Subject and Body.
–Add a macro to Subject by selecting the macro and clicking Insert Field or drag-and-drop the
macro into the content area.
Macros are added at the current cursor position within Subject.
–Add a macro to Body by selecting the macro and clicking Insert Field or drag-and-drop the
macro into the content area.
Macros are added at the current cursor position within Body.
–To save the template, click OK.
●Edit: Select the template and click Edit. You can then make changes to it. (You cannot edit the default
email templates: Concise and Verbose.)
●Delete: Select the template and click Delete. (You cannot delete the default email templates: Concise
and Verbose.)
●Copy: Select the template and click Copy. You can then name the new template and make changes to
it.
Manage the Templates for Alert Subscriptions
You can reset the default alert subscription template back to its original state. This is convenient if changes have
been made to the template that you no longer want applied.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Alerts > Subscription Templates.
2. To reset the alert subscription template to factory settings (its state when rst installed), click Restore.
Congure the Settings for the Alerts Log
This option enables an entry to be created in a log le each time HP Web Jetadmin processes an alert. You can
control the format of the log le entry, the maximum size of the log le, and turn the logging on and o. This le
has a pre-dened path and lename on the server, and that path is shown in Log le path.
The maximum logle size is enforced by removing the oldest entries whenever new ones are added. New entries
are added to the beginning of the logle and the oldest entries are removed from the end of the logle.
Use the following steps:
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 79
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Alerts > Log to File.
2. After you select Enable, specify the maximum le size for the log.
To clear the log, select Clear.
3. Select the language for the log.
4. To make changes to the log le, click Edit. The Edit Alert Log to File Template page is displayed.
5. Type the eld directly into the Body.
Or, you can insert elds:
●Select the source for available elds in Source.
●Highlight the eld in Available Fields (at the left of this page) and then click Insert Field (at the right of
this page).
6. Click the Apply button.
7. To reset the format to factory settings (its state when rst installed), click Restore.
Congure the Format for SNMP Traps
The SNMP Trap Generator provides an easy way to integrate HP Web Jetadmin with another management
application. You can create alert subscriptions in HP Web Jetadmin for the device alerts that you want forwarded
to the management application. The alert subscription species information about the server where the SNMP
traps are sent and the format for the SNMP traps. When HP Web Jetadmin processes one of these device alerts,
it forwards the SNMP trap to the specied server and port.
The SNMP Trap Generator supports only one format for the SNMP traps. If you change the format, all of the
existing and future alert subscriptions that generate SNMP traps use the new format.
To handle an SNMP trap from the SNMP Trap Generator, load the MIB le (webjet.mib) or HP System Insight
Manager CFG le (webjet.cfg) into the management application that receives the SNMP traps. After you direct the
MIB or CFG le to read the trap variable, you can view the formatted SNMP trap. The MIB and CFG les are
available in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\HP Inc\Web Jetadmin 10\views\dav\bin
To congure the format for SNMP traps, perform the following steps:
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin uses the displayed format for all of the forwarded SNMP traps.
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Alerts > SNMP Trap Generator.
2. To change the format, perform the following steps:
a. Click the Edit button.
b. On the Edit SNMP Trap Template window, make the changes to the format.
c. Click the OK button.
3. To reset the format to the default, click the Restore button.
Firmware Conguration Options
Global settings can be stored here for managing rmware images and how devices are updated.
80 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Congure the Settings for Firmware Upgrades
Use this option to specify the number of concurrent rmware upgrades that HP Web Jetadmin can perform, the
number of times that HP Web Jetadmin tries a rmware upgrade again if the upgrade fails, and how long
HP Web Jetadmin waits before trying a rmware upgrade again.
Congure the rmware upgrade settings
1. Go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Firmware > General.
2. In the Maximum concurrent upgrades box, enter the maximum number of concurrent rmware upgrades
that HP Web Jetadmin can perform. The default is 8.
IMPORTANT: If the maximum number of concurrent rmware upgrades is set to 11 or higher, you must
also change the value in the FirmwareUpgradeThreadsize section in the
PerfomanceTuning.cong.xml le to match the value specied in the Maximum concurrent upgrades box.
For instructions on changing the FirmwareUpgradeThreadsize section, see Increase the size of the
rmware upgrade thread pool on page 81.
IMPORTANT: Upgrading the rmware on a large number of devices simultaneously is a resource-intensive
operation and requires a high-end server. Even if HP Web Jetadmin is installed on a high-end server,
HP recommends that you keep the other HP Web Jetadmin tasks to a minimum while the rmware
upgrades run.
3. In the Retries box, enter the number of times that HP Web Jetadmin tries a rmware upgrade again if the
upgrade fails. The default is 0.
4. In the Time between retries boxes, enter the number of hours that HP Web Jetadmin waits before trying a
rmware upgrade again. The default is 3.
5. Click the Apply button.
Increase the size of the rmware upgrade thread pool
The maximum number of concurrent rmware upgrades is dened by the size of the rmware upgrade thread
pool. The value specied for the size of the rmware upgrade thread pool must match the value specied in the
Maximum concurrent upgrades box.
1. Make a backup copy of the PerfomanceTuning.cong.xml le. This le is available in the following directory
on the HP Web Jetadmin server:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
2. Open the PerfomanceTuning.cong.xml le in Notepad or a similar editor.
3. Change the <value>xx</value> attribute in the FirmwareUpgradeThreadsize section. For
example, specify 30.
<property name="FirmwareComponent.FirmwareUpgradeThreadsize">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>xx</value>
</property>
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 81
IMPORTANT: The FirmwareUpgradeThreadsize section is available in the
PerfomanceTuning.cong.xml le only for new installations of HP Web Jetadmin 10.3 SR8 or later. For
installations that have been upgraded to HP Web Jetadmin 10.3 SR8 or later, this section must be manually
added to the PerfomanceTuning.cong.xml le.
4. Close and save the le.
5. Restart the HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJAService).
6. Launch the HP Web Jetadmin client.
7. Change the value of the maximum number of concurrent rmware upgrades. For instructions on changing
the value, see Congure the rmware upgrade settings on page 81.
Reports Conguration Options
Global settings for Reports can be set here.
Manage the General Settings for Reports
You can use this option to dene the calendar quarters for your company and restore the report templates to the
defaults. The specied calendar quarters are reected in a generated report if the data for that report is
separated into quarters.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Reports > General.
2. Select the date for the rst day of the rst quarter of the year (for your company).
3. To restore all of the Report templates that came with HP Web Jetadmin, click Restore.
4. You will be asked to conrm your request. Click OK in the dialog box.
5. Click the Apply button.
Congure the Data Collection Times for Reports
You can set the default time for all data collections.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Reports > Data Collection Times.
2. For each type of data collection, specify the time that the collection occurs. The default for each type of
data collection is 12:00 A.M.
3. Click the Apply button.
Supplies Conguration Options
Global settings can be set here for Supplies.
82 Chapter 2 Introduction to HP Web Jetadmin ENWW
Congure the Threshold for Low Supplies
The General option controls the supply threshold at which devices are placed in the “supply needed” state.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Supplies > General.
2. In the Supply level box, specify the percentage of remaining supplies that triggers the device to send a
notication that the supply is low. The default is 25.
3. Click the Apply button.
Congure the Shop for Supplies Link in Reports
The Supplies Reordering option lets you select whether or not to display a Shop for Supplies link on the Supplies
Ordering report; this is a direct link to the HP SureSupply web site.
Use the following steps:
1. On the top menu bar, access Tools > Options > Device Management > Supplies > Supplies Reordering.
2. Check the box Include shop for supplies link in reports to allow the administrator to enable or disable
ordering from SureSupply for the application.
3. Click the Apply button.
ENWW Device Management Conguration Options 83
3 Device Management
The Device Management view provides many features for conguring and managing the devices on the network.
The left navigation pane and the task modules on the Overview pane provide access to these features.
Devices - Common Tasks Task Module
The Devices - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for devices:
●Discover devices on the network
●Create a device group
●Congure the settings on devices
●Subscribe to alerts for devices
●Upgrade the rmware on devices
●Add devices to a data collection
●Generate a report
Devices - Summary Task Module
The Devices - Summary task module provides links that display the device lists.
Devices - Active Tasks Task Module
The Devices - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the device tasks that are running. Use this task module
to stop or view the details of an active task.
Devices - Scheduled Tasks Task Module
The Devices - Scheduled Tasks task module provides a list of the device tasks that are scheduled to run. Use this
task module to delete or edit a task schedule.
Device Management Options
Conguration options can be set for many functional areas within the Device Management view. For more
information, see Device Management Conguration Options on page 60.
84 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Device Tabs
When you select a device list or device group, tabs are available in the lower portion of the device list. These
device tabs provide additional information and functionality for the devices that are selected in the device list.
Showing and Hiding Device Tabs
The device tabs are displayed in the lower portion of any device list page to provide you with more detailed
information about the devices. The device tabs are enabled by default but can be disabled at any time. The
advantage of displaying the device tabs is to enable quick access to all device data by simply selecting the device
in the device list and then clicking on the desired tab.
To hide the device tabs, use the Hide Device Tabs tool (the up/down arrow button on the toolbar on any device
list page). This oers more room to display the device list itself. Hiding device tabs can also reduce network
trac and improve performance while working with large lists of devices.
Status Tab
Device status can appear for a single device or multiple devices depending on list selection. Device status polling
rates can be altered for both multiple and single status modes. The number of devices that can concurrently
display status through Status tab is limited to ten by default but can be increased or decreased (Congure the
Polling Options for Device Lists on page 61). These settings can be accessed in Tools > Options > Device
Management > Status.
The Status tab shows real-time status messages and graphics that indicate device issues for the selected device
or devices. While the status tab is being shown, the device status is updated regularly. Use the Status tab to
quickly assess the current status of one or more devices.
The polling rate of the devices is set in Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Polling (Device Polling
Conguration Options on page 60).
The Status tab has three possible views:
●Single device view (most common): When a single device is selected, the single device view is shown. The
toolbar on the Status tab links to the Embedded Web Server for the selected device (if the device supports
this feature). Device identication information such as device model, host name, IP address, and system
contact information is also displayed (as requested through the top menu bar on View > Preferences >
Device Identication). Current supply and reserve levels, including the name of the consumable and a
ENWW Device Tabs 85
percentage level are shown. Additional information on all supplies is available on the device’s Supplies tab
at the bottom of any device list.
●Multiple device view: When between 2 and 10 devices are selected, the multiple tiled view is shown. Device
identication information such as device model, host name, and IP address is also displayed. Current
supplies and reserve levels are shown. Additional information on all supplies is available on the device
Supplies tab.
The number of devices shown is determined by the conguration setting in Tools > Options > Device
Management > Device Tabs > General (Congure the General Options for Device Tabs on page 65). If the
multiple device view limit is set to 5, and you have more than 5 devices selected, the view changes from
individual statuses (for each device) to a status summary for all selected devices.
●Composite device view: When more than 10 devices are selected, the composite view is shown. The
number of selected devices is shown along with how many are in an OK, Error, or Caution state on the
device Status tab at the bottom of any device list.
In the Status tab, you can select elds from the device information section and click Ctrl-C.
Options on the Status tab page include:
●For single device view:
–Embedded Web Server (only enabled in Single device view): Brings up a web browser that takes you
to the device’s Embedded Web Server, if the device has one.
–Congure Page: Shows the Cong tab; you can change or add conguration information for devices.
–Online or Oine (only enabled in Single device view): Shows whether the selected device is online or
oine. You can actually change the status for the device remotely using this option.
●For multiple device view (2-10 devices):
–Congure Page: Shows the Cong tab; you can change or add conguration information for devices.
From the Customize Status Tab page, you can select multiple options to be displayed. While it is
convenient to have the conguration information displayed, selecting a lot of the options could
potentially impact polling time.
●For composite device view (over 10 devices):
–Congure Page: Shows the Cong tab; you can change or add conguration information for devices.
From the Customize Status Tab page, you can select multiple options to be displayed. While it is
convenient to have the conguration information displayed, selecting a lot of the options could
potentially impact polling time.
Parts of the Status tab page include:
●Single device view (one selected device):
–Status: Shows the status of the selected device.
–Information: Shows device identication information as requested through the top menu bar on
View > Preferences > Device Identication.
–Front Panel Messages: Shows the front panel message currently displayed on the selected device.
–Supply levels: Shows the supply and reserve levels that remain for the selected device.
●Multiple device view (2-10 selected devices):
–Status: Shows the status of the selected devices.
–Information: Shows device identication information as requested through the top menu bar on
View > Preferences > Device Identication.
86 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
–Front Panel Messages: Shows the front panel message currently displayed on the selected devices.
–Supply levels: Shows the supply and reserve levels that remain for the selected devices.
●Composite device view (11 or more selected devices):
–Status summary: The number of selected devices is shown along with how many are in an OK, Error,
or Caution state.
The following conguration options can be set for polling devices.
●Congure the Background Polling Options on page 60
●Congure the Polling Options for Device Lists on page 61
●Congure the Polling Options for Device Tabs on page 62
Cong Tab
The Cong tab allows device conguration for the selected device or devices. A list of conguration items is
displayed and is based on the conguration items supported for the devices selected. If one has the correct
permissions, they can change one or more conguration items and apply the settings to the device or devices
selected. If one does not have the correct permissions, they can only view the conguration items.
If a single device is selected, the conguration items in the tab are shown with the current device settings. If
multiple devices are selected, conguration items in the tab are shown with unspecied or blank settings. The
list of congurable options varies by the devices selected. With multiple devices selected, all congurable items
will probably not apply to all devices. Only settings that apply to a device will be set on that device. Some options
may be repeated multiple times because dierent settings are supported on dierent devices. If it is not clear
which device or device model a particular setting applies to, holding the mouse over the name in the
conguration settings displays a tooltip with additional information.
Features on the Cong tab page include:
●Apply Template: Select a previously created conguration template to apply to the currently selected
devices.
●View History: Displays a list of recent congurations that have occurred on one or more of the selected
devices (View the Conguration History on page 177).
●Customize button: Starts the Edit My Settings List wizard. Use this wizard to create a personalized list of
favorite conguration options that are available from the My Settings category.
My Settings allow you to group commonly used conguration items in one place, so they are easy to work
with. You can congure, edit, or delete options from My Settings. You can access My Settings from the
Cong tab in any Device List (and then click Customize), by right-clicking on any congurable item (for
example, in the Create Conguration Template wizard).
After the Edit My Settings List is displayed, select the conguration option by highlighting it and clicking the
arrow buttons between the two lists. To display the options in My Settings, check the Show ‘My Settings’
box. To save your changes, click OK.
●Refresh: Gets the current settings from a single device, or the unspecied settings for multiple devices. Any
pending changes which have not been applied will be lost.
●Category tree: Organizes the conguration options into categories to make them easier to nd. The
conguration options are listed alphabetically in each category.
●Conguration options: Changes the settings on the devices. The changes that are made to these settings
do not take eect until they are applied and conrmed.
ENWW Device Tabs 87
●Save as Template: Captures the selected conguration in an HP Web Jetadmin conguration template. You
can use templates for the following reasons:
–A backup of the device conguration is needed to manage maintenance and risk.
–A device conguration is deemed as “release accepted” and a template is needed to congure other
devices with like-settings.
The conguration template only captures conguration options that are selected.
●Schedule: Schedule this conguration for later (Schedule Device Congurations on page 178).
●Apply: Apply all of the settings to the device or devices now.
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab allows easy access to alerts settings for a particular device or set of devices. Device alerts provide
the ability for the device to proactively notify you when a problem occurs with the device.
You can set alerts using the Alerts tab or by selecting Alerts from the menu at the left. Using the Alerts tab can
be faster since you have already selected the device or devices.
The Alerts tab has two possible views:
●Single device view: The current set of subscribed alerts is displayed. You can subscribe to alerts, change
alert subscriptions, or remove alert subscriptions.
●Multiple device view: A summary view of how many devices have alerts subscriptions and how many do
not. The same quick access to alerts subscriptions, change alert subscriptions, or remove alert
subscriptions is provided.
Options on the Alerts tab page include:
●Group By: The dierent ways you can choose to group alerts:
–Device: Displays devices that can be individually expanded to show each applied subscription and
corresponding Alerts detail.
–Subscription: Displays subscriptions by name that can be individually expanded to show devices to
which the subscription has been applied.
–Solution Type: Displays one or any of the three types of Alerts that have been congured. These can
be expanded to show individual subscriptions and devices to which the subscription has been applied.
●+ (Expand All): View detail.
●- (Collapse All): View summary information only and no detail.
●Subscribe: Create an alert subscription.
●Apply Subscription Template: Use alert subscription settings to apply to additional devices. The Alert
History option allows you to view the alerts history for the selected set of devices.
●Alert History: View alerts history; can group by device or by alert.
Parts of the Alerts tab page include:
●Device Model
●IP Hostname
●IP Address
88 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Advanced Settings
There are two threshold settings that can be set through Advanced Settings; Count threshold and Percent
threshold. When Count threshold is enabled, the Alert will trigger as the increasing device counter matches
the value (number) applied here. This is only visible when Page Count Alerting is enabled.
Percent threshold supplies a common threshold value (percentage) that can apply to threshold Alerts. This
is a decreasing percentage and is set on an integer value. This is a percentage based on decreasing
supplies. This setting is only applicable to supplies that are depleting or depleted and need replacing.
●Notication Type
●Subscription Type
●Linked to Template
This page displayed is identical to the page displayed when you select Alerts - All Subscriptions in the left
navigation pane (View All Alert Subscriptions on page 209).
Features on the Alerts tab page include:
●Save As Template: Save the current settings as an alerts template (Create Alert Subscription Templates
on page 200).
●Unsubscribe: Remove devices from this alerts template (Edit Alert Subscription Templates on page 205).
●Edit Subscription: Make changes to an alerts subscription (Edit Alert Subscription Templates on page 205).
Troubleshoot Tab
The Troubleshoot tab provides features that are used to remotely manage and troubleshoot devices. The
features that are available vary depending on the devices that are selected in the device list. Some of the
features are available only if a single device is selected in the device list.
The following features are available on the Troubleshoot tab:
●Embedded Web Server button—Opens the device Embedded Web Server (EWS). The EWS provides options
to remotely manage the device.
●Online or Oine button—Sets the device status to online or oine.
●HP Support button—Opens the product support page for the device.
●Reset Device button—Starts the Device Reset Options wizard. Use the following steps to reset the devices:
1. From any device list, select one or more devices.
2. Click the Reset Device button.
3. On the Select a reset option page, select one of the following options:
NOTE: The options that are available vary depending on the selected devices.
○Power Cycle—Sends a power cycle command to the devices.
○Reset to Factory Defaults—Resets the devices to the factory defaults.
4. To schedule the power cycle to occur at a specic time, select the Schedule checkbox.
5. Click the Next button.
6. On the Schedule device reset page, use the following steps to create a schedule:
ENWW Device Tabs 89
a. In the Name box, enter a name for the schedule.
b. From the Start time lists, select the date and time that the power cycle occurs.
c. In the Recurrence section, select the option that species how often the power cycle occurs, and
then specify any associated settings.
d. Click the Next button.
7. On the Success page, click the Done button.
●Print Test Page button—Sends a test page or le to the device. The le must be in a le format that the
device can print. The le formats that are valid vary depending on the device. For example, most devices
can print TXT and PJL les. Some devices can print only PDF les.
●Remote Control Panel button—Opens the Remote Control-Panel page for the device. This page is used to
remotely interact with the device control panel. If an administrator password is congured on the device,
HP Web Jetadmin displays a page where you must enter the administrator password.
●Restore Device button—Launches the Restore Device wizard. Use the following steps to restore the
devices:
NOTE: This option is only supported with FutureSmart devices. If this function is greyed out for
FutureSmart devices, click on the Cong tab, and then go back to the Troubleshoot tab.
1. Click Browse, and select the backup le from the system (compressed ZIP format).
The Encryption Key eld should match the restore le key provided at the time of taking the backup.
2. Click the Restore settings from a dierent product box. Once this option is enabled, devices of the
same class can be restored.
NOTE: There is no option to get the backup le from HP Web Jetadmin. Use the device EWS page to
get the backup le by navigating to General, and then Backup and Restore.
The current conguration settings change once the le is restored, and the device will restart.
If an invalid encryption key is entered, HP Web Jetadmin displays a success message after the le has
been successfully transferred to the printer. With the current rmware implementation, the printer
will start processing the le, and HP Web Jetadmin will not know if the le could be decoded/
decrypted correctly.
●Detailed status section—If a single device is selected, displays a list of the status messages that occurred
for the device. If multiple devices are selected, displays the number of each status message that occurred
for the devices.
●Troubleshooting tools section—Provides historical information for one or more selected devices. Select
one of the following options:
–Recent Alerts—Displays a list of the recent alerts.
To displays more information about all of the alerts in the list, click the View History button.
–Recent Congurations—Displays a list of the recent device congurations.
To display more information about a device conguration, select the conguration from the list, and
then click the Details button.
To display more information about all of the device congurations in the list, click the View History
button.
–Firmware Updates—Displays a list of the rmware updates that are available.
90 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Groups Tab
This tab reects the group or groups to which a device has membership, when a single device is selected. The
tab re-displays all selected devices from any device list showing all columns specied in View > Preferences >
Device Identication, and the Groups column when multiple devices are selected.
These devices will be added to any group created from the Groups tab, Add devices to group, or Add devices to
new group. In the single device mode, Remove From Group can be used to remove the selected device from any
manual group.
Parts on the Groups tab page include:
●Add devices to group: Easily add devices to an existing group.
●Add devices to new group: Conveniently create a group and immediately add devices to it.
Columns on the Groups tab page include:
●Group: Lists the name of the group for the selected devices.
●Description: Shows the description of the corresponding group as entered while creating a group with the
Create new device group Wizard or while editing a group with the Edit device group wizard.
●Contact: Shows contact information of the corresponding group as entered while creating a group with the
Create new device group Wizard or while editing a group with the Edit device group wizard.
Features on this page include:
●Remove From Group: Remove a device from the selected group (Remove Devices from a Manual Group
on page 130).
●View: View the devices in the selected group (View a Device Group on page 134).
You must select a group before clicking View. If you are in a group and click View in the Groups tab, you
must have a row selected with a group other than the one you are in.
Reports Tab
The Reports tab allows easy access to report functionality for a device or set of devices.
The two main areas of this feature allow you to access the two main reporting tasks:
●Data Collection: Must be enabled for devices to ensure the raw data is present to generate reports. Turning
on data collection (by checking the check box and clicking Apply) enables this process. The Job Data
collection option enables the Jobs by user: color/mono report. The Device Data collection enables the
Device pages: color/mono report.
●Report Generation: Select the type of report to generate.
Parts on the Reports tab page include:
●Group By: The dierent ways you can choose to group data:
–Device: Orders the tab-list by each device displayed in the list selection. Expanding the list shows each
device and its collection state for each data collection type.
–Data Collection: Orders the tab-list by data collection type and shows devices beneath each.
ENWW Device Tabs 91
–Enabled: Shows two groups of devices. One is Enabled which are devices that have by-user data
collection enabled. The other one is Disabled, which are devices that do not have by-user data
collection enabled.
–None: Shows a tab-list of all devices selected with their data collection states appearing within
columns.
●+ (Expand All) or - (Collapse All): show all details or show only summary information.
●Add devices to data collection: Add devices to a data collection that have been dened (Add Devices to Data
Collection on page 227).
●Apply data collection template: Apply a data collection template (Apply a Data Collection Template
on page 229).
●Generate report: Produce a report after data collection has completed (Generate Reports on page 235).
●Schedule report: Schedule this report to be generated at a specic time (Schedule a Report on page 247).
Supplies Tab
The following tasks can be performed on the Supplies tab for the devices selected in a device list:
●Quickly check the status of the supplies and its reserve levels that are installed on the selected devices
●Print a report that shows the status of the supplies
●Access the HP SureSupply website to purchase supplies
The following features are available on the Supplies tab:
●Group by list—Species how the supplies information is grouped and displayed in the list. Select one of the
following options:
–Device—Groups the information by the device model name.
–Urgency—Groups the information by the level of the supply, such as Low, Empty, and OK.
–Part number—Groups the information by the part number of the supply.
–None—Displays one line for each supply that is installed on the selected devices.
●Refresh Sort button—Updates the sorted information.
●View list—Species how much information about the supplies is included in the list. Select one of the
following options:
–Default—Displays the device model, IP hostname, IP address, supply level, reserve level, pages
remaining, part number, and so on.
–Details—Displays all of the information that the Default option displays and also displays information
such as the capacity, manufactured date, and serial number of the supply.
●+ (Expand all rows) button—Expands each row to display the detailed information.
●- (Collapse all rows) button—Collapses each row to display only the summary information.
●Show all and Show only needed buttons—Species which supplies are displayed in the list. These buttons
toggle between the two features.
–Show all button—Displays all of the supplies that are available for the selected devices.
–Show only needed button—Displays only the supplies that are in a low or very low state.
92 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Refresh Supplies button—Updates the levels of the supplies and its reserve state.
●Shop for supplies online button—Opens the Order Supplies window where you must choose whether
HP Web Jetadmin automatically sends information about the selected printers to HP. Select the appropriate
option, and then click the OK button. The HP SureSupply website opens where supplies for the devices can
be purchased.
●Print shopping list button—Generates a print preview of the information that is currently displayed in the
list.
Storage Tab
Storage management functionality is used to manage fonts, macros, and objects on device storage facilities
such as disk or ash devices. This functionality can be viewed from any device list with one or more devices
selected and then choosing the Storage tab.
All selected devices are displayed in the Storage tab list with Device Model, IP Hostname, and IP Address dened.
Used space and Read/Write accessibility are displayed for each device in the list. In addition, grouping controls
exist for multiple devices enabling a variety of storage analysis and storage conguration access.
The following features are available on the Storage tab:
●View list: To change the information that is displayed on the Storage tab, select one of the following
options from the list:
–Media: This option lists the storage media on the selected devices. If the Storage Device count is 1 or
greater, the mouse-over tool tip displays a table of all the storage media on the device. The following
options are available in this view:
○Secure Storage Erase: Starts the devices secure storage erase action. One of three secure
modes can be set for the storage erase action. These modes are Non-secure Fast Erase, Secure
Fast Erase, and Secure Sanitizing Erase. The extent of security in the secure erase feature on the
device will depend on device model and rmware. See device documentation regarding Secure
Storage erase features for more details. An option to enable write-protect can be set to leave
the device in read-only mode once secure storage erase has completed. This feature can be
scheduled as a one time or recurring operation.
○Initialize File System: Causes the device user-directory structure to initialize. The le system will
vary depending on device or storage type; please see device-specic documentation. This
feature can be scheduled as a one-time or recurring operation.
○Write Protection: Enables or disables write functionality on the selected storage facility. This
makes a device read-only or read-write capable.
○Erase Customer Data: Starts the Erase Customer Data wizard. This wizard removes any job
information that is stored on the device, but does not remove any device conguration settings.
The device cannot be used while the erase operation is in progress. The erase operation can be
scheduled to occur at a specied time.
The erase operation runs in one of the following modes:
●Non-secure fast erase
●Secure fast erase
●Secure sanitizing erase—This erase mode overwrites the data three times. The erase
operation might take several hours to complete for a large hard disk that has numerous
jobs.
ENWW Device Tabs 93
HP Web Jetadmin monitors the erase operation for one hour. If the erase operation takes
more than one hour to complete, HP Web Jetadmin displays an error message on the
Results page of the Erase Customer Data wizard. However, the device continues the erase
operation until it is complete.
●Secure cryptographic erase
For more information about HP FutureSmart devices and hard disk security, see the
HP FutureSmart Firmware Device Hard Disk Security white paper. This white paper is available
from the HP support page (in English).
○Use Drive: If a device has more than one drive installed, enables you to select the drive where
conguration les, stored jobs, and temporary les are stored, and move existing customer data
to that drive. You cannot move conguration data to a RAM drive because all data on a RAM
drive is lost when the drive is turned o and then turned on. You can create a schedule to run
the Use Drive operation one time or on a recurring basis.
○Erase Drive: Enables you to completely erase a drive. This process does not preserve any data.
You can erase only one drive at a time. The Secure Erase option selects the most secure erase
method available for the selected drive. The Cryptographically Erase option is performed only
on secure drives. This option resets the encryption key, prevents access to the data, turns the
drive o and then on, and re-encrypts the drive with new keys. You can create a schedule to run
the Erase Drive operation one time or on a recurring basis.
○Set Encryption to AES_128: Erases all of the data on the SSD drive. The device automatically
turns o and then turns on. When the device turns on, the encryption level is set to AES-128.
○Set Encryption to AES_256: Erases all of the data on the SSD drive. The device automatically
turns o and then turns on. When the device turns on, the encryption level is set to AES-256.
–Fonts and Macros: This option displays the number of fonts and macros installed on the device. The
mouse-over tool tip displays a table of all the fonts and macros installed on the device. The following
options are available in this view:
○Repository button: Displays the Repository pane with a list of all of the fonts and macros that
are stored in the repository. For more information about managing the storage repository, see
Storage Repository on page 256.
○Install: Installs a font or macro on the selected device. (See Install Fonts and Macros on Devices
on page 258.)
○Remove: Removes the selected fonts and macros from the device, but does not remove them
from the Storage Repository. (See Remove Font and Macro Files from Devices on page 258.)
○Print Font/Macro: Prints the selected fonts and macros. (See Print Font/Macro on page 258.)
–Resident Fonts: This option displays the number of resident fonts on the device. The mouse-over tool
tip displays a table of all the resident fonts on the device.
–Disk Jobs: This option displays the number of stored jobs currently on the device. The mouse-over
tool tip displays a table of the stored jobs on the device. The following options are available in this
view:
○Delete: Deletes the selected print job.
○Print Disk Job: Prints the selected print job. If the print job is secured by a PIN, you must type the
correct PIN in order to print the job. You can enter only one PIN. If you select more than one PIN-
94 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
protected job and the jobs have dierent PIN values, you can print only one. HP recommends
that you select only one private print job at a time to avoid this restriction.
●Templates button: Displays the Templates pane with a list of all of the storage templates that have been
created. For more information about storage templates, see Storage Templates on page 259.
Solutions Tab
The Solutions tab displays the following information about the devices that are selected in the device list:
●The number of applications, such as chailets and Microsoft .NET Framework applications, that are installed
on the device
●The number of solutions that are installed on the device
●Whether Application Manager and Solution Manager are installed on the device
Application Manager and Solution Manager are required to install chailets and .NET Framework
applications. Application Manager is required to install solutions.
The following features are available on the Solutions tab:
●Repository button—Accesses the Solutions Repository where you can manage the solutions. For more
information, see Solutions Repository on page 263.
●Apply Template button—Starts the Apply Solution Template wizard. For more information about this
wizard, see Applying a Solutions Template on page 268.
●Install Managers button—Starts the Install Manager wizard. For more information about this wizard, see
Install Solutions on page 96.
●Remove button—Starts the Uninstall Solution wizard. For more information about this wizard, see
Uninstalling Solutions on page 265.
●Edit button—Starts the Edit Solution wizard. For more information about this wizard, see Editing Solutions
on page 95.
●Install button—Starts the Install Solutions wizard. For more information about this wizard, see Installing
Solutions on page 264.
Editing Solutions
●Description: custom description of the solution.
●Application URL: species where the solution is located, and identies a credential that can be applied to
access the location.
●Conguration URL: species where a conguration le is located, and identies a credential that can be
applied to access the location. The conguration le is used to congure the solution.
●License URL: species where a license le is located, and identies a credential that can be applied to
access the location. The license le is used to grant access to various functionality within the solution.
You can edit the Conguration URL and License URL properties for one or more solutions using the Edit Solution
wizard.
ENWW Device Tabs 95
1. From the Solutions tab, select a device and click Edit. The Edit Solution wizard is started with the Select
options page displayed.
2. Select an existing template or manually specify options.
3. To edit the solution immediately, click Next.
-or-
To schedule the edit for another time, click Schedule and then Next.
4. Select at least one solution and click Next. The Edit settings page is displayed with a list of solutions that
have been selected.
5. If you select one of the displayed solutions, its Conguration URL and License URL settings are displayed in
the Settings group box on the right side of the wizard page.
6. Specify new Conguration URL and License URL settings and then click Activate Choice for Solution. The
selected solution will have its associated State column changed to Modied. Click Next.
7. If you are installing the solution now, the Conrm page is displayed.
If you chose to schedule the edit of the solution, the Specify schedule options page is displayed. Assign a
name and then specify a date, time, and recurrence for the edit.
Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
8. Click Edit. The Results page is displayed.
9. Click Done.
Install Solutions
The Install Solutions wizard installs the Application Manager, or the Solution Manager, and the solution. Follow
these steps:
1. Select a device or devices within the Solutions tab.
2. On the Solutions tab page at the bottom of any device list, click Install. The Install Solutions wizard is
started with the Select page displayed.
3. Select the Install Solution Manager check box for FutureSmart devices, or Install Application Manager
depending upon the device (FutureSmart devices or other devices), and then select the solution.
4. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Click Install.
Capabilities Tab
The Capabilities tab page shows a list of capabilities information for either a single device or multiple devices,
depending on the devices selected in the device list. Device capabilities are displayed in two columns: capabilities
name and capabilities value. An alphabetic sort can be done on the capabilities name.
96 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Firmware Tab
The Firmware tab provides information about the device rmware and HP Jetdirect rmware that are currently
installed on the selected devices and information about the newer rmware versions that are available in the
Firmware Repository. The following features are available on the Firmware tab:
●View list—To change the information that is displayed on the Firmware tab, select one of the following
options from the list:
–Summary—Displays the status of the rmware that is installed on the selected devices, indicates if
newer versions of the rmware are available, and indicates the number of selected devices that are
currently in a short stack condition.
ENWW Device Tabs 97
NOTE: When the HP Jetdirect rmware is upgraded, a device might be left in a short stack condition
if the device is disconnected during the upgrade process or a fatal error occurs. HP Web Jetadmin
detects this error condition and tries the upgrade again to make sure that the device is not left in an
incomplete upgrade state.
–Printer Firmware—Displays detailed information about the device rmware on the selected devices.
The Printer Firmware - Severity column can be used to verify that the device rmware is up-to-date. A
green icon indicates that the latest version of the device rmware in the Firmware Repository is
installed on the device. A yellow icon indicates that a newer version of the device rmware is available
in the Firmware Repository. The Up-to-date icon is displayed in this column if the rmware version on
the device is newer than the rmware versions that are available in the Firmware Repository or if the
rmware version on the device is the same as the latest rmware version that is available in the
Firmware Repository.
By default, HP Web Jetadmin checks for newer rmware versions in the HP Web Jetadmin Firmware
Repository. Instead of checking all rmware les in the HP Web Jetadmin rmware repository, it can
validate if newer qualied images are available in the HP Web Jetadmin repository by changing the
value for ConsiderQualiedFirmwareAsLatest in the FirmwareUpgrade.cong.xml to True. If this
setting is not available in the FirmwareUpgrade.cong.xml le, then add the full section:
<property name="ConsiderQualifiedFirmwareAsLatest">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>True</value>
</property>
After changing the value in the xml le, restart HP Web Jetadmin. If the value for
ConsiderQualiedFirmwareAsLatest in the FirmwareUpgrade.cong.xml is set to True,
HP Web Jetadmin will only consider the qualied rmware image as the latest image, even if there is
a non-qualied image with a later rmware datecode and version available in the HP Web Jetadmin
repository. If none of the rmware images are set as qualied, then it will always show the existing
device rmware as up-to-date.
By default, the FirmwareUpgrade.cong.xml can be found in:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService
\cong
The Printer Firmware - Available in WJA Repository column displays the number of device rmware
les in the Firmware Repository that are available to install or reinstall on the device. This number
includes the current device rmware le and all of the new rmware les in the Firmware Repository
that can be installed or reinstalled on the device. The Up-to-date icon is displayed in this column if the
rmware version on the device is newer than the rmware versions that are available in the Firmware
Repository.
–Jetdirect Firmware—Displays detailed information about the HP Jetdirect rmware on the selected
devices.
The Jetdirect Firmware - Severity column can be used to verify that the HP Jetdirect rmware is up-
to-date. A green icon indicates that the latest version of the HP Jetdirect rmware in the Firmware
Repository is installed on the device. A yellow icon indicates that a newer version of the HP Jetdirect
rmware is available in the Firmware Repository. The Up-to-date icon is displayed in this column if the
rmware version on the device is newer than the rmware versions that are available in the Firmware
Repository or if the rmware version on the device is the same as the latest rmware version that is
available in the Firmware Repository.
The Jetdirect Firmware - Available column displays the number of HP Jetdirect rmware les in the
Firmware Repository that are available to install or reinstall on the device. This number includes the
98 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
current HP Jetdirect rmware le and all of the new HP Jetdirect rmware les that can be installed or
reinstalled on the device. The Up-to-date icon is displayed in this column if the rmware version on
the device is newer than the rmware versions that are available in the Firmware Repository.
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin can consider only qualied Jetdirect Firmware. The
ConsiderQualiedFirmwareAsLatest option mentioned under Printer Firmware also applies toJetdirect
Firmware.
●Repository button—Displays the Firmware Repository pane. For more information about managing the
repository, see Firmware Repository on page 213.
●Upgrade button—Starts the Firmware Upgrade wizard. This button is available only if the same version or
a newer version of the device rmware or HP Jetdirect rmware is available for the selected devices.
Copy Template Wizard
Throughout Device Management view, templates can be created and managed to save you time and provide
consistency. Templates contain conguration preferences (that vary by template type) and can be applied to
devices or groups. Templates are available in Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data Collection, and Report
Generation. Templates with a locked icon next to them are system templates that cannot be edited; these
templates can be copied if you want a template with similar settings.
NOTE: In the Application Management view, templates can be created for Role Templates (Role Templates
on page 283).
After a template has been created, it can be copied to create a new template and then changes can be made.
This is useful if you need a template similar to an existing one.
To copy templates, perform the following steps:
1. In the left navigation pane, right-click the area for the template (Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data
Collection, and Report Generation) and select Copy template. The Copy Template wizard is started with the
Specify template name page displayed.
2. Select the template to copy from the Template drop-down list.
3. In the New template name eld, type the name of the new template.
The original template will remain unchanged.
4. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed showing the original template name and the new template name
just created.
5. If the new template name is correct, click Copy Template. The template will be copied to its new name.
6. The Results page is shown. Click Done.
7. Make changes to the new template by following the appropriate steps:
●Edit Conguration Templates on page 185.
●Edit Alert Subscription Templates on page 205.
●Edit Discovery Templates on page 168.
●Edit a Data Collection Template on page 230.
●Edit a Report Template on page 253.
ENWW Copy Template Wizard 99
Export and Import Device Conguration Templates
In an environment that has multiple instances of HP Web Jetadmin, you can create device conguration
templates in one instance, and then import them into the instances that are running on dierent servers.
However, to import device conguration templates, each server must run the same version of HP Web Jetadmin.
Export device conguration templates
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Conguration.
2. To export multiple templates, right-click Templates, and then select Export conguration templates. The
Export Templates wizard starts. On the Select template page, select the templates, and then click the Next
button.
-or-
To export one template, expand Templates, right-click the template, and then select Export. The Export
Templates wizard starts.
3. On the Specify export options page, enter a password in the File encryption password box. This password
prevents unauthorized access to any sensitive data in the template.
4. In the Conrm password box, enter the password again, and then click the Next button.
5. On the Conrm page, verify that the correct templates are listed, and then click the Export button.
6. On the Save as window, navigate to the location to save the template le, enter a name in the File name
box, and then click the Save button.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Import device conguration templates
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Conguration.
2. Right-click Templates, and then select Import conguration templates. The Import Templates wizard
starts.
3. On the Select le page, click the Browse button, navigate to and select the template le, and then click the
Open button.
4. In the File password box, enter the password that was assigned to the template le when it was exported.
5. To overwrite an existing template that has the same name, select the Overwrite duplicate templates
checkbox. If you select this checkbox, a warning message appears on the Conrm page.
6. Click the Next button.
7. On the Conrm page, verify that the le name is correct, and then click the Import button.
8. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Edit Schedule Wizard
After a schedule has been completed, it can be edited.
100 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
To edit schedules, perform the following steps:
1. In Device Management, access the Scheduled Tasks task module. Then highlight the task and Edit.
In Application Management, access the Application Management - Schedule Tasks task module or the Web
Jetadmin - All Active Tasks task module.
2. Highlight the task and click Edit.
3. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
4. The Results page is shown. Click Done.
Mapping
Mapping lets you identify the physical location of devices, device groups, and URLs on a map. You can also set up
navigation shortcuts to key items.
There are three general steps to follow to use the Map features:
1. Activating the Maps Feature on page 102
2. Adding a Map Graphic to a Device Group on page 102
3. Placing Devices and Subgroups on a Map on page 103
When all three of these steps have been completed, you can use the Map docking feature and begin interacting
with maps (Docking Task Modules and Maps on page 35).
Devices and Groups
Devices in groups and sub-groups have specic behaviors that should be considered:
Devices in Automatic Groups
●If a device that has been placed on the map for an automatic group is automatically removed from an auto
group (because it no longer meets the auto group criteria) it is removed from the map but the information
that is on the map and where it is placed is maintained in case the device is automatically added back into
the group in the future. The mapping information will be maintained until the map for the group is
removed, the group is removed, or the device is deleted from HP Web Jetadmin.
●If a device is automatically added to an automatic group (because it meets the auto group criteria) the
behavior depends upon whether or not it was previously on the map. If it was not previously on the map,
then it will not be on the map after it is added. If it was on the map when it was automatically removed
earlier, then it will be placed back on the map in the same location. If the map has been changed in
between and the location is now o the map, the map item will be removed from the map.
For more information about automatic and manual groups, see Manual versus Automatic Groups on page 122.
Devices in Sub-groups
●If you remove a sub-group that has been placed on its parent's map, then the sub-group is removed from
the map and all map information about that sub-group on that map is permanently deleted from
ENWW Mapping 101
HP Web Jetadmin. For information about sub-groups, see Placing Devices and Subgroups on a Map
on page 103.
●If you change a sub-group that has been placed on its parent's map to have a dierent parent group, then
the sub-group is removed from the original parent group's map and all map information about that sub-
group on that map is permanently deleted from HP Web Jetadmin.
Hidden Devices and Mapping
Hidden devices in HP Web Jetadmin will not be displayed on any map. However, HP Web Jetadmin will continue
to remember that the device is on those maps and where it was placed unless the map or group with the device
is deleted from HP Web Jetadmin.
When you reactivate a hidden device, it reappears on any maps that contained it when it was hidden. It is placed
in the same location on each map on which it appeared. If the map for the group has changed and the location
where the device is to be placed is no longer on the map, then the device is permanently deleted from that
group's map. For automatic groups, the device only reappears on the map if it also reappears in the group
because it still meets the auto grouping criteria for the group.
Activating the Maps Feature
The Map module must be activated before you can use it.
1. From the top menu bar, select View > Device Modules > Map.
2. If Map is grayed out, it is already active. If it is not grayed out, select it to activate maps.
If you are in a device group with a map, activating it causes the map for that group to appear. If not, then
there are no visible changes when this feature activated.
Adding a Map Graphic to a Device Group
Any graphic can be added to a device group. File types must be supported by Microsoft Windows.
1. From the left navigation pane, select All Devices or a group under Groups.
2. Click Congure map in the toolbar. The Congure map dialog is displayed.
3. To add a map to the group, follow the steps on the page. You can also drag-and-drop a graphic onto the
right-hand portion of the window to use it as your map graphic.
Changing a Graphic Image for a Map
A graphic image for a map can be changed to a dierent image. File types must be supported by Microsoft
Windows.
1. Click Congure Map on any device list page. If the group already has a map and the map module is showing
the map for the group, you can access Congure Map by clicking on the Congure Map tool on the Map
toolbar.
2. Click New map. The File Open dialog is displayed.
102 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
3. Specify the new graphic le
4. Drag a graphic image and drop it on the picture area of the Congure map dialog.
Placing Devices and Subgroups on a Map
Before you can place devices on a group map, there must be devices in the group (Add Devices to a Group
on page 129). In order to place sub-groups on a group map, the group must have sub-groups.
The device image is the same image used for that device in device lists. It is centered on the point where you
drop it on the map.
If selecting more than one device, devices are placed on the map at the point where you drop them with each
image being positioned slightly down and to the right of the previous one. If the automatic positioning places an
image o of the map, the cascading continues in the upper left corner of the map.
A device or a subgroup may only appear on the map once. Once it is on the map, it no longer appears in the list
on the left. Devices may appear on multiple maps. Subgroups can only appear on the map for their parent group.
1. Click Congure Map on any device list page. If the group already has a map and the map module is showing
the map for the group, you can access Congure Map by clicking on the Congure Map tool on the Map
toolbar.
2. Select Device or Group from Map Item Type. The devices in the device group are listed.
3. Select one or more devices in the list and drag and drop them on the map where you want them.
4. To move the device or subgroup to a dierent location on the map, click on it and drag and drop it on its
new location.
Placing URLs on a Map
1. Click Congure Map on any device list page. If the group already has a map and the map module is showing
the map for the group, you can access Congure Map by clicking on the Congure Map tool on the Map
toolbar.
2. Select URL from Map Item Type. The devices in the device group are listed.
3. Type a name and Web address for the URL.
4. Click on the URL and drag and drop it onto the map where you want it. The item image is placed centered
on the point where you drop it.
5. To move the URL to a dierent location on the map, click on it and drag and drop it on its new location.
Viewing Device or Group Status
The View mode provides various functionality for maps.
●Device status: The status of a device or a group is only displayed on the map in View mode; it is not visible
in Congure Map. The status is shown on the device icon on the map.
●Selecting devices on a map: Selecting a device on a map also selects it in the device list. If a device is on a
map, selecting it in the device list will also select it on the map. Multiple devices can be selected on the map
by holding down Ctrl.
ENWW Mapping 103
●Accessing devices in sub-groups: Selecting a group on the map also selects it in the left navigation pane
and displays its device list. If the new group has a map, it is displayed in the map module; if it does not have
a map, the map module is hidden.
●Move up to a parent group: Use Map to move to the parent group by clicking View parent group item on the
map module's toolbar. This selects the parent group in the left navigation pane and switches to that
group's device list. If the parent group has a map it is displayed in the map module; if it does not have a
map the map module is hidden.
●Go to a URL: Select a URL on the map to launch the browser and take you to that URL.
●Filter device list: Any lter applied to the device list is also applied to the map. For example, if you apply the
Color devices lter to the device list, the map no longer shows monochrome devices that have been placed
on the map. Clearing the lter causes the mono devices to reappear on the map.
Sizing a Map
A map can be resized using one of three methods.
In Edit mode, resize the Congure Map dialog by clicking and dragging a corner of the map graphic.
In View mode, use the drop-down in the Map module and select one of three methods. The images for the
devices, groups, or URLs on the map will move appropriately as the map is scaled to continue to center on the
same point on the map.
●Fit to screen: The map image will t exactly within the available space of the Map window.
●100%: The map image is displayed as the actual size of the graphic image that is being used for the map.
Depending upon the current size of the map module window, the resulting image may be smaller or larger
than the window.
●Custom: You can select the size of the map between 10% of actual size to 200%. Select Custom and then
use the “minus” and “plus” signs to decrease or increase the size of the map. These buttons change the
zoom by 10% each time they are clicked until the limit is reached (at which time the button will be
disabled).
Removing Items from a Map
You can remove items from a map without removing the entire map.
1. Click Congure Map on any device list page. If the group already has a map and the map module is showing
the map for the group, you can access Congure Map by clicking on the Congure Map tool on the Map
toolbar.
2. Remove items using one of these methods:
●Click the item to remove and drag it o the map.
●Right-click on the item to remove and select Remove item.
Removing a Map from a Group
You can remove a map from a group with one of the following methods:
104 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Use Remove map on the toolbar.
●Right-click on the map to remove and select Remove map.
Device Lists
HP Web Jetadmin Device Lists and related features such as sorting and ltering lets you easily locate, manage,
and analyze device eets. Batch conguration, eet upgrades, reporting and other powerful HP Web Jetadmin
features all start with the basic list of devices.
For example, Pete is an HP Web Jetadmin user who understands that all devices of a certain model and in a
certain geographical location require rmware updates. These updates are required to enhance the device
functionality and increase performance. Using advanced ltering, Pete can get a list of devices that match both
the model and geographical location criteria. Pete can then export the details from this list and use the contact
information to begin communicating a time frame in which the rmware updates will occur. After a time, the
contacts are all aware of the rmware update activity that will happen after hours when most devices are not in
use. Then, using a device list and rmware updating, Pete can schedule the eet updates for these devices.
Later, again using HP Web Jetadmin lists, Pete can view all of the devices that have or have not completed the
rmware update process. A common theme in this scenario is device lists and ltering. (See Filters and Device
Lists on page 110.)
Pre-Dened Device Lists
The following pre-dened device lists show devices on your network that are not marked as hidden:
●All Devices: Displays a list of all discovered devices.
●Color Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that support color.
●Error Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that are in an error state.
●Information Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that are in an information state.
●New (Last Discovery): Displays a list of devices that were discovered for the rst time by the last discovery.
●New (Manual): Displays a list of discovered devices that are considered new. Devices are considered new
when they are rst discovered. The devices remain in this state until you explicitly acknowledge them.
Acknowledging devices can be done by right-clicking any selection of devices in any devices list.
●New (Time Period): Displays a list of devices that were discovered for the rst time within the last 14 days.
You can set the number of days in Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Filters > New Devices
Filter. For more information, see Congure the Number of Days that Devices are Considered New
on page 65.
●Non-unique Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that cannot be uniquely identied.
HP Web Jetadmin uses a combination of the device serial number, model name, and model number to
create a unique identication for each device it discovers and adds to the All Devices list. If a device cannot
supply any of these attributes, HP Web Jetadmin adds the device to the All Devices list, but marks the
device as non-unique. Some features, such as Device Utilization Data Collections, do not function with non-
unique devices.
●PC-Connected Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that are connected to a PC rather than
connected directly to the network.
●Ready Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that are in a ready state.
ENWW Device Lists 105
●Ungrouped Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that are not assigned to any group.
●Warning Devices: Displays a list of discovered devices that are in a warning state.
If the Device Model column is blank, that device has a model name that HP Web Jetadmin does not recognize. If
Unknown (Disconnected) appears in the Device Model column, the HP Jetdirect print server does not have a
printer connected to it.
Groups lists are the Device Lists that display when a group is selected. These lists can be searched or ltered just
as the All Devices list can be searched or ltered (Search Device Lists on page 114 or Filters and Device Lists
on page 110). For more information about Groups, see Groups on page 121.
Columns for Device Lists
The columns in device lists contain simple data or complex data. HP Web Jetadmin obtains most of the data that
appears in these columns by querying the devices, but some of the data is specic to HP Web Jetadmin. You can
use the columns to sort and customize the device lists.
There are numerous columns in HP Web Jetadmin. This number continually increases as new devices,
functionality, and plug-ins are released.
Use the following steps to add or remove columns in device lists:
1. Access any Device List. Right-click in any column header and select Customize. The Select Columns wizard
is started.
2. To specify the columns displayed on this page, select one of the following options from the Category drop-
down list:
●Favorites: Displays the most commonly used columns.
●All: Displays all of the available columns, except obsolete columns. To display only a specic category
of columns, expand All, and then select the category.
●Obsolete: Displays columns that are still available in HP Web Jetadmin, but have been replaced by
new columns or will not be supported in the future.
3. Select the column by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
columns, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons.
Some complex columns support displaying portions of their detailed information as individual columns.
These complex columns display the detailed items as children in a tree structure in the column selection
control. To see the detailed information that can also be used as columns, expand the complex column.
When you move a detailed item to the other list, the name of the item is displayed followed by the name of
its parent in parentheses.
4. Click OK. The changes should be reected on the Device Lists.
Complex Data in Device Lists
A complex column contains a summary of the data in a grid format. The heading of a complex column contains
an icon (a magnier over a sheet of paper) that indicates an advanced tooltip is available. Hold the cursor over
the underlined data in the grid to activate the advanced tooltip feature and display more information about the
data in a grid format. You can also display the data for a complex column as separate columns.
The data in the complex column is not a combination of all of the column’s subitems. The data in the complex
column is one of the following values:
106 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●The value of only one of the column’s subitems that are displayed when the cursor is held over the data in
the complex column, such as the Print Usage Counters complex column
●A unique value, such as the Proxy Server complex column
The advanced tooltip displays for 1 minute or until you move the cursor outside of the tooltip. Every time you
move the cursor within the tooltip, the 1 minute starts over. The information in the tooltip can also be complex.
In this case, the tooltip displays a summary of the data and an icon that indicates more data is available. Hold the
cursor over the data in the tooltip to activate another advanced tooltip that displays the next level of data.
Columns Dependent on HP Web Jetadmin Data
Some column data is internal to HP Web Jetadmin and is not obtained from the device, such as device status or
other data specic to the local application. Examples of these columns dependent on HP Web Jetadmin data are:
●User Dened Settings: Custom columns that can be created by users and then populated with data that is
only resident on the application. (In previous versions of HP Web Jetadmin, this used to be called custom
elds or custom settings.)
●Acknowledged: Shows if you have dened the device as Acknowledged. Acknowledging devices can be
done by right-clicking any selection of devices in any devices list.
●Credentials Required: Shows requests for required credentials that were not met.
●Discovery Date/Time: Time and date of the last discovery.
●Last Communication: Time and date of the last communication.
●Last Discovered: Time and date of the last discovery that found this device.
●PC-Connected: If a device is locally connected to a PC.
●Status: HP Web Jetadmin status message about the device.
●Severity: Severity rating of status for the device.
●Groups: Shows the group membership for a device, listing ether a single group or the word “multiple”. If
you hover-over it with your mouse a listing of all groups is displayed.
You can enable two dierent columns that help track discovery and communication and represent internal
device date/time tracking: Last Communication and Last Discovered. These time stamps are updated whenever
a discovery has occurred in which the device was discovered or re-discovered.
Columns Dependent on HP Jetdirect Data
Some columns displayed in device lists in HP Web Jetadmin are dependent on data retrieved from HP Jetdirect
devices:
●Jetdirect Model
●Jetdirect Port
●Jetdirect Revision
IP Hostname and System Name can both be enabled in HP Web Jetadmin device lists. The IP Hostname is
enabled in the Default HP Web Jetadmin device list layout. These two items can be useful but can also be
confusing.
ENWW Device Lists 107
IP Hostname is an element that is populated with a name retrieved from network DNS (Domain Name Service).
HP Web Jetadmin uses the device IP address and performs what is known as a reverse-lookup; DNS responds
with a name value if one is registered within the service for that particular IP address. Two requirements exist for
HP Web Jetadmin to be able to get a device's IP Hostname: DNS provides reverse name lookup based on the IP
address, and the device IP address must have a name registered in DNS. If HP Web Jetadmin performs a name
lookup for a device’s IP address and DNS is unable to deliver a result, the value Unknown is displayed in the
device list's IP Hostname column. HP Web Jetadmin will only show resolvable names in the IP Hostname column.
The IP Hostname column is enabled by default. To populate this column, HP Web Jetadmin must perform DNS
lookups. To enable DNS lookups, go to Tools > Options > Shared > Network > DNS. For security and performance
reasons, you can disable DNS lookups.
System Name is an object that is bound to the HP Jetdirect print server. The System Name appears as Host
Name in the Embedded Web Server (EWS) interfaces for many devices in the networking conguration area. This
device bound name, in and of itself, is not resolvable through DNS. When a device’s System Name is changed to
something like “PRTR445” and the DNS name value for a device’s IP address is “lab412”, the IP Hostname
column in HP Web Jetadmin will reect “lab412”. System Name is simply a device bound object that can be
changed using HP Web Jetadmin and the device’s EWS but there are cases when it can also be registered into
DNS.
HP Jetdirect print servers have a few dierent features that can allow the System Name value to become
registered into a device’s DNS. In many cases, when devices have their IP address parameters DHCP congured, a
registration with DNS is possible. This is dependant on both the DHCP system on the network, the HP Jetdirect
print server model and rmware revision, and the system name being populated on the HP Jetdirect print server.
For more information about DHCP/DNS name registration, see the technical documentation for HP Jetdirect print
servers. WINS is another network service that can be used to make HP Jetdirect print server system names
visible through DNS. Many HP Jetdirect print servers are capable of exposing the System Name via WINS and
WINS/DNS linkages can cause these names to be DNS visible and also appear in the IP Hostname column in
HP Web Jetadmin. For more information about IP Hostname and DNS registration, see the technical
documentation for HP Jetdirect print servers.
Statuses on Device Lists in HP Web Jetadmin
You can select columns to view on Device Lists from a static list of columns. The various statuses might be
displayed in those columns include:
●Unavailable: The device does not support the column.
●Undened: For the HP Jetdirect version when the device is incapable of reporting that attribute.
●Missing: Usually a temporary status until the device communicates its data to HP Web Jetadmin.
Manipulating Columns in Device Lists
You can manipulate columns on the device lists in HP Web Jetadmin:
●Selecting Devices: Selecting a device means performing some action that causes the device to become
selected which sets up the device or devices for some further action. Click to select one device or Shift
+Click to select multiple devices.
●Resize columns: To set the width of a column, click and drag the column marker in the list header to the
desired width. Or, to resize the column to the broadest width required to display the data, double-click on
the column header.
●Sort columns:
108 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
–To sort the entire device list by a specic column, click in the header for that column. Click again to
reverse the sort.
–To perform a secondary sort on a list, use Shift+Click on a dierent column after the initial sort.
–To perform additional sorts, hold down Shift while clicking on dierent column headers.
●Display or hide columns: To display or hide columns, right-click on the column header. The columns that are
currently displayed have a check mark next to them; the ones that are not displayed (or hidden) have
nothing next to them. Click on the columns to display or hide.
●Right-click menus: Various kinds of right-click menus are displayed based on whether something is
selected and what list is displayed. For example, if a device is selected on a device list, right-clicking within
the device list causes dierent menu options to be displayed than right-clicking when no devices are
selected.
●Re-order columns: Move columns around in device lists by dragging-and-dropping them in the header to
where you want them.
Customizing Layouts for Device Lists
In addition to the Default layout which is always available (it cannot be deleted), you can create dierent layouts
to apply to any Device List. At the top of each Device List is a Layouts eld with a drop-down list from which you
can select any custom layout or default layout or create a layout. The layouts can be:
●Shared: Any user can access them.
●Private: Cannot be accessed by other users.
Add custom device lists
1. In the toolbar, click View > Column Layouts. The Column Layout Manager page is displayed.
2. Click New. The Column Layout Editor page is displayed.
3. Type the name of the custom view in Name.
4. To specify the columns displayed on this page, select an option from the Category drop-down list.
5. Select the column to display on the device lists by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between
the two lists.
TIP: To select multiple columns, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move the order of the visible
columns, use the up/down arrows.
6. If this view can be seen or used by other users, check the box for Shared (or public).
7. Click OK. The Column Layout Manager page is displayed. Click Close. The view you just edited is available to
select on the device lists.
Edit custom device lists
1. In the toolbar, click View > Column Layouts. The Column Layout Manager page is displayed.
Highlight the view to edit and then click Edit. The Column Layout Editor page is displayed.
2. To specify the columns displayed on this page, select an option from the Category drop-down list.
3. Select the column to display or remove from the device lists by highlighting it and clicking the arrow
buttons between the two lists.
ENWW Device Lists 109
TIP: To select multiple columns, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move the order of the visible
columns, use the up/down arrows.
4. If this view can be seen or used by other users, check the box for Shared (or public).
5. Click OK. The Column Layout Manager page is displayed. Click Close. The view you just added is now
available to select on the device lists.
Filters and Device Lists
You can use lters to limit the content of any device list based on specic criteria. You can also apply lters to
other features, such as automatic device groups.
Characteristics of lters are:
●Multiple layers of ltering can be created by using AND/OR operators.
●Filters can be stored and also shared with other users.
●Some built-in lters are available when HP Web Jetadmin is installed.
●Filters can be added as ltered lists in the left navigation pane.
Available actions for lters listed on the Filters menu (accessible from the toolbar) are:
●Built-in: Apply a built-in lter, such as Color Devices or Error Devices, to the displayed device list.
●Shared: Apply a lter that is designated as Shared in the Filter Editor.
●Private: Apply a lter that is not designated as Shared in the Filter Editor.
●Clear: Clear the lter from the selected devices in the device list.
●New: Use the Filter Editor to create a lter.
●Edit: Use the Filter Editor to edit a lter.
●Save As: Save a lter with another name.
●Manage: Use the Filter Manager to create, edit, and delete lters.
Built-in Filters
The following built-in lters are available from the Filter menu:
●Color Devices: Any devices with color capability.
●Error Devices: Any devices with a severity of "Error".
●Information Devices: Any devices with a severity of "Information".
●New (Last Discovery): Any devices that were added to the All Devices list since last discovery.
●Non-Unique Devices: Any devices that do not have a unique serial number.
●PC-Connected Devices: Any devices that were discovered through PC-Connected device discoveries.
●Ready Devices: Any devices that are in a ready state.
●Ungrouped Devices: Any devices that are not a member of a group.
●Warning Devices: Any devices with a severity of "Warning".
110 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Filter Manager and Filter Editor
The Filter Manager and Filter Editor features are used to create, edit, copy, and delete the device list lters.
HP Web Jetadmin supports Microsoft Global Input Method Editors (IMEs). An IME is a program that can be used to
enter complex characters and symbols, such as Japanese characters, by using a standard keyboard. For more
information, see the Microsoft technical documentation.
Building a Compound Filter
If you create a basic lter and do not get the results you need, you can create a compound lter. After you create
a basic lter in the Filter Editor, you can select Advanced to view its layers. For example:
GT([IP Address], [192.168.40.0]) AND LT([IP Address], [192.168.47.255])
AND EQ([Device Name], [HP LaserJet 4100 MFP]) OR EQ([Device Model],
[HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP])
The Advanced feature can be used to change the lter into two sub-lters that are compounded. Use the AND
function and add some open and closed parentheses:
(GT([IP Address], [192.168.40.0]) AND LT([IP Address], [192.168.47.255]))
AND (EQ([Device Name], [HP LaserJet 4100 MFP]) OR EQ([Device Model],
[HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP]))
TIP: For backward compatibility with previous releases, HP Web Jetadmin still supports alternate symbols,
such as quotes (") and apostrophes ('), to enclose parameters for lter functions. HP Web Jetadmin automatically
changes alternate symbols to brackets when you exit the Advanced editor.
After this compound lter is added to the Specify lter criteria page, the Basic feature can no longer be used (you
will receive an error message).
Create Filters
1. Access a device list. In the toolbar, click Filters, and then click Manage. The Filter Manager page is displayed.
2. Click New. The Filter Editor page is displayed.
3. Type the name for this new lter in Name.
4. To make this lter visible to other users, select Shared. If the lter is not shared, it is only visible to the user
who created it.
5. If the lter is shared, you can choose to have it display in the left navigation pane under the All Devices list
by selecting Available Under All Devices.
6. If you select Advanced, a text eld is displayed where you can manipulate lter attributes that are
expressed in explicit text rather than through a graphical interface. An example of this content is show
here: Contains([Asset Number], [2]) AND Contains([Asset Number], [1],
[Match Case])
An invalid string should be blocked from being applied to settings. An Insert feature is provided to place
operators and functions into the advanced lter content. A Validate feature is provided to report problems
with the advanced lter content if any exist.
7. If you select Basic, click Add. Now you can specify:
ENWW Device Lists 111
●Category: Species the columns that are displayed in the Device Property drop-down list.
●Device Property: Device and system attributes, which are the same as HP Web Jetadmin columns.
●Not: Check box that invokes “not” ltering. When an attribute matches the lter functions, the device
will NOT be shown in the list.
●Filter Function: A set of standard operators that give exibility to the device property denition. These
operators will change depending on the Device Property selected.
Once multiple selections are chosen and displayed in Filter Function, you can choose “AND” or “OR”
(the default is “AND”).
●Value: Provides an entry point to dene the Filter Function and Device Property value. This can either
be a free text eld or a pre-populated drop-down menu depending on the Device Property selected.
●Options: Contains features that further describe the content of free text. Examples are “Match Case”
and “Ignore Case”. This feature is only active when free text elds are available.
8. When done, click OK. The Filter Editor is displayed with your selections.
9. When done, click Close. The device list is displayed.
Edit Filters
1. Access a device list. In the toolbar click Filters and then click Manage. The Filter Manager is displayed.
2. Select the lter you want to edit, and then click Edit. The Filter Editor page is displayed.
3. Make the changes to the existing lter.
4. When done, click OK. The Filter Manager page is displayed.
5. When done, click Close. The device list is displayed.
“Save As” Filters
1. Access a device list. In the toolbar click Filters and then select Save As. The Save Filter As is displayed.
2. Apply the lter you want to copy to the new lter.
3. In the toolbar, click Filters, and then select Save As. The Save Filter As page is displayed.
4. Specify the name of the new lter, and then click OK. You can now edit the lter denitions of the new lter.
Managing Filters
1. Access a device list. In the toolbar click Filters and then select Manage. The Filter Manager is displayed.
2. Select the lter and then click:
●New: Create a lter.
●Edit: Edit a lter.
112 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Copy: Copy an existing lter to create a new lter.
●Remove: Delete a lter.
3. Follow the steps for the action requested.
Apply Filters to Device Lists
1. Display the device list on which you want to apply the lter.
2. In the toolbar click Filters and then click one of the following:
●Built-in: Apply a built-in lter, such as Color Devices or Error Devices, to the displayed device list.
●Shared: (If there are shared lters); Lists any lter that has been designated as “shared” in the Filter
Editor.
●Private: Access all lters that are not shared (as specied in the Filter Editor).
3. Select the lter from the list. The device list will automatically display only those devices that match the
criteria in the selected lter.
4. To view all devices again, click Filters and then select Clear.
Filtering On Special Column Types
Some device list columns show a summary value rather than the actual data stored on the device or in the
HP Web Jetadmin database. This is because the actual data is too complex to be represented in a column cell.
These columns are treated dierently for the display and lter features. The display feature shows an indicator
in the column cell. The lter feature can act on the actual underlying data. Examples of columns like these are
the Device Groups column and the SNMP Trap Destination Table column.
Two examples of how these columns work and how ltering can be used are:
●The Device Groups column for a device belonging to just one group shows the actual name of that group.
The Device Groups column for a device belonging to more than one device group shows the indicator value
<Multiple>. The Device Groups column for a device belonging to no device groups will show the indicator
value <None>.
Filtering can be used to lter devices that belong to a particular device group by using the Device Groups
lter property and the value of the device group name. An example taken from the Advanced edit mode of
HP Web Jetadmin ltering is shown here:
Contains([Device Groups], [Test])
●The SNMP Trap Destination Table column always uses the summary rather than the actual data from the
device’s trap destination table. This is because the data on the device trap destination table is too complex
to be displayed properly within a column cell. The summary used in the SNMP Trap Destination Table
column cell is <number1> of <number2>, where number1 is the actual number of entries in the trap
destination table and number2 is the maximum number of possible entries in the trap destination table.
For example, a device having a potential for three trap destination table entries with only one of those
being used will appear 1 of 3 in the SNMP Trap Destination Table column. Tooltip functionality (which is a
text message resulting by hovering your mouse over the column cell) can be used to reveal the contents of
a device trap destination table. For example, the following tooltip could appear when activated for a cell:
2 of 3
Slot, Trap Destination, Port, Version, Community
ENWW Device Lists 113
1,192.168.0.254,27892, v2c, wja
2,192.168.0.6,27892, v2c, wja
Further, HP Web Jetadmin ltering features can be utilized to nd devices that do or don’t have specic trap table
entries. For example, ltering can be used to see if a list of devices has a certain IP address present in any of
their trap destination tables. Here is an example take from the Advanced edit mode of HP Web Jetadmin:
AnyItem([SNMP Trap Destination Table (obsolete).Trap Table Entries], [EQ(\
[Trap Table Entry.IP Address\], \[192.168.0.254\])])
Another example of using HP Web Jetadmin lter features on the SNMP Trap Destination Table uses regular
expression. Taken from the Advanced edit mode of HP Web Jetadmin:
RegEx([SNMP Trap Destination Table (obsolete)], [(?<entries>[0-9]+) of
\k<entries>\r])
This example shows a lter that will lter the list to only devices with full trap destination tables.
Some complex columns do not support ltering on the individual subitems. For these columns, the lter
compares the lter value to the export text for the item that represents the subitems as nested XML tags. For
more information about ltering in complex columns, see the white papers that are available from the
HP Web Jetadmin support page (click the ag icon on the bottom of the page, and then select your country/
region).
Search Device Lists
You can use the Search feature to search all of the visible columns in a device list for devices that meet specic
criteria. A Quick Search feature and a more complex Advanced Search feature are available. The rst time that
you search a device list, the search takes longer than subsequent searches.
Quick device list searches
The Search Text box is available on the toolbar that appears above device lists. The Search Text box provides a
simple entry point for searching device lists.
1. In the Search Text box, enter the search criteria, and then press the Enter key. The rst occurrence of the
search criteria is highlighted.
2. To display the next occurrence, press F3.
-or-
To display the previous occurrence, press Shift+F3.
Advanced device list searches
The Advanced Search feature provides more exible searches. For example, you can use regular expressions in
the search criteria to specify a search pattern instead of exact text to match.
1. On the toolbar above the device list, click the Advanced Search (binoculars) icon. The Advanced Search
window opens.
2. In the Find what box, enter the search criteria.
3. Click the + button next to the Find options option.
4. To nd only occurrences of the search criteria that match the specied uppercase and lowercase exactly,
select the Match case checkbox.
114 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
5. To select the next occurrence of the search criteria and retain the selection of any previously located
occurrences, select the Add to selection checkbox.
If this checkbox is cleared, the next matching entry is selected, but any previously selected entries are
cleared.
6. To enable the use of regular expressions as part of the search criteria, select the Use regular expression
checkbox.
The content of the search string must follow the Microsoft .NET Framework standard for a regular
expression pattern. For example, if you specify gr(a|e)y as the search criteria, the search nds
occurrences of both gray and grey without having to perform two searches.
TIP: For more information about regular expressions, go to the MSDN Library, and then search for regular
expressions.
7. To continue the search at the beginning of the device list when it reaches the end of the device list, select
the Wrap at end of list checkbox.
-or-
To stop the search when it reaches the end of the device list, clear the Wrap at end of list checkbox.
8. To search a specic column in the device list, select the column from the Search column list.
9. To nd the rst occurrence of the search criteria, click the Find button.
-or-
To nd the next occurrence of the search criteria, click the Find button again.
-or-
To nd and highlight all of the occurrences of the search criteria, click the Find All button.
Exporting Device Data
Data representing device attributes can be exported to a le and then stored on a disk or sent via email through
SMTP. Export data is the same as column data. Many data elements exist within HP Web Jetadmin but the data
that is actually available on devices will vary depending on model and device rmware revision.
You can also copy and paste data from Device Lists to any other application. Select one or more rows, click Ctrl-C
or right-click on a device and then select Copy. When pasting this information, it is formatted the same way a
device list export would be: the rst row will be column headers and the subsequent rows will be the selected
devices.
To export device data, perform the following steps:
1. Access any device list. Then right-click anywhere within the list and select Export. The Export Devices
wizard is started with the Select columns page displayed.
2. Select the Device Interaction Settings:
●Threshold: Specify the age or type of data that HP Web Jetadmin will get from the devices selected:
–Database only: HP Web Jetadmin will always get data from the database.
–Missing items only: HP Web Jetadmin will get data directly from the device if that data is not
already in the database.
–From device only: HP Web Jetadmin will always get data from the device.
ENWW Device Lists 115
–1 Hour: HP Web Jetadmin will always get data that is one hour old or older.
–3 Hours: HP Web Jetadmin will always get data that is three hours old or older.
–6 Hours: HP Web Jetadmin will always get data that is six hours old or older.
–24 Hours: HP Web Jetadmin will always get data that is 24 hours old or older.
●Do not prompt for credentials: Select this if you want to export data from devices but you do not want
to prompt for credentials from each device that is exporting data.
3. To specify the columns displayed on this page, select one of the following options from the Category drop-
down list:
●Favorites: Displays the most commonly used columns.
●All: Displays all of the available columns, except obsolete columns. To display only a specic category
of columns, expand All, and then select the category.
●Obsolete: Displays columns that are still available in HP Web Jetadmin, but have been replaced by
new columns or will not be supported in the future.
4. Select the column by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
columns, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move the order of the visible columns, use the up/down
arrow buttons.
5. To schedule the export for a later time, click Schedule device list export.
A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web
Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
6. Click Next. If devices were not selected prior to starting this wizard, the Select devices page is displayed. If
devices were selected, skip the next step.
7. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
8. Click Next. The Specify destination settings page is displayed. You can congure the lename of the
exported le, the destination, and the le format.
9. Specify the destination:
●Local le: Select this to save the export to a local le. You will be prompted for a lename and location
after the export has begun.
●Email: Send the data to an email address. Type the email address on this page or browse for the
correct email address.
●Server le: The server lename and path are specic to the HP Web Jetadmin host installation. The
provided path describes where the le will be located after the export has completed. If a le of the
same name exists in the location, the lename of the export le will have a time stamp appended to it
to make it unique. If you want to replace the default lename, type the new name in the input box.
●Database: Select this to save to a database view. Provide the view name and language for header
information. The export will create a view located under Views in the HP Web Jetadmin database. The
116 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
view can be accessed with any SQL Server tool or reporting tool. (This option is only available after a
license is purchased and installed.)
10. Select the le format (CSV or XML).
11. Click Next; the Conrm page is displayed.
12. Click Start Export. The Results page is displayed listing the status of the export.
For complex columns, HP Web Jetadmin exports only the summary data displayed in the device list grid. To
display the details, select each of the individual subitems you want to export. If an item contains a list of
elements, the item typically has a subitem that represents the list. You can select the subitem to export the
entire list. In this case, the output is an XML fragment that contains an item tag for each element in the list. If the
individual items are also complex, the XML fragment includes all of the item details. You cannot select the level
of detail exported for each item. Some complex items do not support the selection of individual subitems for
export. In this case, the exported content is an XML fragment that includes all of the subitems rather than the
summary displayed in the device list.
Related Application Options for Device Lists
The following conguration options exist for Device Lists:
●Manage Hidden Devices on page 63
●Manage Blocked Devices on page 64
●Congure the Background Polling Options on page 60
●Congure the Number of Days that Devices are Considered New on page 65
●Congure the General Options for Device Tabs on page 65
The column IP Hostname is dependent on Congure the DNS Settings on page 47 lookups, which are enabled by
default. For security and performance reasons, you can turn them o (Columns for Device Lists on page 106).
Printing Device Lists
You can print any device list. You can select specic devices or print the entire list.
To print device lists, perform the following steps:
1. From the left navigation pane, access any device list.
2. You can either print the entire list or just selected devices:
●To print the entire device list, you can choose to print the whole list or certain pages of it. Go to the
next step.
●To print specic devices on the list, highlight those devices and then go to the next step.
3. To preview the list as requested, click File > Print > Preview > Device List.
4. On the device list page, in the toolbar click File > Print > Device List. The Print page is displayed.
5. Select your printer and the page range (All, Selection, or Pages to identify certain page numbers).
6. Click Print. The selected list will print to the specied printer.
ENWW Device Lists 117
Deleting Devices from Device Lists
You can delete any device from a device list.
If you delete a device from a device list, HP Web Jetadmin removes the device from all of the maps and
permanently deletes all of the map information about that device.
To delete devices from device lists, perform the following steps:
1. From the left navigation pane, access any device list.
2. Highlight the device or devices to delete and right-click to select Delete.
3. Select one of the following options:
Function
Removes devices from device
lists
Removes historical and task
data
Will be rediscovered the next
time a discovery is performed
Hide Yes No Yes
Delete Yes Yes Yes
Delete and block Yes Yes No. If you delete devices from
the Blocked Devices list,
HP Web Jetadmin discovers
the devices again the next
time a discovery runs.
4. Click OK.
Refreshing Devices
From any device list, you can refresh devices or the display of a device.
Refresh Selection: This device list feature is available for either single or multiple devices. Right-click your
selection or use F5 to activate this feature. When Refresh Selection is activated, HP Web Jetadmin client will
request all device data the client is currently tracking for those devices directly from the devices even if the data
within the database is not expired. There may be a short delay in the data change on your device list depending
on number of devices in the selection. After Refresh Selection is nished, all of the data within your device list
should appear very close to data that actually exists on the devices that were selected when the feature was
activated. Data on devices, such as page counts, can change quickly so there is really never a guarantee that
data is absolutely accurate. After the refresh is nished, normal polling and data threshold behavior will
continue.
Refresh Selection (Full): This device list feature is only available on a single device selection. Right-click your
selection and choose Refresh Selection (Full) to activate this feature. When Refresh Selection (Full) is activated,
HP Web Jetadmin eectively clears all device based data and then re-retrieves those data elements important to
Discovery. If the device is the same device, all data elements used to identify the device are kept the same and
the device uniqueness attributes that are internal to this copy of HP Web Jetadmin are also kept the same. After
this discovery action has nished (for either a changed or existing device) the same refresh action is performed
as the Refresh Selection feature. In other words, all of the device data that the client is currently tracking for
those devices which be requested directly from the devices because the data has been invalidated in the
HP Web Jetadmin database tables. If the device is not the same (it does not have the same uniqueness
identiers) HP Web Jetadmin will do exactly what occurs during a new device discovery; HP Web Jetadmin will
register a new unique device into device data tables. The old device will remain as well, but the new device will
be activated, leaving the old device in Communication Error state. The old device, should it be found on a new IP
address, can be activated again once HP Web Jetadmin begins to communicate with it.
118 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
TIP: At this time, the Refresh Selection (Full) feature is restricted to a single device for performance reasons. To
get the desired result, a full discovery should be done on your network or maybe only on a specic list of IP
addresses using the Specied addresses discovery option.
Find More Devices
On the All Devices page (select All Devices from the left navigation menu) in the upper right corner is a Start
discovery button. When you click that button, the Device Discovery wizard starts to walk you through the steps
needed for a successful device discovery.
You will want to use this feature after you initially install HP Web Jetadmin and then afterwards to nd additional
devices. When you rst install HP Web Jetadmin, no discovery has been run which means the All Devices list will
be empty.
Add Credentials for Devices
Some devices use credentials, which must be entered into HP Web Jetadmin for a user to access that device. If
the credentials entered by the user (when trying to access a device) do not match the credentials entered
HP Web Jetadmin, the device denies access.
The All Devices list has a Credentials Required column that shows which devices need credentials. Yes in this
column indicates that the corresponding device requires credentials; No indicates that it does not need
credentials. If a device requires credentials, you must add them before users access that device. The Needed
Credentials wizard will walk you through the steps to add credentials. The pages displayed by the wizard will
vary based on the specic credentials required by the device or devices.
To add credentials for devices, perform the following steps:
1. In the All Devices list, highlight the device or devices requiring credentials (those with a Yes in the
Credentials Required column).
2. Right-click and select Update Credentials.
3. Use the Needed Credentials wizard to enter the credential information for the device or devices. Depending
upon the credentials required by the device or devices, one or more of the following pages will be displayed
for you to complete:
TIP: Throughout the Needed Credentials wizard there is a Skip button that can be used to not enter
credentials for devices if, for example, you are unsure of the required value for the device.
●Enter SNMPv1 Get Community Name page: Select the device for the credential, supply the Get
Community Name (can be up to 256 characters), and click Set. Then click Finish, or click Next and
follow instructions in the wizard.
●Enter SNMPv1 Set Community Name page: Select the device for the credential, supply the Set
Community Name (can be up to 256 characters), and click Set. Then click Finish, or click Next and
follow instructions in the wizard.
●Enter EWS or Domain Password page: Select the device for the password, type the username and
password, and click Set. Then click Finish, or click Next and follow instructions in the wizard.
●Enter SNMPv3 Credential page: Select the device for the password and type the username, the
authenticated password, and the private password. Click Set and then click Finish.
NOTE: Enter either the EWS credentials or the Domain credentials. Enter Domain credentials as:
FullyQualifiedDomainName\Username
ENWW Device Lists 119
Resolve Communication Errors for Devices That Have a New IP Address
Devices can be in a communication error status for several reasons, such as the device is turned o or the IP
address assigned to the device has changed. If devices are in a communication error status because the IP
addresses assigned to the devices have changed, you can use the Resolve IP Addresses wizard to rediscover
these devices and resolve the status.
The Resolve IP Addresses wizard retrieves a list of all the devices that are currently in a communication error
status, regardless of the reason for the communication error. For each of these devices, the wizard retrieves the
hostname assigned to the device, and then looks up the hostname in the Domain Name System (DNS) to
determine if the corresponding IP address has changed. If a new IP address has been assigned to the device, the
wizard adds that device to a list of devices to be rediscovered. The wizard then runs a Specied Addresses
discovery using this list of devices to be rediscovered. If there are PC-connected devices and network-connected
devices in a communication error status, the wizard runs a separate discovery for each group of devices.
If you know that the IP addresses assigned to some of the devices on the network have changed, you can run
the Resolve IP Addresses wizard one time to resolve the status of those devices. If the IP addresses assigned to
the devices on the network change frequently, you can create a schedule to run the wizard on a recurring basis,
such as daily, weekly, or monthly.
To resolve devices that are in a communication error status, perform the following steps:
1. Go to Tools > Resolve Device Communication Failures. The Resolve IP Addresses wizard starts.
2. To run the discovery immediately, leave the Schedule checkbox cleared.
-or-
To create a schedule for the discovery, select the Schedule checkbox.
A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web
Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
3. Click the Next button. The Specify credentials page appears.
4. If credentials are required to discover the devices, select the Specify credentials to use for this discovery
option, and then perform the following steps:
a. If the devices on the network have an SNMPv1 Get Community Name other than public dened, select
the SNMPv1 Get Community Name checkbox, and then enter the SNMPv1 Get Community Name in
the box.
b. If HP Web Jetadmin is congured to discover SNMPv3 devices, select the SNMPv3 Credentials
checkbox, and then enter the user name, authentication password, and private password in the
boxes.
IMPORTANT: To enable HP Web Jetadmin to discover SNMPv3 devices, go to Tools > Options >
Device Management > Device Discovery > General.
c. If the devices are connected to the network through a PC, select the WMI Credentials checkbox, and
then enter the administrator (local) credentials for the Windows host that HP Web Jetadmin queries
during the discovery in the boxes.
d. To use the global credentials, select the Use global credentials checkbox.
TIP: To dene the global credentials, go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials, and then select
the appropriate option.
120 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
5. Click the Next button.
6. If you did not select the Schedule checkbox, the Conrm page appears. Perform the following steps:
a. Click the Start Resolving Devices button.
b. The Results page appears and shows the progress of the discovery. While the discovery is running,
you can hide the Resolve IP Addresses wizard or cancel the discovery.
This discovery is available in the Devices – Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device Management >
Overview page. You can view the progress or stop the discovery from this task module.
c. When the discovery is nished, the Results page indicates the status of the discovery and displays the
number of devices that were found in a communication error status, the number of devices that were
resolved, and the number of devices that were not resolved.
If a device is in a communication error status, but the IP address assigned to the device has not
changed or the Resolve IP Addresses wizard was unable to discover the new IP address found in the
DNS, the wizard cannot resolve the status. The device remains in a communication error status.
d. Click the Done button.
7. If you selected the Schedule checkbox, the Specify schedule options page appears. Perform the following
steps:
a. In the Name box, enter a name for this discovery schedule.
b. In the Start time boxes, specify the date and time this discovery starts.
c. In the Recurrence section, select the option that denes how often this discovery runs, and then
specify the corresponding settings.
d. Click the Next button.
e. On the Conrm page, click the Create Schedule button.
f. The Results page appears and displays the details about the discovery. Click the Done button.
This discovery schedule is available in the Devices – Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device
Management > Overview page. You can edit and delete the schedule from this task module.
Groups
Groups lets you separate devices into subsets (or device groups) so that you can easily manage them. You can
add and delete groups, name and rename them, and add or remove devices from existing groups. Putting
devices in groups lets you congure multiple devices at the same time.
You can organize groups in a hierarchy to make it easier to manage them. It might be best to mirror an existing
structure you are using for groups of devices. For example, you can organize your groups by geography, by
building and oor, or by functional area (accounting, marketing, and so forth). Groups can have the same name
when they don’t exist within the same parent group.
Device groups can be either Manual, where you specify which devices belong to each group, or Automatic, where
you dene lter criteria and devices are automatically added to and removed from each group. You cannot
manually change the membership of Automatic groups except by changing the lter criteria. You can have both
manual and automatic groups at the same time. (See Manual versus Automatic Groups on page 122.)
Device groups can also be used to delegate device management responsibilities to specic users. A user can be
granted device management permissions for devices only in specic groups.
ENWW Groups 121
You can do the following with Groups:
●Organize your devices into meaningful categories, for ease of management.
●Create a hierarchy of parent groups and subgroups.
Subgrouping is where a group exists as a member or subgroup of a parent group. The top-level parent
group in HP Web Jetadmin is simply “Groups.” This exists at the top-level node in the left navigation pane
and can only contain other groups.
●Create Automatic groups, where membership is determined automatically according to dened lter
criteria.
●Create Manual groups, where membership is determined manually.
●Create policies for automatically applying various types of operations on devices when they are added to
and removed from a group.
●Schedule various operations to happen on a group, rather than specic devices.
●Apply security permissions for users, such that they can perform operations on some groups, but not
others.
●Provide meaningful names up to 48 characters long.
●The same device can be included in more than one device group.
A few common examples of HP Web Jetadmin groups scenarios include:
●A geographic representation of your device eet.
●Parent groups representing buildings within a campus could contain subgroups that represent oors or
oor quadrants. This could ease nding devices within a campus setting.
●Parent groups reecting how devices are dispersed among organizations.
Group Representation
In the Device Management navigation pane, group names are followed by a number enclosed with parentheses.
This number is the number of devices in the group. For example, if the Finance group contains ve devices and
does not contain any subgroups, this group appears in the Device Management navigation pane as Finance (5).
If a group contains subgroups, the parent group name is followed by a second number enclosed with
parentheses. This number is the sum of the number of devices in the parent group and the number of devices in
all the subgroups of the parent group. For example, the Building 1 group contains two devices and two
subgroups. The 1st Floor subgroup contains 12 devices and does not contain any subgroups. The 2nd Floor
subgroup contains 10 devices and does not contain any subgroups. In the Device Management navigation pane,
these groups appear as Building 1 (2)(24), 1st Floor (12), and 2nd Floor (10).
You can include the same device in multiple groups. If the same device is assigned to multiple subgroups of a
parent group, that device is counted only once in the total number of devices for the parent group, and the total
number of devices is followed by an asterisk (*). For example, if two devices are assigned to both the 1st Floor
and 2nd Floor subgroups, the parent group appears in the Device Management navigation pane as Building 1 (2)
(22*).
122 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Manual versus Automatic Groups
You can use groups to categorize devices based on common criteria. For example, you might use an IP
addressing scheme to group devices based on the area where they are located. The ability to create manual
device groups and the ability to use the Filter feature to create automatic device groups provide powerful tools
for managing group membership.
In HP Web Jetadmin, groups can be set up with one of two dierent membership types:
●Manual group: Each device is assigned manually to the group and remains in the group until you remove it.
●Automatic group: Devices are automatically assigned based on specied lter criteria. You can create a
variety of lters. For example, to understand how many color devices exist on a specic network, build the
following lters. The rst lter species the network. The second lter species the color capability.
Property Function Value
IP Address Contains 15.5
Color Equals Yes
You can also edit this lter in advanced mode using the HP Web Jetadmin ltering syntax. These strings can
have functions and values added and modied to aect the outcome of the ltering action. Automatic
group membership is updated when one or more of the following occur:
–The Automatic Group has had a lter (or lter change) applied.
–New devices enter the system running a device discovery.
–Device changes are realized by the system that either match or don’t match the lter criteria.
–Devices are removed from the system by hiding or deleting them from the All Devices list.
Group Policies
Policies are applied to groups for the purpose of applying a settings action (or actions) onto a device when it
becomes a member of the group or when it is removed from a group.
Many combinations of policy settings can be applied to a group. Multiples of the same policy types can be
applied to groups as well. A short denition for each policy type follows:
●Enable data collection policy: If you have already dened a reports data collection template, this policy will
automatically apply that template to devices when they are added to the group, when they are removed
from the group, or both.
●Subscribe to alerts or unsubscribe to alerts policy: If you have already dened an alert subscription
template, this policy will automatically apply that template to devices when they are added to the group,
when they are removed from the group, or both.
●Congure devices policy: If you have already dened a device conguration template, this policy will
automatically apply that template to devices when they are added to the group, when they are removed
from the group, or both.
●Add or remove devices to supply group policy: If you have already dened a supply group, this policy will
automatically add devices to that supply group when they are added to the group, when they are removed
from the group, or both.
ENWW Groups 123
Example for Group Policies
Following is a simple example of applying a conguration template to a group:
●An administrator is named Pat.
●Pat has an HP Web Jetadmin group named “Pat’s Devices”.
●One policy setting on the group is a conguration template that sets the System Contact to “Pat” and the
Device Location to “Building 3”.
Change the Order in which HP Web Jetadmin Applies Policies
You can specify the order in which HP Web Jetadmin applies policies to devices that are added or removed from
a device group. When HP Web Jetadmin nishes applying one policy, it begins applying the next policy in the list.
If a device does not respond while HP Web Jetadmin is applying a policy, the policy execution task never
completes. In this case, HP Web Jetadmin does not apply the remaining policies in the list to the device. To avoid
this situation, HP Web Jetadmin provides a timeout setting with a default value of 450 minutes for each policy
execution task. If a policy execution task does not complete within this default timeout period, HP Web Jetadmin
begins executing the next policy in the list.
You can increase or decrease the timeout value, depending on the types of policies you dene for device groups
and the number of devices to which HP Web Jetadmin applies these policies during an execution phase. If you
only dene policies that do not take a long time to execute, such as installing solutions or fonts, or only add a
few devices to a device group at one time, you can decrease the timeout value. If you dene policies that take a
long time to execute, such as rmware upgrades, or add a large number of devices to a device group at one
time, you can increase the timeout value.
For example, assume that you dene a rmware upgrade policy and a subscribe to alerts policy for a device
group, and specify that the rmware upgrade policy is applied rst and the subscribe to alerts policy is applied
second. If you add 100 devices to this device group, HP Web Jetadmin begins executing the rmware upgrade
task for all the devices. If HP Web Jetadmin does not nish upgrading the rmware on all 100 devices within 450
minutes, it continues executing the rmware upgrade task on the remaining devices and begins executing the
subscribe to alerts task for all the devices. HP Web Jetadmin is now executing both policy tasks at the same
time. In this case, it is possible for HP Web Jetadmin to execute the subscribe to alerts policy on a device before it
executes the rmware upgrade policy on that device. To ensure that the policies are applied to devices in the
order you specied, you can increase the timeout value to allow additional time for HP Web Jetadmin to
complete the rmware upgrade task.
To change the default timeout value, perform the following steps:
124 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. Use Notepad or a similar editor to open the PolicyOrdering.cong.xml le. This le is available in the
following directory on the HP Web Jetadmin server:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
2. Find the following entry:
<ipmc:configuration xmlns:ipmc="www.hp.com/schemas/imaging/ipmc/
config/2004/02/24">
<property name="PolicyExecutionTaskTimeout">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>450</value>
</property>
</ipmc:configuration>
3. Change the <value> parameter to the number of minutes that are appropriate for the types of policy
execution tasks you dene and the number of devices you add to a device group at one time.
Security Restriction Settings for Groups
You can use a restricted role to specify which device groups a user can access and which management tasks the
user can perform for the devices in those device groups. For more information about using roles, see Roles
on page 280. For more information about managing users, see Users on page 283.
When a restricted role is assigned to a user, the user can view all of the device groups that are available. The
names of the device groups that the user can access based on the restricted role are highlighted in bold text. For
the devices in these device groups, the user can perform only the management tasks that are specied for the
restricted role.
For example, use the following steps to give User A permission to access only the devices that are in Group 1 and
permission to refresh and delete the devices that are in Group 1:
1. Create a restricted role. On the Specify permission settings page of the Create Role wizard, select Device
Groups from the Restriction type list, and select the Manage Devices check box.
2. Assign the restricted role to User A. On the Specify role settings page of the Assign User Role wizard, add
Group 1 to the Restrict permissions by group list.
When User A displays a list of all the available device groups, only Group 1 is highlighted in bold text. User A can
access, refresh, and delete the devices that are in Group 1. If User A tries to delete a device in any other device
group, HP Web Jetadmin displays an error message.
Groups - Common Tasks Task Module
The Groups - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for device groups:
●Create a device group
●Add devices to a device group
●Remove devices from a device group
●Edit the settings for a device group
●Delete a device group
●Edit the policies for a device group
ENWW Groups 125
●Import device groups
●Export device groups
Groups - Summary Task Module
The Groups - Summary task module provides the following information about the device groups:
●The number of device groups that include devices that have an Error or Warning status
●The number of device groups that have been created
●The number of devices that are assigned to device groups
●The number of devices that are not assigned to device groups
●The number of discovered devices
Groups - Management Task Module
The Groups - Management task module provides a list of the device groups that have been created. Use this task
module to perform the following tasks:
●Create a device group
●Edit the properties of a device group, including the group name
●Add devices to a device group
●Remove devices from a device group
●Delete a device group
●Display a list of the devices in a device group
Create a New Device Group
A device group is set of devices on your network. After you create a group, you can manipulate all of the devices
in that group. You can set up device groups so that device membership is either determined manually by you
(Manual group) or automatically based on criteria you specify (Automatic group).
Naming groups with meaningful descriptions makes it easier to nd a specic device group in a list. For example,
instead of assigning Payroll and Receivables as device group names, you could assign Accounts
Payroll and Accounts Receivables. These two device groups would then appear together in a sorted
list.
The Manual group feature allows you to add discovered devices to a device group, thereby giving you complete
control over the group membership. This method can be cumbersome if you have a lot of devices, and
membership may need to be reevaluated manually when new devices are discovered or added to the network.
However, this method may be required in certain grouping strategies, where the criteria cannot be evaluated
automatically (such as “Marketing,” “Payroll”, and “Sales” devices).
The Automatic group feature allows HP Web Jetadmin to automatically add newly discovered devices to a device
group if the devices meet specic criteria. Specify the lters that HP Web Jetadmin uses to determine if a new
device should be added to a device group. You can specify multiple lters for the device group. You can also use
the lters to remove devices from a device group when lter criteria does not apply to a device. Automatic group
126 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
membership is determined by lter settings; devices cannot be added to or removed from these groups
manually.
Use the following steps to create a device group:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Groups, and then select New group. The Create
Group wizard starts.
2. On the Specify group options page, specify the following settings:
●Group name: The following are characteristics of the group name:
–Can be up to 48 characters.
–Can have alphabetic characters.
–Can have numeric characters.
–Can have special characters, such as an apostrophe (‘) or hyphen (-).
–Can have Unicode characters.
–Cannot contain a forward slash or a backward slash.
–Can have the same name as another group if the two groups with identical names are in
dierent parent groups.
–Naming is exible and can be changed on existing groups.
●Parent group: Click the ... button, and then select the parent group. The following are characteristics
of parent groups:
–Can contain a subgroup that has the same name as another subgroup in a dierent parent
group.
–No known limits exist for the depth of parent groups and subgroups or the number of groups.
IMPORTANT: All primary device group criteria applies to subgroups.
●Group membership type: Determines how devices will be added to the group. Select:
–Manual group: Each device is added to the group manually.
–Automatic group: Devices are added to the group automatically depending upon the lters set
for the group.
3. To set the properties for the group, select the Congure group properties now checkbox.
4. Click Next.
5. If you are creating a manual group and did not select the Congure group properties now checkbox,
continue with step 9.
-or-
If you are creating a manual group or an automatic group and selected the Congure group properties now
checkbox, continue with step 6.
6. To create a manual group, perform the following steps:
a. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select
multiple devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use
ENWW Groups 127
the double arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or
view more columns by right-clicking the column headers.
b. Click Next.
To create an automatic group, perform the following steps:
a. On the Specify lter criteria page, dene the criteria that determines which devices are automatically
added to this group by using the Basic or Advanced editing option.
Select the Basic option, and then click Add. On the Function page, specify the following settings, and
then click OK:
●Device Property: Select the property from the drop-down list.
●Not: Check this if the devices should not match the lter criteria. Otherwise, devices matching
the lter criteria will be assigned to this group.
●Filter Function: Select the way in which the devices should match the lter criteria from the
drop-down box (contains, ends with, equals, and so forth).
●Value: Type the value for the lter criteria.
●Options: Choose to ignore the case to determine a match or to match the case.
●Category: Select Favorites (most commonly used lters), All (all the available lters, except
obsolete lters), or Obsolete (lters that are still available, but have been replaced by new lters
or will not be supported in the future).
Select the Advanced option, and then dene the lters as follows:
i. Type your own formula using the Insert button to insert various expressions.
ii. When you have nished, click Validate to ensure the formula for the lter is valid.
b. Click Next.
7. On the Specify group properties page, enter the description and contact information, and then click Next.
8. On the Congure group policies page, perform the following steps:
NOTE: The Policy column lists policies based on the user’s permissions. This list is blank if there are no
user permissions congured (User Security on page 278).
a. To add a policy to the device group, click Add. On the Add Policy page, select the appropriate options
from the Policy, Trigger, and Policy action lists, and then click Add. When you are nished adding
policies, click Close.
b. To delete a policy from the device group, select the policy in the Policies for devices added to group or
Policies for devices removed from group section, and then click Remove.
c. To specify the order in which the policies are applied to devices in the device group, select the policy in
the Policies for devices added to group or Policies for devices removed from group section, and then
click the up or down arrow.
d. When you are nished conguring the group policies, click Next.
9. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click Create Group.
10. On the Results page, select the View group checkbox if you want to open the group, and then click Done.
128 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Building a Compound Filter (Groups)
If you have created a basic lter and are not getting the results you need, you can create a compound lter. Once
you create a basic lter in the Filter Editor, you can click Advanced to view its layers. For example:
GT([IP Address], [192.168.40.0]) AND LT([IP Address], [192.168.47.255])
AND EQ([Device Name], [HP LaserJet 4100 MFP]) OR EQ(]Device Model],
[HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP])
The Advanced feature can be used to change the lter into two sub-lters that are compounded. Use the AND
function and add some open and closed parentheses:
(GT([IP Address], [192.168.40.0]) AND LT([IP Address], [192.168.47.255]))
AND (EQ(]Device Name], [HP LaserJet 4100 MFP]) OR EQ(]Device Model],
[HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP]))
NOTE: For backward compatibility with previous releases, HP Web Jetadmin still supports alternate symbols,
such as quotes (") and apostrophes ('), to enclose parameters for lter functions. HP Web Jetadmin automatically
changes alternate symbols to brackets when you exit the Advanced editor.
After this compound lter is added to the Specify lter criteria page, the Basic feature can no longer be used (you
will receive an error message).
Moving a Device Group
After a device group is created, you can move it to a dierent level within Groups. To move a device group,
expand Groups in the left navigation menu; click on the group to move and drag it to the group that should be its
parent. The Move Group wizard is displayed. Click Move Group and then click Done.
Add Devices to a Group
Managing a group of devices can be easier than managing individual devices. Adding devices to a group lets you
manage all of the devices in that group at the same time. Removing devices from a group means to delete them
from the group, but they will remain in the All Devices list. You can only add devices to a group that has been
identied as a manual group; devices are automatically added to any group identied as an automatic group
based on lter criteria (Manual versus Automatic Groups on page 122).
To add devices to groups, perform the following steps:
1. Select Groups in the left navigation pane. The Groups page is displayed.
On the Groups page, click Add devices to group. The Add Devices wizard is started with the Select group
page displayed.
2. Select the group to add devices to and click Next.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
4. Click Next. A Conrm page is displayed.
If changes need to be made, click Back and make corrections.
If no changes need to be made, click Add Devices. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display the
Groups page.
ENWW Groups 129
Remove Devices from a Manual Group
You can delete any device from a device group that has been identied as a manual group (Manual versus
Automatic Groups on page 122).
To remove devices from manual groups, perform the following steps:
1. Select Groups in the left navigation pane. The Groups page is displayed.
On the Groups page, click Remove devices from group. The Remove Devices wizard is started with the
Select group page displayed.
2. Select the manual group to remove devices from and click Next.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
4. Click Next. A Conrm page is displayed.
If changes need to be made, click Back and make corrections.
If no changes need to be made, click Remove Devices. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display
the Groups page.
Edit a Device Group
After a device group has been created, you can change its name, the devices in the group, how the devices are
assigned to that group (manually or automatically), or any of its properties.
To edit device groups, perform the following steps:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Groups, and then select Edit group. The Edit Group
wizard starts.
2. On the Select group page, click the ... button, select the group, and then click Next.
3. On the Specify group options page, enter the new group name and parent group name. Select the Manual
group or Automatic group option.
NOTE: When you change a device group from Manual to Automatic, devices that meet the lter criteria for
the automatic group will replace any devices that had been in the group when it was a manual group.
Changing a device group from Automatic to Manual will not cause the device membership to change; the
devices present in the group will be retained and manual modications can be performed on those devices.
If you rename the group, the group name must conform to the following specications:
●Must have a unique name within its parent group.
●Can be up to 48 characters.
●Can have alphabetic characters.
●Can have numeric characters.
●Can have special characters, such as an apostrophe (‘) or hyphen (-).
130 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Can have Unicode characters.
●Cannot contain a forward slash or a backward slash.
4. Click Next.
5. If you selected the Manual group option, perform the following steps:
a. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select
multiple devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use
the double arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or
view more columns by right-clicking the column headers.
b. Click Next.
If you selected the Automatic group option, perform the following steps:
a. On the Specify lter criteria page, dene the criteria that determines which devices are automatically
added to this group by using the Basic or Advanced editing option.
Select the Basic option, and then click Add. On the Function page, specify the following settings, and
then click OK:
●Device Property: Select the property from the drop-down list.
●Not: Check this if the devices should not match the lter criteria. Otherwise, devices matching
the lter criteria will be assigned to this group.
●Filter Function: Select the way in which the devices should match the lter criteria from the
drop-down box (contains, ends with, equals, and so forth).
●Value: Type the value for the lter criteria.
●Options: Choose to ignore the case to determine a match or to match the case.
●Category: Select Favorites (most commonly used lters), All (all the available lters, except
obsolete lters), or Obsolete (lters that are still available, but have been replaced by new lters
or will not be supported in the future).
Select the Advanced option, and then dene the lters as follows:
i. Type your own formula using the Insert button to insert various expressions.
ii. When you have nished, click Validate to ensure the formula for the lter is valid.
b. Click Next.
6. On the Specify group properties page, enter the description and contact information, and then click Next.
7. On the Congure group policies page, perform the following steps:
a. To add a policy to the device group, click Add. On the Add Policy page, select the appropriate options
from the Policy, Trigger, and Policy action lists, and then click Add. When you are nished adding
policies, click Close.
b. To delete a policy from the device group, select the policy in the Policies for devices added to group or
Policies for devices removed from group section, and then click Remove.
c. To specify the order in which the policies are applied to devices in the device group, select the policy in
the Policies for devices added to group or Policies for devices removed from group section, and then
click the up or down arrow.
d. When you are nished conguring the group policies, click Next.
8. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click Save Group.
ENWW Groups 131
NOTE: Automatic group membership is determined by lter settings; devices cannot be added to or
removed from these groups manually.
9. On the Results page, select the View group checkbox if you want to open the group, and then click Done.
Delete a Device Group
You can keep your groups current by removing those groups that are no longer needed.
If you delete a device group with a map, all map information associated with that group is permanently deleted
from HP Web Jetadmin. For more information about maps, see Mapping on page 101.
To delete device groups, perform the following steps:
1. Select Groups in the left navigation pane. The Groups page is displayed.
On the Groups page, click Delete device group. The Delete Group wizard is started with the Select groups
page displayed.
2. Highlight the group or groups (must be at the same level) to delete.
NOTE: Multiple groups, if at the same level, can be selected; use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click.
3. Click Next. A Conrm page is displayed.
If changes need to be made, click Back and make corrections.
If no changes need to be made, click Delete. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display the Groups
page.
Edit Device Group Policies
You can make changes to device group policies.
To edit device group policies, perform the following steps:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Groups, and then select Edit group policies. The Edit
Group Policies wizard starts.
2. On the Select group page, click the ... button, select the group, and then click Next.
3. On the Congure group policies page, perform the following steps:
a. To add a policy to the device group, click Add. On the Add Policy page, select the appropriate options
from the Policy, Trigger, and Policy action lists, and then click Add. When you are nished adding
policies, click Close.
b. To delete a policy from the device group, select the policy in the Policies for devices added to group or
Policies for devices removed from group section, and then click Remove.
c. To specify the order in which the policies are applied to devices in the device group, select the policy in
the Policies for devices added to group or Policies for devices removed from group section, and then
click the up or down arrow.
d. When you are nished conguring the group policies, click Next.
4. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click Save Policies.
5. On the Results page, click Done.
132 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Import Device Groups
You can import device groups from an XML le. The format of the XML le must match the format of the le
created by Export Group.
NOTE: Group Policies are not part of the Groups Import/Export feature set. These policy settings must be
created manually on the target HP Web Jetadmin instance where after Groups import has been completed.
To import device groups, perform the following steps:
1. In the left navigation pane, right-click Groups and then click Import. The Import Groups wizard is started
with the Select options page displayed.
2. Specify the le to import and then identify the parent group (if any) for his imported device group. The
parent group must already exist on HP Web Jetadmin.
3. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed listing any device groups you are importing.
4. Click Import Group. The Results page is displayed.
5. Click Done.
Export Device Groups
You can export device groups to an XML le.
To export device groups, perform the following steps:
1. In the left navigation pane, right-click Groups and then click Export. The Export Groups wizard is started
with the Select groups page displayed.
2. Select the group by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
groups, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons.
If a group is being added whose parent group has already been added, you will be prompted for the desired
location of this group.
3. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed listing any device groups you are exporting.
4. Click Export Group and choose a location on the client machine and a lename.
5. Click Save. The Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done.
Rename a Device Group
You can change the name of a group to give it a more meaningful name.
To rename device groups, perform the following steps:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand the Groups node and right-click on the specic group to rename; select
Rename.
2. Type the new name and click Enter. A group name:
ENWW Groups 133
●Must have a unique name within its parent group.
●Can be up to 48 characters.
●Can have alphabetic characters.
●Can have numeric characters.
●Can have special characters (such as “‘” or “-”).
●Can have Unicode characters.
●Cannot contain a forward slash or a backward slash.
View a Device Group
You can view device groups that have been created.
To view device groups, perform the following steps:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Groups.
2. Select the group you want to view.
Search for Groups
You can use the Groups Search feature to quickly nd a group that meets specic criteria. The Groups Search
feature supports regular expressions.
NOTE: For more information about regular expressions, go to the MSDN Library, and then search for regular
expressions.
To search for a group, perform the following steps:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Groups, and then select Search. The Groups Search
window appears.
2. In the Name box, enter the search criteria. You can use the following special characters in the search
criteria:
●*: Matches the preceding character zero or more times. For example, if you specify zo*, group
names that contain z, zo, or zoo are considered a match.
●?: Matches the preceding character zero or one time. For example, if you specify a?ve?, group
names that contain v or ve are considered a match.
You can use these special characters together to specify the following searches:
●*?: Repeats the search criteria any number of times, but as few times as possible.
●??: Repeats the search criteria zero or one time, but as few times as possible.
All other characters are treated as normal characters.
3. Click the Search button. A list of all the groups that meet the search criteria appears.
4. Select the group that you want to display, and then click the OK button.
134 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Discovery
Discovery features enable HP Web Jetadmin to nd devices and then add them to the HP Web Jetadmin device
lists. You might have information about the network that can be used in HP Web Jetadmin discovery settings, but
some discovery features enable you to search for devices without networking details.
A powerful discovery engine exists within HP Web Jetadmin enabling you to locate most devices on both small
and large networks. HP Web Jetadmin includes a new discovery for printers located in Active Directories (Active
Directory Discovery on page 149). Scheduling and discovery templates allow you to tailor HP Web Jetadmin
features to any topology or geographically deployed printer eet. (See also Schedule Discoveries on page 163
and Create Discovery Templates on page 166.)
Discovery features in HP Web Jetadmin include:
●Active Directory Discovery on page 149.
●Import and Export Features of IP Range Files on page 145.
●IP Range calculator (Setting Realistic Ranges on page 143).
●View Discovery History on page 165.
●Discovery Templates (Create Discovery Templates on page 166).
●Manage Blocked Devices on page 64.
●Integrated PC-Connected device discovery (PC-Connected Device Discoveries on page 137).
Network devices can be automatically discovered on multiple subnets and then managed. The following types of
discovery are currently supported:
●SLP Multicast Discovery on page 140: An SLP Multicast request is sent out on the network to evoke a
response from devices connected to HP Jetdirect print servers.
●IP Broadcast Discovery on page 141: An SNMP Broadcast is sent to the specied Broadcast address. SNMP
Devices respond.
●IP Range Discovery on page 142: Searches for devices within a range of IP addresses.
●Specied Device Address Discovery on page 147: You can add address lists of known devices to
HP Web Jetadmin to query only specic end nodes.
●Active Directory Discovery on page 149: Queries Microsoft Active Directory using an Active Directory
starting point such as domain, organization units (OUs), or other Active Directory containers.
●Domain Discovery on page 151: For PC-Connected devices, the domain is browsed to identify Windows
hosts on the network.
●WS-Discovery on page 152: A Web Services request is sent out on the network to evoke a response from
network-connected and PC-connected devices that support the Web Services protocol.
●Quick Device Discovery on page 139 is also available to discover devices when you add the hostname or IP
address information to this feature anywhere in Device Management. Plus, HP Web Jetadmin can listen for
SLP announcements that are propagated from HP Jetdirect-connected devices. This passive mechanism
requires no additional settings and only generates network trac when HP Web Jetadmin receives an SLP
announcement.
In addition to gathering devices that are directly connected to the network, HP Web Jetadmin can nd PC-
Connected devices. These are devices that are connected through USB or parallel connectors to either desktops
or servers on the network (Discovery Types and Methods on page 136).
When you initially install HP Web Jetadmin, you will be asked if you want to run a discovery immediately. You can
request to discover devices at any time. By default, HP Web Jetadmin does not listen for SLP broadcasts; when
ENWW Discovery 135
passive SLP is enabled, some devices may be found by this type of discovery even if you do not initiate a
discovery.
Discovering Devices with HP Web Jetadmin through Firewalls
Although rewalls provide a secure perimeter for business resources, they can also present a barrier to software
products. HP Web Jetadmin provides the ability to discover and manage devices throughout a business network.
HP Web Jetadmin uses Multicast and SLP techniques to discover devices on your network. Using standard
rewall congurations, multicasts are typically blocked because the communication port on which it relies is
blocked. To facilitate a broadcast discovery such as Multicast and SLP, HP Web Jetadmin uses the well-known
static port, UDP port number 427. To enable this discovery technique, the machine running HP Web Jetadmin
must unblock the port used from within the rewall settings.
Discovery Types and Methods
HP Web Jetadmin performs the following types of discoveries:
●Network-connected device discoveries—HP Web Jetadmin nds a network node and then sends SNMP
queries to discover the devices that are connected directly to that network node. After the SNMP query
resolves a device, the device is displayed in the All Devices list. Resolved devices can include HP Jetdirect-
connected devices, third-party devices, HP network scanners, HP network projectors, and so on. For more
information, see Network-Connected Device Discoveries on page 136.
●PC-connected device discoveries—HP Web Jetadmin nds PCs and then discovers the devices that are
connected to an LPT port or USB port on those PCs. HP SNMP Proxy Agent is a small software package that
facilitates communication between HP Web Jetadmin and the PC-connected devices. If HP SNMP Proxy
Agent is installed on the PC, HP Web Jetadmin gathers detailed information about the connected devices. If
HP SNMP Proxy Agent is not installed on the PC, HP Web Jetadmin gathers only a minimal amount of device
information about the connected devices. For more information, see PC-Connected Device Discoveries
on page 137.
Most of the discovery methods are available for both network-connected discoveries and PC-connected
discoveries. The following table identies whether a discovery method can be selected for each discovery type.
Discovery method Network-connected device discoveries PC-connected device discoveries
Quick Device Discovery on page 139 Yes No
SLP Multicast Discovery on page 140 Yes No
IP Broadcast Discovery on page 141 Yes Yes
IP Range Discovery on page 142 Yes Yes
Specied Device Address Discovery
on page 147
Yes Yes
Active Directory Discovery on page 149 Yes Yes
Domain Discovery on page 151 No Yes
WS-Discovery on page 152 Yes Yes
136 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Network-Connected Device Discoveries
HP Web Jetadmin uses several methods to nd devices that are connected directly to the network. Regardless of
the method used, HP Web Jetadmin rst nds nodes on the network. Then HP Web Jetadmin determines if the
nodes are qualied printing or imaging devices by using the SNMP protocol to query the nodes for specic SNMP
objects. HP Web Jetadmin adds the qualied devices to the database and displays them in the All Devices list.
In most cases, the IP addresses for devices are static. However, IP addresses can change in some situations,
such as when the device is moved or DHCP is used to assign device addresses. In these cases, HP Web Jetadmin
automatically changes a device’s IP address in the database when it detects a change in that IP address.
PC-Connected Device Discoveries
HP Web Jetadmin can discover printers that are connected directly to PCs. A PC-connected device discovery
queries the local PCs to nd devices that are connected to an LPT port or USB port on the local PC. HP SNMP
Proxy Agent is a small software package that facilitates the communication between HP Web Jetadmin and the
PC-connected devices. If HP SNMP Proxy Agent is installed on a PC, HP Web Jetadmin gathers detailed
information about the connected devices. If HP SNMP Proxy Agent is not installed on a PC, HP Web Jetadmin
gathers only a minimal amount of device information about the connected devices.
When a PC-connected device discovery runs, HP Web Jetadmin communicates directly with the local PC in one of
the following ways:
●HP SNMP Proxy Agent—HP Web Jetadmin looks for HP SNMP Proxy Agent on the PC. If HP SNMP Proxy
Agent is installed, HP Web Jetadmin queries the device through the proxy agent in much the same way as it
queries devices that are connected directly to the network. Many pieces of information about the devices
are available, such as the status, page count, and supply levels.
●Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI)—WMI is a Microsoft service that runs on most Windows
operating systems. Remote management applications use WMI to gather information. HP Web Jetadmin
performs a query through WMI on the PCs that are found by using the various discovery methods. This
query attempts to resolve Windows printer model details for devices that are plug-and-play compatible.
The WMI PC-connected discovery solution does not gather the status or other details from the device. The
WMI PC-connected discovery requires administrator (local) credentials on each host queried.
PC-connected device discoveries use dierent query protocols depending on the discovery method. The
following table shows the primary and secondary protocols for each discovery method. If communication is
possible by using the primary protocol, HP Web Jetadmin queries the devices. If communication is not possible
by using the primary protocol, HP Web Jetadmin uses the secondary protocol to query the devices.
PC-connected device discovery method Primary protocol Secondary protocol
IP Broadcast SNMP WMI1
IP Range SNMP WMI
Specied Addresses SNMP WMI
Active Directory SNMP WMI
Domain SNMP WMI
1IP Broadcast discoveries send an SNMP query to a broadcast address. IP Broadcast discoveries nd devices through WMI only if the PC is
capable of responding to SNMP queries. The SNMP service must be enabled on the PC for it to respond to SNMP queries.
Discoveries that use the WMI protocol require administrative access to the PC that is being queried. The local
administrator password can be used. However, in many environments a domain user is granted administrative
ENWW Discovery 137
privileges on the local Windows hosts. Administrative credentials are entered when the discovery is initiated by
using the Specify credentials to use for this discovery option.
Network-connected and PC-connected devices are added to the All Devices list. To identify devices that are
discovered by PC-connected device discoveries, add the PC Connected column to the device lists.
HP SNMP Proxy Agent
HP SNMP Proxy Agent is software that is installed on a desktop client PC. HP Web Jetadmin uses HP SNMP Proxy
Agent to discover and manage locally connected (for example, USB-connected) HP printers and scanners.
HP SNMP Proxy Agent exposes management objects through the Microsoft SNMP service on the client PC. A
simple PC-connected device discovery in HP Web Jetadmin discovers the locally attached devices.
HP Web Jetadmin then uses the proxy to gather additional information about the devices, such as remaining
toner levels, page counts, and status. HP SNMP Proxy Agent is available from www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin. For
more information about the requirements and important support details, see the HP SNMP Proxy Agent Readme.
This Readme is available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (in English).
Troubleshoot PC-connected Device Discoveries
Administrators can use the log les in HP Web Jetadmin to troubleshoot PC-connected device discoveries. The
log les are useful when running Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) or HP SNMP Proxy Agent
discoveries. The log les do not capture details about network-connected device discoveries.
To enable logging, perform the following steps:
1. Use Notepad or a similar editor to open the DiscoveryManager.cong.xml le. This le is available in the
following directory:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
2. Find the following property:
<property name="DiscoveryLogEnabled”>
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>False</value>
</property>
3. Change the <value> entry to True.
4. Find the following property:
<property name="NumDiscoveryLogs">
<type>HP.Imaging.Wjp.Sdk.Core.Framework.ConfigurationItemString
</type>
<value>2</value>
</property>
This property is useful when PC-connected device discoveries are performed over a long period of time.
The default setting causes HP Web Jetadmin to overwrite a second log le for each new discovery.
5. To increase the number of log les that HP Web Jetadmin creates, change the <value> entry to the
required number of log les.
138 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
6. Close and save the DiscoveryManager.cong.xml le.
7. Restart the HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJA Service). For instructions, see Restart the HP Web Jetadmin
Service Manually on page 21.
CAUTION: Be careful when restarting the HP Web Jetadmin service. Conicts with existing operations,
such as rmware upgrades, alerts, and data collection, might occur.
Each time HP Web Jetadmin contacts an address to determine if a PC-connected device is present,
HP Web Jetadmin adds an entry to the log les in the following directory:
C:\Windows\ServiceProles\NetworkService\AppData\Local\HP Inc\HPWebJetadmin\WjaService\cong
\FileStore\Discovery\Specied
The following are examples of log entries:
●An SNMP error occurred when trying to contact remote server
An SNMP-related error occurred.
●An SNMP Credentials error has occurred
SNMP credentials are required for the device.
●An SNMP Timeout error has occurred
SNMP did not respond within the specied HP Web Jetadmin timeout settings. For more information about
the SNMP timeout settings, see Congure the SNMP Settings on page 46.
●The remote server machine does not exist or is unavailable
The remote host does not qualify as a PC-connected host.
●A Timeout occurred trying to contact Remote Host
A timeout occurred while trying to start a WMI session with the host.
●The Remote host could not be contacted
A WMI session could not be started.
●Access is denied
The remote host denied access to a WMI session.
Quick Device Discovery
If you know the IP address or hostname of a network-connected device, you can use the Quick Device Discovery
feature to nd the device instead of running a full network discovery. To use the IP hostname for the Quick
Device Discovery feature, DNS lookups must be enabled. For instructions on enabling DNS lookups, see
Congure the DNS Settings on page 47.
You can only use the Quick Device Discovery feature to nd PC-connected devices if the devices are already in the
HP Web Jetadmin database. To nd a PC-connected device that is not in the database, you must run a device
discovery and use the PC connected devices option. For more information about PC-connected device
discoveries, see PC-Connected Device Discoveries on page 137.
To nd a network-connected device, the Quick Device Discovery feature searches the device addresses in the
HP Web Jetadmin database. If the device address is in the database, HP Web Jetadmin highlights the device in
the All Devices list. If the device address is not in the database, HP Web Jetadmin performs a network query only
ENWW Discovery 139
for network-connected devices. If the device address is found on the network, HP Web Jetadmin adds the device
to the database and highlights the device in the All Devices list.
The Quick Device Discovery feature does not search the device lists. For instructions on searching the visible
columns in device lists, see Search Device Lists on page 114.
To perform a Quick Device Discovery, perform the following steps:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, enter the IP address or hostname for the device in the Quick
Device Discovery box, and then click the Go button.
2. If the device is not found, perform the following steps:
a. Click the Credentials may be required to locate the device link.
b. On the Enter Credentials window, select the Use checkbox, enter the SNMPv1 Get Community Name
for the device, and then click the OK button.
c. If the device is found, continue with step 3.
-or-
If the device is not found, click the Cancel button, and then click the OK button on the Quick Device
Discovery window. Verify that the device is connected to the network, verify the device address and
credentials, and then repeat the Quick Device Discovery.
3. On the Quick Device Discovery window, click the OK button.
SLP Multicast Discovery
(For network device discoveries only.)
A discovery using SLP multicast requires minimal settings to launch. SLP (service location protocol) is used to
cast a query onto the network for the purpose of nding HP Jetdirect devices. After initial device response, SNMP
follow-up queries are performed to learn more about devices and add them to the All Device list in
HP Web Jetadmin. This discovery mechanism nds HP Jetdirect devices on both local and remote subnets.
Characteristics of an SLP Multicast discovery for network devices include:
●Multicast packets are sent to the HP Jetdirect-specic multicast address: 224.0.1.60.
●Packets contain a router hop-counter (IP time to live attribute) that can be set from within
HP Web Jetadmin (default 4 hops).
●Packets expire when router hop-counter reaches zero.
●The discovery mechanism is fast.
●The discovery presents low network trac.
●HP Jetdirect rmware must be at least x.06.00 or greater.
●Only HP Jetdirect-connected printers will be discovered.
The reach of SLP multicast discovery will depend upon the:
●Setting for Routers to cross (hops) (a conguration option for Discovery; see Congure the General Settings
for Device Discoveries on page 64).
●Conguration of the network routers; if the router is congured to pass multicast requests on to other
sections of your network, then a discovery could potentially discover devices on your entire network.
140 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
The other option to control the reach of the discoveries is to congure the multicast request to span a certain
number of routers (Congure the General Settings for Device Discoveries on page 64). Spanning routers will
require the routers to be congured to allow multicast request to be forwarded.
The discovery could also be aected by the conguration of your local rewall (Discovering Devices with
HP Web Jetadmin through Firewalls on page 136).
If the router is congured to pass multicast requests on to other sections of the network, and Discovery is
congured to cross multiple routers, then a discovery could potentially discover devices across multiple subnets
and perhaps your entire network.
Details About Running an SLP Multicast Discovery
(For network device discoveries only.)
If one of the discovery methods you choose is SLP multicast (while creating templates (Create Discovery
Templates on page 166), editing templates (Edit Discovery Templates on page 168), or scheduling (Schedule
Discoveries on page 163)), then the Choose SLP multicast settings page is displayed. On this page, select the
number of routers to cross (or hops) for the discovery. Increasing the number of hops might increase the amount
of time for the discovery to complete; plus, it generates more network trac than a discovery with fewer routers
to cross.
HP Web Jetadmin does not add devices that cannot be resolved and managed via SNMP, which might be due to
insucient credentials, to the device list. HP Web Jetadmin enforces device manageability through SNMP before
adding devices to the device list.
IP Broadcast Discovery
IP Broadcast discoveries send SNMP query packets (in the form of IP broadcasts) to one or more IP network(s).
These are used in both PC-Connected and network device discoveries.
IP Broadcast Discoveries for Network Devices
An IP Broadcast discovery enables you to nd devices or HP Web Jetadmin installations when IP broadcast
addressees are known. IP broadcast discoveries send SNMP query packets (in the form of IP broadcasts) to one
or more IP network(s). One network-specic broadcast address exists for each IP subnet on an IP intranet. IP
subnets are determined by the IP network number and the IP subnet mask. IP calculators, available free on the
Internet, are a great way to determine IP broadcast addresses. An all 1s IP broadcast can also be used to query
the entire intranet. Broadcasting is typically blocked by routers due to trac spike concerns.
Characteristics of IP broadcast discoveries for network devices include:
●Sends SNMP queries over one or more IP broadcasts.
●Listens for replies and then qualies network connected devices.
●Default broadcast is the Global Broadcast Address (255.255.255.255).
●Can use one or more known IP broadcast addresses with optional address descriptions.
●Limited checking is performed to determine if the broadcast address is valid.
●Fast and thorough, especially on a local segment.
●Most modern networks block broadcast trac.
ENWW Discovery 141
IP Broadcast Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices
IP broadcast discoveries for PC-Connected devices send an SNMP query to the IP broadcast address specied. An
all 1s broadcast is the default. Systems with the SNMP Proxy Agent rst answer with the operating system.
HP Web Jetadmin follows up with queries to both host and to printer specic objects. IP Broadcast discovery
does not attempt WMI queries when no SNMP proxy agent exists.
Characteristics of IP broadcast discoveries for PC-Connected devices include:
●Settings are the same as network device.
●SNMP queries are attempted on discovered nodes.
●If no SNMP Proxy Agent response, WMI queries are performed when credentials exist in settings.
NOTE: Legacy editions of Microsoft Windows Server that have HP SNMP Proxy Agent or HP WS Pro Proxy Agent
do not always respond to IP broadcasts from the HP Web Jetadmin server. HP recommends that you use
alternate discovery methods to nd PC-connected devices on legacy editions of Microsoft Windows Server.
Details About Running an IP Broadcast Discovery
1. In the left navigation pane, click Discovery and then click Discover devices on my network (in the Discovery -
Current Tasks task module). The Device Discovery wizard is started with the Specify discovery options page
displayed.
2. Select Specify settings and then select IP broadcast. Click Next. The Select IP broadcast address page is
displayed.
3. You can:
●Select a broadcast address.
●Add: Add a broadcast. Type the address in Address and type a description (if desired) in Description.
Then click Add.
●Show favorites only: View only the broadcast addresses you have added by clicking Show favorites
only (at the bottom of the page).
●Remove: Remove addresses from the list by highlighting the address and clicking Remove.
●Customize: Add or remove addresses to favorites by clicking Customize. Then select an address and
click Add Favorite or Remove Favorite. When done, click OK (Customizing IP Ranges for Discoveries
on page 146).
4. Click Next.
IP Range Discovery
In contrast to running a broadcast discovery (where all devices or HP Web Jetadmin installations in the subnet
are queried), you can choose to discover a specied IP range or a number of IP ranges. This reduces network
trac and eliminates the possibility of having unwanted devices. HP Web Jetadmin installations show up in the
database. IP Range discovery searches for devices or HP Web Jetadmin installations within a range of IP
addresses. This type of discovery is accurate and thorough but can be slow for large ranges.
142 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
IP Range Discovery is eective when the administrator has knowledge of IP segments. Administrators use IP
Range Discovery settings to map IP segments or groups of IP segments into HP Web Jetadmin discovery. This
method eciently sweeps selected portions of the network or WAN. IP Range address pairs consist of beginning
and ending IP addresses. IP Range discoveries rst ping specic IP addresses as dened by range address pairs.
If the device responds, HP Web Jetadmin follows with SNMP queries. Multiple ranges can be specied in IP Range
discoveries. HP Web Jetadmin pings in bursts of 30 queries to the rst set of addresses from the rst range and
then waits one second before sending the next burst of 30 queries.
Setting Realistic Ranges
Most networks are divided up into subnets, which can be used to describe a network IP addressing scheme and
are sometimes referred to as IP maps. A subnet within a large network can be described with a network number
and a subnet mask. This is an example of one subnet with an IP range of 15.5.188.1 through 15.5.191.254:
●Network number example: 15.5.188.0
●Subnet mask example: 255.255.252.0
There are 1,022 possible addresses on this subnet. It may take HP Web Jetadmin only about 10 minutes to
discover devices on this network depending on the network, the number of devices on that network, and the
host on which HP Web Jetadmin is installed.
NOTE: IP address calculators are an easy way to analyze IP networks. Many free versions of IP calculators exist
and can be obtained on the Internet.
IP Range discovery can perform to expectations when the range data has been correctly developed. It is easy to
congure ranges that are larger than needed and actually cause the discovery to take a long time and perhaps
even yield little in the way of devices. For example, a class A range could easily be developed for the HP intranet
but would literally take weeks to complete. On most large networks, the majority of the IP addresses won’t
answer the HP Web Jetadmin query and will cause timeouts to occur; these translate into very long discovery
times.
If you specify an IP range that is very large, your network might crash if that IP range is for a class A or class B
network (when the rst two octets of the IP range are not the same). HP Web Jetadmin will display a warning
message stating that a large range might cause a large amount of network trac; you can choose to continue or
change the range.
You can choose to specify a large subnet range using the larger subnet address feature (Tools > Options >
Shared > Discovery > Methods > IP Range > General). Large networks are considered any network bigger than a
Class B network, which has up to 65,000 nodes.
Setting Ranges Based on Subnets or Contiguous Subnets
Since large IP ranges can cause HP Web Jetadmin discovery to take long periods of time to complete, it can be
useful to use subnet ranges rather than the entire network for a discovery. These subnets, when put together
into one list, represent an IP map. This type of a map can be obtained from an IT or Network Infrastructure team.
It is also a good idea to work with these teams to discuss plans for implementing HP Web Jetadmin discoveries.
NOTE: HP strongly recommends that you discuss HP Web Jetadmin discoveries with your information
technology or network administration team.
Here is an example of IP range planning. Assume we have 27 subnets on our hypothetical network. All of these
subnets use the same subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Here are the network numbers that represent our 27
subnets:
ENWW Discovery 143
15.0.1.0, 15.0.2.0, 15.0.3.0, 15.0.4.0, 15.0.5.0, 15.0.30.0, 15.0.31.0, 15.0.32.0, 15.0.33.0, 15.0.34.0, 15.0.35.0,
15.0.36.0, 15.0.37.0, 15.0.38.0, 15.0.39.0, 15.0.55.0, 15.0.64.0, 15.0.65.0, 15.0.66.0, 15.0.67.0, 15.0.68.0,
15.0.69.0, 15.0.70.0, 15.0.71.0, 15.0.72.0, 15.0.73.0, 15.0.74.0
From this information, we can formulate the following IP address ranges and import them into
HP Web Jetadmin:
●15.0.1.1-15.0.1.254
●15.0.2.1-15.0.2.254
●15.0.3.1-15.0.3.254
●15.0.4.1-15.0.4.254
●15.0.5.1-15.0.5.254
●15.0.30.1-15.0.30.254
●15.0.31.1-15.0.31.254
●15.0.32.1-15.0.32.254
●15.0.33.1-15.0.33.254
●15.0.34.1-15.0.34.254
●15.0.35.1-15.0.35.254
●15.0.36.1-15.0.36.254
●15.0.37.1-15.0.37.254
●15.0.38.1-15.0.38.254
●15.0.39.1-15.0.39.254
●15.0.55.1-15.0.55.254
●15.0.64.1-15.0.64.254
●15.0.65.1-15.0.65.254
●15.0.66.1-15.0.66.254
●15.0.67.1-15.0.67.254
●15.0.68.1-15.0.68.254
●15.0.69.1-15.0.69.254
●15.0.70.1-15.0.70.254
●15.0.71.1-15.0.71.254
●15.0.72.1-15.0.72.254
●15.0.73.1-15.0.73.254
●15.0.74.1-15.0.74.254
We can take the formulation one step further and simplify things. Some of the IP ranges are contiguous. These
contiguously-addressed subnets are one after the other, in order, making it easy to combine them. The nal
result would look like this:
144 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●15.0.1.1-15.0.5.254
●15.0.30.1-15.0.39.254
●15.0.55.1-15.0.55.254
●15.0.64.1-15.0.74.254
This has reduced the number of IP ranges from 27 to 4. We can build this into a form that is easily imported into
HP Web Jetadmin and also reects descriptions. Here is an example of data that can be imported via a text le:
●15.0.1.1-15.0.5.254 = subnet range for western area
●15.0.30.1-15.0.39.254 = subnet range for central area
●15.0.55.1-15.0.55.254 = subnet range for branch oce
●15.0.64.1-15.0.74.254 = subnet range for eastern area
Consolidating ranges makes dealing with large quantities of data simpler but may not help when descriptions
are needed for the purpose of cataloging ranges.
Import and Export Features of IP Range Files
IP range data can be developed in other tools and imported through text les. In fact, HP Web Jetadmin can
export IP range data to text les. This makes it easier to deal with large numbers of IP ranges, manipulate
complex data and archive data for use in multiple instances. Tile format for IP Range import and export le
format can be broken down as follows:
●1 range per line
●Each IP address is separated by a hyphen character (-)
●Comment or description strings can be appended to the IP range by using an equal character (=)
Here is an example of 1 IP range with a comment: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx-xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx=descriptive text string
(where xxx represents an octet in the IP address).
There is no known limit to the number of IP ranges manageable within HP Web Jetadmin software. IP ranges are
also used by other features like PC-Connected printer discovery and HP Web Jetadmin Installations discovery. All
IP ranges entered into HP Web Jetadmin can also be managed globally from within Tools > Options > Shared >
Discovery > Methods > IP Range > IP Ranges.
IP Range Discoveries for Network Devices
IP Range discoveries for network devices or HP Web Jetadmin installations rst send an SNMP query to all
addresses within the range. When nodes are discovered, HP Web Jetadmin performs queries to determine
qualied devices. These qualied devices, when found, are added to the device lists.
Characteristics of IP range discoveries for network devices or HP Web Jetadmin installations include:
●IP ranges are simply two addresses that represent range begin and end points.
●Multiple ranges can be specied in an IP Range discovery.
●IP range data can be manually added through the user interface.
●IP ranges can be imported to HP Web Jetadmin from text les.
●Multiple IP ranges can be added and with optional, descriptive tags.
ENWW Discovery 145
●HP Web Jetadmin sends 1 query to each address represented by the range.
●HP Web Jetadmin pings the device ranges in bursts of 30.
●HP Web Jetadmin has features to calculate IP ranges based on:
–Local client host
–HP Web Jetadmin server host
–Device
●HP Web Jetadmin IP Range discoveries have proven to be eective, accurate and thorough.
●HP Web Jetadmin IP Range discoveries can be very slow if not congured properly.
●HP Web Jetadmin IP Range discoveries can draw security attention due to their scanning action.
Customizing IP Ranges for Discoveries
To customize the IP ranges for discoveries, perform the following steps:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Discovery, and then select Discover devices. The
Device Discovery wizard starts.
2. On the Specify discovery options page, select the IP Range option, and then click Next.
3. On the Select IP ranges page, click Customize.
4. To add an address to the favorites list, select the address, and then click Add Favorite.
5. To delete an address from the favorites list, select the address, and then click Remove Favorite.
6. Click OK, and then continue with the Device Discovery wizard.
IP Range Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices
IP Range discoveries for PC-Connected devices rst send an SNMP query to all addresses within the range. If
SNMP communication is possible on a device, the discovery attempts to nd a locally connected printer. If no
SNMP communication is possible and if the user provided administrative credentials, the discovery will attempt
to nd a locally connected printer on the device.
Characteristics of IP range discoveries for PC-Connected devices include:
●IP Range scanning is same as network connected.
●Nodes representing hosts are detected.
●SNMP queries are attempted on discovered nodes.
●If no SNMP Proxy Agent response, WMI queries are performed when credentials exist in settings.
Details About Running an IP Range Discovery
The Select IP ranges page is displayed when you choose IP range as the discovery method while:
●Creating discovery templates (Create Discovery Templates on page 166)
●Editing discovery templates (Edit Discovery Templates on page 168)
146 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Scheduling a discovery (Schedule Discoveries on page 163)
●Running a Web Jetadmin discovery (Discover Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin on page 288)
On the Select IP ranges page, you can select the IP address ranges displayed or you can edit the ranges.
1. Choose the action to take:
●Select an IP range.
●Add: Add an IP range by clicking Add. Type the range in First address and Last address; then type a
description (if desired) in Description. Click Add.
To calculate a range, click Calculate range. The Calculate IP Range page is displayed:
–Subnet from my computer: Automatically use IP address ranges currently found on the local
subnet of your computer. You can add a description in Description if desired.
–Subnet from WJA server: Automatically use IP address ranges currently found on the subnet of
the HP Web Jetadmin server. You can add a description in Description if desired.
–Subnet from network address: Type a known IP address and subnet mask. You can add a
description in Description if desired.
●Edit: Make changes to IP ranges by clicking Edit. Follow the steps in the bullet above for “Add”.
●Delete: Remove addresses from the list by highlighting the address and clicking Delete.
●Import: If desired, import a range list by clicking Import and then browse for the range list.
●Export: If desired, export a range list by clicking Export and then browse for location you want to store
the range list.
●Show favorites only: View only the IP ranges you have added by clicking Show favorites only (at the
bottom of the page).
●Customize: Add or remove addresses to favorites by clicking Customize. Then select an address and
click Add Favorite or Remove Favorite. When done, click OK.
2. Click OK.
Specied Device Address Discovery
Sometimes there is enough information about your device eet that enables building a base of device
addresses. These addresses can be added to HP Web Jetadmin through the Specied Address option (see
Manage the Address Lists for Specied Address Discoveries on page 49).
Specied Device Address discoveries use an explicit list of device addresses. These addresses can be IP
hostnames or IP addresses. IP hostnames can have fully qualied domain information appended. Address
information can be both imported from and exported to text les. Specied Device Address discovery works
similarly to IP Range discovery; HP Web Jetadmin simply moves down a list of addresses, performing queries
and adding qualied devices to the all devices list.
Here is an example of a small specied address base:
●15.5.2.1
●15.5.62.4
●15.5.8.3
●15.5.8.7
ENWW Discovery 147
●BP005a.yourco.com
●BP065
●BP076.yourco.com
NOTE: For PC-Connected device discoveries, HP Web Jetadmin follows SNMP queries with WMI queries when no
SNMP Proxy Agent has been detected on the remote host.
Specied Device Address Discoveries for Network Devices
Network device discovery queries each address in the list specied. Devices qualied through these queries are
added to the All Devices list.
Characteristics of Specied Device Address discoveries for network devices include:
●Specied device address discoveries nd devices based on user supplied addresses.
●IP address or hostnames are valid address forms.
●HP Web Jetadmin initially qualies the device by using an SNMP query.
●Follow-up queries through SNMP qualify the device and place it into the All Devices list if appropriate.
●This discovery is very fast and only hits the addresses specied by the user.
●This discovery is only as accurate as the address base specied by the user.
●Addresses can be entered into HP Web Jetadmin one by one or they can be imported from text le.
●In HP Web Jetadmin, addresses can be exported to text le.
Specied Device Address Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices
Specied Address discoveries for PC-Connected devices rst send an SNMP query to all addresses within the list
of addresses. If SNMP communication is possible on a device, the discovery attempts to nd a locally connected
printer. If no SNMP communication is possible and if the user provided administrative credentials, the discovery
will attempt to nd a locally connected printer on the device using WMI protocol.
Characteristics of Specied Device Address discoveries for PC-Connected devices include:
●Specied address scan is the same as network connected.
●Nodes representing hosts are detected.
●SNMP queries are attempted on discovered nodes.
●If no SNMP Proxy Agent response, WMI queries are performed when credentials exist in settings.
Details About Running a Specied Device Addresses Discovery
If one of the discovery methods you choose is Specied address (while creating templates (Create Discovery
Templates on page 166), editing templates (Edit Discovery Templates on page 168), or scheduling (Schedule
Discoveries on page 163)), then the Select addresses page is displayed. On this page, you can select the IP
address ranges displayed or you can edit the addresses:
148 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. In the left navigation pane, click Discovery and then click Discover devices on my network (in the Discovery -
Current Tasks task module). The Device Discovery wizard is started with the Specify discovery options page
displayed.
2. Select Specify settings and then select Specied addresses. Click Next. The Select addresses page is
displayed.
3. Click Edit Addresses. The Specied Addresses page is displayed.
4. Type the network address in Network address and click Add Address; the address is displayed below in the
box. Repeat this until you have entered all network addresses.
5. Check Show For Me next to each IP address you want to include on the Select IP ranges page (the previous
page).
6. If desired, remove any ranges by highlighting it and clicking Remove Address.
7. If desired, import a range list by clicking Import Addresses and then browse for the range list.
8. If desired, export a range list by clicking Export Addresses and then browse for location you want to store
the range list.
9. Click OK and then click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
10. Click Start. The Results page is displayed. Click Done.
Active Directory Discovery
Active Directory Discovery requires your knowledge about the Active Directory domain. HP Web Jetadmin
provides a new discovery feature that queries Microsoft Active Directory using an Active Directory starting point
such as domain, organization unit (OU), or other Active Directory containers. In the case of network devices,
HP Web Jetadmin scans the Active Directory for published shared printers. In the case of PC-Connected device
discovery, HP Web Jetadmin scans the active directory for Windows hosts. From these initially discovered lists of
nodes, HP Web Jetadmin nds and qualies devices and then adds them to the All Devices list.
Active Directory Discoveries for Network Devices
Active Directory (AD) discovery requires your knowledge about the AD domain. Once the AD discovery is started,
the LDAP protocol is used to query AD for published print shares. From print shares discovered, the Port Name
eld is checked for the default name forms which are all case-sensitive and include:
●IP_<ip-addr>
●mt:<ip-addr>
●***ip_<ip-addr> (*** can be anything not containing "ip_")
●ip_<ip-addr>:*** (colon between the IP address and ***)
●ip_<ip-addr> *** (space between the IP address and ***)
●ip_<ip-addr>-*** (dash between the IP address and ***)
●ip_<ip-addr>_*** (underscore between the IP address and ***)
If any of these are found during the Node Discovery, the address is stored. Then, during the Node Resolve, the IP
addresses are queried through SNMP to detect network connected printers. When network connected devices
are discovered, they are added to the HP Web Jetadmin All Devices list. No special user credentials are needed
ENWW Discovery 149
other than device based SNMP Get Community strings (normally not used). In fact, HP Web Jetadmin, running
under the low privilege account, Network Service, takes the credentials of the user logged in through the
HP Web Jetadmin client and uses these to query the Active Directory.
You can choose to perform recursive queries meaning any sub-units below the specied path will be searched.
The administrator can also perform discovery on multiple Active Directory locations. And, the discovery can also
be ltered on both location and description strings if these are published to the Active Directory.
Characteristics of Active Directory discoveries for network devices include:
●You can activate Active Directory discovery by specifying AD location(s).
●You can optionally set location and/or description ltering to narrow Active Directory discovery.
●You can optionally specify Active Directory recursion searching to one or all levels below the specied AD
location or locations.
●Active Directory discovery scans the directory for printer shares.
●IP addresses that are resolved from printer shares are queried using SNMP.
●Printers that are qualied are populated into the HP Web Jetadmin All Devices list.
●Discovery is fast.
●Discovery does not require any special privileges and relies on public Active Directory search.
●Discovery is accurate to the extent that network printers are shared and published through Active
Directory.
●Discovery relies on the fact that a default port name in the Active Directory share actually contains the
printer’s IP address.
Active Directory Discovery discovers published print queues in a network’s Active Directory. To nd the IP
address of the network device to which the print queue is attached, AD discovery parses the print queue’s
port. An IP address can only be detected from those print queues with ports with the default format of
IP_www.xxx.yyy.zzz.
Active Directory Discoveries for PC-Connected Devices
Active Directory discoveries for PC-Connected devices use the LDAP protocol to identify Windows hosts on the
network. Each host identied is queried using the WMI protocol. Administrative credentials are required for this
discovery. Once a connection is established through WMI, the host is queried for a locally connected printer.
Characteristics of Active Directory discoveries for PC-Connected devices include:
●Settings are identical to discoveries for network devices.
●Discoveries for PC-Connected devices scan Active Directory for Windows hosts.
●SNMP queries are attempted on discovered nodes.
●If no SNMP Proxy Agent response, WMI queries are performed when credentials exist in settings.
●Local administrator credentials are required to perform this discovery.
Details About Running an Active Directory Discovery
Start here if one of the discovery methods you choose is Active Directory (while creating templates (Create
Discovery Templates on page 166), editing templates (Edit Discovery Templates on page 168), or scheduling
150 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
(Schedule Discoveries on page 163)), then the Specify Active Directory options page is displayed. On this page,
you can dene options for Active Directory discoveries:
1. Type the path for the Active Directory location or browse to it. Then click Add; it will be displayed in the list
below.
2. Check next to any location you want included in the discovery.
3. If desired, remove any ranges by highlighting it and clicking Remove.
4. Select the recursion level:
●Current level: discoveries check the container specied by the path and the contents of any containers
in the path.
●All levels: discoveries check the container specied by the path plus the contents of all containers and
sub-containers in the path.
5. Specify the print queue lter to use in Filter.
6. Click Next.
Passive SLP Discovery
(For network device discoveries only.)
When HP Jetdirect-connected devices are power-cycled, they propagate SLP (service location protocol) multicast
packets. When HP Web Jetadmin detects an HP Jetdirect SLP multicast (recognized by the source 124.0.1.60), it
performs follow-up SNMP queries and adds the device to the All Devices list.
Characteristics of Passive SLP discoveries for network devices include:
●Passive SLP discovery is quiet; HP Web Jetadmin does not propagate trac unless a previously undetected
device announces itself.
●HP Web Jetadmin listens for UDP trac on port 427.
●Devices, including new devices, are discovered as they are powered on.
●Router ltering may inhibit multicast packets.
●Can be disabled on HP Jetdirect print servers.
●Will only discover HP Jetdirect-connected print servers.
Domain Discovery
(For PC-Connected device discoveries only.)
For Domain discoveries for PC-Connected devices, the domain is browsed to identify Windows hosts on the
network. Each host identied is queried using the SNMP or WMI protocol. Administrative credentials are required
for WMI. For WMI, once a connection is established the host is queried for a locally connected printer.
Characteristics of domain discoveries for PC-Connected devices include:
●SNMP queries are attempted on discovered nodes.
●If no SNMP Proxy Agent response, WMI queries are performed when credentials exist in settings.
ENWW Discovery 151
●Might be slow on large domains.
●Local administrator credentials are needed to perform this discovery.
Details About Running a Discovery Using Domains
Start here if one of the discovery methods you choose is Domain (while creating templates (Create Discovery
Templates on page 166), editing templates (Edit Discovery Templates on page 168), or scheduling (Schedule
Discoveries on page 163)), then the Select domains page is displayed. On this page, you can select the domains
to include in the discoveries:
1. Type the domain in Domain or browse for the domain. Then click Add. The domain is displayed in the
Domain box below.
To remove any domains from the Domain box, highlight the domain and click Remove.
2. Click Next.
WS-Discovery
A discovery that uses the Web Services protocol requires minimal settings to launch. HP Web Jetadmin uses the
Web Services protocol to query the network to nd network-connected and PC-connected devices. After an initial
device response, HP Web Jetadmin performs additional SNMP queries to learn more about the devices and add
them to the All Devices list. This discovery mechanism nds devices on both local and remote subnets.
Characteristics of a Web Services discovery for network devices include the following:
●Packets contain a router hop-counter (IP time to live attribute) that can be set from within
HP Web Jetadmin. The default is 4 hops.
●Packets expire when the router hop-counter reaches zero.
●The discovery mechanism is fast.
●The discovery presents low network trac.
The reach of a Web Services discovery depends on the following:
●The setting for the Routers to cross (hops) conguration option for the discovery (see Congure the
General Settings for Device Discoveries on page 64).
●The conguration of the network routers. If the router is congured to pass Web Services requests on to
other sections of the network, then a discovery might discover devices on the entire network.
You can also control the reach of discoveries by conguring the Web Services request to span a certain number
of routers (see Congure the General Settings for Device Discoveries on page 64). The routers must be
congured to allow the Web Services request to be forwarded.
The discovery can also be aected by the conguration of the local rewall (see Discovering Devices with
HP Web Jetadmin through Firewalls on page 136).
If the router is congured to pass Web Services requests on to other sections of the network and the discovery is
congured to cross multiple routers, then the discovery might discover devices across multiple subnets and
perhaps the entire network.
152 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Details About Running a WS-Discovery
If you choose the WS-Discovery method while creating templates (see Create Discovery Templates
on page 166), editing templates (see Edit Discovery Templates on page 168), or scheduling discoveries (see
Schedule Discoveries on page 163), then the Choose WS-Discovery settings page is displayed. On this page,
select the number of routers to cross (or hops) for the discovery. Increasing the number of hops might increase
the amount of time for the discovery to complete. In addition, the discovery generates more network trac than
a discovery with fewer routers to cross.
Managing Third-Party Printers in HP Web Jetadmin
During device discoveries, HP Web Jetadmin uses SNMP queries to gather information from the device. If
HP Web Jetadmin concludes that the device is a peripheral such as a printer, plotter, or multifunction device, it
displays the device in the list of discovered devices. For HP Web Jetadmin to conclude that a device is a
peripheral, the device must be able to answer a set of industry-standard questions.
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a set of objects that denes the types of SNMP queries that can be
asked of a device. For example, the Standard Printer MIB (RFC 1759) is a generic set of objects to which most
peripherals should be able to provide answers when queried. The Standard Printer MIB consists of objects that
describe functionality and capabilities of the printer such as page counts and media types. Other common MIBs
include MIB2 (RFC 1213) and the Host Resources MIB (RFC 1514). Device vendors also have a set of proprietary
MIBs that contain information unique to their devices. HP Web Jetadmin must have knowledge of MIB objects in
device plug-ins before it can send queries to devices using those MIB objects.
Devices must be able to answer queries dened in the common industry-standard MIBs for HP Web Jetadmin to
discover the devices. Otherwise, there is not enough information about the device to warrant displaying it in the
list of discovered devices. HP Web Jetadmin focuses on printer management, and it would be increasingly
dicult to distinguish devices as printers unless they can answer a standard set of questions such as those
dened in the Standard Printer MIB.
After HP Web Jetadmin discovers a device, the level of support that can be provided depends on the depth of
queries dened in the respective device plug-ins.
Support
Support in HP Web Jetadmin can be quite extensive if the device can answer industry-standard queries. Quite a
bit of HP Web Jetadmin functionality can be supported through standard queries such as basic status,
conguration, alerts, reporting, and page counting. HP Web Jetadmin attempts to support the following
functionality for third-party devices using standard queries for basic support.
Device Page — Status Tab
●Device and Information categories
–Picture of a generic device, possibly vendor specic
–Device Model, IP Hostname, IP Address, System Contact
●Status category
–Basic status (online/oine, toner low, toner out, media low, media out, paper jam, cover open, service
requested)
–Front panel display
●Supply levels category
ENWW Discovery 153
–Input tray remaining levels
–Supplies remaining levels
Device Page — Cong tab
●Device category
–Contact Person
–Control Panel Language
–PJL Conguration
–Company Name
●Network
–System Name
–Proxy Server
Device Page — Alerts tab
●General alerts only, polling only of SNMP Alert table and status OIDs
Device Page — Troubleshoot tab
●Reset Device button
●Embedded Web Server button
Device Page — Supplies tab
●Input tray levels
●Supplies levels
Device Page — Capabilities
●Installed components such as input tray capacities, interpreter languages, duplexer, hard disk, total
memory
Alerts
●Polling only, no traps
●Limited set of events
–Service (online, oine, error, disconnected)
–Supplies (paper out, toner low, toner out, other supplies low/out/replace)
–Media Path (paper jam, cover open, output full)
Reports
●Device Inventory
●Supply Utilization
Columns
●Serial Number
●Contact Person
●System Contact
154 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●System Location
●System Name
●System Up Time
Functionality Denitions
This section provides denitions for many of the supported features for third-party devices and the objects used
for obtaining the information. The feature is supported if the device can answer the industry-standard query
dened in these denitions.
●Alerts: Polling at a specied interval is used to provide alerts that support the following types of events
based on status queries that match certain conditions or prtAlerts table objects. Standard status queries
can typically determine the following types of alert conditions:
–Cover Open
–Oine
–Paper Jam
–Printer Error
Certied devices can process traps for real-time alerts when events occur for most events under the
General category. Polling of remaining supplies levels to provide Supplies alerts at desired thresholds is
also available for certied devices.
●Bitmap and Icon: HP Web Jetadmin displays any predened bitmaps and icons that were created in a device
plug-in. Certied devices have a unique picture that matches the device, while basic support provides one
generic picture per third-party vendor.
●Capabilities: Capabilities such as installed languages, trays, and accessories are displayed on the
Capabilities tab as supported by the device using objects such as prtInterpreterDescription and
prtInputDescription.
●Conguration: The following items are provided at a minimum for conguration, assuming that the device
supports the following objects:
–System Contact (sysContact)
–System Location (sysLocation)
–Control Panel Language (prtConsoleLocalization)
–Contact Person (prtGeneralServicePerson)
–System Name (sysName)
Certied devices can provide extended conguration items using vendor-specic objects.
●Control Panel Display: The current message on the printer front panel is displayed using
prtConsoleDisplayBuerText.
●Description: A description is displayed from the response to sysLocation.
●Engine Cycle Count: Engine Cycle Count is a value stored on the printer that represents a cumulative total of
pages printed for the life of the printer. Engine Cycle Count is displayed if a printer supports
prtMarkerLifeCount. Page counts for mono, color, simplex duplex, fax, copy, and scan are only obtainable
via proprietary queries and require advanced support such as qualied or certied.
ENWW Discovery 155
●IP Hostname: The IP hostname is displayed if the operating system can resolve an IP address to a
hostname from a name server such as DNS or WINS using a GetHostByAddr call. System Name, which can
be the hostname if the NIC registers it with a name server, is displayed if the device answers the sysName
MIB2 object.
●Model: The printer model name is displayed according to the response to hrDeviceDescr.
●Serial Number: The serial number is a unique manufacturing identier for the device. The serial number is a
critical identier item that HP Web Jetadmin uses to determine the uniqueness of a device along with other
items such as the MAC address and IP address. Some functionality, such as Reports, is blocked in
HP Web Jetadmin if the serial number cannot be obtained. Therefore, HP Web Jetadmin makes a strong
eort to obtain the serial number from third-party devices. The most typical and widely supported object
to extract for obtaining the serial number is prtGeneralSerialNumber.
●Status: Device status, which indicates the current state of the printer (for example, online or paper jam), is
displayed based on responses to standard objects such as hrPrinterDetectedErrorState.
●System Contact: The system contact is displayed from the response to sysContact.
●Storage: The presence of storage media such as a hard disk, ash disk, RAM disk, and installed RAM can be
detected using hrDiskStorage objects. Additional storage information is provided on the Storage tab for
certied devices.
●Remaining Input Tray Levels: The approximate amount of paper remaining in a particular tray can be
displayed by calculating a percentage based on responses to the Standard MIB objects
prtInputCurrentLevel and prtInputMaxCapacity.
●Remaining Toner Levels: The approximate amount of toner or ink remaining in the cartridge cavity is
determined by calculating a percentage based on prtMarkerSuppliesLevel and
prtMarkerSuppliesMaxCapacity.
●Reports: Basic support includes only the Device Inventory report. Advanced support may include reports
that make use of the various supported page count values, such as Accessories Inventory (capabilities),
Supply Utilization (marker supply information), Device Utilization (page counters), and Hourly Peak Usage
(hourly page counters).
Troubleshooting
Determining why a particular non-HP device supports the features that it does is usually a result of the device's
ability to answer the queries HP Web Jetadmin sends. Certied devices have known objects written in their
device plug-ins and those objects have already been tested, so issues rarely occur on those devices. However,
for qualied devices and those requiring basic support, HP Web Jetadmin is dependent on the device to answer
industry-standard queries. Some devices support more gauges than others. You cannot always assume that all
devices from a particular vendor support the same features. For example, one Xerox model may support the
control panel display, while another Xerox model does not. The following are common explanations for why
particular items may not appear for devices.
Issue Resolution
A gauge may be present for a consumable, but the gauge is hashed
out instead of containing a remaining percentage.
If a devices answers prtMarkerSuppliesDescription correctly, the
gauge is present because HP Web Jetadmin knows the consumable
exists. However, if the device cannot answer either
prtMarkerSuppliesMaxCapacity or prtMarkerSuppliesLevel correctly,
the percentage cannot be calculated and HP Web Jetadmin displays
hashes instead to indicate an unknown level.
A paper tray gauge does not indicate a remaining percentage. While a device answers the prtInputType query to indicate a tray is
present, the device may respond to the prtInputMaxCapacity and
156 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Issue Resolution
prtInputCurrentLevel queries with either valid values or an
indication that at least one sheet remains. If the device returns valid
values, a calculation is presented. If the device does not provide
valid values, HP Web Jetadmin displays either Empty or Not Empty,
depending on whether the device indicates at least one sheet
remains.
The control panel displays Not Supported or Unknown.Not Supported indicates the device did not respond to the
prtConsoleDisplayBuerText object. Unknown may indicate that the
devices recognizes the prtConsoleDisplayBuerText object, but did
respond with any text.
The model name for the device appears to be a much longer name
than the true name of the device.
HP Web Jetadmin relies on hrDeviceDescr to display the model
name. Properly truncated model names are generally provided in
proprietary objects. HP Web Jetadmin does not know how to
truncate a response to hrDeveiceDescr if it contains too many
characters. For example, if a Lexmark printer responds with
Lexmark X652de 7932M8R LJ.MN.P092, HP Web Jetadmin does not
know where to truncate the string.
No consumable gauges are present for items such as toner and
fuser.
A device must answer prtMarkerSuppliesDescription correctly,
otherwise HP Web Jetadmin does not know that the consumable
exists and cannot display a gauge.
Discovery - Common Tasks Task Module
The Discovery - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for discoveries:
●Discover devices on the network
●Schedule a discovery
●Create a discovery template
●Run a discovery by using a discovery template
●Edit a discovery template
●Delete a discovery template
●Copy a discovery template to create a new template
Discovery - Quick Monitor Task Module
The Discovery - Quick Monitor task module can be used to quickly discover a device and display the device
status.
Discover a device
1. Enter an IP address or hostname in the Device box.
2. Click the Go button. The device information and status is displayed in the task module.
3. If the device is not found, use the following steps to specify the device credentials:
ENWW Discovery 157
a. Click the Credentials may be required to locate this device link. The Enter Credentials window opens.
b. To use SNMPv1 credentials to discover the device, select the Use check box, and then enter the
SNMPv1 Get Community Name for the device in the box.
-or-
To use SNMPv3 credentials to discover the device, use the following steps:
i. In the User name box, enter the user name.
ii. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the authentication protocol must be MD5 or SHA-1. HP Web Jetadmin
cannot discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
iii. In the Authenticated password and Conrm authenticated password boxes, enter the
authenticated password (minimum of 8 characters).
For third-party devices, the authentication password must be in the format of a passphrase with
a minimum length of 8 characters. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover third-party devices that
have an authentication password that is in the format of a key or that is less than 8 characters.
iv. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the privacy protocol must be DES or AES-128. HP Web Jetadmin cannot
discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
v. In the Private password and Conrm private password boxes, enter the private password
(minimum of 8 characters).
vi. For HP devices, select the HP Device checkbox. HP Web Jetadmin uses Jetdirect for the context
name.
-or-
For third-party devices, clear the HP Device checkbox, and then enter a context name in the box
next to the HP Device checkbox. The context name can be left blank.
vii. Click the OK button.
Clear the information from the task module
▲Click the Clear button.
Display the device in the All Devices list
This feature is available only when the Device - Quick Monitor task module is accessed from the Device
Management > Overview pane.
▲Click the Open button.
Discovery - Summary Task Module
The Discovery - Summary task module provides a list of the discoveries that have run. Use this task module to
view the discovery history or run a discovery.
158 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Discovery - Active Discoveries Task Module
The Discovery - Active Discoveries task module provides a list of the discoveries that are running. Use this task
module to stop or view the progress of an active discovery.
Discovery - Scheduled Discoveries Task Module
The Discovery - Scheduled Discoveries task module provides a list of the discoveries that are scheduled to run.
Use this task module to delete or edit a discovery schedule.
Discovery - Templates Task Module
The Discovery - Templates task module provides a list of the discovery templates that have been created. Use
this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Create a discovery template
●Run a discovery by using a discovery template
●Edit a discovery template
●Delete a discovery template
●Copy a discovery template to create a new template
●View the settings for a discovery template
Related Application Options for Discovery
Discovery settings rene the way HP Web Jetadmin performs a discovery in your own environment.
Conguration options for Discovery include:
●Congure the General Settings for Device Discoveries on page 64 (Tools > Options > Device Management >
Device Discovery > General)
●IP Range (Tools > Options > Shared > Discovery > Methods > IP Range > General > Congure Large Subnets
for IP Range Discoveries on page 49)
●IP Range (Tools > Options > Shared > Discovery > Methods > IP Range > Manage the IP Ranges for
Discoveries on page 49)
SNMPv3 Enabled Devices
Devices that have SNMPv3 fully enabled can be discovered by HP Web Jetadmin. To discover these devices,
enable Discover SNMP v3 devices in Tools > Options > Device Management > Device Discovery > General.
HP Web Jetadmin requires SNMPv3 credentials for these devices in order for them to be discovered. There are
two ways HP Web Jetadmin can become aware of device SNMPv3 credentials:
●HP Web Jetadmin is used to enable SNMPv3 and also congure the SNMPv3 credentials onto the devices. In
this case, HP Web Jetadmin stores the credentials into its credential store and uses them whenever device
ENWW Discovery 159
communication is required. HP Web Jetadmin also marks these devices as SNMPv3-enabled and
remembers to use the credentials and SNMPv3 whenever communication is required.
●HP Web Jetadmin has had SNMPv3 credentials added to the Global credentials store and these credentials
match those credential values on the devices. In this case, HP Web Jetadmin is being made aware of
credential values that work for devices that are SNMPv3-enabled. When one of these devices is
encountered, HP Web Jetadmin will try the credential values that are congured using the option SNMPv3
Credentials in Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials. If the credential values work and HP Web Jetadmin is
able to communicate with the devices, the credential values will be stored individually for each device.
Devices that were discovered through SNMPv1 and have had SNMPv3 enabled through some other means such
as Embedded Web Server or another instance of HP Web Jetadmin will indicate a communication failure when
HP Web Jetadmin attempts to re-establish communication. The Refresh Selection (Full) command can be used
on these devices to cause HP Web Jetadmin to reset them to SNMPv3-enabled devices.
NOTE: If SNMPv3 communication was established outside of HP Web Jetadmin, the global discovery setting for
Discover SNMPv3 Devices must be congured in Tools > Options > Device Management > Discovery > General.
No new SNMPv3 devices will be added to the database unless this option is enabled.
Network Options for Discoveries
Related options that can be set in HP Web Jetadmin through Tools > Options > Shared > Network include:
●Congure the SNMP Settings on page 46:
–SNMPv1 timeout value: Specify how long HP Web Jetadmin waits for a reply from a network query
that is sent to SNMPv1 devices. The default is 500 ms.
–SNMPv3 timeout value: Specify how long HP Web Jetadmin waits for a reply from a network query
that is sent to SNMPv3 devices. The default is 1000 ms.
–SNMP retries: Specify how many times HP Web Jetadmin retries an SNMP communication with
devices after a timeout occurs. The default is 3.
●Congure the DNS Settings on page 47 (Enable DNS lookups): Forces HP Web Jetadmin to query name
services for each device discovered. This setting is sometimes disabled in environments where DNS
responses are slow or are not functioning. (The default is on.)
●Manage the IP Ranges for Discoveries on page 49: Global store for IP Range settings used by network
device discovery, PC-Connected device discovery and HP Web Jetadmin application discovery.
●Shared Conguration Options for Credentials on page 52: In some cases, credentials like Manage the Global
SNMPv1 Get Community Names on page 55 or Manage the Global SNMPv3 Credentials on page 56 are
being used. Use Credentials to set well known device credentials. These will be tried during discovery when
devices don’t respond to queries that use default credentials.
Discover Devices
The Device Discovery wizard can be used to launch a discovery immediately or schedule a discovery to run at a
later time.
160 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Use the following steps to discover devices:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Discovery, and then select Discover devices. The
Device Discovery wizard starts
2. To use a discovery template, select the Use template option, and then select the template from the list.
-or-
To specify the discovery settings, use the following steps:
NOTE: For more information about the discovery types and methods, see Discovery Types and Methods
on page 136.
a. Select the Specify settings option.
b. To discover only devices that are connected directly to the network, select the Network connected
devices option.
-or-
To discover only devices that are connected to the PCs that are on the network, select the PC
connected devices option.
c. Select the check boxes for the discovery methods to use. At least one discovery method must be
specied.
3. To run the discovery immediately, leave the Schedule discovery check box cleared.
-or-
To schedule the discovery to run at a later time, select the Schedule discovery check box.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
4. Click the Next button.
5. On the settings page, specify the settings for the discovery method, and then click the Next button.
If more than one discovery method is selected, the wizard displays a separate settings page for each
discovery method.
6. If credentials are not required to discover the devices, select the Do not use credentials option.
-or-
If credentials are required to discover the devices, use the following steps to specify the credentials:
NOTE: The credentials options that are available vary depending on the discovery methods selected.
a. Select the Specify credentials to use for this discovery option.
b. If the devices on the network have an SNMPv1 Get Community Name other than public dened, select
the SNMPv1 Get Community Name checkbox, and then enter the SNMPv1 Get Community Name in
the box.
ENWW Discovery 161
c. If HP Web Jetadmin is congured to discover SNMPv3 devices, use the following steps to specify the
SNMPv3 credentials:
TIP: To enable HP Web Jetadmin to discover SNMPv3 devices, go to Tools > Options > Device
Management > Device Discovery > General.
i. Select the SNMPv3 Credentials check box.
ii. In the User name box, enter the user name.
iii. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the authentication protocol must be MD5 or SHA-1. HP Web Jetadmin
cannot discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
iv. In the Authenticated passphrase and Conrm authenticated passphrase boxes, enter the
authenticated passphrase (minimum of 8 characters).
For third-party devices, the authentication passphrase must be in the format of a passphrase
with a minimum length of 8 characters. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover third-party devices
that have an authentication passphrase that is in the format of a key or that is less than 8
characters.
v. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the privacy protocol must be DES or AES-128. HP Web Jetadmin cannot
discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
vi. In the Private passphrase and Conrm private passphrase boxes, enter the private passphrase
(minimum of 8 characters).
vii. For HP devices, select the HP Device checkbox. HP Web Jetadmin uses Jetdirect for the context
name.
-or-
For third-party devices, clear the HP Device checkbox, and then enter a context name in the box
next to the HP Device checkbox. The context name can be left blank.
d. If Active Directory credentials are required, select the Active Directory Credentials check box, and then
enter the user name, password, and domain in the boxes.
e. To use the global credentials, select the Use global credentials checkbox.
TIP: To dene the global credentials, go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials, and then select
the appropriate option.
7. Click the Next button.
8. Use the following steps to schedule the discovery:
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
a. In the Name box, enter a name for this discovery schedule.
b. In the Start time boxes, specify the date and time that this discovery starts.
162 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
c. In the Recurrence section, select the option that denes how often this discovery runs, and then
specify the corresponding settings.
d. Click the Next button.
9. On the Conrm page, verify that the settings are correct, and then click the Start button.
10. On the Progress page, click the Details button. Review the information for each discovery method, and then
click the Close button.
11. On the Results page, select the View all devices check box to display a list of the discovered devices.
12. Click the Done button.
Schedule Discoveries
Discoveries can be scheduled to run once on a specic date and time or run on a recurring basis. Discoveries can
be scheduled for network-connected devices or PC-connected devices. Multiple schedules can be created with
dierent settings, such as discovery type, discovery methods, and date and time to run.
The settings for a discovery schedule can be changed at any time. The next time the scheduled discovery runs,
the updated settings are used.
For example, assume that the administrator wants to run an IP Range discovery on the subnets in Asia and
Europe every Wednesday at 11:00 a.m. in the time zone where the subnets are located. Each location has ve
subnets. Most of the employees turn o the devices at night to save energy. The HP Web Jetadmin server is in
the North American Central Time Zone. The following table provides the settings for the discovery schedules that
are required to accomplish this task.
Schedule name Time discovery runs in Central Time Zone Recurrence IP ranges searched
Asia 9:00 p.m. Every week on Tuesday 15.62.40.1-15.62.47.254
Europe 4:00 a.m. Every week on Wednesday 15.5.188.2-15.5.188.254
Use the following steps to schedule a discovery:
IMPORTANT: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web
Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Discovery, and then select Schedule discovery. The
Device Discovery wizard starts.
2. To use a discovery template, select the Use template option, and then select the template from the list.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
-or-
To specify the discovery settings, use the following steps:
NOTE: For more information about the discovery types and methods, see Discovery Types and Methods
on page 136.
ENWW Discovery 163
a. Select the Specify settings option.
b. To discover only devices that are connected directly to the network, select the Network connected
devices option.
-or-
To discover only devices that are connected to the PCs that are on the network, select the PC
connected devices option.
c. Select the check boxes for the discovery methods to use. At least one discovery method must be
specied.
3. Click the Next button.
4. On the settings page, specify the settings for the discovery method, and then click the Next button.
If more than one discovery method is selected, the wizard displays a separate settings page for each
discovery method.
5. If credentials are not required to discover the devices, select the Do not use credentials option.
-or-
If credentials are required to discover the devices, use the following steps to specify the credentials:
NOTE: The credentials options that are available vary depending on the discovery methods selected.
a. Select the Specify credentials to use for this discovery option.
b. If the devices on the network have an SNMPv1 Get Community Name other than public dened, select
the SNMPv1 Get Community Name checkbox, and then enter the SNMPv1 Get Community Name in
the box.
c. If HP Web Jetadmin is congured to discover SNMPv3 devices, use the following steps to specify the
SNMPv3 credentials:
TIP: To enable HP Web Jetadmin to discover SNMPv3 devices, go to Tools > Options > Device
Management > Device Discovery > General.
i. Select the SNMPv3 Credentials check box.
ii. In the User name box, enter the user name.
iii. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the authentication protocol must be MD5 or SHA-1. HP Web Jetadmin
cannot discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
iv. In the Authenticated password and Conrm authenticated password boxes, enter the
authenticated password (minimum of 8 characters).
For third-party devices, the authentication password must be in the format of a passphrase with
a minimum length of 8 characters. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover third-party devices that
have an authentication password that is in the format of a key or that is less than 8 characters.
v. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the privacy protocol must be DES or AES-128. HP Web Jetadmin cannot
discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
164 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
vi. In the Private password and Conrm private password boxes, enter the private password
(minimum of 8 characters).
vii. For HP devices, select the HP Device checkbox. HP Web Jetadmin uses Jetdirect for the context
name.
-or-
For third-party devices, clear the HP Device checkbox, and then enter a context name in the box
next to the HP Device checkbox. The context name can be left blank.
d. If Active Directory credentials are required, select the Active Directory Credentials check box, and then
enter the user name, password, and domain in the boxes.
e. To use the global credentials, select the Use global credentials checkbox.
TIP: To dene the global credentials, go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials, and then select
the appropriate option.
6. Click the Next button.
7. Use the following steps to specify the schedule settings:
a. In the Name box, enter a name for this discovery schedule.
b. In the Start time boxes, specify the date and time that this discovery starts.
c. In the Recurrence section, select the option that denes how often this discovery runs, and then
specify the corresponding settings.
d. Click the Next button.
8. On the Conrm page, verify that the settings are correct, and then click the Start button.
9. On the Results page, click the Done button.
View Discovery History
After discoveries run, use the discovery history to evaluate the eectiveness of the discoveries and adjust future
discoveries to better meet your needs.
Use the following steps to view the discovery history:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Discovery, and then select History.
2. To display the detailed data for a discovery, click the + button.
-or-
To hide the detailed data for a discovery, click the - button.
Summary discovery data (rst-level elds)
The rst-level elds provide the overall results of each discovery. With the exception of the New Devices Found
column, these statistics pertain only to a specic discovery. The device count in the New Devices Found column is
only the number of new devices found since the previous discovery ran.
The following are the rst-level elds:
●Date: the date and time the discovery ran.
●User: the user who requested the discovery.
ENWW Discovery 165
●Duration: how long it took for the discovery to complete.
●Type: type of discovery ran (PC-Connected devices or network devices).
●Total Devices Found: the number of network and PC-Connected devices found for this discovery.
●New Devices Found: the number of “New” devices found (network and PC-Connected) for this discovery.
●Hidden Devices: devices that have been removed from the Device View list. This can happen if a device has
been rediscovered with a new network card causing the previous entry to be invalidated but still kept in the
database as an inactive device.
●Reactivated Devices: Hidden devices that are placed back in the Device View list. This can happen when a
previously hidden device is rediscovered under a previously discovered connection.
Detailed discovery data (second-level elds)
The second-level elds provide detailed data about each discovery. Use this data to evaluate and compare the
eectiveness of the discovery methods. For example, use the Devices Found and Unique Devices columns to
determine the strength of a particular discovery method.
The following are the second-level elds:
●Method: the type of discovery that was run. The statistics collected on each discovery method row are
specic to that method. Each of the following elds listed are specic to the method listed here.
●Devices Found: the number of devices found by this discovery method and possibly by other methods as
well.
●Unique Devices: the number of devices found by only this discovery method. Not found within any other
discovery method.
●New Devices: the number of new devices found by this discovery method. New devices are not cumulative
across methods if found by multiple methods. For example, if multiple methods were used for a discovery
and one new device was found by multiple methods, that one device will be listed under each method that
found it.
●Node Count: the number of active nodes or network devices (printer and non-print devices) that were
discovered using this discovery method. This discovery represents a listing of IP addresses that could be
resolved into printers and added to the All Devices list.
●Blocked Devices: the number of blocked devices found by this discovery method.
●New Unique Devices: the number of new devices found by only this discovery method.
Discovery Templates
Discovery templates can be accessed from the Device Management navigation pane or the Discovery -
Templates task module.
Create Discovery Templates
A discovery template contains the settings to run a network-connected device discovery or PC-connected device
discovery. A discovery template can be used to launch a discovery or create a discovery schedule. The Discovery
- Templates task module can be used to manage the discovery templates.
166 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Use the following steps to create a discovery template:
NOTE: For more information about the discovery types and methods, see Discovery Types and Methods
on page 136.
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Discovery, and then select Create discovery
template. The Create Discovery Template starts.
2. To discover only devices that are connected directly to the network, select the Network connected devices
option.
-or-
To discover only devices that are connected to the PCs that are on the network, select the PC connected
devices option.
3. Select the check boxes for the discovery methods to use. At least one discovery method must be specied.
4. Click the Next button.
5. On the settings page, specify the settings for the discovery method, and then click the Next button.
If more than one discovery method is selected, the wizard displays a separate settings page for each
discovery method.
6. If credentials are not required to discover the devices, select the Do not use credentials option.
-or-
If credentials are required to discover the devices, use the following steps to specify the credentials:
NOTE: The credentials options that are available vary depending on the discovery methods selected.
a. Select the Specify credentials to use for this discovery option.
b. If the devices on the network have an SNMPv1 Get Community Name other than public dened, select
the SNMPv1 Get Community Name checkbox, and then enter the SNMPv1 Get Community Name in
the box.
c. If HP Web Jetadmin is congured to discover SNMPv3 devices, use the following steps to specify the
SNMPv3 credentials:
TIP: To enable HP Web Jetadmin to discover SNMPv3 devices, go to Tools > Options > Device
Management > Device Discovery > General.
i. Select the SNMPv3 Credentials check box.
ii. In the User name box, enter the user name.
iii. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the authentication protocol must be MD5 or SHA-1. HP Web Jetadmin
cannot discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
iv. In the Authenticated password and Conrm authenticated password boxes, enter the
authenticated password (minimum of 8 characters).
For third-party devices, the authentication password must be in the format of a passphrase with
a minimum length of 8 characters. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover third-party devices that
have an authentication password that is in the format of a key or that is less than 8 characters.
ENWW Discovery 167
v. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the privacy protocol must be DES or AES-128. HP Web Jetadmin cannot
discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
vi. In the Private password and Conrm private password boxes, enter the private password
(minimum of 8 characters).
vii. For HP devices, select the HP Device checkbox. HP Web Jetadmin uses Jetdirect for the context
name.
-or-
For third-party devices, clear the HP Device checkbox, and then enter a context name in the box
next to the HP Device checkbox. The context name can be left blank.
d. If Active Directory credentials are required, select the Active Directory Credentials check box, and then
enter the user name, password, and domain in the boxes.
e. To use the global credentials, select the Use global credentials checkbox.
TIP: To dene the global credentials, go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials, and then select
the appropriate option.
7. Click the Next button.
8. On the Specify template name page, enter a name for this template, and then click the Next button.
9. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Create Template button.
10. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Run Discoveries by Applying Discovery Templates
Use the following steps to run a discovery by applying a discovery template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Discovery, and then select Run discovery template.
The Device Discovery wizard starts.
2. Select the template to use and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
3. The template summary information is displayed. Review your selection and if it is correct click Start. The
Progress page is displayed. (You can hide the Progress page to do other functions in HP Web Jetadmin
while the discovery is in progress, or you can stop the discovery from this page.)
4. When the discovery is complete, the Results page is displayed.
To view the discovered devices on the All Devices list, check View all devices.
To return to the Discovery page, click Done.
Edit Discovery Templates
The settings for a discovery template can be changed at any time. After the settings are changed, any discovery
that runs by applying the updated discovery template uses the updated settings.
168 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Use the following steps to edit a discovery template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Discovery option, and then select Templates.
2. In the Discovery Templates pane, select the template from the list, and then click the Edit button. The Edit
Discovery Template wizard starts.
3. To discover only devices that are connected directly to the network, select the Network connected devices
option.
-or-
To discover only devices that are connected to the PCs that are on the network, select the PC connected
devices option.
NOTE: For more information about the discovery types and methods, see Discovery Types and Methods
on page 136.
4. Select the check boxes for the discovery methods to use. At least one discovery method must be specied.
5. Click the Next button.
6. On the settings page, specify the settings for the discovery method, and then click the Next button.
If more than one discovery method is selected, the wizard displays a separate settings page for each
discovery method.
7. If credentials are not required to discover the devices, select the Do not use credentials option.
-or-
If credentials are required to discover the devices, use the following steps to specify the credentials:
NOTE: The credentials options that are available vary depending on the discovery methods selected.
a. Select the Specify credentials to use for this discovery option.
b. If the devices on the network have an SNMPv1 Get Community Name other than public dened, select
the SNMPv1 Get Community Name checkbox, and then enter the SNMPv1 Get Community Name in
the box.
c. If HP Web Jetadmin is congured to discover SNMPv3 devices, use the following steps to specify the
SNMPv3 credentials:
TIP: To enable HP Web Jetadmin to discover SNMPv3 devices, go to Tools > Options > Device
Management > Device Discovery > General.
i. Select the SNMPv3 Credentials check box.
ii. In the User name box, enter the user name.
iii. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the authentication protocol must be MD5 or SHA-1. HP Web Jetadmin
cannot discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
iv. In the Authenticated password and Conrm authenticated password boxes, enter the
authenticated password (minimum of 8 characters).
For third-party devices, the authentication password must be in the format of a passphrase with
a minimum length of 8 characters. HP Web Jetadmin cannot discover third-party devices that
have an authentication password that is in the format of a key or that is less than 8 characters.
ENWW Discovery 169
v. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
For third-party devices, the privacy protocol must be DES or AES-128. HP Web Jetadmin cannot
discover third-party devices that do not use these protocols.
vi. In the Private password and Conrm private password boxes, enter the private password
(minimum of 8 characters).
vii. For HP devices, select the HP Device checkbox. HP Web Jetadmin uses Jetdirect for the context
name.
-or-
For third-party devices, clear the HP Device checkbox, and then enter a context name in the box
next to the HP Device checkbox. The context name can be left blank.
d. If Active Directory credentials are required, select the Active Directory Credentials check box, and then
enter the user name, password, and domain in the boxes.
e. To use the global credentials, select the Use global credentials checkbox.
TIP: To dene the global credentials, go to Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials, and then select
the appropriate option.
8. Click the Next button.
9. In the Specify template name box, enter a new name for the discovery template, and then click the Next
button.
10. On the Conrm page, verify that the settings are correct, and then click the Save Template button.
11. On the Results page, select the Run discovery check box to launch a discovery.
12. Click the Done button.
Copy Discovery Templates
Use the following steps to copy a discovery template and create a new template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Discovery, and then expand Templates.
2. Right-click the template to be copied, and then select Copy. The Copy Template wizard starts.
3. On the Specify template name page, enter a name for the new discovery template, and then click the Next
button.
4. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Copy Template button.
5. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Delete Discovery Templates
Use the following steps to delete a discovery template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Discovery option, and then select Templates.
2. In the Discovery Templates pane, select the template from the list, and then click the Delete button. The
Delete Discovery Templates wizard starts.
170 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
3. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Delete Template button.
4. On the Results page, click the Done button.
View Discovery Templates
Use the following steps to view a discovery template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Discovery option, and then select Templates.
2. In the Discovery Templates pane, select the discovery template from the list, and then click the View
button.
Conguration
Many device settings can be viewed and congured through HP Web Jetadmin. Device conguration works
dierently depending on whether a single device or multiple devices are selected.
If a single device is selected, the conguration items in the tab are shown with the current device settings. If
multiple devices are selected, conguration items in the tab are shown with unspecied or blank settings. The
list of congurable options varies by the devices selected. With multiple devices selected, all congurable items
will probably not apply to all devices. Only settings that apply to a device will be set on that device. Some options
may be repeated multiple times because dierent settings are supported on dierent devices. If it is not clear
which device or device model a particular setting applies to, holding the mouse over the name in the
conguration settings displays a tooltip with additional information.
Conguration option availability depends on device model, network card and rmware revision. One model of
device may support a conguration option for digital send functionality where another model, probably a single-
function one, does not support that same conguration option. Again, in eet scenarios, any conguration option
that is set in HP Web Jetadmin will only be applied to device models for which it is supported.
Complex Data in the Conrm, Results, and Conguration History Pages
When conguring devices, the Conrm and Results pages display the options you are conguring and the values
for those options in a simple grid. If the value of the conguration option is complex, the rst column in the grid
contains an icon. Hold the mouse anywhere over the line for that conguration option to activate the advanced
tool tip feature and display details of the conguration option.
The advanced tool tip displays for one minute or until you move the mouse out of the tool tip. Every time you
move the mouse within the tool tip the one minute starts over. The information displayed in the tool tip can also
be complex. In this case, the tool tip displays only a summary similar to the device list grid and displays an icon
that indicates more data is available. Holding the mouse over the data in the tool tip activates another advanced
tool tip that displays the next level of details. This allows you to display multiple levels of details.
Credentials Required for Device Conguration
When HP Web Jetadmin encounters a device conguration that requires credentials, it looks in the device-
specic credentials store rst. If there are credentials for that device in the store, HP Web Jetadmin uses those
credentials for the conguration. If the credentials are valid, HP Web Jetadmin congures the device and does
not change the credentials in the store. If there are no credentials for the device in the store or the credentials
are not valid, HP Web Jetadmin uses the global credentials. If the global credentials are valid and the
ENWW Conguration 171
conguration is successful, HP Web Jetadmin adds the credentials for that device to the store. If a device
credential failure occurs, HP Web Jetadmin displays the Needed Credentials wizard and you can add the device
credentials to HP Web Jetadmin. After you add the required credentials, the device conguration should succeed.
This state can also be detected in post-conguration in either Conguration History or in the Credentials
Required column. After the required credential values exist in the Credentials Store, prompting from
HP Web Jetadmin should not occur unless the values on the device change.
Device File System Password
If a le system password exists on the device and if it is not captured in HP Web Jetadmin’s Credential Store, you
will be prompted for the password when attempting to perform any conguration action. Device le system
passwords can be congured on the devices from HP Web Jetadmin. When these are congured, they are also
placed into the Credential Store. Global le system credentials can be added to HP Web Jetadmin through
Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials > Device > File System (Manage the Global File System Passwords
on page 58). These are used when no password exists in the store and one is required by the device.
Sensitive Device Information
In some cases, HP Web Jetadmin sends sensitive information to the device. This information can include user
and password detail such as device Digital Send features or other device security features that require
credentials. In this case HP Web Jetadmin is sending the information using the SSL/TLS protocol. This protocol
allows HP Web Jetadmin to send encrypted information to the device and prevents clear-text information from
being 'snied' through a network trace utility. When communicating with the device through the SSL/TLS
protocol, HP Web Jetadmin uses certicates stored on the printer's HP Jetdirect network interface. These
certicates can be self-signed or they can be signed by a veriable certicate authority. At this time,
HP Web Jetadmin does not check the authenticity of certicates stored on the device; it simply uses the
certicate when communicating with the device through the SSL/TLS protocol. This security limitation could be
exploited, allowing unauthorized individuals access to sensitive information like user and password detail.
Administrators should keep this in mind when managing sensitive device information using HP Web Jetadmin
software.
Importing a Conguration from a File
A CSV (comma separated value) le can be created and then imported into HP Web Jetadmin for the purpose of
device conguration. This provides a way to congure a eet of devices with unique parameters that would
otherwise have to be congured one device at a time. CSV les can easily be created by exporting data from a
spreadsheet or word processing program.
Here is an example of a device conguration scenario:
●30 devices exist: 16.24.1.26-16.24.1.56
●Asset number assignments are required: Abc10040-Abc10070
●Assignments are made respective to IP address sequence
The following table is an example of the CSV le for this device conguration scenario.
IP Addr Port Asset Number
16.24.1.26 1 Abc10040
172 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
IP Addr Port Asset Number
16.24.1.27 1 Abc10041
16.24.1.28 1 Abc10042
16.24.1.29 1 Abc10043
16.24.1.30 1 Abc10044
NOTE: The rst column is always the device identication, which can be an IP address, MAC address, or IP
hostname. The second column is always the port. For HP devices, the port is 1, unless a device is attached to a
multiport print server. For third-party devices, the port must be <Not supported>, which is case-sensitive. If you
specify anything else for third-party devices, the import fails.
Once the le is created and stored to disk on the client desktop; the user can import the le contents into
HP Web Jetadmin using Congure Devices.
The CSV le contains header text for each device property to be congured. Once the user has browsed and
uploaded the le a Map Headers control appears. The customer specic header text can be matched with the
corresponding device property.
The following are the columns headers for a CSV le. The rst two columns identify the devices to congure. If
HP Web Jetadmin did not discover these devices before the CSV le is imported, the devices are not congured.
●Column 1: Device Identier (either IP address, hardware address (MAC address), or IP hostname)
●Column 2: Port (always just “Port”)
●Column 3 through nn: User-specied device settings. The following device settings can be imported:
–Access Control List
–Asset Number
–Company Name
–Default Copier Copies
–Default Printer Copies
–Device Location
–Device Name
–Get Community Name
–Job Timeout
–Set Community Name
–System Contact
–System Location
–System Name
–TCP Idle Timeout
–HTTP Idle Timeout
–Any user-dened settings that are specied by using the Tools > Options > Device Management >
Conguration > User Dened option.
ENWW Conguration 173
Once the mapping is congured, HP Web Jetadmin displays the data headers and device status. Devices which
were previously discovered and successfully matched are shown in the list; any devices in the le which were not
successfully matched are counted as “Unresolved devices”.
Only the settings listed above can be imported from a le. If a setting contains a comma, quotations must be
used around that particular setting. For example, the following line can be used to set values of "Chicago, IL,
USA" and "Building 5, Floor 3":
16.24.1.26,1,“Chicago, IL, USA”,“Building 5, Floor 3”
Conguration - Common Tasks Task Module
The Conguration - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following conguration tasks:
●Congure the settings on devices
●Schedule a device conguration
●Create a device conguration template
●Apply a device conguration template to devices
●Edit the settings for a device conguration template
●Delete a device conguration template
●Copy a device conguration template to create a new template
●View the device conguration history
Conguration - Recent Congurations Task Module
The Conguration - Recent Congurations task module provides a list of the device congurations that have run.
Use this task module to view the details for a device conguration or the device conguration history.
Conguration - Active Congurations Task Module
The Conguration - Active Congurations task module provides a list of the device conguration tasks that are
running. Use this task module to stop or view the status of an active task.
Conguration - Scheduled Congurations Task Module
The Conguration - Scheduled Congurations task module provides a list of the device congurations that are
scheduled to run. Use this task module to delete or edit a conguration schedule.
Conguration - Templates Task Module
The Conguration - Templates task module provides a list of the default device conguration templates and the
custom device conguration templates that have been created. Use this task module to perform the following
tasks:
174 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Create a device conguration template
●Apply a device conguration template to devices
●Edit the settings for a device conguration template
●Delete a device conguration template
●Copy a device conguration template to create a new template
●View the settings for a device conguration template
Related Application Options for Conguration Management
Global settings can be set here for eet congurations:
●Congure the Retry Settings for Device Conguration Schedules on page 66
●Restore the Default Conguration Templates on page 66
●Manage the User-dened Device Conguration Settings on page 66
Congure Devices
Use the following steps to congure devices without using a conguration template:
1. In the left Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Congure
devices. The Congure Devices wizard starts.
2. Select one of the options:
●Use template: Devices will be congured by applying settings from a template. Select a conguration
template from the drop-down box and go to Step 3.
●Specify settings: Devices will be congured by specifying settings in the wizard. Go to Step 3.
●Import from le: Devices will be congured by importing settings from a CSV le. (See Importing a
Conguration from a File on page 172.)
–Click Next. The Select CSV le page is displayed.
–Type the path and name of the CSV le to import, or browse for the le. Click Next. If successful,
it shows you the headers from the CSV le.
NOTE: If any errors are found in the CSV le, you will need to correct them and then try this
import procedure again.
–Select the comparable device setting for each header. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
–Click Congure devices. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display the Conguration
page.
NOTE: For more information about the Conrm and Results pages, see Complex Data in the
Conrm, Results, and Conguration History Pages on page 171.
3. To schedule the conguration for a later time, click Schedule conguration.
ENWW Conguration 175
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
4. Click Next. The Select devices page is displayed.
5. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
Click Next. If you chose to specify settings, the Specify device settings page is displayed.
6. The settings displayed are the ones supported by the devices selected in Step 5. Settings are organized
alphabetically within each category. You can also use the personalized My Settings category to easily nd
your favorite settings. If My Settings is not visible, then right-click and select Show ‘My Settings’. Select the
conguration options and then click Next.
NOTE: For information about specic conguration options that might not work properly in a batch mode,
see Captured Congurable Options and Conguration Templates on page 182.
If you chose to schedule this conguration, the Specify schedule options page is displayed.
If you did not choose to schedule this conguration, go to Step 8.
7. Select the start date and time for your conguration, specify how often it should run, and give it a name.
Conguration schedules can have the following exible settings applied:
●Name: Enter a name for this scheduled task, for easier identication in the task modules and the
conguration history.
●Start time: Species when the conguration will launch.
●Recurrence, Once: Launches only once in the specied schedule.
●Recurrence, Daily: Task will recur daily once per day or once per weekday depending on the selected
setting.
●Recurrence, Weekly: Task will recur once every X weeks on the day specied depending on the
setting.
●Recurrence, Monthly: Task will recur once every X months on XX day depending on setting; or, task
will recur on specied day pattern depending on setting.
176 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
NOTE: For more information about the Conrm page, see Complex Data in the Conrm, Results, and
Conguration History Pages on page 171.
8. Review the settings selected. If you did not choose to schedule this conguration, go to step 10.
9. Click Create Schedule. The Results page is displayed.
NOTE: For more information about the Results page, see Complex Data in the Conrm, Results, and
Conguration History Pages on page 171.
At this point, the schedule has been created but the devices have not yet been congured. You may want to
run the conguration once to make sure there are no problems, such as devices needing credentials in
order to be congured. This will increase the chances of the scheduled conguration completing
successfully. If you do not want to run the conguration now, uncheck the option Run conguration now
(recommended) and click Done to display the Conguration page. Otherwise, you will be taken to a second
Conguration page.
10. Click Congure Devices. The Results page is displayed. To see details of the conguration, click Details.
Then click Close.
NOTE: For more information about the Results page, see Complex Data in the Conrm, Results, and
Conguration History Pages on page 171.
Click Done to display the Conguration page.
View the Conguration History
When HP Web Jetadmin congures a device, information about the device, settings congured, and results is
stored in the conguration history. The conguration history can be exported to a comma-separated values
(CSV) le.
View the conguration history
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Conguration, and then select History.
NOTE: For more information about how to display complex data on the Conguration History pane, see
Complex Data in the Conrm, Results, and Conguration History Pages on page 171.
2. On the Conguration History pane, select one of the following options from the Group By list:
●None—Displays the conguration history as a simple list. To sort the list by a column, click the
column heading.
●Task—Groups the conguration history by the task.
●Device—Groups the conguration history by the device model.
●Initiator—Groups the conguration history by the user who initiated the device conguration.
●Start time—Groups the conguration history by the date and time that the device conguration
started.
●Device result—Groups the conguration history by the results of the device conguration.
●Task result—Groups the conguration history by the results of the task.
ENWW Conguration 177
3. To display the details for a group or device conguration, click the + button next to the group or device
conguration.
-or-
To hide the details for a group or device conguration, click the - button next to the group or device
conguration.
4. To display the details for all of the conguration history, click the + (Expand All) button at the top of the
Conguration History pane.
-or-
To hide the details for all of the conguration history, click the - (Collapse All) button at the top of the
Conguration History pane.
5. To refresh the conguration history, click the Refresh button.
Export the conguration history
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Conguration, and then select History.
2. Click the Export button.
3. On the Save As window, navigate to and select the folder where the CSV le is saved.
4. In the File name box, enter a name for the CSV le.
5. Click the Save button.
Schedule Device Congurations
Congurations can be scheduled to occur at the time and day you specify. Like other scheduling within
HP Web Jetadmin, conguration schedules can have the following exible settings applied:
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the template
when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the task runs.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also display
any task module on the Overview page.
●Name: Allows exible naming of scheduled tasks.
●Start time: Species when the conguration will launch.
●Recurrence, Once: Launches only once in the specied schedule.
●Recurrence, Daily: Will recur daily once per day or once per weekday depending on setting.
●Recurrence, Weekly: Will recur every X weeks depending on setting.
●Recurrence, Monthly: Will recur once every X months on XX day depending on setting; or, task will recur on
specied day pattern depending on setting.
Once a conguration task is scheduled it can be viewed in the Conguration - Scheduled Congurations task
module. Running tasks can be viewed in Conguration - Active Congurations task module.
Use the following steps to schedule a device conguration:
178 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web Jetadmin
server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Schedule
conguration. The Schedule Device Conguration wizard starts.
2. Select one of the options:
●Use template: Devices will be congured by applying settings from a template. Select a conguration
template from the drop-down box and go to Step 3.
●Specify settings: Devices will be congured by specifying settings in the wizard. Go to Step 3.
●Import from le: Devices will be congured by importing settings from a CSV le. (See Importing a
Conguration from a File on page 172.)
–Click Next. The Select CSV le page is displayed.
–Type the path and name of the CSV le to import, or browse for the le. Click Next. If successful,
it shows you the headers from the CSV le.
NOTE: If any errors are found in the CSV le, you will need to correct them and then try this
import procedure again.
–Select the comparable device setting for each header. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
–Click Congure devices. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display the Conguration
page.
3. Click Next. The Select devices page is displayed.
4. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
Click Next. If you chose to specify settings, the Specify device settings page is displayed.
5. The settings displayed are the ones supported by the devices selected in Step 4. Settings are organized
alphabetically within each category. You can also use the personalized My Settings category to easily nd
your favorite settings. If My Settings is not visible, then right-click and select Show ‘My Settings’. Select the
conguration options and then click Next.
NOTE: For information about specic conguration options that might not work properly in a batch mode,
see Captured Congurable Options and Conguration Templates on page 182.
6. Select the start date and time for your conguration, specify how often it should run, and give it a name.
Conguration schedules can have the following exible settings applied:
ENWW Conguration 179
●Name: Enter a name for this scheduled task, for easier identication in the task modules and the
conguration history.
●Start time: Species when the conguration will launch.
●Recurrence, Once: Launches only once in the specied schedule.
●Recurrence, Daily: Task will recur daily once per day or once per weekday depending on the selected
setting
●Recurrence, Weekly: Task will recur once every X weeks on the day specied depending on the
setting.
●Recurrence, Monthly: Task will recur once every X months on XX day depending on setting; or, task
will recur on specied day pattern depending on setting.
Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
7. Review the settings selected.
8. Click Create Schedule. The Results page is displayed.
At this point, the schedule has been created but the devices have not yet been congured. You may want to
run the conguration once to make sure there are no problems, such as devices needing credentials in
order to be congured. This will increase the chances of the scheduled conguration completing
successfully. If you do not want to run the conguration now, uncheck the option Run conguration now
(recommended) and click Done to display the Conguration page. Otherwise, you will be taken to a second
Conguration page.
9. Click Congure Devices. The Results page is displayed. To see details of the conguration, click Details.
Then click Close.
Click Done to display the Conguration page.
Conguration Templates
Conguration templates are used to store device settings and apply those settings to one or more devices. This
can be done to keep device congurations consistent and to make it easy to apply a common set of settings on a
regular basis. Templates are an easy way to change the settings for regularly scheduled congurations, without
having to recreate the entire schedule. Templates can also be used to save many settings from a device, either
for backup purposes or to apply to similar devices.
You can create and manage conguration templates:
●Create conguration template: Create a conguration template (Create Conguration Templates
on page 182).
●Apply conguration template to devices: Apply the selected conguration template to devices (Apply
Conguration Templates to Devices on page 186).
●Edit conguration template: Make changes to an existing conguration template (Edit Conguration
Templates on page 185).
●Delete conguration template: Delete a conguration template (Delete Conguration Templates
on page 186).
●Copy conguration template: Copy a conguration template and rename the new template and make
changes to it (Copy Template Wizard on page 99).
180 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Export conguration templates: Export a conguration template to a le and then import it into a dierent
instance of HP Web Jetadmin running on a dierent server (Export and Import Device Conguration
Templates on page 99).
●Import conguration templates: After a conguration template has been exported, you can then import it
to use it on a dierent instance of HP Web Jetadmin running on a dierent server (Export and Import
Device Conguration Templates on page 99).
Volatile Conguration and HP Web Jetadmin Conguration Templates
Some actions performed remotely on devices can cause the device to automatically power cycle or change in
some other way that can impact the success of further conguration. Consider the case where you are
attempting to congure several device parameters, including one parameter that causes the device to reset
itself, which also causes HP Web Jetadmin to lose communication with the device for a time. Changing a device's
IP parameters is a good example. The device (in many cases) re-initializes and stops communicating for a time.
HP Web Jetadmin has several conguration elements that are known to cause device interrupts and, therefore,
cause a conguration to become volatile or unstable. These items are programmatically marked in such a way
that HP Web Jetadmin always uses them last in a conguration. These conguration items are:
●Security > LDAP - Accessing the Server
●Digital Sending > Activity Log
●Fax > Fax Reports and Logs (print or clear activity log)
●Security > Disable Direct Ports
●Network > Protocol Stacks
●Network > IPv4 Information, which includes Subnet Mask and Gateway (both single and batch
congurations)
●Wireless > 802.11 a/b/g
●Network > Link Setting
●File System > File System Password
●Security > Get Community Name
●Security > Set Community Name
●Security > SNMP Version Access Control
In any conguration, whether it is performed for a single device, for multiple devices, or with a conguration
template, these settings are always sent to the device last to improve the chance of successful congurations.
The following considerations should be made with these settings:
●The chances of a conguration failure increase when these settings are used in the same conguration.
●HP Web Jetadmin only marks these items to run last. HP Web Jetadmin does not put these items in any
order relative to the other items listed here.
●Device behaviors, while sometimes predictable, are not fully documented with these known conguration
items.
In summary, not all of the HP Web Jetadmin congurations can guarantee a positive and stable result at the
physical device. You might need to test individual conguration options to understand the eects on various
HP device models and determine if an HP Web Jetadmin conguration is successful. HP will continue best eort
practices in documenting these and other known conguration characteristics.
ENWW Conguration 181
Adding Conguration Templates to a Group Policy
Conguration templates can be added to Group policies. Group policies are a powerful new automation tool that
can save you a great deal of time conguring devices and HP Web Jetadmin settings. Any device group can have
a property known as Group Policy. One type of group policy is Congure Devices, which uses a selected
conguration template from the list of existing templates. The conguration template can be applied either as
the device is added into the group or as the device is removed from the group. Multiple Congure Devices Group
Policies using dierent templates can exist on a single device group.
Captured Congurable Options and Conguration Templates
Some conguration options behave dierently for single-device conguration than they do for multiple-device
conguration. When capturing device settings into a conguration template via the Save As Template feature,
some conguration options will fail when the template is used to congure multiple devices. The conguration
options that will fail when used to congure multiple devices via a stored conguration template are the
following:
●Tray Administration
●Authentication Manager
●Control Panel Language
●Default Media Type
●SNMP Trap Destination Table
●Access Control List
●IPv6 Options
●Asset Number
●System Name
●IP Address
●LAA Address Conguration
When capturing device settings via the Save As Template feature, these items should remain unchecked. If it is
desired to have these conguration options as part of the template, an edit can be performed on the template
after it has been saved and the desired conguration option can be selected and congured appropriately. Once
the modied template is saved, a version of the conguration option that supports multiple conguration will be
used and the operation should succeed. This situation will not occur during normal use of multiple device
conguration or when a conguration template is created independently from a device.
Create Conguration Templates
Conguration templates are used to store device settings and apply those settings to one or more devices. This
can be done to keep device congurations consistent and to make it easy to apply a common set of settings on a
regular basis. Templates are an easy way to change the settings for regularly scheduled congurations, without
having to recreate the entire schedule. Templates can also be used to save many settings from a device, either
for backup purposes or to apply to similar devices.
Use the following steps to create a conguration template:
182 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Create conguration
template. The Create Device Conguration Template wizard starts.
2. On the Select Template Models page, select the device models to congure, and then click the right arrow
button.
3. Select the network cards to congure, and then click the right arrow button.
4. Click Next. The Specify template options page appears, listing only the conguration options that apply to
the device models and network cards you selected.
5. Enter the name of the template (up to 48 characters).
6. Specify the settings for the conguration options to include in the template, and then click Next.
NOTE: If you click Back, any conguration settings you already specied might be lost when you return to
the Specify template options page. If you remove any device models or network cards on the Select
Template Models page, some conguration options might not be available when you return to the Specify
template options page. If you add device models or network cards on the Select Template Models page,
new conguration options might be available when you return to the Specify template options page.
NOTE: For information about specic conguration options that might not work properly in a batch mode,
see Captured Congurable Options and Conguration Templates on page 182.
NOTE: The conguration options selected for this template will only be applied to those devices that
support the options.
7. On the Conrm page, verify that the conguration option settings are correct, and then click Create
Template.
8. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Create and Use Variable Data
With HP Web Jetadmin 10.4 SR2 or later, templates and OXPd les support variable data.
When creating a conguration template, the following conguration options support variable data:
●Asset Number
●Quick Sets
●LDAP Sign in Setup
●Fax Archiving
●Fax Header Settings
●Outgoing Servers
●Email Address/Message Setting
If the value eld for the conguration item displays a blue colored background, then that conguration item can
use variable data.
ENWW Conguration 183
Create user dened elds to store your variable data
If you want to use variable data, you need to create user dened elds to store your variable data. The user
dened eld can have any name. Use the following steps to create user dened elds:
1. Click Tools, and then Options.
2. Click Device Management, and then click the plus sign to expand Conguration, and then click User Dened.
3. Click New to create a new user dened eld.
4. On the Create User Dened Settings screen, in the Setting Name eld, enter a name.
For example: var_DefaultFrom or var_DefaultDisplayName.
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
5. Click OK, and then repeat these steps for all the variable elds.
NOTE: Every user dened eld uses a unique number in the HP Web Jetadmin database which is invisible to
users. If you delete a user dened eld and create a new user dened eld with the same name, another unique
number will be associated with the user dened eld. Therefore, you must create the user dened eld on one
HP Web Jetadmin server, export the user dened eld, and then import it on other HP Web Jetadmin servers.
Import the variable data into HP Web Jetadmin
Use the following steps to import variable data:
1. Create a CSV le with the following syntax on the rst line:
IP Addr,Port,UserDefinedFieldName1,UserDefinedFieldName2
2. On the lines after that, list the actual values. The Port option is always 1 for network-connected devices.
IP Addr,Port,var_DefaultFrom,var_DefaultDisplayName
10.10.10.10,1,Pfxe.fser@company.com,Peter
10.10.10.11,1,sdf.cxe@company.com,Sandra
NOTE: Instead of IP Addr, you can also use Mac Address or IP Hostname. For more information, see
Importing a Conguration from a File on page 172.
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin stores the user dened values only in its own database. Nothing gets congured
on the device itself.
3. In HP Web Jetadmin, right-click Conguration and then select Congure Devices.
4. Select File, and then Import, and then follow the wizard.
Create a template with variables
After identifying the variable conguration options and creating the corresponding user dened elds, create a
template and refer to the user dened eld as variable data by using one of the following conventions:
●Variable data (a variable in a template always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
184 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
-or-
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%
For more information on creating a template, see Create Conguration Templates on page 182.
Using variable data with OXPd les
You can use variable data in the following OXPd les:
●OXPd Device Functions
●OXPd Accessory Records
●OXPd Authentication Agents
●OXPd Statistics Agents
●OXPd Quota Agents
In the following elds:
●Server context ID
●URI
●User name
●Vendor ID (only for OXPd Accessory Records)
●Product ID (only for OXPd Accessory Records)
After creating user dened variables, refer to the user dened elds inside the OXPd le using the following
format:
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%ServerContextID%%
Edit Conguration Templates
Use the following steps to edit a conguration template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Edit conguration
template. The Edit Device Conguration Template wizard starts.
2. On the Select template page, select the template, and then click Next.
3. On the Select Template Models page, change the device models and network cards included in the
template, and then click Next.
NOTE: If you change the device models and network cards included in the template, any conguration
settings you already specied for the template might be lost. If you remove any device models or network
cards, some conguration options might no longer be available. If you add device models or network cards,
new conguration options might now be available.
4. On the Specify template options page, enter a new name for the template (up to 48 characters).
5. Specify the settings for the conguration options to include in the template, and then click Next.
NOTE: For information about specic conguration options that might not work properly in a batch mode,
see Captured Congurable Options and Conguration Templates on page 182.
ENWW Conguration 185
NOTE: The conguration options selected for this template will only be applied to those devices that
support the options.
6. On the Conrm page, verify that the conguration option settings are correct, and then click Save
Template.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Delete Conguration Templates
Use the following steps to delete a conguration template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Delete conguration
template. The Delete Device Conguration Template wizard starts.
2. Select the template to delete and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
3. Click Delete Template. The Results page is displayed.
Click Done to display the Conguration page.
Copy a Conguration Template
Throughout Device Management view, templates can be created and managed to save you time and provide
consistency. Templates contain conguration preferences (that vary by template type) and can be applied to
devices or groups. Templates are available in Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data Collection, and Report
Generation. For more information, see Copy Template Wizard on page 99.
View Conguration Templates
Use the following steps to view a conguration template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Conguration, expand Templates, and then select the
template. The information about the template is displayed in the workspace.
2. You can view all of the settings for the template. You can also:
●Apply: Apply the selected conguration template to devices (Apply Conguration Templates to
Devices on page 186).
●Edit: Make changes to an existing conguration template (Edit Conguration Templates on page 185).
●New: Create a conguration template (Create Conguration Templates on page 182).
●Delete: Delete a conguration template (Delete Conguration Templates on page 186).
Apply Conguration Templates to Devices
When you apply a conguration template, HP Web Jetadmin congures the devices with the settings stored in
the template.
The following are the results you can expect when applying a template:
●The template contains conguration options for a single device model or network card.
186 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
If you apply the template to a device model or network card that is specied in the template, all the
conguration options are valid and HP Web Jetadmin applies the conguration options to the device.
If you apply the template to a device model or network card that is not specied in the template, the
results are not guaranteed. Other device models and network cards might not support the conguration
options specied in the template. If the device model or network card supports a conguration option
specied in the template, HP Web Jetadmin applies that conguration option to the device. If the device
model or network card does not support a conguration option specied in the template, HP Web Jetadmin
does not apply that conguration option to the device and displays Not Supported for that conguration
option on the Results page.
●The template contains conguration settings for multiple device models and network cards.
When you apply the template, the results depend on the conguration options specied in the template
and the device models and network cards to which you apply the template.
If the conguration options specied in the template are common to all the device models and network
cards specied in the template, HP Web Jetadmin applies all the conguration options when you apply the
template to those device models and network cards.
However, all the conguration options might not be valid for all the device models and network cards
specied in the template. For example, assume that the template includes one device model that supports
the fax functionality and one device model does not support the fax functionality. If you apply the template
to the device model that supports the fax functionality, HP Web Jetadmin applies the fax conguration
options specied in the template to the device. If you apply the template to the device model that does not
support the fax functionality, HP Web Jetadmin does not apply the fax conguration options specied in
the template to the device and displays Not Supported for those conguration options on the Results page.
To determine if a device model or network card supports the conguration options specied in the template, edit
the template. For instructions, see Edit Conguration Templates on page 185. For each conguration option in
the template, hold the cursor over the conguration option title. A list of device models and network cards that
support that conguration option appears.
Use the following steps to apply a conguration template to devices:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Conguration, and then select Apply conguration
template. The Apply Device Conguration Template wizard starts.
2. Select the conguration template from the drop-down box.
3. If you want to schedule this conguration to run at a later time, select Schedule conguration. Click Next;
the Select devices page is displayed.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
4. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
ENWW Conguration 187
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Review the settings selected. Click Apply Template. The Results page is displayed.
6. To see details of the conguration, click Details. Then click Close.
Click Done to display the Conguration page.
Alerts
HP Web Jetadmin can detect dierent events occurring on devices and then relay detailed messages about
those events, device states, and other important specics. These messages can be sent to email addresses or to
Alerts History within HP Web Jetadmin. For example, error or warning conditions on printers, such as paper out
or toner low, can trigger email messages to be sent by HP Web Jetadmin that contain detailed information
pertaining to the condition, allowing the recipient to act upon that condition immediately
The advantage of alerts is that you can receive proactive, real-time warnings via email for events that occur on
networked printers. Receiving early notication of printer events allows administrators to correct the problems
before they impact end user productivity, saving time for both the administrator and the end user. Helpdesks
might use alerts to proactively troubleshoot issues with printers before end users detect them. Individuals
responsible for ordering consumables, such as toner cartridges, might enable toner low alerts so they can be
warned of toner low conditions in order to proactively order toner before it runs out.
Alerts and HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin sends proactive alerts when it detects an event on a device. HP Web Jetadmin determines the
appropriate action to take for that event, and then sends a notication through a specied method.
HP Web Jetadmin detects device-based events in one of the following ways:
●Device polling—HP Web Jetadmin always uses polling for the Supplies and Critical alerts.
HP Web Jetadmin polls devices for Supplies alerts in adaptive intervals based on the rate that the supplies
are used.
HP Web Jetadmin polls devices for Critical alerts at the rate specied for the Alerts option. For more
information about this option, see Congure the Polling Options for Device Alerts and Supplies Alerts
on page 62.
●Traps—Devices send trap packets to HP Web Jetadmin when an event occurs.
When an alert subscription is created for a device, the IP address for HP Web Jetadmin is congured as the
trap destination on the device.
188 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin supports the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c traps and SNMPv3 traps that devices send. There are
signicant dierences in the way that HP Web Jetadmin handles the trap tables for SNMPv1/SNMPv2c and
SNMPv3. For more information about these dierences, see the Using Proactive Alerts with
HP Web Jetadmin white paper. This white paper is available from the HP Web Jetadmin support page (in
English).
The following features are available for alerts in HP Web Jetadmin:
●An intuitive, easy-to-use interface for subscribing to alerts
●Multiple options for specifying alert subscriptions
●A default template for alert subscriptions
●Alerts for supply events
●Adaptive polling for supply events
●Backup polling
●An alerts history interface
What You Can Do With Alerts
You can use Alerts to have immediate or real-time notication that an event has occurred. A common scenario is
a print maintenance or support team. These people would like to know when a problem happens rather than to
wait for a customer complaint. In this way, they can proactively handle trouble perhaps even prior to the
customer experiencing downtime.
In HP Web Jetadmin, you actually subscribe to Alerts to get information about devices. When you subscribe to an
Alert, you are requesting information from a device (or devices) about specic settings on that device (or devices)
including events, email address notication, and more. (See Create Alert Subscriptions on page 192.)
Types of Alerts
There are three types of Alerts:
●General alerts (detailed): Include most non-supply device events and rely on traps. Polling is established
when traps destinations cannot be congured.
●Supplies alerts: Monitor device supply status and levels through polling. The polling mechanism uses a
combination of slow-polling and sliding time interval depending on the level of the supply being monitored.
●Critical alerts: Events are monitored by polling every ve minutes. The polling interval is congurable within
the range of 5 to 360 minutes. Because of the frequent polling nature of this solution, it is important to use
it sparingly and only for devices that need immediate attention. All General Alerts are available.
Examples of Alerts
Following are some examples of alerts you might want to congure:
●An alert that is set to add an event to the alert history when a specic printer error occurs.
ENWW Alerts 189
NOTE: Alerts now support more detailed printer errors such as “Subsystem 72 -- Service Error” and
more.
●An alert set to notify a recipient through email about a Toner Low condition.
●An alert set to notify a recipient through email about a specic supply threshold.
●An alert set to propagate an SNMP trap directed at a listener process on another application such as
HP OpenView.
Alerts Traps Listener Port
HP Web Jetadmin uses UDP port 27892 as the traps listener port for alerts and any reports that are based on
by-user collections.
Alerts - Common Tasks Task Module
The Alerts - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for alerts:
●Subscribe to alerts for devices
●Create an alert subscription template
●Apply an alert subscription template to devices
●Edit an alert subscription template
●Delete an alert subscription template
●Copy an alert subscription template to create a new template
Alerts - Recent Alerts Task Module
The Alerts - Recent Alerts task module provides a list of the alerts that have occurred. Use this task module to
view the alerts history.
Alerts - Alert Subscriptions Task Module
The Alerts - Alert Subscriptions task module provides the following information:
●The number of devices that are subscribed for alerts
●The number of devices that are not subscribed for alerts
●The number of discovered devices
Use this task module to display a list of the alert subscriptions that have been created or subscribe to alerts for
devices.
190 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Alerts - Subscription Templates Task Module
The Alerts - Subscription Templates task module provides a list of the default alert subscription templates and
the custom alert subscription templates that have been created. Use this task module to perform the following
tasks:
●Create an alert subscription template
●Apply an alert subscription template to devices
●Edit the settings for an alert subscription template
●Delete an alert subscription template
●Copy an alert subscription template to create a new template
●View the settings for an alert subscription template
Alerts - Active Tasks Task Module
The Alerts - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the alert tasks that are running. Use this task module to
stop or view the status of an active alert task.
Related Application Options for Alerts
Conguration settings can be stored here for managing alerts:
●Attach the Supplies Report to the Email Notications for Supply Alerts on page 78
●Congure the Polling Options for Device Alerts and Supplies Alerts on page 62
●Manage the Custom Email Templates on page 78
●Manage the Templates for Alert Subscriptions on page 79
●Congure the Format for SNMP Traps on page 80
Managing Device Alerts
When alerts have been congured for a device, they are entered on a Trap Table. (Traps are set only on General
alerts, see Create Alert Subscriptions on page 192). Depending on the device, the trap table will contain up to 3,
6, or 12 for that device. HP Web Jetadmin will not automatically overwrite any traps in the table. When a Trap
Table is full, the Edit trap table settings dialog box is displayed, which lets you manage the alerts for that device.
You can:
●Remove all trap table settings: Removes all traps from the table and allows new ones to be added.
●Remove selected trap table settings: Removes selected traps from the table and allows new ones to be
added.
●Skip this device: Leaves the trap table full so new alerts will not be added for this device.
The Edit trap table settings dialog box will be displayed within HP Web Jetadmin as soon as the Trap Table for
the device becomes full. If alerts were set up with a schedule, with a Group Policies on page 123, or for Device
Utilization by User and Data Collections on page 226, the Edit trap table settings dialog box will be accessible
ENWW Alerts 191
through the Alerts - Active Tasks Task Module on page 191 so that you can take action on them at your
convenience.
Create Alert Subscriptions
An alert subscription denes the following information:
●The type of alerts that HP Web Jetadmin monitors
●The devices that HP Web Jetadmin monitors for the alerts
●The specic events that HP Web Jetadmin monitors
●The type of notications that HP Web Jetadmin sends when the events occur
HP Web Jetadmin always displays alerts in the alert history. When the Log to File option is enabled,
HP Web Jetadmin also writes alerts to the alerts log le. For more information about the alerts log le, see
Congure the Settings for the Alerts Log on page 79.
Create an alert subscription by using an alert subscription template
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Alerts, and then select Subscribe. The Create Alert
Subscription wizard starts.
2. On the Specify alerts subscription type page, select the Use Template option, select the alert subscription
template from the list, and then click the Next button.
3. To select individual devices, use the following steps:
a. Select the Devices option.
b. To change the list of devices, click the ... button next to the Source box, and then select the device list.
c. Select the devices from the list, and then click the > button.
d. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
-or-
To select a group of devices, use the following steps:
a. Select the Groups option.
b. Click the ... button next to the Group box, and then select the group.
c. To include the subgroups that are in the selected group, select the Include subgroups checkbox.
IMPORTANT: If subgroups are included, network trac might increase signicantly. HP recommends
that you include subgroups only when necessary.
d. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
4. To link the selected alert subscription template to this alert subscription, select the Link template to
subscription option. Changes that are made to the selected alert subscription template are automatically
applied to the devices that are associated with this alert subscription.
-or-
To create an alert subscription that is not linked to the selected alert subscription template, select the Do
NOT link template to subscription option, and then enter a name for this alert subscription in the
Subscription name box. Changes that are made to the alert subscription template are not applied to the
devices that were previously congured with this alert subscription template.
192 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
5. Click the Next button.
6. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Apply Template button.
7. On the Progress page, click the Details button. Review the alerts for each device, and then click the Close
button.
8. If HP Web Jetadmin has stored the maximum number of alerts for any of the selected devices, the Edit trap
table settings window opens. For more information about this window, see Manage the trap table
on page 196.
9. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Create an alert subscription by specifying the alert settings
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Alerts, and then select Subscribe. The Create Alert
Subscription wizard starts.
2. On the Specify alerts subscription type page, select the Specify Settings option.
3. Select one of the following options, and then click the Next button:
●General alerts (detailed)—HP Web Jetadmin monitors the devices for non-supply events and relies
on SNMP traps. HP Web Jetadmin establishes polling when the SNMP trap destination cannot be
congured.
●Supplies alerts—HP Web Jetadmin monitors the devices for supply statuses and levels and relies on
polling. The polling mechanism uses a combination of slow-polling and a sliding-time interval
depending on the level of the supply being monitored.
●Critical alerts—HP Web Jetadmin monitors the devices for specic events by polling the devices every
5 minutes. The polling interval can be congured in the range of 5 to 360 minutes. HP recommends
that you use this option sparingly and only for devices that need immediate attention because the
polling frequency can signicantly increase network trac.
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin establishes polling when the SNMP trap destination cannot be congured. This
polling rate is congurable, For more information see: Congure the Polling Options for Device Alerts and
Supplies Alerts on page 62.
4. To select individual devices, use the following steps:
a. Select the Devices option.
b. To change the list of devices, click the ... button next to the Source box, and then select the device list.
c. Select the devices from the list, and then click the > button.
d. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To select a group of devices, use the following steps:
a. Select the Groups option.
b. Click the ... button next to the Group box, and then select the group.
c. To include the subgroups that are in the selected group, select the Include subgroups checkbox.
IMPORTANT: If subgroups are included, network trac might increase signicantly. HP recommends
that you include subgroups only when necessary.
d. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
ENWW Alerts 193
5. If the General alerts (detailed) or Critical alerts option was selected, use the following steps:
a. On the Select alerts page, select the checkboxes for the alerts to monitor, and then click the Next
button.
b. To choose not to congure the advanced settings, select the No advanced settings option.
-or-
To prevent HP Web Jetadmin from sending duplicate alerts for a specic period of time, use the
following steps:
i. Select the Time to ignore duplicate alerts option. This setting applies only to this alert
subscription.
ii. In the Ignore duplicates for boxes, enter the amount of time that HP Web Jetadmin waits before
sending a duplicate alert.
iii. To specify that HP Web Jetadmin ignores the rst occurrence of the time period congured for
the Ignore duplicates for option, select the Ignore rst time period checkbox.
-or-
To send alerts when a threshold is exceeded, select the Count threshold (if applicable) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the Send alert when value exceeds box. For example, if a threshold
of 5000 is specied for the Page Count alert, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert from each monitored
device when it prints page 5,001.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 6.
-or-
If the Supplies alerts option was selected, use the following steps:
a. On the Select supplies categories page, select the check boxes for the supply alerts to monitor, and
then click the Next button.
b. To specify a supply threshold, select the Threshold value (early warning, low, very low) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the box. The threshold is a decrementing value. When a supply
reaches the threshold, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert.
-or-
To specify that HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert when the supply level increases signicantly from the
current level, select the Replaced option.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 6.
6. To only write alerts to the alert history log, select the Alert history only option, and then click the Next
button. Continue with step 7.
-or-
To send email notications when alerts occur, use the following steps:
IMPORTANT: SMTP must be congured to send email notications. For more information, see Congure
the SMTP Gateway Settings on page 47.
194 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
a. Select the Email option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Send to box, enter the email addresses of the recipients separated with a semi-colon (;).
-or-
Click the Browse button. On the Select Email Address window, select the email addresses from the
Available addresses list, and then click the > button. Click the OK button.
TIP: To manage the list of email addresses, click the Manage list button. The Options window opens
with the Addresses option selected. For more information, see Manage the Shared Email Addresses
on page 48.
c. To include a short description of the alert in the message, select the Concise option.
-or-
To include a more detailed description of the alert in the message, select the Verbose option.
-or-
To use an email template for the message, select the Custom option, and then select the template
from the list.
TIP: To create an email template, click the New button. The Options window opens with the Email
Templates option selected. For more information, see Manage the Custom Email Templates
on page 78.
d. To send the alert information in the body of the email and as an attachment to the email, select the
Also send the email body as an attachment checkbox.
e. Click the Next button. Continue with step 7.
-or-
To forward SNMP traps to a server when alerts occur, use the following steps:
a. Select the SNMP trap generator option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Trap destination box, enter the IP address or fully qualied domain name of the server where
HP Web Jetadmin forwards the SNMP traps.
c. In the Listen port box, enter the port on which the server listens for SNMP traps.
d. From the SNMP version list, select the version of SNMP that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the traps.
e. If SNMPv1 or SNMP v2 is selected from the SNMP version list, enter a community name for the trap in
the Community box.
-or-
If SNMPv3 is selected from the SNMP version list, use the following steps:
NOTE: For SNMPv3, HP Web Jetadmin sends an inform notication to the server instead of a trap
notication. The server sends an acknowledgement to HP Web Jetadmin when the inform notication
is received. If HP Web Jetadmin does not receive an acknowledgement within a specied timeout
interval, HP Web Jetadmin resends the inform notication. For more information about conguring
the SNMPv3 timeout interval and number of retries, see Congure the SNMP Settings on page 46.
i. In the User name box, enter the user name.
ii. In the Context name box, enter a context name, such as public.
iii. From the Authentication protocol list, select the protocol.
ENWW Alerts 195
iv. In the Authentication password and Conrm authentication password boxes, enter the
authentication password.
v. From the Privacy protocol list, select the protocol.
vi. In the Privacy password and Conrm privacy password boxes, enter the privacy password.
f. From the Preferred language list, select the language that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the SNMP traps.
g. To change the format for the SNMP traps, click the Edit button. The Options window opens with the
SNMP Trap Generator option selected. For more information about the SNMP trap format, see
Congure the Format for SNMP Traps on page 80.
h. Click the Next button. Continue with step 7.
7. On the Specify subscription name page, enter a name for the alert subscription, and then click the Next
button.
8. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Subscribe button.
9. On the Progress page, click the Details button. Review the alerts for each device, and then click the Close
button.
10. If HP Web Jetadmin has stored the maximum number of alerts for any of the selected devices, the Edit trap
table settings window opens. For more information about this window, see Manage the trap table
on page 196.
11. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Manage the trap table
1. On the Edit trap table settings window, select a device from the list.
2. To remove all of the traps from the table, select the Remove all trap table settings option.
HP Web Jetadmin can add new traps to the table for this device.
-or-
To remove a specic trap from the table, select the trap from the Trap table settings section, and then
select the Remove selected trap table settings option. HP Web Jetadmin can add new traps to the table for
this device.
-or-
To leave all of the traps in the table, select the Skip this device option. HP Web Jetadmin cannot add new
traps to the table for this device.
3. Click the Activate Choice for Device button.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each device in the list.
5. Click the Finish button.
Edit Alert Subscriptions
The settings for an alert subscription can be changed, including the name of the alert subscription.
196 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Edit an alert subscription
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Alerts option, and then select All Subscriptions.
2. In the All Subscriptions pane, select the alert subscription from the list, and then click the Edit Subscription
button. The Edit Subscription wizard starts.
3. If the alert subscription is congured for General alerts (detailed) or Critical alerts, use the following steps:
a. On the Progress page, select or clear the check boxes for the alerts to monitor, and then click the
Next button.
b. To choose not to congure the advanced settings, select the No advanced settings option.
-or-
To prevent HP Web Jetadmin from sending duplicate alerts for a specic period of time, use the
following steps:
i. Select the Time to ignore duplicate alerts option. This setting applies only to this alert
subscription.
ii. In the Ignore duplicates for boxes, enter the amount of time that HP Web Jetadmin waits before
sending a duplicate alert.
iii. To specify that HP Web Jetadmin ignores the rst occurrence of the time period congured for
the Ignore duplicates for option, select the Ignore rst time period checkbox.
-or-
To send alerts when a threshold is exceeded, select the Count threshold (if applicable) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the Send alert when value exceeds box. For example, if a threshold
of 5000 is specied for the Page Count alert, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert from each monitored
device when it prints page 5,001.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
-or-
If the alert subscription is congured for Supplies alerts, use the following steps:
a. On the Progress page, select or clear the check boxes for the supply alerts to monitor, and then click
the Next button.
b. To specify a supply threshold, select the Threshold value (early warning, low, very low) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the box. The threshold is a decrementing value. When a supply
reaches the threshold, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert.
-or-
To specify that HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert when the supply level increases signicantly from the
current level, select the Replaced option.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
4. To only write alerts to the alert history log, select the Alert history only option, and then click the Next
button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To send email notications when alerts occur, use the following steps:
IMPORTANT: SMTP must be congured to send email notications. For more information, see Congure
the SMTP Gateway Settings on page 47.
ENWW Alerts 197
a. Select the Email option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Send to box, enter the email addresses of the recipients separated with a semi-colon (;).
-or-
Click the Browse button. On the Select Email Address window, select the email addresses from the
Available addresses list, and then click the > button. Click the OK button.
TIP: To manage the list of email addresses, click the Manage list button. The Options window opens
with the Addresses option selected. For more information, see Manage the Shared Email Addresses
on page 48.
c. To include a short description of the alert in the message, select the Concise option.
-or-
To include a more detailed description of the alert in the message, select the Verbose option.
-or-
To use an email template for the message, select the Custom option, and then select the template
from the list.
TIP: To create an email template, click the New button. The Options window opens with the Email
Templates option selected. For more information, see Manage the Custom Email Templates
on page 78.
d. To send the alert information in the body of the email and as an attachment to the email, select the
Also send the email body as an attachment checkbox.
e. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To forward SNMP traps to a server when alerts occur, use the following steps:
a. Select the SNMP trap generator option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Trap destination box, enter the IP address or fully qualied domain name of the server where
HP Web Jetadmin forwards the SNMP traps.
c. In the Listen port box, enter the port on which the server listens for SNMP traps.
d. From the SNMP version list, select the version of SNMP that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the traps.
e. If SNMPv1 or SNMP v2 is selected from the SNMP version list, enter a community name for the trap in
the Community box.
-or-
If SNMPv3 is selected from the SNMP version list, use the following steps:
NOTE: For SNMPv3, HP Web Jetadmin sends an inform notication to the server instead of a trap
notication. The server sends an acknowledgement to HP Web Jetadmin when the inform notication
is received. If HP Web Jetadmin does not receive an acknowledgement within a specied timeout
interval, HP Web Jetadmin resends the inform notication. For more information about conguring
the SNMPv3 timeout interval and number of retries, see Congure the SNMP Settings on page 46.
i. In the User name box, enter the user name.
ii. In the Context name box, enter a context name, such as public.
iii. From the Authentication protocol list, select the protocol.
198 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
iv. In the Authentication password and Conrm authentication password boxes, enter the
authentication password.
v. From the Privacy protocol list, select the protocol.
vi. In the Privacy password and Conrm privacy password boxes, enter the privacy password.
f. From the Preferred language list, select the language that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the SNMP traps.
g. To change the format for the SNMP traps, click the Edit button. The Options window opens with the
SNMP Trap Generator option selected. For more information about the SNMP trap format, see
Congure the Format for SNMP Traps on page 80.
h. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
5. On the Specify subscription name page, enter a new name for the alert subscription, and then click the
Next button.
6. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Edit Subscription button.
7. On the Progress page, click the Details button. Review the alerts for each device, and then click the Close
button.
8. If HP Web Jetadmin has stored the maximum number of alerts for any of the selected devices, the Edit trap
table settings window opens. For more information about this window, see Manage the trap table
on page 199.
9. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Manage the trap table
1. On the Edit trap table settings window, select a device from the list.
2. To remove all of the traps from the table, select the Remove all trap table settings option.
HP Web Jetadmin can add new traps to the table for this device.
-or-
To remove a specic trap from the table, select the trap from the Trap table settings section, and then
select the Remove selected trap table settings option. HP Web Jetadmin can add new traps to the table for
this device.
-or-
To leave all of the traps in the table, select the Skip this device option. HP Web Jetadmin cannot add new
traps to the table for this device.
3. Click the Activate Choice for Device button.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each device in the list.
5. Click the Finish button.
Copy an Alert Subscription Template
Throughout Device Management view, templates can be created and managed to save you time and provide
consistency. Templates contain conguration preferences (that vary by template type) and can be applied to
devices or groups. Templates are available in Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data Collection, and Report
Generation. For more information, see Copy Template Wizard on page 99.
ENWW Alerts 199
Alert History
The following information is available in the alert history:
●Time Received—The time that the device received the alert.
●Alert—The name of the alert.
NOTE: Job Completed alerts are not saved in the database and displayed in the Alert column because
these alerts consume too much space in the database.
●Device Model—The model of the device that received the alert.
●IP Hostname—The IP hostname of the device that received the alert.
●IP Address—The IP address of the device that received the alert.
Use the following steps to view the alert history:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Alerts, and then select View alerts history.
2. Click the Close button.
Alert Subscription Templates
You can view Alert templates (including the default template) and also do any of the following actions:
●Apply an Alert Subscription Template on page 204
●Create Alert Subscription Templates on page 200
●Delete an Alert Subscription Template on page 208
●Edit Alert Subscription Templates on page 205
Use the following steps to view an alert subscription:
1. Expand the Alerts tree in the left navigation pane and then expand Templates to list all Alert templates.
Click on the template you want to view. The specic template detail is displayed.
2. You can do any of the following:
●Apply: Apply the template to devices (Apply an Alert Subscription Template on page 204).
●Edit: Make changes to the template (Edit Alert Subscription Templates on page 205).
Alert Templates in Group Policies
The Groups Policy features is a powerful new automation tool that saves users a great deal of time conguring
devices and HP Web Jetadmin settings. Both Automatic and Manual type groups can have the Group Policy
property. One policy that can be added to any device group’s properties is Alerts. Both Subscribe and
Unsubscribe using Alert templates can be applied to devices in the group either as they are populated into group
membership or as they are removed from group membership. In this way, devices can have specic Alerts
applied or de-applied without impact to other Alerts settings. (See Group Policies on page 123.)
200 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Create Alert Subscription Templates
An alert subscription template denes the following information:
●The type of alerts that HP Web Jetadmin monitors
●The devices that HP Web Jetadmin monitors for the alerts
●The specic events that HP Web Jetadmin monitors
●The type of notications that HP Web Jetadmin sends when the events occur
Alert subscription templates can be used to apply the same setting to multiple alert subscriptions. If an alert
subscription template is linked to an alert subscription, any changes that are made to the alert subscription
template are automatically applied to the devices that are associated with the alert subscription
The Default Alert Template is precongured when HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The Default Alert Template
species several alerts in the Media Path, Service, and Supplies categories
HP Web Jetadmin always displays alerts in the alert history. When the Log to File option is enabled,
HP Web Jetadmin also writes alerts to the alerts log le. For more information about the alerts log le, see
Congure the Settings for the Alerts Log on page 79.
Use the following steps to create an alert subscription template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Alerts, and then select Create subscription template.
The Create Alert Subscription Template wizard starts.
2. On the Specify alerts subscription type page, select one of the following options, and then click the Next
button:
●General alerts (detailed)—HP Web Jetadmin monitors the devices for non-supply events and relies
on SNMP traps. HP Web Jetadmin establishes polling when the SNMP trap destination cannot be
congured.
●Supplies alerts—HP Web Jetadmin monitors the devices for supply statuses and levels and relies on
polling. The polling mechanism uses a combination of slow-polling and a sliding-time interval
depending on the level of the supply being monitored.
●Critical alerts—HP Web Jetadmin monitors the devices for specic events by polling the devices every
5 minutes. The polling interval can be congured in the range of 5 to 360 minutes. HP recommends
that you use this option sparingly and only for devices that need immediate attention because the
polling frequency can signicantly increase network trac.
3. If the General alerts (detailed) or Critical alerts option was selected, use the following steps:
a. On the Select alerts page, select the checkboxes for the alerts to monitor, and then click the Next
button.
b. To choose not to congure the advanced settings, select the No advanced settings option.
-or-
To prevent HP Web Jetadmin from sending duplicate alerts for a specic period of time, use the
following steps:
ENWW Alerts 201
i. Select the Time to ignore duplicate alerts option. This setting applies only to this alert
subscription template.
ii. In the Ignore duplicates for boxes, enter the amount of time that HP Web Jetadmin waits before
sending a duplicate alert.
iii. To specify that HP Web Jetadmin ignores the rst occurrence of the time period congured for
the Ignore duplicates for option, select the Ignore rst time period checkbox.
-or-
To send alerts when a threshold is exceeded, select the Count threshold (if applicable) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the Send alert when value exceeds box. For example, if a threshold
of 5000 is specied for the Page Count alert, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert from each monitored
device when it prints page 5,001.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
-or-
If the Supplies alerts option was selected, use the following steps:
a. On the Select supplies categories page, select the check boxes for the supply alerts to monitor, and
then click the Next button.
b. To specify a supply threshold, select the Threshold value (early warning, low, very low) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the box. The threshold is a decrementing value. When a supply
reaches the threshold, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert.
-or-
To specify that HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert when the supply level increases signicantly from the
current level, select the Replaced option.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
4. To only write alerts to the alert history log, select the Alert history only option, and then click the Next
button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To send email notications when alerts occur, use the following steps:
IMPORTANT: SMTP must be congured to send email notications. For more information, see Congure
the SMTP Gateway Settings on page 47.
a. Select the Email option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Send to box, enter the email addresses of the recipients separated with a semi-colon (;).
-or-
Click the Browse button. On the Select Email Address window, select the email addresses from the
Available addresses list, and then click the > button. Click the OK button.
TIP: To manage the list of email addresses, click the Manage list button. The Options window opens
with the Addresses option selected. For more information, see Manage the Shared Email Addresses
on page 48.
c. To include a short description of the alert in the message, select the Concise option.
-or-
To include a more detailed description of the alert in the message, select the Verbose option.
202 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
-or-
To use an email template for the message, select the Custom option, and then select the template
from the list.
TIP: To create an email template, click the New button. The Options window opens with the Email
Templates option selected. For more information, see Manage the Custom Email Templates
on page 78.
d. To send the alert information in the body of the email and as an attachment to the email, select the
Also send the email body as an attachment checkbox.
e. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To forward SNMP traps to a server when alerts occur, use the following steps:
a. Select the SNMP trap generator option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Trap destination box, enter the IP address or fully qualied domain name of the server where
HP Web Jetadmin forwards the SNMP traps.
c. In the Listen port box, enter the port on which the server listens for SNMP traps.
d. From the SNMP version list, select the version of SNMP that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the traps.
e. If SNMPv1 or SNMP v2 is selected from the SNMP version list, enter a community name for the trap in
the Community box.
-or-
If SNMPv3 is selected from the SNMP version list, use the following steps:
NOTE: For SNMPv3, HP Web Jetadmin sends an inform notication to the server instead of a trap
notication. The server sends an acknowledgement to HP Web Jetadmin when the inform notication
is received. If HP Web Jetadmin does not receive an acknowledgement within a specied timeout
interval, HP Web Jetadmin resends the inform notication. For more information about conguring
the SNMPv3 timeout interval and number of retries, see Congure the SNMP Settings on page 46.
i. In the User name box, enter the user name.
ii. In the Context name box, enter a context name, such as public.
iii. From the Authentication protocol list, select the protocol.
iv. In the Authentication password and Conrm authentication password boxes, enter the
authentication password.
v. From the Privacy protocol list, select the protocol.
vi. In the Privacy password and Conrm privacy password boxes, enter the privacy password.
f. From the Preferred language list, select the language that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the SNMP traps.
g. To change the format for the SNMP traps, click the Edit button. The Options window opens with the
SNMP Trap Generator option selected. For more information about the SNMP trap format, see
Congure the Format for SNMP Traps on page 80.
h. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
5. On the Alerts template name page, enter a name for the alert subscription template, and then click the
Next button.
ENWW Alerts 203
6. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Create Template button.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Apply an Alert Subscription Template
After an alert template has been created, you can specify devices to use it with (Create Alert Subscription
Templates on page 200). When applying a template to devices, you can choose to have the devices:
●Link template to subscription: Any changes made to the template will automatically aect any devices
associated with this template.
●Do NOT link template to subscription: Changes made to this template will not aect the devices associated
with it. This is used to apply the template settings as a new subscription without linking that subscription in
any way to the original template.
Alert templates create an alerts subscription on the devices to which they were applied. Any time a new
template is applied, a new alerts subscription is created on those devices.
Use the following steps to apply an alert subscription template:
1. Expand the Alerts tree in the left navigation pane. In the Alerts - Common Tasks task module, select Apply
subscription template. The Select template page is displayed with all alert subscription templates in
alphabetical order.
2. Highlight the template and click Next. The Select devices page displayed.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
Click Next. The Specify link options page is displayed.
4. Select the way you want to be notied about alerts:
●Link template to subscription: Any changes made to the template will automatically aect any
devices associated with this template.
●Do NOT link template to subscription: Changes made to this template will not aect the devices
associated with it. In eect, you are just using the settings from the template and then saving them
under a dierent name for the device just added. You must enter that dierent name for the
subscription.
Click Next.
5. The Conrm page is displayed. Click Apply Template.
204 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
6. To see details about the alerts, click Details; to see details about the alerts for each device, click Expand All.
When done, click Close; the Results page is displayed.
7. Click Done.
Edit Alert Subscription Templates
The settings for an alert subscription template can be changed, including the name of the alert subscription
template.
If an alert subscription template is linked to an alert subscription, any changes that are made to the alert
subscription template are automatically applied to the devices that are associated with that alert subscription.
HP Web Jetadmin always displays alerts in the alert history. When the Log to File option is enabled,
HP Web Jetadmin also writes alerts to the alerts log le. For more information about the alerts log le, see
Congure the Settings for the Alerts Log on page 79.
Use the following steps to edit an alert subscription template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Alerts option, and then select Templates.
2. In the Alerts - Subscription Templates pane, select the alert subscription template from the list, and then
click the Edit button. The Edit Subscription Template wizard starts.
3. If the alert subscription template is congured for General alerts (detailed) or Critical alerts, use the
following steps:
a. On the Select alerts page, select or clear the check boxes for the alerts to monitor, and then click the
Next button.
b. To choose not to congure the advanced settings, select the No advanced settings option.
-or-
To prevent HP Web Jetadmin from sending duplicate alerts for a specic period of time, use the
following steps:
i. Select the Time to ignore duplicate alerts option. This setting applies only to this alert
subscription.
ii. In the Ignore duplicates for boxes, enter the amount of time that HP Web Jetadmin waits before
sending a duplicate alert.
iii. To specify that HP Web Jetadmin ignores the rst occurrence of the time period congured for
the Ignore duplicates for option, select the Ignore rst time period checkbox.
-or-
To send alerts when a threshold is exceeded, select the Count threshold (if applicable) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the Send alert when value exceeds box. For example, if a threshold
of 5000 is specied for the Page Count alert, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert from each monitored
device when it prints page 5,001.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
-or-
If the alert subscription template is congured for Supplies alerts, use the following steps:
ENWW Alerts 205
a. On the Select supplies categories page, select or clear the check boxes for the supply alerts to
monitor, and then click the Next button.
b. To specify a supply threshold, select the Threshold value (early warning, low, very low) option, and
then enter the threshold value in the box. The threshold is a decrementing value. When a supply
reaches the threshold, HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert.
-or-
To specify that HP Web Jetadmin sends an alert when the supply level increases signicantly from the
current level, select the Replaced option.
c. Click the Next button. Continue with step 4.
4. To only write alerts to the alert history log, select the Alert history only option, and then click the Next
button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To send email notications when alerts occur, use the following steps:
IMPORTANT: SMTP must be congured to send email notications. For more information, see Congure
the SMTP Gateway Settings on page 47.
a. Select the Email option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Send to box, enter the email addresses of the recipients separated with a semi-colon (;).
-or-
Click the Browse button. On the Select Email Address window, select the email addresses from the
Available addresses list, and then click the > button. Click the OK button.
TIP: To manage the list of email addresses, click the Manage list button. The Options window opens
with the Addresses option selected. For more information, see Manage the Shared Email Addresses
on page 48.
c. To include a short description of the alert in the message, select the Concise option.
-or-
To include a more detailed description of the alert in the message, select the Verbose option.
-or-
To use an email template for the message, select the Custom option, and then select the template
from the list.
TIP: To create an email template, click the New button. The Options window opens with the Email
Templates option selected. For more information, see Manage the Custom Email Templates
on page 78.
d. To send the alert information in the body of the email and as an attachment to the email, select the
Also send the email body as an attachment checkbox.
e. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
-or-
To forward SNMP traps to a server when alerts occur, use the following steps:
206 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
a. Select the SNMP trap generator option, and then click the Next button.
b. In the Trap destination box, enter the IP address or fully qualied domain name of the server where
HP Web Jetadmin forwards the SNMP traps.
c. In the Listen port box, enter the port on which the server listens for SNMP traps.
d. From the SNMP version list, select the version of SNMP that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the traps.
e. If SNMPv1 or SNMP v2 is selected from the SNMP version list, enter a community name for the trap in
the Community box.
-or-
If SNMPv3 is selected from the SNMP version list, use the following steps:
NOTE: For SNMPv3, HP Web Jetadmin sends an inform notication to the server instead of a trap
notication. The server sends an acknowledgement to HP Web Jetadmin when the inform notication
is received. If HP Web Jetadmin does not receive an acknowledgement within a specied timeout
interval, HP Web Jetadmin resends the inform notication. For more information about conguring
the SNMPv3 timeout interval and number of retries, see Congure the SNMP Settings on page 46.
i. In the User name box, enter the user name.
ii. In the Context name box, enter a context name, such as public.
iii. From the Authentication protocol list, select the protocol.
iv. In the Authentication password and Conrm authentication password boxes, enter the
authentication password.
v. From the Privacy protocol list, select the protocol.
vi. In the Privacy password and Conrm privacy password boxes, enter the privacy password.
f. From the Preferred language list, select the language that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the SNMP traps.
g. To change the format for the SNMP traps, click the Edit button. The Options window opens with the
SNMP Trap Generator option selected. For more information about the SNMP trap format, see
Congure the Format for SNMP Traps on page 80.
h. Click the Next button. Continue with step 5.
5. On the Specify name page, enter a new name for the alert subscription template, and then click the Next
button.
6. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Save Template button.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Import and Export Alert Templates
In an environment that has multiple instances of HP Web Jetadmin, you can create device alert templates in one
instance, and then import them into the instances that are running on dierent servers. However, to import
device alert templates, each server must run the same version of HP Web Jetadmin.
Use the following steps to export device alert templates:
ENWW Alerts 207
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Alerts option.
2. To export multiple templates, right-click Templates, and then select Export alert templates. The Export
Templates wizard starts. On the Select template page, select the templates, and then click the Next
button.
-or-
To export one template, expand Templates, right-click the template, and then select Export. The Export
Templates wizard starts.
3. On the Specify export options page, enter a password in the File encryption password box. This password
prevents unauthorized access to any sensitive data in the template.
4. In the Conrm password box, enter the password again, and then click the Next button.
5. On the Conrm page, verify that the correct templates are listed, and then click the Export button.
6. On the Save as window, navigate to the location to save the template le, enter a name in the File name
box, and then click the Save button.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Use the following steps to import device alert templates:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Alerts.
2. Right-click Templates, and then select Import alert templates. The Import Templates wizard starts.
3. On the Select le page, click the Browse button, navigate to and select the template le, and then click the
Open button.
4. In the File password box, enter the password that was assigned to the template le when it was exported.
5. To overwrite an existing template that has the same name, select the Overwrite duplicate templates check
box. If you select this check box, a warning message appears on the Conrm page.
6. Click the Next button.
7. On the Conrm page, verify that the le name is correct, and then click the Import button.
8. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Delete an Alert Subscription Template
Use the following steps to delete an alert subscription template:
1. Expand the Alerts tree in the left navigation pane. In the Alerts - Common Tasks task module, select Delete
subscription template. The Delete Alert Template wizard is started with the Select template page
displayed.
2. Highlight the template you want to delete and click Next. If the template is linked to devices, specify the
options to remove:
●Remove template but save linked subscriptions: Delete the template but do not delete any
occurrences of this template that have been saved by other names with devices associated with it
(unlinked, see Apply an Alert Subscription Template on page 204).
●Remove subscriptions for all linked devices (listed below): Delete the template and any subscriptions
to the template for all of the devices listed on this page.
Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
208 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
3. Click Delete Template; the Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done.
View All Alert Subscriptions
On the All Subscriptions page, you can view the following information about alerts:
●Device Model: The model of the device that received the alert.
●IP Hostname: The IP Hostname of the device that received the alert.
●IP Address: The IP Address of the device that received the alert.
●Advanced Settings: Any advanced settings for the device.
●Notication Type: How you are notied about the alert (logging or email and logging).
●Subscription Type: General alerts (detailed), Supplies solution, and Mission critical solution.
●Linked to Template: If the device is linked to a template (any future changes to that template will aect the
alert settings for the device).
Use the following steps to view all of the alert subscriptions:
1. Expand the Alerts tree in the left navigation pane and select All Subscriptions. The All Subscriptions page is
displayed.
2. A summary is displayed with all alert subscription templates in alphabetical order. To view details, click +
next to the device. To show details for all subscriptions click + (Expand All) at the top of the page, or click -
(Collapse All) to minimize all subscriptions.
3. To group Alerts, select Group By at the top of the page. You can group alerts by:
●Device: Displays devices that can be individually expanded to show each applied subscription and
corresponding Alerts detail.
●Subscription: Displays subscriptions by name that can be individually expanded to show devices to
which the subscription has been applied.
●Solution Type: Displays one or any of the three types of Alerts that have been congured. These can
be expanded to show individual subscriptions and devices to which the subscription has been applied.
4. With All Subscriptions, you can do any of the following:
●Save as Template: Starts the Create Alert Subscription Template wizard, with the subscription
settings that were selected; see Create Alert Subscription Templates on page 200.
●Unsubscribe: Stop subscribing to the alerts currently set for this device.
●Edit Subscription: Make changes to the alerts for this subscription; see Edit Alert Subscriptions
on page 196.
Firmware
Both printer and HP Jetdirect device rmware can be updated from HP Web Jetadmin. A rmware image le can
be downloaded from www.hp.com and put on the client system. It can then be imported into the Firmware
Repository. If the version of this image is greater than the version on the device, an upgrade is possible.
HP Web Jetadmin cannot be used to downgrade rmware to an older revision level. Firmware updates can be
ENWW Firmware 209
scheduled to occur at any time. Firmware update retry is also available in cases where an update failed or a
device was not on the network.
Qualifying Firmware
Qualifying rmware images ensures that rmware images are tested by individuals with permissions to qualify
images before installing and implementing them in your workplace. When rmware images are marked as
Qualied, they are listed with the column Qualied in the Firmware Repository. With appropriate permission, you
can require rmware images to be qualied by clicking Edit Properties in the Firmware Repository. If you do not
have permission, you can only install rmware images that have been Qualied. Permissions are set in
Application Management > User Security > Roles; for permissions settings, select Device Management >
Firmware > Manage Repository.
Firmware Repository and Qualifying Firmware
The Firmware Repository can be accessed from the navigation pane under Firmware (Firmware Repository
on page 213). HP Jetdirect and printer rmware images exist on www.hp.com and can be accessed in two ways:
●HP Web Jetadmin can contact www.hp.com and display available images to users (using the Get Images
feature). The images can then be imported to the client using the Import feature.
●Image les can be manually obtained and imported to HP Web Jetadmin by the user.
In both cases, the goal is to get the desired image(s) onto HP Web Jetadmin so that they can be used for
updating.
Qualify Feature
Images that are imported into HP Web Jetadmin can be marked as Qualied. This allows administrative control
over rmware images as they are downloaded from the Web.
Users assigned to Roles having Upgrade Device permission enabled, but who do not have Manage Repository
enabled are able to upgrade only with rmware images that are qualied (those marked as Yes in the Qualied
column). Images that are not qualied, will not appear in the list.
Administrators assigned to Roles having Manage Repository enabled, have the ability to see non-qualied
images (those marked as No) and qualied images (those marked as Yes). These administrators can use
upgrade devices with this rmware for test and qualication purposes. Once the rmware is qualied, these
same administrators can use the Edit Properties feature in the Firmware Repository to mark the rmware as
qualied. This action allows other users to begin performing upgrades with tested/qualied rmware.
Finding Images
HP Jetdirect rmware can be obtained through www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_rmware. HP Printer rmware
images can be obtained by visiting the device specic Software and Drivers Downloads pages at
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software. Devices that have rmware update capability will oer a self extracting
executable. The le required for HP Jetdirect printer rmware updates has an rfu extension. This le can be
extracted and then imported into HP Jetdirect by using Import.
210 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Firmware - Common Tasks Task Module
The Firmware - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for rmware:
●Upgrade the rmware on devices
●View the Firmware Repository
Firmware - Active Tasks Task Module
The Firmware - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the rmware tasks that are running. Use this task
module to stop or view the status of an active task.
Firmware - Scheduled Tasks Task Module
The Firmware - Scheduled Tasks task module provides a list of the rmware tasks that are scheduled to run. Use
this task module to delete or edit the settings for a scheduled task.
Firmware - Device Summary Task Module
The Firmware - Device Summary task module provides the following information:
●The number of devices that have the most current device and HP Jetdirect rmware versions installed
●The number of newer versions of the device and HP Jetdirect rmware that are available in the Firmware
Repository and the number of each type that is available
●The number of devices that are currently in a short stack condition
NOTE: When the HP Jetdirect rmware is upgraded, a device might be left in a short stack condition if the
device is disconnected during the upgrade process or a fatal error occurs. HP Web Jetadmin detects this
error condition and tries the upgrade again to make sure that the device is not left in an incomplete
upgrade state.
Related Application Options for Firmware
Global settings can be stored here for managing rmware images and how devices are updated.
●Congure the Settings for Firmware Upgrades on page 81
Upgrade Firmware
Once the rmware images exist on HP Web Jetadmin host, they can be applied as upgrades to devices.
If you chose to only use qualied rmware images, then you must certify rmware images before upgrading the
rmware. Use Edit Properties on the Firmware Repository.
Use the following steps to upgrade the rmware:
ENWW Firmware 211
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Firmware. In the Firmware - Common Tasks task module, select
Upgrade rmware. The Upgrade Firmware wizard is started with the Select upgrade type page displayed.
2. Select the type of rmware to upgrade (device or HP Jetdirect).
3. To schedule the rmware upgrade for later, select Schedule rmware upgrade. Click Next. The Select
devices page is displayed.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
4. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
Click Next. The Select rmware version page is displayed.
If you chose to only use qualied rmware images (in Edit Properties), a Qualied column is displayed
showing whether or not each image listed is qualied. You can select any of the qualied images to
upgrade. If you need to qualify an image and you have the appropriate permissions (Manage Firmware
Images set through User Security on page 278), select the image and click Edit Properties.
NOTE: Some images with the same version and models will be listed as one option on the drop-down list.
Click Next.
5. If one or more of the selected devices support Boot Language, the Select boot language page is displayed.
Select the boot language that will be sent to the printer before the upgrade begins. Then click Next.
If none of the selected devices support Boot Language, this page will not be displayed.
6. If you are scheduling this upgrade for a later time, the Specify schedule options page is displayed. Select
the start date and time. Then click Next.
7. The Conrm page is displayed. Click Next.
8. The Results page is displayed. If a device does not support boot language or for HP Jetdirect upgrades, N/A
will be displayed.
9. Click Done.
212 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Upgrading Firmware for HP Jetdirect Devices versus Printer Devices
Upgrading rmware on HP Jetdirect devices versus printing devices is similar but not identical. HP Jetdirect
rmware updates are done by contacting the device through SNMP and directing it to perform an update by
obtaining the updated rmware from a TFTP service that is started on the HP Web Jetadmin server.
HP Web Jetadmin uses the standard port number for the TFTP server (port 69) that may get blocked by rewall
software on the system hosting HP Web Jetadmin software. Once the update action is started, the device
performs actions against the image le on the TFTP server until the whole image le is obtained. The actual
update action is performed by the HP Jetdirect device itself.
Printer rmware updates are done by HP Web Jetadmin sending the RFU image le to the printer in the same
way a print job would be sent. This print-le action is done via port 9100 on the printer. Once the printer receives
the job, it recognizes it as an update and then launches internal processes that perform the actual update.
HP Web Jetadmin is used strictly as a le send agent in the case of printer rmware updates.
NOTE: If an HP Jetdirect rmware upgrade is launched during a large print job, the job will not nish processing
and will need to be restarted by the user.
Firmware Repository
The rst step in rmware updates is to nd available images. Images exist on www.hp.com and can be accessed
in two ways:
●HP Web Jetadmin can contact www.hp.com and display available images for you.
●You can manually obtain and import image les to HP Web Jetadmin.
In both cases, the goal is to get the desired image onto the HP Web Jetadmin host so that it can be used for
updating. This image will be shown on the Firmware Repository page.
NOTE: For more information about qualifying rmware and the Firmware Repository, see Qualifying Firmware
on page 210.
View the Firmware Repository
You can view the rmware images that HP Web Jetadmin uses on the Firmware > Repository page. This page
displays the following:
●Version of the rmware.
●Date of the version.
●Whether or not the image is local.
●Languages that the rmware supports. All available is displayed for images that do not support languages
packs.
●Device models that the rmware upgrade supports.
Use the following steps to view the Firmware Repository:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Firmware and click Firmware Repository.
2. The available rmware upgrades are listed on the Firmware Repository page.
ENWW Firmware 213
From the Firmware > Repository page, you can choose to do the following:
●Get Images on page 214
●Import Images on page 214
●Edit Properties for Firmware Images on page 214
●Delete Images on page 215
●Upgrade Firmware on page 211
Get Images
Get Images is used to download selected images from www.hp.com onto the client. They can then be imported
into the Firmware Repository and then installed from the Firmware Repository onto the HP Web Jetadmin device
using the Import feature.
Use the following steps to obtain the rmware images:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Firmware and click Firmware Repository. The Firmware Repository page
is displayed with the rmware images already available.
2. Click Get Images. The Get Firmware Images wizard is started with the Select images page displayed.
3. Select the images to get from www.hp.com and click Next. The Select destination page is displayed.
4. Select the destination for the image to be stored and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Click Get Images. The image is downloaded to HP Web Jetadmin and the Results page is displayed.
6. To get the images onto the HP Web Jetadmin server, check the box for Import rmware images and then
click Done. The rmware images are then imported to the server and will appear in the Firmware
Repository on page 213. (For more information about importing rmware images, see Import Images
on page 214.)
7. Click Done.
Import Images
Use the following steps to import images in the Firmware Repository onto devices:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Firmware and click Firmware Repository.
The rmware upgrades are displayed on the Firmware Repository page. Click Import. The Import Firmware
Images wizard is started with the Select rmware le page displayed.
2. Enter or browse to the le with the rmware image and click Next. The image is imported to devices and
the Results page is displayed.
3. Click Done.
Edit Properties for Firmware Images
Use the following steps to edit the description of a rmware image or mark a rmware image as qualied:
214 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Firmware and click Firmware Repository.
2. Highlight the image to be edited and click Edit. The Edit Image Properties dialog is displayed.
3. Change the description of the qualied image setting and click OK.
Delete Images
Use the following steps to delete a rmware image from the Firmware Repository:
1. In the left navigation pane, click Firmware and then click Firmware Repository. The Firmware Repository
page is displayed.
2. Select the rmware image you want to delete and click Delete.
3. A conrmation message is displayed. Click Yes.
4. The rmware will be deleted from the Firmware Repository.
Edit Scheduled Upgrades
Use the following steps to edit a scheduled rmware upgrade task:
1. In the Firmware - Scheduled Tasks task module, select the task and click Edit Properties.
2. Make any changes to the scheduled upgrade task and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
3. Click Next. The schedule for upgrading the rmware will be changed.
Delete Scheduled Upgrades
Use the following steps to delete a scheduled rmware upgrade task:
1. In the left navigation pane, click Firmware. Access the Firmware - Scheduled Tasks task module.
Select the schedule to delete and then click Delete.
2. A conrmation message is displayed. Click OK. The schedule is deleted from HP Web Jetadmin.
Reports
HP Web Jetadmin provides a rich set of data collection and reporting features. These features enable data
collections that are stored in a database and that are used in generating reports at a later time. After data is
collected about a device or group of devices, you can display the data in a report, save the data for future use, or
save the report.
There are two steps to producing a report:
1. Collecting the data: request which devices to collect information about for the report. Since this process
causes network trac and database space, you must turn on data collection when you want a report.
ENWW Reports 215
NOTE: If the data collection is not turned on, then the data will not be included in the report when it is run.
2. Generating the report: specify the report type, the device or group or devices to include in the report (which
could be all or a subset of the devices you specied in Step 1), and the time frame for the data to be
included in the report. This must be done each time you want the report to run.
Reporting in HP Web Jetadmin shows data change over time. A very simple report could be simple device page
count on a single device (Device Utilization, see Device Utilization on page 221). After data collection has been
established and multiple page counts exist in the database, a report can be displayed that shows the page count
change (if any) in a selected time interval.
For more information about producing a report for the rst time, see Getting Started with Reports on page 224.
Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available
The following table identies the reports that can be generated for each type of data collection.
Data collection type Report generated
Accessories Inventory
Collects information about the accessories that are installed on
devices, such as a duplexer or paper tray.
Accessory information is collected once every 24 hours.
Accessory Inventory
Reports information about the device accessories that are installed,
have been uninstalled, and have been changed.
Device Inventory
Collects information about the device status, other device details,
and attribute changes, such as the rst and last communication.
Device information is collected once every 24 hours.
Device Inventory
Reports the devices that HP Web Jetadmin discovered, devices that
have been lost, and any IP address changes. This information
includes the number of each device model that is installed on the
network.
Device Utilization
Collects the following information:
●Page counts for the color, mono (black and white), simplex,
duplex, and total pages printed
●Page counts for the copy, scan, digital send, and fax pages
printed
Data is collected once every 24 hours.
Device Utilization
Reports the page counts for the media and page types that the
devices processed during a specic time interval or reporting
period.
Device Utilization by User
Collects information about the jobs that each user printed, including
the application used to print each job.
Data is collected when job traps are sent from a device to the
HP Web Jetadmin host. For devices that do not support job traps,
the data in the device job table is collected once every 24 hours.
Device Utilization by User
Reports the jobs that have been printed and the user who printed
the jobs.
Event Log History
Collects information from the error log on the devices.
Event Log History
Reports the frequency of occurrence for each error type.
Hourly Peak Usage
Collects the following information:
●Page counts for the color, mono (black and white), simplex,
duplex, and total pages printed
Hourly Peak Usage
Reports the page counts for the media and page types that the
devices processed on an hourly basis and displays them as charts
or summary reports.
216 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Data collection type Report generated
●Page counts for the copy, scan, digital send, and fax pages
printed
Data is collected once every hour.
Supply Utilization
Collects information about the supplies that are about to run out
and consumption rates based on the current usage. These supplies
include cartridges, maintenance kits, and drum kits.
Data is collected once every 24 hours.
Supply Ordering (HP SureSupply)
Reports the requirements for ordering supplies based on a
percentage or threshold. This report provides an option to
automatically place orders by using HP SureSupply.
Supply Replacement Forecast
Reports the estimated date when each supply will need to be
replaced by using the supply usage history. This report includes the
percentage of condence, part number details, current supply
levels, and so on.
Supply Usage
Reports the supply consumption rates in specic environments. For
each supply, this report shows the consumption to-date, last
installation date, serial number, and so on.
NOTE: This report includes information only about devices that
have cartridges with serial numbers installed.
Examples of Reports
Reporting in HP Web Jetadmin shows data change over time. A very simple report could be simple device page
count on a single device. After data collection has been established and multiple page counts exist in the
database, a report can be displayed that shows the page count change (if any) in a selected time interval. (See
Device Utilization on page 221).
Following is an example of data collection for page counts for a device for seven days:
Day 1: 20 pages Day 8: 35
Day 2: 25 pages Day 9: 40
Day 3: 26 pages Day 10: 44
Day 4: 26 pages Day 11: 44
Day 5: 26 pages Day 12: 44
Day 6: 26 pages Day 13: 44
Day 7: 31 pages Day 14: 47
On days where page counts remain the same (in the example above, Days 3, 4, 5, and 6), HP Web Jetadmin
stores the unchanged value.
Based on the above example, a simple report totaling pages printed in one week intervals might look like this:
Device 1.1.0.1
ENWW Reports 217
Week 1: 11
(31 - 20 = 11)
Week 2: 16
(47 - 31 = 16)
Total: 27
(11 + 16 = 27)
Another report totaling pages printed in daily intervals might look like this:
Day 1: 0 Day 8: 4
Day 2: 5 Day 9: 5
Day 3: 1 Day 10: 4
Day 4: 0 Day 11: 0
Day 5: 0 Day 12: 0
Day 6: 0 Day 13: 0
Day 7: 5 Day 14: 3
Device 1.1.0.1
Total = 27
Complex reporting features exist and facilitate much more than simple counts. Data collected over time and
reported in some interval is the general basis for most reporting features.
Report Management - Common Tasks Task Module
The Report Management - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for
reports:
●Display an overview of the main steps required to produce reports
●Add devices to a data collection
●Remove devices from a data collection
●Generate a report
●Schedule a report
●View an archived report
Data Collection - Common Tasks Task Module
The Data Collection - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for data
collections:
218 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Add devices to a data collection
●Remove devices from a data collection
●Create a data collection template
●Apply a data collection template to devices
●Edit a data collection template
●Delete a data collection template
●Copy a data collection template to create a new template
Data Collection - Management Task Module
The Data Collection - Management task module provides a list of the data collection types and the number of
devices that have been added to each data collection. Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Add devices to a data collection
●Remove devices from a data collection
●View the settings and devices for a data collection
●View the Data Collection Anomalies window where you can reconcile or resolve the anomalies
Data Collection - Templates Task Module
The Data Collection - Templates task module provides a list of the data collection templates that have been
created. Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Create a data collection template
●Apply a data collection template to devices
●Edit a data collection template
●Delete a data collection template
●Copy a data collection template to create a new template
●View the settings for a data collection template
Reports - Scheduled Reports Task Module
The Reports - Scheduled Reports task module provides a list of the reports that are scheduled to run. Use this
task module to delete or edit the settings for a report schedule.
Reports - Report Templates Task Module
The Reports - Report Templates task module provides a list of the default report templates and the custom
report templates that have been created. Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
ENWW Reports 219
●Create a report template
●Apply a report template to devices
●Edit a custom report template
●Delete a report template
●Copy a report template to create a new template
●View the settings for a report template
Reports - Report Generation Task Module
The Reports - Report Generation task module provides a list of the default reports that can be generated. Use
this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Generate a report
●Schedule a report to run at a later time
●Generate a sample of a report
Reports - Archived Reports Task Module
The Reports - Archived Reports task module provides a list of the reports that have been archived. Use this task
module to perform the following tasks:
●View an archived report
●Send an archived report to an email address
●Save an archived report as a comma-separated values (CSV) or HTML le
●Delete an archived report
Related Application Options for Reports
Global settings can be stored here for managing report data.
●Manage the General Settings for Reports on page 82
●Congure the Data Collection Times for Reports on page 82
Available Reports
Reports are generated through a combination of user-dened settings and collected data that is stored in the
database. There are many report types that correspond directly to data collection types. Completed reports can
be displayed through the HP Web Jetadmin client host. Reports are stored in an archive and can be sent to email
through SMTP.
Reports can be generated in a summary format or in a reporting period format. Reports can be scheduled to
occur at a specied time automatically or immediately.
220 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the template
when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web Jetadmin
server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also display
any task module on the Overview page.
Accessory Inventory
The Accessory Inventory report can be used to inventory and track changes in device accessories.
Available report subtypes are:
●Time Interval: reports changes in accessories on devices over the specied time interval.
●Last Known Status: reports the last known status of each accessory on the device.
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Accessory Name
●Accessory Status
●Collection Date
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
NOTE: You might need to power cycle your devices to reect accessory changes.
Device Inventory
The Device Inventory report captures device status and device communication states. This report can be used to
track devices that are missing or have been known to be missing in some time frame.
Available report subtypes are:
●Time Interval: reports changes in statuses on devices over the specied time interval.
●Last Known Status (Details): reports the last known status and communication state of each device.
●Last Known Status (Summary): categorizes devices into the dierent statuses.
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Inventory Status
●Inventory Date
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Device Utilization
The Device Utilization report tracks the media usage and page counts for a specic time period. The following
report subtypes are available:
ENWW Reports 221
●Time Interval (Job Type): Displays the page counts for the specied job type (for example, mono, color, or
copy jobs).
●Time Interval (Media Size): Displays the page counts for the specied media size.
●Job Type (Details): Displays the page counts for the specied job type and media sizes.
The report data that is available for job types includes, but is not limited to, the following:
●Total
●Total Accent Color
●Total Color
●Total Duplex
●Total General Oce Color
●Total Mono
●Total Other Color
●Total Simplex
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Device Utilization by User
The Device Utilization by User reports by-user page counts based on job tables captured at the device.
Available report subtypes are:
●Time Interval: reports pages printed by user (application page count, color page counts, mono page counts,
and others) over a time period.
●Time Interval (Media Size): reports pages printed by user of media sizes (letter, legal, and others) over a
time period.
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Total
●MS Word
●Total Color
●Total Mono
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Event Log History
The Event Log History report shows device errors and error categories.
Available report subtypes are:
●Time Interval: reports pages printed on an hourly interval over a time period.
●Summary (Event Type): reports the number of events in each category for each device, by report interval
(daily, weekly, monthly, and others).
222 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Event Code (Hex)
●Event Description
●Event Log Page Count
●Event Type
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Hourly Peak Usage
The Hourly Peak Usage report tracks hourly page and media counts.
Available report subtypes are:
●Time Interval: reports pages printed on an hourly interval over a time period.
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Total Mono
●Total
●Total Simplex
●Total Duplex
●Total Simplex
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Supply Ordering
The Supply Ordering report provides a list of needed supplies based on your specied percentage and threshold.
Also included is an HP SureSupply order option.
Available report subtypes are:
●Details: shows how many supplies per device are needed based on the specied threshold.
●Summary: shows a consolidated list of totals needed per supply part number across all devices based on
the specied threshold.
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Supply
●Supply Part Number
●Installation Date
●Estimated Supply Level (%)
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
ENWW Reports 223
Supply Replacement Forecast
The Supply Replacement Forecast report is a predictive report showing replacement needs for specic supplies.
The device supplies metrics that exist in your database will be analyzed, a prediction about needed supplies will
be made, and the Supply Replacement Forecast will be generated. This prediction is based on details that
include supplies levels, percentage coverage, and other historic data relegated to supplies and printing. The
report will include a percentage condence rating to give you an indication of how much data existed and was
used in the analysis. If very little data existed, the percentage condence should indicate a low value. If you have
been tracking supplies on devices for a long period of time, the report would show a higher percentage of
condence.
Available report subtypes are:
●Details: shows estimated forecasted replacement date per device per supply as well as quantity of supply
needed in the specied time period.
●Summary: shows the quantity of supply needed by part number across all devices based on specied time
period.
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Supply
●Supply Part Number
●Estimated Remaining
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Supply Usage
The Supply Usage report shows usage based on page count over supply lifetime, including many supply details
including install dates and serial numbers. This report only includes information about devices with serial
numbers on their toner cartridges.
Available report subtypes are:
●Details: shows supplies that are installed (active) and/or uninstalled (removed) on the device and provides
usage information (installation date, estimated percentage remaining, and more).
●Inventory: tracks a specic supply instance between devices (the supply must have a valid serial number).
Available columns for this report include but are not limited to:
●Supply Part Number
●Supply Status
●Supply Installation Date
●Average Supply Coverage (%)
●Average Supply Coverage (%) (default)
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Getting Started with Reports
The following steps are required to generate a report:
224 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. Collect the data: Specify the devices for which HP Web Jetadmin collects data. The data collection process
causes network trac and requires database space, so you must enable data collection when you want a
report. You can specify which reports HP Web Jetadmin generates based on the type of data collection you
select.
2. Generate the report: Specify the following options:
●The type of report to generate. The type of data collection specied in step 1 determines which
reports HP Web Jetadmin can generate.
●The device group or individual devices to include in the report, which might be all of the devices or a
subset of the devices specied in step 1.
NOTE: You can only select devices for which data has been collected.
●The time frame for the data to be included in the report.
This must be done each time you want the report to run.
Data Collection
Data collections are groups of devices that have specic collection types enabled. You can apply a data collection
type such as Device Utilization to a single device, to multiple devices, or to a device group. When a data collection
is rst applied to a device or devices, HP Web Jetadmin launches a data collection immediately establishing a
data baseline. Once the device is populated under a specic data collection type, data collections occur at some
interval or by way of some trigger.
NOTE: Applying data collection to a device group is done through Group Policies on page 123.
As data is collected, it is stored in tables within the HP Web Jetadmin database. Data retention is set to one year
beyond the initial collection date. This value can be changed in Tools > Options > Shared > Server Maintenance >
Reports (Manage the Report Data on page 52). Data collections for Reports can be retained for up to 5 years.
Data Collection Cycle
Data collection types all have a specic collection cycle that may or may not be dependent on a schedule. The
Device Utilization by User data collections are triggered when printers send job-trap packets into the
HP Web Jetadmin host. All other types are schedule-triggered. All data collections collect data every 24 hours
except for the Hourly Peak Usage data collection which is collected once every hour to provide greater reporting
resolution.
The default start time for the data collection 24 hour cycle is set at 12:00AM at the HP Web Jetadmin host. This
can be congured for each data collection in Tools > Options > Device Management > Reports > Data Collection
Times. When subscribing a device to a data collection, you can choose the time of collection if you prefer a
dierent time. The 24 hour cycle is designed to ensure reporting accuracy. Data within reports will be marked if
the data collected did not represent a full 24 hour cycle.
Initial Data Collection
Activating data collection always launches the specic data collection type on selected devices. This is done to
gather initial or baseline data that is then stored in the database. This is not a user-selectable action. The result
of this initial data collection can be observed in the Results display for any completed data collection.
ENWW Reports 225
Data Collection Custom Collection Time
HP Web Jetadmin has a custom collection time feature that allows you to specify the time zone of the devices
you are collecting for and the hour to perform the collection. The data collection start time is 12:00AM local
server time. The default collection time for the Web Jetadmin server can be altered through Tools > Options >
Device Management > Reports > Data Collection Times (see Congure the Data Collection Times for Reports
on page 82). You can specify the time zone and custom hour when setting up data collection (see Add Devices to
Data Collection on page 227) or when creating data collection templates (Create a Data Collection Template
on page 228), For example:
Joy has devices in the Pacic time zone. Her HP Web Jetadmin server is in the mountain time zone. The devices
that Joy manages are not turned on until 8AM. Pacic time. Data collection at 12AM Mountain time would not
capture any data for the devices since they are turned o at the end of the business day. When Joy sets up data
collection for the devices, Joy can specify that she would like the collection to run in the Pacic time zone and at
9:00AM. The data collection would start on the HP Web Jetadmin server at 10AM Mountain time which is 9AM
Pacic time.
HP Web Jetadmin will continue to use a 24 hour data collection cycle for all devices.
Device Utilization by User and Data Collections
The Device Utilization by User data collection type uses SNMP traps to trigger the HP Web Jetadmin host data
collection. Every time a print job is completed by the device, a trap is sent and HP Web Jetadmin runs a complete
query of the device’s job table. Any new entries in the job table are stored in the HP Web Jetadmin database; all
old entries that were previously stored are discarded.
HP Web Jetadmin uses UDP port 27892 as the traps listener port for alerts and any reports that are based on
by-user collections.
Device Utilization by User accuracy may be limited by two things:
●the device’s ability to store only a limited number of jobs in the job table.
●the device’s ability to trap when multiple print jobs are queued.
Both of these are dependant on device printer model and rmware. Device Utilization by User and Reporting
should never be used as a substitute for job accounting. HP Web Jetadmin Reports features are designed for
trending and analysis purposes.
NOTE: For devices that don’t support job-traps, HP Web Jetadmin will collect the device’s job table once every
24 hours.
Device and Printer Driver Support for Device Utilization by User
Job logging features are not available on all HP printers. Check your printer documentation to be sure these
device-based features exist.
End of job trapping is not supported on all HP printers. In the case where end of job trapping is not supported,
HP Web Jetadmin will query the job tables once per collection period (24 hours). This may impact the accuracy of
by-user reporting due to the limited size of the device job log.
Windows print drivers supplied by HP are known to support device job log entries. Windows print drivers
available through Microsoft Windows operating systems may not support job log entries. Be sure to use
HP model-specic drivers or the HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) when by-user tracking is required.
226 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Using Group Policies to Set Data Collection
The Group Policies feature is a powerful new automation tool that can save you a lot of time conguring devices
and HP Web Jetadmin settings. Any device group has a property known as a Group Policies. One policy that can
be added to any device group’s properties is Enable Data Collection. When activating the Enable Data Collection
to a device group, you must dene a data collection template from the list of existing templates. Also, a trigger is
specied that enables the conguration to take place either as the device is populated into the group or as the
device is de-populated from the group. Multiple Enable Data Collection settings can exist on a single device
group. See Group Policies on page 123.
Add Devices to Data Collection
Use the following steps to add devices to a data collection:
NOTE: If you access this feature through the Data Collection - Management Task Module on page 219, then you
will skip the rst page of the Add Devices to Data Collection Wizard.
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then click Data Collection.
In the Data Collection - Common Tasks task module, select Add devices to data collection. The Add Devices
to Data Collection wizard is started with the Select data collection page displayed.
2. Select the template to use, if any and then select the type of data collection(s) to perform.
3. Select the time zone and the time to start data collection. The click Next; the Select devices page is
displayed.
NOTE: For more information about Data Collection oset hours, see Data Collection Custom Collection
Time on page 225.
4. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
5. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
6. Click Add Devices. The Results page is displayed.
Click Details to view the types of data collection for that device. When done, click Close; the Results page is
displayed again.
7. Click Done to display the Data Collection page.
8. Now you are ready to generate a report.
ENWW Reports 227
Remove Devices from Data Collection
Use the following steps to remove devices from a data collection:
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then click Data Collection.
In the Data Collection - Common Tasks task module, select Remove devices from data collection. The
Remove Devices from Data Collection wizard is started with the Select data collection type page displayed.
2. Select the type of data collection that you want to remove devices from and click Next. The Select devices
page is displayed.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
4. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed showing you the devices to be deleted from this type of data
collection.
5. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done to display the Data Collection page.
Data Collection Templates
In Data Collection Templates, you can:
●Create new templates (Create a Data Collection Template on page 228).
●View existing templates (Data Collection Templates on page 228).
●Edit existing templates (Edit a Data Collection Template on page 230).
●Apply existing templates (Apply a Data Collection Template on page 229).
●Delete existing templates (Delete a Data Collection Template on page 230).
●Copy existing templates (Copy Template Wizard on page 99).
You can also add devices to or remove devices from this type of data collection.
Create a Data Collection Template
For more information, see Types of Data Collection and Reports That Are Available on page 216.
Data Collection Templates are designed to help you enable more than one data collection type. In summary, you
can create a data collection template by opening the Create Data Collection Template wizard, select one or more
data collection types, name the template, and then conrm the settings.
After the template has been created, it can be applied to devices in the same ways as individual data collection
types. By applying data collection templates, you are actually conguring the individual data collection types
without having to activate controls multiple times.
For scheduling information, see Data Collection Custom Collection Time on page 225.
Use the following steps to create a data collection template:
228 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then click Data Collection.
In the Data Collection - Common Tasks task module, select Create data collection template. The Create
Data Collection Template wizard is started with the Choose data collection type page displayed.
2. Select the type of data collection for this template and specify the time zone and collection time and then
click Next. The Select collection time page is displayed.
3. Select the time zone and the time to start data collection. The click Next; the Specify name page is
displayed.
NOTE: For more information about Data Collection oset hours, see Data Collection Custom Collection
Time on page 225.
4. Type the name for the template and then click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done to display the Data Collection page.
7. Now you are ready to apply the template to devices and to generate a report.
Apply a Data Collection Template
You can apply a Data Collection template that has already been created to a device or group of devices. You can
also turn data collection on and o; this is useful if you need to control the network trac generated to
communicate with the devices and also because the data is stored in database tables which, over time, can
become quite large. By selecting the data to include, you have great exibility as to what you want to include in
your reports.
Use the following steps to apply a data collection template:
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then click Data Collection.
In the Data Collection - Common Tasks task module, select Apply data collection template. The Apply Data
Collection Template wizard is started with the Select data collection page displayed.
2. Select a template and click Next. The Select devices page is displayed.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
4. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
Click Details to view the types of data collection for that device. To expand the details for all devices, click
Expand All. When done, click Close; the Results page is displayed again.
ENWW Reports 229
6. Click Done to display the Data Collection page.
7. Now you are ready to generate a report.
Edit a Data Collection Template
Use the following steps to edit a data collection template:
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then click Data Collection.
In the Data Collection - Common Tasks task module, select Edit data collection template. The Edit Data
Collection Template wizard is started with the Select template page displayed.
2. Select a template and click Next. The Choose data collection type page is displayed.
3. To change the type of data collection for this template, check the type or types to include and uncheck
those that should not be included. Then click Next. The Select collection time page is displayed.
4. Select the time zone and the time to start data collection. The click Next; the Specify name page is
displayed.
NOTE: For more information about Data Collection oset hours, see Data Collection Custom Collection
Time on page 225.
5. To change the name for this template, type the new name in Template name (or you can leave the name as
it was). Then click Next. The Conrm page is displayed showing you the old settings and the new settings
for this template.
6. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
7. Click Done to display the Data Collection page.
8. Now you are ready to generate a report.
Delete a Data Collection Template
Use the following steps to delete a data collection template:
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then click Data Collection.
In the Data Collection - Common Tasks task module, select Delete data collection template. The Delete
Data Collection Templates wizard is started with the Select templates page displayed.
2. Select the data collection template or templates to delete and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
3. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done to display the Data Collection page.
Copy a Data Collection Template
Throughout Device Management view, templates can be created and managed to save you time and provide
consistency. Templates contain conguration preferences (that vary by template type) and can be applied to
devices or groups. Templates are available in Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data Collection, and Report
Generation. For more information, see Copy Template Wizard on page 99.
230 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
View Data Collection Templates
Use the following steps to view a data collection template:
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane; then expand the Data Collection tree and click
Templates.
2. Select the template from the list, and then click the View button.
Data Collection Summaries
You can view which devices have been added to any type of data collection. The following information is
displayed:
●Name: name of the data collection.
●Trac impact: how this data collection, while running, aects network trac (high, medium, or low).
●Collection time: how often this data collection is run.
●# Devices: how many devices are included in this data collection. (More devices included might negatively
impact network trac).
●Reports supported: shows all of the reports you could generate with this particular type of data collection.
Use the following steps to view a summary of a data collection:
1. Expand the Reports tree in the left navigation pane and then expand Data Collection. Below Data
Collection, click on any type of data collection. The summary page for that type of data collection is
displayed.
2. View the summary data displayed.
3. To collect data now, highlight one or more devices listed and click Collect Now (at the bottom of the page).
The data collection for the selected device or devices is started immediately.
4. To add devices from this type of data collection:
a. Click Add Devices (at the bottom of the page). The Add Devices to Data Collection wizard is started
with the Select devices page displayed. Click Next.
b. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select
multiple devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use
the double arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or
view more columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks
can be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts.
If the devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and
create a new scheduled task.
c. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed showing you the devices to be added to this type of data
collection.
d. Click Add Devices. The Results page is displayed.
e. Click Done to display the summary data page.
ENWW Reports 231
5. To remove devices from this type of data collection:
a. Select the devices you want to remove and click Remove Devices (at the bottom of the page). The
Remove Devices from Data Collection wizard is started with the Conrm page displayed.
b. Click Remove Devices. The Results page is displayed.
c. Click Done to display the summary data page.
6. To generate a report now, see Generate Reports on page 235.
Data Collection Statuses
Following are the various Data Collection statuses that will be displayed on Data Collection pages.
Status Denition Resolution
Communication Error Data Collection was not possible because
HP Web Jetadmin was not able to
communicate with the device.
Make sure the device is connected to the
network and that it is turned on
Device Change Error A dierent device exists at this IP address.
The Data Collection feature checks the
device for unique attributes. Devices that
don’t match this criteria fail with this error.
The new device should be discovered
through any discovery mechanism and then
added into the data collection. Anomaly is
informational only.
Device Error Data Collection was not possible due to a
device error.
Check the device.
Failure Data Collection was not successful. This could indicate ether an internal or
external failure. Check the device if these
recur.
In Process Data Collection is in progress. N/A
Need Credentials Data Collection was not possible because
credentials are required.
To locate the devices requiring credentials,
use the HP Web Jetadmin Device List
column titled Credentials Required. To add
credentials, right-click on each device
requiring credentials and select Update
Credentials. After the credentials are
updated, the Data Collection should succeed
the next time it is attempted.
Not Valid For Device Data Collection type is not valid for this
device model.
Select a dierent device. If the device isn't
capable, consider removing it from the data
collection.
Success Data Collection was successful. N/A
Data Collection Anomalies
Use the following steps to view the data collection anomalies:
232 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
1. In the Reports - Data Collection - Management task module, highlight the type of data collection to review
and click Anomalies. The Data Collection Anomalies page is displayed.
2. Select the anomaly to view and click Reconcile.
You can choose to Ignore the anomaly.
3. To export the anomalies listed to an spreadsheet report, click Export and then specify the location to save
the le.
4. When done, click Close.
The following table provides a description of the data collection anomalies.
Anomaly Type Description Reset Ignore Adjust
Device at IP Address
changed
All data collections The device is a
dierent device than
what was subscribed
to.
Deletes all data
stored for the
device.
Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Suspect Serial
Number
All data collections The serial number is
not unique (for
example, serial
numbers with xxx).
This often occurs
when swapping one
formatter for
another.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Inconsistent Totals Data collections for
Device Utilization
and Hourly Peak
Usage
The page counts do
not reconcile (for
example, the page
count total is
dierent from the
sum of color and
mono page counts).
Deletes all the
Collection data
collected on the
device for the given
collection period.
Future collections
during that time will
continue as normal.
Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Abnormal Increasing
Page Counts
Data collections for
Device Utilization
and Hourly Peak
Usage
The page counts
collected were over
10,000 pages for a
given collection
period.
Deletes the
Collection data
collected on the
device for the given
collection period.
Future collections
during that time will
continue as normal.
Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
Adjusts the current
values for the
anomalous
collection,
subtracting the
abnormally large
number of pages
from the count.
Descending Page
Counts
Data collections for
Device Utilization
and Hourly Peak
Usage
The collected page
count has
decreased; and will
be treated as if no
pages were printed
on the device.
Deletes the
Collection data
collected on the
device for the given
collection period.
Future collections
during that time will
continue as normal.
Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
Adjusts the current
values for the
anomalous
collection,
subtracting the
actual negative
pages from the
collection.
Possibly missing job
data
Data collections for
By User
HP Web Jetadmin
has detected that
print jobs may have
been missed
because the device
didn't send traps for
the jobs.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
ENWW Reports 233
Anomaly Type Description Reset Ignore Adjust
Removed from trap
table
Data collections for
By User
The
HP Web Jetadmin
server was removed
from the device's
trap table. Traps for
completed jobs will
not be received.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
Altering this
anomaly adds the
HP Web Jetadmin
server to the Trap
Table.
Device is not unique All data collections HP Web Jetadmin
was not able to
obtain sucient
data to uniquely
identify the device.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Not supported by
device
All data collections The device does not
support the
requirements of the
data collection.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Device is under
contract
All data collections HP Web Jetadmin
could not complete
the report
subscription for the
device because it is
under contract.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Failed to connect to
device
All data collections HP Web Jetadmin
was unable to
communicate with
the device.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
SNMP trap table is
full on device
All data collections HP Web Jetadmin
could not complete
the collection
subscription for the
device because the
device's trap table is
full
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Device does not
support required
SNMP trap
All data collections HP Web Jetadmin
could not complete
the collection
subscription for the
device because the
device does not
support the required
SNMP trap
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Credentials are
required to
subscribe to device
All data collections HP Web Jetadmin
needs credentials
for the device before
the report
subscription can be
completed.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
Subscription was
skipped for device
All data collections During upgrade, the
collection
subscription request
for this device was
skipped by the user.
N/A Ignores this
anomaly and
removes it from the
open anomalies list.
N/A
234 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Report Generation
After data collection has been performed, you can generate reports. The type of reports that can be generated is
dependent upon the type of data collection that you ran.
Reports - Common Tasks Task Module
The Reports - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for reports:
●Generate a report
●Schedule a report
●Create a report template
●Apply a report template to devices
●Edit a report template
●Delete a report template
●Copy a report template to create a new template
●View an archived report
●Send an archived report to an email address
●Save an archived report as a comma-separated values (CSV) or HTML le
●Delete an archived report
Generate Reports
Before you can generate a report, you must specify the report type, devices or device groups included in the
report, device information included in the report, time period for the report, and if the report is archived or sent
to an email address. You can generate the report immediately or schedule the report to run on a recurring basis.
You can select the device information that is included in the report from the Available columns list in the
Generate Report wizard. Because there are so many columns available, the list provides three categories of
columns—Favorites, All, and Obsolete. Each category contains a list of columns and additional categories that
you can select.
When generating and displaying reports, HP Web Jetadmin uses either a period (.) or comma (,) as the decimal
separator depending on the display language that is congured on the HP Web Jetadmin client. For example, the
decimal separator is a period if the display language is English and the decimal separator is a comma if the
display language is German. To change the display language in Windows on the HP Web Jetadmin client, go to
Start > Control Panel > Clock, Language, and Region > Region and Language, and then click the Keyboard and
Languages tab. From the Choose a display language list, select the language. If the Choose a display language
list is not available, an additional language must be installed rst.
NOTE: When viewing device lists, the decimal separator might be dierent from the decimal separator that is
used when generating and displaying reports. HP Web Jetadmin uses either a period (.) or comma (,) as the
decimal separator in device list columns depending on the settings that are congured on the Formats tab in the
Region and Language dialog.
When reports are generated and sent to shared email addresses, HP Web Jetadmin uses either a period (.) or
comma (,) as the decimal separator depending on the preferred language that is congured for each shared
email address. For example, the decimal separator is a period in English reports and a comma in German
ENWW Reports 235
reports. For instructions on specifying the preferred language for shared email addresses, see Manage the
Shared Email Addresses on page 48.
Use the following steps to generate a report:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Reports, and then select Generate report. The
Generate Report wizard starts.
2. To use a report template, select the Use template option, and then select a template from the list.
-or-
To create a custom report, select the Custom option, and then select the report type from the list.
NOTE: Data collection must be enabled for the report type that is selected. For more information about
conguring data collection, see Data Collection on page 225.
3. To schedule the report to run at a later time, select the Schedule report checkbox.
4. Click the Next button.
5. To specify the devices that are included in the report by selecting individual devices, use the following
steps:
a. Select the Devices option.
b. To display only the devices that are in a specic device list, click the ... button, and then select the
device list.
c. From the Available devices column, select the devices, and then click the > button.
-or-
To include all of the devices, click the >> button.
-or-
To specify the devices that are included in the report by selecting a device group, use the following steps:
NOTE: If a report for a device group is scheduled, the report includes the devices that are in the device
group when the scheduled task starts.
a. Select the Groups option.
b. Click the ... button, and then select the device group.
c. To include the subgroups in a device group, select the Include subgroups checkbox.
CAUTION: If subgroups are included in the report, HP Web Jetadmin might take more time to
generate the report and there might be a signicant increase in network trac.
6. Click the Next button.
7. If data collection has not been enabled for the selected devices, the Enable data collection page appears.
Use the following steps to enable data collection:
a. Click the Start Data Collection button. The Add Devices to Data Collection wizard starts.
b. From the Time zone list, select the time zone that HP Web Jetadmin uses for the data collection.
c. From the Time list, select the time when HP Web Jetadmin collects data from the devices.
d. Click the Next button.
e. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Add Devices button.
236 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
f. On the Results page, click the Done button.
g. On the Enable data collection page, click the Next button.
8. On the Specify report settings page, specify the settings for the report. For more information about the
settings for a specic report, click one of the following links:
●Accessory Inventory Report Settings on page 238
●Device Inventory Report Settings on page 239
●Device Utilization Report Settings on page 240
●Device Utilization by User Report Settings on page 241
●Event Log History Report Settings on page 243
●Hourly Peak Usage Report Settings on page 244
●Supply Ordering Report Settings on page 245
●Supply Replacement Forecast Report Settings on page 246
●Supply Usage Report Settings on page 246
9. Click the Next button.
10. To only archive the report, select the Archive only option.
-or-
To send the report to email recipients, use the following steps:
a. Select the Email option.
b. In the Send to box, enter the email addresses of the recipients separated by a semi-colon (;).
-or-
Click the Browse button. On the Select Email Address window, select the email addresses from the
Available addresses list, and then click the > button. Click the OK button.
NOTE: When reports are generated and sent to shared email addresses, HP Web Jetadmin uses
either a period (.) or comma (,) as the decimal separator depending on the preferred language that is
congured for each shared email address. For example, the decimal separator is a period in English
reports and a comma in German reports. For instructions on specifying the preferred language for
shared email addresses, see Manage the Shared Email Addresses on page 48.
c. To send the report as an HTML le, select the HTML option.
-or-
To send the report as a comma-separated values (CSV) le, select the CSV option.
11. Click the Next button.
12. In the Report name box, enter a name for the report.
13. In the Archive report for box, enter the number of days that HP Web Jetadmin keeps the archived report.
14. Click the Next button.
15. If the Specify schedule options page appears, use the following steps:
ENWW Reports 237
a. From the Start time lists, select the date and time that the scheduled report is generated.
b. In the Recurrence section, select the option that species how often the scheduled report is
generated, and then specify any associated settings.
c. Click the Next button.
16. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Create Schedule button.
17. On the Report Generation Complete page, click the Done button.
Accessory Inventory Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Accessory Inventory report in the
Generate Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Formatting (Detailed) section, select whether or not to show all accessories.
●To show all accessories, click Show all accessories.
●To show only some accessories, leave Show all accessories unchecked. Then select the accessories to
show from Available accessories. and click the arrow buttons between the two lists to move them to
Selected accessories.
3. In the Date range section:
●Previous time period:
This option lets you request data from a specied number of previous days, weeks, months, and
years. TO base this from today, select From today; for example, if today is April 4, then previous
month would be March 4 to April 4. If you request for the last month, that would be April 1 to April 30.
NOTE: This option is not available if you are scheduling this report for a later time.
●Previous quarter: This option lets you request data based on company quarters.
●Custom range: To specify a custom date range, specify the date range for the data to be included on
the report.
NOTE: Even though data can be collected for a period of time, not all of that data has to be included on
the report. You can determine a smaller time frame for the data that is actually included in the report.
238 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
4. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
5. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
6. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Device Inventory Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Device Inventory report in the Generate
Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Date range section:
●Previous time period:
This option lets you request data from a specied number of previous days, weeks, months, and
years. TO base this from today, select From today; for example, if today is April 4, then previous
month would be March 4 to April 4. If you request for the last month, that would be April 1 to April 30.
ENWW Reports 239
NOTE: This option is not available if you are scheduling this report for a later time.
●Previous quarter: This option lets you request data based on company quarters.
●Custom range: To specify a custom date range, specify the date range for the data to be included on
the report.
NOTE: Even though data can be collected for a period of time, not all of that data has to be included on
the report. You can determine a smaller time frame for the data that is actually included in the report.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
3. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
4. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
5. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Device Utilization Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Device Utilization report in the Generate
Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●Select the Report Interval (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or None).
240 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●To include totals for any specic column, select Show totals.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Formatting (Detailed) section (only applicable for the Job Type (Details) subtype), select whether or
not to show all media sizes.
●To show all media sizes, click Show all media sizes.
●To show only some media sizes, leave Show all media sizes unchecked. Then select the media sizes
to show from Available media sizes. and click the arrow buttons between the two lists to move them
to Selected media sizes.
3. In the Date range section:
●Previous time period:
This option lets you request data from a specied number of previous days, weeks, months, and
years. TO base this from today, select From today; for example, if today is April 4, then previous
month would be March 4 to April 4. If you request for the last month, that would be April 1 to April 30.
NOTE: This option is not available if you are scheduling this report for a later time.
●Previous quarter: This option lets you request data based on company quarters.
●Custom range: To specify a custom date range, specify the date range for the data to be included on
the report.
NOTE: Even though data can be collected for a period of time, not all of that data has to be included on
the report. You can determine a smaller time frame for the data that is actually included in the report.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
4. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
5. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
6. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Device Utilization by User Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Device Utilization by User report in the
Generate Report wizard.
ENWW Reports 241
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To include totals for any specic column, select Show totals.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Date range section:
●Previous time period:
This option lets you request data from a specied number of previous days, weeks, months, and
years. TO base this from today, select From today; for example, if today is April 4, then previous
month would be March 4 to April 4. If you request for the last month, that would be April 1 to April 30.
NOTE: This option is not available if you are scheduling this report for a later time.
●Previous quarter: This option lets you request data based on company quarters.
●Custom range: To specify a custom date range, specify the date range for the data to be included on
the report.
NOTE: Even though data can be collected for a period of time, not all of that data has to be included on
the report. You can determine a smaller time frame for the data that is actually included in the report.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
3. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
4. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
5. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
242 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Event Log History Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Event Log History report in the Generate
Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To include totals for any specic column, select Show totals.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Date range section:
●Previous time period:
This option lets you request data from a specied number of previous days, weeks, months, and
years. TO base this from today, select From today; for example, if today is April 4, then previous
month would be March 4 to April 4. If you request for the last month, that would be April 1 to April 30.
NOTE: This option is not available if you are scheduling this report for a later time.
●Previous quarter: This option lets you request data based on company quarters.
●Custom range: To specify a custom date range, specify the date range for the data to be included on
the report.
NOTE: Even though data can be collected for a period of time, not all of that data has to be included on
the report. You can determine a smaller time frame for the data that is actually included in the report.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
ENWW Reports 243
3. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
4. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
5. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Hourly Peak Usage Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Hourly Peak Usage report in the
Generate Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Formatting (Detailed) section, select the time range. You can select the entire day or a start and end
time.
3. In the Date range section:
●Previous time period:
This option lets you request data from a specied number of previous days, weeks, months, and
years. TO base this from today, select From today; for example, if today is April 4, then previous
month would be March 4 to April 4. If you request for the last month, that would be April 1 to April 30.
NOTE: This option is not available if you are scheduling this report for a later time.
●Previous quarter: This option lets you request data based on company quarters.
●Custom range: To specify a custom date range, specify the date range for the data to be included on
the report.
NOTE: Even though data can be collected for a period of time, not all of that data has to be included on
the report. You can determine a smaller time frame for the data that is actually included in the report.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
244 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
4. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
5. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
6. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Supply Ordering Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Supply Ordering report in the Generate
Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Formatting (Detailed) section, select the Threshold for the supplies to be included in the report. You
can also choose to include the Order Supplies button which provides easy access to the HP SureSupply
website.
NOTE: This option to order supplies is only displayed if you have enabled Shop for Supplies in Tools >
Options > Device Management > Supplies > Supplies Reordering, see Congure the Shop for Supplies Link
in Reports on page 83)
3. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
ENWW Reports 245
4. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
5. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Supply Replacement Forecast Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Supply Replacement Forecast report in
the Generate Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Formatting (Detailed) section, the Forecast period. You can also choose to include the Order Supplies
button which provides easy access to the HP SureSupply website.
NOTE: This option to order supplies is only displayed if you have enabled Shop for Supplies in Tools >
Options > Device Management > Supplies > Supplies Reordering, see Congure the Shop for Supplies Link
in Reports on page 83)
3. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
4. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
5. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Supply Usage Report Settings
Following are steps to complete the Specify report settings page for the Supply Usage report in the Generate
Report wizard.
1. In the Formatting (General) section:
246 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Select the subtype for this report.
●Select how to group the data. Each group will be a separate section of the report. You can also select
a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select Ascending.
An example of this is Device Model. If chosen, HP Web Jetadmin groups all of the same device models
next to each other in the report.
●Select how to sort the data. Data within each group (as specied above) will be sorted this way. You
can also select a primary and a secondary sort. To have the data sorted in ascending order, select
Ascending.
An example is IP Address: when chosen, HP Web Jetadmin orders the devices within the report by
their IP addresses. Of course, the ordering occurs within the Group by subsets.
●To exclude any device that has no data collected for it, select Exclude devices with no collected data.
2. In the Formatting (Detailed) section, specify the Usage period and the installation state:
●Active Only: installed in the printer.
●Removed Only: removed from the printer.
3. In the Device Information section, select the column category (Favorites, All, or Obsolete) from the Source
list.
Select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move them to Selected columns.
4. In the Report data section, select the columns to be displayed from Available columns and click > to move
them to Selected columns.
5. Click the Next button. For more information about the remaining pages in the Generate Report wizard,
return to the task in Generate Reports on page 235.
Schedule a Report
Reports can be generated as you request them (if data collection has been enabled) or they can be scheduled to
be generated at a future time. This might reduce network trac at particular heavy times, or it might give the
data collection process time to collect the data necessary to make the report meaningful.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the template
when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web Jetadmin
server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also display
any task module on the Overview page.
Use the following steps to schedule a report:
ENWW Reports 247
1. Select Reports from the left navigation pane. The Reports page is displayed.
In the Report Management - Common Tasks task module click Generate report. The Generate Report
wizard is started with the Choose report options page displayed.
2. If templates have been created, you can select an existing template from the Use template drop-down box.
If there are no existing templates or if you want to request a custom report, select the report type from the
drop down under Custom.
NOTE: Be sure and select a report that matches the type of data collection you specied in Data
Collection on page 225. If you nd you need a dierent report, you might have to go back to Data Collection
on page 225 and select a dierent type of data collection.
Click Next. If any of the devices you selected have not been added to the corresponding data collection, the
Enable data collection page is displayed. You can choose to add those devices to the data collection by
clicking Start Data Collection. This will launch the Add Devices to Data Collection wizard (see Add Devices to
Data Collection on page 227). You can add those devices at a later time.
3. Click Next. The Select devices page is displayed.
4. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
Click Next. The Specify report settings page is displayed. For detailed information about this page for a
specic report, select one of the following:
●Accessory Inventory Report Settings on page 238
●Device Inventory Report Settings on page 239
●Device Utilization Report Settings on page 240
●Device Utilization by User Report Settings on page 241
●Event Log History Report Settings on page 243
●Hourly Peak Usage Report Settings on page 244
●Supply Ordering Report Settings on page 245
●Supply Replacement Forecast Report Settings on page 246
●Supply Usage Report Settings on page 246
5. After you have completed the Specify report settings page, click Next; the Specify report name page is
displayed.
6. Enter the name for this report and specify how long you want to keep this report.
248 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the
template when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the
task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also
display any task module on the Overview page.
7. If you are scheduling this report for a later time, the Specify schedule options page is displayed. Select the
start date and time for your report and also how often it should run:
●Start time: Species when the conguration will launch.
●Recurrence, Once: launches only once in the specied schedule.
●Recurrence, Daily: task will recur daily once per day or once per weekday depending on the selected
setting.
●Recurrence, Weekly: task will recur once every X weeks on the day specied depending on the setting.
●Recurrence, Monthly: task will recur once every X months on XX day depending on setting; or, task
will recur on specied day pattern depending on setting.
8. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed, summarizing all of the report format options you have selected
for this report.
9. Click Create Schedule. The Report Generation Complete page is displayed showing the actual report
generation.
10. Click Done to display the Reports page.
Deleting Scheduled Reports
You can delete a report after it has been scheduled, if it has not been generated, through the Reports -
Scheduled Reports task module.
1. In Reports, display the Reports - Scheduled Reports task module.
2. Highlight the report to delete and click Delete. The Conrm Delete message is displayed.
3. Click Yes. The previous page is displayed again.
Editing the Schedule for a Report
You can edit the schedule for a report, if the report has not been generated yet, through the Reports - Scheduled
Reports task module.
NOTE: If a task is scheduled by using a template, the task uses the settings that are dened in the template
when the task starts. If the template is updated, the updated settings are used the next time the task runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The location
where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the HP Web Jetadmin
server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling tasks.
ENWW Reports 249
NOTE: Scheduled tasks are displayed in the Scheduled Tasks task module on the Device, Discovery,
Conguration, Firmware, Reports, Storage, Solutions, and Application Management pages. You can also display
any task module on the Overview page.
1. Select Reports from the left navigation pane. The Reports page is displayed.
Display the Reports - Scheduled Reports task module. The reports that have been scheduled are listed.
2. Highlight the report click Edit. The Edit Schedule (Report Generation Task) wizard is displayed.
3. Make changes to the schedule that had been created for the report. When done, click Next. The Conrm
page is displayed.
4. Review your selections and then click Next. The Progress page is displayed. When done, click Done.
Email Reports
HP Web Jetadmin can attach reports to an email as an HTML or comma-separated values (CSV) le and send the
email to a recipient. The SMTP gateway must be congured before HP Web Jetadmin can send reports to an
email recipient. For more information about conguring the SMTP gateway, see Congure the SMTP Gateway
Settings on page 47.
When new email addresses are added to the shared email addresses in HP Web Jetadmin, the preferred
language for each email address is specied. The decimal separator that HP Web Jetadmin uses in the reports is
either a comma (,) or a period (.) depending on the preferred language that is specied for each shared email
address.
To send a report to a shared email address in a dierent language, the preferred language for that shared email
address must be changed rst. For more information about specifying the preferred language for a shared email
address, see Manage the Shared Email Addresses on page 48.
Save Archived Reports
You can request that a report be saved as an HTML document anywhere on your network. When you select Save
As, you can type the lename and location or browse for the location. The report will automatically be saved in
HTML format.
You can request that a report be exported in comma-separated value (CSV) le format. CSV is a le type that
stores tabular data (like in an Excel sheet) and is common on all computer platforms. CSV is one implementation
of a delimited text le, which uses a comma to separate values. However, CSV diers from other delimiter
separated le formats in using a " (double quote) character around elds that contain reserved characters (such
as commas or newlines). Most other delimiter formats either use an escape character such as a backslash, or
have no support for reserved characters. In computer science terms, this type of format is called a at le
because only one table can be stored in a CSV le. Most systems use a series of tables to store their information,
which must be attened into a single table often with information repeated over several rows to create a
delimited text le.
Report Templates
In Report Templates, you can:
●Create a Report Template on page 251
●Apply a Report Template on page 253
250 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
●Edit a Report Template on page 253
●Delete a Report Template on page 254
●Copy a Report Template on page 255
●View: view a report template that has been previously created (see View Report Templates on page 251).
View Report Templates
1. Expand the Reports menu in the left navigation pane and then expand Report Generation. Then click
Templates.
2. Click on the template to view.
Create a Report Template
A report template contains a set of criteria including the report type, devices, and the report format. After a
report template is created, you can apply it to generate a report easily.
Any number of templates can be added to the twenty pre-existing templates that come with HP Web Jetadmin:
●By User - Application
●By User - Color/Mono
●By User - Print Server
●By User - Simplex/Duplex
●Device Utilization - Color/Mono
●Device Utilization - Job Type
●Device Utilization - Media Size
●Device Utilization - Simplex/Duplex
●Event Log - History
●Hourly Peak Usage - After Hours Printing
●Hourly Peak Usage - Business Hours
●Supplies - Current Status
●Supplies - Detailed Forecast
●Supplies - Inventory
●Supplies - Ordering Details
●Supplies - Purchasing Planning
●Supplies - Replacement Eciency
●Supplies - Replacement Plan
●Supplies - Shopping List
●Supplies - Supply Eciency
ENWW Reports 251
NOTE: These templates are default templates and cannot be edited or renamed. If you would like to alter the
functionality of the default template, you can copy the default template and edit the saved copy (see Copy
Template Wizard on page 99). You can delete the default templates. If you choose to restore them this is
performed by going to Tools > Options > Device Management > Report > General and clicking Restore. This
restores all report generation default templates.
Create Report Template is the wizard used to customize and store reports settings. Once the wizard is launched,
you can select any one of the available Report types and then select settings for this template, including Report
Format, Report Columns, Destination Settings, and more.
Use the following steps to create a report template:
1. Expand the Reports menu in the left navigation pane and then select Report Generation.
In the Reports - Common Tasks task module, select Create report template. The Create Report Template
wizard is started with the Select report type page displayed.
2. Highlight the report type and click Next. (Only one report type may be selected at a time.) The Specify
report settings page is displayed.
3. For detailed information about this page for a specic report, select one of the following:
●Accessory Inventory Report Settings on page 238
●Device Inventory Report Settings on page 239
●Device Utilization Report Settings on page 240
●Device Utilization by User Report Settings on page 241
●Event Log History Report Settings on page 243
●Hourly Peak Usage Report Settings on page 244
●Supply Ordering Report Settings on page 245
●Supply Replacement Forecast Report Settings on page 246
●Supply Usage Report Settings on page 246
4. After you have dened the report format, click Next. The Specify destination options page is displayed.
5. Select how you want the report displayed (either on the page or directly to email). If sending the report to
email addresses, you can either browse for those addresses or you can enter them manually. Separate
each address with a semi-colon.
6. Specify the report destination:
●Archive only: saves the report on the HP Web Jetadmin server.
●Email: send the report to an email address (Email Reports on page 250). Type the email address on
this page or browse for the correct email address.
7. Specify the le format:
●HTML: save the le as an HTML document (Save Archived Reports on page 250).
●CSV: export the report as a CSV document (Email Reports on page 250).
Click Next; the Specify name page is displayed.
8. Type the name for this report template and then click Next.
9. The Conrm page is displayed, summarizing all of the report format options you have selected for this
report. Click Create Template.
252 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
10. The Results page is displayed.
11. Click Done to display the Report Generation page.
Apply a Report Template
A report template contains a set of criteria including the report type, devices, and the report format. After a
report template is created, you can apply it to generate a report easily.
Use the following steps to apply a report template:
1. Expand the Reports menu in the left navigation pane and select Report Generation.
In the Reports - Common Tasks task module, click Apply report template. The Generate Report wizard is
started with the Choose report options page displayed.
2. In the Use template drop-down box, highlight the template you want to use and click Next. The Specify
date range for report page is displayed.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
To select an entire group instead of individual devices, change the selection method to Groups. Tasks can
be performed on a single group or a group and all of its subgroups.
NOTE: If subgroups are included, the task might take longer to complete and network trac might
increase signicantly. HP recommends that you include subgroups only when necessary.
If a task is scheduled for a group, the task uses the devices that are in the group when the task starts. If the
devices that are in the group are changed, you do not have to delete the scheduled task and create a new
scheduled task.
4. Click Next; the Specify report name page is displayed. Type the name for this report template and then click
Next.
5. The Conrm page is displayed, summarizing all of the report format options you have selected for this
report. Click Next.
6. The Report Generation Complete page is displayed showing the actual report generation.
7. Click Done to display the Reports page.
Edit a Report Template
Use the following steps to edit a report template:
1. Expand the Reports menu in the left navigation pane and then select Report Generation.
In the Reports - Common Tasks task module, select Edit report template. The Edit Report Template wizard
is started with the Select template page displayed.
2. Highlight the template to edit and click Next. (Only one template may be selected at a time.) The Specify
report settings page is displayed.
3. For detailed information about this page for a specic report, select one of the following:
ENWW Reports 253
●Accessory Inventory Report Settings on page 238
●Device Inventory Report Settings on page 239
●Device Utilization Report Settings on page 240
●Device Utilization by User Report Settings on page 241
●Event Log History Report Settings on page 243
●Hourly Peak Usage Report Settings on page 244
●Supply Ordering Report Settings on page 245
●Supply Replacement Forecast Report Settings on page 246
●Supply Usage Report Settings on page 246
4. After you have dened the report format, click Next. The Specify destination options page is displayed.
5. Select how you want the report displayed (either on the page or directly to email). If sending the report to
email addresses, you can either browse for those addresses or you can enter them manually. Separate
each address with a semi-colon.
6. Specify the report destination:
●Archive only: saves the report on the HP Web Jetadmin server.
●Email: send the report to an email address (Email Reports on page 250). Type the email address on
this page or browse for the correct email address.
7. Specify the le format:
●HTML: save the le as an HTML document (Save Archived Reports on page 250).
●CSV: export the report as a CSV document (Email Reports on page 250).
Click Next; the Specify name page is displayed.
8. Type the name for this report template and then click Next.
9. The Conrm page is displayed, summarizing all of the report format options you have selected for this
report. Click Next.
10. The Results page is displayed showing the actual report generation.
11. Click Done to display the Report Generation page.
Delete a Report Template
Use the following steps to delete a report template:
1. Expand the Reports menu in the left navigation pane and then select Report Generation.
In the Reports - Common Tasks task module, select Delete report template. The Delete Report Templates
wizard is started with the Select template page displayed.
2. Highlight the template to delete and click Next. (Only one template may be selected at a time.) The Conrm
page is displayed.
3. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done to display the Report Generation page.
254 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Copy a Report Template
Throughout Device Management view, templates can be created and managed to save you time and provide
consistency. Templates contain conguration preferences (that vary by template type) and can be applied to
devices or groups. Templates are available in Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data Collection, and Report
Generation. For more information, see Copy Template Wizard on page 99.
Archived Reports
Archived Reports stores all previously-generated reports and gives you a way to display them. You can view
archived reports, export them to CSV format, or delete them. An adjustable 90 day time-to-live (TTL) setting
erases these reports as they age. Once the report has reached this value, HP Web Jetadmin automatically clears
it from the archive.
View Archived Reports
You can view any report that has already been generated through View archived reports. All reports that have
been generated are stored in Archived Reports.
Use the following steps to view an archived report:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Reports.
Select Archived Reports. The Archived Reports page is displayed.
2. Highlight the report to view and click View.
3. Now you can:
●Email Reports on page 250.
●Save Archived Reports on page 250.
●Print: select Print and then select the printer to send the report to.
4. Click Close. The Archived Reports page is displayed.
Delete Archived Reports
Use the following steps to delete an archived report:
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Reports and then click Archived Reports. The Archived Reports page is
displayed.
2. Highlight the archived report you want to delete and click Delete. The Delete Archived Report wizard is
started with the Conrm page displayed.
3. If you need to make changes, click Back. If this is the correct report to delete, click Next. The Results page is
displayed.
4. The report you deleted is displayed. Click Done.
ENWW Reports 255
Storage
Storage provides the capability to download and manage font and macro les on devices.
Storage - Common Tasks Task Module
The Storage - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for storage:
●Import fonts and macros into the Storage Repository
●Delete fonts and macros from the Storage Repository
●Create a storage template
●Apply a storage template to devices
●Edit a storage template
●Delete a storage template
●Copy a storage template to create a new template
Storage - Active Tasks Task Module
The Storage - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the storage tasks that are running. Use this task
module to stop or display the status of an active task. If a storage task is stopped, any devices that have not
been congured yet are not congured.
Storage - Scheduled Tasks Task Module
The Storage - Scheduled Tasks task module provides a list of the storage tasks that are scheduled to run. Use
this task module to delete or edit the settings for a task schedule.
Storage Repository
The Storage Repository lets you store fonts and macros.
Import Fonts and Macros
To import font and macro les into the Storage Repository, perform the following steps:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Storage, and then select Import fonts and macros.
The Import Fonts and Macros wizard starts.
2. On the Select fonts and macros to import page, click Browse.
3. On the Open dialog, browse to and select the font and macro les, and then click Open.
4. To remove any font and macro les that currently reside in the repository from the import list, select the
Exclude fonts and macros already in the repository checkbox. Selecting this checkbox prevents
HP Web Jetadmin from overwriting any les that are already in the Storage Repository.
256 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
5. Click Next.
6. On the Conrm page, verify that the list of fonts and macros is correct, and then click Import.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Delete Fonts and Macros
You can delete fonts and macros from the Storage Repository. If they have been added to devices, this does not
delete them from those devices.
1. In the left navigation pane, right-click on Storage and then click Delete fonts and macros. The Delete Fonts
and Macros wizard is started with the Select fonts and macros page displayed.
2. Highlight the fonts and macros you want to delete from the repository and then click Next. The
Conrmation page is displayed.
3. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done.
Edit Properties for Storage
You can congure the ID associated with each font or macro le. By default, the font and macro installation
process will start assigning IDs starting with '1'. If you need specic fonts and macros to have specic ID values,
then you can dene those values with Edit Properties so that they will always get installed with those ID values.
A font and a macro may have the same ID but all fonts must have unique IDs and all macros must have unique
IDs.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Storage and then click Repository. The Storage Repository is displayed.
2. Select the font or macro whose ID you want to change. Then click Edit Properties. The Edit Resource
Properties dialog is displayed.
3. Type the new ID number and click OK.
Save to File
You can save fonts and macro les to a le outside of HP Web Jetadmin. This would be useful if you want to
install them on a PC-connected printer at a later time.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Storage and then click Repository. On the Repository page, click Save to
File. The Save to File wizard is started with the Source page displayed.
2. Choose which font and macro les you want to save by selecting Use template or Select from list; then click
Next.
3. If you chose:
●Use template:
–The Select template page is displayed.
–Select the template to use and click Next.
●Select from list:
ENWW Storage 257
–The Select fonts and macros page is displayed.
–Select the font and macro les to save and click Next.
4. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Click Save. The Save as page is displayed. Select the location and name for this le and click Save. The
Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done.
Install Fonts and Macros on Devices
After a font or macro le has been imported into the Storage Repository, it can be installed on a device.
1. Access any device list.
2. Highlight the device or devices and click the Storage tab at the bottom portion of page. On the View menu,
select Fonts and Macros.
3. Highlight the device or devices in the Storage tab and click Install. The Install Fonts and Macros wizard is
started with the Select fonts and macros page displayed.
4. Select the font and macro les you want to install on the device and click Next. The Specify destination
page is displayed.
5. Select the destination for the chosen font and macro les and then click Next. The Options page is
displayed.
6. Make your selections and then click Next.
7. The Conrm page is displayed.
8. Click Install. The Results page is displayed.
9. Click Done.
Remove Font and Macro Files from Devices
After a font or macro le has been installed on a device, it can be removed from that device. It is not deleted
from the Storage Repository.
1. Access any device list.
2. Highlight the device or devices and click the Storage tab at the bottom portion of page. On the View menu,
select Fonts and Macros.
3. Highlight the device or devices in the Storage tab and click Remove. The Remove Fonts and Macros wizard
is started with the Select device resources page displayed.
4. Select the font and macro les you want to remove from the device and click Next. The Conrm page is
displayed.
5. Click Remove. The Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done.
258 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Print Font/Macro
This option prints a test page of the selected font or macro.
1. Access any device list.
2. Highlight the device or devices and click the Storage tab at the bottom portion of page. On the View menu,
select Fonts and Macros.
3. Highlight the device or devices in the Storage tab and click Print Font/Macro. The Print Fonts and Macros
wizard is started with the Select fonts and macros page displayed.
4. Select the font and macro les you want to print and click OK.
Storage Templates
Storage templates allow a number of selected font and macro les to be installed on a group of devices or a
single device, allowing any number of these les to be installed with a single command. You can:
●Create Storage Templates on page 259
●Apply a Storage Template on page 260
●Edit Storage Templates on page 260
●Delete a Storage Template on page 261.
●Copy a Storage Template on page 261
●View Storage Templates on page 261.
Create Storage Templates
Use the following steps to create a storage template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, right-click Storage, and then select Create storage template.
The Create Storage Template wizard starts.
2. To download fonts and macros to the devices, select the Download fonts and macros to the device(s)
option.
-or-
To delete fonts and macros from the devices, select the Delete fonts and macros from the device(s) option.
3. On the Select fonts and macros page, select the fonts and macros from the list, and then click the Next
button.
4. On the Specify destination page, select the option that species where the fonts and macros are stored on
the device from the Destination list, and then click the Next button.
TIP: A device might recognize some USB devices as ash media. To determine if you should select USB
Storage or Flash from the Destination list, select the device in any device list, and then click the Storage tab.
Hold the cursor over the number displayed in the Storage Media column. In the table that opens, the Media
Type column identies the option that must be selected from the Destination list. You can use these steps
to verify the destination for other media types, such as RAM disks and ash disks.
5. On the Options page, use the following steps to specify the overwrite options:
ENWW Storage 259
a. To replace the existing fonts and macros on the device with the fonts and macros in this storage
template, select the Overwrite existing fonts and macros checkbox.
b. To replace the IDs of the existing fonts and macros on the device with the IDs of the fonts and macros
in this storage template, select the Overwrite existing fonts and macro IDs checkbox.
c. Click the Next button.
6. On the Specify name page, enter a name for the storage template in the Name box, and then click the Next
button.
7. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Create button.
8. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Apply a Storage Template
You can install storage within a template to a single device, multiple devices, or a group.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Storage and then click Templates. On the Storage Templates overview
page, click Apply. The Apply Storage Template wizard is started with the Select devices page displayed.
2. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers. Then click Next.
3. The Conrm page is displayed.
4. Review the selections and click Apply Template. The Results page is displayed.
5. Click Done.
Edit Storage Templates
Use the following steps to edit a storage template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand the Storage option, and then select the Templates
option.
2. In the Templates pane, select the storage template from the list, and then click the Edit button. The Edit
Storage Template wizard starts.
3. To download fonts and macros to the devices, select the Download fonts and macros to the device(s)
option.
-or-
To delete fonts and macros from the devices, select the Delete fonts and macros from the device(s) option.
4. Click the Next button.
5. On the Select fonts and macros page, select the fonts and macros from the list, and then click the Next
button.
6. On the Specify destination page, select the option that species where the fonts and macros are stored on
the device from the Destination list, and then click the Next button.
260 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
TIP: A device might recognize some USB devices as ash media. To determine if you should select USB
Storage or Flash from the Destination list, select the device in any device list, and then click the Storage tab.
Hold the cursor over the number displayed in the Storage Media column. In the table that opens, the Media
Type column identies the option that must be selected from the Destination list. You can use these steps
to verify the destination for other media types, such as RAM disks and ash disks.
7. On the Options page, use the following steps to specify the overwrite options:
a. To replace the existing fonts and macros on the device with the fonts and macros in this storage
template, select the Overwrite existing fonts and macros checkbox.
b. To replace the IDs of the existing fonts and macros on the device with the IDs of the fonts and macros
in this storage template, select the Overwrite existing fonts and macro IDs checkbox.
c. Click the Next button.
8. On the Specify name page, enter a name for the storage template in the Name box, and then click the Next
button.
9. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Save button.
10. On the Edit template results page, click the Done button.
Delete a Storage Template
Delete any storage templates that are not being used.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Storage and then click Templates. The Storage Templates overview page is
displayed.
2. Select the template to delete and click Delete. The Delete Template wizard is started with the Conrm
page displayed.
3. Review the selection and click Delete Template. The Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done.
Copy a Storage Template
You can copy storage templates to create a new template. The copied template is added to the list of existing
templates and the original template is unchanged.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Storage and then click Templates. The Storage Templates overview page is
displayed.
2. Select the template to copy and click Copy. The Copy Template wizard is started with the Specify template
name page displayed.
3. Type the name for the new template. The original template's name will not be changed.
4. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Review the selection and click Copy Template. The Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done. The new template will now be listed under Templates left navigation pane.
ENWW Storage 261
View Storage Templates
Use the following steps to view a storage template:
1. In the Device Management navigation pane, expand Storage, and then select Templates.
2. On the Templates pane, select the storage template from the list, and then click the View button.
Solutions
Solutions extends HP Web Jetadmin support to include new licensable and congurable solutions supplied
through third parties.
HP Web Jetadmin provides functionality to manage programs that can be installed on devices. Central to the
process of solution management is a Solution Repository, which is a collection of programs that can be installed
on managed devices. Three dierent types of programs can be contained within the repository:
●Chailets
●Microsoft .NET Framework solutions
●Solutions
For simplicity, these program types will simply be referred to as Solutions.
Solutions are imported into the Solution Repository. Then they can be installed on a device or a group of devices.
Solutions within the repository may have their properties edited or, if they are no longer needed, solutions can
be removed from the repository.
On device lists, a Solutions Tab is provided to allow you to manage solutions that are installed on a device. You
can quickly see which solutions are installed on a device and then take action to either install new solutions or
remove solutions that are no longer needed.
Solutions within the repository may be combined together to create Solution Templates. These templates may
be applied to a device or a group of devices to install one or more solutions. Functionality is provided to manage
templates that have been created. Templates may be edited, copied, or removed. Applying a template means
that the solutions identied within the template are installed on the device or group of devices.
Templates may also be applied as part of a Group Policy. A Group Policy is an action that is performed when a
device is added to a group or removed from a group. Group policies can also be used to create workows that
dene multiple actions needed to be performed on a group of devices that meet specic criteria.
Solutions - Common Tasks Task Module
The Solutions - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for solutions:
●Import a solution
●Install a solution on devices
●Uninstall a solution from devices
●Edit the settings for a solution
●Create a solution template
●Apply a solution template to devices
262 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
Solutions - Active Tasks Task Module
The Solutions - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the solutions tasks that are running. Use this task
module to stop or display the status of an active task. If a solutions task is stopped, any devices that have not
been congured yet are not congured.
Solutions - Scheduled Tasks Task Module
The Solutions - Scheduled Tasks task module provides a list of the solutions tasks that are scheduled to run. Use
this task module to delete or edit the settings for a solutions schedule.
Solutions Repository
The available solutions are listed on the Solutions Repository page. From this page you can:
●Import solution: import solutions into the Solutions Repository (Importing Solutions on page 263).
●Edit solution: edit solutions that have already been imported (Editing Solution Settings on page 263).
●Remove solution: remove solutions that have already been imported (Removing Solutions on page 264).
●Install solution: install solutions on devices or groups of devices (Installing Solutions on page 264).
The Solutions Repository can contain dierent types of solutions:
●Pre-installed solutions: cannot be removed.
●Added solutions: all added solutions can be edited to facilitate solution management. They include:
–Chailets (Java-based applications)
–Microsoft .NET Framework applications
–Solutions
Importing Solutions
You can import solutions and then install them later on devices or groups of devices.
1. In the left navigation pane, click on Solutions and then click Repository. The Repository page is displayed.
2. Click Import. The Import Solutions wizard is started with the Select les page displayed.
3. Select a solution to import or click Browse to nd the desired solution.
4. To import the solution, click Import.
Editing Solution Settings
You can make changes to solutions that have already been imported.
1. In the left navigation pane, click on Solutions and then click Repository. The Repository page is displayed.
2. Select a solution and click Edit. The Edit Solution Settings wizard is started.
3. If you are editing a:
ENWW Solutions 263
●Chailet or Microsoft .NET Framework application:
–Description: custom description of the application.
●Solution: you can edit the:
–Description: custom description of the solution.
–Application URL: the URL path to the location of the solution on the application depot that the
device will use when obtaining the solution from that depot.
User name and Password (Depot Credential): a user name and password credential used to gain
access to the depot where the Application URL is located. The user name and password
credential can be left blank, or both values must be provided.
–Conguration URL: species where a conguration le can be retrieved to properly congure the
solution.
User name and Password (Depot Credential): a user name and password credential used to gain
access to the depot where the Conguration URL is located. The user name and password
credential can be left blank, or both values must be provided.
–License URL: species where a license le can be retrieved. The license associated with the le
will identify which features you have that are licensed to use within the solution.
User name and Password (Depot Credential): a user name and password credential used to gain
access to the depot where the License URL is located. The user name and password credential
can be left blank, or both values must be provided.
4. After you make your edits, click OK.
Removing Solutions
You can remove solutions that have already been imported. All solutions can be removed except for pre-
installed solutions.
1. In the left navigation pane, click on Solutions and then click Repository. The Repository page is displayed.
2. Select the solution to remove and click Remove. The Remove Repository Solution wizard is started with the
Conrm page displayed.
3. To remove the solution, click Remove. The Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done.
Installing Solutions
You can identify a solution and then install it on one or more devices or groups of devices. You can also specify
properties for the solution.
1. In the left navigation pane, click on Solutions and then click Repository. The Repository page is displayed.
2. Click Install. The Install Solutions wizard is started with the Select options page displayed.
3. Select an existing template or manually specify options.
4. To install the solution immediately, click Next.
To schedule the installation for another time, click Schedule and then click Next.
264 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. The
location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where the
HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when scheduling
tasks.
The Select devices page is displayed.
5. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers. Then click Next. The Edit settings page is displayed with the
list of solutions that may be installed.
6. Select at least one solution and click Next. The Edit settings page is displayed with the list of solutions that
have been selected to be installed. This page also indicates whether or not conguration settings have
been supplied for the solution.
7. Depending on the type of solution, you can edit its properties. If you're editing a:
●Solution: you can edit the:
–Description: custom description of the solution.
–Application URL: species where the solution is located. This is used to retrieve the application.
–Conguration URL: species where a conguration le can be retrieved to properly congure the
solution.
–License URL: species where a license le can be retrieved. The license associated with the le
will identify which features you have that are licensed to use within the solution.
●Chailet or Microsoft .NET Framework application:
–Description: custom description of the solution.
Click OK.
8. If you are installing the solution now, the Conrm page is displayed.
If you chose to schedule the installation of the solution, the Specify schedule options page is displayed.
Assign a name and then dene the date and time for the installation.
9. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
10. Click Install. The Progress or Results page is displayed.
11. Click Done.
Uninstalling Solutions
You can uninstall solutions from one or more devices.
1. In the left navigation pane, click on Solutions. From the Common Tasks task module, click Uninstall
solution. The Uninstall Solutions wizard is started with the Select devices page displayed.
2. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers.
3. Click Next. The Select solutions page is displayed with the list of solutions that may be uninstalled.
ENWW Solutions 265
4. Select at least one solution to uninstall from the selected devices and click Next. The Conrm page is
displayed with the list of solutions that have been selected to be uninstalled from which devices.
5. Click Uninstall. The Progress or Results page is displayed.
Solutions Templates
Solution templates allow a number of selected solutions to be installed on a group of devices or a single device,
allowing any number of solutions to be installed with a single command. You can:
●Create solutions template: Create a solutions template (Creating a Solutions Template on page 266).
●Edit solution template: Make changes to an existing solutions template (Editing a Solutions Template
on page 267).
●Remove solutions template: Delete a solutions template (Deleting a Solutions Template on page 267).
●Copy solutions template: Copy a solutions conguration template and rename the new template and make
changes to it (Copying a Solutions Template on page 267).
●Apply solutions template: Install solutions within a template to a single device, multiple devices, or a group
(Applying a Solutions Template on page 268).
Specic Solution Templates Overviews
Each solution template has a specic page that shows the template name, the solutions, and the settings for
each solution. From these pages, you can:
●Apply solutions template: Install solutions within a template to a single device, multiple devices, or a group
(Applying a Solutions Template on page 268).
●Edit solution template: Make changes to an existing solutions template (Editing a Solutions Template
on page 267).
●Delete solutions template: Delete a solutions template (Deleting a Solutions Template on page 267).
●Copy solutions template: Copy a solutions conguration template and rename the new template and make
changes to it (Copying a Solutions Template on page 267).
Creating a Solutions Template
You can create a new solutions template.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Solutions and then click Templates. On the Solutions Template Overview
page, click Create. The Create Solution Template wizard is started with the Select solutions page displayed.
2. Select the solutions to include with the template. To install solution managers, click Install managers if
needed.
3. Click Next. The Edit settings page is displayed.
4. The solutions that have been selected to be installed are displayed. To change conguration settings, click
Edit and make changes as necessary.
5. Click Next. The Specify template name page is displayed.
6. Type the name and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
266 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
7. Review the template and click Create template. The Results page is displayed.
8. Click Done.
Deleting a Solutions Template
Delete any solutions templates that are not being used.
1. In the left navigation pane, expand Solutions, and then click Templates.
2. On the Templates page, select the template to delete, and then click Delete. The Delete Solution
Templates wizard starts.
3. On the Conrm page, review the selection, and then click Delete Templates. The Results page displays.
4. Click Done.
Editing a Solutions Template
You can make changes to a solutions template.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Solutions and then click Templates. On the Solutions Template Overview
page, click Edit. The Edit Solution Template wizard is started with the Select solutions page displayed.
2. Select the solution to edit and click Next. The Edit settings page is displayed.
3. To modify the template, click Edit and make the necessary changes.
4. Click Next. The Specify template name page is displayed.
5. You can change the name of the template if desired and the click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
NOTE: If you change the name of the template, the original template will now have this new name. If you
want to copy an existing template and maintain the original template and its name, you must use the Copy
option on the Solutions Template Overview page (Copying a Solutions Template on page 267.
6. Review the selection and click Edit Template. The Results page is displayed.
7. Click Done.
Copying a Solutions Template
You can copy solutions templates to create a new template. The copied template is added to the list of existing
templates and the original template is unchanged.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Solutions and then click Templates. On the Solutions Template Overview
page, click Copy. The Copy Solution Template wizard is started with the Template Specication page
displayed.
2. Select the template to copy and specify the name for the new template. The original template's name will
not be changed.
3. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
4. Review the selection and click Copy Template. The Results page is displayed.
5. Click Done. The new template will now be listed under Templates left navigation pane.
ENWW Solutions 267
Applying a Solutions Template
You can install solutions within a template to a single device, multiple devices, or a group.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Solutions and then click Templates. On the Solutions Template Overview
page, click Apply. The Apply Solution Template wizard is started with the Select devices page displayed.
2. Select the solution options to apply. If you want to apply the solutions later, click Schedule. Then click Next.
The Select devices page is displayed.
3. Select the device by highlighting it and clicking the arrow buttons between the two lists. To select multiple
devices, use either Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click. To move all devices from one list to the other, use the double
arrow buttons. You can sort the list of available devices by clicking the column headers, or view more
columns by right-clicking the column headers. Then click Next.
If you are applying the template now, the Results page is displayed.
If you chose to schedule this for later, the Specify schedule options page is displayed with the list of
solutions that may be installed. Specify when you want the solutions to be applied.
4. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Review the selections and click Apply Template. The Results page is displayed.
6. Click Done.
268 Chapter 3 Device Management ENWW
4 Print Management
The Print Management view gives you control over remote print queues and drivers. These features can be used
to create, edit, and delete existing queues as well as to install or update printer drivers. HP Web Jetadmin can act
as a driver repository for deploying new HP drivers onto remote systems. And, HP Web Jetadmin Print
Management features use HP’s Universal Print Drivers (UPDs).
For example, you can use HP Web Jetadmin Print Management to locate a workstation or server on the network.
Once this host is found, you can add administrative credentials and begin to manage the print queue and drivers
on the remote host. Existing queues on the host can have a number of settings and/or the driver changed.
Queues can be added or removed. You must have local administrator rights on these remote systems when
performing this management activity.
File and printer sharing must be enabled at the remote host where the print queue is to be created.
Fleet Management of Print Queues
Within the Print Management view, HP Web Jetadmin has the capability of installing queues and drivers onto
multiple remote hosts. This eet queue creation can be done remotely from the HP Web Jetadmin client
interface and in a conguration session.
Users of the Print Management feature could be IT personnel in school districts. These personnel may have
responsibility over desktop print functionality and print devices in remote and wide geographic distribution. On
top of the remote distribution problem, large numbers of workstations and dierent restrictions apply. Consider
this problem:
●Each school in the district has obtained a color MFP.
●A dozen to several hundred student workstations could exist in each school.
●Sta are allowed to print color but students are not.
●IT has full administrative access to all of the workstations.
HP Web Jetadmin could be used in attaining substantial savings in an environment like this one. Pre-
conguration could be used on drivers deployed to student workstations. All drivers and queues could be
deployed through the Create Print Queue tool (Create Print Queue on page 271) and in very few conguration
sessions. Travel to each of the schools could then be reduced to a bare minimum.
Driver Management
HP Web Jetadmin facilitates driver management. Drivers can be added to the HP Web Jetadmin host which acts
like a driver repository. These drivers are installed on remote hosts where queue management is being
performed. Some of these features can be locked.
Driver management in HP Web Jetadmin includes the following:
●Pre-congure driver (Pre-congure Driver on page 274).
●Upload driver to available drivers (Upload Drivers to HP Web Jetadmin on page 274).
ENWW Fleet Management of Print Queues 269
●Delete driver from available drivers (Delete a Driver on page 275).
●Retrieve driver from available drivers (Retrieve a Driver on page 275).
Supported drivers include:
●HP device specic drivers
●.INF install
HP’s Universal Print Driver
The HP Universal Print Driver Postscript (UPD-PS) is bundled with HP Web Jetadmin software and can be
installed from any create or edit queue interface (Create Print Queue on page 271 or Edit Print Queue
on page 273). Universal Print Drivers PCL5 and PCL6 can be added to HP Web Jetadmin through a .INF
installation
The HP Universal Print Driver has pre-congure capability which enables you to specify print defaults such as
duplex or grayscale. Some of these defaults can be locked so that users must always use certain features such
as duplex.
When HP Web Jetadmin creates a queue using the HP Universal Print Driver, the driver and printer (specied in
HP Web Jetadmin) are installed in traditional mode, which means that the printer and driver have none of the
special HP Universal Print Driver features that are available when this driver is installed from install.exe when
downloaded from www.hp.com.
Print Management and Credentials
HP Web Jetadmin requests and utilizes Windows user credentials during print management operations. These
credentials are needed for viewing, adding or removing print queues, or for modifying print queue driver or
queue settings on remote systems. The credentials used during print management must provide local
administrator access on the Windows system being managed by HP Web Jetadmin. These credentials are stored
securely by HP Web Jetadmin and are re-used when the same Windows user requests further print
management operations. These credentials are not reused for other Windows users requesting print
management operations; credentials for dierent Windows users are stored separately and securely for each
user requesting print management operations. These credentials can be cleared from the HP Web Jetadmin
credential-store by using the Clear all stored credentials feature within Tools > Options > Shared > Credentials >
General.
CAUTION: Clear all Credentials removes all stored credentials including all device credentials. Use caution when
performing this operation.
Print Management - Common Tasks Task Module
The Print Management - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for print
queues and print drivers:
●Create a print queue
●Edit a print queue
●Delete a print queue
270 Chapter 4 Print Management ENWW
●Precongure the settings for a print driver
●Upload a print driver to HP Web Jetadmin
●Delete a print driver from HP Web Jetadmin
●Copy a print driver to any destination
Print Management - Print Queues Task Module
The Print Management - Print Queues task module provides a list of the print queues that have been created.
Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Find a remote host on the network and specify the user credentials that provide administrative access to
that host
●Create a print queue
●Delete a print queue
●Edit the settings for a print queue
●Send a test page to a print queue
Print Management - Available Drivers Task Module
The Print Management - Available Drivers task module provides a list of the print drivers that have been
uploaded to HP Web Jetadmin. Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Upload a print driver to HP Web Jetadmin
●Delete a print driver from HP Web Jetadmin
●Precongure the settings for a print driver
●Copy a print driver to any destination
Print Management - Active Tasks Task Module
The Print Management - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the print management tasks that are
running. Use this task module to stop or display the status of an active task.
Print Management Options
There are no conguration options for Print Management at this time.
ENWW Print Management - Print Queues Task Module 271
Create Print Queue
Local administrator credentials are required on hosts managed by HP Web Jetadmin Print Management features.
You can have these rights in a number of ways.
●You are a domain administrator.
●Your user domain account exists in the local Administrator group on the remote host.
●You belong to a domain group that exists in the local Administrator group on the remote host.
File and printer sharing must be enabled at the remote host where the print queue is to be created.
It is possible to create queues on many remote hosts in one working session (Fleet Management of Print Queues
on page 269).
Use the following steps to create a print queue:
NOTE: When creating print queues on Windows Server 2003, you may be prompted for credentials repeatedly
if there are no shared printers already on that host. In this case, you may have to add a shared printer locally.
See Microsoft documentation about enabling the RPC endpoint for the print spooler.
NOTE: Print Management features allow the use of HP drivers regardless of the specic printer model selected.
In many cases, a printer may only be supported with host-based print drivers or other types of print drivers. In
the case where a driver is used in creating a print queue for a device that does not support that driver type,
printing may or may not succeed when using that print queue. Always be sure that a supported driver is being
used and matches the device for which the print queue is being created.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Print Queues task module, click New. The Create Queue wizard is started with
the Select device page displayed.
2. Select a device from the list (only one device can be selected). Click Next. The Select server page is
displayed.
3. Select a computer name and a domain. Select Add (more than one computer name can be selected). Click
Next. The Select driver page is displayed.
4. The Credentials wizard is started if there is only one server selected, if the Show drivers on server in
Available Drivers is checked, and if you have not entered credentials for that server already. Select the print
server and then type your credentials and password. Click Set and then click Finish. The Select driver page
is displayed.
5. Select the driver:
NOTE: The drivers on the print server are displayed in the Available Drivers list if Show drivers on server in
Available Drivers is selected on the Select server page. Plus, if this feature is selected, all drivers are listed,
some of which are not supported.
NOTE: If creating a print queue on multiple servers, only the drivers on the HP Web Jetadmin server and
the UPD drivers are available.
●Universal Print Driver PS: The Universal Print Driver PostScript is available (HP’s Universal Print Driver
on page 270); other Universal Print Drivers can be obtained and installed through an .INF installation.
●Known Drivers: Drivers that are already installed on the remote host or drivers that exist on the
HP Web Jetadmin server (INF driver install base). These drivers, when identied for use with the print
queue, are added to the queue as it is being installed (Create Print Queue on page 271).
To display all drivers (not just the ones that are specic to the selected device), click Show all drivers.
272 Chapter 4 Print Management ENWW
Click Next. The Specify print queue options page is displayed.
6. Type the printer name using Windows naming conventions for print queues. This name must be a unique
name on the server.
7. Type the port name. This defaults to the printer’s IP Address preceded by IP; it is recommended to leave
this as the default but you can change it if desired.
8. If you want to share this printer click Share this printer.
9. The share name defaults to the printer name but you can change it if desired.
10. You can add a location and any comments. Then click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
11. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
If the printer was shared, you can print a test page.
12. Click Done. The Print Management page is displayed.
Edit Print Queue
Any existing print queue can be edited to change the driver associated with it, whether or not it is shared.
Use the following steps to edit a print queue:
NOTE: Print Management features allow the use of HP drivers regardless of the specic printer model selected.
In many cases, a printer may only be supported with host-based print drivers or other types of print drivers. In
the case where a driver is used in creating a print queue for a device that does not support that driver type,
printing may or may not succeed when using that print queue. Always be sure that a supported driver is being
used and matches the device for which the print queue is being created.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Print Queues task module, select the print queue and click Edit. The Edit Print
Queue wizard is started with the Select driver page displayed.
2. Select the driver:
●Universal Print Driver PS: The Universal Print Driver PostScript is available (HP’s Universal Print Driver
on page 270); other Universal Print Drivers can be obtained and installed through an .INF installation.
●Known Drivers: Drivers that are already installed on the remote host or drivers that exist on the
HP Web Jetadmin server (INF driver install base). These drivers, when identied for use with the print
queue, are added to the queue as it is being installed (Create Print Queue on page 271).
To display all drivers (not just the ones that are specic to the selected device), click Show all drivers.
Click Next. The Specify print queue options page is displayed.
3. If you want to share this printer click Share this printer.
4. Click Next. The Results page is displayed.
5. Click Done. The Print Management page is displayed.
ENWW Edit Print Queue 273
Delete Print Queue
Use the following steps to delete a print queue:
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Print Queues task module, click Delete. The Delete Print Queue wizard is started.
2. Select the print queue to delete.
3. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
4. Click Next. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display the Print Management page.
Pre-congure Driver
After drivers are listed in Available Drivers, they can be pre-congured to contain settings such as duplex-on or
grayscale. Many HP drivers can be pre-congured. Typically, PCL5 and PCL6 HP drivers for newer HP devices can
be pre-congured in a variety of ways. Some settings can be locked.
Setting Lockable or Not Lockable
Duplex/Simplex Lockable
Orientation: Portrait/Landscape Not Lockable
Print in grayscale Lockable
Print quality Not Lockable
After a pre-conguration has been added for a driver to HP Web Jetadmin, whenever that driver is selected you
will be asked to select the default or the pre-congured driver.
Use the following steps to precongure a driver:
NOTE: Users who are not members of the local administrators group on the HP Web Jetadmin server host are
not able to create driver pre-conguration settings. The Printing Preferences tab and the Device Settings tab are
not displayed for those users not in the local administrators group.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Common Tasks task module, click Pre-congure driver. The Driver Pre-
conguration wizard is started with the Select driver page displayed.
2. Select the driver and click Next. The Specify Conguration Options page is displayed.
3. Congure the driver settings and name the pre-conguration for the driver; notice that some might be
locked in which cases you cannot adjust them. Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
4. Click Save Conguration. The Results page is displayed.
5. Click Done. The Print Management page is displayed.
The new pre-conguration and the default conguration now exist and can either be exported to an INF
driver install le set or used in managing print queues.
274 Chapter 4 Print Management ENWW
Upload Drivers to HP Web Jetadmin
INF install le sets for drivers can be uploaded into the HP Web Jetadmin host. These drivers can then be
installed onto remote hosts (Edit Print Queue on page 273 or Create Print Queue on page 271).
All of the les in the directory with the INF le and all les in subdirectories of that directory are copied to the
HP Web Jetadmin server as part of the upload process. Extra les not related to that driver should not be in that
directory or its subdirectories.
Use the following steps to upload a driver:
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Available Drivers task module, click Upload. The Upload Driver wizard is started
with the Select INF File page displayed.
2. Select an INF le and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
3. Click Start. The selected driver is copied to the destination specied in the preceding step.
4. Click Done. The Print Management page is displayed.
Delete a Driver
Drivers can be removed from HP Web Jetadmin if there is a more current version available or if they are no
longer needed.
Use the following steps to delete a driver:
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Available Drivers task module, click Delete. The Delete Driver wizard is started
with the Conrm page displayed.
2. Click Next. The Results page is displayed. Click Done to display the Print Management page.
Retrieve a Driver
Use the following steps to copy a driver to any destination:
1. In the left navigation pane, click Print Management at the bottom of the screen.
In the Print Management - Available Drivers task module, click Retrieve. The Get Driver wizard is started
with the Select driver page displayed.
2. Select the driver:
●Universal Print Driver PS: The Universal Print Driver PostScript is available (HP’s Universal Print Driver
on page 270); other Universal Print Drivers can be obtained and installed through an .INF installation.
●Known Drivers: Drivers that are already installed on the remote host or drivers that exist on the
HP Web Jetadmin server (INF driver install base). These drivers, when identied for use with the print
queue, are added to the queue as it is being installed (Create Print Queue on page 271).
To display all drivers (not just the ones that are specic to the selected device), click Show all drivers.
Click Next.
ENWW Upload Drivers to HP Web Jetadmin 275
3. Select the driver and the pre-conguration for the driver and click Next. The Specify destination settings
page is displayed.
4. Select a folder for the driver and click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
5. Click Start. The selected driver is copied to the destination specied in the preceding step.
6. Click Done. The Print Management page is displayed.
276 Chapter 4 Print Management ENWW
5 Application Management
You can use the features in the Application Management view to congure and manage devices on the network.
The task modules on the Overview page provide access to these features.
The following are some important things to note about HP Web Jetadmin:
●Low-privilege service account: HP Web Jetadmin runs under the Network Service account, which is a low-
privilege account on the local system. Many environments require that applications such as
HP Web Jetadmin do not have administrative access to the operating system.
●Database access and authentication: HP Web Jetadmin uses Windows credentials to access the database
instance that was created in Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition when the software was installed.
●File permissions and NTFS: HP Web Jetadmin uses Windows credentials to access the database instance
that was created in SQL Server Express Edition when the software was installed.
Network Ports
HP Web Jetadmin opens a number of ports for various reasons. See the Installation and Setup Guide for detailed
information about Ports on page 11.
Application Management Options
Conguration options can be set for many functional area within the Application Management view. For more
information, see Application Management Conguration Options on page 58.
Application Management - Common Tasks Task Module
The Application Management - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for
managing HP Web Jetadmin:
●Create a role
●Assign a role to users
●Find remote installations of HP Web Jetadmin
Application Management - Active Tasks Task Module
The Application Management - Active Tasks task module provides a list of the application management tasks
that are running. Use this task module to stop or view the status of an active task.
ENWW Network Ports 277
Application Management - Scheduled Tasks Task Module
The Application Management - Scheduled Tasks task module provides a list of the application management
tasks that are scheduled to run. Use this task module to delete or edit the settings for an active task.
HP Web Jetadmin - All Active Tasks Task Module
The HP Web Jetadmin - All Active Tasks task module provides a list of the HP Web Jetadmin tasks that are
running. Use this task module to stop or display the status of an active task.
HP Web Jetadmin - All Scheduled Tasks Task Module
The HP Web Jetadmin - All Scheduled Tasks task module provides a list of the HP Web Jetadmin tasks that are
scheduled to run. Use this task module to delete or edit an HP Web Jetadmin task.
Client Management - Active Clients Task Module
The Client Management - Active Clients task module provides a list of the clients that are connected to the
HP Web Jetadmin server.
User Security
A role is a set of permissions for HP Web Jetadmin features. HP Web Jetadmin administrators can assign local or
domain users to user roles. After a user is assigned to a role, that user can access the features specied for that
role.
The following are the security features in HP Web Jetadmin:
●Advanced security technologies on the Microsoft .NET Framework platform provide authentication and
encryption of client/server communications.
●Windows Active Directory integrated role-based user authentication secures the application against
unauthorized usage.
●Optional SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) communication between client browser and application server ensure
data security for application le download.
●Optional Simple Network Management Protocol v3 (SNMPv3) used on devices provides authentication and
encryption.
●IPsec plug-in; using HP Web Jetadmin, you can congure an IPsec policy and then apply it to one or more
selected HP Jetdirect devices.
●Running under a low-privilege service account reducing risk of privilege escalation attacks.
●Secure online update features allow a safe easy way to get online patches updates and new features.
You can manage access to HP Web Jetadmin in User Security. You can control who has access and what they
have access to. In User Security, you can manage:
278 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
●Role templates: Two exist to allow you to create one set of access levels and then apply that template
when adding users. You can create, view, edit, and delete role templates.
●Users: Allows you to assign users to a role template. You can create, view, edit, and delete users.
Initial User Security
HP Web Jetadmin is a multi-user application that can be accessed from remote client-workstations. Users and
user-permissions can be administered to control access to the application and specic features within the
application. An example of this would be a helpdesk scenario where many users may not require or should not
have access to features like, discovery, user permissions or, global application settings.
HP Web Jetadmin uses Windows domain identities to authenticate users and grant access to the application or to
specied features. HP Web Jetadmin provides single-sign-on which means the user is authenticated by virtue of
being logged into their client host. They do not have to provide their credentials again when logging into
HP Web Jetadmin.
The HP Web Jetadmin Administrator Role
The HP Web Jetadmin administrator has full rights to all application settings and features. The person installing
HP Web Jetadmin software must have local administrative privileges on the install-host and therefore will have
initial administrative access to the software. Any identity that is a member of the local administrators group on
the local host also has administrative access to the software. The identity must have local administrative
privileges on the install-host and therefore will have initial administrative access to the software.
Alternate Log-in Method for User Security
HP Web Jetadmin uses the single sign-on functionality to pass the identity of the user who is currently logged
into Windows on the client to the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed. HP Web Jetadmin authenticates
this identity through the local Windows users on the server or through the Windows domain identities. In some
cases, the client and server might not reside on the same Windows security domain or on any Windows security
domain. If HP Web Jetadmin fails to authenticate this identity for any reason, it displays an alternate log-in
prompt. Users can then enter log-in credentials other than the credentials for the current Windows session on
the client.
The alternate log-in prompt is useful in a variety of situations, such as the following:
●An authorized HP Web Jetadmin user needs to access HP Web Jetadmin from the desktop of an
unauthorized user.
●The HP Web Jetadmin server is on a security domain. The user has a log-in identity on the security domain
that has been given access rights in HP Web Jetadmin through the Users and Roles features. However, the
user's desktop is not on the security domain.
User Security - Common Tasks Task Module
The User Security - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for roles and
users:
ENWW User Security 279
●Create a role
●Assign a role to users
●Copy a role template to create a new template
User Security - Roles Task Module
The User Security - Roles task module provides a list of the roles that have been created. Use this task module to
perform the following tasks:
●Create a role
●Edit a role
●Delete a role
●View the settings for a role
●Copy a role to create a new role
User Security - Users Task Module
The User Security - Users task module provides a list of the users and the roles that are assigned to the users.
Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Assign a role to users
●Edit the settings for a user
●Delete a user
●Display the User Security - Diagnostics pane for a user
●Refresh the list of users
Roles
A role is a set of permissions for specic HP Web Jetadmin features. A permission set can apply to all of the
features in HP Web Jetadmin or be restricted to only the device management features for a device group. For
more information about restricting permission sets to device groups, see Restrict Roles to Device Groups
on page 281.
After you assign a role to a user, the user can access only the HP Web Jetadmin features that are enabled for
that role. You can create multiple roles to allow dierent levels of access to HP Web Jetadmin features for
dierent users. You can assign multiple roles to one user.
The permission sets for roles are cumulative. If you assign one role to a user, you can grant additional
permissions to that user by assigning another role that has a dierent permission set. Users never lose
permissions when multiple roles are assigned to them. For example, assume that Role A enables permission to
update the device rmware and Role B disables permission to update the device rmware. If you assign Role A to
a user, the user can update the device rmware. If you then assign Role B to the user, the user retains
permission to update the device rmware.
280 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
You can use the Diagnostics feature to view the roles that are assigned to a user and the features that are
enabled or disabled for each of those roles. For more information about the Diagnostics feature, see User
Security Diagnostics on page 286.
Restrict Roles to Device Groups
When you create a role, you can restrict the role to device groups and limit the permission set to specic device
management features, such as conguring devices, running discoveries, and updating the device rmware. To
limit the permission set to device groups from the Create Role wizard, you must select the Device Groups option
from the Restriction type list on the Specify permission settings page. Then you can enable or disable each
device management feature. For instructions on creating roles, see Create Roles on page 281.
After you create a role that is limited to the device management features, you can assign the role to a user.
During the process of assigning the role to a user, you must specify the device groups to which the role is
restricted. The user can access the device management features that are enabled for the role only on the
devices that are members of the specied device groups. The user cannot access the device management
features on devices that are not members of the specied device groups. For instructions on assigning roles, see
Assign Roles to Users on page 284.
Create Roles
If you have permission to manage users, you can create roles by using the Create Role wizard.
To create roles, perform the following steps:
1. In the Application Management navigation pane, right-click Roles, and then select Create. The Create Role
wizard starts.
NOTE: You can assign more than one role to a user. The permission sets for roles are cumulative. If you
assign one role to a user, you can grant additional permissions to that user by assigning another role that
has a dierent permission set. Users never lose permissions when multiple roles are assigned to them. For
example, assume that Role A enables permission to update the device rmware and Role B disables
permission to update the device rmware. If you assign Role A to a user, the user can update the device
rmware. If you then assign Role B to the user, the user retains permission to update the device rmware.
2. On the Specify permission settings page, select one of the following options from the Restriction type list:
●None: The permission set for this role applies to all areas of HP Web Jetadmin.
●Device Groups: The permission set for this role is limited to the device management features.
NOTE: If the Device Groups option is selected, you must also specify the device groups to which the
role is restricted when you assign the role to a user. For instructions on assigning roles, see Assign
Roles to Users on page 284.
3. Select the checkbox next to each permission that you want to enable for the role, and then click the Next
button.
NOTE: You must enable at least one permission.
4. On the Specify role name page, enter a name for the role in the Role name box, and then click the Next
button.
NOTE: Each role must have a unique name.
5. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Create Role button.
ENWW User Security 281
6. To start the Assign User Role wizard, select the Assign to users now checkbox. For more information about
the Assign User Role wizard, see Assign Roles to Users on page 284.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Edit Roles
You can change the permissions that are enabled for a role, but you cannot change the restriction type that is
dened for that role. You cannot edit the Administrator role.
NOTE: If a user is logged in to HP Web Jetadmin when you change the permissions for the role to which that
user is assigned, the changed permissions do not take eect until that user logs out and then logs back in.
However, if the user continues working after you change the permissions and tries to access a feature that is no
longer allowed, HP Web Jetadmin displays a message that the user no longer has permission to perform that
action.
Roles can be edited by multiple clients simultaneously. The last saved user settings are the ones that will be
stored for that role template.
To edit roles, perform the following steps:
1. In the Application Management navigation pane, expand the Roles option, right-click the role, and then
select Edit. The Edit Role wizard starts.
2. To enable a permission, select the checkbox next to the permission.
-or-
To disable a permission, clear the checkbox next to the permission.
3. Click the Next button.
4. On the Specify role name page, enter a new name for the role in the Role name box, and then click the Next
button.
NOTE: Each role must have a unique name.
5. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Save Role button.
6. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Delete Roles
You can delete any role except the Administrator role.
NOTE: If a user is logged in to HP Web Jetadmin when you delete the role to which that user is assigned, the
client for that user is shut down and a message displays stating that the user no longer has permission.
To delete roles, perform the following steps:
1. In the Application Management navigation pane, expand the Roles option, right-click the role, and then
select Delete. The Delete Role wizard starts.
2. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Delete Role button.
3. On the Results page, click the Done button.
282 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
View Roles
1. In the left navigation pane, click on User Security.
In the User Security - Roles task module, select the role to change and click View. The role is displayed
showing the type of restriction and any permissions set.
2. From this page, you can:
●Edit Roles on page 282 (if it is not the Administrator role).
●Delete Roles on page 282 (if it is not the Administrator role).
●Add User (Assign Roles to Users on page 284).
●Remove User (Remove Roles on page 286).
Role Templates
Two role templates come with HP Web Jetadmin:
●Default Device Admin Role: has limited device management permissions and no application management
permissions. You can open this template, rename it, and then change permissions as necessary.
●HP Web Jetadmin Administrator Role: a read-only role. Users assigned to this role have full rights to
HP Web Jetadmin. Both users and user-groups can be added to this role. User groups that are added can be
either local or domain groups.
For information about assigning a role template or a role to users, see Assign Roles to Users on page 284.
NOTE: Even though you can create, edit, and view role templates, you cannot edit or delete the
HP Web Jetadmin Administrator (Read-Only) role template.
Copy a Role Template
Role templates can be created and managed to save you time and provide consistency. Templates contain
conguration preferences (that vary by template type) and can be applied to users or user groups. For more
information, see Copy Template Wizard on page 99.
NOTE: Templates are also available in the Device Management view for Conguration, Alerts, Discovery, Data
Collection, and Report Generation.
Users
If you have permission to manage users in HP Web Jetadmin you can add users to a role. A user can be added to
a role with all of its permissions, or that user can be added to a role with only a subset of its permissions.
Managing Users within User Groups
Either domain or local user groups can be assigned to an HP Web Jetadmin Role. Once the assignment is made,
the users contained within the user group have privileges that are dened within by the role. Here are some
examples of user groups and Role assignment.
ENWW User Security 283
●Example 1: a domain user group contains users who belong to the Support team. The company adds and
removes users as needed when sta changes occur. The Support team’s user-group is associated with an
HP Web Jetadmin Role named HELPDESK.
Domain User Group-Support:
AMERICAS\ralphj
EMEA\rjiminez
ASIAPACIFIC\chansen
The following are the assignments.
User Role
AMERICA\Support HELPDESK
●Example 2: a local group on the system that hosts HP Web Jetadmin includes a group named WJAUsers.
This group is managed by the HP Web Jetadmin administrator who’s name is Chester. Chester keeps a few
people in the group who help him administer the application. The group is associated with the built-in Role
named HP Web Jetadmin Administrator (read only).
Local User Group-WJAUsers:
EMEA\Wendt
EMEA\Pacj
ASIAPACIFIC\Hae
The following are the assignments.
User Role
WJA-SYSTEM\WJAUsers HP Web Jetadmin Administrator (read only)
Assign Roles to Users
You can assign roles to users to manage the HP Web Jetadmin features that the users can access. After you
assign a role to a user, the user can access only the HP Web Jetadmin features that are enabled for that role. You
can create multiple roles to allow dierent levels of access to HP Web Jetadmin features for dierent users. You
can assign multiple roles to one user.
The permission sets for roles are cumulative. If you assign one role to a user, you can grant additional
permissions to that user by assigning another role that has a dierent permission set. Users never lose
permissions when multiple roles are assigned to them. For example, assume that Role A enables permission to
update the device rmware and Role B disables permission to update the device rmware. If you assign Role A to
a user, the user can update the device rmware. If you then assign Role B to the user, the user retains
permission to update the device rmware.
To assign roles to users, perform the following steps:
1. In the Application Management navigation pane, right-click User Security, and then select Assign roles to
users. The Assign User Role wizard starts.
2. On the Select users or user groups page, click the Add button.
284 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
3. On the Add User page, enter the user name and domain where the user is dened.
-or-
To search for the user, perform the following steps:
a. Click the Browse button.
b. To change the location, click the Locations button. In the Locations window, select the
HP Web Jetadmin or Windows domain, and then click the OK button.
c. Enter the user name. To display examples of the format for entering user names, hold the cursor over
the Enter the object name to select (examples) link.
d. To validate the user name, click the Check Names button.
e. If the user name is not valid, the wizard displays an error message. Click the OK button, and then
repeat steps b through d.
f. Click the OK button.
4. Click the Add button.
5. To add additional users, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. Click the Close button.
7. On the Select users or user groups page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Next
button.
8. To create a role from the Specify role settings page, click the New button. The Create Role wizard starts.
For instructions on using the Create Role wizard, see Create Roles on page 281.
9. Select the role from the Role list.
10. If the selected role cannot be restricted to device groups, the Add button is not available. Continue with
step 11.
-or-
If the selected role can be restricted to device groups, the Add button is available. Perform the following
steps:
a. Click the Add button.
b. On the Select Group window, click the ... button, and then select the device group.
c. Click the OK button.
d. To add additional device groups, repeat steps a through c.
11. Click the Next button.
12. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Add button.
13. On the Results page, click the Done button.
To assign multiple roles to a user, repeat this procedure for each role that you want to assign to the user.
Edit Users
You can change the user and role for an existing assignment.
ENWW User Security 285
Use the following steps to edit a user role:
1. Select Application Management from the bottom of the left navigation pane.
Expand User Security and click on Users. The User Security - Users page is displayed.
2. Select the user or group and click Edit. The Edit User Roles wizard is started with the Users page displayed.
3. To change the user for the role check Change User and then type the User name and domain.
If you click Browse, the Select User page is displayed. Type the Object Type and Location and click Next. If
necessary, you can browse for locations.
4. The information will be validated. If the user is found, it will be listed in the Selected Users box at the
bottom of this page. If the user is not found, verify the user name and domain and re-enter that
information.
5. Review the users assigned to this role shown in Selected Users.
If any should be removed, click Remove.
If the users assigned to this role template are correct, click Next. The User Security - Users page is
displayed again.
6. Select the role from the Role drop-down box.
7. If any groups have permissions associated with them, they are listed in the Restrict Permissions by Group
box at the bottom of this page.
If any of the sets of permissions should apply to this user, click Add. This means the user will only be
allowed to perform actions on the group listed.
If any of the sets of permissions listed should be removed so that the user has access to more groups, click
Remove.
Click Next. The Conrm page is displayed.
8. Review the selections. If they are correct, click Next. The Results page is displayed. Click Done.
Remove Roles
Use the following steps to remove a role:
1. Select Application Management from the bottom of the left navigation pane.
Expand User Security and click on Users. The User Security - Users page is displayed.
2. Select the user or group and click Remove Role. The Remove User Role wizard is started with the Conrm
page displayed.
3. If this is the correct user to delete, click Next. The Results page is displayed.
4. Click Done. The User Security - Users page is displayed.
User Security Diagnostics
User Security - Diagnostics provides analysis of permissions as they exist for an individual user or group. Any
domain or local user or group can be chosen and then examined for existing permissions on HP Web Jetadmin.
286 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
Use the following steps to view the roles and permissions for a user or group:
1. Select Application Management from the bottom of the left navigation pane.
Expand User Security and click on Diagnostics. The User Security - Diagnostics page is displayed.
2. Browse for or enter the user name and domain and then click View Roles.
3. If desired, select a restriction to lter the list displayed.
4. The role or roles and permissions for the user are displayed.
HP Web Jetadmin Management
HP Web Jetadmin provides the ability to discover most versions of other HP Web Jetadmin installations.
HP Web Jetadmin can perform a unidirectional synchronization with another HP Web Jetadmin All Devices List
(Device Lists on page 105). This makes it easy to discover devices that have already been discovered by other
installations of HP Web Jetadmin. Both of these features, synchronization and application discovery are valuable
for a variety of reasons:
●An administrator detects others using HP Web Jetadmin software to attain understanding of printer
management on the network.
●An administrator detects other HP Web Jetadmin installations as a matter of security or management
policy.
●An administrator is responsible for nding all devices in a distributed environment where others are
responsible for managing them in multiple areas.
HP Web Jetadmin - Common Tasks Task Module
The HP Web Jetadmin - Common Tasks task module provides links that initiate the following tasks for
HP Web Jetadmin:
●Find remote installations of HP Web Jetadmin
●Display a list of the remote HP Web Jetadmin installations that have been found
HP Web Jetadmin - Management Task Module
The HP Web Jetadmin - Management task module provides a list of the remote HP Web Jetadmin installations
that have been found. Use this task module to perform the following tasks:
●Discover remote installations of HP Web Jetadmin
●Launch a remote installation of HP Web Jetadmin
●Quickly discover a remote installation of HP Web Jetadmin by using the IP address or hostname of the
remote HP Web Jetadmin server
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Management 287
HP Web Jetadmin - Summary Task Module
The HP Web Jetadmin - Summary task module provides the number of remote installations of each version of
HP Web Jetadmin that were found on the network.
Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin on the Network
Sometimes it is advantageous to nd other HP Web Jetadmin application installations on the network.
HP Web Jetadmin provides the ability to discover most revisions of the HP Web Jetadmin software and then
synchronize with those other installations.
Using synchronization and application discovery enables you to:
●Detect others using HP Web Jetadmin software to attain understanding of printer management on the
network.
●Detect other HP Web Jetadmin installations as a matter of security or management policy.
●Schedule the discovery of other HP Web Jetadmin installations.
●Find all devices in a distributed environment (others might manage them in multiple areas).
Discover Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin instances can be listed for discovery, user viewing, removing, and even launching.
HP Web Jetadmin instances can be found on both local and remote networks. The settings for IP Range and IP
Broadcast are identical to HP Web Jetadmin Discovery settings. In fact, these settings are shared between the
two features.
●HP Web Jetadmin can discover other instances of HP Web Jetadmin.
●IP Range and IP Broadcast discoveries share stored setting with other discovery features.
●HP Web Jetadmin instances can be launched directly from the discovery listing.
●The listing can be modied by performing further discoveries or by manually removing the instances.
●Address, URL, hostname, and version information are included in the listing.
You can schedule application discovery. If an application discovery is currently running and you try and start
another application discovery, you will receive a dialog asking if you want to view the current discovery or
schedule a new one.
Use the following steps to discover remote installations of HP Web Jetadmin on the network:
1. In the Application Management navigation pane, right-click HP Web Jetadmin Management, and then select
Find More Applications. The HP Web Jetadmin Discovery wizard starts.
2. On the Choose discovery options page, select the discovery methods to use for the discovery. For more
information about the discovery methods that can be used, see the following topics:
●WS-Discovery on page 152
●IP Broadcast Discovery on page 141
●IP Range Discovery on page 142
288 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
3. To run the discovery immediately, leave the Schedule discovery checkbox cleared.
-or-
To schedule the discovery to run at a later time, select the Schedule discovery checkbox.
4. Click the Next button.
5. On the settings page, specify the settings for the discovery method, and then click the Next button.
NOTE: If more than one discovery method is selected, the wizard displays a separate settings page for
each discovery method.
6. If the Specify schedule options page appears, use the following steps:
a. From the Start time lists, select the date and time that the discovery runs.
b. In the Recurrence section, select the options that specify how often the discovery runs.
c. In the Name box, enter a name for the discovery schedule.
d. Click the Next button.
7. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Start button.
8. On the Progress page, click the Done button.
Launch Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin
Use the following steps to launch a remote installation of HP Web Jetadmin:
1. In the Application Management navigation pane, expand the HP Web Jetadmin Management option, and
then select HP Web Jetadmin Installations.
2. On the HP Web Jetadmin Installations pane, select the remote installation from the list, and then click the
Launch button.
Remove Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin
Use the following steps to remove remote installations of HP Web Jetadmin from the list of discovered
installations:
1. In the Applications Management navigation pane, expand the HP Web Jetadmin Management option, and
then select HP Web Jetadmin Installations. The HP Web Jetadmin Installations pane appears.
2. To remove one or more remote installations from the list, select the installations, and then click the
Remove button.
-or-
To remove all of the remote installations from the list, click the Remove All button.
3. On the Conrm page of the Remove Applications From List wizard, verify that the information is correct,
and then click the Next button.
4. On the Results page, click the Done button.
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Management 289
Data Synchronization
Data synchronization pulls information about the devices that have been discovered on a remote
HP Web Jetadmin server, and then adds the devices to the local HP Web Jetadmin server and displays them in
the All Devices list. Data synchronization occurs even if the local HP Web Jetadmin server has already discovered
the devices that are on the remote HP Web Jetadmin server.
Data synchronization is not a two-way process. The devices on the local HP Web Jetadmin server are not pushed
to the remote HP Web Jetadmin server. Therefore, the number of devices on the remote HP Web Jetadmin
server typically does not match the number of devices on the local HP Web Jetadmin server.
The following is an example of data synchronization. Server A is the local server and has 50 discovered devices.
Server B is the remote server and has 100 discovered devices. There are 10 devices on Server A that are not on
Server B. There are 75 devices on Server B that are not on Server A. After data synchronization is initiated on
Server A, Server A has 125 devices—the original 50 devices plus the 75 devices that are pulled from Server B.
Server B still has only 100 devices because the 10 devices from Server A are not pushed to Server B.
A user on the local HP Web Jetadmin server initiates data synchronization. The local user must have domain user
credentials that are associated with a role on the remote HP Web Jetadmin server or administrative rights on the
remote HP Web Jetadmin server. The local user must be in one of the following groups:
●The user group on the local HP Web Jetadmin server. A data synchronization role on that server must also
be assigned to the local user.
●The user group on the remote HP Web Jetadmin Smart Client.
●The admin group on the local HP Web Jetadmin server.
Synchronize data between HP Web Jetadmin servers
1. If there are no user-dened settings congured on the remote HP Web Jetadmin server, continue with
step 2.
-or-
If there are user-dened settings congured on the remote HP Web Jetadmin server, the user-dened
settings must exist on both the local and remote HP Web Jetadmin servers before the values of the user-
dened settings on the remote HP Web Jetadmin server can be synchronized. The user-dened settings
must be exported from the remote HP Web Jetadmin server, and then imported into the local
HP Web Jetadmin server. For more information about exporting and importing user-dened settings, see
Manage the User-dened Device Conguration Settings on page 66.
CAUTION: When a user-dened setting is created, HP Web Jetadmin generates a random number that is
used as a unique identier for that user-dened setting. Therefore, to maintain the same unique identier
for each user-dened setting, the user-dened settings must be exported from the remote
HP Web Jetadmin server, and then imported into the local HP Web Jetadmin server.
2. Go to Tools > Data Synchronization. The Data Synchronization window opens.
3. If the list of remote HP Web Jetadmin servers is empty or the remote HP Web Jetadmin server is not in the
list, use one of the following options to add remote HP Web Jetadmin servers to the list:
●In the WJA Quick Discovery box, enter the IP address or hostname of the remote HP Web Jetadmin
server, and then click the Go button.
●Discover the remote HP Web Jetadmin servers. For more information about discovering
HP Web Jetadmin servers, see Discover Remote Installations of HP Web Jetadmin on page 288.
4. Select the remote HP Web Jetadmin server from the list.
290 Chapter 5 Application Management ENWW
5. To synchronize the HP Web Jetadmin servers immediately, click the Synchronize button.
-or-
To schedule the synchronization for a later time, click the Schedule button. The Synchronize Data wizard
starts. Use the following steps to schedule the synchronization:
a. On the Specify user page, enter your password in the Password box, and then click the Verify link
button.
b. After the link is successfully veried, click the Next button.
c. On the Select device data page, select the checkboxes next to the device data to include in the data
synchronization, and then click the Next button.
NOTE: The checkboxes for the device data that must be synchronized are already selected and
cannot be cleared.
d. On the Specify schedule page, select the date and time that the data synchronization runs.
NOTE: A scheduled task uses the date and time on the server where HP Web Jetadmin is installed.
The location where the scheduled task runs might not be in the same time zone as the location where
the HP Web Jetadmin server is installed. Consider the potential for date and time dierences when
scheduling tasks.
e. In the Recurrence section, select the option that species how often the data synchronization runs,
and then specify any associated settings.
f. Click the Next button.
g. On the Conrm page, verify that the schedule information is correct, and then click the Start
Synchronization button.
h. On the Progress page, click the Done button.
6. On the Data Synchronization window, click the OK button.
Delete data synchronization schedules
1. Go to Tools > Data Synchronization. The Data Synchronization window opens.
2. Select the remote HP Web Jetadmin server, and then click the Clear Schedule button.
3. On the Conrm Schedule Removal window, click the Yes button.
Delete servers from the list of remote servers
1. Go to Tools > Data Synchronization. The Data Synchronization window opens.
2. Select the remote HP Web Jetadmin server, and then click the Delete button.
3. On the Conrm Entry Removal window, click the Yes button.
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Management 291
6 Device Conguration Options
Following are the various conguration options for devices. Your device might or might not support all of the
options.
Device Conguration Options for Copier
Conguration options for Copiers dene functions for the copiers including default copy settings.
Auto Include Margins
Use this option to specify whether content close to the edges on an original scanned document is automatically
included on the copy.
To include the entire image on an original scanned document, including any content that is close to the edges,
select the On option. If necessary, the device reduces the image slightly on the copy, depending on the size of
the printable area on the paper.
To leave a margin of unscanned space on the copy, select the O option. The device might not be able to t the
entire original image on the copy.
Color Copy Mode and Color Copy Mode With Auto
Use this option to set the device to the desired copy mode.
To set this option, select the desired setting from the drop-down box.
Color Copy Option
The Color Copy Option provides an eective way to limit color copying which can serve as a cost control option
for you. To provide an option to disable color copies and limit the color copy costs.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To allow color copies, select Enable.
2. To disable color copies, select Disable. The corresponding option will disappear from the Embedded Web
Server. The disability to make color copies is applied after a timeout period.
Copier Fit To Page
This option enables the device with local copier capability to t the input image size automatically onto the
output sheet size. This object allows you to scale to the output size without knowing the scaling percentage.
292 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To set the Fit to page, select the O or On radio button.
2. Click Apply.
Copier Reduce/Enlarge
This option enables you to specify reduction/enlargement for copies. The number is represented as a
percentage of the original. A value of 100 will make copies with no reduction or enlargement; higher values will
make enlargements, while lower values cause a reduction. It is often useful to be able to make reductions or
enlargements if the paper size being copied to is dierent from the size of the source document. Some useful
values for copying from one size to another would be:
●Legal to Letter (78%)
●Letter to A4 (97%)
●A4 to Letter (94%)
●Legal to A4 (83%)
To set this option, enter a number for the percentage of the reduction or enlargement.
Copy - Alternative Letterhead Mode
When printing using duplex mode, this option denes the rst side of the page as having letterhead and the
other side having no letterhead.
To congure this option, select On or O.
Copy Background Cleanup
Use this option to set the default amount of background to be removed from the original document being
scanned. For example, if a higher value is set then more of the background is removed from the original.
To congure this option, select a default value for the amount of background to remove from scanned images.
Copy Content Orientation
Use this option to specify the default orientation for the scan job and binding format of the original document
and the print job. If the setting is:
●Book-Style: The original document has book-style (long edge) binding and the printed document has book-
style binding.
●Book-style original; Flip-style Copy: The original document has book-style (long-edge) binding and the
printed document has ip-style binding.
●Flip-style: The original document has ip-style (short edge) binding and the printed document has ip-
style binding.
●Flip-style original; Book-style Copy: The original document has ip-style binding and the printed document
has book-style binding.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Copier 293
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. In Orientation, select the orientation for the scan job.
2. In 2-Sided Format, select the desired binding format for the scan job.
Copy Contrast
Use this option to specify the default contrast (brightness) that the device uses to make copies. The device can
make copies that are lighter or darker than the original. To take advantage of the one-touch copying feature,
change the default contrast to the value that users typically select when making copies.
To specify the contrast that the device uses to make copies, select the contrast value from the list. For the
lightest contrast (maximum brightness), select 8 or 125. For the darkest contrast (minimum brightness), select 0
or -125.
Copy Darkness
Use this option to specify the default amount of exposure that is applied to the scanned document. For example,
a lower setting will cause the printed output to be lightened; a higher setting will cause the printed output to be
darkened.
To congure this option, select a default value for the darkness to be applied to scanned images.
Copy Fold
Use this feature to fold sheets of paper in half or into thirds. Folding is supported only for Letter-sized and A4-
sized paper.
●Select None if no fold is necessary.
●Select C-Fold to fold the page into thirds towards the rst side with the top or right side of the paper on the
outside.
When C-Fold is selected, Sheets Folded Together accepts 1 to 3 values.
●Select V-Fold to fold the page in half towards the rst side of the paper.
When V-Fold is selected , Sheets Folded Together accepts 1 to 5 values.
●Select Advanced fold Options to show more folding options or to change the location of the printed content
in relation to the fold.
Copy Heavy Originals
Use this option to specify the weight of the original scanned documents.
When heavy paper is used, the device adjusts the tension and moves the paper through the scanning area at a
slower rate. For paper that weighs more than 100 g/m2, the quality of the output might improve if you select the
Heavy option.
To specify the weight of the original scanned documents, select the Normal or Heavy option.
294 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Copy Job Auto Interrupt
The auto job interrupt feature allows the product to automatically interrupt an active network print job between
complete sets to print a new copy job. This option lets you specify if the auto job interrupt feature is enabled or
disabled. If you enable the auto job interrupt feature, users do not have to wait for large, multi-copy network
print jobs to nish printing before they can print a new copy job.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable the auto job interrupt feature, select On.
2. To disable the auto job interrupt feature, select O.
Copy Job Build
Use this option to enable by default combining multiple scanned jobs into a single printed document. If this
option is enabled, then multiple scan jobs will be combined into one print job and no other network print jobs will
interrupt the copy. If it is disabled, the scan jobs will remain separate scan jobs.
To set this option, select Enabled or Disabled.
Copy Job Scan Ahead
The walk-up copying feature allows you to walk up to the product and start making a copy while the product is
busy printing a network print job. If the walk-up copying feature is enabled and a user initiates a copy job while
the product is printing a network print job, the product scans and holds the copy job until it nishes printing the
network print job. If the walk-up copying feature is disabled and a user initiates a copy job while the product is
printing a network print job, the product waits until it nishes printing the network print job to start scanning the
copy job. The product displays a message on the control panel saying that the copy job is blocked and will be
processed as soon as the current job nishes printing. The user can choose to cancel the copy job or leave the
originals in the automatic document feeder (ADF) or on the scanner glass.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable this feature, select On.
2. To disable this feature, select O.
Copy Manage Booklet
Use this option to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to
form a booklet. The product arranges the pages so that when multiple sheets are folded together, the pages are
in the correct order.
To enable these features, select the check box next to them.
●Booklet Format: assembles sequential pages into the correct order for a booklet.
●Borders on each page: prints a border around each page.
●Fold and Stitch: automatically staples and folds the booklet pages.
NOTE: Set the Staple and Hole punch option to None to enable the Booklet option.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Copier 295
Copy Optimize Text/Picture
Use this option to optimize the quality of copy output based on the content of typical copy jobs. You can choose
to optimize for text, photographs, printed pictures, or a mix of text and pictures.
Select the image type that is most commonly copied from the Optimize Text/Picture drop-down list.
If you select Manually Adjust from the Optimize Text/Picture drop-down list, the Optimize For drop-down list is
available. To specify whether the copy output is optimized more for text or more for pictures by default, select
the appropriate option from the Optimize For drop-down list.
Copy Output Bin
This option lets you specify the default output bin where the printed copies are delivered. The output bins that
you can select depend on the output device that is congured with the product. If you want to take advantage of
the one-touch copying feature, you should change the default to the output bin where the users typically send
printed copies. This eliminates the need for the users to specify the output bin at the control panel each time
they make copies.
To specify the default output bin for copies, select the output bin from the drop-down list.
Copy Pages Per Sheet
Use this option to specify the default number of pages to print on one physical piece of paper and how those
pages are ordered on the paper.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. In Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages to be placed on one physical piece of paper.
2. In Page order, select how those pages should be placed on the paper.
3. To print page borders, select Print page borders.
Copy Paper Tray Selection
Use this option to specify the default input paper tray the device should use for a copy job.
To set this option, select the default paper tray that will be used for copy jobs.
Copy Reduce/Enlarge
Use this option to specify the default reduction and enlargement congurable settings for scanned jobs.
To set this option, specify the scaling within the given range or select Auto Scale.
Copy Sharpness
Use this option to specify the default amount of sharpness to be applied to the original document being
scanned. A higher value produces sharper copies.
296 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
To set this option, select the default sharpness value. The higher the value, the greater the default sharpness.
Copy Stamps
Use this option to change custom Copy Stamps or use the pre-dened Copy Stamps text.
Select up to six preset positions for a stamp and congure the content that will be printed there.
●Text Font: Changes the font.
●Text Size: Changes the text size.
●Text Color: Changes the text color.
●White Background: Enables white background.
Copy Stamps (Custom)
Use these options to change the Custom Copy Stamps text or use the pre-dened Copy Stamps text.
Enable Custom Copy Stamps Text to use user-dened text.
Enable Pre-dened Copy Stamps Text to use pre-dened text.
Copy Stamps (Enforced)
Use this option to use the features of both Copy Stamps and Copy Stamps (Custom).
NOTE: Once changes are made in Copy Stamp (Enforced), further changes can not be made in Copy Stamps or
Copy Stamps (Custom).
Select the stamp content by selecting the check boxes.
Select up to six preset positions for a stamp and congure the content that will be printed there.
●Starting Number: Sets the starting page number in pre-dened stamps.
●Text Font: Changes the font.
●Text Size: Changes the text size.
●Text Color: Changes the text color.
●White Background: Enables white background.
Copy Staple
Use this option to specify the default staple placement for copy jobs. This setting is only available if a stapler is
attached to the device.
To set this option, select the staple placement for copy jobs.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Copier 297
Copy Staple/Hole Punch
Use this option to specify the default staple/hole punch placement for copy jobs. These settings are only
available if a stapler/nisher is attached to the device.
To set these options, select the staple/hole punch placement for copy jobs.
Copy Watermark
Use this option to change the watermark text and the following options:
●Watermark Type: Set text either as None, Text, or Secure. Text is placed at the center of the page.
●Secure Watermark Text: Background text and pattern that is barely visible on the rst copy of a document.
Any future copies of the document display the watermark more visibly.
●First Page Only: Prints watermark only on the rst page.
●Rotate text 45 degrees: Rotates text 45 degrees.
●Text Font: Changes the font.
●Text Size: Changes the size of the font to 30, 40, or 60 point.
●Background Color: Changes the color of the background.
●Background Pattern: Changes the pattern of the background.
●Darkness: Changes the darkness of the font.
Copy Watermark (Custom)
Use these options to change the Custom Watermark text or to use the pre-dened Watermark text.
Enable Custom Watermark Text to use user-dened text.
Enable Pre-dened Watermark Text to use pre-dened text.
Default Copier Copies
This option allows you to select the default number of copies that will be generated on each copy job initiated
from the control panel.
To select the default number of copies, type the number of copies (between 1 and 99) in the edit box.
Default Copy Collation
This option lets you specify collation behavior. Since collation does consume additional resources on the device,
turning this feature o can sometimes allow the device to complete jobs which otherwise may have failed to
complete.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
298 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. To enable this feature, select On or Enabled.
2. To disable this feature, select O or Disabled.
Default Edge-to-Edge Setting
Use this option to specify whether copies are printed as close to the edge of the page as possible or printed with
the normal unprinted border.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. For a 1 mm (0.04 inch) unprintable border, select the Edge-to-Edge Output option.
2. For a 6.35 mm (0.25 inch) unprintable border, select the Normal option.
Default Image Quality
This option lets you select the default copy quality either for maximum performance, or for more economic
operation when the best performance is not needed.
To congure this option, select the desired quality level.
Default Number of Copies
This option lets you specify the default number of copies that are printed for each copy job. If you want to take
advantage of the one-touch copying feature, change the default to the number of copies that the users typically
print. This eliminates the need for the users to specify the number of copies at the control panel each time they
make copies.
To specify the default number of copies, type the quantity in the text box.
Default Number of Sides
This option lets you specify if one side or both sides of the original or the copy document are copied.
To congure this option, select the desired default number of sides from the drop-down box.
Default Original Content
This option lets you specify the default type of information that is on the original document (Text, Graphics, or
Mixed). If you want to take advantage of the one-touch copying feature and the users typically copy originals
that have only graphics or only text, change the default to the appropriate type of information. This eliminates
the need for the users to specify the page content at the control panel each time they make copies.
To congure this option, select the information type (Text, Graphics, or Mixed) from the drop-down box.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Copier 299
Default Original Media Size
This option lets you specify the default original media size of copied documents. The paper sensors override the
default. If the paper sensors cannot detect the size of the original, the product uses the default. If you want to
take advantage of the one-touch copying feature, change the default copy media size to the size of the originals
that the users typically copy. This eliminates the need for the users to specify the media size at the control panel
each time they make copies.
To specify the media size of the originals, select the media size from the drop-down list.
First Copy Speed
This option lets the device handle the speed for the rst copy. If you do not use the copying functionality
frequently, you may take advantages to enable the fast rst copy feature.
To disable this option, select No early warm up (default). The copying process might be slower for the rst copy.
To enable this option, select Early warm up. The copying process will be faster but it might cause excessive wear
on the device.
Hold O Print Jobs During Copy
Use this option to prevent network print jobs from starting until after the product nishes printing a copy job. You
can specify if the hold o print job feature is enabled or disabled. Enabling this option will give walk-up copying
users priority over network print jobs, and the product will not start printing any network print jobs as long as a
user is interacting with the control panel.
Some products support the Hold O Time on page 300 option. The device will wait for the amount of time that
you specify for the Hold O Time on page 300 option after a copy job nishes printing before starting to print
any network print jobs.
NOTE: If you enable the hold o print job feature, you must also specify a value for the Hold O Time
on page 300 option.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable this feature, select On.
2. To disable the hold o print job feature, select O.
Hold O Time
This option lets you specify the default amount of time that network print jobs must wait before starting to print
if the Hold O Print Jobs During Copy on page 300 option is enabled. If you want to give walk-up copying users
priority over network print jobs, you should congure the Hold O Print Jobs During Copy on page 300 option.
HP Web Jetadmin will not start printing any network print jobs as long as a user is interacting with the control
panel. In addition, the product will wait for the amount of time that you specify for the Hold O Time option after
a copy job nishes printing before starting to print any network print jobs.
NOTE: If the Hold O Print Jobs During Copy on page 300 option is not enabled, HP Web Jetadmin ignores the
Hold O Time value entered for this feature.
To specify how long HP Web Jetadmin waits before starting network print jobs, type the number of seconds in
the text box.
300 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Interrupt Copy Jobs
This feature lets you interrupt an active copy job between complete sets to print a new copy job. This option lets
you specify if the copy job interrupt feature is enabled or disabled. If you enable the copy job interrupt feature,
users do not have to wait for large, multi-copy copy jobs to nish printing before they can print a new copy job.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable this feature, select On.
2. To disable the interrupt copy job feature, select O.
Paper Path
Use this option to congure the paper path.
●Select Automatically Select to automatically copy.
●Select Face–up (straightest path) to copy face-up.
●Select Face–down (correct order) to copy face-down.
Device Conguration Options for Device
Conguration options for Devices dene general administrative functions for the device including Power Save,
Tray Administration, and print defaults.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When printing using duplex mode, this option denes the rst side of the page as having letterhead and the
other side having no letterhead.
To congure this option, select On or O.
Anonymous Usage Information Transmission
Use this option to enable or disable the transmission of anonymous information about the printer to HP. The
printer sends the following types of information to HP:
●The country/region, language, and local time zone where the printer is installed
●The printer model number
●Information about how the printer is used, such as the number of pages printed, print mode used, media
printed, brand of cartridges installed, le types printed, and applications used to print jobs
●The events that occur, such as low supply alerts
●The printer features that are used, such as photo card slots, fax, scan, and HP Embedded Web Server
●Additional technical information that varies depending on the printer
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 301
HP uses this information to design future printers that better meet customers' needs.
IMPORTANT: HP is committed to protecting your privacy and the integrity of your devices. Your name, address,
email address, and other sensitive data are not sent to HP.
To enable the transmission of anonymous usage information, select the Enable option.
-or-
To disable the transmission of anonymous usage information, select the Disable option.
Asset Number
Use this option to assign an asset number to the device. The asset number can be based on any user-dened
schema, such as an organization's accounting system.
NOTE: You can only apply this conguration option to a single device. You cannot use this conguration option
to congure multiple devices with the same static value in a template.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Enter the device asset number in the box. Most devices support a maximum of 1,024 characters.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_AssetNumber%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: CityName%%var_AssetNumber%%
Example: CityName%%var_AssetNumber%%Building
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
2. To apply the asset number to the device immediately, click the Apply button.
-or-
To apply the asset number to the device later, click the Schedule button. The Schedule Device Conguration
wizard starts. For more information about using the Schedule Device Conguration wizard, see Schedule
Device Congurations on page 178.
Auto Cleaning Page
This option enables and disables the automatic cleaning page. You can specify how often you want to print the
automatic cleaning page. If the printer is in the middle of a print job when it reaches the page count that you
302 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
specify, the printer nishes printing that print job before it starts the cleaning process. The cleaning process
takes approximately 2.5 minutes to complete. You can either discard or recycle the cleaning page after it is
printed.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable Auto Cleaning Page, select Auto cleaning page enabled.
2. Select the cleaning frequency.
3. Select the page size (Letter or A4). You must use plain paper.
NOTE: To ensure that the cleaning process runs automatically and without intervention, make sure that
the paper size you specify is always available in the printer.
Auto Continue
Choose to have a non-critical error message appear for ten seconds before the device resumes operation. Select
O for Auto Continue to require you to acknowledge non-critical error messages by pressing Continue on the
device before the device resumes operation.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable Auto Continue, select On.
2. To disable Auto Continue, select O. You will have to acknowledge non-critical error messages by pressing
Continue on the device before the device resumes operation.
Auto Recovery
Use this option to enable or disable the Auto Recovery feature on the device. If this option is enabled and an
unrecoverable error occurs in the device rmware, the device automatically turns o and turns on to recover
from the error.
To enable the Auto Recovery feature on the device, select the Enabled option.
To disable the Auto Recovery feature on the device, select the Disabled option.
Auto Sense Mode
Use this option to optimize device settings for certain media types that can be detected automatically by the
printer. Not all printers will support all of the sensing methods, or sensing from every tray. Sensing options may
include:
●Full Sensing: For each sheet of paper that is picked up from the tray, the product detects light paper, plain
paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, and transparencies.
●Expanded Sensing: For the rst few sheets of paper that is picked up from the tray, the product detects
light paper, plain paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, and transparencies. The product assumes
the rest of the pages are of the same type.
●Transparency Only: The product distinguishes between transparencies and non-transparencies.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 303
1. Select the setting for Tray 1 Sensing to congure how the device detects media in Tray 1.
2. Select the setting for Tray N Sensing (if available) to congure how the device detects media in trays 2
through N.
AutoSend
Use this option to enable the device to periodically send usage information about the device’s congurations and
supplies to a list of recipients.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Check the Enable AutoSend box to enable this feature.
2. Select the frequency to send conguration and supplies information in Send every.
3. If you have a relationship with HP that provides you with services such as proactive cartridge replacement,
pay per page contracts, support agreements, or usage tracking, enable the Send to HP using HTTPS
feature. Information is always sent to HP securely using HTTPS POST, if possible. Otherwise, you can
choose to allow this information to be sent using email if HTTPS fails or is unavailable.
4. If you want to send the same information to a custom list of web addresses or email addresses, enable
those features and enter the appropriate addresses.
AutoStore
AutoStore is an automated document and content capture solution for HP MFP devices. The AutoStore product
consists of a server-based application, AutoStore Server, and an installable embedded Web server application,
AutoStore ChaiService.
The AutoStore ChaiService contacts the AutoStore Server on a regular basis to determine whether there is a new
set of AutoStore menus to download and display on the front panel of a device. To do this, it must be congured
with the AutoStore Server information. You can also congure how frequently the AutoStore ChaiService will
contact the AutoStore Server.
NOTE: To protect the AutoStore menus, use a device's authentication feature. If authentication is used,
congure the AutoStore ChaiService to revoke authentication when certain events occur.
NOTE: For convenience, congure the AutoStore ChaiService to contact the AutoStore Server immediately for
new AutoStore menus, especially when the administrator is testing a newly designed set of AutoStore menus.
After AutoStore is installed and congured, the front panel on a device or group of devices displays the AutoStore
menus. These menus allow users to easily scan, process, and route documents to pre-programmed
destinations. For example, an MFP device scans the documents, and then the AutoStore Server processes and
then routes the documents to a destination.
NOTE: If the AutoStore ChaiService is installed on a device(s), you must congure the AutoStore ChaiService to
use the service.
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin does not display the current conguration settings in this section. You can use
HP Web Jetadmin to change the conguration settings. To view the conguration settings, you must use
HP Web Jetadmin to browse to the device embedded Web server.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
304 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. Select either IP Address or Hostname and then type the IP address or hostname in the corresponding text
box.
2. Type the network port value in Port (1 to 9999).
3. To specify how often to poll the AutoStore Server, type the interval (in minutes) in Interval.
4. If displayed, set the Authentication timeout.
5. If displayed and if desired, select Revoke authentication on reentry.
6. Click Apply.
Browser
Use this option to congure specic settings for the web browser on the device (for example, enabling OXPd 1.6
support). The web browser settings that can be congured include connection timeout, response timeout, and a
list of trusted sites.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To set the connection timeout, select an option from the drop-down list.
2. To set the response time, select an option from the drop-down list.
3. Enter trusted sites in the Trusted sites text box. For multiple sites, use a semicolon to separate each entry.
Calibration Timing
Use this option to control when calibrations are performed. You can set the timer (in hours) to turn on or o
calibration. If a time is set, the calibration takes place after the timer expires and the next job is nished printing.
To set this option, select a time from the dropdown box and click Apply.
Cartridge Low Action
This option lets you specify how the printer responds when a toner-low condition exists. Set the printer to
continue normal operations or set it to stop printing. In either case, HP Web Jetadmin displays a Toner Low
message on the Device Status page. Allowing the printer to continue printing when the toner is low lets the
current print job nish printing and gives the user who is responsible for the printer time to change the toner
cartridge. However, this might result in poor print quality.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To let the printer continue printing when the toner is low, select Continue.
2. To stop the printer from printing until the toner is replaced, select Stop.
Cartridge Out Action
This option lets you specify how the printer responds when a toner-out condition exists. Set the printer to
continue normal operations or set it to stop printing. In either case, HP Web Jetadmin displays a Toner Out
message on the Device Status page. Allowing the printer to continue printing when the toner is out lets the
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 305
current print job nish printing and gives the user who is responsible for the printer time to change the toner
cartridge. However, this might result in poor print quality.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To let the printer continue printing when the toner is out, select Continue.
2. To stop the printer from printing until the toner is replaced, select Stop.
Clearable Warnings
This option lets you determine whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or when another job is sent.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select On to display a warning until GO is pressed.
2. Select Job to display a warning until the end of the job in which it was generated.
If On is selected, a warning is displayed until GO is pressed. If Job is selected, a warning is displayed until the end
of the job in which it was generated.
Cold Reset Media Size
This option returns or sets the media size that is used as the Default Media Size when a cold reset occurs.
Dierent countries/regions require dierent default media sizes. The factory uses this option to select the
default media size.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To set the Cold Reset Media Size option, select the option for the media size.
2. Click Apply.
Color Control Setting
Use this option to control the color settings.
●Drying Time: Change the drying time to Normal, Most, or More, by selecting the drop down menu.
The drying time is a period of time inserted between pages to reduce the chance that a page will smear the
one below it in the output tray. Printing will pause temporarily if more time is needed.
NOTE: The time it takes for pages to dry varies greatly depending on paper type, printer driver settings,
humidity, and temperature. In addition, the paper type and printer driver settings might aect the printing
speed.
●Black Spread: Change the black spread to Normal, Less, or Least, by selecting the drop down menu.
Black spread can appear as blurriness where light and dark colors meet, making edges less sharp and
dened.
●Saturation: Move the slider to adjust the amount of saturation.
Saturation is the amount of color used during the printing process. Certain coated paper (such as photo
paper) can absorb larger quantities than other types of paper (such as plain paper).
306 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
NOTE: If you notice smearing on printed documents or images, use a lower saturation setting.
●Hue Correction: Move the slider to adjust the color levels used in documents and images.
●Ignore Driver Settings: If selected, only the device’s settings apply.
●Restore Factory Defaults: Restores the default settings in the drop down menus.
Color Supply Out
This option lets you specify how the printer responds when one of the color toners is empty. You can choose to
set the printer to continue printing with black toner (for a certain number of pages) or set it to stop printing
altogether. In both cases, HP Web Jetadmin displays a Toner Out message on the device lists.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To stop the printer from printing until the toner is replaced, select Stop.
2. To let the printer continue printing with black toner, when one or more of the color toners is out, select
Auto Continue Black.
Color/Black Mix
This option optimizes the performance or cost per page depending on the expected color content of typical print
jobs. This feature allows you to set printer behavior for printing mostly color or mostly black (monochrome) print
jobs.
NOTE: Selecting the Print In Grayscale feature from the printer driver overrides these settings for a specic
print job.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Auto: (Default) best choice for most conditions; it behaves the same as Mostly Color Pages.
2. Mostly Color Pages: Provides the best performance for most conditions, especially when mostly color
pages are printed. Under normal usage, there is minimal or no cost per page impact from this selection.
3. Mostly Black Pages: Provides the best cost per page for users printing mostly monochrome pages on color
printers.
Company Name
The company contact is the name of the organization that owns or is responsible for the device.
HP Web Jetadmin displays the company contact on the Status page for the device and on several of the device
lists. You can also search for and display a list of all of the devices for which a specic organization is responsible.
Contact Person
Use this option to specify the name of the person who should be contacted if there are any problems with the
device or if you need support.
To set this option, type the name of the contact person.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 307
Control Panel Display
This option lets you make specic items appear on the Control Panel Display on the device. The items include IP
Address, Hostname, Serial Number, Asset Number, Device Name, System Location, System Contact, Device
Location and a short text string that you can dene.
One option can be selected.
Select the desired option. If you select Other, enter the message to display on the control panel.
Control Panel Language
This option lets you specify the language that is displayed on the printer control panel. The drop-down list
contains all of the languages that the printer supports. If you have a multilingual workforce, set the control panel
language to the one language that your employees prefer.
Choose the desired language from the drop-down list.
Courier Font Type
This option allows you to choose whether the regular courier font or a dark font is used. This setting does not
aect fax or copy jobs, but does apply to the internal reports which contain a Courier font. The regular TrueType
Courier font prints somewhat lighter than the bitmap fonts for the same.
To specify the courier font type, select Regular or Dark.
Date and Time
This option allows you to remotely specify the time and date for a device or group of devices. When the correct
time and date is set on a device, the device can complete time or date dependant operations and add time and
date stamps on documents, such as a diagnostic report.
To specify the time and date on a device, type the current year, month, and day in the corresponding elds. Use
the 12-hour system. For example, 1 PM is 1 PM.
Date/Time Format
Use this option to specify the format for dates and times as displayed on the device. Specifying the format allows
you to comply with the formats used by your organization.
To specify the date format, select a format from Date format. To specify the time format, select a time format
from Time format.
Daylight Savings Time
Use this option to specify the date range for daylight saving time (summer time), which should match the
daylight saving time schedule for the location of the device.
308 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To specify the start date and end date for daylight saving time, perform the following steps:
a. In the Start Date and End Date columns, select the appropriate values from the Occurrence, Week
Day, Month, and Hour drop-down lists.
b. Type the number of minutes for the daylight saving time oset in the DST Oset text box.
2. To use the default start date and end date for daylight saving time, select the Use Defaults option.
Default Input Paper Tray
This option lets you specify which tray the device should rst get paper from as a default (upper paper tray or
lower paper tray).
Select the paper tray you want to use for a default.
Default Media Size
This option lets you specify the default media size. The drop-down list contains all of the media sizes that the
printer supports. This option is useful if the people who use the printer typically print on a specic size of media.
For example, if the printer is dedicated to the legal department and those users typically print on Legal paper,
set the default media size to Legal.
The media size setting that you might select when printing a job overrides the setting specied here.
To specify the default media size, select the media size from the drop-down list labeled Default Media Size.
Default Media Type
This option species the default media type. The drop-down list contains all of the media types that the printer
supports. This option is useful if the people who use the printer typically print on specic media. For example, if
the printer is dedicated to the human resources department and they typically print on three-hole punched
paper, set the default media type to Prepunched.
NOTE: For this option to work, you must specify the media type for each tray under the Media Type
Administration category on the Device Conguration page.
The media type setting that a user selects when printing a job overrides the setting specied here.
To specify the default media type, select the media type from the drop-down list.
Default Print Density
This option lets you select the default density for print jobs, which aects all pages printed on the device (host
print jobs, received faxes, copies, and internal reports).
To select this option, select a density from the drop-down box (5 is the darkest, or highest density). For color,
select the desired print density for each color. If applicable, you can also select the print density for highlights,
midtones, and shadows.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 309
Default Printer Copies
This option lets you specify the default number of copies that are printed for each print job. This option is useful
if the people who use the printer typically print a specic number of copies. For example, if the printer is
dedicated to the legal department and those users always print three copies of their documents, set the default
number of copies to three.
NOTE: The copies setting that you select when printing a job overrides the setting specied here.
To specify the default number of printer copies, type the number of copies into Default Printer Copies.
Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On
Use this option to control the timing of the calibration when the printer wakes up or is turned on.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To set the printer to calibrate immediately when it wakes up or is turned on, select O. The device will not
print any jobs until it nishes calibrating.
2. To enable a device that is asleep to accept print jobs before it calibrates, select On. The device only accepts
new jobs for a short time. It may start calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has received.
NOTE: For best results, allow the device to calibrate before printing. Print jobs performed before calibration
might not be of the highest quality.
CA Certicates
Devices use certicate authority (CA) certicates, which are also called public keys, to browse to external
websites. For example, devices might require a CA certicate to enable OXPd 1.6 support. If there are no CA
certicates in the device’s certicate store, the device uses the HP Jetdirect CA certicate if one is available.
Use this option to install or remove the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) trusted CA certicates on the device.
Install or remove CA certicates on the device
When CA certicates are removed from the device, the CA certicates remain in the HP Web Jetadmin Certicate
Repository.
CAUTION: If an intermediate CA certicate is installed, the scope of authentication is limited.
1. If you are conguring multiple devices, select one of the following options in the Overwrite options section:
●Replace/overwrite existing Certicates
●Append to existing Certicates
●Remove Certicates
2. Click the Add button. The Add Device Certicate window opens with a list of all of the CA certicates that are
stored in the HP Web Jetadmin Certicate Repository.
TIP: To manage the list of CA certicates, click the Edit button. The Options window opens with the
Certicate Repository option selected. For more information about the Certicate Repository, see Manage
the Certicate Repository on page 69.
3. Select the CA certicates from the list, and then click the OK button.
310 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Delete CA certicates from the list of available CA certicates
▲From the Certicates list, select the CA certicates, and then click the Remove button.
Device Location
This option identies the device based on its location. You can use the Device Location to search for and display a
list of all of the devices that have specic text in their device locations (for example, North Bldg, 3rd Floor).
HP Web Jetadmin displays the Device Location on the device lists if you congured this option to be listed (Device
Identication on page 33 and Columns for Device Lists on page 106). You can also choose to have this column
display in any custom view (Customizing Layouts for Device Lists on page 109).
To congure this option, enter a description of the location in the text box. The maximum number of characters
is 1,024.
NOTE: Some devices do not support a maximum of 1,024 characters.
Device Name
This option identies the device based on its name. You can use the Device Name to search for and display a list
of all of the devices that have specic text in their device names (for example, Color LaserJet Marketing).
HP Web Jetadmin displays the Device Name on the device lists if you congured this option to be listed (Device
Identication on page 33 and Columns for Device Lists on page 106). You can also choose to have this column
display in any custom view (Customizing Layouts for Device Lists on page 109).
To set the device name, type or change the device name in Device Name.
Device Volumes
This group of options selects the volumes of certain sounds emitted by the device:
NOTE: Some of the volume options may not be displayed depending on available features of the device being
congured.
●Line monitor: Allows you to set the volume level used during the fax machine to fax machine negotiation
for each sent and received fax.
●Alarm: Allows you to set the volume level used by the device for the beep to indicate an error condition.
●Ring: Allows you to set the volume level used to indicate an incoming call on the connected phone line.
●Key press: Allows you to set the volume level used when control panel keys are pressed.
To select the volume options, select O, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
Duplex Binding
Use this option to specify the default duplex option and orientation that is used when a print job does not specify
these settings. System administrators can use this option to implement a policy for duplex printing when print
jobs do not specify a setting.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 311
To specify the default duplex option for the device, select one of the following options:
●Long Edge—This option is recommended for portrait print jobs.
●None (1-sided)
●Short Edge—This option is recommended for landscape print jobs.
Duplex Blank Pages
This option lets you optimize the duplex printing performance.
Select Auto to enable enhanced print speed in some circumstances by often not taking the time to print blank
sides. For paper types that need to print the blank side (like letterhead), Auto is smart enough to do so.
Select Yes to always print blank sides in duplex jobs. The image will always be on the correct side.
Duplex Impressions
This option lets you dene how a device counts pages. This option also includes an Opt in agreement to make
the user aware that once enabled, this setting cannot be disabled. Each user is required to opt-in before they will
be able to set this conguration.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Click "Opt In" to enable.
2. The HP Print Tracker Usage Change agreement is displayed. Carefully review the document. If you accept
the terms, select I accept. If you do not accept the terms, this option cannot be enabled.
3. To enable this option, check the box Enable duplex impression counting.
Dust Detection
Use this feature to receive notications when the product detects dust on the document feeder scan assembly.
Dust can reduce scan quality.
●Dust Detection Error Messaging
To enable Dust Detection Error Messaging, select the Enabled option.
To disable Dust Detection Error Messaging, select the Disabled option.
●Dust Detection Feature
To enable the Dust Detection Feature, select the Enabled option.
To disable the Dust Detection Feature, select the Disabled option.
●Dust Detection Sensitivity
To congure Dust Detection Sensitivity, select either Low, Medium, or High from the drop-down box.
312 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Economode
This option allows you to select the Economode (toner saving) default for jobs that do not specify an Economode
value. This allows the printer to behave in a consistent manner for print jobs which do not specify the
Economode setting.
To specify the default Economode value, select the radio button for the desired Economode (On or O).
Enable Retrieve/Print from USB
Use this option to enable or disable the ability to print documents from a USB ash device.
To enable USB printing, select the Enabled option.
-or-
To disable USB printing, select the Disabled option.
Energy Settings
Use this option to change Sleep and Shutdown settings after inactivity.
●Sleep/Auto O After: Changes when the device sleeps after inactivity.
●Shut Down After Inactivity: Changes when the device shuts down after inactivity.
●Delay when ports are active: Delays these energy settings if any ports are in use.
Fuser Modes
Use this option to specify the fuser temperature mode for all the media types that the device supports. You can
associate a dierent fuser temperature mode with each media type. If your environment experiences variable
humidity conditions, changing the fuser temperature mode can maximize the print quality.
To congure the fuser mode for a media type, select the fuser mode from the drop-down list. For more
information about the appropriate fuser modes for a specic device, see the device documentation.
NOTE: When conguring this option in batch mode, a list of all the media types and fuser modes that are
available on all the supported devices displays. If you specify a media type or fuser mode that a selected device
does not support, the setting is ignored for that device.
FutureSmart Level
Each version of the HP FutureSmart rmware can include multiple levels of functionality. HP Web Jetadmin
displays the range of rmware levels that are available in the HP FutureSmart rmware that is installed on the
device.
Use this option to specify the level of the HP FutureSmart rmware version that the device uses.
NOTE: This conguration option is available for HP FutureSmart 3 or later.
NOTE: For more information about HP FutureSmart, see the HP FutureSmart Solution Web site.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 313
To congure this option, enter the rmware level in the box. If the rmware level is outside of the range of levels
that are available on the device, HP Web Jetadmin automatically changes the rmware level to the nearest
minimum or maximum level that the device supports.
After HP Web Jetadmin applies the rmware level to the device, the device automatically restarts.
High Capacity Output Mode
This option lets you specify which high-capacity output accessory the printer directs output to. Directing output
to various high-capacity output accessories can help reduce how much time you spend going to the printer and
removing output from full bins. This is particularly useful for very large print jobs or busy printers.
To set the high-capacity output mode, select one of the output accessory options.
High Capacity Output Names
Use this option to assign unique names to the printer multibin mailboxes. After you assign a name to a mailbox,
users can direct their output to a specic mailbox. For example, you might want to name mailboxes after
departments or individuals within a department.
NOTE: You can only apply this conguration option to a single device. You cannot use this conguration option
to congure multiple devices at one time or include this conguration option in a template.
To congure this option, type the name in the text box next to the mailbox.
Home Screen Applications - FutureSmart 3
Use this option to specify which applications are displayed on the device control panel for devices that have
FutureSmart 3 or earlier. Specify the order in which the applications are displayed, and move applications into
and out of the Quick Sets folder.
Third-party applications might be included in the list of applications. However, other tools might control whether
these applications are displayed or hidden on the device control panel.
The Quick Sets folder appears in the main list of applications. Only one Quick Sets folder is allowed. Quick Sets
applications can reside in the main list of applications or in the Quick Sets folder. Applications in the Quick Sets
folder are displayed immediately after the folder, and the application names are indented. You can move
applications in the Quick Sets folder up or down in the list or move them out of the folder into the main
application list. However, you can only move Quick Sets applications from the main application list into the Quick
Sets folder.
Each application has a corresponding checkbox that species if the application is displayed or hidden on the
device control panel. The rst row of the table contains a master checkbox that controls the checkboxes for all
the applications. If you select the master checkbox, the checkboxes for all the applications are selected. If you
clear the master checkbox, the checkboxes for all the applications are cleared. Selecting or clearing the checkbox
for an application does not aect the status of the master checkbox. The following describes how the
checkboxes for the Quick Sets folder and the applications in the folder behave:
●If you select the checkbox for the Quick Sets folder, the status of the checkboxes for all the applications in
the folder remains unchanged.
●If you clear the checkbox for the Quick Sets folder, the checkboxes for all the applications in the folder are
also cleared.
314 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●If you select the checkbox for an application in the Quick Sets folder, the checkbox for the Quick Sets folder
is also selected. The Quick Sets folder must be displayed on the device control panel if any of the
applications in the folder are to be displayed.
●If you clear the checkbox for an application in the Quick Sets folder, the status of the checkbox for the Quick
Sets folder remains unchanged.
For batch congurations and templates, the checkboxes initially contain a blue square. When you select a
checkbox with a blue square, the checkbox is cleared. In a batch conguration or template, the Home Screen
Applications conguration option is not valid if all the checkboxes contain a blue square. At least one checkbox
must be cleared or selected.
The applications are displayed on the device control panel in the order in which they appear in the table. You can
move applications up or down relative to one another. You can also move Quick Sets applications into and out of
the Quick Sets folder. The buttons to the right of the table are enabled or disabled depending on which
application you select.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To display all the applications on the device control panel, select the master checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
-or-
To hide all the applications on the device control panel, clear the master checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
2. To display an application on the device control panel, select the corresponding checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
3. To hide an application on the device control panel, clear the corresponding checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
4. To change the order in which the applications are displayed on the device control panel, select an
application in the main application list or in the list of applications in the Quick Sets folder, and then click
one of the following buttons:
●Move to top: Moves the selected application to the rst row in the appropriate list.
●Move up: Moves the selected application up one position in the appropriate list.
●Move down: Moves the selected application down one position in the appropriate list.
●Move to bottom: Moves the selected application to the last row in the appropriate list.
5. To move a Quick Sets application from the main application list into the Quick Sets folder, use the Move up
and Move down buttons to position the application immediately after the Quick Sets folder. Select the
application, and then click the Move in button. The selected application is positioned at the end of the list of
applications in the folder.
6. To move a Quick Sets application from the Quick Sets folder into the main application list, select the
application, and then click the Move out button. The selected application is positioned in the main
application list immediately after the Quick Sets folder.
7. To restore the order of all the applications to the order that they were in when you accessed this
conguration option, click the Reset button.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 315
Home Screen Applications - FutureSmart 4
Use this option to specify which applications are displayed on the device control panel for devices which have at
least FutureSmart 4, devices with older rmware should be congured with the Home Screen Applications (-
FutureSmart 3). With the Home Screen Applications - FutureSmart 4 option, you specify the tree order in which
the applications are displayed, the page on which the applications are displayed, and you can move applications
into and out of the Quick Sets folder. The rst page in HP Web Jetadmin is the default screen on the device. The
second page in HP Web Jetadmin can be seen on the device after scrolling to the next/second page.
Third-party applications might be included in the list of applications.
The Quick Sets folder appears in the main list of applications. Only one Quick Sets folder is allowed. Quick Sets
applications can reside in the main list of applications (basically, the top tree level) or in the Quick Sets folder.
Applications in the Quick Sets folder are displayed immediately after the folder, and the application names are
indented. You can move applications in the Quick Sets folder up or down in the list or move them out of the
folder into the main application list. However, you can only move Quick Sets applications from the main
application list into the Quick Sets folder.
Each application has a corresponding checkbox that species if the application is displayed or hidden on the
device control panel. The rst row of the table contains a master checkbox that controls the checkboxes for all
the applications. If you select the master checkbox, the checkboxes for all the applications are selected. If you
clear the master checkbox, the checkboxes for all the applications are cleared. Selecting or clearing the checkbox
for an application does not aect the status of the master checkbox. The following describes how the
checkboxes for the Quick Sets folder and the applications in the folder behave:
●If you select the checkbox for the Quick Sets folder, the status of the checkboxes for all the applications in
the folder remains unchanged.
●If you clear the checkbox for the Quick Sets folder, the checkboxes for all the applications in the folder are
also cleared.
●If you select the checkbox for an application in the Quick Sets folder, the checkbox for the Quick Sets folder
is also selected. The Quick Sets folder must be displayed on the device control panel if any of the
applications in the folder are to be displayed.
●If you clear the checkbox for an application in the Quick Sets folder, the status of the checkbox for the Quick
Sets folder remains unchanged.
When creating a template in template mode, the checkboxes initially contain a blue square. A blue square means
that the current conguration for this item on a device will not be changed. When you select a checkbox with a
blue square, the checkbox is cleared. In a batch conguration or template, the Home Screen Applications
conguration option is not valid if all the checkboxes contain a blue square. At least one checkbox must be
cleared or selected.
The applications are displayed on the device control panel in the order in which they appear in the table. You can
move applications up or down relative to one another. You can also move Quick Sets applications into and out of
the Quick Sets folder. The buttons to the right of the table are enabled or disabled depending on which
application you select.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To display all the applications on the device control panel, select the master checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
-or-
316 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
To hide all the applications on the device control panel, clear the master checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
2. To display an application on the device control panel, select the corresponding checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
3. To hide an application on the device control panel, clear the corresponding checkbox in the Show/Hide
column.
4. To change the order in which the applications are displayed on the device control panel, select an
application in the main application list or in the list of applications in the Quick Sets folder, right-click and
then click one of the following buttons:
●Move In: Moves the selected application to the appropriate folder. It will list the applicable folders.
●Move Out: Moves the selected application out of the folder (this will move the application to the top
level).
●Move to top: Moves the selected application to the rst row in the appropriate list.
●Move up: Moves the selected application up one position within the current folder.
●Move down: Moves the selected application down one position within the current folder.
●Move to bottom: Moves the selected application to the last row within the current folder.
●New Folder: Use this option to create a new folder.
●Edit Folder: Use this option to rename an existing folder.
●Delete Folder: Use this option to delete a folder.
●Restore All: Cancel/restore all the applications to the order that they were in when you accessed this
conguration option.
5. To change the page number of the application (the scrolling location on the screen), click the drop down
box under the Page Number column. If the page number can’t be assigned, the closest possible page
number will be selected.
Home Screen Language Selection
Use this option to enable or disable the Language Selection button on the device control panel. If you enable the
Language Selection button, users can select a dierent language for the control-panel display during their
session.
For some devices, if you enable the Language Selection button, you can specify up to four alternate languages
for the control-panel display and the default keyboard layout for each alternate language.
For some devices, you can specify the default keyboard layout for all the available languages. You can also
enable or disable the alternate keyboard layout button on the keyboard screens. If you enable the alternate
keyboard layout button, you can specify which keyboard layouts are available.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable the Language Selection button on the control panel, select the Show the language Selection
button checkbox.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 317
NOTE: Depending on the device you are conguring, perform step 2 or step 3. To display a list of devices
that support the settings, hold the cursor over the Home Screen Language Selection title bar above the
settings.
2. To specify the alternate languages and keyboard layouts, perform the following steps:
a. Select the alternate language from the list.
b. Select the default keyboard layout for the language from the corresponding list.
3. To specify the keyboard layouts for all the available languages and any alternate keyboard layouts,
perform the following steps:
a. Select the keyboard layout for each language from the corresponding list.
b. To enable the alternate keyboard layouts, select the Display the alternate keyboard button checkbox.
NOTE: If you select the Display the alternate keyboard button checkbox, you must also select at
least one of the available keyboard layouts.
c. To enable all the available keyboard layouts, select the All Keyboard Layouts checkbox.
-or-
To enable specic keyboard layouts, clear the All Keyboard Layouts checkbox, and then select the
checkbox next to each keyboard layout you want to enable.
Home Screen Wallpaper Customization
Use this option to add or remove a wallpaper to the background.
Click Browse to select the image le.
Click Clear Wallpaper to remove the wallpaper.
●Only image les (.jpeg, .png, .gif, .bmp) can be used as wallpapers.
●The maximum supported size is 800x484 pixels in FutureSmart 4.5.
I/O Timeout to End Print Jobs
This option lets you select the amount of time the device should wait between packets of data on a print job
before canceling that job.
To congure this option, select how long the printer waits from the drop-down list.
Inactivity Timeout
Use this option to specify the number of seconds that the device can remain inactive before automatically
reverting to the Home screen. This timeout setting applies only when a user accesses a screen other than the
Home screen, and then no further action occurs on that screen for the specied number of seconds.
To congure this option, enter the number of seconds in the box. Valid values are from 10 to 300.
318 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Input Auto Continue
This option lets you specify the default action that the printer takes when the specied media size or type is not
available. It also lets you specify how long the printer waits before performing the default action. Specifying a
default action for the printer to take when the specied media size or type is not available allows the printer to
nish printing the current job without user intervention.
To specify the action for the printer if the specied media size or type is not available, select the desired action
from the Input Auto Continue drop-down list.
Input Auto Continue Timeout
This option lets you specify how long the printer waits before performing the default action when the specied
media size or type is not available. Specifying how long the printer should wait before taking the default action
when the specied media size or type is not available allows you time to manually correct the issue.
To specify the action for the printer if the specied media size or type is not available, select how long the printer
waits from the drop-down box.
Instant Lamp On
Enable this option to keep the scanner lamp warm when the scanner is turned on. Disabling this option saves
energy when the scanner is not in use but the scanner lamp turns o after a period of inactivity and will need to
warm up before scanning again.
To congure this option, select:
●Enabled: the scanner lamp remains warm and ready to scan when not in use, but uses more energy.
●Disabled: the scanner lamp saves energy when not in use, and will need to warm up before scanning again.
Invalid Personality Reports
Use this option to determine whether invalid personality reports are enabled or disabled for a product.
To congure this setting, select Enabled or Disabled.
Jam Recovery
This option allows you to select the default device reprint behavior after a paper jam is cleared on a fax receive,
copy, or print job. The settings include:
●Disabled: The device will never reprint a page after clearing a paper jam.
●Enabled: The device will always reprint a page after clearing a paper jam.
●Auto: The device will reprint a page after clearing a paper jam, if the installed memory is greater than 7 MB.
To select the jam recovery behavior, select the desired setting (Disabled, Enabled, or Auto).
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 319
Stored Jobs (Delete Temporary Jobs After)
This option lets you specify how long the printer holds a print job that has not printed before automatically
deleting the print job.
CAUTION: Selecting Never Delete could cause the printer’s hard disk to ll up with print jobs that were held but
never released for printing.
Select the timeout value from the Stored Jobs (Delete Temporary Jobs After) drop-down list.
Stored Jobs (Allow on this device)
This option lets you enable and disable the job retention feature. The Stored Jobs (Allow on this device) feature is
available on some printers that have mass storage capability. This allows you to store print jobs in the ash
memory on a printer. The Stored Jobs (Allow on this device) feature allows you to complete the following tasks:
●Store a print job on the printer. You can then call the print job from the printer control panel as needed. This
feature is useful for storing forms and other commonly shared documents.
●Store secure private copies to hold a print job until a user releases it by entering a personal identication
number. Print one copy of a multiple-copy print job for proong. The user can then release the remaining
copies for printing or cancel them.
CAUTION: If the Stored Jobs (Allow on this device) feature is disabled, the option appears on the printer driver
user interface but does not store the print job on the printer.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable the Stored Jobs (Allow on this device) feature, click Enable.
2. To disable the Stored Jobs (Allow on this device) feature, click Disable. If the Stored Jobs (Allow on this
device) feature is disabled, the option appears on the printer driver user interface but does not store the
print job on the printer.
Stored Jobs (Temporary Storage Limit)
This option lets you specify how many jobs can be stored on the printer hard disk at the same time.
Key Press Sound
Use this option to specify whether or not the printer emits a sound when a key is pressed in its control panel.
To congure this option, select On or O.
Keyboard Layout
Use this feature to set the keyboard layout on your device's control panel to your language.
To use this option, select your language.
320 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Manage Stapler/Stacker
Use this option to specify the default Staple, Job Oset and Hole Punch placement for print jobs.
This setting is only available if a stapler is attached to the device.
Manually Feed Prompt
Use this feature to specify whether Manual Feed Prompt will be displayed always, or only if the tray is not
loaded.
If you select Always (default), the system always generates a prompt before pulling from the multipurpose tray.
If you select Unless loaded, the system generates the prompt only if the multipurpose tray is empty or if it is
congured for a dierent type or size.
Media Administration
This option allows you to enable or disable the media types that the printer uses. You can also dene your own
media types.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable a media type, select the check box next to the media type.
2. To disable a media type, clear the check box next to the media type.
3. To dene a new media type, type the media name in Media Types. Select the check box next to the media
type to activate it.
Online Solutions
The Online Solutions feature provides access to cloud-based solution pages for device events, such as paper
jams. When the Online Solutions feature is enabled on a device, the following options are available for device
events:
●QR codes can be displayed on the device control panel.
●Web links can be displayed in the Event Log in the device HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
When a user scans a QR code with a smartphone or tablet or clicks a web link in the Event Log, the device sends
information to the HP Solution Finding Web Service. The HP Solution Finding Web Service identies the most
relevant, up-to-date information or video available for the device event, and then returns the solution to the
user.
IMPORTANT: The information that the device sends to HP includes the event details, device model, and product
serial number. For more information about HP’s privacy practices, review the HP Online Privacy Statement.
Use this option to enable or disable the Online Solutions feature and congure the settings. You can restrict
access to the Online Solutions feature to only the device administrator.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 321
Enable and congure the Online Solutions feature
1. Select the Enable Online Solutions checkbox.
2. To enable QR codes on the device control panel, select the Show QR code in control panel event details
checkbox. An information (i) icon is displayed on the control panel for an event. When a user presses the
information (i) icon, the QR code for that event is displayed on the control panel.
-or-
To disable QR codes on the device control panel, clear the Show QR code in control panel event details
checkbox.
3. To enable web links for event codes in the Event Log, select the Show links in the EWS Event Log checkbox.
-or-
To disable web links for event codes in the Event Log, clear the Show links in the EWS Event Log checkbox.
4. To allow only users who are signed in as an administrator to see the QR codes and Event Log links, select
the Restrict Online Solutions to Administrator checkbox.
NOTE: This setting does not prevent users who are not signed in as an administrator from viewing the
Event Log. This setting only prevents these users from seeing the web links in the Event Log.
-or-
To allow all users to see the QR codes and Event Log links and view solutions from a smartphone or tablet,
clear the Restrict Online Solutions to Administrator checkbox.
Disable the Online Solutions feature
▲Clear the Enable Online Solutions checkbox.
Optimum Speed/Cost
This option optimizes the performance or cost per page depending on the expected color content of typical print
jobs. You can choose whether print quality is more important or whether speed of the print job is more
important.
To specify the optimum speed or cost per page, select one of the options (Auto, Speed, or Cost Per Page).
Optimum Speed/Energy Usage
Use this option to congure the optimum speed and energy usage for the device. This setting controls the fuser
cooling behavior on the device.
To congure this option, select one of the following options from the list:
322 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●Faster First Page: Power to the fuser is not turned o between jobs. This option has no impact on the rst
page out time.
●Save Energy: Power to the fuser is turned o after the device has been idle for 55 minutes. This option has
a minimal impact on the rst page out time because it aects only the rst print job the device sends after
it has been idle for 55 minutes or longer.
●Save Most Energy: Power to the fuser is turned o after each job. This option has the most impact on the
rst page out time because it aects every print job the device sends, regardless of how long the device
has been idle.
Order Supplies % Level
Use this option to congure the low threshold for supplies.
To set this option, type the desired value in the text box (0-100).
Original Orientation
This option lets you specify the default orientation of the information on the printed page. This is useful if the
people who use the printer typically print with a specic orientation. For example, if the printer is dedicated to
the accounting department and those users typically print spreadsheets with many columns, set the default
orientation to Landscape to show as many columns as possible on one page.
NOTE: The orientation setting that you select when printing a job overrides the setting specied here.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To print across the narrow side of the media, select Portrait.
2. To print across the wide side of the media, select Landscape.
Outgoing Servers
Use this option to congure the SMTP servers that the device uses to send outgoing emails for the following
functions:
NOTE: The functions that are available vary depending on the device.
●Email
●Internet Fax
●Alerts
●AutoSend
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: Some devices do not support all of the following conguration options.
1. If you are conguring multiple devices, select one of the following options in the Overwrite options section:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 323
●Replace/overwrite existing lists: Any existing SMTP servers on the device are replaced with the lists
shown here. Any existing servers that are not dened here are deleted.
●Append to existing lists:
If Overwrite any existing items with the same name is not selected, existing servers on the device are
not changed. Any servers dened here are added to the device, unless a server already exists with the
same name for the same function.
If Overwrite any existing items with the same name is selected, existing servers on the device are not
changed, unless a server is dened here with the same name. Any servers dened here are added to
the device, and if the name matches an existing server for a particular function, its values is changed
to those dened here.
2. To add an SMTP server, perform the following steps:
a. Click the Add button.
b. On the Add Server window, enter the hostname or IP address of the SMTP server in the Server name
or address box. The SMTP server name must be unique.
-or-
To search for the available SMTP servers, click the Find Servers button. On the Find Servers window,
select the SMTP server from the list, and then click the OK button.
NOTE: The Find Servers button is available only if you are conguring a single device.
c. In the Port number box, enter the port number. The default is port 25.
d. From the Split emails if larger than list, select the maximum size for emails. The device splits
multiple-page scanned documents that are larger than this value into multiple emails based on the
page boundaries.
e. To enable SMTP server authentication, select the Server requires authentication checkbox, and then
select one of the following options:
●Use credentials of user after sign in at control panel: The device uses the credentials of the user
who is signed in on the device to access the SMTP server.
●Use credentials dened below: The device uses the specied credentials to access the SMTP
server. Enter the credentials in the User name (maximum of 128 characters) and Password
(maximum of 128 characters) boxes.
The User name text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following
formats:
–Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened
eld)
Example: %%var_UserName%%
–Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: Sales%%var_UserName%%
Example: Sales%%var_UserName%%@MyCompany.com
324 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened
elds in HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
f. To test the SMTP server and credentials, enter an email address in the Send test email to box, and
then click the Test Server button.
NOTE: The Test Server button is available only if you are conguring a single device.
g. In the Server usage section, select the checkboxes for the functions that use this SMTP server.
3. To edit an SMTP server, select the SMTP server from the list, and then click the Edit button. On the Edit
Server window, edit the settings, and then click the OK button.
4. To delete a single SMTP server from all of the functions, select the SMTP server from the list, and then click
the Remove button. On the Conrm Remove window, click the OK button.
5. To delete all of the SMTP servers from all of the functions, click the Remove All button. On the Conrm
Remove window, click the OK button.
6. To change the order of the SMTP servers for a function, select the SMTP server from the list, and then click
the up and down arrows to the right of the function. The device contacts the SMTP servers in the order in
which they are listed.
Output Auto Continue
This option allows you to control the behavior of the device if a print job is submitted which lets you specify a
paper tray and/or paper size which does not match the current device conguration. This allows the printer to
behave in a consistent manner in case of a conict between the print job specication and the printer
conguration.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: The options available are dependent upon the device.
1. Output overow command: Species the default action to take when the output bin is full or when the
stapler is empty.
2. Output auto continue timeout: Species how long before the device should wait before taking the action
specied in the output overow command.
3. Output overow bin: Species what bin should be used if the primary bin is full.
Override A4/Letter
Use this option to print on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the device,
or to print on A4 paper when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded).
To enable this option, select Yes and then click Congure.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 325
OXPd Accessory Records
Use this option to add, delete, and list the OXPd accessory records on the device. Accessory records are either
shared or owned. A shared accessory record describes an accessory that multiple web applications can use and
contains a product ID, vendor ID, and serial number. An owned accessory record describes an accessory that only
a single web application can use and contains the same elds as a shared accessory record as well as a callback
URI, server context ID, optional network credential, connection timeout, and response timeout.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. If you are conguring this option for multiple devices at the same time, select one of the following
overwrite options:
●Replace/overwrite existing OXPd accessory record
●Append to existing OXPd accessory record
●Remove OXPd accessory record
2. To add OXPd accessory records to the device, click Add. The Add OXPd Accessory Record dialog is displayed
listing all of the OXPd accessory records in the OXPd Accessory Record Repository. Highlight the OXPd
accessory records you want to add, and then click OK.
To manage the list of OXPd accessory records, click Edit. The OXPd Accessory Record Repository dialog is
displayed. You can import, delete, and edit OXPd accessory records.
3. To delete OXPd accessory records from the device, highlight the OXPd accessory records, and then click
Remove. The OXPd accessory records are deleted from the list of OXPd accessory records on the device.
NOTE: When you delete OXPd accessory records from the device, the OXPd accessory records remain in
the HP Web Jetadmin OXPd Accessory Record Repository. To import, delete, and view OXPd accessory
records, go to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Accessory Records.
NOTE: Server context ID, URI, User name, Vendor ID, and Product ID are custom variable data elds that
support data in the following formats.
●Actual value to be congured
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
For more information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
OXPd Authentication Agents
OXPd authentication agent les contain the information that OXPd-enabled devices require to contact OXPd
authentication servers and authenticate users who sign in on the device. For more information about OXPd
authentication agents, see Manage the OXPd Authentication Agent Repository on page 70.
Use this option to manage the OXPd authentication agents that are stored on the device.
Add OXPd authentication agents on the device
1. If you are conguring multiple devices, select one of the following options:
326 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●Replace/overwrite existing OXPd authentication agents: Replaces the existing OXPd authentication
agents on the devices with the OXPd authentication agents on this list.
●Append to existing OXPd authentication agents: Adds the OXPd authentication agents on this list to
the existing OXPd authentication agents on the devices.
2. Click the Add button. The Add OXPd Authentication Agent Record window opens with a list of the OXPd
authentication agents that are in the repository.
3. To manage the OXPd authentication agents, click the Edit button. The Options window opens with the OXPd
Authentication Agents Repository option selected. You can import, edit, and delete the OXPd authentication
agents in the repository.
4. Select the OXPd authentication agents, and then click the OK button.
Delete OXPd authentication agents from the device
1. If you are conguring multiple devices, select the Remove OXPd authentication agents option.
2. Select the OXPd authentication agents, and then click the Remove button.
NOTE: Server context ID, URI, and User name are custom variable data elds that support data in the following
formats.
●Actual value to be congured
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
For more information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration
OXPd authorization proxy les contain the information that OXPd-enabled devices require to access OXPd
authorization agents from third-party solutions. For more information about OXPd authorization proxies, see
Manage the OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration Repository on page 72.
Use this option to manage the OXPd authorization proxy that is stored on the device.
Add or replace an OXPd authorization proxy on the device
1. Select the Add/replace OXPd authorization proxy conguration option.
2. To add an OXPd authorization proxy, click the Add button.
-or-
To replace the existing OXPd authorization proxy, click the Replace button.
The Add OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration window opens with a list of the OXPd authorization proxy
les that are in the repository.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 327
3. To manage the OXPd authorization proxy les in the repository, click the Edit button. The Options window
opens with the OXPd Authorization Proxy Conguration Repository option selected. You can import, edit,
and delete the OXPd authorization proxy les in the repository.
4. Select the OXPd authorization proxy le, and then click the OK button.
Delete an OXPd authorization proxy from the device
▲Select the Remove OXPd authorization proxy conguration option.
OXPd Device Functions
Use this option to add, delete, and list the OXPd device functions for a third-party device. An OXPd device
function denition consists of a title list, description list, icon list, guide, requested button position, and browser
target. The browser target consists of a URI, optional credentials, and optional initial post query form.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. If you are conguring this option for multiple devices at the same time, select one of the following
overwrite options:
●Replace/overwrite existing OXPd device functions
●Append to existing OXPd device functions
●Remove OXPd device functions
2. To add OXPd device functions to the device, click Add. The Add OXPd Device Functions dialog is displayed.
Select the OXPd device functions you want to add, and then click OK.
To manage the list of OXPd device functions, click Edit. The OXPd Device Function Repository dialog is
displayed. You can import, edit, and delete OXPd device functions.
3. To delete OXPd device functions from the device, highlight the OXPd device functions, and then click
Remove. The OXPd device functions are deleted from the list of OXPd device functions on the device.
NOTE: When you delete OXPd device functions from the device, the OXPd device functions remain in the
HP Web Jetadmin OXPd Device Function Repository. To import, delete, and view OXPd device functions, go
to Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > OXPd Device Functions.
NOTE: Server context ID, URI, and User name are custom variable data elds that support data in the
following formats.
●Actual value to be congured
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
For more information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
OXPd Enabled
Use this option to enable OXPd.
328 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
To set this option, select Enabled or Disabled.
OXPd OPS Cong Settings
Some devices have a limited amount of internal storage. For these devices, you can store OXPd services data on
an external OXPd Pro Server (OPS) instead of the device's internal storage. The OXPd-enabled rmware in the
device does not store OXPd services data. Before you can perform any OXPd services operations on the device,
you must use this option to congure the OXPd Pro Server.
To congure the OPS information on the device, perform the following steps. After these steps are complete, the
device rmware stores the OXPd services data on the OXPd Pro Server.
NOTE: The CA certicate for the OXPd Pro Server must be imported to the device before you can congure the
OPS information on the device.
1. In the URI box, enter the URL for the OXPd Pro Server.
2. Select the Use credentials checkbox.
3. In the Username box, enter the user name that is required to access the OXPd Pro Server.
4. In the Password box, enter the password that is required to access the OXPd Pro Server.
5. In the Conrm Password box, enter the password again.
To remove the OPS information from the device, perform the following steps:
1. Select the Use Credentials checkbox.
2. Select the Remove checkbox.
3. In the Password box, enter the password that is required to access the OXPd Pro Server.
4. In the Conrm Password box, enter the password again.
OXPd Quota Agents
A quota solution, such as Pcounter for HP, is installed on a server and used to specify the amount of various
device resources that each user is allowed to use. These device resources include the number of sheets of paper
printed, the amount of toner used, and so on. The following are examples of how quotas can be dened:
●Quotas can be based on time. The quota balance can be automatically reset on a recurring basis, such as
each week or once a month.
●Quotas can be based on a credit or debit amount. Users can pay into their quota account by using a
payment product, such as a web-based pay-for-print application or a debit/credit card machine attached to
the device.
An OXPd quota agent record contains the information that devices require to access the server where the quota
solution is installed. An OXPd quota agent record can also dene web resources that are displayed when users
initiate a job on the device, such as a request for credentials, and when a quota limit is reached, such as a
warning message.
Use this option to manage the OXPd quota agent records that are stored on the device.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 329
Add OXPd quota agent records on the device
1. Click the Add button. The Add OXPd Quota Agent Record window opens with a list of the OXPd quota agent
records that are available in the repository.
TIP: To manage the list of OXPd quota agent records, click the Edit button. The Options window opens
with the OXPd Quota Agents option selected. For more information, see Manage the OXPd Quota Record
Repository on page 76.
2. Select the OXPd quota agent records from the list, and then click the OK button.
Delete OXPd quota agent records from the device
▲Select the OXPd quota agent records from the list, and then click the Remove button.
OXPd Statistics Agents
Devices collect statistics about each job that they process. The job statistics include the device ID, job ID, user
who initiated the job, and details about the job.
A statistics agent is a server-based solution that receives job statistics from devices. When a job is completed,
the device sends the job statistics to the statistics agent. The statistics agent sends an acknowledgement to the
device when the job statistics are received.
An OXPd statistics agent record denes the information that devices require to send job statistics to the server
where the statistics agent is installed. An OXPd statistics agent record also denes when the device sends job
statistics to the OXPd statistics agent server and whether the device automatically deletes the oldest job
statistics when the storage media on the device is full. The OXPd statistics agent record must be registered on
every device that sends job statistics to the specied OXPd statistics agent server.
Use this option to manage the OXPd statistics agent records that are stored on the device.
Add OXPd statistics agent records on the device
1. If you are conguring multiple devices, select one of the following options in the Overwrite options section:
●Replace/overwrite existing OXPd statistics agents—Replaces the existing OXPd statistics agent
records on the devices with the OXPd statistics agent records on this list.
●Append to existing OXPd statistics agents—Adds the OXPd statistics agent records on this list to the
existing OXPd statistics agent records on the devices.
2. Click the Add button. The Add OXPd Statistics Agent Record window opens with a list of the OXPd statistics
agent records that are in the repository.
TIP: To manage the list of OXPd statistics agent records, click the Edit button. The Options window opens
with the OXPd Statistics Agents option selected. For more information, see Manage the OXPd Statistics
Agents Repository on page 74.
3. Select the OXPd statistics agent records from the list, and then click the OK button.
Remove OXPd statistics agent records from the device
1. If you are conguring multiple devices, select the Remove OXPd statistics agents option.
2. Select the OXPd Statistics agent records from the list, and then click the Remove button.
330 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Paper Tray Assignments
This option lets you assign media sizes and types to input trays. You can also see how much media is in each
tray.
To congure this option, select the media size from the Size drop-down box for the default and for each tray.
PCL Form Length
Use this option to set the PCL form length on the device. You can specify 5 to 128 lines of text per page.
The device uses the PCL form length to set the spacing between lines. When the paper size is changed, the
device automatically recalculates the form length based on the Vertical Motion Index (VMI).
PJL Conguration
This option lets you congure the ability to print PJL les. You can also add them to a conguration template or
schedule them to print at a dierent time.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the desired le from the displayed list.
2. To add a new le to the list, click New. The PJL Repository conguration page is displayed showing current
les in the repository.
NOTE: This page is also accessible from Tools > Options > Device Management > Conguration > PJL
Repository. For more information about the PJL Repository conguration option, see Manage the PJL
Repository on page 69.
Power On Calibration
Use this option to help determine when a power on calibration occurs. Applications can use this object to control
when calibrations are performed.
●On: Calibration occurs immediately following boot.
●O: Calibration never occurs.
●Delayed: Calibration never occurs; for the delay interval. Setting this option to Delayed controls when a
calibration occurs in relation to a power on event.
To congure this setting, select O, On, or Delayed.
Print PDF Errors
You can choose to have a PDF error page print, which shows the error encountered and the stack at the time of
the error. This is useful for debugging.
To congure this option, select On to print an error page or O to not print an error page.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 331
Print PS Errors
You can choose to have a PostScript error page print, which shows the error encountered and the stack at the
time of the error. This is useful for debugging.
To congure this option, select On to print an error page or O to not print an error page.
Printer Wakeup
Use this option to send a notication to the device that takes the device out of Sleep mode. When you enable this
option and click Apply, the notication is sent immediately.
PS Defer Media
If the device uses non-HP PostScript drivers instead of HP drivers to print jobs, use this option to enable or
disable the HP paper-handling model. Non-HP PostScript drivers do not recognize all the tray congurations and
either print from a non-specied tray or do not print at all. The HP paper-handling model always prints jobs.
If the Enabled option is selected, non-HP PostScript drivers use the HP tray-selection method. This is the default.
If the Disabled option is selected, non-HP PostScript drivers use the non-HP PostScript tray-selection method.
Quick Sets
Quick Sets are shortcut jobs with predened settings that help users complete their jobs quickly and reliably.
Users can access Quick Sets on the device control panel from the Home screen or the Quick Sets application.
Use this option to create Quick Sets for Copy, Email, Fax, Save to Network/FTP Folder, Save to USB, and Save to
SharePoint® jobs. Quick Sets are saved as unique jobs and do not impact the defaults that are set for the device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. If you are conguring multiple devices or creating a device conguration template, select one of the
following options:
●Replace/overwrite existing lists: Replaces any existing Quick Sets on the device with the Quick Sets
that are dened here. Any existing Quick Sets on the device that are not dened here are deleted.
●Append to existing lists: Adds the Quick Sets that are dened here to the Quick Sets on the device. A
Quick Set is added to the device only if a Quick Set that has the same name and type does not already
exist on the device.
–If the Overwrite any existing items with the same name checkbox is selected, an existing Quick
Set on the device that has the same name and type as a Quick Set that is dened here is
overwritten with the settings that are dened here.
–If the Overwrite any existing items with the same name checkbox is not selected, an existing
Quick Set on the device that has the same name and type as a Quick Set that is dened here is
not changed.
2. To add a Quick Set, click the Add button. The Add Quick Set wizard starts.
a. On the Specify Quick Set type page, select the type of Quick Set to create, and then click the Next
button. The types of Quick Sets that are available vary depending on the device.
332 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
NOTE: You can create a Quick Set if the base application, such as Email or Save to Network/FTP
Folder, is disabled. However, the Quick Set will not work or appear on the device control panel until
the base application is enabled.
b. On the Specify Quick Set options page, specify the following settings, and then click the Next button:
●Quick Set title: Enter a name for the Quick Set. The name can be a maximum of 30 characters
and can include any Unicode characters.
●Button location: Select the location where the button for the Quick Set appears.
●Quick Set description: Enter a description of the Quick Set. The description can be a maximum of
90 characters and can include any Unicode characters.
●Quick Set start option: Select the option that species how the user starts the Quick Set job.
●Original sides prompt: Select the option that species whether the Quick Set job uses the setting
for original sides that is dened in the application or the user is prompted to specify whether the
originals are one-sided or two-sided.
c. On the Specify Settings page, specify the appropriate settings for the Quick Set, and then click the
Next button. The settings on the page vary depending on the device and Quick Set type.
●Copy: Specify the settings for the copy job.
●Email: Specify the email settings and specify whether users can edit each eld on the device
control panel. If any of the settings require that users sign in, go to the Security tab in the
HP Embedded Web server (EWS) on the device, and then congure the base application to
require signing in.
To specify multiple email addresses for any of the elds, separate each address with a
semicolon (;) or a comma (,).
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
–Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened
eld)
Example: %%var_EmailName%%
–Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: Sales.%%var_EmailName%%
Example: Sales.%%var_EmailName%%@MyCompany
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened
elds in HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
●Fax: Enter one or more fax numbers for the recipients of the fax job. If no fax recipients are
specied, the user must enter the fax number on the device control panel.
●Save to Network/FTP Folder: In the Network folder type section, enter the path to the folder
where the job is saved. The path for a standard shared folder is a simple UNC path without any
variables. The path for a personal shared folder, such as the user's Home folder, is dened in
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 333
Microsoft Active Directory. To save a le to a user's personal shared folder, the user must sign in
at the device and the device must be able to retrieve the information for the user’s Home folder.
In the Folder Access Settings section, select the option that species the type of read and write
access that must be dened for the folder where the job is stored. To verify the folder access
before the job starts, select the Verify folder access prior to job start checkbox.
●Save To USB: Specify the default location where the job is saved on a USB ash drive that is
inserted into the easy-access USB port on the device. Files can be saved at the root directory or
in a specied folder on the USB ash drive.
The folder path can be a maximum of 1,024 characters. Use a forward slash (/) to separate
folder and subfolder names.
●Save to SharePoint®: Specify the path of the SharePoint site where the job is saved. To verify the
access credentials for the SharePoint before the job starts, select the Verify folder access prior
to job start checkbox.
The path for a standard SharePoint site is a simple path without any variables. The path for a
personal SharePoint site, such as a user's Home SharePoint site, is dened in Microsoft Active
Directory. To save a le to a personal SharePoint site, the user must sign in at the device and the
device must be able to retrieve the information for the user’s Home SharePoint site.
The SharePoint Path text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following
formats:
–Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened
eld)
Example: %%var_SharePointSite%%
–Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: https://%%var_SharePointSite%%
Example: https://%%var_SharePointSite%%Sales
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened
elds in HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
d. On the Specify Quick Set job settings page, specify the default scan and le settings that are used for
this Quick Set job, and then click the Next button. The settings that are available on this page vary
depending on the device and Quick Set type.
e. On the Conrm page, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Finish button.
3. To edit a Quick Set, select the Quick Set from the list, and then click the Edit button. The Edit Quick Set
wizard starts. The pages in the wizard vary depending on the Quick Set type. The settings on the pages are
the same as the settings that are described for the Add Quick Set wizard in step 2.
4. To copy the settings of an existing Quick Set to a new Quick Set, select the Quick Set from the list, and then
click the Copy button. The Edit Quick Set wizard starts. Enter a name for the new Quick Set, and then
change the settings as required. The settings on the pages are the same as the settings that are described
for the Add Quick Set wizard in step 2.
334 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
5. To delete a Quick Set, select the Quick Set from the list, and then click the Remove button. On the Conrm
Remove window, click the OK button.
6. To change Quick Set order, select the Quick Set from the list, and then click the Move Up or Move Down
buttons.
Quiet Mode
This option provides a quieter printing experience by slowing the printer down for oce printing or increasing the
speed to the full speed for large jobs. You can select the value as On, O, Auto Transition. Auto Transition allows
you to set a predetermined job size of 10 to 999 pages, and print jobs will print in the Quiet Mode for all print
jobs up to the user's predetermined page size. Jobs that have pages above the predetermined size will print at
the full speed.
To congure Quiet Mode, select On. If desired, specify the job size (10–999) in Auto Transition.
Replace Supplies
Use this option to specify the behavior of the device when a supply becomes low or is out.
NOTE: The Override at Out option is available only from the device control panel. If this option is selected, the
device continues to print when the supply is out. HP Web Jetadmin displays this option only if it is selected on the
device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: The following options are not available for all devices.
1. To stop printing when a supply becomes low, select the Stop at Low option.
2. To stop printing when a supply is out, select the Stop at Very Low option.
3. To allow the device to continue printing when a supply is out, select the Stop At Maxlife option. This option
is available only for monochrome devices.
4. To stop printing and display a prompt when a supply is out, select the Prompt to Continue option.
5. To stop printing when a specic threshold is reached, select the Stop after Very Low by option, and then
enter the number of pages that the device prints before stopping in the box.
Resolution
This option lets you select the default resolution for print jobs that do not specify a resolution. This allows the
printer to behave in a consistent manner for print jobs which do not specify a resolution.
To congure this option, select the desired default resolution.
Resolution Enhancement
REt (Resolution Enhancement Technology) is a process that you can turn on and o. Turning on REt will sharpen
the resolution but slow down printing. If the resolution selected is 1200 dpi, then REt will not be used regardless
of this setting. This setting is not in eect when the resolution used is 1200 dpi.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 335
Select whether to turn REt on or o.
Restore Modes
Use this option to restore all fuser modes to their default or factory settings.
To restore all fuser modes to their default or factory settings, select Restore Modes.
Rotate Oset
Use this to enable or disable Rotate Oset, which allows you to print multiple copies of a job in alternate
orientations.
To set this option, select Enable or Disable.
Show Date and Time
Use this option to enable the printer to hide or display the date and time on the device control panel.
To show or hide the date and time, select Hide or Display.
Show Network Address
Use this option to enable the printer to display the IP Address or the Network Address button on its control panel
(which button is displayed depends on the device). Enabling this feature makes it easier to see the device’s IP
address.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To make the printer show the Network address button in the initial page of its control panel, select Display.
2. To make the printer hide its Network address button, select Hide.
Show Stop Button
Use this option to enable or disable the Show Stop Button in the control panel.
To enable the Show Stop Button, select the Enabled option.
-or-
To disable the Show Stop Button, select the Disabled option.
Click the Apply button.
Show Welcome Message
Use this option to specify a welcome message that is displayed on the device control panel. Users must read the
welcome message, and then touch the OK button to continue.
336 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use the following steps to congure the welcome message:
1. Select the Show Welcome Message checkbox.
2. In the Title box, enter a title that displays in the banner of the welcome message (maximum of 40
characters).
3. In the Text box, enter the text for the welcome message (maximum of 1,500 characters).
4. From the Border Color list, select the color that is used for the border of the welcome message.
Size/Type Prompt
This option lets you specify what the control panel displays when a paper tray is opened and closed. Congure it
to display or not display the message To change size or type press check on the control panel. In either case,
HP Web Jetadmin displays a Tray empty message on the device’s Status page.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To turn on the display message, select Display.
2. To turn o the display message, select Do Not Display.
Sleep/Wake Time
This option species the time of day that you want the printer to automatically start waking (or warming) up and
also sleeping.
You can save energy when the device is not in use for the time specied in Sleep delay. After Sleep delay is
applied, Sleep mode is automatically enabled. It might take some time for the device to return to a Ready state
once it is in Sleep mode. Wake time can only be set if the Sleep delay time is set.
Setting a Wake time is useful to ensure the device is ready at a certain time and not in Sleep mode. For example,
to make sure the device is ready at 7:45, set the Wake time for 7:30, then set a Sleep delay of 30 minutes or
longer so people have time to use the device before it re-enters Sleep Mode. Wake time can only be set if the
Sleep delay time is enabled.
Some devices also support Sleep time. Use Sleep time to ensure the device enters Power save mode at the
specied time, such as the end of the work day. Sleep time can only be set if you have enabled Sleep delay.
NOTE: Make sure you coordinate the Wake time with both Sleep delay and Sleep time.
To set this conguration option, select the desired settings from the lists displayed.
Sleep Delay (Minutes)
Use this option to specify the number of minutes the device must be idle before it automatically enters Sleep
Mode. This option is useful for reducing the average power consumption when the device is not used often.
To congure this option, enter the number of minutes to delay in the text box.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 337
Sleep Delay Time
This option, also referred to as Power Save, lets you specify how long the printer can be idle before
automatically powering o. Sleep Delay mode reduces the printer average power consumption after it has been
idle for a specic length of time. This is useful if the printer is not used often.
NOTE: If the printer has an MFP (scanner unit) installed, such as the HP Color LaserJet 8500 or the HP Color
LaserJet 8550, the Power Save Timeout setting specied on the printer control panel might override the setting
specied on this page.
To set the Sleep Delay, select the timeout value from the drop-down list.
Sleep Mode
Use this option to specify how the printer goes into sleep mode, and then how it warms up again.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To disable Sleep mode, select O. Disabling Sleep mode is not recommended, since energy saving
procedures will no longer be running.
2. To set Sleep mode, select the desired value from the Sleep mode drop-down list.
3. To set Sleep delay, select the desired value from the Sleep delay drop-down list.
Setting a Sleep delay is the most common set to put the printer into sleep mode, after a specic amount of
idle time.
4. To set the Sleep schedule, it must rst be selected from the Sleep mode drop-down list. Then select the
corresponding checkbox for the Wake time and Sleep time for each Weekday. Select the corresponding
time from the available elds.
Setting a Sleep schedule is useful for ensuring that HP Web Jetadmin is Ready at a certain time and not in
Sleep mode.
For example, to make sure HP Web Jetadmin is Ready at 7:45, set the Wake time for 7:30 and then set a
Sleep delay of 30 minutes or longer so people have time to use the product before it re-enters Sleep
mode.
5. To set the Maximize energy savings, select it from the Sleep mode drop-down list.
Selecting Maximize energy savings will let the printer itself determine which are the best sleep options to
be set.
6. To set the Custom energy savings, select it from the Sleep mode drop-down list. To use Custom energy
savings, select Custom energy savings and then select the desired values for Sleep delay. Select Enable for
Wake time and Sleep time for each Weekday. Then select the corresponding time from the available elds.
If multiple and concurrent sets are made, the Custom energy savings option will be automatically selected.
If awakened during a set Sleep schedule, the device will return to Sleep after the Sleep Delay setting or 15
minutes of inactivity occurs, whichever is less time.
Sleep Schedule
Use this option to specify the time of day you want the device to automatically wake up (or warm up) and enter
sleep mode. The wake up time ensures that the device is ready at a specic time each day. The sleep time
ensures that the device enters its energy-saving sleep mode when it is not in use, such as in the evenings or on
338 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
the weekend. You can specify a dierent sleep schedule for each day of the week. You can also add, edit, and
delete sleep schedules for holidays.
To create a weekly sleep schedule, select the checkbox next to the Wake Time and Sleep Time elds for each day
you want to schedule, and then enter the appropriate times.
To create a holiday sleep schedule, perform the following steps:
1. Click Add. The Holiday Schedule - Add dialog is displayed.
2. Type the name of the holiday in the Event eld.
3. Enter the date and time you want the device to enter sleep mode in the Start eld.
4. Enter the date and time you want the device to wake up in the End eld.
5. Click OK.
To edit a holiday sleep schedule, select the schedule from the Holiday Schedule list, and then click Edit. Change
the settings, and then click OK.
To delete a holiday sleep schedule, select the schedule from the Holiday Schedule list, and then click Remove.
Sleep Timer Settings
Use this option to congure the Sleep Mode/Auto O feature on the device. When this feature is enabled, the
device automatically enters Sleep mode or Auto O mode after a specied period of inactivity and then wakes up
when the specied events occur.
CAUTION: Conguring the Sleep Timer Settings conguration option for some devices might cause those
devices to enter a deep sleep mode. USB-based solutions that are connected to these devices might be disabled.
HP Web Jetadmin does not display a message or provide any indication that the USB-based solutions will be
disabled.
To enable the Sleep Mode/Auto O feature, perform the following steps:
1. Select the Enable Sleep Mode/Auto O Timer checkbox.
2. Enter the number of minutes the device waits with no activity before entering Sleep mode in the Sleep
Mode/Auto o after eld. Valid values are 1 through 120.
3. To specify which events wake up the device, select one of the following options:
●All events: The device wakes up when any event occurs.
●Network port: The device wakes up only when a network port event occurs.
●Power button only: The device wakes up only when the power button on the device is pressed.
To disable the Sleep Mode/Auto O feature, clear the Enable Sleep Mode/Auto O Timer checkbox.
Stacker Staple Setting
Use this option to specify the number of staples put on each print job. The stacker staple setting specied in
HP Web Jetadmin overrides the setting specied through the printer control panel.
To congure this option, select No Stapling or One Staple.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 339
Stand by Fuser Mode
Use this option to set the temperature for a Fuser Mode when it is in standby mode. Turning this o means using
less energy but warm up time for a print job will take longer.
To set this option, select the temperature from the drop-down box.
Stapler Oset Mode
If an HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker accessory is installed on the device, use this option to specify whether each print
job is oset in the output bin. Osetting the print jobs makes it easier to separate multiple print jobs.
To disable this option, select the O option.
To enable this option, select the On option.
Staples Out Override
Use this option to specify the default action that the printer takes when the output bin is full or when the stapler
runs out of staples.
To congure this option, select Stop or Continue.
1. To send the rest of a job to a dierent output bin, from Output Overow Command, select Overow Job.
2. Select how long the printer waits from Output auto continue timeout.
3. Select the output bin from Output Overow Bin.
4. To continue printing a job without stapling, select Staples Out Override.
5. Select how long the printer waits from the drop-down list labeled Output auto continue timeout.
Status Page Language
This option lets you specify the device personality (PCL, PostScript, Text, or HP-GL2) that the HP Jetdirect print
server uses when it sends a status page to the device. You might need to change the status page language to
accommodate a particular printing device. For example, a PostScript printer might not be able to understand the
default PCL print page that an HP Jetdirect print server sends.
NOTE: This option only aects the test page output language, not the spooled print job language.
To set the status page language, select one of the status page language options.
Stored Jobs (Sort/List Order)
Use this option to specify the sort order of the stored print jobs on the device. You can sort stored print jobs by
the date or the job name.
340 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Supplies Status Messages on Control Panel
This option lets you control whether or not supplies-related status messages will be displayed on the control
panel.
To display status messages on the device’s control panel, select Show. To suppress status messages, select Do
Not Show.
Suppress Blank Pages
This option lets you specify how the printer responds when a job with blank pages is printed. Allowing the printer
to suppress printing blank pages can save you time, toner, and paper.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To allow printing blank pages in a print job, select No.
2. To suppress printing blank pages in a print job, select Yes.
System Setup
This option lets you congure several settings. See the steps below for more information.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Clearable Warnings: Control how the device tracks clearable warnings. If On is selected, a warning is
displayed until GO is pressed. If Job is selected, a warning is displayed until the end of the job in which it
was generated.
2. Show IP Address: Lets you specify whether the device IP address should be displayed along with the Ready
Message.
3. Tray Behavior:
●Use Requested Tray: Indicates if the device will automatically try to load media from the next input
media tray in the auto-select sequence (dened by each device) when it cannot load media from the
current tray.
●Manual feed prompt: Lets you specify whether Manual Feed Prompt will be displayed always, or only
if the tray is not loaded.
●Size/Type prompt: Lets you specify what the control panel displays when a paper tray is opened and
closed. Congure it to display or not display the message To change size or type press check on the
control panel. In either case, HP Web Jetadmin displays a Tray empty message on the Device Status
page.
●Use another tray: When set to Enabled, this gives the user the ability to select another tray from
which paper could be provided for the job. When set to Disabled, the user is forced to provide paper
through the same tray, after the paper mount message is posted.
4. Duplex Blank Pages: Enables or disables smart duplexing.
System Setup Ram Disk
Use this option to turn o RAM Disk functionality or to set it to automatic. If Auto, a RAM disk is created whose
size is determined by the printer as a percentage of the amount of installed memory.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 341
To congure this option, select O or Auto.
Time Zone
Use this option to specify the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) by selecting the time zone the device is in and specify
whether the clock for the device is automatically adjusted for daylight saving time (DST).
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the time zone for the device from the list.
2. To enable daylight saving time, select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes checkbox.
NOTE: Some time zones do not support daylight saving time. For these time zones, if the Automatically
adjust clock for daylight saving changes checkbox is selected, the Automatically Adjust for DST column in
the device lists always displays No.
-or-
To disable daylight saving time, clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes checkbox.
Time Zone/Daylight Saving
Use this option to specify the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) by indicating which time zone the device is located in
and whether the clock on the device is automatically adjusted for daylight saving time. You can also use this
option to set the real time clock to the local time on the device. The device uses the real time clock to adjust the
weekly timer mode, wake up at a particular time, enable time stamps on email alerts, and record internal event
times. This feature provides the maximum exibility for time conguration and management. When used with
the local time on the device, the Time zone settings and Daylight saving settings options help indicate the GMT
time. You can also use this option to specify the date range for daylight saving time, which should match the
daylight saving time schedule for the location of the device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the time zone for the device from the Time zone drop-down list.
2. To enable the daylight saving setting, select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving time (DST)
checkbox.
3. To specify the start date and end date for daylight saving time, perform the following steps:
a. Select the appropriate values from the Occurrence, Week Day, Month, and Hour drop-down lists.
b. Enter the number of minutes for the daylight saving time oset in the DST oset text box.
4. To use the default start date and end date for daylight saving time, click Use Defaults.
Tray 1 Mode / Manual Feed
This option lets you specify:
●Cassette (Manual Feed Disabled): Let the device prioritize by paper size rst.
●First (Manual Feed Enabled): Means that the device will always try to use paper from that tray regardless of
the media type or size specied.
342 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Select the desired option: Cassette (Manual Feed Disabled) or First (Manual Feed Enabled).
Tray Administration
This option lets you assign media sizes and types to input trays.
NOTE: The drop-down list of media types contains all of the media types that are enabled on the Media
Administration page.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To set the media size and type, select the media size from the Size drop-down list next to the tray.
2. Select the media type from the Type drop-down list next to the tray.
Tray Setup Media Type
This option lets you select the default paper type to be selected for each tray. The device is capable of using
various fuser temperatures for the printing process that are suitable for dierent types of paper.
To congure this option, choose the desired paper type for each tray from the drop-down list box for that tray.
The available options are:
●Light (Less than 60 g/m2), for Transparencies and Thin Paper.
●Midweight (60 - 128 g/m2), for Plain Paper, Plain Envelope, and Postcard.
●Heavy (128 - 225 g/m2), for Bond Paper, Labels, Rough Paper, and Cardstock.
●Extra Heavy (More than 225 g/m2).
Use Another Tray
Use this feature to set the device to use another tray if necessary.
NOTE: This setting may aect the conguration items in the Digital Sending, Fax, and Security categories. It is
not recommended to set this option with other conguration items under those categories.
If you select Enabled (default), the printer prompts users to use another tray when the selected tray is
unavailable.
If you select Disabled, the printer does not prompt the user.
Use Requested Tray
Use this feature to specify how the device handles jobs with a specic input tray.
To have the device use another tray when necessary, select Enabled.
To not direct the device to use another tray when necessary, select Disabled. You will then need to provide paper
through the same tray.
Select Exclusively (default) to ensure that the printer will not automatically select another tray when you indicate
that a specic tray should be used.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Device 343
Select First to allow the printer to pull from a second tray if the specied tray is empty or contains a dierent
media type or size.
Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending
Conguration options for Digital Sending devices dene functions for the device including setup and default
settings.
Activity Log
This option lets you view the logs for the digital send device. The logs contain digital sending job information and
error events associated with the device. You can use this information to check the status of digital send jobs for
the device. If there are any errors associated with the jobs, you can also view the specic error messages to
begin troubleshooting any issues.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To save the activity log, select Save log.
NOTE: The log is saved when the settings for the digital send device are applied.
2. To clear the activity log, select Clear log.
Address Book Management
Use this option to import a predened list of email addresses (500 maximum) from a comma separated value
(CSV) le directly into the internal address book of the digital send device. The address book can store up to
2,000 addresses. Once an address le is imported to the digital send device, the addresses can be searched by
alias. The alias can be a name or an email address. To ensure that searches are consistent in the digital send
device address book, use the same format for all aliases. For example, type the rst name and then the last
name.
NOTE: The CSV le must have a header, which is always the rst line of that le. If the CSV le does not have a
header, the rst line of addresses will be considered a header and that address will be lost.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: A digital send device can store up to 2000 entries, but only up to 500 entries can be loaded at a time.
NOTE: The CSV le must have a pair of entries for each new address, where the rst entry is the name of the
person and the second entry is a valid email address. The CSV le also must have a header entry "name,
emailaddress". Following is a sample of a CSV le:
name, emailaddress
taylor duggan, taylor.duggan@hp.com
kelly jacobson, kelly.jacobson@hp.com
1. To import an address le, select Import address book. Click File to browse to locate the CSV le using a
dialog window.
2. To clear the address book on the digital send device, select Clear device address book.
344 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Administrator Information
This option lets you specify the contact information for the administrator of the digital send device. In case of a
problem with this device, this administrator should be contacted.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Type the name of the person responsible for maintaining the digital sending features of this device in
Name.
2. Type the email address of the person responsible for maintaining the digital sending features of this device
in Email address.
3. Type the phone number of the person responsible for maintaining the digital sending features of this
device in Phone number (optional).
4. Type the physical location of the person responsible for maintaining the digital sending features of this
device in Location (optional).
Advanced Search Options
This option lets you specify the settings the digital send device uses to search the LDAP database for email
addresses. LDAP servers with large email address databases can take a long time for the digital send device to
search. Specify the most ecient search method for the device to ensure the fastest possible search results.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the maximum number of addresses returned from an LDAP search from Maximum LDAP addresses.
NOTE: Smaller values typically result in faster search times, but may not provide the user with all possible
matching addresses.
2. Select the maximum amount of time that the digital send device waits for the LDAP search to complete
from Maximum search time.
NOTE: Smaller values typically result in faster search times, but may not provide the user with all possible
matching addresses.
3. Optional: If the LDAP server supports additional search parameters, type a parameter into LDAP lter
condition. This parameter must be in the form of a valid LDAP lter.
4. Select how thoroughly the search is performed from the Find entries in the database.
●Select fast mode to search for only entries that begin with the search string. This option is faster, but
may not return all matching entries.
●Select verbose mode to search for any entries that contain the search string. This option is more
thorough, but may take longer to complete.
5. If email entries in the LDAP database are alphabetized, select Enabled or Disabled from the Entries in
database are alphabetized drop-down list. The digital send device searches the LDAP database more
eciently if this option is selected.
Clear All Network Folders
Use this conguration item to clear all folder entries from the devices' Send to Network Folder settings. This
should be done in order to either remove settings or as a rst step in modifying folder conguration settings.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 345
NOTE: At this time, Send to Network Folder, Send to Network Folder — MSeries or Later, and Network Folder
Setup conguration items can only be used to modify existing settings only on a single device. In order to modify
settings on more than one device, the folder settings must be cleared using Clear all Network Folders can then
be re-established through a second conguration.
Modication of existing folder settings must be performed in steps. It is advised that you use conguration
templates to both store and modify device settings.
Following is an example of how both the Clear all Network Folders and the Send to Network Folder — MSeries or
Later can be used together to modify existing settings on a group of devices. You will be able to eectively use
this conguration option if you understand this example.
Example:
●Thirty LaserJet M4345 MFP devices have Send to Network Folder functionality enabled and also have the
following three folders implemented identically.
–HR: \\server1\HRFolder
–Accounting: \\server1\AccountingFolder
–Public: \\server3\public\week1
●Each week the folder \public\week1 is changed to correspond to the current week in the year. At this
time, we need to change the folder to be \public\week2.
Steps:
1. Create an HP Web Jetadmin conguration template with these settings:
NOTE: For more information about conguration templates, see Conguration Templates on page 180.
●HR: \\server1\HRFolder
●Accounting: \\server1\AccountingFolder
●Public: \\server3\public\week2
This template can also be stored for longer term use; it can be modied each week that the conguration
action is needed.
2. Once the conguration template is ready, use Clear all Network Folders to remove settings from the 30
devices.
3. After the 30 devices have been cleared of all Send to Network Folder settings, apply the template created
in Step 1 to all 30 devices.
4. Before you clear settings on a device, it is important that you understand what those settings are for.
Clearing the settings and then reapplying new settings may cause other device settings to be lost. Use the
HP Web Jetadmin device list column Digital Sending – Send to Network Folder to verify that all devices
successfully had the folder setting changed. The column detail can either be copied and pasted into an
application like Notepad or exported to a CSV le in order to view the folder settings present on each
device.
Default Messages Settings
Use this option to specify the From address, subject, and body information that initially appears in all email
messages sent from the digital send device. The digital send device uses the email message settings as the
initial content text for each email message it generates. You can also restrict the address elds and message
346 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
body from edits. The initial information provided can serve as a template for the email or provide instructions to
the user. For example, you can specify the subject of the email as shown here: "Please type in a subject for your
message here". For security reasons, you may not want to allow the user to change the From address provided
on the digital send device. You can specify a setting in this section that prevents the user from changing the
default From address.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Specify the address eld restriction by selecting one of the three options: Allow users at the device to edit
all of the address elds (From, To, CC, BCC), Restrict users from editing the ‘From:’ address, or Restrict
users from editing all address elds (From, To, CC, BCC).
2. To specify the default sender, type the email address in Default Email Address.
3. Type the name you want to appear in the From eld of the email in Default Display Name.
NOTE: If the display name is not provided, the value entered in Email Address text box displays in the
From eld of the email.
4. Type a subject in Default Subject. The subject appears in Subject when the user composes an email
message on the digital send device.
5. Type a default message in Default Message.
6. To prevent users from changing the message text of the email, select Restrict users at the device from
editing the 'Message:' eld.
Default Notication Settings for Email
This option lets you set the device to send a notication whenever an email is sent. You can also specify how and
when these notications should be sent.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a value from Condition on which to notify:
●Never: never send notices when an email is sent.
●Always: always send notices when an email is sent.
●All Errors: send notices only when there is an error.
2. Select a delivery method from Method used to deliver notication:
●Email: send the notications to the administrator's email address.
●Print: print the notications.
Default Scan Settings for Email
Use this option to specify the default settings for email attachments that best suits the business needs of your
organization.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Type the default le name in Default File Name.
2. Select the default le type from Default File Type.
3. Select the default color preference from Default Color Preference.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 347
4. Select the default resolution from Default Resolution.
5. Select the default output quality from Default Output Quality.
6. Select the default quality optimization setting from Optimize Text/Picture.
7. Select the default original size from Original Size.
8. Select the default background cleanup setting from Background Cleanup.
9. Select the default original number of sides from Original Sides.
10. Select the darkness setting from Darkness.
11. Select the default orientation from Content Orientation.
12. Select the default sharpness setting from Sharpness.
13. Select the default 2-sided format setting from 2-Sided Format.
NOTE: This option is only enabled if 2-Sided is selected from Original Sides.
14. Select the default contrast setting from Contrast.
Device Contacts Import
Use this option to import a predened list of email addresses (500 maximum) from a comma separated value
(CSV) le directly into the internal address book of the digital send device. The address book can store up to
2,000 addresses. Once an address le is imported to the digital send device, the addresses can be searched by
alias. The alias can be a name or an email address. To ensure that searches are consistent in the digital send
device address book, use the same format for all aliases. For example, type the rst name and then the last
name.
To send scanned documents from the digital send device through email, the user must provide an email address.
The process of entering email addresses can be simplied by providing an address lookup list and by using an
auto-complete feature. Importing addresses into the internal address book of the digital send device allows it to
use the lookup list and the auto-complete feature.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To import an address le:
●To locate the CSV le using a dialog window, click File, or
●Type the path and lename of the CSV le in the text box.
2. To clear the address book on the digital send device, select Delete All Device Contacts.
Digital Sending - Accessing the LDAP Server
This option lets you specify how the digital send device accesses the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) server to look up email addresses. To send scanned documents from the digital send device through
email, the user must provide an email address. The process of entering email addresses can be simplied by
providing an address lookup list and by using an auto-complete feature. Access to the LDAP server email
address database provides a way for the digital send device to use the lookup list and the auto-complete
feature.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
348 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. Select one of the following server bind methods from LDAP server bind method:
NOTE: All options might not be available for all devices.
●Anonymous: The selected LDAP Server does not require user credentials to access the LDAP
database.
●Simple: The selected LDAP Server requires user credentials. Note that the Password, if any, will be
sent across the network unencrypted.
NOTE: If you select Simple, the credentials are sent from the digital send device without encryption.
Contact the LDAP server’s administrator to determine the most appropriate server bind method
settings.
●Simple over SSL: The selected LDAP Server requires user credentials. Using SSL (Secure Sockets
Layer) the password, if any, will be sent across the network encrypted and will be unreadable to a
third party.
●Kerberos: The selected LDAP (Active Directory) Server requires user credentials. A Kerberos ticket will
be obtained from the Kerberos (Active Directory) Server and used to authenticate to the LDAP Server.
The Password will be sent across the network encrypted and will be unreadable to a third party. In
order to use Kerberos as a bind method, you must rst congure Kerberos settings. If using "user's
credentials", make sure that Kerberos Authentication is required for email.
●Kerberos over SSL: The selected LDAP (Active Directory) Server requires user credentials. Using SSL
(Secure Sockets Layer) the password, if any, will be sent across the network encrypted and will be
unreadable to a third party.
2. Set the options for LDAP credentials: The credentials that are used to bind to a specic path (or subtree) in
the LDAP Server. In most cases, this is a user's domain account name and a password. With the Simple or
Simple over SSL methods, the user DN form should be used. In some Windows environments, the form
DOMAIN\username may be used. If the user DN form is used, HP recommends that the bind path specied
in the username match the Search root eld. This ensures that the relative bind distinguished name has
sucient privileges to search from the specied Search root. You can choose one of the following:
●Use device user's credentials
●Use public credentials: Type the user name and password, and then select the Kerberos default realm
or domain.
3. Bind prex: This is the LDAP attribute used to construct the user's Distinguished Name (DN) for
authentication. This prex is combined with the username typed at the control panel to form the Relative
Distinguished Name (RDN). Commonly used prexes are "CN" (for common name) or "UID" (for user
identity).
4. Bind and search root: This is used to validate the user's credentials with the LDAP server. This value is
combined with the RDN to construct the full Distinguished Name (DN) of the user. The string consists of
"attribute=value" pairs, separated by commas. For example:
ou=engineering, o=HP, c=USou=marketing, o=HP,
c=USo=hp.comou=engineering, cn=users, dc=hp, dc=com
NOTE: The Bind prex and Bind and search root settings are only used if the LDAP server bind method is
set to Simple or Simple over SSL, Use device user credentials is selected, and the user authenticates to the
device via Kerberos authentication.
5. Type the IP address or hostname for the LDAP server whose database contains the centralized address
book in LDAP server.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 349
NOTE: Some MFP devices only recognize IP addresses. In such cases, host names will be converted to the
equivalent IP address.
6. Type the number of the TCP/IP port on the server that receives LDAP requests in Port (usually 389).
7. Set the options for Searching the database:
●Search root: The Distinguished Name (DN) of the entry in the LDAP directory structure where address
searching is to begin. A DN is made up of attribute=value pairs, separated by commas. For
example:
ou=engineering, o=HP, c=USou=marketing, o=HP,
c=USo=hp.comou=engineering, cn=users, dc=hp, dc=com
NOTE: On some LDAP Servers, the Search root can be left blank (in which case its root node will be
assumed).
●User information retrieval method: Depending on the type of LDAP server you are running, you might
be able to use default settings for the email address look-up attributes.
Exchange 5.5 Defaults: Select this setting if you are connecting to a Microsoft Exchange 5.5 server
that is running LDAP
. The LDAP attribute values are automatically set.
Active Directory Defaults: Select this setting if you are connecting to a Microsoft Exchange Server
2000 server that is running LDAP. The LDAP attribute values are automatically set.
Custom: Select this setting if you need to manually congure the LDAP attribute values for MFP user's
information look-up.
●Match the name entered with the LDAP attribute of: The attribute in the LDAP database that identies
a person in the address book. The value of this attribute will be compared to the person entered by
the MFP user in order to retrieve that person's email address. Following are a few examples of
possible LDAP attributes:
–uid: User Identier
–cn: Common Name
–sn: Surname
●Obtain email address from: The LDAP attribute that contains the person's email address. The
following are some, but not all, possible LDAP attributes:
rfc822Mailboxmail
●Obtain fax number from: The LDAP attribute that contains the person's fax number.
Digital Sending - Auto Reset Settings
This option lets you specify how long the digital send device waits after a digital sending operation is complete
before it reverts back to the specied default settings. You may need to specify settings other than the default
settings for a digital sending operation. If you need to send multiple jobs, it can be time consuming to specify the
settings for each additional job. Setting a timeout allows you to send another document before the settings
revert to default.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
350 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. To have the digital device reset to the default settings immediately after each digital send job, select
Immediately reset to default settings.
To allow a delay before the digital send device resets to the default settings after each digital send job,
select Delay before resetting the default settings.
2. If you selected Delay before resetting the default settings, type a timeout value in Number of seconds
(10-300) to delay.
Digital Sending - Default ‘From:’ Address
This option lets you specify the From address and subject information that initially appears in all email messages
sent from the digital send device. The digital send device uses these settings as the initial From address and
subject line for each email message it generates. You can also specify whether the digital send device user has
permission to change the default From address at the device. For example, you can specify the subject of the
email: Please type in a subject for your message here. For security reasons, you may not
want to allow the user to change the From address provided on the digital send device. You can specify a setting
in this section that prevents the user from changing the default From address.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. If desired, select Prevent user from changing the default ‘from:’ address.
2. If desired, select Use Address Book Entries only to specify the from address can only be from the device's
address book.
3. To specify the default sender, type the email address in the Email address.
4. Optional: Type the name you want to appear in the From eld of the email in the Display name.
5. Type the default subject for emails in Default subject. For example, type Please type in a
subject for your message here.
6. Type the default le name for emails in Default le name.
Digital Sending - Default Scanner Settings
The default scanner settings determine the initial settings used when a user scans a document. These settings
apply to both copying and digital sending operations. Set the default scanner settings to the preferences used
most often for scanning on the digital send device. This increases user eciency because the user does not need
to spend time manually conguring the scanner settings as often.
NOTE: The digital send device user can override each of the default scanner settings from the device control
panel.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the default paper size the device scanner uses when scanning the document from Document size.
2. Select the default document type the scanner’s image processor uses when scanning the document from
the Document type:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 351
●Text: For documents consisting mostly of textual information.
●Graphics: For documents consisting mostly of graphical images.
●Mixed: For documents consisting of both text information and graphical images.
3. If the device scanner supports two-sided scanning, select 2 Sided document to have the scanner device
scan both sides of the document.
Digital Sending - Email Attachment Settings
This option lets you specify the default email attachment settings for each email sent from the digital send
device. The digital send device uses the email attachment settings as the initial settings for each email message
the device generates. Set the default attachment settings to the preferences used most often for email
attachments on the digital send device. This increases user eciency because the user does not need to spend
additional time manually conguring the attachment settings as often.
NOTE: The default values can be changed as necessary when sending emails from the device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the le format used for email attachments from Default le format.
2. Select black and white or color from Default color preference.
NOTE: Color attachments are larger in size and take more time to send.
3. Select the resolution for email attachments from Default resolution.
4. Select the attachment le size from Default le size.
5. Select the Ti version from Ti version.
Email Address Validation
This option lets you congure HP Web Jetadmin to check email syntax when you type an email address. Valid
email addresses require the “at” sign (@) and a period (.).
To enable or disable address validation, select On or O.
Email Address/Message Settings
Use this option to congure the email address and message settings that the device uses as the initial content
for outgoing email messages when users send scanned documents to email. The email address and message
settings that are available vary depending on the device.
You can use these settings as a template for the outgoing email message or to provide instructions for the user.
For example, you can specify Enter a subject for the email message as the initial subject of the
outgoing email message.
To congure the email address and message settings for outgoing email messages, perform the following steps:
NOTE: Some devices do not support all of the email address and message settings that are described in the
following steps. For these devices, the unsupported settings are not available.
352 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. Some devices support the User editable checkbox for some of the email address and message settings.
To allow users to change a setting from the device control panel, select the User editable checkbox next to
that setting.
-or-
To prevent users from changing a setting from the device control panel, clear the User editable checkbox
next to that setting.
2. To allow users to enter email addresses on the device control panel, select the User can type address
option from the Address eld restrictions list.
-or-
To require users to select email addresses from the address book on the device, select the User must
select from address book option from the Address eld restrictions list.
3. To include the email address specied in the Default from box in the From list, select the Default From
option from the From list.
-or-
To include the email address of the user who is signed in on the device in the From list, select the User's
address (sign-in required) option from the From list.
4. If the Default From option is selected from the From list, perform the following steps:
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_DefaultFrom%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: Info.%%var_DefaultFrom%%
Example: Info.%%var_DefaultFrom%%@MyCompany
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
a. In the Default from box, enter the default email address for the From list. The default email address is
required.
b. In the Default display name box, enter a name for the default email address that the device displays
in the outgoing email message. The display name is optional.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 353
Example: %%var_DefaultDisplayName%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: Info.%%var_DefaultDisplayName%%
Example: Info.%%var_DefaultDisplayName%%@MyCompany
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
5. To allow users to enter the email addresses of the recipients, select the Blank option from the To list.
-or-
To send the outgoing email message to the user who is signed in on the device, select the User's address
(sign-in required) option from the To list.
6. To allow users to enter the email addresses of the recipients who receive a copy of the outgoing email
message, select the Blank option from the Cc list.
-or-
To send a copy of the outgoing email message to the user who is signed in on the device, select the User's
address (sign-in required) option from the Cc list.
7. To allow users to enter the email addresses of the recipients who receive a blind copy of the outgoing email
message, select the Blank option from the Bcc list.
-or-
To send a blind copy of the outgoing email message to the user who is signed in on the device, select the
User's address (sign-in required) option from the Bcc list.
8. In the Subject box, enter the subject for the outgoing email message.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_Subject%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: INFO:%%var_Subject%%
Example: INFO:%%var_Subject%%FROM MFP
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
354 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
9. In the Message box, enter a custom message for the outgoing email message.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_Message%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: Important%%var_Message%%
Example: Important%%var_Message%%Dev Team
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
10. To specify that the device digitally signs outgoing email messages, select the Digitally sign email messages
(requires Smart Card Sign In) checkbox.
-or-
To specify that the device does not digitally sign outgoing email messages, clear the Digitally sign email
messages (requires Smart Card Sign In) checkbox.
NOTE: The Digitally sign email messages (requires Smart Card Sign In) checkbox is available only if a
Smart Card reader is installed on the device and the Smart Card sign-in method is enabled.
11. To allow users to change the digital signing setting from the device control panel, select the Digitally sign
email messages user editable checkbox.
-or-
To prevent users from changing the digital signing settings from the device control panel, clear the Digitally
sign email messages user editable checkbox.
12. To specify that the device digitally encrypts outgoing email messages, select the Encrypt email messages
checkbox.
-or-
To specify that the device does not digitally encrypt outgoing email messages, clear the Encrypt email
messages checkbox.
13. To allow users to edit the digital encryption settings from the device control panel, select the Encrypt email
messages user editable checkbox.
-or-
To prevent users from editing the digital encryption settings from the device control panel, clear the
Encrypt email messages user editable checkbox.
14. To retrieve the recipient's public key from an LDAP server when the device signs the outgoing email
message, enter the LDAP search attribute in the Attribute for recipient public key box.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 355
Email File Settings
Use this option to specify the default settings that the digital send device uses when sending scanned
documents as email attachments. You can specify the settings that are used most often as the defaults. These
default settings increase eciency because users do not need to manually congure the settings each time they
send an email attachment.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: Some devices do not support all of the following conguration options. The settings that are available
for the conguration options vary depending on the device.
1. In the File Name Prex list or box, specify the prex that is added to the attachment le name.
2. In the Default le name box, enter the le name.
3. To allow users to edit the le name from the device control panel, select the User Editable checkbox.
-or-
To prevent users from editing the le name from the device control panel, clear the User Editable checkbox.
4. From the File Name Sux list, select the sux that is added to the attachment le name. The sux can be
the date, time, or name of the user who is logged in on the device.
5. From the Default color preference list, select the color that the device uses to save the document.
6. From the Default output quality list, select the level of quality that the device uses to save the document.
NOTE: If the High (larger le) option is selected, the les are larger and it takes the device more time to
send the les.
7. From the Default le type list, select the le format that the device uses to save the document.
8. From the Default resolution list, select the resolution that the device uses to save the document.
NOTE: Files that have a higher resolution have more dots per inch (dpi) and show more detail. Files that
have a lower resolution have fewer dpi and show less detail, but the les are smaller.
9. From the Compression list, select the type of compression that the device uses when saving the document
as a PDF or XPS le.
NOTE: If the High option is selected, the les are smaller, but the scanning process takes longer.
10. From the Black TIFF compression method list, select the type of black TIFF compression that the device
uses to save the document.
11. From the Color/grayscale TIFF compression method list, select the type of color/grayscale compression
that the device uses to save the document.
12. To encrypt PDF les, select the PDF encryption checkbox. A password is specied as part of the encryption
process. This password must be used to open the PDF le.
If a password was not set prior to starting a scan, users are prompted to enter a password.
-or-
To save PDF les without encryption, clear the PDF encryption checkbox.
13. To delete blank pages in the scanned document, select the Blank page suppression checkbox.
-or-
To retain blank pages in the scanned document, clear the Blank page suppression checkbox.
356 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Email Message Text
This option lets you specify the information that initially appears in the body of all email messages sent from the
digital send device. The digital send device uses the email message settings as the initial content text for each
email message it generates. The initial information provided can serve as a template for the email or provide
instructions to the user. For example, you can type the following message in the body text of the email: Type
the body of the email here.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To use the default message for the email, select Message language and then select a language from the
drop-down list. The device generates an email message containing the default message in the selected
language.
2. To compose a custom message, select Use a custom message and then type a custom message into the
text box.
3. To allow the users to change the message text of the email, select Editable by user.
Email Notication Settings
Use this option to specify the method and under what conditions notications are sent when users send scanned
documents by email. If a recipient email address is not specied, the user must enter an email address at the
device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a value from Condition on which to notify:
●Do not notify: Never send a notication when a user sends a scanned document by email.
●Notify when job completes: Always send a notication when a user sends a scanned document by
email.
●Notify only if job fails: Send a notication only when an error occurs.
2. Select a delivery method from Method used to deliver notication:
●Email: Send the notications by email.
●Print: Print the notications. This option is not available for scanners.
3. If Email is selected from the Method used to deliver notication drop-down list, enter the email address to
which the notications are sent in the Email address text box.
Email Scan Settings
The default scanner settings determine the initial settings used when a user scans a document for sending to
email. Set the default scanner settings to the preferences used most often for sending email from the digital
send device. This increases user eciency because the user does not need to spend time manually conguring
the scanner settings as often.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 357
NOTE: Some devices do not support all of the following conguration options. The settings that are available
for the conguration options vary depending on the device.
1. Select the page size of the original document in Original size.
2. If the original size is Custom:
●Set the unit of measurement for the document in Custom dimension units.
●Set the width for the document in Custom X dimension.
●Set the height for the document in Custom Y dimension.
3. Specify whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided in Original sides.
4. Optimize the output for text or printed pictures, or manually adjust the setting in Optimize text/picture.
5. If Optimize text/picture is set to Manually adjust, then specify the value in Optimize for.
6. Specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page in Content orientation.
7. Determine if the back side of the page is upside down or right side up in 2–Sided format.
8. Specify whether faint images or a light background color should be removed in Background cleanup.
9. Adjust the darkness of the le in Darkness.
10. Adjust the sharpness of the le in Sharpness.
11. Adjust the contrast of the le in Contrast.
12. Remove a specic color from the output of a scanned document in Color dropout. For example, if an
original document has black text and has comments written on it with a red pen, select the Remove red
option. The scanned le will not contain any of the red marks. Removing a color can improve legibility,
improve Optical Character Recognition (OCR) accuracy, and reduce the le size.
13. To scan a document and then display a preview before completing the job, enable Image preview.
14. Enable Job build to combine several sets of original documents into one email attachment. Also use this
feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at
one time.
15. Select Misfeed detection for the product to stop scanning when it senses that multiple pages are being fed
at one time. To prevent a jam from being reported when a user scans an original document with multiple
pages, such as a folded booklet, make sure Misfeed detection is not selected; multiple pages fed at one
time are not reported as a misfeed.
Enable Device Fax Archive Settings
Use this option to enable or disable the ability to archive faxes on the device.
NOTE: To archive faxes on the device, you might need to congure additional settings, such as the archive
destination, fax archive email address for copies of incoming and outgoing faxes, and type of fax job to archive.
For more information about these settings, see the Fax Archive, Fax Archive Setting, and Fax Archiving
conguration options.
To congure this option, select the Enabled or Disabled option.
358 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Enable Save to Network Folder
Use this option to enable or disable the Save to Network Folder feature on the device. This feature provides the
ability to save scanned documents in a shared folder on a network computer or server. If you enable this feature,
the device might require additional conguration settings, such as DNS and WINS server settings.
To congure this option, select the Enabled or Disabled option.
Enable Save to SharePoint
Use this option to enable or disable the Save the SharePoint® feature on the device. This feature provides the
ability to save scanned documents directly on a Microsoft SharePoint site. If you enable this feature, the user
does not need to scan a document to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message, and then manually
upload the le to the SharePoint site.
To congure this option, select the Enabled or Disabled option.
Enable Save to USB
Use this option to enable or disable the Save to USB feature on the device. This feature provides the ability to
save scanned documents on a USB ash drive that is inserted into the easy-access USB port on the device.
To congure this option, select the Enabled or Disabled option.
Enable Send to Email
This option lets you congure the device to send scanned documents as an email. The device may require
additional conguration settings in order to send email, such as an outgoing SMTP server or other default email
settings. This feature eliminates the need to scan the media remotely, save it to le, and then send it in an email
from a computer.
To set this option, select Enabled or Disabled.
Folder Access Settings
Use this option to set the device to rst check access to the shared network folder before saving a le. When this
option is disabled, users can save jobs more quickly, but jobs may fail if the folder is unavailable.
To set this option, check the corresponding checkbox.
Import/Export Address Book
Use this option to import a predened list of email addresses (500 maximum) from a comma separated value
(CSV) le directly into the internal address book of the digital send device. You must use this option to congure
Fax Speed Dials or add Device User Accounts with PINs.
Also use this option to import a list of fax numbers, speed dials, or device user accounts with PIN numbers.
NOTE: The CSV le must have a header, which is always the rst line of that le. If the CSV le does not have a
header, the rst line of an address is considered a header and that address is lost.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 359
NOTE: For more information about the elds that are valid in the CSV le for a specic device, see the device
documentation.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: A digital send device can store up to 2,000 entries, but only up to 500 entries can be loaded at a time.
NOTE: The CSV le must have at least one pair of entries for each new address, where the rst entry is the
name of the person and the second entry is a valid email address. The CSV le can have the following headers;
the rst two are required:
name, emailaddress, dlname, faxnumber, speeddial, code, pin,
permissionset, networkname
Following is a sample of a CSV le:
name, emailaddress, dlname, faxnumber, speeddial, code, pin,
permissionset, networkname
KellyJacobsonUser, kelly.jacobson@hp.com,,,,,57127, Device User,
KellyJacobsonTest
KellyTest2, kelly@hp.com,,,,,12345, Device User, KellyTest2
KellyTest3, jacobson@hp.com,,,,,54321, Device User, KellyTest3
KellyJacobsonUser, kelly.jacobson@hp.com,,,,,,,
KellyTest2, kelly@hp.com,,,,,,,
KellyTest3, jacobson@hp.com,,,,,,,
,,,12345678, SpeedDial1,1,,,
,,,5432100, SpeedDial2,2,,,
,,,8765432, SpeedDial2,2,,,
1. To import an address le, select the Import address book option. Click File, and then browse to the CSV le.
2. To clear the entire address book on the digital send device, select Clear device address book.
To clear parts of the address book (if supported), select the appropriate checkboxes after you select the
Clear device address book option.
Address Book contains both Default and Custom Address Book. In order to clear the Custom Address Book,
select the Clear device address book option, and then select the Custom Address Book check box or only
the default address book clears.
3. To export an address book from the digital send device, select the Export device address book option, and
then click Export Address book. Save the le when prompted.
NOTE: Export is only available if you have a single device selected in the device list.
Import/Export Address Book (Pro)
Use this option to manage the address book that is stored on the HP Pro MFP device. You can import a comma-
separated values (CSV) le into the address book, clear the address book, and export the address book to a CSV
le.
Each line in an imported CSV le is one record. Each record must have entries separated by a comma and must
end with a line break (CRLF). At a minimum, each record must contain a person’s name, PIN, and permission set.
360 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
For more information about other entries that are valid for a specic device, see the documentation for that
device.
The rst line in the CSV le must be a header record that contains the names of the entries. If the rst line is not a
header record, the rst record is considered the header. The information from that rst record is lost when the
CSV le is imported.
The following is an example of a CSV le:
name, emailaddress, pin, permissionset, networkname
KellyJacobson, kelly.jacobson@company.com,57127, deviceUser, KJacobson
JohnHarris, john.harris@company.com,66212, deviceUser, JHarris
SallySmith,,34432, deviceUser,
Import a CSV le
The digital send device can store up to 50 entries in the address book. A maximum of 50 entries can be imported
at one time.
1. Select the Import address book option.
2. Click the File button.
3. On the Open window, navigate to and select the CSV le, and then click the Open button.
Clear the entries in the address book
▲Select the Clear device address book option.
Export the entries in the address book
The address book can be exported only if a single device is selected in a device list.
1. Select the Export device address book option.
2. Click the Export Address book button.
3. On the Save As window, navigate to the folder to save the le, enter a le name in the File name box, and
then click the Save button.
LDAP Search Method
Use this option to specify the search method for looking up information in the LDAP address book. You can
specify the most ecient search method for your organization:
●Quick Search: Returns results faster by only searching for entries that begin with the search string.
●Detailed Search: Returns more thorough results by searching for entries that contain the search string.
To specify the search method, select Quick Search or Detailed Search.
LDAP Settings
To send scanned documents through email, users must enter email addresses on the device. The device can
provide an address lookup list and auto-complete feature by accessing the database on a Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) server.
Use this option to enable the device to connect to an LDAP server and search the database.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 361
Enable the device to search an LDAP server database
1. Select the Enable network contacts (use LDAP server) checkbox.
2. In the LDAP server address box, enter the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server. The LDAP server
address cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
-or-
To search for the LDAP server address, click the Find servers button.
3. To use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to connect to the LDAP server, select the Use a secure connection (SSL)
option. The default is port 636.
-or-
To use a custom port to connect to the LDAP server, select the Use Custom Port option, and then enter the
port number in the box next to the button. The default is port 389.
4. In the LDAP server authentication section, select one of the following options:
●Anonymous: The device does not use credentials to access the LDAP server.
●Simple: The device uses the user's device credentials to access the LDAP server.
NOTE: The device does not encrypt the user's device credentials when sending them to the LDAP
server. Contact the LDAP server administrator to determine the appropriate settings for the server
bind method.
●Windows Negotiated (SPNEGO): The device uses the user's Windows credentials to access the LDAP
server.
5. To use the credentials of the user who is signed in on the device to access the LDAP server, select the Use
MFP user credentials to connect after sign in at the control panel checkbox.
NOTE: If this checkbox is selected, the device does not use the user name and password specied in the
Default credentials for LDAP server connection section.
6. To specify the default credentials that the device uses to connect to the LDAP server, perform the following
steps:
a. If the Windows Negotiated (SPNEGO) option is selected, enter the fully qualied domain name that
the device uses for the authentication in the Windows domain box.
The Windows domain name must comply with the Domain Name System (DNS) standards. An
example of a fully qualied domain name is abc.mid.company.com.
b. In the Username box, enter the name of a user who has access permission on the LDAP server.
c. In the Password and Conrm password boxes, enter the specied user's password.
7. In the Path to start search (BaseDN, Search Root) box, enter the Distinguished Name (DN) of the entry in
the LDAP directory structure where the device begins the search. A DN contains one or more
attribute=value pairs separated by commas.
-or-
On some LDAP servers, the search root can be blank. In these cases, the device starts the search on the
root node.
-or-
362 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
To search for the DN in the LDAP directory structure, click the Find button.
8. From the Source for Attribute Names list, select the source for the attribute names.
9. In the Match the Recipient's Name with this attribute box, enter the LDAP attribute for recipient names. The
attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
10. In the Attribute Name for Recipient’s Email Address box, enter the LDAP attribute for email addresses. The
attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
11. In the Attribute Name for Recipient's Fax Number box, enter the LDAP attribute for fax numbers. The
attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
NOTE: Some devices do not support this attribute. If you are conguring a single device, these devices
ignore the attribute that you enter.
12. To test the retrieval of address book entries from the LDAP server database, enter at least 3 characters in
the Test for LDAP Retrieval box, and then click the Test button.
Disable the device from searching an LDAP server database
▲Clear the Enable network contacts (use LDAP server) checkbox.
Network Folder File Settings
Use this option to specify the default settings for scanned documents that are saved to a network folder.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. From the File name prex list, select the prex that is added to the lename.
NOTE: You can select more than one option from the File name prex list. The selected options appear in
the eld below the list.
2. In the Default le name box, enter the lename. The lename can be a maximum of 1,024 characters and
cannot contain the following characters:
/ \ : * ? " | < >
3. To allow users to edit the default lename from the device control panel, select the User editable checkbox.
4. From the File name sux list, select the sux that is added to the lename.
NOTE: You can select more than one option from the File name sux list. The selected options appear in
the eld below the list.
5. From the Default color preference list, select the color in which the document is scanned.
6. From the Metadata le format list, select the le format that is used for the metadata that is added to the
saved le.
7. From the Default output quality list, select the level of quality that is used to scan the document.
NOTE: If you select the High (large le) option, the le is larger and it takes more time to scan the
document.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 363
8. From the Default le type list, select the le format that is used for the scanned document.
9. From the Default resolution list, select the resolution that is used to scan the document.
NOTE: Documents that are scanned at a lower resolution have fewer dots per inch (dpi) and show less
detail. Documents that are scanned at a higher resolution have more dpi and show more detail, but the le
size is larger.
10. From the Compression list, select the compression method that is used to scan the document.
NOTE: If you select the High option, the le is smaller, but it takes more time to scan the document.
11. From the Black TIFF compression method list, select the compression method that is used for black TIFF
les.
12. From the Color/grayscale TIFF compression method list, select the compression method that is used for
color or grayscale TIFF les.
13. To encrypt PDF les, select the PDF encryption checkbox. A password must be specied as part of the
encryption. The same password must be used to open the le.
NOTE: The user is prompted to enter a password prior to scanning the document if a password was not
set prior to touching the Start button.
14. To remove blank pages from the scanned document, select the Blank page suppression checkbox.
Network Folder Notication Settings
Use this option to specify the method and under what conditions notications are sent when users save scanned
documents to network folders. If a recipient email address is not specied, the user must enter an email address
at the device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a value from Condition on which to notify.
●Do not notify: Never send a notication when a user saves a scanned document to a network folder.
●Notify only if job fails: Send a notication only when an error occurs.
●Notify when job completes: Always send a notication when a user saves a scanned document to a
network folder.
2. Select a delivery method from Method used to deliver notication.
●Email: Send the notications by email.
●Print: Print the notications. This option is not available for scanners.
3. If Email is selected from the Method used to deliver notication drop-down list, enter the email address to
which the notications are sent in the Email address text box.
Network Folder Scan Settings
The default scanner settings determine the initial settings used when a user scans a document for saving to a
network folder. Set the default scanner settings to the preferences used most often for saving to network
folders from the digital send device. This increases user eciency because the user does not need to spend time
manually conguring the scanner settings as often.
364 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the page size of the original document in Original size.
2. If the original size is Custom:
●Select the unit of measurement for the document in Custom dimension units.
●Set the width for the document in Custom X dimension.
●Set the height for the document in Custom Y dimension.
3. Specify whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided in Original sides.
4. Optimize the output for text or printed pictures, or manually adjust the setting. in Optimize text/picture.
5. If Optimize text/picture is set to Manually adjust, then specify the value in Optimize for.
6. Specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page in Content orientation.
7. Determine if the back side of the page is upside down or right side up in 2–Sided format.
8. Specify whether faint images or a light background color should be removed in Background cleanup.
9. Adjust the darkness of the le in Darkness.
10. Adjust the sharpness of the le in Sharpness.
11. Adjust the contrast of the le in Contrast.
12. To scan a document and then display a preview before completing the job, enable Image preview.
13. Remove a specic color from the output of a scanned document in Color dropout. For example, if an
original document has black text and has comments written on it with a red pen, select the Remove red
option. The scanned le will not contain any of the red marks. Removing a color can improve legibility,
improve Optical Character Recognition (OCR) accuracy, and reduce the le size.
14. Enable Job build to combine several sets of original documents into one email attachment. Also use this
feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at
one time.
15. Select Misfeed detection for the product to stop scanning when it senses that multiple pages are being fed
at one time. To prevent a jam from being reported when a user scans an original document with multiple
pages, such as a folded booklet, make sure Misfeed detection is not selected; multiple pages fed at one
time are not reported as a misfeed.
Network Folder Setup
Once Enable Send to Folder is enabled, you can use this option to save device settings to a le or load other
device settings from a le. You can also use this feature to easily view and manage all of your quick access
folders in one interface.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Enable the send to folder settings feature by selecting Enable Send to Folder.
2. Click Add Folder.
3. Select the preferred folder type: Standard or Personal.
4. Type the alias name for the folder in Alias Name.
5. Type the UNC path name for the folder in UNC Path Name.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 365
6. Select the operating system on the computer hosting the quick access folder from Located On.
7. If the server connection requires authorization and you want to authorize using the device user's
credentials, then select Use MFP user's credentials.
8. If the server connection requires authorization and you want to authorize using common credentials, then
select Use Common Credentials.
9. If the server is Windows-based, type the name of the Windows domain in Windows Domain.
10. If the server connection requires authorization and you want to provide default authorization credentials,
type the user name in Username and type the password in Password.
11. Type the NDS Tree value in NDS Tree and type the NDS Context value in NDS Context.
12. Select a value from Condition on Which to Notify.
●Never; never send notices when a le is sent to a folder.
●Always; always send notices when a le is sent to a folder.
●All Errors; send notices only when there is an error.
13. Select a delivery method from Method Used to Deliver Notication.
●Default File Name;
●Print; print the notications.
14. Specify the default settings for les sent to a network folder.
NOTE: The option 2-Sided Format is only enabled if the 2-sided option is selected from Original Sides.
15. Verify that all the information is correct and then click OK.
Follow these steps to edit a quick access folder entry:
1. Select the entry and click Edit Folder.
2. Make the changes and click OK.
Follow these steps to delete a quick access folder entry:
1. Select the entry and click Remove Folder.
2. Click OK.
Follow these steps to verify a quick access folder access:
1. Select the entry and click Verify Access.
2. On the Verify Folder Access dialog box, check if the credentials entered are able to access the folder and
click OK.
OXPd 1.4 Conguration
Use this option to:
●Specify workow service servers' URLs.
●Specify the URL polling interval.
366 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●Upload an SDC conguration le to the device.
●Remove the current conguration le.
If a conguration le has already been uploaded to the device, its name and le version will be shown. Refer to
the documentation provided with the server software for information about the Server URL, Polling Interval and
server software setup.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To upload a conguration le, select a le and click Load document capture le. You can browse to the le if
desired.
2. To remove a conguration le, click on Remove Current File. A new window will open with the operation's
results.
3. Type the polling interval in Polling interval.
4. To connect to a workow service installed on a network server, enter one or more URLs into the URL. At the
specied polling interval, this device will connect to the specied servers and retrieve workow
conguration data.
5. To force URL polling, click Force update now. A new window will open with the operation's results.
Personal Contacts Setup
Use this option to sign-in on the device and access personal contacts from the Microsoft Exchange server.
To congure this option, select Enable Personal Contacts (when users sign in to Windows at the device).
Replicate MFP
This option lets you copy the local digital send settings from one device to another. Using this feature enables
the settings for General, Email, Fax, and LDAP to be replicated.
NOTE: Any congured Send to folders cannot be copied or replicated.
To congure this option, specify the IP address of the source device you wish to replicate.
NOTE: Setting this option successfully does not imply that the device settings were successfully replicated.
Communication errors between this device and the source device are not reported as an error. To verify that
settings were copied, you must examine the device settings after applying this option.
NOTE: This setting may aect the conguration items in the Digital Sending, Fax and Security categories. it is
not recommended to set the this feature with other conguration items under those categories.
Reset Copy Send Timeout
This option lets you specify the default amount of time that HP Web Jetadmin waits after any control panel
activity completes before it resets the send settings to their defaults. You should set the value to provide users
with enough time to set up and complete their digital sending tasks before the product resets their send
settings.
To congure this option, type the number of seconds in the text box.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 367
Scan To Folder Predened Jobs
Use this option to specify the network folder settings, scan settings, and le settings that the device uses to
send scanned documents to a network folder.
Add network folder entries
1. If you are conguring multiple devices or creating device conguration templates, select one of the
following options from the Overwrite options section:
●Replace/overwrite existing lists—Replaces any existing folders on the devices with this list of folders.
●Append to existing lists—Adds this list of folders to the existing list of folders on the devices.
To update folders on devices that have the same name as the folders in this list, select the Overwrite
any existing items with the same name checkbox.
2. Click the Add button. The Add Predened Folder wizard starts.
3. On the Specify Network Folder Settings page, specify the following options, and then click the Next button:
●Display Name: Enter a name for the network folder settings. The name can be a maximum of 30
characters and can contain any Unicode characters.
●Network path: Enter the path for the network folder using the Universal Naming Convention (UNC)
format. This setting is optional.
The format for a UNC path is \\server\share\directory_path. The UNC path can be a
maximum of 512 characters and is not case-sensitive.
●User name: Enter the user name that is required to access the network folder. The user name can be
a maximum of 512 characters.
●Password: Enter the password that is required for server authentication. The password can be a
maximum of 512 characters and is case-sensitive.
●Conrm password: Enter the password again.
●PIN (Optional): Enter the Personal Identication Number (PIN) that is required.
●Conrm PIN: Enter the PIN again.
4. On the Specify Scan Settings page, specify the following settings, and then click the Next button:
●Original Size: Select the default size of the original scanned documents.
●Original Sides: Select the default number of sides of the original scanned documents.
●Contrast: Select the default amount of contrast that is applied when the original documents are
scanned.
5. On the Specify Attachment Settings page, specify the following settings, and then click the Finish button:
●File name prex: Enter the prex that is added to the lenames of the scanned documents. The
lename prex can be a maximum of 30 characters. This setting is optional.
●Default le type: Select the le type that is used to save the scanned documents.
●Default resolution: Select the level of resolution that is used to scan the documents.
●Default color preference: Select the color that is used to scan the documents.
●Compression: Select the compression method that is used to scan the documents.
368 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Edit network folder entries
1. Select the folder entry from the list, and then click the Edit button. The Edit Predened Folder wizard starts.
2. Change the appropriate settings on the wizard pages. The pages in the Edit Predened Folder wizard are
the same as the pages in the Add Predened Folder wizard described previously.
3. Click the Finish button.
Delete network folder entries
1. To delete a network folder entry, select the folder entry from the list, and then click the Remove button.
-or-
To delete all of the network folder entries, click the Remove All button.
2. On the Conrm Remove window, click the OK button.
Send to Network Folder
This option lets you send documents to a network folder. There is a list of predened folders. You can set the
default document setting to apply to documents sent to a network folder.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable this option select Enable send to folder.
2. To add folders to the list of predened folders, click Add and enter the shared folder or FTP site.
3. To edit an existing folder click Edit.
4. To remove all of the predened folders in the list click Remove All.
5. To determine whether you have access to a folder click Test Folder Access and enter a domain, username,
and password for the credentials to use to access public folders.
NOTE: Test Folder Access is only enabled if you are conguring a single device, because it tests access to
the network folder from that specic device.
6. Select settings from the drop-down lists: Color preference, Resolution, Default le size, File format, TIFF
version, and NTLM authentication setting.
Send to Network Folder - MSeries or later
Use this option to enable or disable the ability to send scanned documents to predened folders on the network
or an FTP site. The default settings that the device applies to scanned documents can be congured for each
predened folder.
Enable and congure predened folders
1. Select the Enable send to folder checkbox.
2. Use the following steps to add a predened folder:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 369
a. Click the Add button. The Add Predened Folder wizard starts.
b. On the Choose the destination type page, select the Shared folder or FTP site option, and then click
the Next button.
c. On the Specify the shared folder settings or Specify the FTP site settings page, specify the
appropriate settings, and then click the Finish button.
3. Use the following steps to edit a predened folder:
a. Select the folder from the Predened folders list, and then click the Edit button. The Edit Predened
Folder wizard starts.
b. On the Specify the shared folder settings or Specify the FTP site settings page, change the settings,
and then click the Finish button.
4. Use the following steps to delete predened folders:
a. To delete a predened folder, select the folder from the Predened folders list, and then click the
Remove button.
-or-
To delete all of the predened folders, click the Remove All button.
b. On the Remove folders window, click the OK button.
5. To verify that the device can access the predened folder, select the folder from the Predened folders list,
and then click the Test Folder Access button. Enter the domain, user name, and password that are required
to access the folder.
NOTE: The Test Folder Access button is enabled only if you are conguring a single device because it
tests access to the network folder from that specic device.
6. In the WINS server box, enter the IP address for the WINS server.
7. From the NTLM authentication setting list, select the authentication protocol that the device uses to access
the folder.
8. From the TIFF version list, select the version of TIFF that the device uses to scan the document.
9. To verify that the device can access the predened folder before scanning begins, select the Verify access
before scanning checkbox. If the device cannot access the predened folder, the user must enter new
credentials. The job does not start until the device can access the predened folder.
-or-
To start scanning immediately after the Start button is pressed without verifying that the device can access
the predened folder, clear the Verify access before scanning checkbox. If the device cannot access the
predened folder, the job fails.
Disable predened folders
▲Clear the Enable send to folder checkbox.
SMTP Gateway Settings
This option lets you specify the SMTP gateway settings for the digital send device. The device uses the SMTP
gateway settings to connect to an email server to send scanned documents directly from the digital send device
to an email address.
370 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
NOTE: The SMTP gateway settings of the digital send device must be specied before scanned documents can
be sent through email.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Send emails: You can specify the SMTP gateway IP by providing a valid IP hostname or a valid IP address for
the gateway server in IP hostname or IP address.
NOTE: If you are unsure about the correct SMTP gateway IP address or hostname, click Find Gateway to
search the network for a suitable SMTP gateway server (if one is available).
2. Specify the TCP/IP port number on which the server is processing SMTP requests by typing it in Port
(usually this port is 25)
3. Select the maximum size the SMTP gateway server allows for email attachments from the Maximum
attachment size drop-down list.
4. To specify the use of authentication for using the SMTP server, check Enable SMTP Authentication.
●To use the device's credentials, select Use Device User’s Credentials.
●To use public credentials, select Use Public Credentials and specify the username and password to
use in the authentication.
5. To test the connection to the gateway server, click Test. The digital send device attempts to connect to the
SMTP gateway server using the specied IP hostname or IP address. The results of the test display in a
separate window.
SMTP Multiple Gateway Settings
Use this option to specify the connection and authentication information for one or more SMTP servers. You can
add, edit, or delete each of the entries.
NOTE: When adding or editing an SMTP gateway entry, the settings specied in Default Notication Settings for
Email and Default Scan Settings for Email are applied to the specied gateway entry.
To add an SMTP Gateway entry:
1. In the rst row, type the name or address of the server in Server Name or Address.
2. In the rst row, type the port number of the server in Port Number.
3. In the rst row, select the maximum attachment size from Maximum Attachment Size.
4. In the rst row, if the server connection requires authorization select Requires Authorization.
5. In the rst row, if the server connection requires authorization and you want to authorize using the device
user's credentials, then select Use MFP User's Credentials.
6. In the rst row, if the server connection requires authorization and you want to provide default
authorization credentials, type the user name in Username and type the password in Password.
7. Verify the information is correct by clicking Test Server. If it is correct, click Add Server.
To edit an SMTP Gateway entry, select the entry by clicking the radio button in the second column and then edit
the values in the row and click Edit Server
To delete an SMTP Gateway entry, select the entry by clicking the radio button in the second column and then
click Remove Server.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 371
USB File Settings
This option lets you specify the default le settings for each le saved to an attached USB media from the digital
send device. The digital send device uses the USB le settings as the initial settings for each le the device saves
to USB media. Set the default le settings to the preferences used most often for USB on the digital send device.
This increases user eciency because the user does not need to spend additional time manually conguring the
USB le settings as often.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the lename prex in File Name Prex.
2. Specify the lename for the le to be saved in Default le name.
3. To allow users to edit the default USB lename at the device control panel, select the User Editable
checkbox.
4. Select the lename sux in File Name Sux.
5. Specify whether this le should be saved in black and white or color in Default color preference.
6. Select the quality for the le in Default output quality.
NOTE: Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images, and they take more time
to send.
7. Select the le format for the saved le in Default le type.
8. Set the resolution for the le in Default resolution.
NOTE: Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower
resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is smaller.
9. Specify if the le uses Normal or High compression when saving a scanned document as a PDF or XPS le
in Compression.
NOTE: If compression is set to High, the scanned le is smaller, but the scanning process might take
longer than Normal compression.
10. Select the black TIFF compression method from the Black TIFF compression method drop-down list.
11. Select the color/grayscale compression method from the Color/Grayscale TIFF compression method drop-
down list.
12. For PDF les, enable PDF Encryption if you want to encrypt the output PDF le. A password must be
specied as part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be
prompted to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to pressing Start.
13. If the Blank page suppression checkbox is selected, blank pages are ignored.
USB Notication Settings
Use this option to specify the method and under what conditions notications are sent when users save scanned
documents to USB storage devices. If a recipient email address is not specied, the user must enter an email
address at the device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a value from Condition on Which to Notify:
372 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●Do not notify: Never send a notication when a user saves a scanned document to a USB storage
device.
●Notify only if job fails: Send a notication only when an error occurs.
●Notify when job completes: Always send a notication when a user saves a scanned document to a
USB storage device.
2. Select a delivery method from Method Used to Deliver Notication:
●Email: Send the notications by email.
●Print: Print the notications. This option is not available for scanners.
3. If Email is selected from the Method Used to Deliver Notication drop-down list, enter the email address to
which the notications are sent in the Email address text box.
USB Scan Settings
The default scanner settings determine the initial settings used when a user scans a document for saving to an
attached USB media. Set the default scanner settings to the preferences used most often for saving to an
attached USB media from the digital send device. This increases user eciency because the user does not need
to spend time manually conguring the scanner settings as often.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the page size of the original document in Original size.
2. If the original size is Custom:
●Set the unit of measurement for the document in Custom dimension units.
●Set the width for the document in Custom X dimension.
●Set the height for the document in Custom Y dimension.
3. Specify whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided in Original sides.
4. Optimize the output for text or printed pictures, or manually adjust the setting. in Optimize text/picture.
5. If Optimize text/picture is set to Manually adjust, then specify the value in Optimize for.
6. Specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page in Content orientation.
7. Determine if the back side of the page is upside down or right side up in 2–Sided format.
8. Specify whether faint images or a light background color should be removed in Background cleanup.
9. Adjust the darkness of the le in Darkness.
10. Adjust the sharpness of the le in Sharpness.
11. Adjust the contrast of the le in Contrast.
12. Remove a specic color from the output of a scanned document in Color dropout. For example, if an
original document has black text and has comments written on it with a red pen, select the Remove red
option. The scanned le will not contain any of the red marks. Removing a color can improve legibility,
improve Optical Character Recognition (OCR) accuracy, and reduce the le size.
13. To scan a document and then display a preview before completing the job, enable Image preview.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Digital Sending 373
14. Enable Job build to combine several sets of original documents into one email attachment. Also use this
feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at
one time.
15. Select Misfeed detection for the product to stop scanning when it senses that multiple pages are being fed
at one time. To prevent a jam from being reported when a user scans an original document with multiple
pages, such as a folded booklet, make sure Misfeed detection is not selected; multiple pages fed at one
time are not reported as a misfeed.
Device Conguration Options for Embedded Web Server
Conguration options for Embedded Web Server dene functions for the device’s Embedded Web Server.
Embedded Web Server Conguration Options
This option lets you select various features for the embedded Web server. If you have a set of standard
conguration options for embedded Web servers, you can direct all of your embedded Web servers to the URL of
the printer that has the correct conguration options. This eliminates the need to manually specify the
conguration options for each embedded Web server, reducing errors.
To turn a feature on, select the feature check box. To turn a feature o, clear the feature check box.
Embedded Web Server Language Settings
Use this option to specify what language the embedded Web server uses to display Web pages.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: If you want to receive HP Web Jetadmin alerts, you must use English or the browser language. To do
this, set the Select a language to English and then specify the language in your browser to the language you
need to use. Then select the View pages in browser language option.
1. To display the Web pages in a specic language, select Select a language and select a language from the
drop-down list.
2. To display the Web pages in the language assigned in the user’s browser, select View pages in browser
language.
3. To display the Web pages in the language assigned in the printer, select View pages in printer language.
Embedded Web Server Mail Settings
Use this option to congure email settings for an individual printer or printers in a device group. You can specify
email settings for sending and receiving email messages from the printer.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select SMTP server and then type the SMTP server IP address in the text box.
2. Select Domain name and then type the SMTP server domain name in the text box.
3. To specify the incoming email options:
374 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●Select POP3 server and then type the POP3 server IP address in the text box.
●Select Username and then type the printer name in the text box.
●If required, select Password and then type a password in the text box. Conrm the password by
typing it again in the Conrm password text box.
Embedded Web Server Other Links
Use this option to create links to other Web sites. This is a convenient way to quickly browse to a Web site. These
links appear on the printer’s embedded Web server page. You can create up to ve links.
NOTE: My Printer, Order Supplies, and Solve a Problem links are defaults and cannot be deleted or changed.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: The following characters are not allowed in a link name or link address: |, ", /, *, +, =, !, @, #, $, %, ¨, &, *,
(,) , {, [, }, ], `, ´, ~, ^, ?, \, ;, :, >, , <
1. Type a name for the link in Link name.
2. Type the URL in Link URL and click Add Link.
If you typed a link that you do not want, highlight it in the User-dened links box and click Remove.
To remove all the links displayed in the list, click Clear List. Sending an empty list to the printer will remove
any links that may have been previously created.
Embedded Web Server URL
Specify a URL where the embedded Web server can retrieve conguration information. If you have a set of
standard conguration options for embedded Web servers, you can set up a URL with those conguration
options and direct all of your embedded Web servers to that URL. This eliminates the need to manually specify
the conguration options for each embedded Web server, reducing errors.
To assign or change the URL, type it in the text box.
Time Services
Use this option to access another machine on the network to obtain the correct time for an individual printer or
printers in a device group. HP printers do not have an internal clock to keep track of the time; therefore, they
need to connect to another machine on the network to obtain the current time.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To specify the default values, select Use default values.
2. Enable clock drift correction: the device will check with the server periodically and update its time. This is
benecial because your device is always set to the correct time but it does cause some network trac.
3. To specify the network time server address select Network time server address and type the IP address.
NOTE: The printer receives the time from this machine on the network. For the default value,
HP Web Jetadmin looks for another machine on the network. If another machine on the network is not
found, the value appears as 0.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Embedded Web Server 375
4. Local port to receive time from server: specify the port to use for the device to get data from the time
server.
5. To specify an hour for the printer to synchronize with a machine on the network, select Synchronize time
with server every and type an integer value between 1 and 168 (default is 24 hours).
NOTE: The time synchronizes with another machine on the network at the designated hourly interval and
not immediately after saving. For example, if you specify 2 hours, the printer waits 2 hours after you save
this conguration.
Device Conguration Options for Fax
Conguration options for Faxes dene functions for fax devices including setup and default fax settings.
Blocked Fax List
This option lets you maintain the list of fax numbers that are blocked by the fax device. Your organization can
prevent unwanted fax solicitation by adding the fax number of the solicitor to the blocked fax list.
Following are steps to congure this option:
1. To add a fax number to block, type the number in Fax number and click Add Number.
2. To remove a fax number from the list, highlight it in Blocked fax numbers and click Remove.
Enable Fax Receive
Use this option to specify if the device accepts incoming faxes. This setting does not aect the ability of the
device to send faxes.
To allow the device to accept all incoming faxes, select the Enable Fax Receive checkbox.
-or-
To prevent the device from accepting any incoming faxes, clear the Enable Fax Receive checkbox.
Fax Activity Log
Use this option to specify whether the fax activity log is printed, cleared, or both. The fax activity log contains a
record of all incoming and outgoing fax calls that have occurred since the last time the fax activity log was
cleared. You should periodically print the fax activity log for record-keeping purposes, and then clear the fax
activity log to prevent it from becoming too large.
To congure this option, select Clear, Print, or Print and Clear from the drop-down list. The log is printed and
cleared when you apply the settings for the digital send device.
Fax Answer Mode
This option lets you select the answer mode for this device. Manual mode requires user input and Automatic
does not.
376 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Fax Answer Mode Settings
This option lets you select the answer mode for this device. Options are:
●Manual: requires user input.
●Automatic: requires no user input.
●Telephone Answering Machine (TAM): a telephone answering machine is attached to the Auxiliary (Aux)
phone port of the product. The product only listens for fax tones after the answering machine has picked
up the call; it will not pick up any incoming calls.
●Fax/Tel: The product must automatically pick up the call and determine if the call is a voice or fax call. If the
call is a fax call, the product handles the call as usual. If the call is a voice call, an audible synthesized ring is
generated to alert the user of an incoming voice call.
Following are steps to congure this option:
1. Select the setting.
2. If you select Fax/Tel, specify the number of rings and the answer ring pattern.
Fax Archive
Use this option to specify a particular fax number for archiving the fax job in addition to the ones specied by the
user. This is useful if you want to track the fax jobs sent to the printer.
To congure this option, select Enable fax archive and then type the fax number.
Fax Archive Setting
Use this option to congure the type of fax archive.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the Fax archive setting:
●Disabled: No archiving of faxes will occur.
●Fax: All faxes are sent to this fax number. Enter the fax number in the Fax archive number text box.
●Email: All faxes are archived to the email address specied. Enter the email address in the Fax archive
email address text box. To specify multiple email addresses, separate the email addresses by a
semicolon. This option can be enabled for Send and receive, Send, or Receive.
NOTE: To enable the Fax archive to email, an SMTP gateway must be congured on the Email
Settings and an administrator email address must also be congured on the General Settings page.
2. Select when to archive faxes: Send and receive, Send, or Receive.
3. To disable the printing of incoming faxes when the faxes are successfully archived, select the Disable print
on incoming faxes checkbox.
NOTE: This option is available only when Email is selected in the Fax archive setting list and the Send and
receive or Receive option is selected in the When to archive faxes section.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 377
Fax Archiving
Use this option to enable fax archiving and specify the type of faxes that are archived. You can specify if faxes
are archived or printed or both, and specify how faxes are archived.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To specify how faxes are handled, select one of the following options from the Fax Archiving list:
●Archive and print: Faxes are archived and printed.
●Archive only: Faxes are archived, but are not printed.
●Do not archive (print only): Faxes are printed, but are not archived.
2. To specify how faxes are archived, select one of the following options from the Archive Destination list:
●Email: A copy of the fax is sent to the address specied in the Fax archiving email address eld.
●FTP: A copy of the fax is saved on the FTP server specied in the FTP settings section.
●Network Folder: A copy of the fax is saved in the shared network folder specied in the Folder
settings section.
3. To specify the type of faxes that are archived, select one of the following options from the Type of fax job
to archive list:
●Receive Only: Only incoming faxes are archived.
●Send and Receive: Outgoing and incoming faxes are archived.
●Send Only: Only outgoing faxes are archived.
4. If you selected Email from the Archive Destination list, enter the email address where copies of the faxes
are sent in the Fax archiving email address eld.
5. If you selected Network Folder from the Archive Destination list, specify the following options in the Folder
settings section:
●UNC folder path: The UNC path of the network folder where the archived faxes are saved. The path
must be specied in the format \\servername\sharename.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
–Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_folderpath%%
–Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: \\servername\%%var_sharename%%
Example: \\servername\%%var_sharename%%faxarchive
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
378 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
●Windows domain: The Windows domain where the network folder is located. The domain name must
be less than 128 characters.
●File Name Prex: The prex added to the lename of the archived faxes.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
–Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_filenameprefix%%
–Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: fax%%var_faxfilename%%
Example: fax%%var_faxfilename%%archive
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
●User name: The user name required to access the network folder.
●Password: The password required to access the network folder.
●Verify Folder Access: Click this button to verify that the specied location and credentials for the
network folder are valid.
6. If you selected FTP from the Archive Destination list, specify the following options in the FTP settings
section:
●FTP server: The FTP server where the archived faxes are saved. The server name is required and
must be less than 256 characters.
●Port: The FTP port where the archived faxes are saved. The port number must be from 1 through
65535.
●FTP folder path: The path of the folder on the FTP server where the archived faxes are saved.
●File Name Prex: The prex added to the lename of the archived faxes.
●User name: The user name required to access the FTP server.
●Password: The password required to access the FTP server.
●Verify Access: Click this button to verify that the specied location and credentials for the FTP server
are valid.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 379
Fax Billing Code
This option lets you specify the billing code information for the digital send device. Billing codes provide a way to
track faxes from dierent locations. When supported by the fax method, billing codes can be used to track the
fax source to a specic machine or sender.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To allow the user to enter a billing code other than the default, select Yes from Editable by the user.
2. Type the default billing code value in Default billing code.
3. Select the minimum number of characters that a user is allowed to enter as a valid billing code from
Minimum length. (The maximum number of characters allowed for a billing code is 16.)
Fax Forwarding
Use this option to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to another fax number.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To congure this option, select Enable Fax Forwarding.
2. Select the type of fax job to forward.
3. Type the fax phone number for all copies of incoming and outgoing faxes to be forwarded to.
Fax General
This option lets you specify advanced fax settings for the digital send device. You can specify the modem and
ringer volumes, whether the header information is overlaid on top of the fax image, and whether the fax device
should use JBIG compression or Error Correction Mode (ECM). Printing the header over the top of the fax image
instead of above it reduces the chance that each faxed page is larger than the selected paper size and prints as
two pages on the receiving fax device.
JBIG compression is a protocol that allows for faster fax sending between two JBIG compliant fax devices. It is
possible that older fax machines may fail to connect when JBIG is enabled. Error Correction Mode (ECM) should
normally be enabled, except in extreme circumstances where line conditions are too poor to support ECM faxes.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the fax modem volume from Modem volume.
2. Select the fax ringer volume from the Ringer volume.
3. The phone number, time, and date are stamped at the top of all outgoing faxes. To print this information
over a small portion of the top of the fax image, select the Overlay header.
4. To disable JBIG compression, select the Disable JBIG compression.
5. To disable Error Correction Mode, select the Disable error correction.
Fax Header
You can specify the company name and fax number to be included at the top of your faxes.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
380 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. Type the company name in Company name.
2. Type the fax number in Fax number.
Fax Header Settings
Use this option to specify information about the origin of sent faxes. You can include Company Name, Phone
Number, and Country/Region of origin.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Type the phone number from which the device is dialing in Phone number.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_phone_number%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: 971%%var_phone_number%%
Example: 1%%var_number%%9000
2. Type the name of the company of origin in the Company name.
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in between the
starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_company_name%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
Example: ABC Company%%var_company_state%%
Example: ABC Company%%var_company_state%%@YourService
3. Select the country/region of origin from the Location drop-down list.
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more information on
variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 381
Fax Maximum Baud Rate
Use this option to specify the maximum baud rate for the fax transmission. If the fax is having communication
issues use this setting to select a slower baud rate to determine if the error is being caused by the phone line.
To congure this option, select the baud rate from the drop-down list.
Fax Maximum Baud Rate - Receive
Use this option to specify the maximum baud rate (Kilobits per second) for receiving faxes. The baud rate is
normally set to the highest value available. The fax modem negotiates the appropriate speed up to this setting
while receiving faxes.
If the fax modem is having communication issues, set this option to a slower baud rate to determine if the phone
line is causing the error.
To congure this option, select the baud rate from the drop-down list.
Fax Maximum Baud Rate - Send
Use this option to specify the maximum baud rate (Kilobits per second) for sending faxes. The baud rate is
normally set to the highest value available. The fax modem negotiates the appropriate speed up to this setting
while sending faxes.
If the fax modem is having communication issues, set this option to a slower baud rate to determine if the phone
line is causing the error.
To congure this option, select the baud rate from the drop-down list.
Fax Modem Settings
Similar to a fax machine, the digital send device sends scanned documents to a fax phone number. Specify the
fax settings to ensure that the fax line associated with the digital send device is properly congured.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the country/region of origin from Country/region.
2. Optional: Type the name of the company of origin in Company name.
3. Type the phone number from which the device is dialing in Phone number.
4. If a prex number is required by the local phone system, select Enable dialing prex and then type it in
Dialing prex.
Fax Notication
The digital send device can generate notication reports to provide further details about the result of a fax send
or receive operation. Use this option to specify when the digital send device generates notication reports and
how those reports are delivered to the user. Depending on your needs, you can congure the device to deliver
notication reports regularly or only when specic types of errors occur.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
382 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. Select the condition when fax notications should be sent from Condition upon which to notify.
2. Select the notication delivery method from the Method used to deliver notication:
NOTE: The device must be correctly congured to use either option.
●Print: print the fax notication report directly at the digital send device.
●Email Sender: send the fax notication report to the user’s email address.
3. To include a thumbnail image of each fax with the fax notication report, select Yes from Include
thumbnail.
Fax Number Conrmation
When this option is enabled, prior to sending a fax the device displays a conrmation screen asking for the fax
number again to ensure the number is correct. This is useful in companies and oces that often need to send
restricted and condential information via fax.
To enable this option, select Enabled.
Fax Printing
This option lets you specify the fax printing settings for the fax capable device. You can specify a PIN to secure
incoming fax documents and prevent unauthorized users from printing them. You can also specify whether
incoming faxes are printed or stored. For printed faxes, you can schedule when they are printed. If incoming
faxes contain sensitive information, securing the fax modem with a PIN prevents unauthorized users from
printing those faxes. If the fax device is not attended regularly, storing all received faxes or specifying a printing
schedule prevents the faxes from being printed when the device is unattended.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Type a numeric PIN in PIN number.
Conrm the numeric PIN by typing it again in Conrm PIN number.
2. To specify the printing mode settings for the fax, select one of the following options:
●Print All Received Faxes: Print all faxes when they are received.
●Store All Received Faxes: Store all received faxes on the device. The faxes can only be printed by
entering the correct PIN on the device.
●Use Fax Printing Schedule: Specify the times when incoming faxes can be printed. You can specify the
days and times when the device is unlocked.
Specify the days that the digital send device is unlocked by selecting the appropriate checkboxes in
the Week day column.
Select a start time from Start printing faxes and a stop time from Stop printing faxes.
NOTE: If you do not specify a schedule then the device stores all received faxes.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 383
Fax Printing Schedule
This option lets you specify how faxes are stored and printed. You can choose to always print faxes, always store
faxes, or print faxes according to a specic daily schedule. Depending on the security needs of your organization,
you may choose to always store faxes or only print them during a time when an administrator is present to
collect them. Choose the fax printing schedule that best suits the needs of your organization.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select one of the three options:
●Always store faxes: store all received faxes in memory.
●Always print faxes: print each fax as it is received.
●Use fax printing schedule: print received faxes according to a specied schedule.
2. If you select the Use fax printing schedule option, specify the fax printing schedule. For each day of the
week, select the checkbox in the second column, and then enter the time you want faxes to start printing in
the Start printing faxes eld. Select the checkbox in the fourth column, and then enter the time you want
faxes to stop printing in the Stop printing faxes eld.
You can also enable or disable the Use Holiday Sleep Schedule option. If you enable this option, incoming
faxes are stored during the holidays, and then printed after the holiday.
NOTE: Some device models do not support the Use Holiday Sleep Schedule option.
Fax Receive
Use this option to specify the most ecient fax receive settings for the digital send device. You can specify which
bins on the digital send device the faxes are printed from and delivered to, how the faxes are formatted for
printing, the number of rings the fax device waits before answering an incoming call, and whether the device
should forward the fax document to another fax capable machine. These settings will ensure that the majority of
the incoming faxes are received successfully and delivered to the user in the most eective manner.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the number of the input tray from which the digital send device prints faxes from Fax paper tray.
2. Select the number of the output bin to which the digital send device prints faxes from Fax destination bin.
3. Select the number of rings that the fax machine waits before answering an incoming call from the Number
of rings before answering.
4. To stamp received faxes with available information from the sender, select Stamp received faxes.
5. To scale the incoming fax image to the size of the paper contained in the input tray, select Fit image to
page size.
6. To forward incoming faxes on the digital send device to another fax capable machine, type the phone
number of the target fax in Forwarding number.
NOTE: Even if the digital send device forwards a fax, it will still handle the fax normally by printing it,
emailing it, or storing it in memory.
384 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Fax Receive - Disposition
This option lets you dene what a device should do when receiving a fax. Either print the fax or forward it to a
dierent fax number.
Fax Receive - Other Options
This option lets you select additional options the device can do when receiving a fax. You can allow users to get
faxes even when attached to an extension phone, let the device detect if there is silence after the incoming
phone is answered, or even force each incoming fax to be time-stamped.
Fax Receive - Setup
Use this option to specify the fax receive settings. You can specify which bins the faxes are delivered to, how the
faxes are formatted for printing, the number of rings each fax device waits before answering an incoming call,
and whether each device should forward the fax document to another fax capable machine. These settings will
ensure that the majority of the incoming faxes are received successfully and delivered in the most eective
manner possible.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To forward incoming faxes to another fax capable machine, select Enabled from the Fax forwarding drop-
down list.
2. To stamp incoming faxes with available information from the sender, select Enabled from the Stamp
received faxes drop-down list.
3. Select the number of retry attempts when the receiving line is busy from the Rings to answer drop-down
list.
4. Type the ring interval (in milliseconds) in the Ring interval text box.
5. Select the ringer volume for incoming faxes from the Ringer volume drop-down list.
6. To scale the incoming fax image to the size of the paper contained in the input tray, select Enabled from
the Fit to page drop-down list.
7. Select the bin that incoming faxes are printed out of from the Paper selection drop-down list.
8. Select which output tray the device prints faxes from the Output bin drop-down list.
Fax Receive Settings
Use this option to specify the fax receive settings. You can specify which bins the faxes are delivered to, how the
faxes are formatted for printing, the number of rings each fax device waits before answering an incoming call,
and whether each device should forward the fax document to another fax capable machine. These settings
ensure that the majority of the incoming faxes are received successfully and delivered in the most eective
manner possible.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the ringer volume for incoming faxes from the Ringer volume drop-down list.
2. Select the number of retry attempts when the receiving line is busy from the Rings to answer drop-down
list.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 385
3. Select the speed for the fax from the Fax receive speed drop-down list.
4. Type the ring interval (in milliseconds) in the Ring interval text box.
5. Type the ring frequency in the Ring frequency text box.
6. Enter the time in milliseconds between rings that must elapse before the modem can detect an incoming
ring in the Ring burst o time (220-600) ms text box.
7. Select the duplex setting to use when printing incoming faxes from the Duplexing drop-down list.
8. Select which paper to use for faxes in the Paper selection drop-down list.
9. Select which output tray the device prints faxes from the Output bin drop-down list.
10. To scale the incoming fax image to the size of the paper contained in the input tray, select the Fit to page
option.
11. To stamp incoming faxes with available information from the sender, select the Stamp received faxes
option.
12. Select which circumstances to deliver a notication in Condition on which to notify drop-down list.
13. Select the method to deliver the notication from the Method used to deliver notication drop-down list.
14. Type the email address for notications to be sent to in the Notication email text box.
15. If you are sending faxes using the internal modem, and you include the thumbnail of the rst page, select
Include thumbnail.
Fax Reporting and Error Corrections
This option lets you set up options with errors and tracking reports. Enabling error correction lets the device
automatically attempt error correction with faxes. You can also select how often the fax log is printed by
selecting the frequency in the drop-down list. You can also choose to include the rst page or not.
Fax Reports and Logs
This option lets you specify whether to print or clear the fax activity logs. The fax activity log contains a record of
all the incoming and outgoing fax calls that have occurred since the last time the fax log was cleared.
Periodically, the log should be printed for record-keeping purposes and then cleared. This prevents the log from
becoming too large.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To print the fax activity log, select Print activity log. The log is printed when the settings for the digital send
device are applied.
2. To clear the fax activity log, select Clear activity log. The log is cleared when the settings for the digital send
device are applied.
Fax Resolution Quality
This option lets you specify the resolution quality of outbound faxes. Use the resolution setting to manage the
eciency of the fax sending operation. Lower resolution typically results in faster fax send times, but the quality
of the fax document is reduced.
386 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
NOTE: The resolution setting cannot be changed by the user.
To congure this option, select the quality of outbound faxes from the Resolution drop-down list.
Fax Ring Burst O Time
Use this option to specify a the amount of time between rings that must elapse before the modem can detect an
incoming ring (or, Ring Burst O Time). You may want to specify a custom value for Ring Burst O Time if you use
the fax line for multiple purposes and only want the fax answering for a specic ring duration.
To congure this option, select Enable Custom Ring Burst O Time and then type the value in milliseconds in
Ring Burst O Time.
Fax Ring Frequency
Use this option to specify a particular frequency for the fax ring. You may need to specify a custom value in order
to x oscillations generated by a custom PBX policy. This option might be required by technical support to adjust
the fax ring communication.
NOTE: Change this setting only when directed by an HP technical support agent.
To congure this option, select Enable custom ring frequency and then type a numeric value.
Fax Send
This option lets you specify the most ecient settings for sending faxes from the digital send device. These
settings aect how the device dials outbound faxes and how it behaves when the receiving line fails to answer
the fax. These settings will ensure that the majority of the outbound faxes are received successfully while
minimizing time spent attempting to send faxes to unreachable recipients.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the dialing mode from the Dialing mode drop-down list.
2. To have the fax wait for a dial tone before dialing for an outbound fax document, select Yes from the
Detect dial tone drop-down list.
3. Select the number of retry attempts when the receiving line is busy from the Redial on busy drop-down
list.
4. Select the number of retry attempts when the receiving line fails to answer from the Redial on no answer
drop-down list.
5. Select the number of minutes to wait between retry attempts from the Redial interval drop-down list.
Fax Send - Dialing Mode
This option lets you sets the default dialing mode for dialing a number on a fax send (Tone or Pulse). This lets
you select the dialing mode that suits the characteristics of the available communication line.
To congure this option, select the radio button for the dialing mode.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 387
Fax Send - Other Options or Other Settings
This option lets you dene what the device should do if the number dialed is busy or there is no answer.
Fax Send - Resolution
This option lets you sets the default resolution that will be used when sending faxes. The available selections are
Standard, Fine, Superne, and Photo. This lets you control the quality of the sent faxes when the default setting
is used.
To congure this option, select the desired resolution.
Fax Send - Setup
Use this option to specify the send settings for faxes. You can specify the modem and ringer volumes, the dial
and redial settings, and whether the fax device should use JBIG compression or Error Correction Mode (ECM).
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the fax dial volume from the Fax dial volume drop-down list.
2. To enable Error Correction Mode (ECM), select Enabled from the Error correction mode drop-down list. ECM
should normally be enabled, except in extreme circumstances where line conditions are too poor to
support ECM faxes.
3. To enable JBIG compression, select Enabled from the JBIG compression drop-down list. JBIG compression is
a protocol that allows for faster fax sending between two JBIG compliant fax devices. It is possible that
older fax machines may fail to connect when JBIG is enabled. For such a scenario, use the JBIG disable
option.
4. Select Tone or Pulse from the Dialing mode drop-down list.
5. Select the number of retry attempts when the receiving line is busy, from the Redial on busy drop-down
list.
6. Select the number of retry attempts when the receiving line fails to answer from the Redial on no answer
drop-down list.
7. To have the fax wait for a dial tone before dialing for an outbound fax document, select Enabled from the
Detect dial tone drop-down list.
8. To specify a dialing prex, type the value in the Dialing prex text box.
9. To print the billing code report, select the Print billing code list checkbox.
Fax Send Settings
Use this option to specify the settings for sending faxes. You can specify the fax send method, scan settings,
notication settings, internal modem settings, LAN fax settings, and Internet fax settings.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable sending faxes, select the Enable fax send checkbox.
2. Select the method the device uses to send faxes from the Fax send method drop-down list.
388 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
3. In the Common Job Settings—Scan settings section, specify the following settings for the original
documents and scanned output:
●Default resolution: Select the default resolution used when the original documents are scanned.
●Original size: Select the default size of the original documents.
●Custom dimension units: If you select Custom from the Original size drop-down list, select the default
unit of measurement used for the original documents.
●Custom X dimension: If you select Custom from the Original size drop-down list, enter the default
width of the original documents.
If the Custom dimension units option is set to inches, the default width must be between 54.86 mm
(2.16 in) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in).
If the Custom dimension units option is set to mm, the default width must be between 52 mm
(2.047 in) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in).
●Custom Y dimension: If you select Custom from the Original size drop-down list, enter the default
height of the original documents.
If the Custom dimension units option is set to inches, the default width must be between 73.66 mm
(2.9 in) and 863.6 mm (34 in).
If the Custom dimension units option is set to mm, the default width must be between 73.7 mm
(2.902 in) and 863.6 mm (34 in).
●Original sides: Select the default number of sides of the original documents.
●Optimize text/picture: Select the default type of content optimized when the original documents are
scanned.
●Optimize for: If you select Manually adjust from the Optimize text/picture drop-down list, select the
value that species whether the original documents are optimized more for text or more for pictures
by default.
●Content orientation: Select the default orientation of the original documents.
●2-sided format: Select the default duplex format of the original documents.
If you select Book style, the pages are turned like a book (long edge).
If you select Flip style, the pages are turned like a ip book (short edge).
●Background cleanup: Select the default amount of background removed when the original
documents are scanned.
●Darkness: Select the default amount of exposure applied when the original documents are scanned.
●Contrast: Select the default amount of contrast applied when the original documents are scanned.
●Sharpness: Select the default amount of sharpness applied when the original documents are
scanned. A higher value produces sharper output.
●Image preview: Specify whether the device displays a preview of the scanned output before sending
the fax.
If you select the Make optional option, users can choose whether a preview is displayed before they
send a fax.
●Misfeed detection: Select this checkbox to stop scanning when the device senses that multiple pages
are being fed at one time.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 389
NOTE: To prevent the device from reporting a jam when a user scans an original document that has
multiple pages, such as a folded booklet, make sure that the Misfeed detection checkbox is not
selected. The device does not report a misfeed when multiple pages are fed at one time.
●Job build: Select this checkbox to allow users to combine multiple scanned pages into a single
outgoing fax. If this checkbox is not selected, multiple scanned pages result in multiple outgoing
faxes.
●Enable Blank Page Suppression: Select this checkbox to remove blank pages from the outgoing faxes.
4. In the Common Job Settings—Notication settings section, specify the following settings for fax
notication reports:
●Condition on which to notify: Select when the device generates notication reports for sent faxes.
●Include thumbnail: Select this checkbox to include a thumbnail image of each fax with the fax
notication report.
●Method used to deliver notication: Select how the device delivers fax notication reports.
●Email address: Enter the email address to which the notication reports are sent.
5. In the Common Job Settings—General Fax Send Settings section, select the Fax number conrmation
checkbox to display a conrmation screen asking the user to enter the fax number again. This option is
useful for companies that send restricted and condential information via fax.
6. In the Internal modem—General fax settings section, specify the following settings for the internal modem
on the device:
●Enable PC fax send: Select this checkbox to allow users to send faxes from their computers.
●Enable error correction mode: Select this checkbox to enable Error Correction Mode (ECM). If ECM is
enabled, the receiving fax device checks the fax information for errors. If the receiving fax device
detects an error, it requests the sending fax device to resend all or part of the fax.
NOTE: ECM is normally enabled. However, if the line conditions are too poor to support ECM faxes,
do not select the Enable error correction mode checkbox.
●Enable JBIG compression: Select this checkbox to enable JBIG compression. JBIG compression is a
protocol that allows for faster fax transmissions between two JBIG-compliant fax devices.
NOTE: Older fax machines might fail to connect if JBIG compression is enabled.
●Enable overlay header: Select this checkbox to overlay or prepend the fax header to the fax pages.
●Enable speed dialing matching: Select this checkbox to enable speed dial matching. When speed dial
matching is enabled, walk-up users can enter speed dial numbers instead of full fax phone numbers
when sending a fax.
7. In the Internal modem—Fax dialing settings section, specify the following settings for the internal modem
on the device:
●Fax dial volume: Select the volume of the internal modem dialer.
●Dialing mode: Select the dialing mode used.
●Dialing prex: Enter the dialing prex added to all phone numbers when dialed. For example, enter 9
if it is required to access an outside line.
●Fax send speed: Select the speed used to process outgoing faxes.
●Redial interval: Enter the number of minutes that the internal modem waits between redialing
attempts.
390 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●Redial on no answer: Enter the number of times that the internal modem redials when there is no
answer.
●Redial on busy: Enter the number of times that the internal modem redials when there is a busy
signal.
●Redial on error: Select this checkbox to enable the internal modem to automatically redial if a
communication error occurs while sending the fax. Select the number of times that the internal
modem redials from the list.
●Detect dial tone: Select this checkbox to have the internal modem wait for a dial tone before dialing.
8. In the Internal modem—Billing code settings section, specify the following settings for the internal modem
on the device:
●Enable billing codes: Select this checkbox to prompt users to enter a billing code when faxes are sent.
If this option is selected, the billing code that the user enters is included in the billing code report.
●Default billing code: Enter the default billing code used.
●Minimum length: Enter the minimum number of characters users can enter as a valid billing code.
NOTE: The maximum number of characters allowed for a billing code is 16.
●Allow users to edit billing code: Select this checkbox to allow users to edit the billing code when
sending a fax. If this checkbox is not selected, the default billing code is always used.
9. In the LAN fax setup—LAN fax service settings section, specify the following settings for a third-party fax
device used over a LAN connection:
●Third party LAN fax product: Select the third-party LAN fax device used.
●File format: Specify the le format used for outgoing faxes.
10. In the LAN fax setup—Folder settings section, specify the following settings for accessing the server where
the LAN fax device stores fax jobs:
●UNC folder path: Enter the path to the folder where fax jobs are stored using the Universal Naming
Convention (UNC) format. The format for a UNC path is “\\server\share\directory
path”, and it is not case-sensitive.
●Windows domain: If the network is a Windows-based domain, enter the domain name.
●User name: If the network requires authentication to access the fax folders, enter a valid user name.
●Password: If the network requires authentication to access the fax folders, enter the password for the
user name.
11. In the LAN fax setup—Dialing settings section, specify the following settings for the LAN fax device:
●Maximum retry attempts: Enter the maximum number of times that the LAN fax device tries to send
the fax again if the rst attempt fails.
●Retry interval (minutes): Enter the number of minutes that the LAN fax device waits before trying to
send the fax again.
12. In the LAN fax setup—Input settings section, specify the following settings for the LAN fax device:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 391
●Enable notication: Select this checkbox to send a notication when an error occurs sending the fax
to the network folder.
●Notication timeout (minutes): Enter the number of minutes that the LAN fax device waits before
sending a notication when an error occurs.
●Enable error correction: Select this checkbox to enable Error Correction Mode (ECM). When ECM is
enabled, the LAN fax device resends any portions of the fax that were not successfully sent.
13. In the LAN fax setup—Output settings section, specify the following settings for the LAN fax device:
●LAN fax transmission speed: Select the transmission speed used for outgoing faxes.
●Enable cover page: Select this checkbox to include a cover page with outgoing faxes.
14. In the Internet fax setup section, specify the following settings for an Internet fax service:
●Internet fax provider domains: Enter the domain for the Internet fax service provider, and then click
the Add button.
●To delete a domain, select the domain from the list, and then click the Remove button.
-or-
To delete all of the domains, click the Remove All button.
●Default internet fax provider domain: Select the default domain that is used for the Internet fax
provider.
●Default account email address: Enter the default email 'from' address used to send faxes. The email
address must comply with RFC 5322, 5321, and 3696.
●T37 prex: Enter the T37 prex used to send faxes. The prex can contain characters 0 through 9 and
a comma (,).
●File format: Select the le format used to send faxes.
●If available, use the signed in user's email address as the fax account address: Select this checkbox to
use the signed-in user's email address as the fax account address when faxes are sent.
●Auto complete to North American Numbering Plan (NANP) format using area code: Select this
checkbox to automatically add the area code to the fax number when faxes are sent. Enter the area
code in the text box.
Fax Send Setup
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Enable fax send: enable sending faxes and specify the fax send method.
●Select Enable fax send.
●Select a send method from Fax send method.
2. Common settings – Billing code settings: enable and congure billing codes. Billing codes provide a way to
track faxes from dierent locations. When supported by the fax method, billing codes can be used to track
the fax source to a specic machine or sender.
●To enable billing codes, select Enable billing code.
●To specify the default billing code value, type the billing code value in Default billing code.
392 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●To allow the user to enter a billing code other than the default, select Editable by user.
●To specify the minimum number of characters a user is allowed to enter as a valid billing code, type
the value in Minimum length.
3. Common settings – Default original settings: specify the default settings for scanning fax originals.
●Select the default resolution from the Default resolution drop-down list.
●Select the default two-sided format from the 2-sided format drop-down list.
●Select the default original size from the Original size drop-down list.
●Select the default background cleanup setting from the Background cleanup drop-down list.
●Select the default original number of sides from the Original sides drop-down list.
●Select the darkness setting from the Darkness drop-down list.
●Select the default quality optimization setting from the Optimize text/picture drop-down list.
●Select the default sharpness setting from the Sharpness drop-down list.
●Select the default orientation from the Content orientation drop-down list.
●Select the default contrast setting from the Contrast drop-down list.
4. Common settings – Default notication settings: set the device to send a notication whenever a fax is
sent.
●Select a value from the Condition on which to notify drop-down list:
–Always: always send notices when a fax is sent.
–Never: never send notices when a fax is sent.
–All errors: send notices only when there is an error.
●Select a delivery method from the Method used to deliver notication drop-down list:
–Email: send the notications to the administrator's email address.
–Print: print the notications.
5. LAN fax setup – LAN fax service settings: specify the third-party fax product to use over a LAN connection.
You can also specify the le format for the faxes.
●Select the fax product from the Third party LAN fax product drop-down list.
●Select the fax le format from the File format drop-down list
6. LAN fax setup – Common job settings: specify common information about the network that is used to store
fax jobs. If you have congured your fax device to store faxes on a network server, the common job
settings specify the network information needed to access the server. Save device resources by storing
faxes on a server instead of the device.
●Select the type of network the folder is located on from the Folder is located on drop-down list. The
type of network determines the folder format.
●Type the folder path in Common folder path (UNC).
●If the network is a Windows-based domain, type the domain name in Windows domain.
●If the network requires authentication to access the fax folders, type a valid user name in User name
and type a valid password in Password.
●Type the NDS Tree value in NDS tree and type the NDS Context value in NDS context.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 393
7. LAN fax setup – Dialing settings: specify the dialing settings for sending faxes. These settings aect how
the devices dial outbound faxes and how they behave when the receiving line fails to answer a fax. Use this
section to specify the most ecient fax dialing settings for your organization. These settings will ensure
that the majority of the outbound faxes are received successfully while minimizing time spent attempting
to send faxes to unreachable recipients.
●Enter the maximum number of retry attempts the fax should make in Maximum retry attempts.
●Type the retry interval in minutes in the Retry interval (minutes) text box
8. LAN fax setup – Input settings: specify the settings for incoming faxes on the receiving device. Choose the
settings that best suit the needs of your organization. If you need notications for each received fax, you
can turn on fax notications. If there are problems with the quality of the incoming line, you can turn on
Error correction mode to compensate.
●To enable notications, select Enabled from the Notication drop-down list.
To disable notications, select Disabled from the Notication drop-down list.
●To turn on Error correction mode, select On from the Error correction mode drop-down list.
To turn o ECM, select O from the Error correction mode drop-down list.
●Type the number of minutes for notication timeout in Notication timeout (minutes).
9. LAN fax setup – Output settings: specify the settings for outgoing faxes on the sending device. Choose the
fax transmission speed that best suits the speed capabilities of your organization's outgoing fax lines. If
your organization requires a cover page, you can turn it on.
●Select the fax transmission speed setting from the LAN fax transmission speed drop-down list.
●To turn on the cover page for outgoing faxes, select On from the Cover page drop-down list.
To turn o the cover page, select O from the Cover page drop-down list.
10. Internet fax setup: if your organization uses a separate fax service over an internet connection, use this
option to enable sending faxes from your device through the internet fax service.
NOTE: The device must be congured to send emails before the internet fax feature can be set up.
●Type the domain name for the internet provider in Internet fax provider domain.
●Type the email address for the account that processes the faxes in Default account email address.
●If the internet fax provider requires a T37 Prex for fax emails, type the prex in T37 prex.
●Select the email le format from the File format drop-down list.
●If you want to use the user's email address as the fax account address, select If available, use the
signed in user's email address as the fax account address.
●If you want the area code for the fax number to auto-complete, select the Auto complete to North
American Numbering Plan (NANP) format using area code and type the area code in the
corresponding text box.
Fax Service
Use this option to enable the V.34 fax standard, print fax reports, and set the speaker mode.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
394 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. To print a T.30 report, select the Print T.30 report check box and then select when the report should print
from the When to print report drop-down list.
2. To enable or disable the V.34 fax standard, select Enabled or Disabled from the Fax V.34 drop-down list.
3. To adjust the speaker mode, select a value from the Speaker mode drop-down list.
Fax Time Format
This option lets you select the time format this device should use (12 hour or 24 hours).
Fax Transmit Signal Loss
Use this option to specify the decibel range for transmit signal loss. This compensates for phone line signal loss.
You can increase the amount of decibels used by the fax to compensate for weaknesses in the phone line signal.
To congure this option, type a decibel value in the Decibels eld.
Import Speed Dials
Use this option to import a predened list of fax speed dials from a comma separated value (CSV) le directly
into the internal memory of the device. To send a fax, you must provide a fax number. The process of entering
multiple fax numbers can be simplied by providing an speed dial list. Importing fax numbers into the internal
memory of the device provides a list of fax numbers for users to choose from.
The CSV le should be in the following format:
Fax number, user name, distribution list name, code
where:
●fax number is the fax destination number.
●user name is the sign in name. This value is always 'MFP Public'.
●distribution list name is the name of a distribution list of fax numbers. The code is a unique number
assigned to the distribution list name.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To import a speed dial list, click File to locate the CSV le using a dialog window, or type the path and
lename of the CSV le in the text box.
2. To clear the speed dial list on the device, select Delete all device contacts.
LAN Fax Service Settings
Use this option to specify the settings that the device uses to send faxes through a LAN fax service.
CAUTION: When you enable or make any changes to this conguration option, the fax send method is
automatically set to LAN Fax Service.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Fax 395
1. In the LAN fax service settings section, specify the following options:
●Third-party LAN fax product: Select the LAN fax vendor that the device uses to send faxes.
●File format: Select the le format that the LAN fax vendor uses for faxes.
2. In the Folder settings section, specify the following options:
●Folder is located on: Select the platform on which the fax folder is located.
●UNC folder path: Enter the path to the folder where outgoing faxes are stored using the Universal
Naming Convention (UNC) format. The format for a UNC path is \\server\share
\directory_path. The UNC path is not case-sensitive.
●Windows domain: Enter the Windows domain name where the fax folder is located. The format of the
domain name must comply with DNS standards. The domain name can be a maximum of 128
characters.
●User name: If the network requires authentication to access the fax folder, enter a valid user name.
The user name can be a maximum of 255 characters.
●Password: If the network requires authentication to access the fax folder, enter the password for the
specied user name. The password can be a maximum of 255 characters.
●Test Folder Access: Click this button to verify that the specied location and credentials for the fax
folder are valid.
3. In the Dialing settings section, specify the following options:
●Maximum retry attempts: Enter the maximum number of times that the device tries to send a fax
again if the rst attempt fails. Valid values are from 0 to 99.
●Retry interval (minutes): Enter the number of minutes that the device waits before trying to send a
fax again. Valid values are from 0 to 999.
4. In the Input settings section, specify the following options:
●Condition on which to notify: Select one of the following options to specify when the device sends a
notication for outgoing faxes:
–Do not notify: The device does not send a notication under any conditions. This option is
equivalent to the Never option in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
–Notify only if job fails: The device sends a notication only when a fax job fails. This option is
equivalent to the For errors on any faxes option in the EWS.
–Notify when job completes: The device sends a notication when a fax job completes. This
option is equivalent to the Always option in the EWS.
●Error Correction Mode: Select the option to enable or disable Error Correction Mode (ECM). If you
select the On option, the device resends any portion of a fax that was not successfully sent.
●Method used to deliver notication: Select one of the following options to specify how the device
delivers notication reports when the notication condition occurs:
–Email Sender: The device sends the notication report to the email address that is specied by
using the Administrator Information conguration option.
–Print: The device prints the notication report.
●Email Notication Attachment: Select this checkbox to send the scanned pages to the specied email
address as an attachment.
5. In the Output settings section, specify the following options:
396 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●LAN fax transmission speed: Select the transmission speed that is used for outgoing faxes. If you
select the Default option, the transmission speed that is dened for the device is used.
●Cover page: Select the option that species if a cover page is included with outgoing faxes.
6. In the Quality section, select the default resolution that is used for outgoing faxes from the Resolution list.
PC Fax Send
Use this option to specify whether users can send faxes from their computer.
To allow users to send faxes from their computer, select the Enabled option.
To prevent users from sending faxes from their computer, select the Disabled option.
TCF Settings
Use this option to optimize fax performance by ne tuning the fax ring frequency and TCF signals to best suit the
needs of your organization. If your fax device is having trouble sending outbound faxes, increasing the TCF delay
and extending the TCF signal may improve communication with dicult fax receivers. TCF is a series of zeros
sent to the receiver to conrm that the connection is working and to establish the optimal connection speed. The
sending fax generates a series of TCF signals at dierent speeds until it receives a Conrmation To Receive (CFR)
signal from the receiving fax. TCF T.30 delay species how long to wait before sending each TCF signal. TCF
extend species how long to extend the TCF signal beyond the default time length (1500 milliseconds).
Use the following steps to congure this option:
NOTE: By default, TCF T.30 delay and TCF extend values are set to the manufacturer's default.
1. To specify a custom TCF delay value, check the box next to Enable custom TCF T.30 delay and then type the
length for the delay in TCF T.30 delay. The value can be from 60 milliseconds to 255 milliseconds.
2. To specify a custom TCF extend value, check the box next to Enable custom TCF extend and then type the
length for the extend in TCF extend. The value can be from 0 milliseconds to 2550 milliseconds.
Device Conguration Options for File System
Conguration settings for File System are used to delete les on the device’s memory.
File System External Access
This option allows you to manage the access to le systems by various printer communication languages on a
device hard drive, which helps protect a device’s le system from unauthorized reading or writing of data. If you
disable a printer communication language, that printer communication language cannot read or write any data
to the le system on a device’s hard drive.
NOTE: All printer communication languages are enabled by default.
To congure this option, select the printer communication language or languages to enable.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for File System 397
File System Password
This option prevents unauthorized users from changing any le system conguration options and from
performing a secure storage erase operation. The le system password must be set to perform a secure storage
erase operation and to congure the secure le erase modes and the le system external access.
NOTE: For easier password management, it is recommended to set the same le system password for all
devices.
NOTE: The le system password needs to be set for a device before the new le erase mode can be congured.
The le system password should be set via a separate device conguration. Once set, the new le erase mode
value can be set.
To set the initial le system password for a device, type the password in File system password. Type the
password again in Conrm password.
Secure File Erase Mode
This option determines the behavior of a secure storage erase operation and the erase operation that a printer
automatically performs to make space available on a hard disk drive for incoming print jobs. The erase
operations are designed to add available space to a device’s hard disk drive and to prevent unauthorized users
from accessing condential information from a device’s hard disk drive or other erasable storage device. The
following are the supported secure le erase modes:
●Non-secure Fast Erase: Erases the le system references to operations, such as completed print jobs. By
erasing the references, space on the hard disk drive is made available. This is the fastest erase mode and
the default mode.
●Secure Fast Erase: Erases the le system references to operations and provides one layer of masking to
hide data stored on the hard disk drive or other erasable storage devices. This mode is slower than the
Non-secure Fast Erase but more secure.
●Secure Sanitizing Erase: Erases the le system references to operations and provides multiple layers of
masking to hide data stored on the hard disk drive or other erasable storage devices. This mode may
introduce a signicant performance impact to the device while the process is executing.
NOTE: The le system password needs to be set for a device before the new le erase mode can be congured.
The le system password should be set via a separate device conguration. Once set, the new le erase mode
value can be set.
To congure this option, select a le erase mode from the drop-down list.
Device Conguration Options for Network
Conguration options for Network dene network communication functions for the device including TCP/IP
setup, and protocols.
Bonjour Service Name (mDNS Service Name)
Use this option to congure a user-friendly service name for a device that is running in a Bonjour (mDNS)
environment. The service name is congured on the HP Jetdirect card. You can use this service name to easily
nd the device in the device lists.
398 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
To congure the Bonjour service name (mDNS Service Name), enter the name in the box.
Conguration Precedence
Use this option to congure the precedence that the device uses when setting several conguration parameters
(for example, hostname) by using dierent conguration methods. The order in which the conguration
methods are listed determines which conguration method has precedence over another method for duplicate
conguration parameter values. For example, a DHCP hostname overwrites a TFTP hostname if DHCP/BOOTP
has precedence over TFTP.
To specify the conguration precedence, select a method in the list, and then click Move Up or Move Down.
To restore the default conguration preference, click Reset.
NOTE: To specify the conguration precedence in a template or for multiple devices, you must click Reset.
Desired USB Mode
This option lets you specify the protocol that the USB uses to interface with this device. HP Jetdirect normally
uses the best protocol that the device supports. If a more complex interface does not work with the HP Jetdirect
print server, change this option to a simpler interface. If you select Automatic, the HP Jetdirect print server uses
the best protocol available. If you select Unidirectional, the HP Jetdirect print server uses the forward-data only
protocol (USB class 7.1.1). If you select Bidirectional, the HP Jetdirect print server uses the simple forward and
reverse data protocol (USB class 7.1.2). If you select Multiple Logical Channels (MLC), the HP Jetdirect print server
uses the HP-MLC protocol (USB class 7.1.2+).
To change the protocol, select the option for the protocol that you want this HP Jetdirect print server to use.
DHCP User Class Option (Tag 77)
Use this option to determine the manufacturer, type, model, and serial number of the device.
To congure this option, select the checkbox.
DHCPv4 FQDN compliance with RFC 4702
The Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol for IPv4 (DHCPv4) provides a mechanism for host conguration that
includes dynamically assigning IP addresses and fully qualied domain names (FQDNs). Use this option to enable
or disable DHCPv4 FQDN compliance with RFC 4702.
To enable DHCPv4 FQDN compliance with RFC 4702, select the checkbox.
To disable DHCPv4 FQDN compliance with RFC 4702, clear the checkbox.
HP Connection Inspector
Use this option to enable or disable HP Connection Inspector.
To enable the HP Connection Inspector information, select the Enable option.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 399
To disable the HP Connection Inspector information, select the Disable option.
DNS Server
If your network uses Domain Name System (DNS) services, use this option to specify the IP address of a primary
DNS server for specied devices. If a secondary DNS server is available on your network and can be congured
on the device, you may also specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. A secondary DNS server is used
when the primary DNS server is not available. Use Domain name to specify a Domain Name for this device. A
domain is a set of one or more IP addresses, and the Domain Name identies the domain in which the device
resides (for example, support.hp.com). A Domain Name typically consists of a series of labels separated by the
dot (.) character, ending with a predened sux to identify its top-level domain. For example, top-level
domain .com is used for commercial businesses, .edu for educational institutions, and .org for nonprot
organizations.
Devices on an IP network actually use IP addresses for communications. However, device IP addresses may
dynamically change or be dicult to remember, use or manage. Domain Name System (DNS) services are used
to automatically translate user-friendly Domain Names to corresponding device IP addresses. A server on the
network that provides this service is a DNS server.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server in Primary DNS server IP.
2. Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server in the Secondary DNS server IP.
NOTE: Some devices may not support conguration of a secondary DNS server.
3. To specify a Domain Name for a device, enter the Domain Name assigned to this device in Domain name.
(The entry is limited to 254 alphanumeric ASCII characters, including the dash (-) character and dot (.) label
separator.)
NOTE: When specifying the Domain Name, do not include the device host name. The entry in Domain
name is not the fully-qualied host name (for example, printer1.support.hp.com is a fully-qualied host
name for a device with host name “printer1” in the domain “support.hp.com”).
Error Handling
This option species how the HP Jetdirect EX print server handles error conditions. The print log provides
information that you can use to troubleshoot printer problems and recover from errors.
To congure this option, select one of the settings:
●Dump then Reboot: Device does a memory dump and then reboots.
●Reboot without Dump: Device reboots without doing a memory dump.
●Dump then Halt: Device does a memory dump but doesn’t do a reboot; operations are halted.
Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print allows customers to print web pages, emails, photos, and content from applications that have
integrated Google Cloud Print. Customers simply add the unique email address of their HP ePrint-enabled
product to their Google account, which provides the ability to print easily and securely from any Google Cloud
Print-enabled app, product, or service on any computer or smartphone to the selected HP ePrinter.
400 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use this option to enable or disable the Google Cloud Print feature on the printer or remove the Google Cloud
Print feature from the printer.
To congure the Google Cloud Print feature, select one of the following options from the list:
●Enable—Enables the Google Cloud Print feature on the printer. The printer must then be registered with
Google Cloud Print by using the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
●Disable—Disables the Google Cloud Print feature on the printer.
After the Google Cloud Print feature is disabled on the printer, you can use the printer EWS or
HP Web Jetadmin to enable the feature again.
●Remove—Removes the Google Cloud Print feature from the printer control panel and printer EWS.
After the Google Cloud Print feature is removed from the printer control panel and printer EWS, you must
use HP Web Jetadmin to enable the feature again.
HTTP Idle Timeout
Use this option to congure the amount of time (in seconds) that an HTTP connection to the device remains open
when there is no trac, such as when a print job stops sending data to the device.
To specify an HTTP idle timeout period, enter a value from 5 to 60. The default is 15.
To disable the HTTP idle timeout period, enter 0.
IPP Printer Install Wizard
This option lets you specify the URL for the Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) Printer Install Wizard link for this
printer. When you access this link, an Install Wizard runs that lets you create a print path between your computer
and this printer.
CAUTION: If you change this URL, the availability of the Install Wizard may change. Make sure that the Install
Wizard has been properly set up before changing this.
To congure this option, type the URL for the IPP Printer Install Wizard in the text box.
IPv4 Information
Network devices use an IP address to communicate with another network device and the subnet mask to
determine the network and host portions of the IP address. The default gateway is the address of a gateway
system or a router, which are the nodes that let a network device communicate on other networks or subnets.
These options dene the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address that the HP Jetdirect print
server uses. The IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are required to communicate with a device that
uses the TCP/IP protocol.
CAUTION: These options are fundamental to TCP/IP-based networks. Before you change these options, make
sure that you clearly understand how the network is designed.
NOTE: The IP address specied here overrides BOOTP, DHCP, or any previously congured IP address on the
HP Jetdirect print server. This is similar to conguring static addresses through Telnet or the device control panel
in the case of an internal HP Jetdirect print server. Use the static conguration method if you do not have any
automatic or server methods, such as BOOTP or DHCP.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 401
NOTE: You can only apply this conguration option to a single device. You cannot use this conguration option
to congure multiple devices at one time or include this conguration option in a template.
To change the IP address, type the new IP address in IP Address. To change the subnet mask, type the new
subnet IP address in Subnet Mask. To change the gateway address, type the new gateway IP address in Gateway.
IPv6 Information
You can enable or disable an IPv6-capable device to use the IPv6 protocol. IPv6 must be enabled to access other
IPv6-capable devices through an IPv6 network.
You can specify how the Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol version 6 (DHCPv6) functions on the network.
DHCPv6 is a protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network. If you use dynamic addressing,
a dierent IP address is assigned to the device when it connects to the network. A device's IP address can even
change while it is still connected. DHCP also supports static IP addresses. Dynamic addressing monitors IP
addresses on the network rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new
device can be added to a network without manually assigning a unique IP address to the device.
If you are conguring a single device, you can specify a manual IPv6 address and prex for the device. This
option is not available with multiple devices or templates.
You can set the priority of how a device obtains IP addresses on the network, based on the best method for the
network. The priority is determined by the order listed in the conguration precedence list. For example, if DHCP/
BOOTP has precedence over DHCPv6, an IP address provided through DHCPv4 will have precedence over an IP
address provided by DHCPv6.
You can set IPv6 DNS options, including the Domain, Primary DNS, and Secondary DNS.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable support for IPv6-capable devices, select Enable IPv6. To disable support, deselect this option.
2. Select one of the DHCPv6 policy options:
●Always perform DHCPv6 at startup
●Perform DHCPv6 when stateless conguration is unsuccessful
●Perform DHCPv6 only when requested by the router
3. If you are conguring a single device and wish to enter a manual IPv6 address, select Manual and enter the
appropriate information.
4. To specify the conguration precedence, highlight the method and then click Move Up or Move Down. To
restore the default conguration scheme, click Reset. You must click Reset in order to set the precedence in
a template, or with multiple devices selected.
5. You can specify a domain name for this device to be used in IPv6. The domain name does not include the
device host name, and multiple devices may share the same domain name.
6. You can specify the Primary and Secondary DNS servers for the device to be used in IPv6. If the network
uses Domain Name System (DNS) services, use this option to specify the IP address of a primary DNS
server for this device. If a secondary DNS server is available on the network and can be congured on the
device, specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. A secondary DNS server is used when the
primary DNS server is not available.
402 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
IPX - Ethernet Frame Type
This option lets you specify the Ethernet frame types that the HP Jetdirect print server uses on the network. If
you select Auto, the HP Jetdirect print server tries all of the frame types until it nds the one that works. If you
know that you are only going to use one frame type, selecting that frame type reduces network trac.
To congure this feature, select one of the Ethernet frame type options:
●Auto
●Ethernet 802.3
●Ethernet II
●Ethernet 802.2
●Ethernet SNAP
IPX - Frame Type Token Ring
IPX protocol is supported by Novell NetWare network OS. This option lets you specify which encapsulation type
for IPX to use for a token ring LAN or it can be set to let the device automatically decide which is best to use.
IPX - Queue Server Job Polling Interval
IPX protocol is supported by Novell’s NetWare network operating system. This option lets you specify the
number of seconds for the queue server job polling interval.
IPX - RCFG Support Enabled
RCFG (remote conguration protocol) was developed by HP for remote conguration and management of
devices on an IPX/SPX network, typically a Novell NetWare network. By factory default, RCFG is enabled. RCFG
does not support encrypted communications or authentication, and is not secure. If RCFG is not required for
device conguration and management, it should be disabled. Disabling RCFG does not aect the use of IPX/SPX
Direct-Mode (peer-to-peer) printing. Use this feature to enable or disable RCFG. If enabled, RCFG (sometimes
called RCONFIG) allows the device to be remotely congured on an IPX/SPX network. HP Web Jetadmin may use
RCFG to congure Novell NetWare queue-server linkages on older HP Jetdirect print servers.
To enable RCFG, select Enable RCFG support. To disable RCFG, deselect this eld.
IPX - SAP Broadcast Interval
By default, the HP Jetdirect print server sends out a Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) broadcast every 60
seconds to advertise itself on the network and make Novell print servers aware of its presence. SAP broadcasts
are necessary for the print server services to be located in some Novell NetWare environments. This option lets
you specify how often the HP Jetdirect print server sends out a SAP broadcast. If you have many HP Jetdirect
print servers on your network, SAP broadcasts can cause network trac. To reduce the impact that SAP
broadcasts have on network trac, increase the IPX SAP broadcast interval. You might want to disable
HP Jetdirect SAP broadcasts on Novell networks that use Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS) or on other
networks that do not require them.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 403
To assign or change the IPX SAP broadcast interval , type the broadcast interval in minutes in the text box. To
disable the IPX SAP broadcast interval, type 0 (zero) in the text box.
IPX - Source Routing
IPX protocol is supported by Novell’s NetWare network OS. This option lets you set how source routing is handled
by the device or allow it to automatically choose.
IPX Name
Use this option to change the name of a printer that is running in an IPX/SPX environment. The printer name is
changed on the HP Jetdirect card.
WARNING! If you are in an IPX/SPX environment, changing the printer name could disable the print paths for
types such as NetWare Bindery. If you are not using IPX/SPX, this option becomes another description eld. You
can assign a user-friendly printer name that helps you easily nd the printer in device lists.
To change the IPX/SPX name, type the name in the text box.
Jetdirect External Print Server
The HP Jetdirect External Print Server setting allows you to restart the print server remotely. The external print
server may not be close or be conveniently positioned for access.
To restart the external print server, select Restart.
Job Timeout
This value represents (in seconds) the maximum time of inactivity which must elapse before the print server card
switches from the current network protocol to another when a normal end of job is not detected. For external
HP Jetdirect print servers, allowable values are zero, and also within the range 30 to 3600 seconds. For internal
HP Jetdirect print servers, allowable values are zero, and also within the range 30 to 127 seconds.
NOTE: If the timeout value is set at zero, the print server will never time out (it will always stay in the current
network protocol being used).
To specify a new job timeout, enter the timeout in seconds in the text eld.
Locally Administered Address
Locally administered addresses are only supported in Token Ring HP Jetdirect print servers. The network device
manufacturer originally sets the media access control (MAC) address in the device read-only memory. You can
change the MAC address for most Token Ring network devices. This option lets you specify the MAC address on
the Token Ring HP Jetdirect print server. Some Token Ring environments use the Locally Administered Address
feature. While it is not a requirement that you change the MAC address, the Locally Administered Address feature
might be implemented in some Token Ring environments. Some administrators nd it easier to manage devices
if the MAC address for all of the devices of the same type start with specic characters. For example, starting all
HP devices with 003.
404 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
CAUTION: To prevent potential problems, make sure that the address you assign is not already in use.
NOTE: While the Novell protocol environment on the HP Jetdirect print server can restart and begin printing
again after you assign locally administered addresses, you must recongure the other protocol environments to
acknowledge the new address. This includes the Linux and Microsoft host software.
NOTE: You can only apply this conguration option to a single device. You cannot use this conguration option
to congure multiple devices at one time or include this conguration option in a template.
To assign or change the locally administered address, type the address in the text box.
Link Setting
Use this option to specify the link speed (10 or 100 Mbps) and the communication mode (full- or half-duplex)
that the device should use when connecting to your 10/100Base-TX network each time it is powered on. To
communicate on your network, the device link speed and communication mode must match the operation of
your network. If the device setting is AUTO, the device will attempt to autonegotiate its link settings with the
network each time it is powered on. If the device successfully links to the network, you can then use this feature
to explicitly congure the required link setting on the device. When the device is powered on again, the
congured setting will be used directly. However, if the device fails to link using AUTO, then the link settings on
the device will default to 100 Mbps and half-duplex mode. Communications with the device over the network
may, or may not, be possible. The link setting options:
●AUTO: Link settings are automatically negotiated.
●10TXFULL: The link is set to 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
●10TXHALF: The link is set to 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
●100TXFULL: The link is set to 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
●100TXHALF: The link is set to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
●1000TFULL: The link is set to 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation.
NOTE: Setting the link to a setting incompatible with the network causes the printer to lose access to the
network and might require a cold reset of the printer.
To congure this option, select one of the Link Setting options from the drop-down box.
Mgmt Protocol
Use this option to enable and disable the Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
protocols that the device uses to provide communication security and encryption over the Internet.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only the TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 protocols. To
congure the security protocol when FIPS mode is enabled on the device, you must specify the TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1,
and TLS 1.2 protocols. If you specify the SSL 3.0 protocol, the conguration fails.
If you congure only the SSL 3.0 protocol for a device, a discovery nds the device and adds the device to the
device lists, but the device is in a Device Communication Error state.
To enable a protocol, select the corresponding checkbox.
To disable a protocol, clear the corresponding checkbox.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 405
Network Enable Features
Use this option to enable or disable various network conguration tools, printing methods, and other features
that the device supports. Because each device supports dierent features, the congurable items available for a
specic device vary. The following are examples of congurable items:
●Network conguration tools, such as Telnet and HP Embedded Web Server (EWS). Telnet and EWS provide
additional access to print server conguration and management Web pages.
●Printing services, such as the following:
–File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
–Line Printer Daemon (LPD), which provides line printer spooling services for TCP/IP systems
–Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
–IPP protocol over the HTTPS transport binding (IPPS)
–Port 9100 (direct-mode printing)
●The AirPrint feature on the device, which allows instant wireless printing from iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch
devices. Before you enable the AirPrint option, you must enable the Bonjour (mDNS Cong) option and
enable either the IPP Printing or the IPPS Printing option.
●Other features that some client applications use to discover and identify devices, such as the Service
Location Protocol (SLP).
●The mDNS, IPv4 Multicast, and Link Local Multicast Name Resolution (LLMNR) protocols. mDNS is used for
IP address and name resolution through UDP port 5353. mDNS is typically used on small networks where a
conventional DNS server is not used. IPv4 Multicast allows the print server to send and receive IPv4
multicast packets. LLMNR allows both IPv6 and IPv4 hosts to perform name resolution for neighboring
computers without requiring a DNS server or DNS client conguration.
●HP Web Services, which accesses XML-based data on HP Jetdirect print servers.
●The Web Services (WS) protocol, which is used to discover network-connected and PC-connected devices
on both local and remote subnets.
●The Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) port and registration support.
●The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) conguration le, which controls the behavior of the TFTP server.
To enable a feature, select the checkbox.
-or-
To disable a feature, clear the checkbox.
Network Enable Features - More Settings
The AirPrint-FaxOut feature is used to send faxes from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Macintosh computer to an
AirPrint-enabled printer. The AirPrint Scan (eSCL/WebScan) feature is used to send scanned documents from an
AirPrint-enabled printer to an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Macintosh computer. The AirPrint Secure Scan (Secure
eSCL/WebScan) feature is used to send scanned documents securely from an AirPrint-enabled printer to an iPad,
iPhone, iPod touch, or Macintosh computer.
Use this option to enable or disable the AirPrint-FaxOut, AirPrint Scan (eSCL/WebScan), and AirPrint Secure Scan
(Secure eSCL/WebScan) features on the device. Before these features can be enabled, rst enable the Air Print
option on the Network Enable Features conguration option.
406 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Enable the AirPrint features
1. Select the AirPrint Fax check box.
2. Select the AirPrint Scan (eSCL/WebScan) check box.
3. Select the AirPrint Secure Scan (Secure eSCL/WebScan) check box.
Disable the AirPrint features
1. Clear the AirPrint Fax check box.
2. Clear the AirPrint Scan (eSCL/WebScan) check box.
3. Clear the AirPrint Secure Scan (Secure eSCL/WebScan) check box.
Parallel Handshake
This option lets you specify the parallel mode that the HP Jetdirect EX print server uses. If the specied mode
does not work, the HP Jetdirect print server tries other modes until it nds one that does work. The default
option tells the HP Jetdirect print server to select whichever mode is the fastest. If you know which parallel mode
is the fastest, select it; otherwise, leave this option set to the default.
NOTE: You can only access this option through utilities such as HP Web Jetadmin.
To congure this option, select one of the parallel mode options.
●nACK and Busy: Device checks both the nACK and Busy lines. This is the most reliable because no data is
lost in transfer, but it is the slowest for network communication.
●nACK only: Faster than nACK and Busy but not quite as reliable.
●Busy only: Fastest for network communication but also the least reliable.
Parallel Mode
This option species the parallel mode that the HP Jetdirect EX print server uses. If the specied mode does not
work, the HP Jetdirect print server tries other modes until it nds one that does work. The default option tells the
HP Jetdirect print server to select whichever mode is the fastest. If you know which parallel mode is the fastest,
select it; otherwise, leave this option set to the default.
NOTE: You can only access this option through utilities such as HP Web Jetadmin.
To set the parallel mode, select one of the options:
●Bi-Directional (Jetdirect EX): A parallel connection that supports bidirectional communications.
●Centronics (Jetdirect EX): A standard parallel connection that transfers data in one direction only (to the
printer).
●Automatic: Select the fastest mode (default).
●Multiple Logical Channels (MLC): A bidirectional parallel connection (IEEE-1284) that supports an enhanced
capabilities port.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 407
Phone Home Privacy Setting
This feature allows you to control whether HP may collect statistical data on product use. By allowing HP to
collect this information, improved product features and services can be provided in the future. HP will not collect
network-specic or personal data. For information on HP privacy policies, read the HP Online Privacy Statement
available by clicking privacy statement at www.hp.com in your language. For HP to collect any information,
Internet access must be available. If you enable this feature, information collected by HP will be limited to the
following items:
●HP Jetdirect product number.
●Firmware version and manufacturing date.
●Model number of the attached printer or device.
●Web browser and operating system detected.
●Local language selections used for viewing.
●Web pages Network communications protocols enabled.
●Network management interfaces enabled.
●Device discovery protocols enabled.
●Printing protocols enabled.
●TCP/IP conguration methods enabled.
●SNMP control methods enabled.
●Wireless conguration methods enabled.
To allow HP to collect data on the use of this product, select the check box. To disable this feature, clear the
check box.
Protocol Stacks
This option lets you enable or disable the various protocol stacks on the HP Jetdirect print server. Many networks
only use a few protocols. For example, the AppleTalk and DLC protocols are enabled by default on HP Jetdirect
print servers, but many networks do not use them. Although leaving unused protocols active will not harm the
network, you might gain the following benets if you disable them:
●A slight improvement in network performance.
●An additional measure of security and control because each user must access the HP Jetdirect print
services centrally instead of establishing a direct connection. For example, a Macintosh user cannot set up
a direct AppleTalk connection with the printer, but the user can access centralized print services through
TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
To enable a protocol stack, select the check box next to the protocol stack. To disable a protocol stack, clear the
check box next to the protocol stack.
Scan Idle Timeout
This option lets you specify how long the printer waits before closing an idle connection and going to the next
print job. If your network is busy, there may be a delay in the packet transmissions. In this case, you might want
to specify a longer timeout value.
408 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
To assign or change the scan idle timeout, type the timeout value in seconds in the text eld.
SNMP Trap Destination Table
HP Web Jetadmin runs a background trap-server utility that is used to receive HP Jetdirect traps and alerts, and
can route alert notications to email addresses. However, some networks may require that specic network
servers and management applications receive SNMP traps. This feature allows you to specify dierent trap-
management servers along with the use of special trap community names and supported SNMP agents.
Specied trap servers are stored in a Trap Destination Table on the print server. The number of trap servers that
can be congured (typically 3, 5, 10, or 12) depends on the print server model. A trap server is specied by its IP
address and/or its Fully Qualied Domain Name (FQDN), and a TCP/IP port number used by a management
application on the server (a trap server port number). If a port number is not specied, the default port 162 is
used. The print server can be congured to use a standard SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c agent, or an optional SNMPv2c
Inform agent that requires an acknowledgement from the trap server. The agent selected remains congured
when the print server is powered o/on. The default agent is SNMPv1. A trap community name can be specied
for the SNMP agent to use when sending traps. By default, the trap community name is “public”. If the Trap
Destination Table is empty, traps are not sent unless enabled through HP Web Jetadmin running its background
trap-server utility. Because trap objects (or pre-dened events) are encoded in each device, the available traps
depend on the particular HP Jetdirect print server model and its current rmware version.
Some newer HP devices do not use SNMP to generate alerts through HP Web Jetadmin. For these devices,
changing the SNMP Trap Destination Table conguration option does not aect alerts. You must manage alerts
for these devices by using the Alerts feature in HP Web Jetadmin.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select one of the following actions:
●Clear All: Clears all trap table entries.
●Clear Slot #: Clears the specied trap table entry number, if it exists.
●Clear Any: Clears any trap table entry matching the specied parameters:
–If only IP or Fully Qualied Domain Name (FQDN) is specied, all entries with the matching value
are cleared.
–If a port is specied, only the entry matching that IP and FQDN and port is cleared.
●Replace Slot #: Replaces the existing trap table entry for that slot, if it exists.
–If a device does not support that slot, no action will be taken.
–If only an IP or FQDN is specied, the default port 162 is used.
●Add Any: Adds the specied entry to the next available slot.
–If only an IP or FQDN is specied, the default port 162 is used.
–If the trap table is full, an error will be displayed.
CAUTION: Clearing or replacing trap table entries may cause other applications using those entries to
function incorrectly.
2. Enter the IP address of the desired trap server (to save or clear) in IP Address, or enter the FQDN in FQDN.
NOTE: FQDN is shown only when FQDN is supported by the print server.
3. If required by the trap server:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 409
●Specify a TCP/IP port number for the management application in Port number.
●Select an SNMP agent version from the Version drop-down list.
●Specify a trap community name in Community (up to 255 alphanumeric and special characters).
Support Contact
Use this option to specify the name of the person that users can contact for device support.
Support Phone Number
Use this option to specify the phone number of the person dened for the Support Contact conguration option.
System Contact
The system contact is the name of the person who owns or is responsible for the device. HP Web Jetadmin
displays the system contact on the device Status page and on several of the device lists. The system contact is
useful when you need to dispatch repair personnel, have questions about device settings or usage, or need to
report a problem with a device. You can also search for and display a list of all of the devices that a particular
person is responsible for.
To assign or change the system contact, type the name of the person to contact in System Contact.
System Location
This option identies the system based on its location.
Type or change the device location in System Location.
System Log Server
This option lets you specify the IP address of the server where you want the HP Jetdirect print server to send
system log messages. System log messages identify, for example, when the HP Jetdirect print server was turned
on or when a printer problem occurred.
To assign the system log server, type the IP address of the system log server in the text box.
System Log Server Info - More Settings
Use this option to congure the settings that the HP Jetdirect print server uses to send system log messages to
a Syslog server. System log message identify events that occur on the printer, such as when the HP Jetdirect
print server is turned on or when a problem occurs.
If the printer has received Common Criteria Certication (CCC), advanced security logging events are available. If
CCC logging is enabled, the HP Jetdirect print server also sends the CCC log messages to the Syslog server.
Use the following steps to congure the settings:
410 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
1. To use TCP to send system log messages to the Syslog server, select the TCP option.
IMPORTANT: If the Enable CCC Logging checkbox is selected, select the TCP option to ensure that audit
events are reliably delivered to the Syslog server.
-or-
To use UDP to send system log messages to the Syslog server, select the UDP option.
2. In the SysLog Port box, enter the port that the HP Jetdirect print server uses to send the system log
messages. The default is port 514 for both the TCP and UDP protocols.
3. In the Syslog Maximum Messages box, enter the maximum number of system log messages that can be
sent per minute. Valid values are from 0 to 1000. The default value is 10.
4. In the Syslog Priority box, enter one of the following values to dene the severity of the system log
messages that are sent:
●0—Emergency. The system is unusable.
●1—Alert. Action must be taken immediately.
●2—Critical. A critical condition occurred.
●3—Error. An error condition occurred.
●4—Warning. A warning condition occurred.
●5—Notice. A normal but signicant condition occurred.
●6—Informational. Informational messages.
●7—Debug. Debug-level messages.
●8—Disable. System log messages are queued internally for logging at a later time.
5. To enable CCC logging, select the Enable CCC Logging checkbox.
IMPORTANT: Before CCC logging can be enabled, the IP address for the Syslog server must be congured
by using the System Log Server Info conguration option.
-or-
To disable CCC logging, clear the Enable CCC Logging checkbox.
System Name
This option lets you specify the system name, sometimes called the host name, for the HP Jetdirect print server.
You might want to specify the system name for the HP Jetdirect print server for a variety of reasons, such as the
following example:
●The system name is a static name that is saved on the HP Jetdirect print server. Use the system name to
identify and track devices on the network. You can also include the system name as a column in device list
views. Under some conditions, the system name is visible on the network or the IP name can be resolved
through network name services. This typically occurs in a DHCP environment.
NOTE: This option does not change the DNS server entries. If you want to view the system name on the
network, you must update network name services, such as DNS, with name and address data.
NOTE: You can only apply this conguration option to a single device. You cannot use this conguration option
to congure multiple devices at one time or include this conguration option in a template.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 411
To congure this option, type the host name in System Name.
TCP Idle Timeout
This option lets you specify how long TCP/IP stays open when there is no trac. If the network is busy, there may
be a delay in the packet transmissions. In this case, you might want to specify a longer timeout value.
To assign or change the TCP idle timeout, type the timeout value in seconds in the text box.
TCP/IP Conguration Method
This option lets you specify how the HP Jetdirect print server obtains its TCP/IP conguration. This is a quick
method for resetting the IP stack on the HP Jetdirect print server, forcing it to try and obtain an IP conguration
through BOOTP or DHCP.
NOTE: The current HP Jetdirect print server TCP/IP conguration is erased.
●BOOTP Server: Forces the HP Jetdirect print server to obtain its TCP/IP conguration on the network
through a BOOTP server, if one exists and if the print server conguration parameters have been dened.
When you save the conguration, the HP Jetdirect print server immediately resets its IP address to 0.0.0.0.
If a BOOTP conguration does not occur within a short period of time, the IP address defaults to
192.0.0.192.
●DHCP Server: Forces the HP Jetdirect print server to obtain its TCP/IP conguration on the network through
a DHCP server, if one exists and if the print server conguration parameters have been dened. When you
save the conguration, the print server immediately resets its IP address to 0.0.0.0. If a DHCP conguration
does not occur within a short period of time, the IP address defaults to 192.0.0.192.
●Auto IP: Automatically congure the IP address.
To recongure the HP Jetdirect print server, select the conguration method option.
TCP/IP Domain Sux
Use this option to add domain suxes to the DNS suxes list, which is a list of domain names for the printer. The
DNS suxes list may contain up to 31 entries. Each sux can have up to 255 letters, numbers, or dots. If you
remove all entries from the DNS suxes list, all suxes are removed from the device as well.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To add a new sux, type the new sux in Sux name and click Add Sux.
2. To remove a sux from the DNS suxes list, select the sux and click Remove. To remove all suxes from
this list, click Remove All. You do not have to select any suxes if you are removing all entries in the list.
Upload CA Certicate
Use this option to upload a certicate authority (CA) certicate to the network interface card (NIC) on the device.
You can upload root CA certicates and intermediate CA certicates. You cannot upload user certicates.
412 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
An intermediate CA is a subordinate of a root CA. An intermediate CA is capable of signing and issuing identity
certicates. The result is a certicate chain that begins at the root CA and ends with identity certicates.
Intermediate CAs provide an added level of security that reduces the risk of the root CA being compromised.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only CA certicates that are signed by using the SHA-1
authentication protocol or later. To upload CA certicates when FIPS mode is enabled on the device, the CA
certicates must be signed by using SHA-1 or later. If you upload a CA certicate that is signed by using the MD5
authentication protocol or earlier (MD2 or MD4) or is in the PFX format with the RC4 Message Authentication
Code (MAC) verication, the conguration fails.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Click the Browse button, navigate to and select the CA certicate, and then click the Open button.
2. For a root CA certicate, clear the Allow Intermediate CA certicate checkbox.
-or-
For an intermediate CA certicate, select the Allow Intermediate CA certicate checkbox.
CAUTION: If an intermediate CA certicate is installed, the scope of authentication is limited.
Upload Jetdirect Certicate
Use this option to upload a valid HP Jetdirect certicate to the authentication server and copy the certicate to
the device. Some organizations require secure authentication for their devices. You can upload the HP Jetdirect
certicate remotely to meet the security needs of your organization.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only HP Jetdirect certicates that are signed by using
the SHA-1 authentication protocol or later. To upload HP Jetdirect certicates when FIPS mode is enabled on the
device, the HP Jetdirect certicates must be signed by using SHA-1 or later. If you upload an HP Jetdirect
certicate that is signed by using the MD5 authentication protocol or earlier (MD2 or MD4) or is in the PFX format
with the RC4 Message Authentication Code (MAC) verication, the conguration fails.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Click the Browse button.
2. On the Open window, navigate to and select the certicate le, and then click the Open button.
3. In the Password box, enter the password for the HP Jetdirect certicate.
Web Services Print
Use this option to enable or disable the Microsoft Web Services for Devices (WSD) Print services supported on
the HP Jetdirect print server.
Enable or disable this option and then click Apply.
WINS Server
Use this feature to specify the IP address of a primary Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) server for this
device. A secondary WINS server may also be specied, if supported by the device, for use when the primary
WINS server is not available. Devices on IP networks actually use IP addresses for communications. A WINS
server provides name resolution services, that is, it translates between user-friendly host names and IP
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Network 413
addresses for each network computer or device. A WINS server employs a distributed database of host names
and associated IP addresses. The database is automatically updated dynamically so that host name and IP
address resolution is always current.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Enter the IP address of the primary WINS server in Primary WINS server IP.
2. Enter the IP address of the secondary WINS server in Secondary WINS server IP.
NOTE: Some devices may not support conguration for a secondary WINS server.
Device Conguration Options for Projector
Conguration options for Projector dene functions specic to projectors.
Auto-search
When Auto Search enabled is checked, the projector will automatically search for a device connected to it.
Auto-sync VGA
When this option is selected, the device will automatically sync up its resolution with the incoming device.
Power
This option lets you remotely change the power level of the device. Standby uses less power while Lamp On will
set the projector so it can be used.
Requested Source
This option lets you specify what video standard source the projector will use for its source. You can also specify
the projector to scan for any attached source, and select the source from the drop-down list.
Device Conguration Options for Security
Conguration options for Security dene functions for the device including authentication methods and access.
802.1X Authentication
Use this option to specify the 802.1X authentication settings on the HP Jetdirect print server required for client
authentication on the network. You can also use this option to reset the 802.1X authentication settings to the
factory-default values.
414 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
CAUTION: Use caution when changing the 802.1X authentication settings. You might lose the connection. If
communication with the device is lost, you might need to reset the device server to a factory-default state, and
then reinstall the device.
For most 802.1X networks, the infrastructure components, such as LAN switches, must use 802.1X protocols to
control a port's access to the network. If these ports do not allow partial or guest access, you might need to
congure the print server with the 802.1X parameters prior to connecting to the network. To congure the initial
802.1X settings before connecting to the network, you can use an isolated LAN or a direct computer connection
using a crossover cable. The supported 802.1X authentication protocols and associated conguration depend on
the print server model and rmware version.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the supported protocols that are used for 802.1X authentication on the network.
●PEAP (congure certicate rst): Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) uses digital
certicates for network server authentication and passwords for client authentication. PEAP requires
an EAP user name, EAP password, and Certicate Authority (CA) certicate. Dynamic encryption keys
are also used.
●EAP-TLS (congure certicate rst): Extensible Authentication Protocol using Transport Layer Security
(EAP-TLS) is a mutual authentication protocol based on digital certicates for authentication of the
client and network server. EAP-TLS requires an EAP user name, HP Jetdirect certicate, and CA
certicate. Dynamic encryption keys are also used.
2. In the User name text box, enter the EAP/802.1X user name for the device (maximum of 128 characters).
The default user name is the default hostname of the print server, NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six
digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
3. In the Password text box, enter the EAP/802.1X password for the device (maximum of 128 characters).
4. In the Conrm password text box, enter the password again.
5. In the Server ID text box, enter the server ID that identies and validates the authentication server. The
server ID is specied on the digital certicate that a trusted CA issued for the authentication server.
NOTE: If the Require Exact Match checkbox is not selected, you can specify any string for the server ID.
6. To validate the server ID that is specied in the Server ID box against the server ID that is specied in the
digital certicate issued by the CA for the authentication server, select the Require Exact Match checkbox.
7. In the On Authentication Failure section, select one of the following options:
●Connect Anyway (802.1x Fail-over): If this option is selected and the 802.1X authentication settings
are applied to an unsecured port, the device does not lose connectivity if you do not change from an
unsecured port to a secured port on the device. The device connectivity functions without 802.1X
authentication.
●Block Network (Secure failure): If this option is selected and the 802.1X authentication settings are
applied to an unsecured port, the device enters a communication error status if you do not change
from an unsecured port to a secured port on the device. To return the device to a ready state, change
to a secured port on the device.
8. From the Encryption strength list, select the level of encryption for the selected protocols.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only the High encryption strength. To congure
the encryption strength when FIPS mode is enabled on the device, you must specify the High encryption
strength. If you specify the Low or Medium encryption strength, the conguration fails.
9. To initialize the port, select the Re-authenticate on apply checkbox. The device re-authenticates the 802.1X
settings after they are applied.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 415
Access Control for Device Functions
Use this option to specify the sign-in method that is required to access applications from the device control
panel and enable or disable access to the applications by using the built-in permission sets. The sign-in methods
and applications that are available vary depending on the device.
You can create custom permission sets. You can then use these custom permission sets to restrict access to the
applications.
Signed-in users cannot be more restricted than guest users. If signed-in users are restricted from accessing
applications, guest users are also restricted from accessing those applications.
You can specify the default sign-in method that is required to access all of the applications. You can then specify
a dierent sign-in method for individual applications. You must enable and congure the sign-in methods on the
device. For example, to select Windows as the sign-in method, you must enable and congure the Windows Sign
In Setup conguration option on the device.
The following are examples of the sign-in methods that might be available for a device:
●Local Device
The Local Device sign-in method is always available, regardless of whether or not the method is enabled.
When a user accesses the device, the device prompts the user to enter a device PIN only if the Local Device
sign-in method is enabled and congured.
●Windows
●LDAP
●Smart Card
If an HP Smart Card Reader is installed, users must sign-in. You should disable all of the other sign-in
methods. You might need to install certicates separately to support this conguration.
If the Restrict Color conguration option has been used to enable or disable color printing and copying for all of
the HP Web Jetadmin users, the device ignores any color printing and copying settings that are enabled for the
permission sets here.
Based on what’s selected in the Applications Group drop-down list, it displays the supported applications for
Control Panel or EWS.
Manage permission sets
The default permission sets that are available vary depending on the device.
1. Use the following steps to create a permission set:
a. Click the Create button.
b. On the Create Permission Set window, enter a name for the permission set, and then click the OK
button.
The new permission set is added as a column to the table in the Access control for device applications
section.
2. Use the following steps to edit a permission set:
NOTE: You cannot edit the Device Administrator, Device Guest, and Device User permission sets.
416 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
a. Select the permission set from the list, and then click the Edit button.
b. On the Edit Permission Set window, enter a new name for the permission set, and then click the OK
button.
3. Use the following steps to delete a permission set:
NOTE: You cannot delete the Device Administrator, Device Guest, and Device User permission sets.
a. Select the permission sets from the list, and then click the Delete button.
b. On the Delete Permission Set window, verify that the information is correct, and then click the OK
button.
4. Use the following steps to copy a permission set:
a. Select the permission set from the list, and then click the Copy button.
b. On the Copy Permission Set window, enter a name for the new permission set, and then click the OK
button.
5. If you are conguring multiple devices or creating device conguration templates, select one of the
following options from the Overwrite options section:
●Replace/overwrite existing lists: Replaces any existing permission sets on the devices with this list of
permission sets.
●Append to existing lists: Adds this list of permission sets to the existing permission sets on the
devices.
To update permission sets on devices that have the same name as the permission sets on this list,
select the Overwrite any existing items with the same name checkbox.
Congure the access for device applications
1. From the Default sign in method list, select the sign-in method for all of the applications.
2. To assign a sign-in method to an application that is dierent from the default, select the sign-in method
from the list next to the application.
3. Use the following steps to congure the access for an application:
a. Scroll to the application in the list.
b. To enable access to the application, select the checkbox for the permission set.
-or-
To disable access to the application, clear the checkbox for the permission set.
4. To allow users to select an alternate sign-in method from the control panel, select the Allow users to
choose alternate sign-in methods checkbox.
-or-
To require users to use the sign-in method that is specied for each application, clear the Allow users to
choose alternate sign-in methods checkbox.
5. To automatically sign out users when a job starts, select the Automatically sign users out after starting
each job checkbox. The user must sign in again to start another job.
-or-
To leave users signed in when a job starts, clear the Automatically sign users out after starting each job
checkbox. Users remain signed in until they sign out or their session times out.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 417
Create device conguration templates for devices that have new or custom sign-in methods
Some devices have new or custom sign-in methods installed that are not available on the Access Control for
Device Functions conguration option. To create device conguration templates and congure this option for
these devices, perform the following steps:
1. From the device list, select a single device that has a custom sign-in method installed.
2. Click the Cong tab, expand the Security category, and then select the Access Control for Device Functions
conguration option.
3. Verify that the custom sign-in method appears in the Default sign in method list.
4. Specify the appropriate settings for the device.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. On the Conrm window, verify that the information is correct, and then click the Congure Devices button.
7. On the Results page, click the Done button.
Access Control Level for Device Functions
Use this conguration option to set the access control levels for the device. A dierent authentication method
and security level can be assigned to each device function. You can reduce costs and increase security by only
allowing users access to the minimum set of device functions necessary for your organization's operational
needs.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Set the access control level for device functions:
●Maximum: Require sign-in before any device features can be accessed.
●Minimum: Allow unauthenticated access to all device features except Service Mode.
NOTE: If you selected Minimum, you do not need to dene permission sets.
●Custom: Require sign-in for selected device features.
2. If you choose Maximum or Custom access control level, you need to dene one or more permission sets.
The permission sets control which device features a member of the dened group has access to. To create
a permission set, click Add and type the new permission set name in Permission set name and then dene
which functions should require signing.
3. After a permission set has been created, you can edit it; select the permission set in Permission sets and
then click Edit.
4. To delete a permission set, select the permission set in the Permission sets box and then click Delete.
Access Control List
An access control list (ACL) is used to specify the IP addresses on your network that are allowed access to the
device. The list supports up to 10 entries. If the list is empty, then any system is allowed access. By default, host
systems with HTTP connections (such as Web browser or Internet Printing Protocol connections) are allowed
access regardless of access control list entries. This allows hosts to access the device when Proxy Servers or
Network Address Translators are used. However, unltered access by HTTP hosts may be disabled by clearing
the Check ACL for HTTP check box.
418 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
CAUTION: You may lose your ability to communicate with the device if your system is not properly specied in
the list, or access through HTTP is disabled. If communication with the device is lost, restoring network settings
to factory-default values may be required.
The access control list (ACL) is normally used for security purposes. Network administrators can congure the
device to limit which systems or management stations have access to the device. The device will block
communications from systems that are not congured for access.
Host systems to be allowed access are specied by their IP host or network address. If the network contains
subnets, an address mask may be used to specify whether the IP Address entry is for an individual host system
or a group of host systems. For an individual host system, the mask 255.255.255.255 is assumed and is not
required.
To add an entry into the Access Control List:
1. Enter an IP address in IP Address.
2. To identify whether the IP address entry is an individual host or a group of hosts, enter a subnet mask in
Mask.
NOTE: The rst item in the ACL must be the IP address of the HP Web Jetadmin server or an IP address with a
wide subnet mask that includes the IP address of the HP Web Jetadmin server.
To delete entries from the Access Control List for batch and template conguration, click Clear all ACL Table
entries.
Authenticate LDAP and Kerberos Without Email
Use this option to enable or disable the Kerberos and LDAP Authentication functions that allow users to sign in to
the servers even if they do not have an email address.
To enable authentication without an email address, select the appropriate checkboxes. Users who do not have a
published email address on the LDAP or Kerberos server can sign in by using their username and password, and
then authenticate successfully.
To disable authentication without an email address, clear the appropriate checkboxes. Users who do not have a
published email address on the LDAP or Kerberos server cannot sign in and authenticate successfully.
Authentication Manager
Use this option to set the authentication method used to access the device and various functions on the device.
The authentication methods are HP Digital Send Service, Group 1 PIN, Group 2 PIN, User PIN, LDAP, and
Kerberos. The device functions include Copy, Send email, Send fax, Send to folder, HP Digital Send Service
workow, and so on. If another device function becomes available through a third-party installation, that
function appears in the function list and you can enable an authentication method for it.
Automatic Update
Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Update in the device control panel. This is a one-time setting, and
it can be congured after a cold reset.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 419
1. Select the check box.
2. To enable Automatic Update, select the Enabled option.
-or-
To disable Automatic Update, select the Disabled option.
3. Click the Apply button.
Bootloader Password
This option lets you congure a password on the bootloader screens for a device. This keeps the user from
making any changes when the device rst boots up. The Bootloader PIN keeps users from changing the
Bootloader Password. You can enter a new 4 digit PIN (or enter the existing 4 digit PIN if it had been set
previously) and then enter the Bootloader Password itself.
NOTE: If you forget the Bootloader PIN, the Bootloader password can not be changed and could only be cleared
(along with the Bootloader PIN) via a service call.
Color Access Control
Use this option to manage the usage of color printing supplies within your organization. If you select Color
permissions, you can also specify which users (up to 50) have permission to print in color on a device or you can
import a permission conguration le to set the permissions. This feature also lets you specify which
applications have permission to print in color on a device (up to 10) or you can import a permission conguration
le to set the permissions.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select one of the available permissions:
●Enable Color: All color jobs will print in color.
●Disable Color: All color jobs will print in black.
●Color permissions: Requires the device to check the permissions dened for the user (up to 50) and
the application to determine if the job can be printed in color. If either the user or the application has
"black-only" permission, then the job is printed without color.
NOTE: If you select this option, be sure to set the user and application permissions to control access
to color printing features.
2. If you selected Color permissions, you can now restrict color user permissions.
●To specify the default user permission, select an option from Color permission.
●To look up a user, click Locate Name. You can search for users by object or location.
●To add a user to the permissions list, type the name of the user in System User Name and then select
a permission from Permission.
NOTE: This list can contain up to 50 users.
●To edit the permissions for a user on the list, click on the user name in the list and then select a
permission from Permission.
420 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
●To delete a user from Permissions, select a user name entry on the list by clicking on it and then click
Delete.
●To import a permissions conguration le, click Browse and search for a conguration le to import.
NOTE: The le is imported when the changes to the device(s) are saved.
3. You can also specify the default application permission.
●To add an application to the permissions list, type the name of the application in Technical Application
Name and then select a permission from Permission.
NOTE: This list can contain up to ten applications.
●To edit the permissions for an application on the list, click on the application name entry and select a
permission from Permission.
●To delete an application from the permissions list, click on an application name entry on the list.
●To import a permissions conguration le, click Browse and search for a conguration le to import.
NOTE: The le is imported when the changes to the device(s) are saved.
Color Access Control Level
Use this option to specify whether to allow jobs to print in color. The On setting allows all color jobs to print in
color. The Custom access control setting requires the device to check the permissions dened for the user and
the application to determine whether each job will be printed in color or not. If either the user or the application
has “black-only” permission, then the job will be printed without color. The O setting will result in all color jobs
printing in black.
The driver used for printing must be an HP print driver because the printer relies on the print driver to tell it who
is printing and from which application. The print drivers that ship with Microsoft Windows do not support this
functionality.
The EWS page for the device has a job log that lists who has printed and from what application. This log can be
accessed in order to nd out the application and user name that needs to be entered into this conguration
option in order to restrict the user or application.
To congure this option, select one of the available settings.
Control Panel Access
This option allows you to lock the device control panel, preventing unauthorized users from accessing it and
changing the device settings. Users can still read the settings on the device’s control panel. The unlock options
that are available depend on the device. For some devices, you can only lock and unlock the control panel. For
other devices, you can specify the level of access: minimum, moderate, or maximum. The denitions for the
dierent levels of access also depend on the device. If you install a printer in a public area, you might require
additional security. Locking the device control panel prevents unauthorized users from accessing the device
settings either at the device or though a software utility that provides control panel access.
To prevent users from changing device settings, select the appropriate lock option. To let users change device
settings, select Unlock.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 421
Control Panel Shortcuts
Use this option to specify the shortcuts that appear in the Shortcuts folder on the device control panel and
specify the order in which the shortcuts appear in the Shortcuts folder.
1. To show a shortcut in the Shortcuts folder, select the checkbox next to the feature name.
-or-
To remove a shortcut from the Shortcuts folder, clear the checkbox next to the feature name.
2. To move a shortcut up in the list, select the feature name, and then click the Move up or Move to top
button. On the device control panel, the shortcut moves to the left in the list.
3. To move a shortcut down in the list, select the feature name, and then click the Move down or Move to
bottom button. On the device control panel, the shortcut moves to the right in the list.
Default Sign In Method
This option lets you specify the sign in method for accessing the device. You should select the method that best
suits the needs of your organization. You can choose a local sign in or alternative sign in methods such as a
user's Windows login.
NOTE: The sign in options may vary depending on installed plug-in solutions and other accessories, such as
Smart Card readers.
To congure this setting, select an option from the drop-down list.
Device Announcement Agent
The device announcement agent provides automatic conguration out of the box with no administrator
intervention. When the device is turned on, the device sends an announcement to the conguration server, and
then the conguration server pushes the conguration settings to the device. This feature is enabled by default
and requires a conguration server, such as HP Imaging and Printing Security Center.
Use this option to specify the settings for the device announcement agent that the device uses to announce its
presence to the conguration server. By default, the device announcement agent uses the DNS hostname hp-
print-mgmt to locate the conguration server. Authentication between the device and conguration server is not
required.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the Enable Device Announcement Agent checkbox.
2. To override the default DNS hostname or if a DNS server is not available, enter the IP address of the
conguration server that the device announcement agent uses in the Conguration Server IP Address
(v4/v6) text box.
3. To enable authentication of the device announcement agent, select the Require Mutual Authentication via
Certicates checkbox. This is the most secure conguration method because certicates must be installed
and trusted on the device and on the conguration server.
-or-
To disable authentication of the device announcement agent, clear the Require Mutual Authentication via
Certicates checkbox.
422 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Device User Accounts
A permission set establishes the access level for various device functions, such as the ability to print in color,
cancel jobs, and edit fax speed dial numbers. Devices support the predened Device Administrator and Device
User permission sets. To create custom permission sets, use the Access Control Level for Device Functions
conguration option.
Use this option to specify the default permission set that is applied to new device user accounts on the device.
To congure this option, select the permission set from the list.
To create device user accounts by using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) on the device, perform the
following steps:
1. Click the Security tab.
2. In the left pane, click the Access Control link.
3. Scroll down to the Device User Accounts section, and then click the New button.
4. On the New Device User Account page, specify the information, and then click the OK button.
Device user accounts can act as address book entries depending on which elds are populated. For a eet
conguration of device user accounts, use the import/export features that are available in the EWS on the device
and in HP Web Jetadmin. If you are not familiar with the CSV format that is used to import les, HP recommends
that you use the EWS on the device to congure the device user accounts, and export the device user accounts
to a CSV le. Then use the Import/Export Address Book conguration option in HP Web Jetadmin to import the
CSV le, and set the device user accounts on multiple devices simultaneously. The Import/Export Address Book
conguration option is available in the Cong tab > Digital Setting category.
Digital Sending Service
The Digital Sending Service is an independent HP product that allows you to congure digital sending. If you
select the Allow use of digital send service checkbox, the Digital Sending Service manages the device. If you
select the Allow transfer to new digital send service checkbox, any Digital Sending Service can manage the
device, even if another Digital Sending Service is currently managing the device.
Disable Direct Ports
Checking the disable direct ports makes the device more secure but it only allows printing through the network
connection. If this option is selected, the device must be rebooted afterwards.
Display Color Usage Job Log Page On Information Tab
Use this option to display the Display Color Usage Job Log Page On Information Tab of the device Embedded Web
Server.
Enable or disable this option and then click Apply.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 423
Display Options on Information Tab
Use this option to enable or disable the options that appear on the Information tab in the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS) on the device.
To congure this option, perform the following steps:
1. To enable the Print option, select the Display Print Page on Information Tab checkbox.
-or-
To disable the Print option, clear the Display Print Page on Information Tab checkbox.
2. To enable the Job Log option, select the Display Job Log on Information Tab checkbox.
-or-
To disable the Job Log option, clear the Display Job Log on Information Tab checkbox.
Embedded Web Server Password
If you are concerned about security, specify a password for the Embedded Web Server conguration.
NOTE: When setting a password on the device, you must enter the current password, if any, regardless of
credentials stored in the application. If you don’t, the setting will fail as “Invalid Data”.
To assign the password, type it in Password. Type the same password in Conrm password. To change the
password, type it in Current EWS password. Type the same password in Conrm password.
Enable Host USB plug and play
Use this option to enable or disable the USB Plug and Play feature on the device. The USB Plug and Play feature
is used to perform tasks such as scanning to a USB ash drive.
NOTE: If this option is disabled, control-panel applications that require the USB Plug and Play feature, such as
the Save To USB application, are automatically disabled.
To enable the USB Plug and Play feature, select the Enabled option.
-or-
To disable the USB Plug and Play feature, select the Disabled option.
Enable PJL Device Access Commands
HP Printer Job Language (PJL) is a command language that can be used to request information from printers (for
example, printer model, conguration settings, and status) and change the conguration settings on printers.
Use this option to enable or disable PJL commands on the printer.
To allow users to send PJL commands to the printer, select the Enabled option.
NOTE: If the Enabled option is selected for non-HP FutureSmart devices, be aware of the following issues:
●Disk jobs can no longer be deleted by using the Erase Customer Data button on the Storage tab.
●If the Printer Wakeup conguration option is enabled, this feature might not work.
424 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
-or-
To prevent users from sending PJL commands to the printer, select the Disabled option.
Encrypt all web communication
This option lets you to enable or disable the HP Jetdirect card to encrypt any information coming from the
device.
Select Enabled to encrypt information or Disabled to not encrypt information.
Encryption Strength
Use this option to specify the SSL encryption strength. If encryption is enabled, ciphers display the weakest
cipher allowed for the encryption strength specied.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only the High encryption strength. To congure the
encryption strength when FIPS mode is enabled on the device, you must specify the High encryption strength. If
you specify the Low or Medium encryption strength, the conguration fails.
To congure this option, select the encryption strength from the list.
EWS Information Protection
Use this option to enable or disable protection for the Information tab on the device Embedded Web Server
(EWS) page.
If the Enabled option is selected and an EWS password is congured on the device, users cannot access the
Information tab on the EWS without logging in with the EWS device password.
If the Disabled option is selected and an EWS password is congured on the device, users can access the
Information tab without logging in with the EWS device password. To access all the other tabs on the EWS page,
users must log in with the EWS password.
FIPS-140 Mode
Use this option to enable or disable the Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) mode on the device. FIPS
mode enforces the use of cryptographic suites and protocols that comply with the FIPS-140 standards for
computer security. FIPS supports the following protocols for the conguration options on the device:
●SNMP Version Access Control conguration option: SHA-1 authentication protocol and AES-128 privacy
protocol
●Kerberos setting on the IPsec/Firewall Policy conguration option: AES128-SHA1 and AES256-SHA1
protocols
●Upload Jetdirect Certicate conguration option: Certicates that are signed by using SHA-1 or later
●Upload CA Certicate conguration option: Certicates that are signed by using SHA-1 or later
●Mgmt Protocol conguration option: TLS 1.2, TLS 1.1, or TLS 1.0
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 425
Enable FIPS mode
▲Select the Enabled option.
CAUTION: The enable conguration fails if the following non-FIPS protocols are congured on the device:
●SNMP Version Access Control conguration option: MD5 authentication protocol and DES privacy
protocol
●Kerberos setting on the IPsec/Firewall Policy conguration option: DES-CBC-MD5 algorithm
●Upload Jetdirect Certicate conguration option: Certicates that are signed by using MD5 or earlier
(MD2 or MD4)
●Upload CA Certicate conguration option: Certicate that are signed by using MD5 or earlier (MD2 or
MD4)
●Mgmt Protocol conguration option: SSL 3.0 or earlier
Disable FIPS mode
▲Select the Disabled option.
Get Community Name
The Get Community Name password can be set to prevent unauthorized people from using SNMP utilities to
access a device and get the device settings.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Type the password and then repeat it for conrmation.
2. To disable the public Get Community Name, select Disable SNMPv1/v2 default Get Community Name of
'public'. If a device does not support this option, it will ignore it in batch congurations or when applying
templates.
Group 1 PIN
This option enables you to force users to use a pin to access a device. You can then use the Authentication
Manager function to specify what features (such as walk-up, copy, send, fax) are restricted by this. You can have
two dierent groups, each with a unique pin.
To set this option, type the PIN and then type it again for conrmation.
Group 2 PIN
This option enables you to force users to use a pin to access a device. You can then use the Authentication
Manager function to specify what features (such as walk-up, copy, send, fax) are restricted by this. You can have
two dierent groups, each with a unique pin.
To set this option, type the PIN and then type it again for conrmation.
426 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
IPsec/Firewall Policy
(Full-featured HP Jetdirect print servers only) The Firewall and Internet Protocol security (IPsec) features provide
network-layer security on both IPv4 and IPv6 networks. The Firewall provides simple control of which IP
addresses are allowed access. IPsec (RFC 2401) provides the additional security benets of authentication and
encryption.
IPsec conguration is relatively complex. However, because IPsec provides security at the network layer and can
be relatively independent of the application layers, the opportunity for secure host-to-host communications
over a widespread network, such as the Internet, is greatly enhanced.
●If IPsec is supported, you can control IP trac by using both Firewall and IPsec protection.
●If IPsec is not supported, you can control IP trac by using only Firewall protection.
NOTE: In addition to Firewall and IPsec protection at the network layer, the HP Jetdirect print server also
supports the following:
●An SNMPv3 agent at the application layer for management application security
●Open Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) standards at the transport layer for secure client-server applications,
such as client/server authentication or HTTPS Web browsing
For IPsec/Firewall operation on the HP Jetdirect print server, use this option to congure an IPsec/Firewall policy
that is applied to specied IP trac. For more information about conguring IPsec/Firewall policies and the
specic settings, see the HP Jetdirect Print Servers Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE: To ensure communications with an HP Jetdirect print server that is congured with an IPsec policy,
computer systems that communicate with the print server must be properly congured. IPsec policies that are
congured on the print server and computer systems must be compatible. Otherwise, connections fail.
Use the following steps to modify a rule:
1. Select the rule, and then click the Add / Modify Rules button. The IPsec/Firewall Policy wizard starts.
2. On the Specify Address Template page, select the address template.
3. Use the following steps to modify the address template:
a. Click the Modify button.
b. On the Create Address Template window, make the appropriate changes, and then click the OK
button.
4. On the Specify Address Template page, click the Next button.
5. On the Specify Service Template page, select the service template.
6. Use the following steps to modify the service template:
a. Click the Modify button.
b. On the Create Service Template window, click the Manage Services button.
c. On the Manage Services window, make the appropriate changes, and then click the OK button.
d. On the Create Service Template window, click the OK button.
7. On the Specify Service Template page, click the Next button.
8. On the Specify Action page, select the appropriate option, and then click the Next button.
9. If the Require trac to be protected with an IPsec/Firewall policy option is selected, the Specify IPsec/
Firewall Template page appears. Use the following steps to modify the IPsec template:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 427
a. Select the IPsec template, and then click the Modify button. The IPsec Template wizard starts.
b. On the IPsec Protocols page, make the appropriate changes, and then click the Next button.
c. On the Identity Authentication page, make the appropriate changes, and then click the Next button.
The IPsec Template wizard closes.
10. On the Specify IPsec/Firewall Template page, click the Next button.
11. On the Rule Summary page, click the Finish button.
Use the following steps to delete a rule:
1. Select the rule, and then click the Delete Rule button.
2. On the Conrm window, click the Yes button.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only the AES-128 and AES-256 ciphers. To congure
the Kerberos setting when FIPS mode is enabled on the device, you must specify the AES-128 and AES-256
protocols. If you specify the DES-CBC-MD5 cipher for the Kerberos setting, the conguration fails.
HP Jetdirect IPsec supports the Kerberos authentication method. The Kerberos authentication method supports
the AES128-SHA1 and AES256-SHA1 encryption protocols. These encryption protocols incorporate an iteration
count that increases the complexity of the encryption keys. The default iteration count in HP Jetdirect is 4,096,
which complies with current standards. The iteration count in HP Jetdirect and the iteration count on the
Kerberos domain controller must match. To change the iteration count on the Kerberos domain controller, create
the following Registry entry and provide the appropriate value. This Registry entry aects all of the Kerberos
clients of the domain controller.
HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Kdc\IterationCount (DWORD)
The HP Web Jetadmin administrator can create an IPsec rule with Kerberos pre-authentication by using one of
the following methods:
●Use HP Web Jetadmin to congure the settings for the IPsec rule, which includes the Kerberos server admin
credentials and organization unit (OU) path. HP Web Jetadmin uses these settings to create an account on
the Key Distribution Center (KDC) server.
●Log in to the KDC server and manually create an account. Then access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
on the device, and congure the settings for the IPsec rule.
The HP Web Jetadmin administrator must not congure the settings for an IPsec rule by using HP Web Jetadmin
and then later update those settings by using the device EWS, or vice versa. The following are examples of the
conicts that can occur:
●The HP Web Jetadmin administrator uses HP Web Jetadmin to create an IPsec rule that has an encryption
type of DES. Then the HP Web Jetadmin administrator uses the device EWS to change the encryption type
to AES-128. If the HP Web Jetadmin administrator then uses HP Web Jetadmin to perform a refresh and
reapply the rule to the device, the IPsec policy fails because the encryption type for the Kerberos server
account is still DES. To ensure that the encryption type is updated on the Kerberos server, the
HP Web Jetadmin administrator must use HP Web Jetadmin to change the encryption type.
●The HP Web Jetadmin administrator uses HP Web Jetadmin to create an IPsec rule. Then the
HP Web Jetadmin administrator uses the device EWS to change the settings for the rule. When the
HP Web Jetadmin administrator views the rule in HP Web Jetadmin, the changes that were made by using
the EWS are not displayed. In this case, HP Web Jetadmin does not display an error message and the IPsec
policy might not be applied correctly.
428 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Kerberos Authentication
Use this feature to congure the device (multi-function peripheral, or digital sender) to authenticate users to a
Kerberos Realm. When Kerberos authentication is selected as the Log In Method for one or more Device
Functions on the Authentication Manager feature, the user at the device must enter valid credentials to gain
access to those functions (username, password, and realm).
Authentication consists of two interdependent parts:
●The device veries the user's credentials with the Key Distribution Center (KDC).
●After the device user has supplied valid credentials and has been authenticated, the device searches for the
user's email address and name.
If either step fails, the user is denied access to the functions that have been congured to require Kerberos
authentication.
Accessing the Kerberos Authentication Server
The Kerberos realm (domain) is the fully qualied domain name of the Kerberos realm (domain).
Use the Advanced button to the right of the Kerberos realm (domain) eld to access the Alternate Domain
Conguration. Alternate domains are mapped to the default realm.
The Kerberos server hostname can be the same as the Kerberos realm (domain) if a DNS (Domain Name Service)
service is available and correctly congured. The device will use DNS to look up the rst available KDC (Kerberos
Domain Controller) on the network. If DNS is not available, the IP address of the Kerberos Server may be used.
The Kerberos server port is the default IP port used by the Kerberos authentication method. The default is port
88, but this can be dierent in dierent network environments. Please contact your IT administrator to
determine the appropriate port if the default port does not work.
Accessing the LDAP Server
The LDAP server bind method determines how the device will access the LDAP server.
The Credentials conguration section is used to determine which credentials will be used to bind (authenticate)
to the LDAP server.
●When Use device user credentials is selected, the device users credentials (entered at the control panel of
the device) will be used to access the LDAP server. This method has the advantage of not having to store a
username and password, which may expire, in the device.
●When Use public credentials is selected and user credentials are not available, the Username and Password
entered will be used to access the LDAP server. This method should be used if for some reason device
users do not have read access to the LDAP data.
The Bind prex setting is the LDAP attribute used to construct the user's Distinguished Name (DN) for
authentication. This prex is combined with the username typed at the control panel to form the Relative
Distinguished Name (RDN). Commonly used prexes are "CN" (for common name) or "UID" (for user identity).
The Bind and search root value is used to validate the user's credentials with the LDAP server. This value is
combined with the RDN to construct the full Distinguished Name (DN) of the user.
The string consists of "attribute=value" pairs, separated by commas. For example:
ou=engineering, o=HP, c=US
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 429
ou=marketing, o=HP, c=US
o=hp.com
ou=engineering, cn=users, dc=hp, dc=com
The LDAP server is typically the same as the Kerberos server in the Windows Active Directory Environment.
The Port is the IP port used by the LDAP protocol to communicate with the LDAP server. This is typically port 389
or port 3268.
Searching the LDAP Database
The Search root is the Distinguished Name (DN) of the entry in the LDAP directory structure where address
searching is to begin. A DN is made up of ' attribute=value ' pairs, separated by commas. For example:
dc=HP, dc=com
ou=engineering, dc=northamerica, dc=HP, dc=com
ou=marketing, o=HP, c=US
o=hp.com
ou=engineering, cn=users, dc=hp, dc=com
NOTE: On some LDAP servers, the Search root can be left blank (in which case its root node will be assumed).
The search root is not case sensitive.
Retrieve the Device User's Email Address Using Attribute Of
After the device user has been located in the LDAP database, the user's email address is retrieved from the
database by using the LDAP attribute specied in Retrieve device user's email address using attribute of eld. In
the Windows Active Directory environment, this attribute is typically mail.
Retrieve the Device User's Name Using Attribute Of
The user's display name is obtained from the LDAP attribute that is specied in the Retrieve device user's name
using the attribute of eld. In the Windows Active Directory environment, this attribute is typically displayName.
LDAP - Accessing the Server
This option lets you specify how the digital send device accesses the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) server to look up email addresses. To send scanned documents from the digital send device through
email, the user must provide an email address. The process of entering email addresses can be simplied by
providing an address lookup list and by using an auto-complete feature. Access to the LDAP server email
address database provides a way for the digital send device to use the lookup list and the auto-complete
feature.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select one of the following server bind methods from LDAP server bind method:
●Simple: The digital send device will use credentials to access the LDAP server.
430 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
NOTE: If you select Simple, the credentials are sent from the digital send device without encryption.
Contact the LDAP server’s administrator to determine the most appropriate server bind method
settings.
●Simple over SSL: the digital send device will use credentials to access the LDAP server and to enable
the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol for communication between LDAP server and the device. The
SSL protocol encrypts the authentication credentials before sending the credentials to the device.
2. Type the IP address or hostname for the LDAP server in LDAP server.
3. Type the number of the TCP/IP port on the server that receives LDAP requests in Port (usually 389).
4. If you select Simple over SSL, type the complete specied name of a user who has access to the LDAP
server in LDAP administrator’s DN and the password for the user name in Password.
LDAP - Searching the Database
Use this option to specify the root and attributes used to search the LDAP database for the user’s email.
LDAP Sign In Setup
Use this option to enable or disable the LDAP sign-in method and congure the settings that the device uses to
establish a connection with the LDAP server, authenticate users, and search the LDAP server database.
Enable and congure the LDAP sign-in method
NOTE: Some devices do not support all of the following conguration options.
1. Select the Enable LDAP Sign In checkbox.
2. In the LDAP server address box, enter the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server. The LDAP server
address cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
3. In the Port number box, enter the port that the LDAP server monitors for queries. The default is port 389.
4. To enable SSL, select the Use SSL checkbox.
-or-
To disable SSL, clear the Use SSL checkbox.
5. In the Server Authentication section, select one of the following options:
●Use MFP User Credentials: The device uses the credentials of the user who is signed in on the device
to authenticate to the LDAP server.
In the Bind prex text box, enter the bind prex. The bind prex cannot contain the following
characters:
& < > ;
●Use LDAP Admin Credentials: The device uses the LDAP Admin credentials to authenticate to the
LDAP server.
In the LDAP Admin Distinguished DomainName(DN) box, enter the LDAP distinguished name. The
LDAP distinguished name is required.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 431
In the Password box, enter the LDAP Admin password.
6. To congure the LDAP database search settings, perform the following steps in the LDAP Database Search
Settings section:
a. To add the location in the LDAP directory structure where the device begins the search, enter the root
name in the Bind and Search Root box, and then click the Add button. To enter multiple locations,
separate the root names with the vertical bar (|) symbol. The root name cannot contain the following
characters:
& < > ;
This text box can use static data or custom variables supported in the following formats:
●Variable data (a variable always starts and ends with %% with the name of the variable in
between the starting and ending %% signs)
%%<custom variable>%% (where “<custom variable>” is the name of the user dened eld)
Example: %%var_DatabaseSearchSettings%%
●Variable data along with a combination of static content before or after the variable
<static value>%%<custom variable>%%<static value>
TIP: By starting the variable data name with var_, it’s easier to nd and identify user dened elds in
HP Web Jetadmin.
TIP: In HP Web Jetadmin, text boxes that support variable data are highlighted blue. For more
information on variable data, see Create and Use Variable Data on page 183.
b. To delete a search root, select the root name from the BindSearchRoot grid, and then click the
Remove button.
c. To delete all of the search roots, click the Remove All button.
7. In the Match the name entered with this attribute box, enter the attribute name that the device uses to
authenticate the user login name. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
8. In the Retrieve the device user's email address using this attribute box, enter the LDAP attribute name for
user email addresses. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
9. In the Retrieve the device user's name using this attribute box, enter the LDAP attribute name for user
names. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
10. In the Retrieve the device user's group using this attribute box, enter the LDAP attribute name for user
groups. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
11. If the specied group attribute must match the LDAP attribute exactly, select the Exact match on group
attribute checkbox.
-or-
If the specied group attribute does not need to match the LDAP attribute exactly, clear the Exact match on
group attribute checkbox.
432 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Disable the LDAP sign-in method
▲Clear the Enable LDAP Sign In checkbox.
LDAP Users and Groups
Use this option to set LDAP permissions for individual users or groups. These permissions control who has
access to what features on the device. Choose the permission levels that best suit the security needs of your
organization and the convenience needs of your users.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a value from Default permission set for LDAP users.
2. To add a user permission setting, type the user name in Name.
3. Select the permission setting from Permission.
4. Select the type from Type and click Add.
5. To edit a permission set, select it from the list and then edit the Permission set.
6. To remove a user permission setting, select the permission setting and click Remove.
Local Administrator Password
Local Administrator Password is used to congure Account Lockout Policy for the device to avoid device lockout if
login fails. It also prompts the user to enter the proper password for the device.
Use the following steps to congure the Local Administrator Password:
1. If Enable Account Lockout is enabled, then Maximum Attempts, Lockout Interval, and Reset Lockout
Interval is enabled. Enable or disable account lockout using this option.
a. Maximum Attempts - Maximum number of password attempts (3-30)
b. Lockout Interval- Interval the account is locked out (5-1800 Secs)
c. Reset Lockout Interval- Reset the interval of lockout (0-1800 Secs)
2. Enable Password Complexity- When enabled, the password must contain three of the following: uppercase
letters, lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters.
3. Minimum Password Length- Password length should be 0-16 (when complexity disabled) 3-16 (when
complexity enabled). (0) indicates that the minimum password length is disabled; no password is required.
NOTE: See the actual device for supported range of values.
Near Field Communication
Near eld communication (NFC) capabilities enable an easy one-to-one HP wireless direct print connection by
using a simple device-to-device touch. Users can quickly connect to the printer and print documents and images
from a mobile device, such as a smartphone or tablet, by touching the mobile device to the NFC antenna on the
printer. Use this option to enable and disable the NFC feature on the printer.
To enable the NFC feature, select the Enable Near Field Communication checkbox.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 433
To disable the NFC feature, clear the Enable Near Field Communication checkbox.
Novell Sign In Setup
Use this option to set up Novell authentication on a device. Specify the Novell trees that a user can authenticate
against. You can extend the structure and security of a Novell network to the device by enabling the Novell NDS
sign in on the device. This provides for enhanced security and ease of use for users who are already members of
a Novell tree.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select Enable Novell NDS Sign In.
2. To add a Novell tree, type the name of the Novell tree in the text eld under Add Tree and then click Add
Tree.
To remove a Novell tree, highlight the tree and then click Remove Tree.
3. Type the address of the Novell server in Novell Server Address.
4. Type the context value in Context.
5. Type the bind prex in Bind Prex.
6. Type the root name for binding and searching in Bind and Search Root.
7. Type the name of the tree in Default Tree.
PJL Password
Printer Job Language (PJL) is a command language that enables some features of a device. Setting the PJL
password restricts access to those PJL features. The PJL password is a numeric PIN. The PJL password is cleared
by entering a zero (0) as the new password.
NOTE: The PJL password only provides security for conguring device settings from a Netware server.
Print Job Color Control
Use this option to enable or disable color printing for all print jobs or limit the color printing based on a list of
approved software programs.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a value from Default for print jobs generated from unspecied computer applications.
2. To add an application color control setting, type the name of the application in Application name.
3. Select the color control setting from Color control and click Add.
4. To edit and application color control setting, select the application from the list and edit the value of Color
control.
5. To remove an application color control setting from the list, select the application color control and then
click Remove.
434 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Printer Firmware SHA1 Code Signing
Use this option to allow the device to install only rmware bundles that are signed by using Secure Hash
Algorithm 2 (SHA-2) or allow the device to install rmware bundles that are signed by using SHA-1 or SHA-2.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
▲To allow the device to install only rmware bundles that have an SHA-2 signature, select the Disabled
option. The device uses SHA-256 to validate the bundle signature. The device does not install rmware
bundles that have only an SHA-1 signature.
-or-
To allow the device to install rmware bundles that have an SHA-1 or SHA-2 signature, select the Enabled
option. The device always validates the rmware bundles by using the more secure SHA-2 signature.
Printer Firmware Update
Use this option to enable or disable the ability of a device to have its rmware updated remotely. If disabled, the
device will not accept RFU rmware update les.
Remote Conguration Password
Remote Conguration Password is used to congure CCC (Common Criteria Certication) Protection Prole. It
locks the remote account after a xed number of login fails and prompts the user to enter the proper password
for the device.
1. If Enable Account Lockout is enabled, then Maximum Attempts, Lockout Interval, and Reset Lockout
Interval is enabled. Enable or disable account lockout for remote conguration using this option.
a. Maximum Attempts - Maximum number of password attempts (3-30)
b. Lockout Interval- Interval the account is locked out (5-1800 Secs)
c. Reset Lockout Interval- Reset the interval of lockout (0-1800 Secs)
2. Enable Password Complexity- When enabled, the password must contain three of the following: uppercase
letters, lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters.
3. Minimum Password Length- Password length should be 0-16 (when complexity disabled) 3-16 (when
complexity enabled). (0) indicates that the minimum password length is disabled; no password is required.
NOTE: See the actual device for supported range of values.
Restrict Color
Use this option to manage the use of color printing supplies within your organization. You can specify that all
color print jobs are printed in color, all color print jobs are printed in their grayscale equivalent, or color printing is
restricted based on the user's permission level or based on the application.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select one of the following options:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 435
●Enable color: All color print jobs are printed in color.
●Disable color: All color print jobs are printed in their grayscale equivalent.
●Set custom color access: Color printing is restricted based on the custom settings that you dene.
2. If the Set custom color access option is selected, perform the following steps:
a. Select one or more of the following:
●Restrict by user permissions: Select this checkbox to restrict color printing based on user
permission sets. Use the Access Control for Device Functions conguration option to dene the
user permission sets.
●Restrict by application: Select this checkbox to restrict color printing based on applications.
If both the Restrict by user permissions and Restrict by application checkboxes are selected, the
lowest level of permission is applied when restricting color print jobs.
b. If the Restrict by application checkbox is selected, dene the application permissions as follows:
●Specify the default permission level for all applications: Select the type of color usage from the
Default permission for applications drop-down list.
●Identify and manage applications that require specic permission levels: These applications
have the specic permission level applied to them instead of the default permission level. These
applications are identied in the Non default applications list.
To add an application to the list, enter the name of the application in the Name text box, select
the type of color usage from the Permission drop-down list, and then click Add.
To delete one or more applications from the Non default applications list, select the
applications, and then click Remove.
To delete all of the applications from the Non default applications list, click Remove All.
Secure Communication
Use this option to enable the ciphers.
The device communicates based on these secure communications and enabled ciphers. The enabled check
boxes indicate currently active ciphers, and disabled check boxes indicate inactive ciphers. Securely manage the
network device using a Web browser and the HTTPS protocol. To authenticate the HP Jetdirect Web Server when
HTTPS is used, congure a certicate or use the pre-installed, self-signed X.509 Certicate. The encryption
strength species what ciphers the Web server will use for secure communications.
AES256-GCM-SHA384 and AES128-GCM-SHA256 ciphers are only supported with TLS 1.2. If the active ciphers
are limited to AES256-GCM-SHA384 and/or AES128-GCM-SHA256, then the supported TLS protocol must be set
to only TLS 1.2 on the client and the server; otherwise, a communication error occurs. When browsing to the
printer, or when conguring the printer via HP Web Jetadmin, the printer is the server and HP Web Jetadmin is
the client.
Secure Disk Encryption Mode
Use this option to determine whether encryption is automatically enabled when an HP Secure Hard Disk is
installed. This is the default and recommended mode. If you have a specic need to manually specify a drive
password or want to start encrypting at a later time, the Manual setting allows this. If Manual is selected, you
must use the EWS page to individually enable encryption of each device.
436 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To automatically enable encryption when an HP Secure Hard Disk is installed, select Automatic. This is the
default and recommended mode.
2. If you need to manually specify a drive password or want to start encrypting at a later time, select Manual
and then use the EWS page to individually enable encryption of each device.
Secure Disk Password
Use this option to congure a password for all of the secure disks installed on the device. This password provides
access to the encrypted data on the secure disks. This password locks all of the secure disks, but does not
encrypt the data on the disks. The device automatically generates a separate encryption key for each disk to
encrypt the data.
If you change the password, no data on the secure disks is lost. If you remove the secure disk from the device,
access to the encryption key is lost and the data on the secure disk cannot be decrypted.
NOTE: The password can be cleared only through the BIOS on the device. Clearing the password renders the
data on the device unusable and makes the secure disk appear as a new disk.
Automatically generate a random password
1. Select the Generate a new random password (Recommended) option.
2. For HP FutureSmart devices, turn o the device, and then turn on the device. Other devices automatically
turn o, and then turn on.
Manually assign a password
1. Select the Manually set a new drive password option.
2. In the Password and Conrm Password boxes, enter the password. The password must be between 8 and
32 characters long.
3. For HP FutureSmart devices, turn o the device, and then turn on the device. Other devices automatically
turn o, and then turn on.
Service Access Code
A unique service personal identication number (PIN) is assigned to each HP product model. During the
manufacturing process, the same service PIN is written to every device for a specic product model. The factory-
default service PIN cannot be changed.
The factory-default service PIN is required to gain access to the Service menu at the device control panel. The
factory-default service PIN for the various HP product models is public information. Anyone who can nd the
factory-default service PIN for the product model can sign in at the device control panel and access all of the
troubleshooting tools and conguration settings that are available from the Service menu.
Use this option to congure a service access code on the device. This service access code provides additional
security for the Service menu. The factory-default service PIN can no longer be used to gain access to the Service
menu. However, the factory-default service PIN can be restored at any time.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 437
Congure a service access code
1. In the Service Access Code box, enter the service access code. The service access code must be exactly 8
digits in the range of 00000000 to 99999999. All 8 digits must be entered.
2. In the Verify Access Code box, enter the 8-digit service access code again.
Restore the factory-default service PIN
1. In the Service Access Code box, select the current value, and then press the Delete key.
2. In the Verify Access Code box, select the current value, and then press the Delete key.
Service Loading
Use this option to enable or disable the ability to install third-party services and applications that run directly on
the device.
To enable this feature, select the Enabled option.
-or-
To disable this feature, select the Disabled option.
Set Community Name
The Set Community Name, which is dierent than the device password, prevents unauthorized users from using
SNMP utilities to access and change device setting. Once you assign a Set Community Name, only users who
know the Set Community Name can change the device settings from an SNMP utility.
NOTE: When setting a password on the device, you must enter the current password, if any, regardless of
credentials stored in the application. If you don’t, the setting will fail as “Invalid Data”.
To congure this option, type the Set Community Name in Set community name and then conrm it by retyping it
in Repeat set community name. To change the Set Community Name password, type the current one in Current
set community name and then type the new one in Set community name. Conrm it by retyping it in Repeat set
community name.
Smart Card Sign In Setup
The structure and security of a domain network can be extended to the device by enabling the Smart Card sign-
in method on the device. This feature provides enhanced security and ease-of-use for users who are members
of that domain.
Use this option to enable or disable Smart Card authentication on the device and congure the trusted domains
that the device uses to authenticate users.
NOTE: The Smart Card sign-in method is available only if an optional Smart Card reader accessory is installed
on the device.
If the Smart Card sign-in method is required, disable all of the other sign-in methods. You might need to install
certicates on the device. For more information about installing certicates, see Manage the Certicate
Repository on page 69.
438 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Enable and congure the Smart Card sign-in method
1. Select the Enable Smart Card Sign In Setup checkbox.
2. To add a trusted domain, enter the domain name in the box, and then click the Add Domain button.
3. To delete a trusted domain, select the domain from the list, and then click the Remove Domain button.
-or-
To delete all of the trusted domains, click the Remove All button.
4. From the Default Windows domain list, select the default domain.
5. To use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to sign in, select the Use SSL checkbox. The default is port 636.
-or-
To use a custom port to sign in, clear the Use SSL checkbox, and then enter the port number in the Port
box. The default is port 389.
6. In the Retrieve the device user's email address using this attribute box, enter the attribute name for the
email address.
Disable the Smart Card sign-in method
▲Clear the Enable Smart Card Sign In Setup checkbox.
Smart UX
Use this option to congure Smart UX. Smart UX apps use Android technology.
To enable Smart UX, select the check box next to Allow Smart UX apps on this product.
To disable Smart UX, clear the check box next to Allow Smart UX apps on this product.
SNMP Version Access Control
SNMPv3 protects the network management information that is sent between HP Web Jetadmin and a device
through user authentication and data encryption. SNMPv3 supports the MD5 and SHA-1 authentication protocols
and the DES and AES-128 privacy protocols. SNMPv3 does not support the No Authentication Protocol and No
Privacy Protocol modes.
You can use SNMPv3 to prevent unauthorized users from viewing or changing device settings. You can require
SNMPv3 to view or change information on a device. You can allow SNMPv1 read-only access to the device and
also require SNMPv3 to change information on a device. SNMPv1 does not use data encryption when sending
information between HP Web Jetadmin and a device.
Use this option to enable and disable SNMPv3 on the device and specify the authentication protocol, privacy
protocol, and passphrases that are required.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) supports only the SHA-1 authentication protocol and AES-128
privacy protocol. To create or update the SNMPv3 credentials when FIPS mode is enabled on the device, you
must specify the SHA-1 and AES-128 protocols. If you specify the MD5 authentication protocol and DES privacy
protocol, the conguration fails.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 439
Enable SNMPv3
1. Select the Enable SNMPv3 option.
2. In the Set community name (optional) box, enter the name that is currently congured for SNMPv1.
3. In the User name box, enter the user name.
4. From the Authentication Protocol list, select the protocol.
5. In the Authentication passphrase and Conrm authentication passphrase boxes, enter the passphrase for
the specied authentication protocol.
6. From the Privacy Protocol list, select the protocol.
7. In the Privacy passphrase and Conrm privacy passphrase boxes, enter the passphrase for the specied
privacy protocol.
8. To enable SNMPv1 read-only access on the device, select the SNMPv1 read-only option.
-or-
To disable SNMPv1, select the SNMPv1 disabled option.
Change the SNMPv3 credentials
1. Select the Modify SNMPv3 option.
2. In the Current SNMPv3 Credential section, enter the user name, authentication protocol, authentication
passphrase, privacy protocol, and privacy passphrase that are currently congured for SNMPv3. The
current SNMPv3 credentials are required.
3. In the New SNMPv3 Credential section, enter the new values for the authentication protocol, authentication
passphrase, privacy protocol, and privacy passphrase that are to be changed.
NOTE: The user name that is currently congured for SNMPv3 cannot be changed.
CAUTION: To change the authentication and privacy passphrases, the current passphrases must be
specied even if global SNMPv3 credentials are stored in HP Web Jetadmin. If the current passphrases are
not specied, the conguration fails.
4. To enable SNMPv1 read-only access on the device, select the SNMPv1 read-only option.
-or-
To disable SNMPv1, select the SNMPv1 disabled option.
Disable SNMPv3
1. Select the Disable SNMPv3 option.
2. In the Current SNMPv3 Credential section, enter the user name, authentication protocol, authentication
passphrase, privacy protocol, and privacy passphrase that are currently congured for SNMPv3. The
current SNMPv3 credentials are required.
Temporary Limit Overrides
Use this option to override page limits for specic users in a permission set. If one or more users in a permission
set has a specic need to print more pages than the page limit for the group allows, you can set an override for
that user to allow for more page prints.
440 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Type the user name in User Account.
2. Select a value from Total Override: Drop-down list.
●Page Limit: Specify a page limit for the total number of pages printed. Then type that number in the
adjacent text box.
●No Page Limit: Do not specify a page limit for the total number of pages printed.
3. Select a value from Color Override:
●Page Limit: Specify a page limit for the number of color pages printed. Then type that number in the
adjacent text box.
NOTE: The page limit for color pages cannot exceed the total page limit.
●No Page Limit: Do not specify a page limit for the number of color pages printed.
4. To add the overrides to the list below, click Add.
5. To edit the settings, select the overrides on the list and then edit Total Override and Color Override.
6. To remove a temporary limit override setting, select the override setting and click Remove.
Usage Limit and Reset Period
Use this option to enable usage limits. If usage limits are enabled, each user in a Permission Set is assigned a
limited number of pages during a recurring time period. The number of pages is the same for each person in the
device Permission Set. Limits and overrides will automatically reset at the start of each reset period. Usage limits
can help reduce the operating costs of your organization. Use the usage reports to identify usage trends among
your users.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select the Enable usage limits on this device check box.
2. Select one of the Usage Limit Exceeded Report options.
3. Select the reset option desired.
4. To reset usage tracking immediately, select Reset usage tracking.
Usage Limits for Permission Sets
Use this option to dene the general page limits and the color page limits for predened permission sets.
NOTE: You can apply this conguration option only to a single HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology device. You cannot use this conguration option to congure multiple devices at one time or include
this conguration option in a device conguration template.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To assign page limits to a permission set, locate the permission set name in the Permission Set column.
2. Select a value from the corresponding Total Page Limit drop-down list.
3. If you selected a page limit, specify the number of pages in the corresponding Color Page Limit drop-down
list.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 441
NOTE: The page limit for color pages cannot exceed the total page limit. If a higher value is entered for
the color page limit, then the total page limit is used.
User PIN Authentication
Use this option to add user PIN records into the device one at a time, and to edit or delete user PIN records that
have already been saved in the device.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To add or edit a user:
a. Click Add, or select a user and click Edit.
b. Type the person's name in Name.
c. Type the person's email address in Email address. If email address validation is enabled on the device,
the email address must include an at symbol (@).
d. Type the user PIN in User access PIN. The PIN must be between 4 and 8 characters.
e. Click OK.
2. To remove a user, select the user and click Remove.
3. To delete all users, click Remove All.
4. Remove all existing entries: In a template or with multiple devices selected, check this box to delete all
existing user PINs from the device. If this box is not checked, user PINs will be added to any existing PINs in
the device.
5. Overwrite any existing entries: In a template or with multiple devices selected, check this box to overwrite
any existing user PINs with the same name. If this box is not checked, user PINs will be added to any
existing PINs in the device, and existing PINs with the same name will not be changed.
Windows Sign In Setup
The structure and security of the Windows domain networks can be extended to the device by enabling the
Windows sign-in method on the device. This feature provides enhanced security and ease-of-use for users who
are members of a Windows domain.
Use this option to enable or disable the Windows sign-in method and congure the Windows trusted domain and
attribute keys that the device uses to authenticate users.
Enable and congure the Windows sign-in method
1. Select the Enable Windows Negotiated Sign In checkbox.
2. Use the following steps to congure the trusted Windows domains that the device uses to authenticate
users:
a. To add a trusted domain, enter the domain name in the box that is next to the Add Domain button,
and then click the Add Domain button.
442 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
NOTE: Some devices support only one trusted domain. For these devices, the Add Domain button
becomes unavailable after a trusted domain is added.
b. To delete a trusted domain, select the domain name from the list, and then click the Remove Domain
button.
c. To delete all of the trusted domains, click the Remove All button.
NOTE: For some devices, this feature is available only if you are conguring multiple devices or
creating device conguration templates.
3. To specify the default trusted domain, select the domain name from the Default Windows domain list.
NOTE: For devices that support only one trusted domain, the specied trusted domain is automatically
set as the default.
4. To enable SSL, select the Use SSL checkbox.
-or-
To disable SSL, clear the Use SSL checkbox.
NOTE: For some devices, this feature is available only if you are conguring multiple devices or creating
device conguration templates.
5. In the Match the name entered with this attribute box, enter the Windows domain attribute for user login
names. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
6. In the Retrieve the device user's email address using this attribute box, enter the Windows domain
attribute for user email addresses. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
7. In the Retrieve the device user's home folder using this attribute box, enter the Windows domain attribute
for user home network folders. The attribute name cannot contain the following characters:
& < > ;
NOTE: For some devices, this feature is available only if you are conguring multiple devices or creating
device conguration templates.
8. In the Retrieve the device user’s name using this attribute box, enter the Windows domain attribute for
device user names. The attribute name cannot contain special characters.
NOTE: For some devices, this feature is available only if you are conguring multiple devices or creating
device conguration templates.
Disable the Windows sign-in method
▲Clear the Enable Windows Negotiated Sign In checkbox.
Windows Users and Groups
Use this option to set Windows permissions for individual users or groups. These permissions control who has
access to what features on the device. Choose the permission levels that best suit the security needs of your
organization and the convenience needs of your users.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Security 443
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Select a permission set from Default permission set for Windows users.
2. To add a user permission setting, type the user name in Name.
3. Select the permission setting from Permission.
4. Select the type from Type and click Add.
5. To edit a permission set, select it from the list and then edit the Permission set.
6. To remove a user permission setting, select the permission setting and click Remove.
Device Conguration Options for Supplies
Conguration options for Supplies manage settings related to consumable supplies, such as cartridges.
Cartridge Low Action - Black
Use this option to specify the action that the device takes when the supply reaches a low condition. If a print
supply becomes low during a print job, the print quality of the job might be unacceptable.
To specify the action that the device takes when the supply reaches a low condition, select one of the following
options:
●Stop—The device stops printing the current print job and displays an error message on the device control
panel that prompts the user to replace the supply.
NOTE: If this option is selected, the Cartridge Very Low Action - Black conguration option is locked and
cannot be congured.
●Continue—The device nishes printing the current print job and displays a warning message on the device
control panel that reports the supply is low.
NOTE: If this option is selected, the Cartridge Very Low Action - Black conguration option can be
successfully congured.
Cartridge Policy
Use this option to specify that only genuine HP cartridges can be installed and used in this device.
To allow only genuine HP cartridges to be used in this device, select the Authorized HP option.
To allow any properly functioning cartridges to be used in this device, select the O option.
Cartridge Protection
Use this option to congure the cartridge protection mode. When the cartridge protection mode is congured, all
of the cartridges that are currently installed in the device or eet of devices become permanently protected.
After the cartridge protection mode is congured on a cartridge, the cartridge protection mode on that cartridge
cannot be removed or changed.
444 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Cartridges that are congured with single device cartridge protection mode cannot be used in any other devices.
Cartridges that are congured with eet ID cartridge protection mode cannot be used in any devices that are
congured with a dierent eet ID.
Allow the installed cartridges to be used in any device
When this mode is congured, cartridges are not protected and can be used in other devices.
If cartridge protection is turned o on the device, previously protected cartridges that are currently installed in
the device remain permanently protected. These cartridges remain locked to the device or to a eet ID,
depending on the setting before cartridge protection is turned o.
When cartridge protection is turned o on a device that has a eet ID congured, the eet ID on the device is
cleared, cartridge protection mode is set to device only, and protection is switched o. When new cartridges are
installed in the device, the new cartridges are not protected and can be used in other devices.
▲Select the O option.
Allow the installed cartridges to be used only in this device
When single device cartridge protection mode is congured, the cartridges that are currently installed in the
device become permanently protected and can be used only in this device. When new cartridges are installed in
the device, the new cartridges become permanently protected and can be used only in this device. If a protected
cartridge is removed from this device and installed in another device, the cartridge is unusable in that device.
CAUTION: After the cartridge protection mode is congured on a cartridge, the cartridge protection mode on
that cartridge cannot be removed or changed.
To congure single device cartridge protection mode, perform the following steps:
1. Select the Protect Cartridges by allowing the installed cartridges to be used only in this device option.
2. In the Cartridge Protection Warning window, click the OK button.
NOTE: If you click the Cancel button, the Protect Cartridges by allowing the installed cartridges to be used
only in this device option is disabled and the O option is enabled.
Allow the installed cartridges to be used in all of the devices that have the same eet ID
When eet ID cartridge protection mode is congured, HP Web Jetadmin stores the eet ID on the selected
devices. The cartridges that are currently installed in the selected eet of devices become permanently
protected and can be used only in devices that are congured with the same eet ID. When new cartridges are
installed in a device in the eet, the new cartridges also become protected. If a protected cartridge is removed
from one of these devices and installed in a device that is not congured with the same eet ID, the cartridge is
unusable in that device.
CAUTION: After the cartridge protection mode is congured on a cartridge, the cartridge protection mode on
that cartridge cannot be removed or changed.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that you keep a careful record of the eet ID. After the eet ID is congured on the
devices, there is no method for retrieving the eet ID if it is forgotten.
The HP Web Jetadmin administrator can assign a new eet ID to a device. In this case, the cartridges that are
currently installed in that device continue to function and can be used in devices that are congured with the old
eet ID. Any new cartridges that are installed in the device become protected with the new eet ID and can be
used only in devices that are congured with the new eet ID.
TIP: If dierent eet IDs are assigned to dierent device groups, it is easier to keep track of which eet ID is
assigned to each device group by creating a device conguration template for each eet ID.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Supplies 445
To congure eet ID cartridge protection mode, perform the following steps:
1. Select the Protect Cartridges by allowing the installed cartridges to be used in all devices with the same
eet ID option.
2. In the Cartridge Protection Warning window, click the OK button.
NOTE: If you click the Cancel button, the Protect Cartridges by allowing the installed cartridges to be used
in all devices with the same eet ID option is disabled and the O option is enabled.
3. In the Fleet ID password box, enter the eet ID. The eet ID must be a value from 1 to 65535.
NOTE: If the Allow these cartridges in all device with same Fleet ID checkbox is selected, a eet ID must
be specied.
4. In the Conrm Fleet ID password box, enter the eet ID.
Delay Very Low Message
Use this option to specify a threshold for the number of pages that the device prints after a supply reaches a
very low status before the device displays a notication message. The threshold can be congured based on the
usage history for each supply. The following are examples:
●If one color cartridge is used more than the other color cartridges, specify a lower page count threshold for
that color cartridge to ensure that there is enough time to order a new cartridge or locate a replacement
cartridge.
●If one color cartridge is rarely used or a replacement cartridge is readily available, specify a higher page
count threshold for that color cartridge to avoid having the device display the supply very low message any
longer than necessary.
Congure the threshold for the very low supply message
1. Select the Enable option.
2. Select the checkbox next to the supply, and then enter the page count threshold for that supply in the box.
NOTE: A higher page count threshold provides less warning before the supply runs out. Setting a page
count threshold that is too high might result in the supply running out before the supply very low message
appears.
Disable the very low supply message
▲Select the Disable option.
Estimated Supplies Levels
By default, HP Web Jetadmin displays the estimated supplies levels in 10% increments. For some devices, you
can choose to display the estimated supplies levels in 1% increments instead of 10% increments. However,
displaying the estimated supplies levels in 1% increments does not imply a 1% level of accuracy. The accuracy of
the actual supplies levels and the remaining pages varies depending on the types of documents printed and
other factors. HP uses the rst 20% of cartridge use to estimate the remaining pages. In addition, other HP tools
might display supplies levels in dierent percentage increments.
446 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Use this option to enable the device to display the estimated supplies levels in 1% increments instead of the
default of 10% increments. Before you enable this option, carefully review and accept the Estimated Supplies
Levels agreement.
Display the estimated supplies levels in 1% increments
1. Click the "Opt In" to enable button.
2. Carefully review the Estimated Supplies Levels agreement.
3. If you accept the terms of the agreement, select the I accept option.
-or-
If you do not accept the terms of the agreement, select the I do not accept option. You will not be able to
enable this option.
4. Click the Close button.
5. Select the Enable 1% Estimated Supplies Level checkbox.
After this option is applied to a device, you might need to click the Refresh Supplies button on the Supplies tab to
view the estimated supplies levels in 1% increments.
Return the estimated supplies levels to 10% increments
▲Clear the Enable 1% Estimated Supplies Level checkbox.
Level Gauge
Use this option to specify if the supply level gauge is displayed on the control panel for single-function devices.
To display the supply level gauge on the device control panel, select the On option.
-or-
To hide the supply level gauge on the device control panel, select the O option.
Supply Low Alerts
Use this option to enable or disable the supply low alerts. If this option is enabled, the device triggers an alert
when the supply is very low.
To enable supply low alerts, select the Enabled option.
To disable supply low alerts, select the Disabled option.
Supply Threshold
Use the following conguration options to specify the supply level threshold that must be reached before the
device displays the supply low message:
●Cartridge Threshold - Black
●Cartridge Threshold - Cyan
●Cartridge Threshold - Magenta
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Supplies 447
●Cartridge Threshold - Yellow
●Drum Threshold - Black
●Drum Threshold - Cyan
●Drum Threshold - Magenta
●Drum Threshold - Yellow
●Fuser Kit Threshold
●Maintenance Kit Threshold
●Transfer Kit Threshold
The threshold can be congured based on the expected usage rate for the supply. The following are examples:
●If one color cartridge is used more than the other color cartridges, specify a higher threshold for that color
cartridge to ensure that there is enough time to order a new cartridge or locate a replacement cartridge.
●If one color cartridge is rarely used or a replacement cartridge is readily available, specify a lower threshold
for that color cartridge to avoid having the device display the supply low message any longer than
necessary.
To congure the supply threshold, enter the threshold as a percentage. A lower threshold provides less warning
before the supply runs out.
Supply Very Low Action
Use the following conguration options to specify the action that the device takes when the supply reaches a
very low condition:
●Cartridge Very Low Action - Black
●Cartridge Very Low Action - Color
●Document Feeder Kit Very Low Action
●Fuser Kit Very Low Action
●Maintenance Kit Very Low Action
●Toner Collection Unit Very Full Action
●Transfer Kit Very Low Action
If a print supply becomes very low or runs out during a print job, the print quality of the job might be
unacceptable. If a maintenance supply reaches a very low condition, the print quality might be unacceptable or
the device operation might be adversely aected.
To specify the action that the device takes when the supply reaches a very low condition, select one of the
following options:
●Stop—The device stops printing the current print job.
●Prompt to Continue—The device displays a prompt. The user can choose to nish printing or stop the
current print job.
●Continue—The device nishes printing the current print job.
448 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Device Conguration Options for Web Services
The conguration options in the Web Services category dene the settings that aect HP Web Services.
ePrint Settings
Use this option to enable or disable access to HP Web Services and specify which services are enabled for the
device. HP Web Services includes HP ePrint and HP Print Apps. You can enable HP Web Services on all devices,
but the supported services vary depending on the device model.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. Review the Terms of Use provided at welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/termsofuse.html?
jumpid=in_R11549eprintercenter.
2. To accept the Terms of Use and enable HP Web Services, select the Enable HP Web Services check box.
3. To enable printing by sending an email with an attached document to the device, select the Enable
HP ePrint check box. HP ePrint supports the following email attachments:
●Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, Outlook, and Excel les
●Text les
●PDFs
●Image les (BMP, JPG, PNG, and TIFF)
4. To enable access to printable web content from the device control panel, select the Enable Print Apps check
box.
5. Click Apply.
ePrint Settings - More Settings
Use this option to specify whether or not the printer can be enrolled in the HP Instant Ink replacement service.
For more information about enrolling eligible printers in HP Instant Ink, visit hpinstantink.com.
Allow the printer to be enrolled in the HP Instant Ink service
1. Verify that the Allow device to connect to HP Web Services checkbox on the ePrint Settings conguration
option is selected.
2. Select the HP Instant Ink checkbox.
Prevent the printer from being enrolled in the HP Instant Ink service
▲Clear the HP Instant Ink checkbox.
HP JetAdvantage (More Apps)
HP JetAdvantage is a cloud-based service that provides access to applications that extend the capabilities of
devices. Use this option to enable or disable the HP JetAdvantage feature on the device and specify whether or
not users can create accounts for HP JetAdvantage from the device control panel.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Web Services 449
Congure the HP JetAdvantage feature
When the HP JetAdvantage feature is enabled, the More Apps button is available from the Home screen on the
device control panel. HP Web Jetadmin adds the *.hpbizapps.com URL to the HP-hosted Trusted Sites list on the
device and enables Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) for this website.
▲To enable the More Apps button on the device control panel, select the Enable HP JetAdvantage (More
Apps) checkbox.
-or-
To disable the More Apps button on the device control panel, clear the Enable HP JetAdvantage (More Apps)
checkbox.
Congure the ability to create HP JetAdvantage accounts
▲To allow users to create accounts from the device control panel, select the Allow users to create an account
checkbox.
CAUTION: There is no mechanism in HP Web Jetadmin to restrict the ability to create HP JetAdvantage
accounts to only specic users. If this checkbox is selected, any user can create an account from the device
control panel.
To prevent users from creating accounts from the device control panel, clear the Allow users to create an
account checkbox.
Proxy Server
Use this option to congure or view the web browser proxy settings on the device (for example, to enable OXPd
1.6 functionality that requires accessing web sites from a device). You can determine whether or not the web
proxy is enabled. If enabled, the proxy address and port must be set. Proxy credentials may be provided. A proxy
exception list is also supported. The device web browser does not use the proxy for addresses in the Proxy
server exception list.
Use the following steps to congure this option:
1. To enable this option, select Manual.
2. Type the URL for the proxy server in Proxy Server.
3. Type the port number for the proxy server in Proxy Port.
4. Type the user ID and password in User and Password.
5. Type all proxy server exceptions in Proxy server exception list. Use a semicolon to separate multiple
addresses.
Device Conguration Options for Wireless
Conguration options for Wireless dene wireless communication for the device including setup and encryption.
450 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Enable Wireless Direct
Use this option to enable or disable the HP wireless direct printing feature on the device. This feature provides
the ability to print from a wireless mobile device directly to an HP wireless direct-enabled printer without
requiring a connection to a network or the Internet.
To enable the HP wireless direct printing feature, select the Enable Wireless Direct checkbox.
To disable the HP wireless direct printing feature, clear the Enable Wireless Direct checkbox.
Enable Wireless Station (802.11)
Use this option to enable or disable the wireless station settings.
To enable the wireless station settings, select the Enable Wireless Station (802.11) check box.
-or-
To disable the wireless station settings, clear the Enable Wireless Station (802.11) check box.
Radio State
Use this option to enable or disable the Wireless Radio feature. If the device is in wired mode, you can congure
the Wireless Radio state. If the device is in wireless station mode or access point mode, you cannot congure the
Wireless Radio state.
To congure this option, select the Disable Radio or Enable Radio option from the list.
Wi-Fi Direct
HP Wi-Fi Direct printing provides the ability to print from a mobile device, such as a smartphone or notebook
computer, directly to a printer without connecting to a Wi-Fi network. The mobile device must be within range of
the printer.
Use this option to congure the settings that are used to connect the mobile device to the printer.
Enable HP Wi-Fi Direct printing
1. Select the Enable Wi-Fi Direct checkbox.
2. In the HP Wi-Fi Direct Name box, enter the printer model.
The HP Wi-Fi Direct printing name consists of a predened prex and a sux in the format of
printer_model.
3. To specify the security method that is used to establish the Wi-Fi connection between the printer and the
mobile device, select one of the following options from the Connection Method list:
●Auto—The printer accepts all Wi-Fi connections. The user is not required to enter a passphrase on the
printer control panel. However, if the mobile device requires a passphrase, the user must enter the
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Wireless 451
default passphrase on the mobile device before the Wi-Fi connection is established. The default
passphrase is 12345678.
●Manual—The user must enter a passphrase on the printer control panel before the Wi-Fi connection
is established.
●Advanced—The printer uses the specied advanced settings to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
4. To enable HP Wi-Fi Direct printing with security, enter the passphrase in the Passcode box. The passphrase
must be 8 to 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits. The mobile device encrypts the passphrase and sends
it to the printer.
If the Auto option is selected from the Connection Method list, the default passphrase is 12345678. This
default passphrase cannot be changed.
5. From the Channel list, select the channel that the printer uses to establish the Wi-Fi connection.
6. If the Advanced option is selected from the Connection Method list, use the following steps to congure the
advanced settings:
a. To prevent the printer from broadcasting the HP Wi-Fi Direct name on the Wi-Fi network, select the
Do not broadcast the Wi-Fi Direct name checkbox.
-or-
To allow the printer to broadcast the HP Wi-Fi Direct name on the Wi-Fi network, clear the Do not
broadcast the Wi-Fi Direct name checkbox.
b. To prevent the HP Wi-Fi Direct name from being displayed on the conguration reports, select the Do
not show the Wi-Fi Direct name on reports checkbox.
-or-
To display the HP Wi-Fi Direct name on the conguration reports, clear the Do not show the Wi-Fi
Direct name on reports checkbox.
c. To prevent the passphrase from being displayed on the conguration reports and printer control
panel, select the Do not show Wi-Fi Direct password on reports or printers control panel checkbox.
-or-
To display the passphrase on the conguration reports and printer control panel, clear the Do not
show Wi-Fi Direct password on reports or printers control panel checkbox.
Disable HP Wi-Fi Direct printing
▲Clear the Enable Wi-Fi Direct checkbox.
Wireless Direct
HP wireless direct printing provides the ability to print from a mobile device, such as a smartphone or notebook
computer, directly to a printer without connecting to a wireless network. The mobile device must be within range
of the printer.
Use this option to congure the settings that are used to connect the mobile device to the printer.
452 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
Congure the settings for HP Ocejet Pro devices
1. Select the Enable Security checkbox.
2. In the HP Wireless Direct Name box, enter the printer model.
The HP wireless direct printing name is the service set identier (SSID). The SSID consists of a prex in the
format of HP-Print-XY-, where XY is the last 2 characters of the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct
Accessory hardware or media access control (MAC) address, and a sux in the format of printer_model.
3. To enable HP wireless direct printing with security, enter the passphrase in the Passcode box. The
passphrase must be 8 to 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits. The mobile device encrypts the
passphrase and sends it to the printer.
4. To allow the printer to broadcast the SSID on the wireless network, select the Broadcast the SSID checkbox.
-or-
To prevent the printer from broadcasting the SSID on the wireless network, clear the Broadcast the SSID
checkbox.
Congure the settings for HP FutureSmart devices
1. In the HP Wireless Direct Name box, enter the printer model.
The HP wireless direct printing name is the service set identier (SSID). The SSID consists of a predened
prex and a sux in the format of printer_model.
If the Auto or Manual option is selected from the Connection Method list, the prex is DIRECT-XY-HP where
XY is the last two hexadecimal characters of the wireless MAC address.
If the Advanced option is selected from the Connection Method list, the prex is HP-Print-XY-, where XY is
the last 2 characters of the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory hardware or media access
control (MAC) address.
2. To specify the security method that is used to establish the wireless connection between the printer and
mobile device, select one of the following options from the Connection Method list:
●Auto—The printer accepts all wireless connections. The user is not required to enter a passphrase on
the printer control panel. However, if the mobile device requires a passphrase, the user must enter
the default passphrase on the mobile device before the wireless connection is established. The
default passphrase is 12345678.
●Manual—The user must enter a passphrase on the printer control panel before the wireless
connection is established.
●Advanced—The printer uses the specied advanced settings to establish a wireless connection.
3. To enable HP wireless direct printing with security, enter the passphrase in the Passcode box. The
passphrase must be 8 to 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits. The mobile device encrypts the
passphrase and sends it to the printer.
If the Auto option is selected from the Connection Method list, the default passphrase is 12345678. This
default passphrase cannot be changed.
4. From the Channel list, select the channel that the printer uses to establish the wireless connection. The
default channel is 6.
If the Enable Wireless Station conguration option is enabled, the printer ignores the Channel setting and
uses the wireless station settings that are congured by using the 802.11 b/g/n conguration option.
5. If the Advanced option is selected from the Connection Method list, use the following steps to congure the
advanced settings:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Wireless 453
a. To allow the printer to broadcast the SSID on the wireless network, select the Broadcast the SSID
checkbox.
-or-
To prevent the printer from broadcasting the SSID on the wireless network, clear the Broadcast the
SSID checkbox.
b. To display the SSID on the conguration reports and printer control panel, select the Show the
Wireless Direct name on reports and the printer’s control panel checkbox.
-or-
To prevent the SSID from being displayed on the conguration reports and printer control panel, clear
the Show the Wireless Direct name on reports and the printer’s control panel checkbox.
c. To display the passphrase on the conguration reports, printer control panel, and Near Field
Communication (NFC) record, select the Show the Wireless Direct password on reports and the
printer’s control panel checkbox.
-or-
To prevent the passphrase from being displayed on the conguration reports, printer control panel,
and NFC record, clear the Show the Wireless Direct password on reports and the printer’s control
panel checkbox.
Wireless Station (802.11)
Use this option to congure the wireless network conguration parameters for an IEEE 802.11 wireless Ethernet
connection.
In the Wireless Mode section, specify the following options:
1. Wireless Mode: Select the 802.11 wireless mode.
2. Guard Interval: Select the guard interval, which is the space between the symbols (or characters) that are
transmitted. This space eliminates the intersymbol interference (ISI) that occurs when echoes or reections
from one symbol interfere with another symbol. Adding time between symbol transmissions allows these
echoes and reections to dissipate before the next symbol is transmitted and prevents propagation delays.
Select one of the following options:
●Auto: Select this option to use the default guard interval.
●Short: Select this option to set the guard interval to 400 nsec.
●Long: Select this option to set the guard interval to 800 nsec. A longer guard interval reduces the
channel eciency.
3. Enable AMSDU Aggregation: Select this option to enable Aggregated Mac Service Data Unit (A-MSDU),
which increases the maximum size of the frame transmission from 2,304 bytes to 7,935 bytes. This option
applies only to the 802.11n wireless mode.
NOTE: You can use the Enable AMSDU Aggregation and Enable AMPDU Aggregation options separately or
together.
454 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
4. Enable AMPDU Aggregation: Select this option to enable Aggregated Mac Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU),
which allows a maximum size of the frame transmission of 64 KB. This option applies only to the 802.11n
wireless mode.
5. Enable Block ACKs: Select this option to enable block acknowledgements (ACKs), which allow each of the
aggregated data frames to be individually acknowledged or retransmitted if an error occurs. This option
applies only to the 802.11n wireless mode.
In the Communications section, specify the following options:
1. Network name (SSID): Enter the Service Set Identier (SSID) to which the HP Jetdirect print server connects.
The SSID identies the extended service set (ESS) that is normally associated with larger networks in
Infrastructure mode. The SSID is case sensitive.
The print server lists the detected SSIDs. An empty (or blank) Network name (SSID) eld is acceptable for
networks that rely on the signal strength, encryption, and authentication methods to control network
access.
The factory default SSID congured on the HP Jetdirect print server is hpsetup. To initially communicate
with the print server, the SSID for the wireless device must also be hpsetup.
2. Infrastructure (access point): Select this option to allow wireless devices on the network to communicate by
using an access point. To connect to the network, the settings on the wireless device must match the
wireless connection settings for the access point. Select this option if the wireless devices must be in
Infrastructure mode.
3. Ad-hoc (peer-to-peer): Select this option to allow wireless devices on the network to communicate directly
with each other. Other terms used for Ad hoc mode include Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS) and
Computer-to-Computer mode. Ad hoc mode is the factory default congured on the HP Jetdirect print
server.
Channel: Select the radio frequency the print server uses to broadcast its availability if it fails to associate
with the specied ad hoc network on any channel. The factory default is channel 11 (2462 MHz). Channel
10 (2457 MHz) is also available. To initially communicate with the print server, the wireless device must be
congured for Ad hoc mode.
In the Authentication and Encryption section, specify the following options:
1. No authentication or encryption: Select this option if device authentication or security is not required to
access the wireless network.
NOTE: The network might continue to use WEP encryption keys for data privacy.
2. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy):
●Authentication: Indicates the authentication mode for the specied WEP settings.
●WEP-Personal: Select this option if the devices on the wireless network use a shared encryption key
(or a shared password value) for network access and communication. Each device on the network
must use the same key. The HP Jetdirect print server supports IEEE 802.11 WEP keys for encrypted
network communications. If you select this option, specify the following settings to congure the WEP
key:
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Wireless 455
–Input key in: Select the format for the WEP key.
–WEP Key: The WEP key format is programmatically determined and validated by using either
alphanumeric ASCII (8-bit) characters or hexadecimal (4-bit) digits.
–Index: Select the WEP key index position (1, 2, 3, or 4) the print server uses for encrypted
communications from the list.
●WEP-Enterprise: Select this option if the network uses WEP with EAP/802.1x authentication. This type
of security uses a central authentication server, such as Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS), to authenticate users on the network. If you select this option, specify the following
settings to congure the authentication:
–Enabled protocols: Select one or more of the following server-based authentication protocols:
LEAP: Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol. A proprietary protocol from Cisco
Systems that uses passwords for mutual authentication. During mutual authentication, the
client and server authenticate each other.
PEAP (congure certicate using EWS rst): Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol. A
mutual authentication protocol that uses digital certicates for server authentication and uses
passwords for client authentication.
EAP-TLS (congure certicate using EWS rst): EAP using Transport Level Security. A mutual
authentication protocol that uses digital certicates for server authentication and uses
passwords for client authentication. For additional security, the authentication exchanges are
encapsulated in TLS.
–Encryption strength: Select the minimum encryption strength to use during communications
with the authentication server. For each encryption strength, ciphers are specied to identify the
weakest cipher allowed.
3. WiFi Protected Access (WPA):
●WPA Version: Select the WPA version.
●Encryption: Select the encryption method.
●WPA-Personal: Enter the security key that is used to generate the preshared key for authentication
on the network. The security key must be entered in one of the following formats:
–A passphrase that is 8 to 63 characters and consists of 0 through 9, a through z, A through Z,
and numerous special characters that include the following:
! @ # $ % ^ & () _ + = − { } [ ] \ / “ < > ? “ ‘ ˜
–A security key that is 64 hexadecimal characters (0 through 9, and A through F).
●WPA-Enterprise: Select this option if the network uses WPA with EAP/802.1x authentication. This type
of security uses a central authentication server, such as RADIUS, to authenticate users on the
network. Specify the following settings:
–Enabled protocols: Select one or more of the following server-based authentication protocols:
LEAP: Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol. A proprietary protocol from Cisco
Systems that uses passwords for mutual authentication. During mutual authentication, the
client and server authenticate each other.
PEAP (congure certicate using EWS rst): Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol. A
mutual authentication protocol that uses digital certicates for server authentication and uses
passwords for client authentication.
456 Chapter 6 Device Conguration Options ENWW
EAP-TLS (congure certicate using EWS rst): EAP using Transport Level Security. A mutual
authentication protocol that uses digital certicates for server authentication and uses
passwords for client authentication. For additional security, the authentication exchanges are
encapsulated in TLS.
–Encryption strength: Select the minimum encryption strength to use during communications
with the authentication server. For each encryption strength, ciphers are specied to identify the
weakest cipher allowed.
ENWW Device Conguration Options for Wireless 457
7 End-User License Agreement
When you download, register, and install HP Web Jetadmin, you must read the End-User License Agreement
(EULA) and acknowledge that you agree to the terms.
After HP Web Jetadmin is installed, the EULA is available from the online Help. To view the EULA, go to Help >
About, and then click the View the End-User License Agreement link.
458 Chapter 7 End-User License Agreement ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
.NET Framework
notication that installation is
required 45
A
Accessory Inventory report 221
Active Clients task module 278
Active Congurations task module
174
Active Directory device discovery
149
Active Discoveries task module 159
Active Tasks task module 44
Alerts 191
Application Management 277
Devices 84
Firmware 211
Print Management 271
Solutions 263
Storage 256
address for certicates 14
addresses management 48
administrator credentials 272
advanced searches for device lists
114
alert subscription templates 200
creating 201
editing 205
restoring defaults 79
alert subscriptions
attaching supplies report to email
notications 78
conguring format for SNMP
traps 80
creating 192
editing 196
viewing 209
Alert Subscriptions task module 190
alerts
conguring format for SNMP
traps 80
creating subscriptions 192
device polling options 62
editing subscriptions 196
history 200
overview 188
related application options 191
selecting correct IP address 19
subscription templates, applying
204
subscription templates, deleting
208
supplies 43
supplies polling options 62
types of 189
uses for 189
alerts log
clearing 79
editing template 79
le size 79
language 79
Alerts tab 88
Alerts task modules
Active Tasks 191
Alert Subscriptions 190
Common Tasks 190
Recent Alerts 190
Subscription Templates 191
All Active Tasks task module 278
All Scheduled Tasks task module
278
anonymized data collection 45
application log
conguring settings 59
displaying 33
Application Management
conguration options 59
options 277
Application Management task modules
Active Tasks 277
Common Tasks 277
Scheduled Tasks 278
Application Management view 32,
277
conguration options 59
HP Web Jetadmin Management
page 287
overview 277
application views 32
Application Management view 32
Device Management view 32
Print Management view 32
applications
server-based 38
Applying a data collection template in
Reports 229
archived reports
deleting 255
overview 255
viewing 255
Archived Reports task module 220
authentication agents, OXPd 70
authorization proxies, OXPd 72
authorizing certicate 14
automatically restarting 10
Available Drivers task module 271
B
background polling options 60
background tasks 44
backing up HP Web Jetadmin 22
binding to specic NIC 17
Blocked Devices list
managing 64
C
Capabilities tab 96
certicate repository 69
clearing
alerts log 79
ClickOnce Smart Client
installing and launching 44
notication that .NET Framework is
required 45
overview 15
client
sleep state 45
client application
event notications 43
notication that .NET Framework is
required 45
operating system requirements
2
ENWW Index 459
other requirements 5
performance 37
client connection
selecting correct IP address 18
client hardware requirements 4
Client Management - Active Clients
task module 278
client ports 11
client security requirements 6
client sessions, HP Web Jetadmin
starting 17
client sessions, multiple 37
client, HP Web Jetadmin
overview 44
collecting data for reports 215, 216
columns for device lists 106
command line
uninstall from 29
command-line, installing from
in blocking mode 9
syntax 6
Common Tasks task module
Alerts 190
Application Management 277
Conguration 174
Data Collection 218
Devices 84
Discovery 157
Firmware 211
Groups 125
HP Web Jetadmin 287
Print Management 270
Report Management 218
Reports 235
Solutions 262
Storage 256
User Security 279
complex data
device lists 106
comunication errors, resolving 120
Cong tab 87
conguration 171
Application Management 59
recommended initial steps 10
restricting by device group 54
shared 60
conguration le
correcting IP address 20
conguration les, importing 172
conguration options
Application Management view 59
Device Management view 60
shared 45
Conguration task modules
Active Congurations 174
Common Tasks 174
Recent Congurations 174
Scheduled Congurations 174
Templates 174
conguration templates
applying to devices 186
creating 182
deleting 186
editing 185
viewing 186
conguration templates, device
restoring 66
conguration, device
applying templates to devices
186
creating templates 182
deleting templates 186
editing templates 185
scheduling 178
steps for 175
viewing history 177
viewing templates 186
conguring
automatic service restart 10
context-sensitive help 31
control panel, device
accessing remotely 89
copy and paste 37, 115
Copying templates 99
Create Print Queue tool 269
Create Role wizard 281
creating device groups 126
creating print queues 272
credentials
conguration 53
delegation 53
global 55
list of 53
required 54
store 53
wizard 119
credentials, device
adding 119
required for conguration 171
credentials, global
SNMPv3 56
credentials, local administrator 272
CSV, exporting reports to 250
custom conguration settings 67
custom elds or settings 107
customizing layouts for device lists
109
D
Data Collection
activating 225
adding devices 227
anomalies 232
cycle 225
Device Utilization by User type
226
devices, removing 228
Groups Policy feature 227
overview 225
statuses 232
summary reports 231
templates, applying 229
templates, creating 228
templates, deleting 230
templates, editing 230
templates, viewing 228
data collection
default times 82
types available 216
Data Collection custom collection
time 226
Data Collection task modules
Common Tasks 218
Management 219
Templates 219
data collection templates
viewing 231
data collection, anonymized 45
data synchronization
between HP Web Jetadmin
servers 290
deleting schedules 291
deleting servers from list of
remote servers 291
database conguration option 45
database requirements 4
database, Microsoft SQL
data managed 40
instance 40
460 Index ENWW
defaults
Universal Print Driver Postscript
(UPD-PS) 270
defaults, factory
resetting devices 89
Delete Role wizard 282
deleting device groups 132
deleting devices 118
deleting drivers 275
deleting fonts and macros 257
deleting print queues 274
device alerts
creating subscriptions 192
editing subscriptions 196
polling options 62
device communication errors,
resolving 120
device conguration
applying templates to devices
186
certicates 69
creating templates 182
credentials required 171
deleting templates 186
editing templates 185
importing conguration les 172
overview 171
OXPd accessory records 70
OXPd device functions 70
PJL conguration options 69
retry settings for schedules 66
scheduling 178
steps for 175
templates, adding 180
user-dened settings 67
viewing history 177
viewing templates 186
Device Conguration options 292
device conguration schedules
retry settings 66
device conguration templates
exporting and importing 100
restoring 66
device control panel
accessing remotely 89
device credentials
adding 119
required for conguration 171
device discoveries
creating templates 166
history 165
launching 160
methods 136
network-connected 137
PC-connected 137
related network options 160
running by applying discovery
templates 168
scheduling 163
templates 166
types 136
device discoveries, network-connected
overview 137
device discoveries, PC-connected
overview 137
troubleshooting 138
device discovery
Active Directory 149
application options 159
domains, using 151
rewalls 136
IP broadcast 141
IP range discovery 142
multicast 141
overview 135
passive SLP 151
Quick Device Discovery 139
SLP Multicast 140
Web Services 152
WS-Discovery 152
Device Discovery wizard 160
device rmware
viewing version information 97
device groups
adding devices 129
automatic 123
creating 126
dening policies 123
deleting 132
editing 130
editing policies 132
manual 123
overview 121
removing devices 130
renaming 133
representation in device lists 122
security restriction settings 125
specifying order policies are
applied 124
viewing 134
Device Inventory report 221
device list lters
applying 113
creating 111
editing 112
Filter Editor 111
Filter Manager 111
Device Lists
Missing status 108
Unavailable status 108
Undened status 108
device lists
advanced searches 114
columns dependent on
HP Jetdirect data 107
columns for 106
creating lters 111
customizing layouts for 109
deleting devices 118
device tabs 85
displaying complex data 106
exporting data 115
lters 110
group representation 122
hidden devices 63
number of days considered new
65
overview 105
polling options 61
predened 105
printing 117
quick searches 114
related application options 117
searching 114
Device Management
options 84
showing and hiding device tabs
85
Device Management view 32, 84
conguration options 60
device tabs 85
device password, HP Jetdirect 54
device polling
background options 60
options for device lists 61
options for device tabs 62
supplies options 63
Device Reset Options wizard 89
Device Summary task module 211
ENWW Index 461
device tabs
Alerts 88
Capabilities tab 96
Cong 87
Firmware 97
Groups 91
maximum number of devices
displayed 65
polling options 62
Reports 91
showing and hiding 85
Solutions tab 95
Status 85
Storage 93
Supplies 92
Troubleshoot 89
Device Utilization by User report 222
Device Utilization report 221
devices
accessing control panel
remotely 89
accessing EWS 89
accessing product support
pages 89
blocking from discoveries 64
conguring 175
discovering 160
nding 119
global le system passwords 58
hiding after communication
error 63
maintaining accurate IP
addresses 137
number of days considered new
65
ordering supplies 92
power cycling 89
printing test pages or les 89
resetting to factory defaults 89
resolving communication errors
120
scheduling discoveries 163
setting status to online or oine
89
supported 5
user-dened conguration
settings 67
Devices task modules
Active Tasks 84
Common Tasks 84
Scheduled Tasks 84
Summary 84
directories and les, overview 39
discoveries
blocking devices 64
discoveries, device
creating templates 166
history 165
launching 160
methods 136
network-connected 137
PC-connected 137
related network options 160
running by applying discovery
templates 168
scheduling 163
templates 166
types 136
discoveries, PC-connected device
troubleshooting 138
discovering
remote installations of
HP Web Jetadmin 288
Discovery
specied address 50
third party printers 153
discovery 135
discovery history
archiving expired entries 51
clearing 51
clearing archive le 51
retention period 51
Discovery task modules
Active Discoveries 159
Common Tasks 157
Quick Monitor 157
Scheduled Discoveries 159
Summary 158
Templates 159
discovery templates
copying 170
creating 166
deleting 170
editing 168
running discoveries 168
viewing 171
discovery, device
Quick Device Discovery 139
distributed environments 38
DNS (domain name server)
conguration options 47
DNS conguration option 47
docking 35
documentation, printing 31
domain browsing 58
domain name server (DNS)
conguration options 47
domains and device discovery 151
downloading images 214
drag-and-drop 36
drivers
deleting 275
listing 273
management of 269
preconguring 274
retrieving 275
Universal Print Driver Postscript
(UPD-PS) 270
drivers, print
uploading 275
E
Edit Role wizard 282
Edit Schedule Wizard 100
editing device group policies 132
editing device groups 130
editing print queues 273
Editing Solutions 95
editing users 285
email
SMTP gateway settings 48
Email addresses management 48
email conguration options 47
email templates
creating 79
restoring defaults 79
emailing reports 250
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
accessing 89
End-User License Agreement (EULA)
458
environments, distributed 38
errors, explaining 36
Event Log History report 222
event notications
client application 43
conguring port 20
EWS (Embedded Web Server)
accessing 89
462 Index ENWW
EWS password 58
EWS password credential 53
exporting
device conguration templates
100
exporting device data 115
exporting device groups 133
F
factory defaults
resetting devices 89
Feature Packs
importing 23
Release Notes 23
File and printer sharing 272
le cache, Smart Client 37
File menu 32
le system password 172
le system password credential 53
le system passwords
global 58
les 39
Filter Editor 111
Filter Manager 111
lters
compound 111
device lists 110
lters, device list
applying 113
creating 111
editing 112
Filter Editor 111
Filter Manager 111
FIPS
enabling on HP Web Jetadmin
server 24
rewall software, conguring 21
rewalls, discovering devices
through 136
Firmware tab 97
Firmware task modules
Active Tasks 211
Common Tasks 211
Device Summary 211
Scheduled Tasks 211
rmware upgrades
conguring settings 81
downloading images 214
importing les 214
overview 209
related application options 80,
211
repository 213
steps for 211
rmware, device
viewing version information 97
rmware, HP Jetdirect
viewing version information 97
fonts
importing 256
G
gateway, SMTP
conguring settings 48
general conguration options 45
generating reports 215, 225
getting started 224
Get Community Name object 56
global credentials 55
SNMPv3 56
Groups
exporting 133
importing 133
groups 121
Groups Policy feature 227
Groups tab 91
Groups task modules
Common Tasks 125
Management 126
Summary 126
guides, printing 31
H
help icon 31
Help menu 32
Help, online 31
Hidden Devices list
managing 63
history
alerts 200
device conguration 177
device discoveries 165
history, discovery
archiving expired entries 51
clearing 51
clearing archive le 51
retention period 51
host access requirements 6
Hourly Peak Usage report 223
HP Jetdirect
device password 54
displaying IP hostname in device
lists 107
displaying model in device lists
107
displaying port in device lists 107
displaying revision in device lists
107
displaying system name in device
lists 107
HP Jetdirect rmware
viewing version information 97
HP Web Jetadmin client
overview 44
HP Web Jetadmin client sessions
starting 17
HP Web Jetadmin Management page
overview 287
HP Web Jetadmin server
enabling FIPS 24
overview 37
HP Web Jetadmin service (HPWJA
Service)
how the service works 38
HP Web Jetadmin task modules
All Active Tasks 278
All Scheduled Tasks 278
Common Tasks 287
Management 287
Summary 288
HP Web Jetadmin, remote installations
deleting from list of remote
servers 291
discovering 288
launching 289
overview 288
removing 289
HPWJA Service
how the service works 38
HPWJA service
selecting correct IP address 18
HTTP
changing port 42
changing the default port for the
Smart Client application 16
HTTP conguration option 47
HTTP conguration options 46
HTTP/HTTPS service 42
ENWW Index 463
HTTPS
changing port 42
changing the default port for the
Smart Client application 16
conguring 15
I
identifying the server 36
images, downloading 214
IMEs (Input Method Editors) 111
importing
device conguration templates
100
Feature Packs 23
fonts and macros 256
importing device groups 133
importing rmware les 214
INF les, uploading 275
Input Method Editors (IMEs) 111
Install Managers 96
Installation
one hardware platform 1
upgrading 1
installation
subsequent tasks 10
installation requirements 5
installing
Feature Packs 23
installing HP Web Jetadmin
from command line 6
from command line in blocking
mode 9
recommended initial steps 10
using installer 6
IP addresses
maintaining accuracy 137
selecting on multi-homed
servers 17
IP range conguration options 49
IP range discovery 142
IP Ranges 49
L
languages, available 43
launching
remote installations of
HP Web Jetadmin 289
layouts for device lists 109
left navigation pane 35
license agreement, software 458
License Manager 30
lists
device lists 105
local administrator credentials 272
localization 43
log, alerts
clearing 79
editing template 79
le size 79
language 79
log, application
conguring settings 59
displaying 33
low-privilege service account 41,
277
M
macros
importing 256
Management task module
Data Collection 219
Groups 126
HP Web Jetadmin 287
Managing Columns on Device Lists
47
manual groups, removing devices
from 130
manually restarting 21
Mapping 101
Maps
top menu bar 34
maps
docking 35
menu bar, top 32
Microsoft Global Input Method Editors
(IMEs) 111
Microsoft SQL database overview 40
Microsoft SQL Server
using separate instance 15
Microsoft SQL Server Express
Edition 40
database access and
authentication 277
Missing status 108
mode, traditional 270
multi-homed servers
selecting correct IP address 17
Multicast
passing requests 141
My Settings 87
N
navigating 32
navigation pane 35
Need Info wizard 36
network conguration options 46
network ports 277
network requirements 5
Network Service account 277
network trac and behavior 43
network-connected device discoveries
overview 137
NIC, binding to specic 17
NT AUTHORITY\Network Service
account 41
O
online Help 31
options
Application Management 277
device conguration 292
Device Management 84
OXPd accessory record repository 70
OXPd Authentication Agents
Repository 70
OXPd Authorization Proxy
Conguration Repository 72
OXPd device function repository 70
OXPd Quota Record Repository 76
OXPd Statistics Agents Repository
74
P
page layout 34
left navigation pane 35
task modules 35
work space 35
pane, navigation 35
passive SLP 151
password
le system 172
passwords
EWS 58
PC-connected device discoveries
overview 137
troubleshooting 138
peak usage report 223
permissions, analysis of 286
PJL repository 69
policies
device groups 132
464 Index ENWW
policies, device group
changing timeout setting 124
dening 123
specifying order applied 124
polling rates
static 62
polling, device
background options 60
options for device lists 61
options for device tabs 62
supplies options 63
port numbers 10
standard SSL port 14
table of 277
ports 11
changing HTTP 42
changing HTTPS 42
event notications 20
post-installation steps 10
power cycling devices 89
Preferences
Device Filters 32
Device Identication 33
print drivers
uploading 275
Print Management
conguration options 271
users, example of 269
view 269
Print Management task modules
Active Tasks 271
Available Drivers 271
Common Tasks 270
Print Queues 271
Print Management view 32, 269
Print Queues task module 271
printer sharing 272, 273
printing guides 31
product support pages
accessing 89
proxy user conguration options 47
Q
queue management
creating print queues 272
deleting print queues 274
editing print queues 273
Quick Device Discovery 139
Quick Device Find 47
Quick Monitor task module 157
quick searches for device lists 114
Quota Record Repository, OXPd 76
R
Recent Alerts task module 190
Recent Congurations task module
174
Related Application Settings for Device
Lists 47
Release Notes
Feature Packs 23
Remote Control-Panel page 89
remote installations of
HP Web Jetadmin
deleting from list of remote
servers 291
discovering 288
launching 289
overview 288
removing 289
remote ports 11
removing
remote installations of
HP Web Jetadmin 289
renaming device groups 133
report
Supplies Usage report 224
report data
deleting 52
retention period 52
Report Generation
overview 235
Report Generation task module 220
Report Management - Common Tasks
task module 218
report templates
dening calendar quarters 82
restoring defaults 82
viewing 251
Report Templates task module 219
Reports
Apply data collection templates
229
Data Collection custom collection
time 226
reports 228
Accessory Inventory report 221
adding and removing devices
227
archived reports overview 255
archived reports, deleting 255
archived reports, viewing 255
available reports 220
collecting data 215, 216
Data Collection 225
data collection times 82
Device Inventory report 221
Device Utilization 221
Device Utilization by User report
222
emailing 250
Event Log History report 222
examples 217
exporting to CSV 250
generating 215, 235
generating reports 225
getting started 224
Hourly Peak Usage report 223
overview 215
related application options 220
report templates 250
saving as HTML documents 250
scheduling 247
Supply Ordering report 223
Supply Replacement Forecast
report 224
templates, applying 253
templates, creating 251
templates, deleting 254
templates, editing 253
types available 216
viewing report templates 250
See also Data Collection
Reports tab 91
Reports task modules
Archived Reports 220
Common Tasks 235
Report Generation 220
Report Templates 219
Scheduled Reports 219
repositories
certicate 69
OXPd accessory records 70
OXPd Authentication Agents 70
OXPd Authorization Proxy
Conguration 72
OXPd device functions 70
OXPd Quota Record 76
OXPd Statistics Agents 74
PJL les 69
ENWW Index 465
Repository 263
repository, rmware 213
requirements, system 1
Resolve Device Communication
Failures feature 120
Resolve IP Addresses wizard 120
restart 10, 21
restoring defaults
alert subscription templates 79
device conguration templates
66
email templates 79
report templates 82
SNMP traps format 80
restoring HP Web Jetadmin 22
retention period
discovery history 51
retrieving drivers 275
retry values for SNMP 46
roles
assigning to users 284
creating 281
deleting 282
editing 282
overview 280
removing 286
restoring defaults 59
restrict to device groups 281
templates for 283
viewing 283
Roles task module 280
S
Scheduled Congurations task
module 174
scheduled device congurations
retry settings 66
Scheduled Discoveries task module
159
Scheduled Reports task module 219
Scheduled Tasks task module
Application Management 278
Devices 84
Firmware 211
Solutions 263
Storage 256
Schedules
Edit Schedule Wizard 100
schedules
deleting data synchronization
291
scheduling
device congurations 178
searching
device lists 114
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
implementing 13
secure sockets layer (SSL) 13
security restriction settings for device
groups 125
server application requirements 1
server hardware requirements 3
Server Maintenance 50
server maintenance conguration
option 51, 52
server security requirements 6
server, HP Web Jetadmin
enabling FIPS 24
overview 37
server, identifying 36
service
restarting automatically 10
restarting manually 21
service account, low-privilege 41
Service, HPWJA
how the service works 38
sessions, multiple 37
Set Community Name object 56
shared conguration options 45, 60
sharing printers 272, 273
sleep state 45
slow-polling mechanism 43
SLP Multicast 140
SLP, passive 151
Smart Client
deploying 15
le cache 37
installing and launching 44
Smart Client application
changing default HTTP and HTTPS
ports 16
running in workgroups 16
SMTP gateway
conguring settings 48
SNMP
conguration options 46
credentials 53
Get Community Name object 56
Set Community Name object 56
SNMP conguration option 46
SNMP Trap Generator
conguring format for SNMP
traps 80
SNMP traps
conguring format 80
restoring default format 80
SNMP traps registration
selecting correct IP address 19
SNMPv1/SNMPv2c
handling trap tables 188
SNMPv3
global credentials 56
handling trap tables 188
software license agreement 458
Solutions
editing 95
Install Managers 96
overview 262
Solutions tab 95
Solutions task modules
Active Tasks 263
Common Tasks 262
Scheduled Tasks 263
Solutions templates
templates, Solutions templates
266
specied address 50
Specied Device Address Discovery
47, 147
SQL Server
using separate instance 15
SQL Server 2005 Express edition
277
SQL Server Express Edition 40
database access and
authentication 277
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
implementing 13
SSL (secure sockets layer) 13
starting
remote installations of
HP Web Jetadmin 289
static polling rates 62
Statistics Agents Repository, OXPd
74
status bar 34
Status tab 85
466 Index ENWW
Storage
deleting fonts and macros 257
overview 256
repository 256
Storage Repository
importing fonts and macros 256
Storage repository 256
Storage tab 93
Storage task modules
Active Tasks 256
Common Tasks 256
Scheduled Tasks 256
Storage templates
templates, Storage templates
259
storage templates
creating 259
editing 260
viewing 262
subscription templates 200
applying 204
deleting 208
Subscription Templates task
module 191
subscription templates, alert
creating 201
editing 205
subscriptions, alert
creating 192
editing 196
viewing 209
Summary task module
Devices 84
Discovery 158
Groups 126
HP Web Jetadmin 288
supplies
alerts for 43
link for reordering 83
ordering 92
polling options 63
supply low threshold 83
supplies alerts
polling options 62
Supplies Ordering report
Shop for Supplies link 83
supplies report
attaching to email notications for
alerts 78
Supplies tab 92
Supplies Usage report 224
Supply Ordering report 223
Supply Replacement Forecast
report 224
support pages, product
accessing 89
support, technical 31
supported devices 5
synchronizing data between
HP Web Jetadmin servers 290
system requirements 1
T
tabs, device
Alerts 88
Capabilities 96
Cong 87
Firmware 97
Groups 91
Reports 91
showing and hiding 85
Solutions 95
Status 85
Storage 93
Supplies 92
Troubleshoot 89
task modules 35
docking 35
tasks, background 44
technical support 31
template, alerts log
editing 79
Templates
copying templates 99
templates
creating 228
reports 250
templates for roles 283
Templates task module
Conguration 174
Data Collection 219
Discovery 159
templates, alert subscription
creating 201
editing 205
restoring defaults 79
templates, conguration
applying to devices 186
creating 182
deleting 186
editing 185
viewing 186
templates, data collection
viewing 231
templates, device conguration
exporting and importing 100
restoring defaults 66
templates, discovery
copying 170
creating 166
deleting 170
editing 168
running discoveries 168
viewing 171
templates, email
creating 79
restoring defaults 79
templates, report
dening calendar quarters 82
restoring defaults 82
viewing 251
templates, storage
creating 259
editing 260
viewing 262
test pages or les
printing 89
third party printers 153
thresholds
supply low 83
time preference 51
timeout values for SNMP 46
tools
Create Print Queue 269
Tools menu 32
top menu bar 32
maps 34
traditional mode 270
trap tables
SNMPv1/SNMPv2c 188
SNMPv3 188
traps, SNMP
conguring format 80
restoring default format 80
Troubleshoot tab 89
U
Unavailable status 108
Undened status 108
ENWW Index 467
uninstalling HP Web Jetadmin
from command line 29
from Control Panel 29
Universal Print Driver Postscript (UPD-
PS) 270
UPD-PS (Universal Print Driver
Postscript) 270
upgrade rmware
overview 209
upgrade requirements 5
upgrades, rmware
conguring settings 81
upgrading 1
upgrading HP Web Jetadmin 22
uploading rmware les 214
URL for certicates 14
usage report 223
user roles
restoring defaults 59
user security
administrator role 279
initial steps 279
overview 278
User Security task modules
Common Tasks 279
Roles 280
Users 280
user-dened conguration settings
67
users
analysis of permissions 286
assigning roles 284
diagnostics 286
editing 285
managing within user groups
283
Users task module 280
V
version, nding 36
View menu 32
viewing
report templates 250
viewing device groups 134
views
Application Management 277
Device Management 84
Print Management 269
views, application 32
virtual machine requirements 3
W
Web Services
passing requests 152
Wizards
Need Info wizard 36
wizards 36
Credentials 119
work space 35
WS-Discovery 152
468 Index ENWW

Navigation menu